Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2017
Belt Filter Press Replacement Project 2017 05 -Sept -2017 Plans, Specs, proposal and contract 05 -Sept -2017 Res 17-290, setting a public hearing 11 -Sept -2017 Notice of Public Hearing 19 -Sep -2017 Res 17-307, approving plans, specs, form of agreement and estimate of cost. 20 -Sept -2017 Notice to Bidders 17 -Oct -2017 Res 17-330, awarding contract (Woodruff Construction Inc.) 25 -Oct -2017 Performance and Payment Bond 28 -May -2021 Engineer's report 01 -Jun -2021 Res 21-148, accepting the work lvswami _ CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE CITY OF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA AUGUST 301h, 2017 N O J :=tom m SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE SHEET TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE TO BIDDERS ........................................... NOTE TO BIDDERS .............................................. FORM OF PROPOSAL .......................................... BIDBOND.............................................................. FORM OF AGREEMENT ....................................... PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ............ CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) . WAGE THEFT POLICY ......................................... BIDDER STATUS FORM ....................................... GENERAL CONDITIONS ...................................... SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ........................ ATTACHMENT: OWNERS SAFETY PROGRAM ATTACHMENT: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHMENT: DRAWINGS Page Number ro o_ r r =gym= ni 0 NOTICE TO BIDDERS CITYOF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 2:30 P.M. on the 10th day of October, 2017. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 17th day of October, 2017, or at special meeting called for that purpose. A prebid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m. on September 28, 2017 at the Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, Iowa. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders' tour of the treatment plant facilities being modified will immediately follow conclusion of pre-bid meeting (approximately 11:00 a.m). The Project will involve the following: General construction at the City of Iowa Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, IA. Work will include demolition of three existing belt filter presses, procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated piping, replacement of four polymer pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; and control system modifications and integration. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc, of Muscatine, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be submitted in a sealed envelope. In addition, a separate sealed envelope shall be submitted containing a completed Bidder Status Form and a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 5% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. The City shall retain the bid security furnished by the successful bidder until the approved contract form has been executed, a bond has been filed by the bidder guaranteeing the performance of the contract, and the contract and bond have been approved by the City. The City shall promptly return the checks or bidder's bonds of unsuccessful bidders to the bidders as soon as the successful bidder is determined or within thirty days, whichever is sooner. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to on"un- dred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible smety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materiatswd *or, y and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages-orany*ind .-- caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also gUante&he maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from aCipafter its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: IF_1951 Milestone 1 Date: January 12'h, 2018 Substantial Completion Date: May V', 2018 Specified Completion Date: May 31, 2018 Specified Start Date: November 2, 2017 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Printed copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the City Engineer, City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $65 fee is required for each set of printed half-size set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the Treasurer of City of Iowa City, Iowa. The fee is refundable if returned within 14 days of award of the project by City Council in re-usable condition. Electronic Bidding Documents consisting of portable document format (PDF) files of Project Manual and Drawings on compact disc may be obtained from Ms. Mae* Hoag, Stanley Consultants, Inc. Muscatine, Iowa, telephone 563-264-6657 viaEngineer's file, transfer service and includes entry on planholders list. c-=, l Bidding Documents also may be examined at regional plan rooms and their Internet-ba construction information subscription services. ._11 Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minorip contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors -can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 2&1-'5796 'Ad the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Posted upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa KELLIE FRIJEHLING, CITY CLERK AF -2 2. NOTE TO BIDDERS The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond and Bidder Status Form Envelope 2: Form of Proposal e N O 3 L9 —+ r -�� C r o� = M ko FORM OF PROPOSAL CITY OF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS FORM ARE CON- TAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder Address of Bidder TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 E. Washington St. Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the a4ftnt $ in accordance with the terms set forth in the "ProjectSpecifiilions,:L The undersigned bidder, having examined and determined the scope :e &ntr Documents, hereby proposes to provide the required labor, services, materials and��nr� iprt a 5n to perform the Project as described in the Contract Documents, including AddenkL _0 and , and to do all work at the prices set forth herein. We further propose to do all "Extra Work" which may be required to complete the work contemplated, at unit prices or lump sums to be agreed upon in writing prior to starting such work. Lump Sum Bid Price: (words) (figures) Cash ato contingency allowances specified in Section 01 20 00 are included in the price(s) set ,f ,Ih above and have been computed in accordance with the General Conditions. 3vtrnate No. 1 - Driveway Paving (Add): M •F. vn_ Q ; (words) i - (figures) FP -1 Alternate No. 2 — Window Storefront (Add): (words) Alternate No. 3 — Stainless Steel Coil Doors (Add): (words) (figures) (figures) The basis of contract award, if awarded, will be the lowest responsive, responsible bidder of the base bid plus any or all add alternates that are determined to be in the best interest of the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids. The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: Name: Type of Work: Aoox $ Amnt: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the "Contract Documents" and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the "Contract Documents' prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: FP -2 , as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated for Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, o c =� then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in !u MrcAnd 4W, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall„inV egnt, exeeed the amount of the obligation stated herein. 1 C-) cn By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forted $a t]ie Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide t bo as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. w The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this A.D., 20_ 0 Witness f:]�MIi Principal By — Surety By — Attach Power-of-Attomey day of (Seal) (Title) (Seal) (Attorney-in-fact) FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). WHEREAS the City has prepared certain Plans, Specifications, Proposal and Contract dated the 30th day of August, 2017, for the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project ('Project'), and WHEREAS, Contractor submitted a bid on the Project described in said Plans, Specifications, Proposal and Contract; and WHEREAS, the parties hereto now wish to enter into this agreement for the construction of said Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: The Contractor hereby agrees to perform the Project for the sums listed in its Form of Proposal including the total extended amount of which sums are incorporated herein by this reference. 2. Contract Times: a. The Work will be substantially completed on or before May 1, 2018, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before May 31, 2018. b. Milestones. Parts of the Work shall be substantially completed on or before the following Milestone(s): Milestone 1: Installation and start-up of 1' belt filter press completed on or before January 12, 2018. c. Liquidated Damages. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the times specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. Theal3rties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved p3 proviin a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Ownere rk is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring a ch roofl� -, � Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages ford u&t al— a penalty): zCm a M Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for -4@M dap that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contfwct) specified above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially completW AG -1 Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. Milestones: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the duration (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for achievement of each Milestones, until each Milestone is achieved. 3. This Agreement consists of the following additional component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: ' 1 �y }_, a. Addenda Numbers � M�� r b. Plans; m M d. Technical Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; m --;;o (� e. Performance and Payment Bond; A ca _ f. Contractor's Completed Bidder Status Form; attached hereto; g. Contractor's Completed Assurance of Contract Compliance Program (Anti - Discrimination Requirements), attached hereto, h. Completed Form of Proposal; and i. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. t— }_, m R �~ m�= M�� RJ rte AG -2 3. The names of subcontractors acknowledged by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): Name: Quantity: Unit Price: $ Amnt: DATED this Cit ATTEST: day of Mayor Contractor ATTEST: 20_ City Clerk (Company Official) AG -3 Approved By: City Attorney's Office CDP *42 —'� � •n C.)� �, r rn as 0 m CA ,D PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND r*i (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. N d WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of entered iF_I!P a -' (date) J written Agreement with Owner for Wastewater Belt Filter Press Replacement Prg*t; aW WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance andF?aymeaBon03 be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared" Stanley Consultants, Inc., which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and thmagreed- upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or e� �+ IT Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in 1� N ►Tt accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- `"� N Sion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract m ' between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even Q c q :c though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or ti subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractors Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of Two (2) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF , IN THE PRESENCE OF: Witness (Principal) (Title) (Surety) Witness (Title) ON (Street) C3 N rn y►.� -v A (City, State, Mt-) � m M, �W s 1171 (Phone cn 'D Contract Compliance Program 0 �rn � r ~`r CITY 4F IOWA CITY � C n, SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2 All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. CC -1 N O 'h � r rn o:!K s Q o .n CC -1 SECTION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES 2 THROUGH 3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) 1. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. o 2. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or* beh'aof the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. 9 cn Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246,*amende"d the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et seg.) and relevant orders of the U.�Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orde= .•..JJ - _a 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement.— Where tatement Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CC -2 j >-r ru nh m r� s CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Print Name Phone Number Title Date CC -3 N t� 1 O ..;� -' m :�tTti X nc �� o cn .p SECTION 111 - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Oppgrtunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees -or arOnvolved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the cutrept @pNal ewcloyment opportunity laws. {mv 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer.'.his-can babne by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportuni�empl er". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pool Word-of-mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only 'use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor -interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only ri job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in ^- personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. �(h) Improvehiring and selection procedures and use non -biased promotion, transfer and training r) , policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all . companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -4 Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC -5 N 0 �n rn �-� L r �rn �. � O CA �0 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, promote or refer for employment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 03-4105, 12-16- 2003) B. It shall be unlawful for any labor organization to refuse to admit to membership, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprenticeship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or training because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such applicant or member. C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organization or the employees or members thereof to directly or indirectly advertise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwelcome, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identithgmantal status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-95) rn v D. Employment policies relating to pregnancy and childbirth shall be governed by the fellowirW:. --ico —1 1 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes fro pI(Wnenfn applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima faciewlati rr�r of this title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscarriage,— childbirth and recovery therefrom are, for all job related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwritten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other temporary disabilities. E. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or prospective employee a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus. An agreement between an employer, employment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective employee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or prospective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the state epidemiologist determines and the director of public health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the center for disease control of the United States department of health and human services, that a person with a condition related to acquired immune deficiency.syndrome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunodeficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this section: CC -6 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifications are related to a bona fide religious purpose. A religious qualification for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or religious institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualification. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employment or offer of employment shall not discriminate among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) 3. The employment of individuals for work within the home of the employer if the employer or members of the family reside therein during such employment. 4. The employment of individuals to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) 5. The employment on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 03-4105,12-16-2003) 6. A state or federal program designed to benefit a specific age classification which serves a bona fide public purpose. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) 7. The employment on the basis of disability in those certain instances where presence of disability is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 03-4105, 12-16-2003) 8. Any employer who regularly employs less than four (4) individuals. For purposes of this section, individuals who are members of the employer's family shall not be counted as employees. (Ord. 08-4312, 8-11-2008) CC -7 w 0 Cn T ' f C-)-� C r o .n CC -7 SAMPLE: EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY To all employees of This Company and its employees shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment based on his or her age, color, creed, disability, national origin, gender identity, marital status, race, religion, sex, or sexual orientation. The anti -discrimination policy extends to decisions involving hiring, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. Further, this Company and its employees will provide a working environment free from such discrimination. All employees are encouraged to refer minority and women applicants and applicants with disabilities for employment. The Equal Employment Opportunity Officer for the is: Name: o C~ Address:: fu r �cj 7<rn� Telephone Number: ' � jp NOTE: This is a SAMPLE ONLY. You may wish to confer with your EEO officer or legal counsel to formulate a policy which specifically meets the needs of your company. CC -8 r fu CC -8 CITY OF IOWA CITY WAGE THEFT POLICY It is the policy of the City of Iowa City, as expressed by City Council Resolution No. 15-364 adopted on November 10, 2015, not to enter into certain contracts with, or provide discretionary economic development assistance to, any person or entity (including an owner of more than 25% of the entity) who has admitted guilt or liability or been adjudicated guilty or liable in any judicial or administrative proceeding of committing a repeated or willful violation of the Iowa Wage Payment Collection law, the Iowa Minimum Wage Act, the Federal Fair Labor Standards Act or any comparable state statute or local ordinance, which governs the payment of wages, for a period of five (5) years from the date of the last conviction, entry of plea, administrative finding or admission of guilt. (hereinafter "Wage Theft Policy") I. Application. The Wage Theft Policy applies to the following: ` a. Contracts in excess of $25,000 for goods, services or public improvements. b. Contracts for discretionary economic development assistance. "Discretionary" economic development assistance shall mean any economic development assistance provided by the City of Iowa City that is not required by law. II. Exceptions. The Wage Theft Policy does not apply to emergency purchases of goods and services, emergency construction or public improvement work, sole source contracts excepted by the City's purchasing manual, cooperative/piggyback purchasing or contracts with other governmental entities. 111. Affidavit. The contracting entity must complete the attached affidavit showing compliance with the Wage Theft Policy and provide it to the Contracting Department prior to the execution of the contract. Contract provision: Any contract to which this policy is applicable will include the following contract provision: If the City becomes aware that a person or entity (including an owner of more than 25% of the entity) has admitted guilt or liability or been adjudicated guilty or liable in any judicial or administrative proceeding of committing a repeated or willful violation of the Iowa Wage Payment Collection law, the Iowa Minimum Wage Act, the Federal Fair Labor Standards Act or any comparable state statute or local ordinance, which governs the payment of wages, within the five (5) year period prior to the award or at any time after the award, such violation shall constitute a default under the contract. IV. Waivers. If a person or entity is ineligible to contract with the City as a result of the Wage Theft Policy it may submit a request in writing indicating that one or more of the following actions have been taken: a. There has been a bona fide change in ownership or control of the ineligible person or entity; b. Disciplinary action has been taken against the individual(s) responsible for the acts givNg rise to the violation(s); _ o CD .J c. Remedial action has been taken to prevent a recurrence of the acts giving rise di�alifica4 or default; n-< r r or R1 rn � d. Other factors that the person or entity believes are relevant. The City Manager or Designee shall review the documentation submitted, make any inquiries deRed necessary, request additional documentation if warranted and determine whether a reduction in the ineligibility period or waiver is warranted. Should the City Manager or Designee determine that a reduction or waiver of the ineligibility period is warranted the City Manager or Designee shall make such recommendation to the City Council. The City Council will make a final decision as to whether to grant a reduction orwaiver. WT -1 STATE OF COUNTY ) SS: WAGE THEFT AFFIDAVIT fs I, upon being duly sworn, state as follows:Ln r 1. 1 am the [position] of 2� ["contracting entity'] and have the authority to execute this affidavit on behalf of said contrasting entity and any person or entity with an ownership interest in said contracting entity of more'Jan 25%. 2. Neither [contracting entity] nor any person or entity with an ownership interest of more than 25% of said contracting entity has been adjudicated guilty or liable in any judicial or administrative proceeding of committing a repeated or willful violation of the Iowa Wage Payment Collection law, the Iowa Minimum Wage Act, the Federal Fair Labor Standards Act or any comparable state statute or local ordinance, which governs the payment of wages in the last 5 years. This instrument was acknowledged before me by E�E Signature on ,20 Notary Public in and for the State of Cr I Rl }(7 �� o Signature on ,20 Notary Public in and for the State of Bidder Status Form To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer "Yes" or "No" for each of the following: ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: L -4 --to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to bidders who are residents? ❑ Yes ❑ No 3. If you answered "Yes" to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. 0 You may attacdnadditi '-' I sit if needed. To be completed by all bidders t rPart D -4 u1 I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowlsrn ani knomi t my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. �p = O o .. Firm Name ?a o Sionature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner BF -1 Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet maybe used to help complete PartA of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No O My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in.a statdoiher th?.luowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa s664ary tate, hBfiled o its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neittx ikeceiVM a cerate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ; �-< 1�{ ❑ Yes ❑ No - `•• My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statementof �alif�ttion in�Fis V state and the statement has not been canceled. � 1c ❑ Yes ❑ No v w My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. e.. ❑ Yes ❑ No , My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other Phan Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate v- j.L: hos not been revoked or canceled. >- C-, n �. - o o �t BF -2 ARC 1271C LABOR SERVICES DIVISION[875] Adopted and Filed Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 73A.21, the Labor Commissioner hereby adopts anew Chapter 156, "Bidder Preferences in Government Contracting," Iowa Administrative Code. This amendment adopts new rules concerning preferences for resident bidders on government construction projects. The new chapter sets forth requirements for a public body involved in a public improvement and sets forth enforcement procedures. Notice of Intended Action was published in the October 30, 2013, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC 1160C. Public comments regarding the proposed rules were received. Commenters stated that some of the rules could be misinterpreted and that some of the rules were beyond the statutory authority of Iowa Code section 73A.21. Commenters expressed ideas on how to make the bidding process more efficient. Commenters also questioned the constitutionality of Iowa Code section 73A.21. One commenter suggested adding compliance with Iowa Code chapter 91C as a basis to find that a company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. These rules are not identical to those published under Notice of Intended Action. Some changes are technical; other more substantive changes are described below. References to "domicile" were removed from several rules. Subrule 156.2(1) was changed to clarify that the requirements apply only to a project to be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder; to clarify that only office addresses, not construction worksites, must be ftorted; to remove a reference to perjury; and to change the deadline for submitting a statement to the Public body. Paragraph 156.2(2)"b" was changed by deleting the phrase "under this Act." Subrule 156.2(3) was changed by adding new paragraph "k" concerning construction contractor registration, and by clarifying that compliance with only one of the lettered paragraphs in the subrule is necessary. Paragraph 156.2(4)"b" was changed by adding the phrase "if applicable." In rule 875-156.3(73A), the tern "public body" replaced the term "nonresident bidder." A new rule 875-156.9(73A) containing a severability clause was added. The principal reason for adoption of this amendment is to implement legislative intent. No variance procedures are included in these rules because variance provisions are set forth in 875—Chapter 1. After analysis and review of this rule making, no impact on jobs has been found. These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 73A.21. These rules shall become effective on February 12, 2014. O rn The following amendment is adopted. y2d rl, rno Adopt the following new 875 --Chapter 156: CHAPTER 156 BIDDER PREFERENCES IN GOVERNMENT CONTRACTING O� 875-156.1(73A) Purpose, scope and definitions. These rules institute administrative anc�pperati0al procedures for enforcement of the Act. The definitions and interpretations contained in Iowa C"e section 73A.21 shall be applicable to such terms when used in this chapter. "Act" means Iowa Code section 73A.21. Affiliate, " when used with respect to any specified person or entity, means another person or entity that, either directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under common control or ownership with, such specified person or entity. "Commissioner" means the labor commissioner appointed pursuant to Iowa Code section 91.2, or the labor commissioner's designee. "Division" means the division of labor of the department of workforce development. BF -3 "Nonresident bidder" means a person or entity that does not meet the definition of a resident bidder, including any affiliate of any person or entity that is a nonresident bidder. "Parent, " when used with respect to any specified person or entity, means an affiliate controlling such specified person or entity directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries. "Public body" means the state and any of its political subdivisions, including a school district, public utility, or the state board of regents. "Public improvement" means a building or other construction work to be paid for in whole or in part by the use of funds of the state, its agencies, and any of its political subdivisions and includes road construction, reconstruction, and maintenance projects. "Public utility" includes municipally owned utilities and municipally owned waterworks. "Resident bidder" means a person or entity authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business for transacting business within the state at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country. "Resident labor force preference" means a requirement in which all or a portion of a labor force working on a public improvement is a resident of a particular state or country. "Subsidiary, " when used with respect to any specified person or entity, is an affiliate controlled by such specified person or entity directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries. 875-156.2(73A) Reporting of resident status of bidders. 156.2(1) Reporting to public body. When a contract for a public improvement is to be awaled to the lowest responsible bidder, the public body shall request a statement from each molder r ding the bidder's resident status. The statement shall be on the form designated by the coior The statement shall require the bidder to certify whether the bidder is a resident bidder ?rr Ttonr ident bidder. In the case of a resident bidder, the statement shall require the resident bidder' ' ent* each) office at which the resident bidder has conducted business in the state during the pre .1 and the dates on which the resident bidder conducted business at each office. In the case of- bidder, the statement shall require the nonresident bidder to identify the nonresident bidtler horngstate or foreign country as reported to the Iowa secretary of state, to identify each preference offereUy the nonresident bidder's home state or foreign country, and to certify that, except as set forth on the form, there are no other preferences offered by the nonresident bidder's home state or foreign country. The statement shall include such additional information as requested by the commissioner. The statement muatbe signed by an authorized representative of the bidder. A fully completed statement shall be deg -6d to be incorporated by reference into all project bid specifications and contract documents with an bidd 6n a public improvement. Failure to provide the statement with the bid may result in the bid being deeted nonresponsive. This may result in the bid being rejected by the public body. ti156:2(2) Determining residency status. a. J& purposes of the Act, a person or entity is a resident bidder if the person or entity: f.. (1) ,-As authorized to transact business in Iowa; and (2k Has had one or more places of business in Iowa at which it is conducting or has conducted mess in this state for at least three years immediately prior to the date of the first advertisement for public improvement. b. If the person or entity is a resident of a state or foreign country that has a more stringent definition than is set forth in paragraph 156.2(2) "a" for determining whether a person or entity in that state or country is a resident bidder, then the more stringent definition applies. 156.2(3) Determining authorization to transact business. A person or entity is authorized to transact business in the state if one or more of the following accurately describes the person or entity: a. In the case of a sole proprietorship, the sole proprietor is an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes; b. In the case of a general partnership or joint venture, more than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes; BF -4 C. In the case of a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state, the statement has not been canceled; d In the case of a limited liability partnership whose statement of qualification is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited liability partnership has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed pursuant to Iowa Code section 486A.105(4); e. In the case of a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in this state, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has not filed a statement of termination; f. In the case of a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership; g. In the case of a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in this state, the limited liability company has not filed a statement of termination; h. In the case of a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited liability company has received a certificate of authority to transact business in this state and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled; L In the case of a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in this state, the corporation (1) )ras paid all fees required by Iowa Code chapter 490, (2) has filed its most recent biennial report, and (3) has not filed articles of dissolution; j. In the case of a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation (1) has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, (2) has filed itg most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and (3) has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked; or k The person or entity is registered with the Iowa division of labor as a construction contractor pursuant to Iowa Code chapter 91C. 156.2(4) Determining if bidder has conducted business in state. In order to determine if a bidder has a place of business for transacting business within Iowa at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement of the public improvement, the bidder shall meet the following criteria for the three-year period prior to the first advertiseWt for the public improvement: �= a. Continuously maintained a place of business for transacting business in lowtiha is gy"able� for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mails; and M .... b. Conducted business in the state for each of those three years and filed an Iowa 14aax return, if applicable, made payments to the Iowa unemployment insurance fund, if applicable, gy$tmaire ned an Iowa workers' compensation policy, if applicable, in effect for each of those three yearq; 875-156.3(73A) Application of preference. When awarding a contract for a public im'iiat to the lowest responsible bidder, the public body shall allow a preference to a resident biddWas agaot a nonresident bidder that is equal to any preference given or required by the home state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident without regard to whether such preferences are actually enforced by the applicable regulatory body in each state. If the bidder is a subsidiary of a parent that would be a nonresident bidder if such parent were to bid on the public improvement in its own name, then the public body shall allow a preference as against such bidder that is equal to the preference given or required by the home state or foreign country of the bidder's parent. In the instance of a labor force preference, a public body shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the home state or foreign country of the nonresident bidder, or the parent of a resident bidder if the parent would qualify as a nonresident bidder if such parent were to bid on the public improvement in its own name. A preference shall not be applied to a subcontractor unless the home state or foreign country of the nonresident bidder to whom the contract was awarded would apply a preference to the subcontractor. BF -5 Specific methods of calculating and applying a preference shall mirror those that apply in the home state or foreign country of the nonresident bidder to whom the contract was awarded. In the event that the specific method used by the nonresident bidder's home state or foreign country cannot be determined, the calculation for a labor force preference shall include only the labor force working on the public improvement in Iowa on a regular basis calculated by pay period. 875-156.4(73A) Complaints regarding alleged violations of the Act. 156.4(1) Complaints. Any person with information regarding a violation of the Act may submit a written complaint to the commissioner. Any complaint must provide the information required pursuant to subrule 156.4(2) or as much of such information as is reasonably practicable under the circumstances. The completed written complaint form shall be submitted to the commissioner at Labor Services Division, 1000 East Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319. 156.4(2) Written complaint form. The commissioner shall prepare a written complaint form that a person with information regarding a potential violation of the Act may submit pursuant to subrule 156.4(1). The written complaint form shall request the following information: the name, address, telephone number, and e-mail address of the complainant; the name of the bidder that is believed to have violated the Act; a description of any relationships between the complainant and the bier; an n antry identification of the public body to which the bidder submitted a bid; the home state or foreigEo of the bidder; a description of the goods and services provided under the bid; and 7ad*nal information as requested by the commissioner. .-t -0 156.4(3) Availability ofwritten complaint form. The written complaint form shall be39a&blq�l all division offices and on the department of workforce development's Internet Web site. rn p 3 875-156.5(73A) Nonresident bidder record-keeping requirements. While participatiiigi3�a poIlic improvement, a nonresident bidder from a home state or foreign country with a residei-labor fy'tce preference shall make and keep, for a period of not less than three years, accurate records of all wo employed by the contractor or subcontractor on the public improvement. The records shall include each worker's name, address, telephone number if available, social security number, trade classification, and starting and ending date of employment. 875-156.6(73A) Investigations; determination of civil penalty. The commissioner or an authorized deskiee shall cause an investigation to be made into charges of violations of the Act, including Y . allegations set forth in a written complaint. 156.6(1) Investigative powers. The commissioner or the authorized designee shall have the folfowing powers: 1 ; o. Heotings. The commissioner may hold hearings and investigate charges of violations of the A&t. b. Entry into place of employment. The commissioner may, consistent with due process of law, eater any place of employment to inspect records concerning labor force residency, to question an employer er employee, and to investigate those facts, conditions, or matters as are deemed appropriate ikdetermining whether any person has violated the provisions of the Act. The commissioner shall only make an entry into a place of employment in response to a written complaint. C. Residency of workers. The commissioner may investigate and ascertain the residency of a worker engaged in any public improvement in this state. d Oaths; depositions; subpoenas. The commissioner may administer oaths, take or cause to be taken deposition of witnesses, and require by subpoena the attendance and testimony of witnesses and the production of all books, registers, payrolls, and other evidence relevant to a matter under investigation or hearing. e. Employment ofpersonnel. The commissioner may employ qualified personnel as are necessary for the enforcement of Iowa Code section 73A.21. The personnel shall be employed pursuant to the merit system provisions of Iowa Code chapter 8A, subchapter IV. f Request for records. The commissioner shall require a contractor or subcontractor to file, within 10 days of receipt of a request, any records enumerated in rule 875-156.5(73A). If the contractor or subcontractor fails to provide the requested records within 10 days, the commissioner may direct, within 15 days after the end of the 10 -day period, that the fiscal or financial office charged with the custody and disbursement of funds of the public body that contracted for construction of the public improvement or undertook the public improvement, to withhold immediately from payment to the contractor or subcontractor up to 25 percent of the amount to be paid to the contractor or subcontractor under the terms of the contract or written instrument under which the public improvement is being performed. The amount withheld shall be immediately released upon receipt by the public body of a notice from the commissioner indicating that the request for records as required by this paragraph has been satisfied. 156.6(2) Division determination. Upon conclusion of an investigation, the commissioner or an authorized designee shall issue a written determination to the party that was the subject of the investigation. The determination shall indicate whether or not the division finds a violation of the Act by the party. If the determination indicates that the party engaged in a violation of the Act, the determination shall also indicate the remedies the division intends to pursue as a result of the violation. 156.6(3) Informal conference. A party seeking review of the division's determination pursuant to this rule may file a written request for an informal conference. The request must be received by the division within 15 days after the date of issuance of the division's determination. During the conference, the party seeking review may present written or oral information and arguments as to why the division's determination should be amended or vacated. The division shall consider the information and arguments presented and issue a written decision advising all parties of the outcome of the informal conference. E 875-156.7(73A) Remedies. Following the conclusion of the informal conference, or following the expiration of the time in which a party may file a written request for an informal conference, the division may s- pursue the following remedies. 156.7(1) Injunctive relief. If the division determines that a violation of the Act has occurred, the division may sue for injunctive relief against the awarding of a contract, the undertaking of a public improYcment, or the continuation of a public improvement. 156.7(2) Civil penalty. Any person or entity that violates the provisions of this chapter is subject to a civil penalty in an amount not to exceed $1,000 for each violation found in a first investigation by the division, not to exceed $5,000 for each violation found in a second investigation by the division, and not to exceed $15,000 for a third or subsequent violation found in any subsequent investigation by the division. Each violation of this chapter for each worker and for each day the violation continues constitutes a separate and distinct violation. In determining the amount of the penalty, the division shall consider the appropriateness of the penalty to the person or entity charged, upon determination of the gravity of the violation(s). The collection of these penalties shall be enforced in a civil action brought by the attorney general on behalf of the division. 875-156.8(73A) Compliance with federal law. If it is determined that application of this chplM and the Act may cause denial of federal funds which would otherwise be available for a public imli&emenMr would otherwise be inconsistent with requirements of any federal law or regulation, the applic2likaf A chaptM shall be suspended to the extent necessary to prevent denial of the funds or to elimina!t inc?sister with federal requirements. — N �t- 875-156.9(73A) Severability. If any rule under this chapter, any portion of a rule underWihaper, or applicability of any rule under this chapter to any person or circumstance is held irr, by=urt, remainder of these rules or the rules' applicability to other persons or circumstances shall ]st be a'" red. These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 73A.21. ro [Filed 12/16/13, effective 2/12/141 [Published 1/8/141 EMOR'S NOTE: For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 1/8/14. BF -7 CITY OF IOWA CITY GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE I- DEFINITIONS AND TERAUNOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 2. Agreement --The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 3. Appllcationfor Payment --The form acceptable to OWNER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid --The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidding Documems--The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 7. Bidding Requirements --The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if any, and the Bid form with any supplements. 8. Bods Performance and payment bonds and -oyther instAinents o,)_security. �" ,r �• 9. Ch'angc Order --A document required by OWNER �Irhich is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and "IU�horizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work etc an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract 1 Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the {Agreement. ` 10.im--A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONI'R�TOR seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract --The entire and integrated written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents -The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and OWNER's written interpretations and clarifications issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in this paragrap(.,are Contract Documents. Files in electronic mediaMrmat of text, data graphics, and the like � tt may Uer fumi by OWNER to CONTRACTkou:-Are,aot Cct Documents. ::> -t 13. Contract Price--' OWNER to CONTRACD Work in accordance with I stated in the Agreement (s paragraph 11.03 in the case 14. Contract Times --The number o`t'days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve milestones; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by OWNER's written approval of final payment. 15. CONTRACTOR --The individual or entity with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work --The sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. 17. Drawings --That part of the Contract Documents approved by OWNER which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Extra Work— Work not provided for in the Contract as awarded or deemed essential to the satisfactory completion of the Contract and authorized by OWNER. 20. Field Order --A written order issued by OWNER which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.OWNER 21. Final Payment --Payment made to CONTRACTOR after all work is satisfactorily completed. Final payment does not include retainage. 22. General Requirements --Sections of Division I of the Specifications. 23. Hazardous Environmental Condition --The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Wasfe Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903), as amended fibm time to time. 25. Lhws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations -- Any and 'all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ,ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all lgovernmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts (having jurisdiction. 26. Liens --Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone --A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award --The written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 29. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 30. OWNER --The City of Iowa City with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed, including its employees and professional consultants under contract providing services for the Work. 31. OWNER's Professional Consultant --An individual or entity having a contract with OWNER to furnish services as OWNER's independent professional consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 32. Partial Utilization --Use by OWNER of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 33. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 34. Petroleum --Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 12.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non - Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 35. Project --The total construction of the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents, which may be the whole or a part, as may be indicated in the Contract Documents. 36. Project Manual --The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 37. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 38. Resident Project Representative --The authorized representative of OWNER who is assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 39. Samples --Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 40. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to OWNER to illustrate some portion of the Work. 41. Site --Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Work is to be performed, includin"ghts-of-way and easements for access they and s= other lands furnished by OWNER which �cJesign�d for the use of CONTRACTOR. b. 42. Specifications --That UM$ of Ithe ����tna�act Documents consisting of writtmqaturiR descAptions of materials, equipment, s t jWndar d workmanship as applied to � c= and ain administrative details applica ret= 7r 43. Subcontractor --An individual 4antity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 44. Substantial Completion --The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of OWNER, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 45. Supplementary Conditions --That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 46. Supplier --A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 47. Underground Facilities --All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 48. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 49. Work --The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and famishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 50. Work Change Directive --A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties eex�ec[ that the change ordered or documented by a Wort -Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsegde4tly issued Change Order following ,negotiaGdus by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the _Xontrac! Price or Contract Times. 51.`Written Amendment --A written statement `"Ittpdifyiggthe Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date ofthe Agreemi'.nit and normally dealing with the non- engineeritig or nontechnical rather than strictly construCK-related aspects of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Terminology A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as allowed;" "as approved," or terns of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable, "proper, " "satisfactory, " or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of OWNER as to the Work, it is intended that such action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to OWNER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to any provisions of the Contract Documents. I:IIiT 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. C. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or. deficient in that it does not confogmto the Contract Documents or does not meet the retirements of any inspection, reference standard; test, o prov rred to in the Contract Documents,ochas dam prior toOWNER!sfinal payment (unlec5res nsibiHl�rthe protection thereof has bee rt-p9sGrne��t�3' O R at Substantial Completion in 90ppdancP'with Tftaph 12.04 or 12.05). m y D. Furnish, Install, Perform,'I4e"�1' e T 1. The word "furnish," Ren use%-ytn connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to fumish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "instal I," "perform," or "provide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in acontext clearly requiring an obligation of CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Refer to Supplementary Conditions regarding copies of Drawings and Project Manuals. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. CONTRACTOR's Review of Contract Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully` study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly repbrt in writing to OWNER any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shallobtain a written interpretation or clarification from OWNER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, qr discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER for its timely review: 1. a progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing, and processing such submittal; and 3. a schedule of values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. C. Evidence oflnsurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to run, but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.05.11, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, at least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by CON- TRACTOR, OWNER, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to OWNER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted to OWNER. 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to OWNER if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on OWNER responsibilty for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility theMor. 2. CONTRACTOR's schet Sh0Vrawi�d Sample submittals will be acc able tO WNH- "It provides a workable arranged5" ff4or iewirMd processing the required submitWW") _<t- 3. CONTRACTOWs sch" if v' ues y�{,�e acceptable to OWNER as to d Mstandui�it provides a reasonable allocatio the Cract Price to component parts of the Work. N ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by OWNER and shall be consistent with the intent of and as reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to OWNER, or any of its consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. alf, during the performance of the Work, CONT"CTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the perfon*ce of the Work or of any standard, specifioa ton,,.ipanual or code, or of any instruction of any Surber, C 6NTRACTOR shall report it to OWNER in writinetgg at once. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with theWork effected thereby (except in an emergency as requ6d by paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplealaertt to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.04. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or dis- crepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment or (ii) a Change Order. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) OWNER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; or (iii) OWNER's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contragtwith OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or o4arship rights in any of the Drawings, Specificatiog or othocutget3ti (or copies of any thereof) prepared by cc CO be of O R, including electronic media editiot gR Q (iMall ner tse any of such Drawings, Specificatippv;bthert ocurrI , or copies thereof on extensions of thpgtrject out en consent ofOWNER oruse ofsame at! otl_Aproje is prohibition will survive final paym cal9pleticqt�� d acceptance of the Work, or terminatio comletion(Phe Contract. Nothing herein shall pri$rtde COZITRACTOR from retaining copies of the Contra Docu s for record purposes. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. OWNER shall furnish the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall fumish CONTRACTOR with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide forall additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. Such additional land uses acquired by CONTRACTORshall be by written agreement with the property owner. A copy of the written agreement shall be provided to OWNER. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that OWNER has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that OWNER has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions • and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. differs substantially and materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 2. is of an unusual nature, and differs substantially and materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), notify OWNER in writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order by OWNER to do so. B. OWNER's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, OWNER will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, M and advise CONTRACTOR in writing of findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work, as determined by OWNER; subject to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Article 9. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOre unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amo mor extent, if any, of any adjustment in the(Sract Prry� or C Times, or both, a Claim ma ma theref lt provided in Article 9. Howeve , Elshall Me liable to CONTRACTOR for Mltims sts, sses, or damages (including but not d [o all feed charges of engineers, architect m and r professionals and all court or arb' o er d u resolution costs) sustained by C Ron r m connection with any otherproje anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER by OWNERS of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. OWNER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: a, reviewing and checking all such information and data; b. locating and exposing when requested by OWNER all Underground Facilities within the Work area whether they are indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination of the Work with OWNERS of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work; e. Notifying all utility companies, all pipeline owners, or other parties affected, and endeavoring to have all necessary adjustments of the public or private utility fixtures, pipelines, and other appurtenances within or adjacent to the limit, of construction made as soon as practicable; and f Notification concerning work near buried utilities as required by Section 479.47, Code of Iowa (2011), and for conducting work as required therein. 3. Water lines, gas lines, wire lines, communication lines, service connections, water and gas meter boxes, water and gas valve boxes, light standards, cableways, signals, and all other utility appurtenances within the limits of the proposed construction, which are to be relocated or adjusted, are to be moved by OWNERS of the utility at their expense, except as otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents; 4. It is understood and agreed that CONTRACTOR has cortsiaered in the Bid all of the permanent and tempor3ty utility appurtenances in their present or relocated positions as shown in the Contract Documents and thaE•idditional compensation will not be allowed for any delppys, inconvenience, or damage sustained by CONT;$ACTOR due to any interference from the utility appurtenances or their operation or relocation. B. Not Shown ar Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify OWNER of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER. OWNER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. No compensation shall be due for any Work stoppage caused by the location of an Underground Facility. 2. If OWNER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Times, to the extent that it is attributable to the existence of an Underground Facility. 4.05 Reference Points A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in OWNER's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to OWNER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualifW personnel. 0 4.06 Hazardous Environmental CwE5ion at N nrn A. Reports and Drawings: Refdriruge ireade 1, Ae Supplementary Conditions for the idpattfication of reports and drawings relating to a HaM**s Eliron Condition identified at the Site, ifanyA fhav en ut by OWNER in the preparation of the_Ctact cumpriq B. Limited Reliance by CONT TOR OA Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR m rely up( Ache general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in suc}}fi reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER or OWNEWs Professional Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shall immedi- ately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER may retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or bot, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by CONTRACTOR',either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 9. F. If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR doeshot agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then OWNER may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 9. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless CONTRACTOR, OWNER's Professional Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.F shall obligate CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 are not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All Bonds shall be in the forth prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any Bond furrtted by CON- TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomMnsolvent or its right to do business is terminated st her art of the Project is located or it ceas ee requir nts of paragraph 5.0LB, CONTRA hal ithirnW ays thereafter substitute another Bon uredbothhich shall comply with the requiremenfSf�ragraphs 5 and 5.02. ryt a O 3 5.02 Licensed Sureties and InsurC197` D A. All Bonds and insurance requires* the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates oflnsurance A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and, in addition, provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perforin any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of eny person or property damage arising out of the owneesh ip, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5:04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respecfof professional liability) OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under para- graphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); and 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 11.07. C. CONTRACTOR shall purchase as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Protective Liability Insurance from CONTRACTOR's sources as primary cogygrege for OWNER and OWNER's Professional ConsultantJ 5.05 Acceptance oJBonds and i 6i6ince[+$plion (o place A. If OWNER has anyc-"Ectiol! {o thir7overage afforded by or other provisionsoMe Bonds or ce required to be purchased and maierti5(d b O TOR in accordance with Article 5 on [he bagts on -co o ance with the Contract Documents, .OWNER-7hall so notify CONTRACTOR in writing within�pdaysrreceipt ofthe certificates (or other evidence request required by paragraph 2.05.C. CONTRACTOR shall provide such additional information in respect of insurance provided as OWNER may reasonably request. If CONTRACTOR does not purchase or maintain all of the Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, OWNER may elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or insurance to protect its interests at the expense of CONTRACTOR, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.06 Property Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Professional Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework and Work in transit and shall insure against at least the following perils: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment in transit for incorporation in the Work or stored at the site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; and 5. be maintained in effect until final payment is made. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured retention. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S 6.01 Supervi&n and Superintendence A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct the,Wgrk competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent thereto who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. The name, address and telephone number of the Resident Superintendent shall be provided to OWNER prior to commencement of Work. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout, and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on 10 Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice to OWNER. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- quirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of OWNER. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Docu- ments. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the ress schedule that will change the Contract es sh a submitted in accordance with the re, of icle l uch adjustments may only I m a nge O or Written Amendment in acco a wit�Articl C7� fJtY 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals"_i n .< a A. Whenever an item of es 1 oXequi is specified or described in the Con c=ents ing the name of a proprietary item o e nam . f a particular Supplier, the specification or descnptionro intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to OWNER for review under the circumstances described below: 1. "Or -Equal" Items: If, in OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by OWNER as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in OWNER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment OWNER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to OWNER; and (ii) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. If, in OWNER's sole discretion, an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow OWNER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by OWNER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. c. The procedure for review by OWNER will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as OWNER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. CON73LACTOR shall first make written application to'OWNER for review of a proposed substitute `item of material or equipment that - CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substitute 1.-t-- item will .adequately perform the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The appjication will. state the extent, if any, to which the use -of the proposed substitute item will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item and whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified shall be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, I1 maintenance, repair, and replacement services shall be indicated. The application shall also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by OWNER in evaluating the proposed substitute item. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow OWNER, in OWNER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by OWNER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.05.A.2. C. Owner's Evaluation: OWNER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. OWNER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or - equal" or substitute will be ordered, installe(L% utilized until OWNER's review is complete, which wi11bap–evidenced by either a Change Order for a sub's'iftte, anproved Shop Drawing for an "or equal".iE will ise CONTRACTOR in writing of anyD eg ja iv termip n. D. Special Guarantee: OW1�t-yna3�L*quirl CON- TRACTOR to furnish at CON TRAt akyR's en : Mial performance guarantee or other saw igspec[( y substitute. ;X —_ L E. CONTRACTOR's Fxpensd?"CONICTOR shall provide all data in support of any proposed s stitute or "or - equal" at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER has reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance by OWNER by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. CON- TRACTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER to reject defective Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between OWNER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due dny such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laces and Regulations. D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for spheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a director indirect contract with CONTRACTOR. E. MNTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with OWNER through CONTRACTOR. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on property insurance, the agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against OWNER, CONTRACTOR, OWNER's Professional Consultant, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRACTOR will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of 12 any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, OWNEWs Professional Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, employees or agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time ofopening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall not be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. rs B. If CONTRACTOR perform&y Wd�kno�Y1r�pr having reason to know that it rFAIKUra o Law!'�r Regulations, CONTRACTOR shaliKainallims losses, and damages (including but nQyirrftedl4,tt11 f and charges of engineers, architects, ey , and in professionals and all court or arbi or ger d resolution costs) arising out of or toauch VP however, it shall not be CON TOSr pn responsibility to make certain thatSped tions and Drawings are in accordance with La and Re tions, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CON CTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.03: 6.10 Taxes A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC- TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to OWNER or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultant, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance ofthe Work During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it ready for utiliratid$by OWNER. At the completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents, D. l.aading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall not load ttor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to OWNER and OWNER's Professional Consultant for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to OWNER. 13 6.13 Safety and Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, aria' Underground Facilities not designated for removdl"ielocor replacement in the course of'mnstrctito,R _{ B. CONTRACTOR shall coulfl ith fill applicable Laws and Regulations relating to ttR etycbf persgqwaqq��r property, or to the protection of or Aroperty -r damage, injury, or loss; and shall _ it aintak necessary safeguards for such saft rotec n. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners o nt property and of Underground Facilities and other lity, o rs when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and sha perate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER, its employees, or anyone for whose acts OWNER may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed in accordance with paragraph 12.07.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connections with the Work. OWNER will not have such responsibility. No action undertaken by OWNER under General Conditions paragraphs 13.1 or 13.2, will constitute a transfer of this responsibility or acceptance of this responsibility by OWNER. 6.14 Safety Representative A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give OWNER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If OWNER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to OWNER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. All submittals will be identified as OWNER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similardatato show OWNER the services, materials, and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable OWNER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to OWNER foi review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, and the use for which intended and otherwise as OWNER may require to enable OWNER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to OWNER as required by paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to OWNER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. D. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have: a. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; 14 b. determined and verified all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. determined and verified all information relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. 3. At the time of each submittal, CONTRACTOR shall give OWNER specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written com- munication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to OWNER for review and approval of each such variation. E. OWNER's Review 1. OWNER will timely review and approve or give notice of necessary corrections to the submitted Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to OWNER. OWNER's review will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2.OWNER's review and approval will not extend in means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular ans, method, technique, sequence, or procC�iu�re of_Mnstruction is specifically and expressly cAUd for byrthe Contract Documents) or to safety ioor p ms incident thereto. The review rot of a se ate item as such will not indicateu4 val of the bly in which the item functions. —4V) Cn 3. OWNER' s 5 v review apal df' Shop Drawings or Samples shall n 've:WNTI�'OR from responsibility for any 'ation from the require- ments of the Contract DoRhents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing clMed OWNER's attention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17.D.3 and OWNER has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by OWNER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D.1. F. Resubmittal Procedures 1. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by OWNER and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by OWNER on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 13.04 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. B. Time is an essential element of the Contract, an it is important that the Work continue each working day and pressed vigorously to completion. 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee A. CONTRACTOR warrents and guarantees to OWNER that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. B. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: I. observations by OWNER; 2. ftyment IryOWNER of any progress or final payment t L.. r3* the issuance of a certificate of Substantial CcmpletW by OWNER or any payment related thereto 4, use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by OWNER; 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 15 8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- tions, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage: 1. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and 2. is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether caused in part by any negligence or omission of an individual or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Reg}dytions regardless of the negligence of any such indivr or entity. J B. In any and all claims agail>; AMrrJ% or OWNER's Professional Consultant or axy:!f I it ruve consultants, agents, officers, direcore ployces by any employee (or the survivor er ons{{ ��repressm}�!�ive of such employee) of CONTRAC anyp$ubco�ecRor, any Supplier, or any individual or enttty�ior int ly employed by any of them to perfarm.�ypy a£ilre Wor,or anyone for whose acts any of tlRm may liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6`.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of OWNER's Professional Consultant or to the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of the preparation of, or the failure to prepare maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, designs, or Specifications. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK 7.01 Related Work at Site A. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the Site by OWNER's employees, or let other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON- TRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of OWNER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOWs Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other w(4k and promptly report to OWNER in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. CONTRACTOR's failure to so rpport will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and respon- sibility for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Furnish Data A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents. 8.02 Pay Promptly When Due A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 12.02.0 and 12.07.C. 16 8.03 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. OWNER's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER's identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by OWNER in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.04 Insurance A. OWNEWs responsibilities, if any, with respect to pur- chasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.05 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities A. OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OWNER shall not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. OWNER shall not be obligated to pay standby or down time rental on any equipment used or stored at the Site unless agreed to and included in an approved Change Order. 8.06 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OWNEWs responsibility with respect to any undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in paragraph 4.06. 8.07 Evidence ojfinancial Arrangements A. If and to the extent OWNER has.Ureed to furnish CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence Rhat financial arrangements have been magS to sMfy OWNER's obligations under the ContrailIgdfgcurMts, t WR!s responsibility in respect thereotf*RMpe waset fortU the Supplementary Conditions. c7'—< t 1 N ARTICLE 9 -PAYMENTS � a 9.01 Scope of Payment 30. C2 A. CONTRACTOR shall accept to compensation herein provided as full payment for furnishing all material, labor, tools, and equipment and for performing all work under the Contract or any extension thereof allowed under Article 10; also, for all cost arising from the action of the elements or other natural causes, agreements, and performances, non -performances, or delays involving other contractors and third parties, or injunctions or lawsuits resulting therefrom, or from any unforeseen difficulties not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents and which may be encountered during prosecution of the Work and up to the time of acceptance thereof, except damage to the Work due to acts of war. Nothing herein shall in and of itself be construed to prejudice or deny any claim filed under (3) An amount equal to 35 percent of the provisions of Article 9.05. sum of the above items listed in (1) and (2) will at an agreed price or on a force account basis. also be paid to CONTRACTOR. The 35 B. The Contract Price for any item shall be full percent shall cover compensation for furnishing compensation for acceptable work and for materials, the necessary small tools for work, together equipment, tools, and labor for performance of all work with all other overhead items of expense. necessary to complete the item in accordance with the basis is performed. Profit percentage shall not Contract Documents. (4) For property damage, liability, and This written agreement shall describe the Extra worker's compensation insurance premiums, 9.02Payment For Work Performed unemployment insurance contributions, and price or prices therefor. social security taxes on the force account work, A. CONTRACTOR shall receive and accept payment for CONTRACTOR shall receive the actual cost, work performed under the Contract as follows: to which 10 percent will be added. .... CONTRACTOR shall famish evidence of the 1. Items of Work Performed Which Are Covered by rate or rates paid for such bond, insurance, and Definite Prices Stipulated in the Contract. For all items tax. of acceptable work performed which are covered by definite unit prices or lump sum amounts specified in the (5) The wage of the superintendent, contract, CONTRACTOR shall receive and accept timekeeper, or supervisor who is employed compensation at the rate specified in the contract, except partly on force account work and partly on for items identified as that of significant change as other work shall be prorated between two provided in Articles 4.03 and 9.04. classes of work according to the number of (2) CONTRACTOR shall receive the persons shown by the payrolls as employed on� 2. In making Contract adjustments, consideration each class of work. shall be given to the portion of the cost of the Work that shall be furnished to OWNER and one to can be classified as fixed costs, independent of the exact (6) For materials used 1force account quantity of work performed, such as transportation and work, CONTRACTOR shall rMive th�jual installation costs on equipment, overhead cost, etc. Any cost of materials �iveredrpn theS Birk, price adjustment shall be arrived at from the standpoint including the freight—OCbancIT& chargstas that neither party to the contract shall be penalized by the shown by original rec*ted billstto whir%st increase or decrease in quantities which occasioned the shall be added a suToetfual to 15 pe t price adjustment. thereof. in rl` B. Extra Work 1� 9 (7) Rental rate for. FVxhin4 too 1. Extra Work ordered by OWNER of a quality or be used) and fuel and lubl&ants shelf be based class not covered by the Contract, will be paid for either on the average monthly rfmal rate f?the most at an agreed price or on a force account basis. recent Rental Rate Blue Book published by Dataquest Incorporated. OWNER and a. Agreed Price Basis. For Extra Work ordered CONTRACTOR shall agree on a rental rate in by OWNER and performed on an agreed price writing before Extra Work on force account basis, OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall enter into basis is performed. Profit percentage shall not a written agreement before the work is undertaken. be added to the rental rate. This written agreement shall describe the Extra Workihat is to be done and shall specify the agreed price or prices therefor. (8) Compensation as herein provided shall be accepted by CONTRACTOR as payment in b. Force,Arcount Basis. full for Extra Work done on a force account .... basis. It will be assumed that such payment i (1) For Extra Work performed on a force includes the use of tools and equipment for 1 • 1 account basis, CONTRACTOR shall receive which no rate is allowed, overhead, and profit. the rate of wage (or scale) agreed to in writing with OWNER before beginning work for each (9) At the end of each day, and every hour that laborers, timekeepers, CONTRACTOR shall prepare payrolls in supervisors; and superintendents are actually duplicate for labor furnished on a force account engaged in work. basis using OWNER's standard force account forms. Both copies shall be signed by the (2) CONTRACTOR shall receive the OWNER's representative and actual costs paid to, or in behalf of, workers by CONTRACTOR's representative. One copy reason of subsistence and travel allowances, shall be furnished to OWNER and one to health and welfare benefits, pension fund CONTRACTOR. Claims for Extra Work benefits, or other benefits, when the amounts performed on a force account basis shall be are required by a collective bargaining submitted to OWNER in triplicate. Any agreement or other employment contract receipts or statements required by OWNER to generally applicable to the classes of labor support such claims shall be attached thereto. employed on the work. Such claims shall be filed no later than the tenth day of the month following that in which the work was actually performed, and shall 17 include all labor charges, rental charges on machinery, tools, and equipment, and all material charges insofar as they are available. 3. Extra Work Performed by a Subcontractor. The percentage markup to be allowed to CONTRACTOR for Extra Work (including force account work) performed by a Subcontractor shall be in accordance with the following: a. 10 percent on the first $50,000 with a $100 minimum. b. 5 percent on the portion over $50,000. C. Deficient Work Payment for work judged by OWNER to be deficient Work will be made at the reduced rate specified in the Contract Documents or, if no such rate is specified, at a modification of the Contract Price, as determined by OWNER. 9.03 Cancelled Work A. OWNER shall have the right to cancel any or all items from the Contract when unforeseen circumstances, unanticipated design changes, or other reasons beyond the control of CONTRACTOR prevent or unreasonably delay completion of the Contract or certain items ofthe Contract, or when OWNER determines that cancellation is in the public interfst. B. OWNER may prevent CONTRACTOR from starting Wqrk on. the Contract or an identified phase of the Contract as d result of a delay caused by OWNER or others. C. When the Contract period is defined by the approximate- starting date and the delay prevents CONTRACTOR starting Work on the Contract or an identified phase of the Contract for 30 calendar days beyond such date, CONTRACTOR may request cancellation by written notice to OWNER stating the reasons therefor. D. When the Contract period is defined by the late start date and the delay prevents CONTRACTOR starting for more than 30 calendar days after the date of award of Contract and at least 30 calendar days beyond the date which, by notice to OWNER, CONTRACTOR proposed to stall work, CONTRACTOR may request cancellation by providing written notice to OWNER, stating the reasons therefor. E. In the case of 9.03C., or 9.03D., within 30 calendar days from the date of the request, OWNER will eliminate or minimize, if possible, the cause for the delay and issue a Notice to Proceed, redefine the basis on which the Work is to proceed, or cancel the Contract or phase of the Contract. F. CONTRACTOR shall not use delays that occur prior to starting Work or an identified phase of the Work as a basis of a claim against OWNER except for an extension of Contract period. Notices described in this Article 9 shall be transmitted by ordinary mail. G. For finished portions of non -major items cancelled, CONTRACTOR will be paid, at the contract unit prices, in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.02. For finished portions of major items cancelled, CONTRACTOR will be paid as provided in Article 9.02. For all items, materials 18 ordered and delivered for the unfinished portion of such cancelled or omitted items, OWNER will pay cost plus 10 percent as an overhead charge. CONTRACTOR's expense for handling or transporting this material shall be included in computing the cost. OWNER will also pay any actual expenses sustained by CONTRACTOR by reason of such cancellation or omission and not represented by work completed or material delivered. In computation of material cost or expenses sustained, no anticipated profit will be included. Material paid for shall become the property of OWNER and shall be disposed of as directed by OWNER. 9.04 Standardized Contract Clauses A. Suspensions of Work Ordered by OWNER 1. If the performance of all or any portion of the Work is suspended or delayed by OWNER in writing for an unreasonable period of time (not originally anticipated, customary, or inherent to the construction industry) and CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension or delay, CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER, in writing, a request for adjustment within 7 calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. 2. Upon receipt, OWNER will evaluate CONTRACTOR's request. If OWNER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of CONTRACTOR, its Suppliers, or Subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, OWNER will make an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the Contract in writing accordingly. CONTRACTOR will be notified of OWNER's determination whether an adjustment of the Contract is warranted. 3. No Contract adjustment will be allowed unless CONTRACTOR has submitted the written request for adjustment within the time prescribed. 4. No Contract adjustment will be'2§owed under this clause to the extent that rKorman)ic,,would have been suspended or delayed bthq6ause or which adjustment is provide, =11d"14, unde y other term or condition of this&aliact. r �. C!1 B. Significant Changes in the CCI fC r of ll'or rri a 1. OWNER reserves the azinw ,at any time during the Work, scThan�in gdhnllfies and such alterations in the 142k as qo necessary to satisfactorily complete the Project. Sub changes in quantities and alterationswill not invalidate the Contract nor release the surety, and CONTRACTOR agrees to perform the Work as altered. 2. If the alterations or changes in quantities significantly change the character of the Work under the Contract, whether such alterations or changes are in themselves significant changes to the character of the Work or, by affecting other work, cause such other work to become significantly different in character, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profit, will be made to the Contract. The basis for the adjustment shall be agreed upon in writing prior to the performance of the Work. If a basis cannot be agreed upon, then an adjustment will be made either for or against CONTRACTOR in such amount as OWNER may determine to be fair and equitable. 3. If the alterations or changes in quantities do not significantly change the character of the work to be performed under the Contract, the altered Work will be paid for as provided elsewhere in the Contract. 4. The tern "significant change" shall apply only to the following circumstances: a. When the character of the Work, as altered, differs materially in kind or nature from that involved or included in the original proposed construction; or b. When a major item of Work, defined as an item of Work in excess of $50,000, is increased in excess of 125 percent or decreased below 75 percent of the original Contract quantity. Any allowance for an increase in quantity shall apply only to that portion in excess of 125 percent oforiginal Contract item quantity, or in case of a decrease below 75 percent, to the actual amount of work performed. 9.05 Disputed Claims For Extra Compensation A. In any case where CONTRACTOR deems that extra compensation is due for work or material not clearly covered in the Contract and not ordered by OWNER as Extra Work as defined herein, CONTRACTOR shall file a written claim with OWNER for this extra compensation before commencing the Extra Work upon which the claim is based. B. OWNER shall be responsible for damages attributable to the performance, nonperformance or delay of any other contractor, governmental agency, utility, firm, corporation, or individual authorized to do work on the project, only when these damages result from negligence on the part of OWNER, its officers or employees. In any case where CONTRACTOR deems extra compensation is due from OWNIM as damages resulting from these performances, nonperformlhices, or. delays, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER inowriting at the time the delay occurs. -t. In a0,cases, if the notification required pursuant to 9.0n is not given or, if after the notification is given, OWNER is not afforded the ability to keep strict account of actual costs' as defined for force account construction, CONTRACTOR thereby agrees to waive the claim for extra cwmpensatioh for this work. This notice by CONTRACTOR, and the fact that OWNER has kept account of the cost as aforesaid, shaltnot be construed as establishing the validity of the claim. The claim, when filed, shall be in writing and in sufficient detail to permit auditing and an intelligent evaluation by OWNER. The claim shall be supported by such documentary evidence as the claimant has available and shall be verified by affidavit of the claimant or other persons having knowledge of the facts. If the claimant wishes an opportunity to present the claim in person, then the claim shall be accompanied by a written request to do so. Where the claimant asks an opportunity to present the claim in person, OWNER, within 30 calendar days of the filing of the claim, will fix a time and place for a meeting, between the claimant 19 and OWNER. OWNER will, within a reasonable time from the filing of the claim or the meeting above referred to, whichever is later, rule upon the validity of the claim and notify the claimant, in writing, of the ruling together with the reasons therefor. In case the claim is found to be just, in whole or in part, it will be allowed and paid to the extent so found. CONTRACTOR shall not institute any court action against OWNER for the adjudication of any claims until the claim has been first presented to OWNER pursuant to this Article. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 10.01 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be made in writing and submitted by the party making the claim to the other party to the Contract. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 10. 10.02 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Wrol A. Where CONTRACTDR is vent* in completing any part of the Work' n ontracCTimes due to delay beyond the contrdONSRAC7�. the Contract Times will be extended jgyKamoy1�ppt cJl to the time lost due to such delay if a CMM O's rfihUe the'e(� as provided in paragraph 10.0I.A. D pV eyoq�the c� of CONTRACTOR shall include, u t 3Si limy o, negligent acts by OWNER, negligee p b3aMility owners or other contractors performing othe6fork asi4pntemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidernkt, abndSal weather conditions, or acts of God. 10.03 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control A. The Contract Times will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 10.04 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from complet- ing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, as determined by OWNER in its sole discretion, an extension of the Contract Times in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. 10.05 Delay Damages A. In no event shall OWNER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from: 1, delays caused by or within the control of CON- TRACTOR; or 2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. ARTICLE 11 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 11.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER has actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 11. 11.02 Access to Work A. OWNER, OWNER's Professional Consultant, other representative's- and personnel of OWNER, independent testing labotatories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional; interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 11.03 Tests and Inspections A. CONTRACTOR shall give OWNER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by paragraphs 11.03.0 and 11.03.13 below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 11.04.6 shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 11.04.B; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish OWNER the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER's 20 acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of OWNER, it must, if requested by OWNER, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 11.03.E shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CON- TRACTOR has given OWNER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and OWNER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 11.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of OWNER, it must, if requested by OWNER, be uncovered for OWNER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. B. If OWNER considers it necessary or advisable that inspected covered Work be observed by OWNER, reinstalled or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at OWNER's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as OWNER may require, that portion ofthe Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 9. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shal I be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or anqWnsion of the Contract Times, or both, direcjiy attritftble to such uncovering, exposure, observat[SA, ins ion, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. IartK4 are Aft to agree as to the amount or extent Mbreef, CONTRACXDR may make a Claim therefor as proG_L?legin Article 9r� __4 n rs 11.05 OWNER May Stop the Wor11G� = M A. If the Work is defective, c 1%TF=TOG1s to supply sufficiently skilled workeWr suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work ir@ch a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. The right of OWNER, however, to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for,employee or agent of any of them. 11.06 Correction or Removal g(Dejective Work A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, whether fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal, including, but not limited to, all costs of repair or replacement of work of others. 11.07 Correction Period A. If, within two years after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations, the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by or specific provision stated in the Contract Documents , any Work, material, or equipment is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.1 LA is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions, perform one to more of the following remedial actions: (i) repair such defective land or areas; (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective; or (iii) satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terns of such instructions or, in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may perform or have a third party perform the required remedial actions, and CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages, including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs arising out of or relating to the performance of said remedial action. B. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may stag to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. C. Where defective Work and damage to other Work resulting therefrom has been corrected or removed and replaced undeh this paragraph 11.07, the correction period hereunder withiespect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. D. CONTRACTOR's obligations under this paragraph 11.07 are in addition to any otherobligation orwarranty. The provisions of this paragraph 11.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 11.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all 21 fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 9. If the acceptance occurs after final payment, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 11.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from OWNER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 11.06.A, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the ConQ*t Documents, OWNER may, after seven days writ notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and rem6aycajry sad defielftly. B. In exercising the rights as medis un 'is section, OWNER shall proceed ex i usW tln 1 connection with such correctivremedial $�1�n, OWNER may exclude CONTRA rodWl or f the Site, take possession of all or,-5Mof 3Fe WoMd suspend CONTRACTOR's servictig a cd Mereto, take possession of CONTRACTOMp— toolsr„aappliances, construction equipment and machinery at tit Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, and OWNER's other contractors access to the Site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this section. C. All Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph 11.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in Article 9. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include, but not be limited to, all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies under this section 11.09. ARTICLE 12 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 12.01 Schedule of Values A. The schedule of values established pursuant to paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to OWNER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 12.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established for each progress payment, but not more often than once a month, CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, on other documentation warranting that OWNER hak received the materials and equipment free a?d clearof al I Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance c'r other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. OWNER will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, indicate in writing acceptance or denial of the Application for Payment. If the Application is denied, OWNER shall state the reasons for such denial and CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Payment by OWNER of amount requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by OWNER that to the best of OWNER's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents subject to: (i) an evaluation ofthe Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, (ii) the 22 results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, (iii) a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Article 9, and (iv) any other qualifications stated in the recommendation; and C. the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's entitlement to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is OWNER's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By making any such payment OWNER will not thereby be deemed to have accepted that: (i) inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work, or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 4. Neither OWNER's review of CONTRACTOR's Work for the purposes of making payments, including Final Payment, will impose responsibility on OWNER to supervise, direct, or control the Work or for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Additionally, said review or recommendation will not impose responsibility on OWNER to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens. 5. OWNER may, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made to sumextent as may be necessary to protect OWNW from & because: to a. the Work is defeor orpleted Wrk has been damaged, esrec?C or replacement; CA r�� b. the Contract Priee life red by Written Amendment or O_rs; v c. OWNER has bAPn requ6d to correct defective Work or complete Worlt.in accordance with paragraph 11.09; or d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraph 13.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Twenty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER, the amount will become due, subject to the provisions of paragraph 12.02.1), and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. D. Reduction in Payment 1. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount because: a. claims have been made against OWNER arising from CONTRACTOR's performance or fur- nishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling OWNER to a setoff against the amount requested; or d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occur- rence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 12.02.B.S.a through 12.02.B.5.c or paragraph 13.02.A. 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full amount, OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld or any adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRACTOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by paragraph 12.02.C.1. 12.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will U'ss to OWNER no later than the time of payment, fref od clearof all Liens. n1 12.04 Subslajr l Completion A. WherSONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that OWNER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly thereafter, OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If OWNER does not consider the Work substantially complete, OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing, giving the reasons therefor. C. If OWNER considers the Work substantially complete, OWNER will prepare a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion and will issue a final certificate of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. 23 D. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 12.05 Partial Utilization A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following conditions: 1. OWNER at any time may request, at any time and in writing, that CONTRACTOR permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request OWNER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER in writing that CONTRACTOR corkQers any such part of the Work ready for its intended ujBand substantially complete and request OWPgR to ia cez ' to of Substantial Completion for %e Wort! >ti ithin a reasonable time after eithenjiO regMt, ORM and CONTRACTOR shall makpep.igspec�t�Qnot a partof the Work to determine its- Ws bf'com n. If OWNER does not consider lli cyf the N10 o be substantially complete, 9 Ea willr'lptify CONTRACTOR in writing Si _ theMasons for. If OWNER considers that6rt of tN Work to be substantially complete, the prKvisionsgsection 12.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 12.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, OWNER will promptly make a final inspection with CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 12.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of OWNER, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all main- tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guaran- tees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and any other necessary documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by the following, unless previously delivered: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers satisfactory to OWNER of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in paragraph 12.07.A.2 and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible have been paid orotherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt of payment in full, CONTRACTOR may fumish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnfy OWNER against any Lien. B. Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of OWNER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and OWNER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, OWNER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, OWNER will, within ten days after receipt of the final complete Application for Payment, indicate in writing to CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 12.09.OWNER will otherwise return the Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the formal acceptance of the Work by OWNER, retainage will become due and payable. 12.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If final completion of the Work is significantly delayed through no fault of CONTRACTOR, OWNER may, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been fumished as required in paragraph 5.0 1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to OWNER with the 24 Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 12.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute a waiver of all Claims: 1, by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to paragraph 12.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terns of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing which are still unsettled. ARTICLE 13 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 13.01 OWNER May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination of the Contract for cause: 1. CONTRACTOR's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04; 2. CONTRACTOR's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. CONTRACTOR's disregard of the authority of OWNER; or 4. CONTRACTOR's violation insubstantial way of any provisions of the C tract �uments. B. If one or more of the even i fiMn pam#*h 13.01.A occur, OWNER may, afte1159S CMTRA4#P@R and the surety, if any, seven days ne, to to the services of CONTRACTOR, R from the Site, and take possession'6t�ttpP tiyeak anII CONTRACTOR'stools ,appliances cN'�nequ��pr�+aqq��t, and machinery at the Site, and use t e to7Ge fulllfelEnt they could be used by CONTRAC R wit t liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion, rporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages, including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs sustained by OWNER arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will be incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. C. Where CONTRACTOWs services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. 13.02 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid, without duplication of any items: 1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipat&profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out df kr resulting from such termination. 13.03 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate I A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for"more than 90 consecutive days by OWNERor nderanorderofcourtorotherpublicauthority, or OWNEIrfails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 d ys after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 days to payrpNTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written notice to OIINER and provided OWNER does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in section 13.02. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if OWNER has failed for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may, seven days after providing written notice to OWNER, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions 25 of this section 13.03 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under Article 9 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 14 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 14.01 Methods and Procedures A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 15 - MISCELLANEOUS 15.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Con t Documents requires the giving of written notice, it wile deemed to have been validly given if deli&edin rson e individual or to a member of the fitsaarxo fficer e corporation for whom it is intendedrirZ' elrvered at errant by ordinary mail, postage prepai(b 4K the d t bss address known to the giver of the nalk%-.* <r a rn 15.02 Computation of Times _ rn Z 0 A. When any period of time is reftr*fd to ittthe Contract Documents by days, it will be compilled to elude the first and include the last day of such period. If the t day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 15.03 Cumulative Remedies A'The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 15.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Agreement. 15.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa. 15.06 Compliance with OSHA Regulations A. CONTRACTOR and all Subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910 (General Industry Standard) and 29 CFR 1926 (Construction Industry Standard). CONTRACTOR and all Subcontractors are solely responsible for compliance with said regulations. 15.07 Employment Practices A. Neither CONTRACTOR nor its Subcontractors shall employ any person whose physical or mental condition is such that its employment will endanger the health and safety of themselves or others employed on the Project. B. CONTRACTOR shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to include the following clauses in any subcontracts: 1. To discharge from employment or refuse to hire any individual because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age, or disability unless such disability is related to the job performance of such performance or employee. 2. To discriminate against any individual in terns, conditions, or privileges of employment because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, 26 gender identity, marital status, age or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. 15.08 Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements). A. For all Contracts and subcontracts of $25,000 or more, CONTRACTOR and all affected Subcontractors shall abide by the requirements of the City of Iowa City Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 15.09 Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding ofNon-Federal Aid Projects A. CONTRACTOR awarded the Project, together with all Subcontractors, shall be required to complete the form included with these Specifications titled the same as this section and submit it to OWNER before work can begin on the Project. Note that this requirement involves only those projects not funded with Federal moneys. 15.10 Construction Stakes A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the preservation of stakes and marks. Any necessary restaking will be at CONTRACTOR's expense and will be charged at a rate of $75 per hour. N O d �y -v G7 M C-3 S r r r �rn 3�- m W CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the City of Iowa City General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. SC -2.02 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS A. After Notice of Award, CONTRACTOR may obtain from the OWNER, at no charge, maximum of five (5) complete sets of the Drawings and Specifications. SC -5.01 BONDS AND INSURANCE Delete paragraph 5.01.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amoufa:tt least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and-paymem of all CONTRACTOR's obligations underthe Contract Documents. These Bonds sh remai(t� effec` TI at least until two years after the date when final payment becomes due, except}as,*vided— otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRAC;TQR s`AII als f" furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. - n 'r- SC -5.04 CONTRACTOR's LIABILITY INSURANCE ;r The limits of liability for the insurance shall provide coverage for not less than the fwk)wing amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: o 1. Workers' Compensation, and related coverages: a. State: Statutory b. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman's): Statutory C. Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 1. 2. CONTRACTOR's General Liability which shall include completed operations and product liability coverages: a. General Aggregate $2,000,000 b. Products -Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 c. Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 d. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $1,000,000 e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide Explosion, Collapse and Underground coverages where applicable. f. Excess or Umbrella Liability: General Aggregate $1,000.000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 3. Automobile Liability: a. Bodily injury and Property Damage: Single Combined Limit $1,000,000 In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: The entire amount of CONTRACTOR's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured CONTRACTOR becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by CONTRACTOR's insurer. The entire amount of CONTRACTOR's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by CONTRACTOR's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, CONTRACTOR unless this requirement is waived by OWNER. CONTRACTOR's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. If CONTRACTOR's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. CONTRACTOR'S General Liability, Auto Liability and Workers' Compensation insurance shall be endorsed with the Governmental Immunities Endorsement (see attached copy) and Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the OWNER. CONTRACTOR'S Workers' Compensation insurance shall also be endorsed with the Alternate Employer endorsement naming the OWNER as the Alternate Employer. . The OWNER requires that the CONTRACTOR'S Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. OWNER reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. OI�VER also reserves the right to reject CONTRACTOR's insurance if not in compliance with the rems he'r%, provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declarfa nd se dcl specific performance or termination, as the case may be. -0 CJ-< r r cn In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified WNTRACTCy� Certificate of Insurance are cancelled or modified, or in the event that CONTRACTOR ir" iab� los either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not underthis Contra Wovered by r� same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of CONTRACTOR's liab insurance, then OWNER may, in its discretion, either suspend CONTRACTOR's operations or activities under this atract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for Work performed on the Contract. SC -6.06.6. CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS CONTRACTOR shall list those persons, fines, companies or other parties to whom it proposestintends to enter into a subcontract regarding this Project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. Such identification will not be made public at the bid opening. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, 2 CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. CONTRACTOR shall submit and acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriated Change Orderwill be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER to reject defective Work. SC -15.10 CONSTRUCTION STAKES Delete section 15.10.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -15.11 OWNER'S SAFETY PROGRAM A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work at the Site shall complete a Contractor Orientation Program. This program is in response to OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926 Subpart -C. This program is designed to inform you and your company's staff of hazards present associated with w(W on sanitary sewer lines or at Wastewater Division treatment facilities. See the—attachoO ContraWr Orientation Program document for more information. O END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS :•C � S 0 J� r 7 W Y O U 3 rrri A h• C 3 r -tet-4 CITY OF I0VVA CITY �� MEMORANDUM Date: November 19, 2010 To: Contractors, Vendors and Manufacture Representatives From: City of Iowa City Wastewater Division Re: Contractors Orientation Program Purpose: The purpose of the Contractors Orientation Program (COP) is to orient the contractors staff of on site safety concerns during construction projects and to comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926 Subpart- C. This orientation program has been developed regarding operational and safety issues specifically at the City of Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Division. The orientation includes such information as infection control, smoking restrictions, hazardous locations, evacuation requirements, among other topics. The orientation outline and contents are available to review in the main administration building at the South Wastewater Plant. Policy: All who are providing construction, vendor, or manufacture representative services for the City of Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Division and will not be accompanied by plant or sewer maintenance staff shall be required to complete the COP course. All services awarded either by a bidding process, yearly maintenance contracts or emergency repair including but not limited to: alterations, repairs including painting, equipment replacement, equipment calibrations, and sanitary sewer pipe repair or replacement in streets or alleys require completion of the COP course. Additional service work which may require completion of the Contractors Orientation Program includes but is not limited to the following: • Repair or maintenance of building HVAC systems. • Vibration and noise evaluations of plant buildings. • Service work to public utilities (electric, gas or telephone). • Water main testing, flushing, repair or maintenance. • Manufacturer representatives completing equipment service or repairs. Expectations: ..+ All who are providing services as previously defined shall complete the COPurse.!Sirkwood Community College at the Iowa City or Cedar Rapids campuses will administer this cfor6ye City Iowa City Wastewater Division. The COP course is computer based training. ASi=4orn%ting t Contactor Orientation Program, Kirkwood will issue a photo identification badge sp!E!Wto the Cit Iowa City Wastewater Division. Enclosed are copies of required forms and contemmfombtion for Kirkwood campuses. Zrn a m • The photo identification badge is required to be worn while on site at the IowaiBigwawwater—* Treatment Plants. V • Construction service workers who have not completed the COP course will not'i�e per®tted to provide services for the City of Iowa City Wastewater Division. W • The contractor will insure their staff has completed the COP course prior to dispatching them to work at the Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Division. • Completion of the COP course and payment to Kirkwood at $35.00 per is the contractors responsibility. Payment due at time of scheduling. • The Wastewater Division project coordinator will verify that each worker has a photo identification badge while on the job site. • The City of Iowa City Wastewater Division Contractors Orientation Program must be completed once every two (2) years. November 19, 2010 Re: Contractor Orientation Program CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street Iowa City. Iowa 52240-1826 (319) 356-5000 (319) 356.5009 FAX www.lcgov.org The City of Iowa City Wastewater Division will now require contractors, venders and manufacturer representatives to complete a Contractor Orientation Program. This program is in response to OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926 Subpart -C. This program is designed to inform you and your company's staff of hazards present associated with work on sanitary sewer lines or at Wastewater Division treatment facilities. Enclosed you will find copies of the following: • The City of Iowa City Wastewater Division, Contractor Orientation Program policy. • Iowa City Location, Registration and Rules 1.4 • CVCSC Training Center Rules. (needs to be copied and taken to testingsentere • Employee Personal Information Form (need to complete one form for e6eh-gmplftyee —n taking the program) -o • Kirkwood requires payment by the employee or employer prior to complgr4thee r Contractor Orientation Program. -+C-) If you have any questions regarding the Contractor Orientation Program please cliri6ct me at Q 319-356-5170 ext. 6104 between 7:00 am and 4:00 pm Monday through Friday q�ou can E-mail me at chris-gilstrap aaAowa-citv.orq o Sincerely, Lai of, \ E t�.r,4. mail, Chris D. Gilstrap Assistant Superintendent City of Iowa City Wastewater Division Cedar Valley Contractor's Safety Council Iowa City Location REGISTRATION AND RULES REGISTRATION INFORMATION: Kirkwood Cedar Rapids or Iowa City Locations To register and reserve a time -slot call: Roxanne Foley @ 319.398.7783 E-mail: Roxann.Foley@kirkwood.edu Hours of operation: Cedar Rapids Testing Facility: Monday to Friday 7:00 am to 5:00 pm Iowa City Testing Facility: Monday to Friday 9:00 am to 12:00 pm Payment of $35.00 per person due at time of scheduling test. Mgistrations are taken by appointment only. Space is limited. TRAINING CENTER RULES All students must read and understand the following rules. The Training Center is considered an extension of the work place and policy violations will not be tolerate4. I.D. Required Students and the company or union hall registering them must give the students Social Security number. The student must also present a valid, legible, government issued, good condition that contains a recent, identifiable photograph. Acceptable forms of identification are: state drivers license, state I.D. card, U.S. Passport, current foreign passport, green card, U.S. Military or government photo I.Db English LanguageOC rNn "T1CVCSC Training Center classes are offered in English only. Studentrast pass OF test in English. n cn Cheating or Falsifying = Q Anyone falsifying identification or caught cheating will be barred f6A yearWlO EXCEPTIONS! Cleanliness Attendees clothing and shoes must be free of dirt, mud, chemicals, dust, grease attendees will be asked to wash, change, or cover-up to avoid damage to the center or cross contamination of other attendees. Personal Behavior Foul, abusive or inappropriate language, attendees suspected of being under the influence of drugs or alcohol, and weapons will not be tolerated. Students ejected from the Training Center for personal behavior may register future classes consistence with the rules of the Training Center. However, second time offenders shall be permanently banned from future Training Center programs. Harassment No one will be permitted to harass others. Everyone has the responsibility to avoid action, implied, or explicit, which may suggest harassment in any form. Tobacco The use of tobacco is PROHIBITED inside the building, but smoking is allowed outside. Cell Phones Radios, Cell Phones, Pagers, must be off. If students need to be reached t&l ey may be called at the Training Center. Orn N C) Unexcused Absence 1;i;_, If a student leaves a class prior to completion, she/he must notify t!�f rai6ng for - Center Center of leaving. Without a legitimate excuse, companies will be% rgcA the Ml price for the student who leaves class after registration. =� � w Passing/Failing a Course CD Each course has a final test. The final CBT score is based on the number of questions asked (usually not more than 25) <80%. (Pass rate is 80%) Students who score less than 80% on the final test will be allowed to retake the course the same day. A score less than 80% on the second try means that the student may NOT retake the course during the same calendar year. When a student attains a passing score, the date of the successful training is recorded in the on-line database and a photo id is issued. Badges Students are given a photo ID as proof of a passing score. A failing score means that the training center cannot confirm minimum safety knowledge. Individual host companies decide whether a person who fails the class will be admitted to their facility. ID's will only be issued from the Iowa City Kirkwood Campus. Signature: Date: Cedar Valley Contractors Safety Council (CVCSC) Personal Information Sheet Name Date Address City State Zip Social Security Number Home Phone Contractor/Company Information Name Address City State : Zip Business Phone Contact Name Courses Billed ❑ Basic OSHA ❑ Alliant 6th ❑ Alliant Prairie Creek ❑ Cedar Rapids Paper (CRP) ❑ Diamond V Mills ❑ Genencor International ❑ Quality Chef ❑ Cedar Rapids Water Pollution DOB twow# City. N 0 o ❑ U of I Hospitalsrn ❑ City of IC - Wastew0dr rn -a c'7—G I ❑ City of IC - Water MpgrtnfAt r- -<r ❑ City of IC - LaadSllo rn rn CD w CEDAR VALLEY CONTRACTOR SAFETY COUNCIL Contractor Safety Orientation Date: Basic Safety # Site Specific # City of Iowa City SIGN -IN SHEET ** Site Specific Only STUDENT S.S. NUMBER COMPANY BASIC P/F SITE COURSE SITE P/F SIGNATURE V X01 Technical Specifications for Wastewater Belt Filter Press Replacement Project City of Iowa City Iowa City, Iowa I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Jay M. B adyy /tignplbre) date) Discipline: Civil Engineer, Iowa License No. 13153 License expires December 31, 2018. Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by JMB on Table of Contents Stanley Consultants INc A Stalky Cusp Company ElheMn UlO-I call mid Ca .i. Se l- WWOk IW7 0001 05.dm I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. "x�p1P11P1tn11011U1/r4grU' xpQP0 f ES SIDA,q� Andrea L. Bickford Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. "71ut111101utopq FE •o pSSI ^, oe ANDREA L (s ature) (date) _ j = BICC D v ZD ' { Discipline: Structural Engineer, Iowa License No. 20844 License expires December 31, 2017 SCOTT A m �r•W 1111111t Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by ALB on Table WARREN t of Contents I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed _•' Professional En ee///r''' under the laws of the State of Iowa. 81ONq��''�i,,� ``0.fES �•- Lane E. IVM � 2 r .`� ,''� Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by SAW on Table (signature) (date)a u+ IPIrrs m Discipline: Electrical Engineer, Iowa License No. 17368 � m ' f •-' r• '''q*•••'••...' •''• License expires December 31, 2018. :0 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by LEI on Table of -• Contents Stanley Consultants INC ASt Ly Qv CMVarj rny4.efi% EvNwrueW sad C. m1� Se ,ea -lSb de 00 01 05.dw I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. "71ut111101utopq FE •o pSSI ^, IQ Scott A.WarrE' �10 ,moo,•• .•Fy-' �,3 SCOTT A m a • (signs ure) (d�_ WARREN t 21525 Discipline: Instrumentation Engineer, Iowa License No. 21525 _•' i -f License expires December 31, 2018 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by SAW on Table of Contents Stanley Consultants INC ASt Ly Qv CMVarj rny4.efi% EvNwrueW sad C. m1� Se ,ea -lSb de 00 01 05.dw I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ""paan'nu°gjrrMi,,,, ```��O`PD F E S S 1OZ 'Ilz Jon J. BovenkampQ r.• , 4:0 C' o•. .......•• • Fc sign re)(date) = w JON J. ; Z BOVENKAMP m Discipline: Machical Engineer, Iowa License No. 15551 3 15551 ; . D c License expires December 31, 2016. �'�,,, *•'•.,•••� ••,,.•' 'u ��� Pages or sheets covered by this seal: As designated by JJB on Table of Contents I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described `\`"tpppEllnElprryp���� charge. I aw was m dulyared bregi registered architect me or under rect u derthelsion laws of stateole f`��.G14 A4,& Iowa. • .) p� g Chad Chamberlin =` EJ rc / yn /p 07267 =_ Signature W` (���fi _ }j'V` Pages of o nth sheets covered by this seal: As designated by CMC on Table ��0 r, C- Date Issued:EIDA uI11nRG""`� N O �n ti rn �r � a m oro y� � — y` o w Stanley Consultants INC A S, airy Gn, Ca ,,V Ergi,eemg, Emmmrenul eM Con;vuctin Sorin-YMIMAh 0001 OS.tloC 26710.01.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS ms1869 SECTION 00 01 10 -Page 1 BELT FILTER PRESS AND PUMP REPLACEMENTS WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA CITY. IOWA SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP Resp. Charge Section Title Page DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS JMB 01 1100 Summary of Work JMB 01 1500 Work Sequence JMB 01 2000 Price and Payment Procedures Request for Information (RFI) Form JMB 01 2513 Product Substitutions Procedures Product Substitution Request Form JMB 01 3000 Administrative Requirements JMB 01 3300 Submittal Procedures Submittal Transmittal Form JMB 01 4000 Quality Requirements JMB 01 4333 Manufacturer's Field Services ALB 01 4533 Code Required Special Inspection and Procedures Statement of Special Inspections and Tests JMB 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls JMB 01 6000 Product Requirements JMB 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements JMB 01 7319 Installation Requirements JMB 01 7823 Operating and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Manual Cover Diagram FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS JMB 0241 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE ALB 03 00 10 Concrete Work DIVISION 05 METALS ALB 05 50 00 DIVISION 08 OPENINGS CMC 08 30 00 CMC 0841 13 CMC 08 80 00 DIVISION 09 FINISHES JMB 09 96 00 Metal Fabrications Specialty Doors and Frames Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts Glazing High Performance Coatings DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS CMC 1221 00 Window Blinds N o_ O W C') t/7 n -C ch � G'Cm a 7J = D W 0 1 to 1 to 1 to 1 1 to 1 1 to 1 to 1 1 m 1 ie� 1 (S� 1 1>� 1 to 1 to 1 to 1 5 2 5 4 6 4 5 3 4 1 to 9 1 to 10 1 to 5 1 to 3 1 to 3 1 to 2 1 to 10 1 to 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 26710.01.00 Page 2 -SECTION 00 01 10 ms1869 Resp. Charge Section Title Pace FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 20 FACILITY SERVICES JJB 20 05 00 Common Work Results for Facility Services Systems 1 to JJB 20 05 13 Common Work Results for Facility Services Piping 1 to 1 to Pipe Class Specifications 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 1 ACS6 - Type E or S Carbon Steel, ASME Class 125 JJB 23 34 00 HVAC Fans ACU1 — Hard Drawn Copper, ASME Class 125 to v ADI1 — Ductile Iron ANSI/AWWA C1 51/A21.51 32 11 23 SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP APE5 — PEX Tubing, 150 psi at 73°F o to JMB JMB 32 13 13 32 16 23 ASS3 — CCST w/PE Jacket 5 psig at 150°F �� JJB 20 05 29 Supports and Anchors for Facility Services Piping and Equipment 1 to JJB 20 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 1 to M-1008 iC-) DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING JJB 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 1 to JJB 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 1 to JJB 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 1 to JJB 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 1 to DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL LEI 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 1 to LEI 2¢95 03 Small and Medium 3 -Phase Motors 1 to LEI W05 33 Above -Grade Raceway 1 to LEI 26 29 23' Low -Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 1 to r DIVISIOW32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS v JMB 32 11 23 SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK JMB 31 22 18 Finish Grading 1 to ALB 31 23 16-16 Structural Excavation and Backfill 1 to C1:, DIVISIOW32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS JMB 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses- j o to JMB JMB 32 13 13 32 16 23 Concrete Paving Sidewalks �� ri r 1 1 t JMB 329219 Seeding n� v 149— iC-) cn PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP -<rr DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION m SAW 40 05 00 Common Work Results for Process Systems y 1 to JJB 40 23 36 Wastewater Process Piping System © 1 to LEI 4041 13 Process Pipe Electrical Heat Tracing 1 to SAW 40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems 1 to SAW 40 94 43-13 Input/Output Listing Layout 1 to SAW 40 94 43-13 Input/Output Listing 1 to SAW 40 96 15 Control System Operational Description 1 to SAW 40 96 45 Graphic Screen Requirements 1 DIVISION 43 PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMEN JMB 4321 53 Sludge Pumps 1 to 27 6 24 8 6 2 5 4 26710.01.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS ms1869 SECTION 00 01 10 - Page 3 Resp. Charge Section Title Page DIVISION 44 POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT JMB 4431 16 Activated Carbon Adsorption Odor Control Equipment 1 to 7 DIVISION 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT JMB 46 33 46 Progressive Cavity Polymer Pumps 1 to 4 JMB 46 76 21 Belt Filter Presses 1 to 15 Form A. Unit Responsibility Certification Form 1 Form B. Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form 1 Form C. Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form 1 N O_ r C? �-� C r -+n rn v w rl N �� Q' r,4 Isar M Q C) W 26710.01.00 SUMMARY OF WORK ms1869 SECTION 01 11 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Agreement comprises general construction including demolition of three existing belt filter presses, procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated piping, replacement of four polymer pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; exhaust ducting and odor control system, and miscellaneous modifications and improvements. Work includes control system modifications and integration. 1.02 AGREEMENT A. Construct Work under single lump sum Agreement. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. Work on Project which will be executed prior to start of Work of this Agreement, and which is excluded from this Agreement, as follows: None. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's use of premises during construction period; cdordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. F B. See Section 01 15 00 for additional work sequence requirements. 1.05 ~ CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Confine construction activities to within plant property boundaries. Do not trespass on private property. B. Limit Contractor's use of premises for Work and for storage, to allow for: 1. Work by other contractors. gnrri 2. Owner occupancy. 3>-r 'o 3. Public access. to r —t h C. Existing facilities: '{trTl n' M 1. Wastewater treatment plant will be in operation throughout execution of this acC -he and conduct work so as to minimize interference with plant operation and muni:€. Construction activity, insofar as practicable, shall not interfere with operatiorrr���f plant= 2. Provide temporary piping, pumping, power, and control facilities as required to maintffn continuous plant operation and complete treatment except as otherwise specified. Integrity of existing plant utilities shall be maintained by Contractor at all times. Maintain road access for plant operations vehicles to all treatment process units, or provide alternate temporary road access to all treatment process units, or provide alternate temporary road access at no additional cost to City, at all times. 3. It is assumed that existing facilities outside scope of this contract are in good repair. Damage or defects noticed by Contractor shall be reported to Owner immediately and prior to start of any work. Damage caused by Contractor shall be repaired and/or replaced to its original condition as determined by Owner, at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Take special precautions to protect operating mechanical equipment, power supply and distribution equipment, and instrumentation equipment from exposure to weather, concrete dust, debris, dirt, and water during construction period. D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of items under this Agreement, stored on Site. SUMMARY OF WORK 26710.01.00 Page 2 -SECTION 01 11 00 ms1869 E. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or Work areas needed for operations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. Confine construction equipment, storage of materials and equipment and operations of workers to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or requirements of Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber premises with construction equipment or other material or equipment. B. If it is necessary for Contractor to move its equipment, materials, or materials included in work to allow for continuous operation of plant, Contractor shall do so promptly and as directed by Owner. C. Coordinate work of various sections of the specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. D. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. i Zr f=UrPI I CN A. Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction for conduct of its normal operations. Cooperate with Owner's Representative in all construction operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner usage. B. Maintain existing utility services in substantially continuous operation during construct, making and removing temporary connections as necessary. o —' n ryn C. Perform Work hazardous to operation of existing wastewater treatment plant, *ich Fill rer= interruption of service at times specifically approved by Owner. �nCArnr PART PRODUCTS jrn _ NOT USED C� D N i aD PART 3 tcgXECUTION V i-.. • iNOT�ISE[i�"n }: END OF SECTION C 2 26710 01 00 WORK SEQUENCE ms1869 SECTION 01 15 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 101 CONTINUITY OF PLANT OPERATIONS A. Existing wastewater treatment plant will continuously receive and treat wastewater to meet effluent discharge requirements; these functions shall not be interrupted except as specified herein. Coordinate work to minimize interference with normal operation of plant equipment and processes. B. Contractor shall not operate Owner's equipment. Owner will open and close valves and gates and take units off line to assist in Contractor's approved construction sequence plan. Contractor shall keep Owner fully apprised of any changes in construction schedules. C. Bypassing: 1. Bypassing untreated or partially treated wastewater and sludges to surface waters or drainage courses is prohibited. 2. If bypassing caused by Contractor, its employees, or Subcontractors occurs, Owner will be entitled to take immediate corrective action without notice to Contractor. 3. Contractor shall bear costs resulting directly or indirectly from bypassing caused by actions of Contractor, its employees, or Subcontractors, such as penalties, legal fees, expenses to stop bypass, and remedial actions. D. Notify Owner at least one week before previously scheduled outage occurs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Detailed outage schedule of necessary removal from service for each affected tank, pipeline, channel, electrical/instrumentation circuit, equipment component, structure, and process. Include plant shutdown and outage schedule in construction schedule specified in Section 01 33 00. v B. Describe length of time for each outage. C. Describe procedures, temporary plant, and equipment necessary to maintain treatment process operations. 1.03 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES A. Construction schedule prepared as specified in Section 01 33 00 shall recognize conr is to sequence of construction activities specified herein. Approaches described herein and wn on Construction Sequencing drawings are actions Contractor may choose to folio ee}}gtent "Ln constraints. Contractor may propose alternate methods to achieve similar res u -W rn 1 1. Definitions: c'r< t a. Dry weather periods shall, in general, be months with low precipitation,; c Ily&m A igust through February. Actual dry weather periods shall be as determined bneasedM weather, precipitation, flows entering plant, and plant operation require 3 �-�1' b. Wet weather periods shall be any time period which is not within definew®her peugas. c. Typical low flow period is from 12:00 a.m. to 6:00 a.m. ;• o d. Minor Shutdown: Any shutdown requiring less than 4 hours. r e. Major Shutdown: Any shutdown other than a minor shutdown. 2. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, bulkheads, pumps, temporary piping, power and appurtenances necessary to facilitate shutdowns and temporary flow re-routing to perform the Work. 3. Temporary pumping systems shall consist of multiple pumps, 2 minimum, capable of pumping anticipated flows in combination. a. Pumping system shall be configured for automatic. b. Contractor shall operate and maintain temporary pumping systems and equipment during shutdowns. 4. Plant shutdown: Partial or complete liquid treatment plant shut down not allowed. 5. Process Shutdowns. WORK SEQUENCE 26710 01 00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 15 00 ms1869 a. Shutdown of individual processes or systems may be required for limited number of construction activities; notify plant superintendent at least one week prior to scheduled shutdown. b. Provide 14 days advance notice to Owner of need for a minor shutdown. c. Provide 30 days advance notice to Owner of need for a major shutdown. d. Contractor shall schedule a shutdown coordination meeting with Owner one week prior to each shutdown. e. Do not proceed with work affecting a facility's operation without obtaining Owner advance approval of need for, and duration of, such work. The Owner will endeavor to grant Contractor requests where possible. However, because Owner's primary responsibility is to treat wastewater, and plant will continuously receive wastewater and process sludges, requested timing may not be possible. f. Any and all process shutdowns shall require a shutdown plan, including detailed schedule, backup tools and equipment, personnel involved, contingency plan, and any procedures involved in restarting process or facility. Owner's approval of Shutdown Plan is required prior to any shutdowns. g. Shutdowns will be allowed, but shall only be allowed at times when impact to treatment or processing is minimized such as non-wet weather periods or at times when processes do not need to be operational. h. Minimize number of shutdowns; perform activities requiring shutdown at same time. i. Maximum duration of shutdown is dependent on process being shut down and plant operational conditions. 6. BFP Feed Pumps: a. Constraint: 1) One feed pump shall be operational. 2) Pumping to at least one belt filter press shall be maintained. b. Approach: Retrofit one or two pumps, piping, and new local electrical and contrl &onnections at a time. Put new units in operation prior to demolition of next old units— � 7. Polymer Feed Pumps: a. Constraint: 1) One feed shall be operational. r pump �� 2) Pumping to at least one belt filter press shall be maintained.Ln �n b. Approach: Retrofit one or two pumps, piping, and new local electrical and e ml Tnec"" at a time. Put new units in operation prior to demolition of next old units. - a 8. Belt Filter Presses (BFPs): a. Constraint: N 1) Maintain one unit operational. `a 2) Demolition of two existing units cannot be performed until one unit is replaced with new c and new unit is fully operational. �— 3) Maintain room air supply and exhaust at all times. rN b. Approach: «.. 1) Install gravel access at location of new drive. Provide plating as needed for the work. tU 2) Remove one or both north window sets from the BFP room. m 3) Install new door and/or provide temporary opening enclosure(s) to maintain room and keep out precipitation. !E 4) Remove air supply duct for door opening clearance during BFP replacement activities. 4) 5) Demolish and replace one existing BFP. 0 a) Choice for which unit to demolish first is at contractor's option unless an existing press is having operational problems whereas Owner will exercise its right to select the problematic unit to be replaced first. b) Modify floor for new machine. c) Demolish sludge, effluent water, polymer, electrical, and controls for first unit. Maintain services to the other two BFPs. d) Install new BFP. e) Install new sludge, effluent water, polymer, electrical and controls to first unit. f) Make unit operational and mechanically test. g) Initiate initial performance testing. 6) With Owner's authorization, proceed to demolition and replacement of two remaining BFPS with similar sequence to initial unit replacement. 26710.01.00 WORK SEQUENCE ms1869 SECTION 01 15 00 - Page 3 7) Replace roof exhaust fans in sequence that maintains at least one roof exhaust fan operational at all times. 8) Install odor control ducting and curtaining. Make odor control system operational. 9) Reinstall air supply duct and restore other systems impacted by BFP replacement. 10) Install coil doors/window sets. 11) Leave gravel in place or alternately install new driveway paving if Alternate 1 selected. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION G7 A4 EO T •1 C -1-<I ::i'2M r m o V, 26710.01.00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 01 20 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Allowance schedule: 1. Section 46 76 21 -Belt Filter Presses: Include stipulated sum of $742,200 for purchase, delivery, and start-up of equipment specified. B. Costs included in cash allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; shop drawings, delivery to site and applicable taxes, manufacturer's services. C. Costs not included in cash allowances but included in contract price: Product handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing; assistance in testing and adjustment. D. Contractor responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 2. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. .Z9 1.02 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES O -n r A. Include in Contract, a stipulated price of $20,000 for use upon Owner's instructSQ -,a m+ 7774n B. Contractor's costs for delivery, installation, labor, insurance, CA bonding? products, ry, payroll, -149i , equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authi g ex6ndit e f funds from this Contingency Allowance. ' .r Y N C. Funds will be drawn from Contingency Allowance only by Change Order authorized by EQner. D. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on EJCDC C-620 - Contractor's Application for Payment. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. D. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit 3 copies of each application on EJCDC C-620 - Contractor's Application for Payment or Contractor's electronic media driven form. B. Content and format: Use Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 0120 00 ms1869 D. Payment period: Submit at intervals stipulated in Agreement. E. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01 33 00. Substantiating data: When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include following with application: 1. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 2. Record documents as specified in Section 01 70 00, for review by Owner which will be returned to Contractor. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 4. Construction progress schedules, revised and current. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to Work. B. Engineer will advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on Engineer's Instruction to Contractor (ITC) Form. C. Errgineer may issue a proposal request which includes detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, change in Contract Time for executing change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 10 days. D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a change authorization request to Engineer, describing proposed change and its full effect on Work. Include a statement describing reason for change, and effect on Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement - describing effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00. E. Stipulated price Change Order: Based on proposal request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's change authorization request as approved by Engineer. F. Time and material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of Contract. Engineer will determine change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract Documents. No tiff and material work will be performed without prior written authorization by Engineer. rn G. Maintain detailed records of work done on time and material basis. Provide full i ati&#equi for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in WoIS.< to r __K') H. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow ( atieg of rn quotation.= Q 01310K _ I. Change Order Forms: Engineer's Change Order Form. y Xr J. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract. K. Correlation of Contractor submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Price. 2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by change, and resubmit. 3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 26710.01.00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 0120 00 - Page 3 1.06 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Questions regarding conflicts or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted by Contractor on attached Request for Information (RFI) form. 1.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in opinion of Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace Work, Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Authority of Engineer to assess defect and identify payment adjustment, is final. D. Nonpayment for rejected products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. O'ns� 1.08 ALTERNATES 4 Cn A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at (�J s ojon. rn Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. r n B. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to complet ork, izuding changes under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in Agreement een C&ner and Contractor. C. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1 — New driveway to the new BFP room coil doors: Work in this alternate consists of removing 6 inches of aggregate base (leaving 6 inches of aggregate base in place, installation of 6 inches of Portland cement concrete paving per specifications and as detailed on reference C drawing C3 and all associated incidental work. c 2. Alternate No. 2 — New storefront in lieu of base bid coil door. Work in this alternate consists of i installing new storefront with windows in west opening instead of coil door per specifications 08 41 13 and 08 80 00. Mullion location and spacing to match existing storefront per reference r drawings A -S5 (North Elevation), AS -8 (Details K/L/M) and all associated incidental work 3. Alternate No. 3 - Stainless Steel Overhead Door Work includes using Type 6F, 22 -gage (0.90 �+ mm), minimum, stainless steel for curtain slats and 22 -gage (0.80mm) stainless steel for back cover slats for the insulated rolling doors (Section 08 30 00). PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED I��I�Zi71��3ij�[eP►I C REQUEST FOR INFORMATION RFI No.: Stanley Consultants INC Contract No. Date: and Name: Contractor: Owner: Engineer: Subject: Drawing Reference: Spec Section: Information Required (Be Specific): Contractor Representative Date Reply: Engineer Representative Date N WHICH CHANGES THE CONTRACT PRICE OR TIME, YOU MUST SUBMIT A PROPOSAL OR A C! r 26710.01.00 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 0125 13 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. For period of 30 days after effective date of Agreement, Engineer will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. After end of that period, requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. B. Submit 3 copies of request for substitution for consideration using attached Product Substitution Request Form. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutions with requirements stated in Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. Amount Many net change to Contract Price. o —r 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. =n rNn 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources, or replacement riiitewals70 ,) - C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: –+C-) CA 1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings. _< mm. an 2. They are requested directly by Subcontractor or supplier. ;� 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. c� D tV D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written notification from EngineWof Owner's acceptance. E. Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that: 1. It has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. It will provide same warranties or Bonds for substitution as for product specified or as required by Owner. 3. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and will make such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. It waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under its Agreement, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 6. It will reimburse Owner for charges of Engineer or Engineer's consultants for evaluating any proposed substitute, whether proposed substitute is accepted or rejected. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 0125 13 ms1869 1.03 ENGINEER DUTIES A. Review Contractors requests for substitution with reasonable promptness and advise Owner. B. Notify Contractor in writing of Owner's decision to accept or reject requested substitution. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION r rn 0 a - r r� C. e�. r rn 0 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM To: Project: Specified Item: Section Page Paragraph The undersigned request consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION Description Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design o tailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. j pO N 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the constructt@R3ch4ole, or specified warranty requirements. ^� 7-4 Ln 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. an �r-M The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed subtft *n %Fe equivalent or superior to the specified item. %D Submitted by: Signature Firm Address . Date For use by Engineer/Architect ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as noted ❑ Not Approved ❑ Received too late By Date Telephone Remarks Attachments 26710 01.00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 30 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. G. Coordinate temporary facilities required to maintain continuity of treatment facility operations during construction. 1.026 PROJECT SITE ADMINISTRATION A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out Work and perform construction as required by Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at site. B. Except in connection with safety or protection of persons or Work or property at site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in Contract Documents, all Work at site shall be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor shall not permit overtime work or performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent given after prior written notice to Engineer. *� � J C. Incompetent or incorrigible employees shall be dismissed from Work by Contr, representative when requested by Engineer, and such persons shall not again to Work without written consent of Engineer. D. Workmanship shall be of best quality. 1.03 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Employ a Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Iowa. r B. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify Engineer of any discrepancies discovered. C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings. D. Verify set -backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 0130 00 ms1869 E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. F. Submit a copy of site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents. G. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Representatives of Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents. B. Preconstruction meeting: 1. Owner's Resident Project Representative will schedule a meeting after 15 days after Notice to proceed 2. Location: Wastewater treatment plant or other location convenient for all parties, designated by Owner. 3. Attendance: a. Owner's representative. b. Engineer and its professional consultants. c. Resident Project Representative. d. Contractor's superintendent. e. Major Subcontractors. f. Major suppliers. 2j g. Others as appropriate. 4. Agenda: C1 a. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. b. Distribution of Contract Documents. (' c. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of valute-send 4gre�s... schedule. d. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the1Er%eeAt e. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutionsbpplicalrpns for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout proceores. N f. Scheduling. g. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. h. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. i. Temporary facilities j. Security and housekeeping procedures. k. Procedures for testing. I. Procedures for maintaining record documents. m. Requirements for start-up of equipment. n. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 5. Owner's Resident Project Representative will prepare meeting notes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Progress meetings: 1. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at periodic maximum intervals. 2. Owner's Resident Project Representative will hold called meetings as required by progress of Work. 3. Location of meetings: Project field office of Owner. 4. Owner's Resident Project Representative r will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. 5. Attendance: a. Engineer, and its professional consultants as needed. b. Contractor and Subcontractors as appropriate to agenda. c. Suppliers as appropriate to agenda. 26710.01.00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS mall 869 SECTION 01 30 00 - Page 3 d. Others. 6. Suggested agenda: a. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. b. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. c. Field observations, problems, conflicts. d. Problems which impede construction schedule. e. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. g. Revisions to construction schedule. h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding Work period. i. Coordination of schedules. j. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. k. Maintenance of quality standards. I. Pending changes and substitutions. m. Review proposed changes for: 1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. 2) Effect on other contracts of Project. 3) Other business. 7. Owner's Resident Project Representative will prepare meeting notes and distribute copies within 5 days after meeting to participants, with copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. D. Preingtallation meeting: 1. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at Site prior r td commencing work of the section. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of the specific section. 3. Notify Owner's Resident Project Representative 4 days in advance of meeting date. 4. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: a. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. b. Review coordination with related work. 5 Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantitiQtsizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box. go rn C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6'(2 m) cord and plug including grounding 3br ectal�or cc�tion to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual speciffaetf6n Wionsr =in rn PART EXECUTION =gym S 3.01 SPECIAL PROCEDURES �� 0 � o A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new products for patchgg and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion. D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 01 30 00 ms1869 E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to renewed condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. K. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Engineer for review. L. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. M. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted imperfections. N. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. q\I1Z417M9x01IMZI discolor4rshowina other v --� it IM" nc^_ Y � p . r.. to rr? ac IT rr ti discolor4rshowina other a A --� it Y � 26710.01.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 01 33 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit electronically submittals required by Specification Sections. Contact Engineer as listed below for submittal instructions. An FTP/FTA site or direct posting site will be provided after award to post submittals and to receive return submittals: Mr. Jay M. Brady Email: bradyjay@stanleygroup.com Stanley Consultants, Inc. Stanley Building 225 Iowa Avenue Muscatine, Iowa 52761-3764 Office Phone: 563-264-6322 B. Engineer will make internal distribution to the Owner and other interested parties. C. Submittals shall be in English language. 4-' L. D. L.Weights, measures, and units shall be English units. E. , Symbols and drawings shall conform to ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/CSA Z99. If22 ° CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES l A.. Review submittals prior to submission. Submittals not reviewed and coordinated by Contractor are subject to being returned without review to Contractor. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements and dimensional information. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance to Specifications. C. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. r� D. Notify Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in submittal re"remeptOf Contract Documents. Any such deviations permitted by Engineer will require rr atl;s of Cact Documents. { r �n (-n E. Provide space on Shop Drawings for Contractor and Engineer stamps. =frn y M = F. When Shop Drawings are revised for resubmission, identify all changes made Q179 pr=ous 0 submission. 30. C A— G. G. Submittals containing language imposing duties on others (such as verification of dimensions or supply of related information) inconsistent with contract language shall be null and void. H. Submittals shall not be used as media for inquiries for information or for verification of information that must be supplied by others to Contractor. Inquiries or verification of information shall be made by separate Contractor submittal using Request for Information (RFI) process. I. Begin no fabrication or Work which requires submittal review until return of submittals by Engineer with stamp, as either "Reviewed", 'Reviewed as Noted", or "Reviewed as Noted -Resubmit." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 33 00 ms1869 J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals that carry Engineer stamp as either "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 1.03 ENGINEER DUTIES A. Review required submittals with reasonable promptness and in accord with schedule, only for general conformance to design concept of Project and compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or program incident thereto. Review of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of assembly in which item functions. Contractor is solely responsible for coordination and accuracy of dimensional information on shop drawings. Engineer's shop drawing review and comments on dimensional information shall not relieve Contractors responsibility for dimensional information. B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal, or review of submittal. Engineer's action on submittals is classified as follows: 1. Reviewed: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to be in conformance to design concept of Project and Contract Documents. Contractor may proceed with fabrication of work in submittal. 2. Reviewed As Noted: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to be in conformancIv design concept of Project and Contract Documents, except as noted by reviewer. Coatractomay proceed with fabrication of work in submittal with modifications and correctioP ,@S inati„eted byn reviewer. > o 3. Reviewed As Noted -Resubmit: Submittal has been reviewed and appears to.,4)p4p cor{ormageMo design concept of Project and Contract Documents, except as noted by revidWW-)CofiAdctor9ma proceed with fabrication of work in submittal with modifications and correctioFK ind ted tr reviewer. Contractor shall make any corrections indicated by reviewer and resq it f0wevie 4. Resubmit: Submittal has been reviewed and appears not to be in conformance~ todeE n con e of Project or with Contract Documents. Contractor shall not proceed with fabpeation pf_+✓ork in submittal, but instead shall make any corrections required by reviewer and resubmit fosxeview. 5. Returned without Review: Submittal is being returned without having been reviewed because: 1) not required by Contract Documents; 2) grossly incomplete; 3) indicates no attempt at conformance to Contract Documents; 4) cannot be reproduced; 5) lacks Contractors completed approval stamp; or 6) lacks design professional's seal when required by law or Contract Documents. If submittal is required by Contract Documents, Contractor shall not proceed with Work as detailed in submittal, but instead shall correct defects and resubmit for review. �. For Information Only: Submittal has not been reviewed but is being retained for informational purposes only. 7. Void: Submittal is voided because it is no longer required or has been superseded by another submittal. t C. €2`eturn one electronic copy of submittals to Contractor. Contractor shall make additional distribution M as required. D. Engineer Review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called Engineer's attention to such variation at time of submission, and Engineer has given written concurrence pursuant to Contract Documents to specific variation, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer or other reviewer relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in submittals. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance to information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with article "Submittal Procedures" and for record documents purposes as described in Section 0170 00. B. Designate in construction schedule, or in separate coordinated submittal schedule, dates for submission and dates that reviewed submittals will be needed. 26710.01.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 01 33 00 - Page 3 C. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in Work or in work of other contractors. D. Present in clear and thorough manner, complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and like information to enable review of information as required. E. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Drawings. F. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. G. Equipment which is identified on Contract Documents with tag number or name shall be identified on Shop Drawing with same tag. H. Schedule submittals to expedite Project. Coordinate submission of related items. I. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days to complete review process. J. Oentify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be Detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. ri K. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in electronic format. 1. Submit electronic copy to Engineer at project site, or post in FTP site specific instructions will be provided after award. `e 2. Submittal Transmittal form (see pdf attached) shall be provided in Word format for each submittal. MSWord template will be provided after award. 3. Text documents shall be submitted in .pdf format except for the shop drawing Transmittal Form. 4. Drawings shall be submitted in .pdf or .tif format. 5. Electronic submittal shall be suitable for reproduction in black and white. 6. Samples may be submitted to Engineer at address given above. L. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of: a. Contractor. b. Supplier. c. Manufacturer. 5. Identification of product, with Specification section number and article number. o 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or materials. 0,c� 8. cN Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. y ro ...� 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. �n to 11. An 8" x 3" blank space for Contractor and reviewer stamps. —< A M 12. Indication of Contractor's approval, initialed or signed, with wording subst y amollovf" "Contractor represents to Owner and Engineer that Contractor hafeitherE V determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria,a materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, or assumes full responsibility for doing so and has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents." 13. If Contract Documents include performance specifications stating required results which can be verified as meeting stipulated criteria, so that further design by Contractor prior to fabrication is necessary, Submittal depicting such design must be prepared under seal of professional engineer SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 01 33 00 ms1869 registered licensed in appropriate Iowa and Submittal shall be signed and sealed in accordance with applicable regulations and with following certification statement: "I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision, that I am a duly registered licensed professional engineer under laws of state of Iowa and I accept responsibility for adequacy of this document to meet criteria stipulated in Contract Documents." M. Product Data: 1. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. 2. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. N. Design data: 1. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 2. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. O. Data sheets: na 1. Data sheets may require information not known until Contractor's engineerjng is co" leta. Furnish estimated values based on good engineering judgment. Estimated3Zpj.Ves II be identified by placement of "(est.)" next to value. 2. Data Sheets shall be updated and resubmitted by Contractor once final val s a kgown. r 3. Do not leave items blank or labeled "To Be Determined" or "Later." c Ln 4. Do not submit manufacturer Product Data instead of completed data sheets_ p m s P. Test reports: 1. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. y tV 2. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with%&ormation given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Q. Certificates: 1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor. 2. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to reviewer. R. Manufacturer's instructions: 1.` --When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, -storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. 2. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. S. Manufacturer's field reports: 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation for information. 2. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. T. Erection drawings: 1. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Engineer or Owner. 26710.01.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 0133 00 - Page 5 Samples: 1. Samples for selection as specified in product sections: a. Submit for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. b. Submit samples of finishes in colors selected, textures, and patterns for selection. 2. Submit to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 3. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. 4. Submit number specified in individual Specification Sections; 1 of which will be retained by Engineer. 5. Reviewed Samples which may be used in Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 6. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification section. 7. Field Samples and mock-ups: a. Erect at Project Site, at location acceptable to Engineer. b. Size or area: That specified in respective Specification Section. c. Fabricate each Sample and mock-up complete and finished. d. Remove mock-ups upon acceptance of Work or when acceptable to Engineer. V. Proposed products list: c-1. Within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement, submit list of major products proposed `- to Engineer for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. W. Operations and maintenance manuals: 1. Designate in construction schedule, or in separate coordinated schedule, dates for submission ` and dates that reviewed operations and maintenance manuals will be needed. 2. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be presented in clear and thorough manner, complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and like information to enable reviewer to review information as required. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Drawings. 1.05 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Engineer and resubmit until stamped as either 'Reviewed,""Reviewed as Noted," or "For Information Only." B. Text and depictions changed on Submittal shall be back -circled (clouded). C. Engineer will assume that portions of Submittal not back -circled have not been changpa&by Contractor from previous submission. D. Indicate revision number and date in document revision block. c -)—G t r+ E. Excessive resubmittals beyond an initial submittal and one re -submittal maykchgged 1trough Owner to Contractor for additional engineering review and processing effort �ourrate30. s 1.06 DISTRIBUTION $7c = 0 p. A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings which carry Engineer stamp as either "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" to: 1. Job site file. 2. Record Documents file. 3. Other affected contractors. 4. Subcontractors. 5. Supplier or fabricator. B. Distribute Samples which carry Engineer stamp as either "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" as directed by Engineer. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 26710 01 00 Page 6 - SECTION 01 33 00 ms1869 1.07 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION A. Construction progress schedules: Submit initial schedules to Engineer within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. After review, resubmit required revised data within 10 days. B. Form of schedules: 1. Prepare schedules in form of horizontal bar chart. a. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. b. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. c. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. d. Minimum sheet size: 11 x 17. 2. Format of listings: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 3. Format of listings: Chronological order of start of each item of Work. 4. Identification of listings: By major Specification Section numbers. C. Construction progress schedule shall show: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity, with Contract Price breakdown at each stage. 2. Dates for beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction specifically listing: a. Site clearing. b. Site utilities. c. Foundation Work. d. Structural framing. CD y e. Subcontractor Work. f. Equipment installations. g. Finishes. h. Installation and use of temporary facilities required to maintain continuitytmeo plarm of��e'd operations. S i. Scheduled short term outages of treatment processes, functions, or utilitieRmayimpa� portions of the treatment plant operations. 3. Projected percentage of completion for each item, as of first day of each month. D. Submittal schedule shall show dates for Contractor's submittals. E. Prepare and submit subschedules for each separate stage of Work specified in Section 01 11 00. F. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of prime schedules. G. Progress revisions: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. 2. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: a. Major changes in scope. b. Activities modified since previous submission. rT+ c. Revised projections of progress and completion. d. Other identifiable changes. 3. Provide narrative report as needed to define: M a. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule. b. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. j c. Effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. H. Distribution copies of reviewed schedules to: 1. Job site file. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Other concerned parties. I. Instruct recipients to report promptly to Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by projects shown in schedules. 26710.01.00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 01 33 00 - Page 7 1.08 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION A. Provide photographs of Site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by photographer acceptable to Engineer. B. Each month submit photographs C. Deliver digital files to Owner with Project Record Documents. Catalog and index in chronological sequence; provide typed table of contents. 1.09 SAFETY PROCEDURES MANUAL A. Prepare and submit to Owner safety procedures manual defining Contractor's safety program for work on site. Manual shall include: 1. Safety responsibilities of Contractor's personnel. 2. Description of Contractors safety program. 3. Requirements of use of personal protective equipment. ;4. General safety-related rules of conduct. :5. Fire prevention measures. '6. Accident reporting procedures. 1 7. Procedures for hot work (welding, cutting, etc.), overhead work, and work in enclosed, confined spaces (tank, boiler, etc.). Reference 29 CFR Part 1910. c 111`0 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM PROCEDURES A. Submittals shall be accompanied by completed copies of Submittal Transmittal form, bound herein. An electronic version of transmittal form is available and may be obtained from Engineer. Reproduce additional copies required. B. Submit 2 copies of transmittal form for initial submittals and resubmittals. Sequentially number transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Prior to submittal, complete information under heading "Contractor's Transmittal." D. Engineer will complete information under "Reviewer's Action." E. Do not include submittals for more than one section of Specifications on Submittal Tlrsmittal form. J F. Identify project title, location, and number and contract title and number. h rr — y, � -v G. Identify preparer name and, submittal number, including preparer's submittal c9ui3jon &nbe –40 rt7 H. A brief description under "Title" should clearly identify specific application of eg16 en* mate` r+a� covered by Submittal, utilizing where possible same title used in Drawings an ific:oons.lJ I. Identify Specification Section number. T' CA J. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Date Received Date Distributed SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Transmittal No. Project Title Project Location Project No. Contract Title Contract No. CONTRACTOR'S TRANSMITTAL ENGINEER'S/ARCHITECT'S ACTION Status Abbreviations: R - Reviewed RS — Resubmit RN - Reviewed as Noted RET - Returned Without Review RNR — Reviewed as Noted Resubmit FIO - For Information Only V - Void Preparer Preparer Submittal No. Rev. No. Title Section No. Submittal No Status Distribution No. Cont RPR Own Des Contractor Remarks Address Na3 A11301 6Z :l i Nb S- d3S LIO By Date By Signature above, the Contractor shall certify that they have reviewed the submittal and that they ') cl% t applicable specification sections and contract drawings. Action of any kind on submittal by Enginee ct relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, correctness of details, or conformance to the contract Engineer/Architect Remarks �_ By Stanley Consultants y ri,..brw>w Date 26710 01 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 0140 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. ,Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, i vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not C permit tolerances to accumulate. B. c Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.03 BUILDING CODES AND PERMITS A. Obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. B. Pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for prosecution of Work, which are applicable at time of opening of Bids. Pay all charges of utility service companies for connections to Work. Owner will pay all charges of such companies for capital costs related thereto. C. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, building and constructioncaRo rufo and"n regulations applicable to Work. If Contractor observes that Specifications or Dralnrta arewt varglpae therewith, give Engineer prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary change,3-Aall �adju�lEA by appropriate Modification. —t0 <m M D. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contqAl;yOu sA law , ordinances, rules, and regulations, and without such notice to Engineer, Contractcfi;0611 em— r all ants arising therefrom; however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to n1ke certrds that Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such laws, ordinances, rules, and regAtions. E. Obtain and pay for NPDES permit coverage for Project under Iowa DNR General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharges Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities." Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of permit application process including, but not limited to: 1. Prepare effective Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan in accordance with Iowa DNR requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 26710 01 00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 40 00 ms1869 2. Prepare and file complete Iowa DNR "Notice of Intent for NPDES Coverage under General Permit." 3. Prepare "Public Notice of Storm Water Discharge" and publish in 2 newspapers in accordance with Iowa DNR requirements. 4. Submit required information and direct questions to: Mr. Joe Griffin Storm Water Coordinator Iowa DNR 900 E. Grand Avenue Des Moines, Iowa 53019-0034 (515) 281-7017 1.04 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except -here a specific date is established by code. C) C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. n C —t D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, requestcatror n front the Engineer before proceeding. {rn q —n 3 --{ E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties in CongomorMbse of— Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference doerwie$*S' any reference document. �c F. Abbreviations used in Drawings and Specifications are as specified in ASME Y14.38 and IEEE 260. G. Schedule of references: 1. ACI - American Concrete Institute 2. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction 3. ANSI -American National Standards Institute 4. ASME -American Society of Mechanical Engineers 5. ASTM — International Standards Worldwide 6. AWS - American Welding Society c7. IBC - International Building Code 8. ICC - International Code Council, Inc. 9. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 10. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association ;11. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 12. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 13. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.05 WELDING CERTIFICATES A. Promptly after Notice of Award, submit to Engineer one copy, unless specified otherwise, for each person, by name, assigned to do field welding of materials installed under this Agreement. B. Show on certificates that each person has passed tests specified by AWS. C. Submit certificates prior to execution of any welding. Certificates not required for nonstructural tack welding. 26710.01.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 0140 00 - Page 3 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of a firm to perform testing and inspection. B. The testing firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the Engineer. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in location in which Project is located. 2. Laboratory staff: Maintain a full time specialist on staff to review services. 3. Testing equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off the project site. D. Cooperate with testing firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Engineer and testing firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with testing firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Re -testing or re -inspection required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be 'performed by the same testing firm on instructions by the Engineer. Payment for re -testing or re- inspection will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract ' Sum/Price. G. Agency responsibilities: i 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 9. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meeting. H. Agency reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Engin and t=ontractor. When requested by Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. Include the]lbwinJq `n 1. Date issued.Sa= i -o ..� 2. Project title and number. c>—C cis 3. Name of inspector. C� rn 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. m 5. Identification of product and specifications section. _ 6. Location in the Project. - 7. Type of inspection or test. 1' o 8. Date of test. "' 9. Results of tests. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. I. Limits on testing authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 01 40 00 ms1869 1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Refer to Section 01 33 00, paragraph "Manufacturers' Field Reports." PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequentrk. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. o =� B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of ne rk hang apf or attached. 3 . r d � �.:. cn C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sectiogs. +T7 D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the cormct kWtion� 3.02 PREPARATION zy rV A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying 'any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS A. After system or equipment necessary for operation of Work is in operating condition, Contractor shall supervise operation of equipment or system for period sufficient to assure proper functioning, and make necessary observations, investigations, and adjustment. B. Notify Engineer when Work is considered to be complete, in operating condition, and ready for inspection and tests. C. Engineer will conduct tests it deems necessary to determine if equipment or system functions properly. 26710.01.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 0140 00 - Page 5 D. If equipment or system fails to function properly, or guaranteed performance is not indicated, Contractor shall make necessary corrections, including replacement, at no cost to Owner, and after such corrections are completed, demonstrate to Engineer that equipment or system functions properly and guaranteed performance is obtainable. END OF SECTION N d ch ter' —' N rn —n D _y v C--) -< L r �r �x x- o c.jx 26710.01.00 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES ms1869 SECTION 0143 33 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SERVICE ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Manufacturer shall provide qualified Service Engineer(s), as necessary to: 1. Instruct and advise Owner and Owner's installing contractor regarding proper method for unloading, erecting, and installing equipment to ensure installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Supervise assembly of equipment. 3. Ensure that alignment and clearances of equipment are checked and adjusted to allowable tolerances. 4. Inspect completed installation to ensure apparatus is in operating condition, making such detailed checks of equipment installation as are necessary to ascertain that equipment is assembled, installed, aligned, connected, lubricated, and prepared for operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 5. Review and accept the construction of the equipment installation at the following stages: a. When equipment has been correctly installed in the manner and to the tolerances prescribed by the Manufacturer for correct performance. b. When equipment installation has been satisfactorily tested to the levels of perfo_r�nance necessary to meet the requirements of these specifications. c� c. When Owner's training has been satisfactorily completed. p -' 6. Check connections to equipment and adjust, or supervise adjustment of, coq%m an*dicati devices after equipment has been installed and connected. -'—+ -n 7. Provide Engineer with duplicate copies of final alignment and clearance meJTfiemtWs on Fr rotating or reciprocating equipment. Measurements shall clearly identify eaci4pece of equi nt. 8. Supervise preliminary operation of equipment and necessary adjustments. _ 1r -rt 9. Provide the services of factory trained instructors for the purpose of trainingi personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The iparructiorawvork, shall consist of classroom and hands-on field training. Subjects shall include the ?Bllowing�.3 a. Start-up procedures b. Shutdown procedures c. Troubleshooting d. Selection of proper polymer types and dosages (for BFPs) e. Replacement of dewatering belts (for BFPs) f. Operating adjustments for performance optimization g. Preventive maintenance h. Maintenance procedures i. Emergency procedures j. Records keeping 10. The Manufacturer shall submit a course outline, along with proposed class materials, for review by the Owner and Engineer at least 30 days prior to the training. it B. Presence of Service Engineer will in no way relieve Manufacturer of any responsibility assumed under Agreement. C. Work and abilities of Service Engineer shall be subject to review of Engineer. If Engineer determines that any Service Engineer is not properly qualified, Seller shall replace Service Engineer upon written notification by Engineer. D. Manufacturer shall provide continuity in assignment of Service Engineer to Work. In event substitution of Service Engineer is made which is not at request of Engineer, substitute's time for "familiarization" shall be at Manufacturer's expense. E. Manufacturer shall be responsible for multiple trips and associated expenses including labor necessary to fulfill Service Engineer's responsibilities during equipment installation, adjustment, checkout, testing, and training through final acceptance. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 43 33 ms1869 F. If any of Service Engineers time spent at site or if any of his trips to site are required to make corrections to equipment supplied under Agreement resulting from defective design, material or workmanship used in manufacture of equipment, such time and trips will be at Manufacturer's expense and will not be counted against number of working days or trips specified, nor will unit prices apply. G. Training Summary: 1. The following table summarizes training time expected. Item I Onsite Training Time Belt Filter Presses 32 hours BFP Feed Pum s 4 hours Polymer Pumps 4 hours Odor Control System 1 8 hours Travel time is in addition to onsite time H. Manufacturer shall provide two additional trips by qualified Service Engineer to provide up to 6 hours of onsite service per trip under its base proposal pricing. Trips shall be performed at 6 months and 12 months from final acceptance to assist owner in troubleshooting, maintenance, operational adjustments, and additional training. Owner may adjust schedule of the two trips as necessary for its needs. The followinq table summarizes follow up trips expected 11 Item Tris Onsite Time per Tri Belt Filter Presses 2 6 and 12 months 8 hours BFP Feed Pumps 1 4 hours Polymer Pumps 1 1 4 hours Odor Control System 1 1 8 hours Travel time is in addition to onsite time PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION t N P J �� Li, ...� r" a m :� Q 26710.01.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 0145 33 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. Special inspections and structural observations required by IBC 2012. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT A. Unless noted otherwise, provide and pay for materials, samples, mockups, and assemblies required for testing and inspection. Pay for shipping costs related to delivery of Work to Site. B. Special Inspector will pay for shipping costs of samples transported from Site to laboratory. C. If exploratory work is required to determine cause of defects, cost of such work shall be paid by Contractor. If work is found to be defective, in judgment of Special Inspector, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for costs incurred in this event. D. Tests as required to qualify Contractor or workers for any phase of Work, shall be paid by Contractor 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Building official: Officer or its duly authorized representative charged with administration and enforcement of adopted building code. B. Continuous: Full time observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved Sgial Inspector who is present in area where work is being performed. O —+ --c') rn C. Fabricator: Contractor who fabricates members and assemblies on premises of 'oT }acf8?s sho D. Field quality control testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for kQllat n of and for completed Work. s E. Inspection: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring observation and technical adjustmeirt. N1.0 F. Installer/applicator/erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. G. Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring special inspection by an approved Special Inspector who is present in area where work is being performed. The periodic inspection / intervals shall be at beginning of work, at times of significant work, prior to work being concealed, and �t at completion of work. r. H. Preconstruction testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. I. Product testing: Tests and inspections performed by NRTL, NVLAP, or testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. J. Special Inspector (SI): Experienced person who is educated and qualified in conducting, supervising, and evaluating tests and/or inspections. 1. Where tests or inspections are required to be performed by a certified individual, SI shall have required certifications. CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 0145 33 ms1869x 2. Where tests or inspections are required to be performed by a licensed engineer, SI shall be a licensed engineer or shall be under direct supervision of a licensed engineer experienced with type of work requiring special testing and inspection. K. Special testing and inspection services: Items required by building code as adopted by local Building Official, and other items identified which in professional judgment of Engineer, are critical to integrity of building structure. Services are required of materials, installation, fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved Contract Documents and referenced standards. L. Source quality control testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. M. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. Testing agency: Established and approved independent testing agency acceptable to Owner and Building Official and as noted below: `1. Authorized to operate in state in which project is located and experienced with requirements and testing methods specified in Statement of Special Inspection. '2. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards, or to accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.14 SPECIAL INSPECTOR(S) A. More than one Special Inspector (SI) may be required to provide varied knowledge and experience necessary to adequately test and inspect all categories of work requiring special inspection. B. Sls shall perform their duties independent from construction quality control staff employed by Contractor. SI services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with requirements of contract documents. C. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of SI(s). 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Special Inspector shall submit information to Building Official as required to get Building Official approval of Special Inspector's qualifications. Special Inspector shall submit letter to Owner documenting acceptance of qualifications by Building Official. F1 Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepared in tabular form by SDecial Inspector, to submit to Owner, Contractor and Engineer, and including following 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. �*=t 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. Cl) 5. Number of tests and inspections required. -tri 6. Time schedule or time span for tests, inspections, and submittal of reports..–<lrr 7. Requirements for obtaining samples. 0`70 8. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service. ao5 m C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 0 rn 0 Cr m 3 0 ca 26710.01.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 01 45 33 - Page 3 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of Special Inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re -inspecting. D. Submit Reports to Owner, Building Official, Contractor, and Engineer weekly. A final report of inspections documenting required special inspections and correction of discrepancies shall be submitted periodically. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Inspector acting as Owner's Representative may require testing and inspection of work at plant, before shipment. Owner reserves right to reject material not complying with Contract Documents. ro o_ B. Regulatory requirements: o r 1. Perform special inspections, tests, and structural observations in accordaniz-6:0h IChaptV17 and in accordance with requirements of this section. ' --1Q 2. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with industry stand se s reference for specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specifie Kabsence o referenced standard, tests shall be accomplished in accordance with generallyced in %—.# ;c}u, Jv standards. —_ 3. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective wdFk or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor sh it obligate Owner to accept such work. C. Qualifications: Following paragraphs establish minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 1. Installer: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Fabricator: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Engineer: Professional Engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 5. Specialists: Certain sections of Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for activities indicated. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing Work. 6. Testing agency: NRTL, an NVLAP, or independent agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. a. NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. b. NVLAP: Testing agency accredited according to NIST National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 7. Factory -Authorized Service Representative: Authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 01 45 33 ms1869x D. Conflicting requirements: 1. If compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 2. Minimum quantity or quality levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. 1.07 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Special Inspector: 1. Attend a pre -construction meeting to review scope of special testing and inspection. 2. Test or inspect work specified for conformance with approved design Drawings, Specifications, and applicable material and workmanship provisions of code. 3. Perform testing and inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. A. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. c 5. Bring discrepancies to immediate attention of Contractor for correction, then, if uncorrected after a reasonable period of time, to attention of Owner, Engineer and Building Official. 6. Submit test and inspection reports to Building Official, Contractor, Engineer, and other designated persons. 1 7. Limits of authority: Special Inspectors may not waive or alter Contract requirements, or approve P or accept any portion of Work unless specifically authorized by Owner. SIs may not assume any duties of Contractor, and they have no authority to stop or reject Work. C Y. Engineer: 1. Identify items requiring special testing and inspection specified. 2. If requested, attend a pre -construction meeting to review scope of special structural testing and inspection. 3. Review summary reports submitted by Special Inspectors. C. Contractor 1. Attend preconstruction meeting to review scope of special testing and inspection. 2. Provide SI access to approved Drawings and Specifications at job Site. 3. Review reports submitted by Sls. 4. Retain at job Site reports submitted by Sls for review by Building Official upon request. 5. Correct in a timely manner, deficiencies identified in inspection and testing reports. Now adequate time for corrective work, re -inspection, and documentation. J 6. Provide SI safe access to work requiring inspection or testing. $ rn 7. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to Work and to obtain, handleelsam, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test sampleb_< t r 8. Verify conformance of Work within specified construction tolerances. —�tn�brn 9. Costs of retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitaty ygrk thin failed to comply with Contract Documents. = 0 10. Maintain a log of tests and inspections at Site.7G D. Building Official (typical responsibilities; noted for information only): (A 1. Determine work which, in its opinion, involves unusual hazards or conditions in accordance with IBC. 2. Approve fabricators of assemblies as it deems fit. 3. Review and approve SI qualifications. 4. Review reports and recommendations submitted by Sls. 5. Review "final signed reports" submitted by Sls. Documents should be accepted and approved by building department prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 26710.01.00 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND PROCEDURES ms1869 SECTION 0145 33 - Page 5 E. Owner: 1. Establish funding to provide for cost of special testing and inspection services. 2. Provide SI with approved design Drawings and Specifications and with reviewed Shop Drawings. 1.08 NOTICE OF INSPECTIONS A. Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by Building Official, as required by building code and other local codes. B. Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by SI. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER A. Special testing and inspection, conventional testing and inspection, and periodic inspect4s by Building Official do not preclude normal field involvement and site observations 8Enginedr, noL.-Jall it relieve Contractor of any responsibility to complete work in accordance with appsAved 64wings 6i{d specifications in a timely manner. -0 3.02 TEST AND INSPECTION LOGr a -I"rn A. Prepare record of tests and inspections. Include: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. N 3. Identification of testing agency or SI conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project Site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for reference during normal working hours. 3.03 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged Work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed surfaces, as judged solely by Special Inspector. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. B. Protect work exposed by or for testing and/or inspection and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for testing and/or inspection. 3.04 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Attached Statement of Special Inspections and Tests outlines inspections and tests that will be performed by Special Inspector in accordance with IBC 2012 Chapter 17. Additional information on tests and inspections is included in referenced Specification Sections. B. Tests and inspections listed in Statement of Special Inspection and Tests are in addition to those required by Contractor's quality control program. END OF SECTION oc :!! ;,� ,_ e�� Int ,: ,. ,t As required by 2012 IBC Building Code 1704.3, Engineer has completed following Statement of Special Inspections and Tests. Completion of Statement of Special Inspections and Tests and submission to Building Official is a condition for issuance of BuildingPermit. Project Title: Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project No.: 26710 Project Address: Iowa City, IA Architect/Engineer: Stanley Consultants, Inc. Name of Person Completing this Statement: Andrea L Bickford P.E. Phone: 563-264-6600 Date: 08/03/2017 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS U O INSPECTION AND TESTING C7 IBC REFERENCED (Continuous and Periodic as I_:REFERENCE STANDARD REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Defined by IBC) 0O K SECTION U W IL CONT. = Continuous PERIOD. = Periodic QC = Quality Control QA = Quality Assurance O = Observe these items on a random basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. P = Perform these tasks for each welded joint or member. A. Structural Steel: AISC 360 1705.2.1 05 50 00 1. Inspection Tasks Prior to 05 50 00 Welding a. Welding procedure P P specifications (WPSs) -''n m availability b. Manufacturer P P y certifications for welding "'lr consumables available c. Material identification O 0 •7 m (type/grade) —: d. Welder identification O 0 Na system e. Fit -up of groove welds 0 O (including joint geometry): joint preparation, dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel), cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces), tacking (tack weld quality and location), backing type and fit if applicable) f. Configuration and finish O O of access holes g. Fit -up of fillet welds: 0 O Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root), cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces), tacking (tack weld quality and location h. Check welding equipment 0 2. Inspection Tasks During 05 50 00 Welding a. Use of qualified welders 0 O b. Control and handling of 0 O welding consumables: Packaging, Exposure control Page 1 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS O a INSPECTION AND TESTING 2 IBC REFERENCED (Continuous and Periodic as rREFERENCE STANDARD REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Defined by IBC) Q n SECTION ca a c. No welding over cracked O 0 tack welds d. Environmental conditions: O O Wind speed within limits, Precipitation and temperature e. WPS followed: Settings 0 0 on welding equipment, Travel speed, Selected welding materials, shielding gas type/flow rate, preheat applied, interpass temperature maintained (min/max), Proper position (F, V, H, Oki f. WQlding technique: 0 O interpass and final • cleaning, each pass within profile limitations, 4 Each pass meets quality requirements 3. Inspection Tasks After 05 50 00 Welding a. Welds cleaned O O b. Size, length, and location P P of welds c. Welds meet visual P P acceptance criteria: Crack prohibition, Weld/base-metal fusion, Crater cross section, Weld profiles, Weld size, Undercut Porosity d. Arc strikes P P e. k -area P P f. Backing removed and P P weld tabs removed (if required) Repair activities P P h. Document acceptance or P P rejection of welded joint n.G CYI l or member 4. Inspection Tasks Prior to ,,,� = OS Bolting a. Manufacturer's O P� -� certifications available for V, G fastener materials aA b. Fasteners marked in 0 0 accordance with ASTM requirements c. Proper fasteners selected O O for joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be excluded from shear lane Page 2 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS U O INSPECTION AND TESTING (3IBC REFERENCED (Continuous and Periodic as REFERENCE STANDARD REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Defined by IBC) 0 E SECTION U a d. Proper bolting procedure O O selected for'oint detail e. Connecting elements, O O including appropriate faying surface condition and hole preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements f. Pre -installation P O verification testing by installation personnel observed and documented for fastener assemblies and methods used gal g. Proper storage provided O O —+ for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components t 5. Inspection Tasks During -1n 05 00 Bolting r a. Fastener assemblies, of 0 O M Z v suitable condition, placed C� in all holes and washers D •• (if required) are N m positioned as required b. Joint brought to snug 0 O tight condition prior to pretensioning operation c. Fastener component not 0 O turned by wrench prevented from rotatin d. Fasteners are 0 0 pretensioned in accordance with RCSC Specification, progressing systematically from most rigid point toward free edges 6. Inspection Tasks After Bolting 05 50 00 a. Document acceptance or P P rejection of bolted connections B. Concrete Construction: 1705.3 1. Inspection of reinforcing X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 1910.4 030010 steel including placement. 2. Inspection of anchors cast in X ACI 318: 8.1.3, 21.2.8 1908.5, 1909.1 030010 concrete where allowable loads have been increased or where strength design is used. 3. Inspection of anchors post- X ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, 1909.1 03 00 10 installed in hardened concrete 21.2.8 members. 4. Verify use of required design X ACI 318: Ch. 4, 5.2-5.4 1904.2, 1910.2, 03 00 10 mix. 1910.3 Page 3 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS C-> INSPECTION AND TESTINGO IBC REFERENCED (Continuous and Periodic as F REFERENCE STANDARD REFERENCE SPECIFICATION Defined by IBC) z SECTION V W a 5. At time fresh concrete is X ASTM C 172, ASTM C 31; 1910.10 030010 sampled to fabricate ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine temperature of concrete. 6. Inspection of concrete X ACI, 318: 5.9, 5.10 1910.6, 1910.7, 030010 placement for proper 1910.8 application techniques. 7. Inspection for maintenance of X ACI, 318: 5.11 - 5.13 1910.9 030010 specified curing temperature and techniques. 8. Inspect formwork for shape, X ACI 318: 6. 1.1 030010 location and dimensions of concrete member being formed.' C. Soils: 1705.6 '( Verify materials below shallow X 31 23 16-16 foundations are adequate to . achieve design bearing oa aci Verity excavations are X 312316-16 extended to proper depth and have reached proper material 3. Perform classification and X 31 23 16-16 testing of compacted fill material 4. Verify use of proper materials, X 31 23 16-16 densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill. 5. Prior to placement of fill, X 31 23 16-16 observe subgrade, and verify site has been prepared properly. Page 4 N O 4C-) NO C-> v a �m Page 4 26710.01.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1869 SECTION 01 50 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 101 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Use Owners existing power service. B. Provide temporary electric feeders as necessary to facilitate Work. Coordinate feed location(s) with Owner. Do not disrupt Owner's use of service. C. Power service characteristics: 120 -volt, single-phase. 480 -volt, 3-phase power is available. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer. D. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required E. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. F. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location. G. Permanent convenience receptacles may be used during construction. CD rN* t H. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single ptmad bra&h cirIM for power and lighting as necessary for Work. �n C n.irn I. Provide power outlets for construction operations as required by Work. Outlets s :,,a �FI-rA and fed from a dedicated minimum 115 -volt, 20 -ampere circuit. Number of outle 8r ctffuit sha be in accordance to the NEC. Provide flexible power cords as required. Power oufts proai0ed shall be properly sized and rated to operate in tunnel ambient temperature and conditions. °D 1.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain adequate lighting for construction operations. B. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. C., Permanent building lighting may be used during construction. 1.03 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Existing facilities shall not be used. B. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50°F (10°C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in product sections. 1.04 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 50 00 ms1869 B. Use existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.05 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. Alternately, equip key points of contact with mobile telephones. 1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide potable water for workers. Do not use Owner's existing water service for drinking water. B. Owner will provide temporary water connections required for construction activities from 1.5° yard hydrant or hose bibs. 1.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide at time of project mobilization. c B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as original condition. 1.98 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS rb A. At Contractor's Option, provide weathertight office trailer with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, ventilation equipment and equipped with appropriate furniture to facilitate use and the work. B. Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30'(10 m) from existing structures in contractor ' laydown area as directed by Owner. C. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field offices or for storage. D. Environmental control, storage spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products. E. Storage areas and sheds: Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products to requirements of Section 0160 00. F. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away fro4ildings. N G. Employee residential occupancy: Not allowed on Owner's property. y`> Mo H. Maintenance and cleaning: cn r 1. Periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. f IT m 2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. Q A� — I. Removal: At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services,71 id det>6. Restore areas. C" 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS A. Construct temporary access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of a width and load bearing capacity to provide unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. B. Construct temporary bridges and culverts to span low areas and allow unimpeded drainage. 26710.01.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1869 SECTION 01 50 00 - Page 3 C. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. D. Location approved by Owner. E. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20'(6 m) width driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. F. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions. G. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. H. On-site roads may be used for construction traffic. Tracked vehicles not allowed on paved areas. Contractor shall repair any damage to roads caused by construction activity to original or better condition. I. Contractor's principal vehicular access to plant site will be via plant's southern drive and through plant's south gate. 1.10 PARKING o O J A. Parking is limited in plant vicinity. Construction personnel shall not park in plant:*2paMg lot.Rrk in areas authorized by Owner. D-4 —� �� cn B. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. :<rn a rn C. Maintenance: v 1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated mat 1, construction equipment, products, mud, snow, and ice. N 2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair brreeaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition. D. Removal, repair: 1. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion. Gravel surface parking shall be left in place for future Work. 2. Remove underground work and compacted materials to a depth of 2" (600 mm); fill and grade site as specified. 3. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original condition. E. Mud from site vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.11 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site. E. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 0150 00 ms1869 A. Project identification sign: 1. One painted sign of size, construction, and design as shown on Drawings. 2. Size lettering to provide legibility from at least 30'(9 m) distance. 3. Content: a. Project title, *logo* and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. b. Names and titles of authorities. c. Names and titles of Engineer and Consultants. d. Name of prime Contractor and major subcontractors. 4. Graphic design, logo, name, and byline colors, style of lettering: As shown on Drawings. B. Project informational signs: 1. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as project identification sign, or standard products; size lettering to provide legibility from at least 30'(9 m) distance. 2. Provide at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and within site. Relocate as Work progress requires. 3. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. t_ C. Design sign and structure to withstand 60 miles/hr (100 km/hr) wind velocity. D. Sign painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum 3 years. E. Finishes, painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. F. Sign materials: 1. Structure and framing: New, wood, structurally adequate. 2. Sign surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4"(19 mm) thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. 3. Rough hardware: Galvanized, aluminum or brass. 4. Paints and primers: As shown on Drawings. G. Installation: 1. Install project identification sign within 21 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. 2. Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.* 3. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. 4. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. 5. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing. 0 H. Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and dam 3 C/> $Ci rn I. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of AQt anrestF area. �� cn :<r a M 1.13 BARRIERS Orn 3 0 A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protej existia facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. ow B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. C. Protect nonowned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.14 ENCLOSURES AND FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, provide chain link fencing or plastic construction netting to secure Contractor's equipment and construction supplies. B. Provide temporary barricades and fencing as necessary to secure the work and for personnel safety. 26710.01.00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ms1869 SECTION 01 50 00 - Page 5 C. Exterior enclosures: 1. Provide temporary insulated weathertight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 2. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. D. Interior enclosures: 1. Provide temporary partitions as necessary to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 2. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: a. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90. b. Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.15 SECURITY r A. Security program: o rA 1. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, anif neMoperatim from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with Owner's se( ugit)wroo�raam. 2. Initiate program in coordination with Owners existing security system at pro�obAigation� 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance w ec1hWes n for Contractor security. S O B. Entry control: y ro 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. o0 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain daily log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request. 4. Provide roster of workers on site for day to Owner each work day in morning within 1 hour of workday start. 5. Owner will control entrance of persons and vehicles related to Owner's operations. 1.16 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. .Protect site from puddling or running water. MVA019111.1role] Zft.1014 A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. Provide temporary sheeting and other methods to minimize dust migration from construction zones into nonconstruction areas of Owner's building. D. Promptly clean up dust and debris as work progresses to minimize tracking into non -construction zones. 1.18 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 01 50 00 ms1869 C. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. E. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. B. Coordinate with Owner on when to perform especially noisy activities. 1.20 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests, insects, and rodents from accessing or invading premises. 1:21 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from r discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.22 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2'(600 mm). C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION 29 Es ge r A 'n n -C u1 MW rn39Q D CD aw 26710.01.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 0160 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PRODUCTS A. Provide products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Provide products of each type by a single manufacturer unless specified otherwise. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer for components being replaced. 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. „V _ o_ B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, gt��es corm and products are undamaged. y,� � — %7 I C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiliM"sfigMeme , Tr damage. -<r— a rn rn = 1.03 RECEIVING, UNLOADING AND STORING = Q A. Receive and unload shipments to plant site from suppliers of equipment under this Contra and for Owner -furnished equipment. B. Unload equipment as soon as possible after arrival. C. Pay freight car and truck demurrage, detention, and any other costs which may be billed to Owner due to failure to unload cars or trucks within time required by freight companies. D. Provide physical protection for equipment placed in storage. 1. Store and maintain materials and equipment after receipt until completed installation is accepted by Owner. Such storage and maintenance shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and requirements of these Specifications. Provide materials, equipment, and labor required for such storage and maintenance. Contractor shall be accountable for any deterioration of materials or equipment occasioned by improper storage or maintenance, and shall recondition, repair, or replace any such materials or equipment without addition cost to Owner. 2. Stored equipment shall be supported above ground and shall be covered with canvas or other heavy-duty sheeting. Cover shall be securely fastened and shall be replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during storage period. 3. Motors shall be stored in dry, warm place and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Motors over 20 hp shall have shaft rotated 900 each month. Provide Engineer with evidence that this requirement is met. • 4. Desiccant shall be maintained between cover and motor frames on motors. Provide desiccant of type permitting visual determination of condition of desiccant. Replace desiccant when it becomes ineffective. 5. Following items shall be stored in weatherproof building complete with bins for storage of small pieces of equipment. Heat to a minimum of 50°F (100C). Storage inside of existing treatment plant not available. a. Electronic instruments and cabinets. b. Electrical equipment with general-purpose enclosures. c. Insulation materials. d. Rotating equipment. e. Miscellaneous electronic equipment, gaskets, and small, machined parts. f. Instruments and controls. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 SECTION 01 60 00 - Page 2 ms1869 E. Inspect stored equipment weekly. Renew protective coatings as necessary to preserve fitness of equipment. F. Contractor shall take custody of equipment and materials received and shall be solely responsible for damage and shortages until acceptance of Contractor's work by Owner. G. Unload equipment as soon as possible after arrival. Contractor shall pay freight railcar and truck demurrage, detention, and any other costs which may be billed to Owner due to failure to unload railcars or trucks within time required by freight companies. H. Use of bare wire rope slings for unloading and handling equipment and materials is prohibited without Owner approval. I. Storage areas will be allocated by Owner for Contractor's use. Equipment shall be stored in assigned lay -down areas. J. Equipment and materials shall be stored and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. K., Provide physical protection for equipment placed in storage. 1. Stored equipment shall be supported above ground and shall be covered with canvas or other heavy-duty sheeting. Cover shall be securely fastened and shall be replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during storage period. 2. Motors: a. Store in dry, warm place (minimum 500F). b. Space heaters shall be connected upon receipt on site and maintained. Space heaters shall not be connected utilizing extension cords. Use of multi conductor cable only. c. Rotate motors over 20 hp 90° each month or as directed by manufacturer. d. Perform a mega -ohm meter test on each medium voltage motor winding to frame utilizing a 10kV mega -ohm meter. Perform test each month and record motor serial number, test values, confirmation of space heaters operational, and signature of tester. e. Provide Owner with written test reports that this requirement is met when requested. 3. Following items shall be stored in weatherproof, heated (minimum 50°F) building complete with bins for storage of small pieces of equipment. Storage inside of existing plant will not be available. a. Electronic instruments and cabinets. b. Electrical equipment with general purpose enclosures. c. Insulation materials. d. Rotating equipment. e. Miscellaneous electronic equipment, gaskets, and small machined parts. r, f. Instruments and controls. a g. Protection panels. —' -n L. Inspect stored equipment weekly and document activities performed. Renew p7mective7foatingr necessary to preserve fitness of equipment. c.?""{ Ln I rn M. Contractor shall provide materials, equipment, and labor required for such stora§6ornd n*ten*s Contractor shall be accountable for any deterioration of materials or equipment t*neNtby V improper storage or maintenance, and shall recondition, repair, or replace any suQi mate rt�' Is or equipment without additional cost to Owner. T''91 N. Electrical equipment or equipment with any electrical components stored outdoors shall be supported at least 12" above ground. 1.04 GENERAL STORAGE A. Store products immediately on delivery in accordance with manufacturers instructions, with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed. 26710.01.00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 60 00 - Page 3 B. Arrange storage in manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 1.05 ENCLOSED STORAGE A. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures. B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 1.06 EXTERIOR STORAGE A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining. B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to elements, cover wil impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. p "' C3 ry*1 C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rig7d eett aterj= to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. _ rn E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. D N 00 1.07 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on scheduled basis. Maintain log of inspections, make available to Engineer on request. B. Verify storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements. C. Verify manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. D. Verify surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected and if weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. 1.08 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT STORAGE A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, manufacturer's service instructions shall accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. B. Service equipment on regularly scheduled basis, maintaining log of services; submit as record . document. 1.09 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 30 days after effective date of Agreement, submit complete list of major products which are proposed for installation electronically to Engineer. B. Tabulate products by Specification section number and title. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 SECTION 01 60 00 - Page 4 ms1869 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.10 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with Specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal," submit request as for substitutions for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named in accordance with Section 0125 13. D.5 For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. E. Whenever Specifications call for item by manufacturer's name and type and additional features of item are specifically required by Specifications, additional features specified shall be provided whether or M not they are normally included in standard manufacturer's item listed. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION N d � �1 Nr� n =;n r r <r- . m M �. m j5: CD cm 26710.01.00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 70 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, submit written notice, with list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Substantial completion will not be considered until: 1. Process equipment and systems are substantially complete, functioning, tested, and operating. 2. Electrical, control, and mechanical systems are substantially complete, functioning, tested, and operating. 3. Miscellaneous work such as sitework, and architectural/structural work is complete aside from minor finish work. C. Within reasonable time, Engineer will inspect to determine status of completion. D. Should Engineer determine that Work is not substantially complete, it will promptly -notify Antractor in writing, giving reasons therefor.o� N —n E. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies, and send second written notice of Substant(!�CQmpletion, flEr Engineer will reinspect Work. -Gr a F. When Engineer determines that Work is substantially complete, it will prepare Cer£€r oa Substantial Completion in accordance with General Conditions. i D N 1.02 FINAL COMPLETION o0 A. When Contractor considers Work is complete, it shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. Engineer will inspect to verify status of completion with reasonable promptness. C. Should Engineer consider that Work is incomplete or defective, it will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective Work. e� D. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies and send second written certification Ir that Work is complete, and Engineer will reinspect Work. M E. When Engineer finds Work is acceptable, it will consider closeout submittals. 1.03 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should Engineer perform reinspections due to failure of Work to comply with claims made by Contractor, Owner will compensate Engineer for such additional services and deduct amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 0170 00 ms1869 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's review. B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit project record documents. D. Submit operation and maintenance data. E. Provide Owner instruction and training and submit record of training activities F. Submit warranty and bond information. G. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. Provide detailed statement of contract price adjustments with payment application. H. Provide evidence of payment and release of liens in accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions. I. Submit Consent of Surety to final payment. J. Submit Certificates of insurance for products and completed operations in accordance with r : supplementary conditions. i ` K. Owner will occupy portions of the building as specified in Section 01 1100. 1.45 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view, remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, and polish transparent and glossy surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean filters of operating equipment. 0 E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. t N y- F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. c,-< r G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from tt—� e. U, m ` IT1 3 1.06 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Engineer 7 days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. 26710.01.00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 70 00 - Page 3 D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and Section 0143 33. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.07 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, e;movecMnt of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. _C*13 wa T7 E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activjR is�necessary,i obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material maM�CtueP. <r�1 b M F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. :� Z b 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS N am A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents, record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 6. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. f B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. r,. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. ` D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. Cp E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 26710 01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 0170 00 ms1869 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. G. Submit documents to Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.10 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. D. Co -execute submittals when required. E. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in 3-D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. G. Time of Submittals: 11 For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period. N B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation.lean, a%st, and lubricate as required. m ..n 7► --t -o C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Rgppirilpr replace FM whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original con!4"nt.Ln -<r m D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subc� ptor=houtrprrnigr written consent of Owner. — V o PART PRODUCTS a' NOT USED Z H v w x LU M a CL 0 Lu U) 0 Z Z 0 U W U) LL 0 0 Z W FILED 2011 SEP -5 AM I I: 28 CITY CLERK IOWA CITY, IMA WA S0112E6 -2 U II; G; Lirc-D 26710.01 00 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 73 19 - Page 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Drawing indicating proposed layout and utilization of Contractor's storage area for Owner approval. Drawing shall be maintained current and shall indicate location of all stored equipment and materials. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Plan indicating location and extent of proposed field welding, and showing what provisions have been made for type of base metal, present stress conditions, and preheating requirements. 2. Proposed shoring or above floor load transfer structure for moving equipment across floors to final position. Documents shall be signed and sealed by Contractor's structural engineer. 3. Certificates for each welder, showing proof of qualifications as outlined in code, prior to any field welding, either temporary or permanent. 4. Duplicate copies of clearances of bearings aligned and amount of runout on couplings. 5. Monthly report indicating status of equipment, motor test reports and materials received. Report shall contain a log of equipment and materials and storage maintenance duties performed. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide dowel pins and shims necessary for leveling and doweling equipment to baseplates. Shims Shall be stainless steel. B. Provide bolting required to anchor equipment securely to building structural steel; holes required in ;structural steel shall be drilled; burning with cutting torch not allowed. C. Provide expansion anchors where required, subject to review by Engineer. Use appropriate type of anchor devices on vibratory equipment. D.' Provide welding rods for field erection of equipment installed under this Contract. E. Grout and material noted on Drawings as "by others," "by purchaser," "by Owner," or the like, necessary for equipment installation. N O PART 3 EXECUTION o —+ �n rn 3.01 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES y'—+ v C -) -< r A. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommff aionYl B. Provide access space around equipment for service. MCrn Provide no less than mi§yRn ae.secorlMded by manufacturer. ' cm 3.02 SPECIAL ERECTION PROCEDURES m A. Field welding to existing structural members shall conform to following requirements: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1. 2. Welding to high strength steels or preheating of highly stressed members will not normally be permitted. 3. Remove temporary welded attachments, grind area smooth, and apply 1 coat of primer to match existing primer. B. Welding of piping shall conform to ASME 831.1 Code for Power Piping and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX when either or both are applicable. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 73 19 ms1869 C. Remove any temporary attachments made to equipment. Grind area of attachment on equipment to smooth surface and apply 1 coat of primer to match existing primer. 3.03 FLOOR SHORING A. Shore parts of structure for which design loading would be exceeded during construction or installation of equipment. B. Protect flooring and other finished surfaces by means of heavy planking. C. Remove shoring and repair any damage to floors or other parts of structures after equipment has been installed. D. Method of shoring subject to review of Engineer. 3.04 CLEANING A. Before assembly or erection, thoroughly clean equipment of temporary protective coatings and foreign materials; completely remove shop -applied flushing compounds. B. Blow out with compressed air as required to remove foreign material. C. After erection of equipment, clean external surfaces of oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign material; touch up shop paint, primer, and filler; leave surfaces smooth and ready for finish painting. 3.05 ALIGNING -+ O� rn A. Align equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 'D --I r -n r B. Use shims of sheet and plate steel; use shims with laminations having individuaHd s not he av� than 0.015" (0.40 mm) for 1/32" (1 mm) to 1/8" (3 mm) directly under equipment._ _ M C. Check alignment of equipment after piping and other external connections have been made and before equipment is placed in operation. Realign equipment as necessary. cv D. After alignment, hot run and recheck alignment; drill and ream items of equipment and fasten to baseplates with tapered dowel pins. E. Include costs for labor required to obtain alignment within allowable limits on equipment installed. This includes labor for any hanger adjustments required. 3.06 SUPPORTS A. Provide devices to support equipment and piping, furnished or installed under this Contract. Refer to Section 20 05 29. B. Fabricate supports of structural steel sections, plates, or rods arranged to provide rigid and sturdy mounting for equipment. C. Provide connections or fasteners required between equipment supports and building structure. D. Equipment foundation pads: As shown on Drawings. E. Provide devices to support equipment piping and appurtenances where specific support is not detailed on Drawings. Support piping adjacent to equipment such that no weight is carried on equipment. F. Support piping adjacent to equipment such that load transferred to equipment does not exceed manufacturers specified allowable load. 26710.01.00 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 01 73 19 - Page 3 3.07 GROUTING A. Place minimum of 1" (25 mm) nonshrink grout under equipment being mounted on concrete foundations unless specified otherwise. Refer to Section 03 00 10. B. Determine quantity of grout required. C. Entire space between top of foundation and bottom of equipment base shall be completely filled with grout, free of any voids. D. Place no grout that has been allowed to set, after mixing, beyond time limitations set forth by grout manufacturer. E. Remove and replace grout that shows cracking. END OF SECTION cow E y M m 26710.01 .00 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA ms1869 SECTION 01 78 23 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA REQUIREMENTS A. Operating and maintenance data shall be in English language. B. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owners maintenance and operation of products furnished under Agreement. C. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Instruct Owners personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this section. 3. Skilled as technical writers to extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsmen competent to prepare required drawings. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS v o -+ A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. DC') N "t7 B. Format:A r 1. Sheet size: 8-1/2" x 11" minimum. 2. Paper: 20 Ib for typed �rrrI p� minimum, white, pages. 3 f � � 3. Text: Manufacturers printed data, or neatly typewritten. o _ 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. tV b. Larger size drawings shall be folded to 8-1/2" x 11", and inserted into pockets. Co 5. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. r - c. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual. , ' • 7. Binders: a. Commercial quality 3 -ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. b. Maximum ring size: 1". c. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number. 2. List of each product required to be included, indexed to content of volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement and list of recommended spare parts. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 01 78 23 ms1869 4. Identify each product byproduct name and other identifying symbols asset forth in Contract Documents, including nameplate information and shop order numbers for each item of equipment furnished. B. Product data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate Drawings with information in Project record documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project record documents as maintenance Drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for particular installation. 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, Bond, and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or Bonds. 1j05 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS Pt,' Submit 3 copies of complete manual in final form and electronic copy in both Word and pdf format. B. Contents, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. , b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. o 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations.,n N —n b. Guide to "trouble -shooting" D� v `! c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. �� r d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: List of lubricants required. <r—a ( t'T 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. o.?? 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams mmuired for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination Drawings. As -installed color -coded piping diagrams. 10. Chart of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 26710.01.00 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA ms1869 SECTION 01 78 23 - Page 3 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electrical and electronic system, as appropriate. 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replacement parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As -installed color -coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and assembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recon%ended quantities to be maintained in storage.�- 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparen=g i&ructiC Owner's personnel. in r;;..11n+� �rn = V 1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE j A. Preliminary draft: -3 1. Submit 2 electronic copies to Engineer and Owner a minimum of 30 days in advance of when equipment is scheduled to be shipped to Owner's site. 2. Provide 1 copy shipped with equipment. B. Submit 1 copy of completed data in final form 15 days prior to final inspection or acceptance. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with comments. C. Submit specified copies of approved data in final form 10 days after receipt of comments. 1.07 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel prior to date for Owner's personnel taking over operation of the equipment. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in a classroom environment onsite by a qualified manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 01 78 23 ms1869 F. Amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION N O J t7 N -fl P C.,-� �, r �r rn o T'' <n OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL COVER DIAGRAM CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY OF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESSES OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR BELT FILTER PRESSES O �n J rn n{ t 1C) m :-j MANUFACTURER'S NAME MANUFACTURER'S ADDRESS STANLEY CONSULTANTS, INC. MUSCATINE, IOWA MULL COVER 1. Imprinting shall be in Arial font. 2. Spine printing shall be 12 -point. 3. Cover printing shall be in point sizes indicated. * If more than one volume is necessary, imprint cover with volume numbers. 36 pt 36 pt 36 pt 36 pt 36 pt M 2Q 24 pt 14 pt 14 pt 26710.01.00 DEMOLITION ms1869 SECTION 02 41 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal and disposal of existing structures, utilities, and road, and associated work including, but not limited to: 1. Demolition and removal of miscellaneous construction and roadways. 2. Demolition and removal of miscellaneous utilities. 3. Demolition and removal of belt filter presses, sludge pumps, and polymer pumps. B. Remove and legally dispose of items, except those identified for re -use. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for demolition work under this contract except as specifically described and listed in Agreement. Include costs in connection with Work in lump sum Contract Price. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Deconstruction: Disassembly of buildings for the purpose of recovering materials. B. Construction and demolition (C&D) materials: Materials produced in the process of construction, renovation and/or demolition of structures, where structures include buildings, roads, and bridges. C&D materials typically include concrete, asphalt, wood, gypsum wallboard, paper, glass, rubble, and roofing materials. Also includes land clearing debris, such as stumps, rocks, and dirt. C. Environmental pollution and damage: Presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human or animal life; affect other species of importance to humanity; or degrade utility of environment for aesthetic, cultural or historical purposes. D. Inertfill: 1. Permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively for purpose of disposal. 2. Inert solids and waste: Nonliquid solid waste including, but not limited to, soil and concrete, that does not contain hazardous substances or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water - quality standards established by regional water board and does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid waste. N E. Demolition waste: Building materials and solid waste resulting from construction, remolling, repair, cleanup, or demolition operations that are not hazardous. Tenn includes, but i5ot limy to, asphalt concrete, portland cement concrete, brick, lumber, gypsum wallboard, cardboid r assocoked packaging, roofing material, ceramic tile, carpeting, plastic pipe, and steel. Th rials may include rock, soil, tree stumps, and other vegetative matter resulting from land clearindW-1han6FapirV1or construction or land development projects. F. Chemical waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acid.goalis_herbi&dg pesticides, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes. m G. Recycling: Process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting materials for purpose of using altered form in manufacture of new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste. H. Reuse: Use, in same or similar form as it was produced, of material which might otherwise be discarded. DEMOLITION 26710 01 00 Page 2 - SECTION 02 41 00 ms1869 I. Solid waste: Putrescible and nonputrescible solid, semisolid, and liquid wastes, including garbage, trash, refuse, paper, rubbish, ashes, industrial wastes, demolition and construction wastes, abandoned vehicles and parts thereof, discarded home and industrial appliances, dewatered, treated, or chemically fixed sewage sludge which is not hazardous waste, manure, vegetable or animal solid and semisolid wastes, and other discarded solid and semisolid wastes. "Solid waste" does not include hazardous waste, radioactive waste, or medical waste as defined or regulated by State law. 1.04 PRE -DEMOLITION MEETING A. Conduct conference at Project site. B. Arrange meeting no less than 10 days prior to demolition with Owner to review salvageable items to determine if Owner wants to retain ownership. C. Review environmental goals of Project with Owner, subcontractors, and waste haulers and make proactive effort to increase awareness of these goals among all labor forces on site. 1.05 SCHEDULING A. Perform Work in manner which will provide least interference and most protection to public and existing construction. Contractor's operations subject to approval by Owner prior to commencement of Work. B. Carefully coordinate time and manner of demolition work with Engineer to assure continued operation of existing facilities and to maintain construction schedule requirements. C. Schedule and perform work in accordance with following general sequence. CoordinateMecific details of work with Owner. Owner's use of premises shall have priority over wo8Contr=. -=c2 ti D. Take care to minimize outages of electrical systems. > __q rrio E. Coordinate electrical system outages with Owner and service utility. Notify Owr�Q wrRAg at Cast 72 hours prior to electrical outage. Indicate system to be disabled, areas affectedpopewd di3ind time of outage, duration, and work to be performed. 70 s F. Outages of following electrical systems shall be performed only with written periftsion pWwner. 1. Power distribution. co 2. Fire alarm. 3. Telephone. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: 1. Two weeks prior to any removal, submit demolition plan for review. Plans shall include sequence of performing proposed work, requirements for interruptions to public use of area, and requirements for Contractor use of public streets and facilities. 2. Two copies of photographs taken of existing construction to remain. Include adjacent private properties that might be disturbed by demolition operations. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings: Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition firm qualifications: Engage licensed demolition contractor and an experienced firm that has successfully completed demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. 26710.01.00 DEMOLITION ms1869 SECTION 02 41 00 - Page 3 B. Temporary electrical construction necessary to maintain existing system during construction shall comply with NEC Article 590. C. Regulatory requirements: 1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for all permits required. 2. Conform to applicable requirements of federal, state, and other governmental agencies for demolition work. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS A. Known underground piping, foundations, and other underground obstructions in vicinity of new construction are shown on Drawings. B. Protect underground facilities encountered during excavation until it is determined whether they are active or inactive. Repair, without compensation, existing active facilities shown on Drawings damaged during operations. C. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Owner provides notification to resume Work. PART PRODUCTS 2 01 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain property of Owner, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed, recycled, or disposed from Project Site in appropriate and legal manner. PART 3 EXECUTION _. 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS Jpp� A. Inspect buildings and structures where demolition is required. Inspect existing Des $ buildinns and structures, Drawings are available from Owner. Contractor shall be familiar Mn-ilEms�hat require demolition and patching. c� B. Notify Owner of any deviation before proceeding with work. :<rrrt = O C. Coordinate the removal of mechanical equipment with other trades so as not to aff� the o e ation of existing systems. m D. Perform work in manner which will provide least interference to utility services including electrical, gas, building utilities, and others. E. Provide and maintain temporary building temperature, humidity, and ventilation systems to provide ambient conditions for work, prevent condensation, and prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, and gases. F. Perform excavation and dewatering necessary to accomplish Work. G. Determine actual Site conditions, extent to which demolition is required, and method of demolition. H. Schedule work with Owner and work in other parts of these Contract Documents. I. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. DEMOLITION 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 02 41 00 ms1869 J. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of demolition and recycling required. K. Survey condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of portion of structure or adjacent structures during demolition. L. Perform surveys as Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from demolition activities. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare drawings, documents, and applications and obtain government agency approvals and permits required for demolition activities. B. Conduct demolition operations and remove C&D materials to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and utilized facilities. C. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or utilized facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. D. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area. 1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect existing Site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping that are designated to remain in place. 3. Repair any damage caused by demolition operations at Contractor's expense. E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of buildings to be demolished and adjacdUbuildings to remain. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of daolitiortr <(') C* 3.03 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Use of explosives not permitted. ACl) FA Gp r m _ r 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS o� A. Comply with federal, state and local regulations pertaining to water, air, solid waste, rec@ng, chemical waste, sanitary waste, sediment and noise pollution. B. Protection of natural resources: Preserve natural resources within project boundaries or restore to equivalent condition. 1. Confine demolition activities to areas defined by public roads, easements, and work area limits indicated on drawings. 2. Temporary construction: Remove indications of temporary construction facilities, such as haul roads, work areas, structures, stockpiles or waste areas. 3. Water resources: a. Comply with applicable regulations concerning direct or indirect discharge of pollutants to underground and natural surface waters. b. Oily substances: 1) Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water in such quantities as to affect normal use, aesthetics, or produce measurable ecological impact on area. 2) Store and service construction equipment at areas designated for collection of oil wastes. 4. Dust control, air pollution, and odor control: Prevent creation of dust, air pollution and odors: a. Use temporary enclosures and other appropriate methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. b. Store volatile liquids, including fuels and solvents, in closed containers. 26710.01.00 DEMOLITION ms1869 SECTION 02 41 00 - Page 5 c. Properly maintain equipment to reduce gaseous pollutant emissions. 5. Disposal practices and waste hauling: a. Legally transport and dispose of materials that cannot be delivered to source -separated or mixed recycling facility to transfer station or disposal facility that can legally accept materials for purpose of disposal. b. Use permitted waste hauler or Contractor's trucking services and personnel. To confirm valid permitted status of waste haulers, contact state or local waste management agency. c. Become familiar with conditions for acceptance of new construction, excavation and demolition materials at recycling facilities, prior to delivering materials. d. Deliver to facilities that can legally accept new construction, excavation and demolition materials for purpose of re -use, recycling, composting, or disposal. e. Do not bum, bury or otherwise dispose of rubbish and waste materials on project site. 6. Re -use and donation options: Implement re -use program to greatest extent feasible. 7. Revenue: a. Revenues or other savings obtained from recycled, re -used, or salvaged materials shall accrue to Contractor unless otherwise noted in Contract Documents. b. Remove and transport C&D materials in manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces, streets, and areas or dust being emitted into atmosphere. c. Clean adjacent streets of dust, dirt, and C&D materials caused by demolition operations. At end of each work day, return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect existing facilities from damage by falling debris, dust, and construction operations. B. Provide shoring and bracing where necessary to support existing construction and protect personnel :and facilities during demolition operation. s. 3.96 DEMOLITION -GENERAL A. Building demolition: Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Locate demolition equipment throughout building and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in sizes that will be suitable for acceptance at recycling or disposal facilities. 3. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avdfree fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. .r 4. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade in small sizes, suitable for a pyan*t redMg or disposal facilities, unless otherwise shown to remain. ]>_ -o 5. Remove all disconnected, abandoned utilities on site. C-) -< cI __4n B. Below -grade construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below -grade cgflsmyctias f II s: 1. Completely remove below -grade construction, including foundation walls arq5oatingsnles© shown otherwise on drawings. 2. Break up and completely remove below -grade concrete slabs, in small sizes}3uitablecllior acceptance at recycling or disposal facilities. m 3. Below -grade areas: Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials. C. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations. D. Remove existing construction as specified and shown and as required to permit new construction. E. Perform removal in manner that will minimize dust, noise, and other nuisance. Maintain haul routes for disposal of material clean and free of debris. DEMOLITION 26710 01 00 Page 6 - SECTION 02 41 00 ms1869 F. Remove existing construction carefully providing for neat and orderly junctions at construction to remain in place. Final appearance of exposed surfaces shall be similar and equal to that of adjacent existing work. Grind off rough surfaces to remove sharp projections. G. Perform demolition operations in manner that in no way endangers personnel, public, existing structures, utilities, roadways, or facilities not to be demolished. H. Any portion of existing construction whether structural or accessory which has become unstable through removal of other parts of construction shall be removed as soon as practical and no such unstable part shall be left free-standing or inadequately braced against causes of collapse at end of each day's work. I. No demolition shall be performed on piping, electrical circuits, or equipment until system has been isolated by Owner. Contractor shall verify isolation of system. J. Contractor shall relocate existing active miscellaneous piping, conduit, and electrical circuits and devices not detailed on Drawings but required for installation of equipment and items installed by this Contract. K. To reduce fire hazards during demolition, Contractor shall: 1. Before removing any part of any building, remove volatile or flammable materials, such as fuel oil, gasoline, kerosene, benzene, cleaning fluids, paints, thinners, cloth, loose paper, combustible trash, coal, and similar materials which might serve as ready fuel for small fires. 2. Maintain stairways in usable condition to highest or lowest level until that portion of structure is removed. 3. Maintain sufficient number of fire extinguishers to check and extinguish small fires inrejeas where Work is being performed. o 4. Wherever cutting torch or other equipment which might cause fire is being u_ [iregingu s shall be kept nearby and ready for instant use. Users of such equipment shad @� inducted in 1 proper method of preventing fires and extinguishing fire. "r �. 5. Fires will not be permitted in Project area, except that small fires for warmin—) -< t g:qt-l�ersomel Ay be permitted in suitable burning equipment arranged to prevent release of embersror sparks. Bing equipment and operation thereof must be approved by Iowa City Fire Departmeft _ 6. Burning of waste lumber and other building materials or trash on Site will not be permitted. ., L. Use of cranes and wrecking balls for demolition work permitted as long as following congtypns are met: 4. Machinery, cables, booms, and other equipment shall pass applicable safety inspections. 2. Crane boom may not be used within 20' of overhead power lines. 3. Wrecking ball or clamshell demolition work shall not cause debris to be kicked outward away from demolition area. 4. Operations do not damage adjacent construction. M. Use of blasting not permitted. N. 'Provide temporary personnel and vehicle protection at openings or ledges made by demolition. O. Double saw cut concrete and asphalt removal areas so remaining edges are clean and undamaged. 3.07 DEMOLITION OF ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, AND SITE MATERIALS A. Remove as shown and specified or as required to permit new construction. B. Structural parts of buildings, such as columns, beams, and joists supporting floor of any story shall be left in place until walls, flooring, and partitions of that story are completely removed, beginning at top and working downward. Exception to this requirement will be made in case of nonrigid frames or concrete buildings. 26710.01.00 DEMOLITION ms1869 SECTION 02 41 00 - Page 7 C. If Contractor elects to use an alternate procedure for progressive or simultaneous wrecking of all parts of building, Contractor's proposed method shall not increase danger to Contractor's personnel, Owner's personnel, or to adjacent structures. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any such alternate procedure proposed before implementing such procedures. D. No wall or part thereof shall be permitted to fall outwardly from any building or into plant basement or floor except through chutes or by other controlled means or methods which will ensure safety and minimize dust, noise, and other nuisance. E. Any part of building, whether structural, or accessory, which has become unstable through removal of other parts, shall be removed as soon as practical and no such unstable part shall be left free- standing or inadequately braced against cause of collapse at end of day's work. Structural steel in building: 1. Provide temporary support or complete new work required for support prior to removal. Maintain existing parts until equipment supported by part is removed or modified. 2. Remove and dispose of steel indicated on Drawings including miscellaneous associated steel. Do not remove bolts and/or rivets of common connections; cut member being removed to leave connection unless shown otherwise. 3. Where steel penetrates masonry or concrete wall, cut flush with wall unless shown otherwise. 4. Where applicable, remove anchor bolts and grout to top or face of existing concrete. Make provisions to ensure smooth surface where grout is removed. 5. Care shall be taken not to damage any portion of existing structural steel that is to remain intact. G. Foundations: 1. Perform required excavation, dewatering, sheeting shoring and bracing required to perform demolition. Refer to Section 3123 16-16. ,2. Removal shall be complete for concrete, bolts, reinforcing steel, and structural steel. `3. Removal of foundations attaching to existing plant building, chimney foundation, or other ` construction to remain shall be to face of foundation or wall to remain. t 4. Upon completion of foundation removal, backfill excavating and depressions with compacted backfill as specified in Section 3123 16-16. Grade area as specified in Section 3122 00. 5. Do not backfill excavations or voids left from foundation removals until removal adequacy is f confirmed by Engineer. H. At termination of concrete removal, prepare surfaces and cover with cement -water groL4;gaste to present neat finished surface appearance. O r CA I. Remove and dispose of portion of existing building walls to limits required by napp ti stQtion acZ required for removal or placement of materials and equipment. Replace removedortio�withrperna type construction. --tom 1m * M X"J. Material shall be removed completely from areas which are to remain. Contractq"ll rr&e s,I inspections by its job superintendent and quality control personnel to assure th4;Feriaj s notpin areas where they can get into operating systems. 30, o m K. Provide temporary, insulated, weathertight closure over openings above grade in buildings to remain. 1. Closures shall remain in place at all times except as directed by Engineer and as required for demolition and construction operations. 2. Closure shall be constructed to prevent water and material from entering building opening. Construct closure to protect interior of building from weather. 3. Closure shall be adequate in strength and anchorage to withstand uplift and wind loading in accordance with ANSI A58.1. 4. Repair and maintain closure until Work is accepted as complete. Damage by other contractors will be repaired at their expense. 5. Closure not replaced by permanent construction under this contract will be removed later by Owner under separate contract. DEMOLITION 26710 01 00 Page 8 - SECTION 02 41 00 ms1869 3.08 DEMOLITION OF MECHANICAL ITEMS A. Remove mechanical equipment and materials as shown on Drawings and as specified. B. Removal shall include but not limited to piping, valves, equipment, hangers, and associated accessories. 3.09 DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. Examination: 1. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. 2. Demolition drawings are based on cursory field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. B. Preparation: 1. Before beginning underground demolition, contact Owner, and local utilities locating service One Call at least 24 hours before digging. 2. Contact Owner to determine equipment items are to be salvaged and delivered to storage area. Other equipment shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from job site. 3. Disconnect electrical systems in or on walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. 4. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. 5. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. C. Demolition and extension of existing electrical work: 1. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to remain to accommodate new construction. 2. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. ro 3. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessibSeiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D N 4. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned oul if gduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandongd-4utleljs whicFw not removed. cn 5. Disconnect and remove the following: ern— v a. Abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. '� 3 b. Devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. c. Abandoned light fixtures, including brackets, stems, hangers, and other gccessow 6. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension irk. 7. Maintain safe access to existing electrical installations which remain active. i D. `Disposal of equipment containing polychlorinated biphenyl compounds (PCBs): Transformers, :capacitors, and lamp ballasts containing PCBs shall be disposed of in accordance with CFR 40 Part 761. Ballasts, even those labeled "no PCBs", shall be disposed of accordingly. Deliver equipment to an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) approved incinerator or ballast recycling service for .(disposal. Provide Owner with manifest and certificate of destruction pursuant to CFR 40 Part 761, Subpart K. 3.10 HANDLING OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Salvageable materials, except items specified to remain property of Owner, shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from Site as Work progresses. B. Certain equipment and material shall be removed and reinstalled as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Contractor shall remove such items, store if required, and reinstall as indicated. In the event of loss or damage to such material or equipment, Contractor shall replace items without additional cost to Owner. C. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally reuse, salvage, recycle, or dispose of materials. 26710.01.00 DEMOLITION ms1869 SECTION 02 41 00 - Page 9 D. Storage of materials to be removed not permitted to accumulate on site. Promptly remove and dispose of unsalvageable equipment and materials. E. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on roofs, floors, or in areas outside of and around any buildings being removed. Waste materials and debris resulting from Work shall be removed and disposed of daily by Contractor in disposal area obtained by Contractor. F. Burning of waste lumber and other building materials or trash on Site will not be permitted. G. No material, obstructions, or debris shall be placed or allowed to accumulate within 15' of any fire hydrant. Fire hydrants shall be accessible at all times. 3.11 PATCHING A. Patch openings in walls, foundations, and checker plating caused by demolition. Use materials comparable to adjacent undisturbed surfaces for patching. B. Any new construction work that affects existing building structures shall be patched to match existing surrounding materials. This includes roofing, walls, walks, flooring ceilings, and any other materials that affect structural or architectural integrity of building. 3.12 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to personnel, public, roadways, streets, structures, utilities, facilities, and equipment caused by operations and shall repair any damage at its own expense or replace items damaged beyond repair. B. � Do not operate vehicles or equipment on existing construction or roadways that could be damaged. C. Backfill applicable excavated areas, open pits, and other depressions as work progresses. Backfill materials shall conform to requirements of Drawings and other specification sections. D. Grade areas disturbed by construction to smooth, uniform surfaces sloped to drain. E., Replace construction removed to facilitate operations with construction of equal quality to that removed. 3.13 CLEAN-UP ru A. Maintain public streets, alleys, or other thoroughfares used in carrying out disposra,free offer or soil attributable to this operation. Equip and load trucks or other vehicles to prevent I a e, win off or other escape of any portion of whatsoever is being hauled. Cost incurred by in ning t such litter will be charged to Contractor and deducted from monies due or to becgelue-FundeMkis contract. c'3cn r— ' �G� B. Upon completion of demolition work in each area, thoroughly clean area of mate' $ of A temaln' CD Q C. Remove materials (except paint) adhered to construction to remain. zy rn D. Leave areas in broom clean and vacuumed condition. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) 26710.01.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1869 SECTION 03 00 10 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast -in-place concrete including formwork, reinforcing steel and miscellaneous materials. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit for each type of product provided under work of this Section: B. Quality assurance data: 1. Tests, or certificates of compliance with standards specified in this Section at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placement for: a. Cement: From each car from which cement will be used. b. Fly ash: From each separate shipment from which fly ash is being used. c. Aggregates: For each size aggregate from each source of aggregate, for grading, deleterious substances and soundness. 2. List of admixtures, joint fillers, sealants, curing compounds, and other manufactured materials proposed identifying manufacturer and type. Provide data on specific items when requested by Owner or Special Inspector. 3. Testing laboratory reports required at least 14 days prior to commencing concrete placement for each class of concrete and each size aggregate: a. Proposed concrete design mix. b. Tests on concrete cylinders from trial batch of proposed mix. 4. Testing laboratory reports for tests on concrete cylinders taken in field. ro 0 C. Submit to Special Inspector Engineer unless noted otherwise. O —+ 'n ti 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS r fl U7 A. Shop Drawings on reinforcing steel. Submit to Owner unless noted otherwise. JC-) r TJ p. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Q A. Contractor shall retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory to performthe %wing tests: 1. Obtaining, making samples and trial batches and performing laboratory testing specified. 2. Establish proposed concrete design mix proportions on basis of either field experience and/or trial mixtures in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5, except specific requirements shall conform to requirement of these specifications. Determine and submit supporting data, standard deviation, trial batch tests, required average strength, proportions, air content, and slump range for each l r mix. 3. Provide reports to Owner giving information on materials, concrete design mixes and testing performed. B. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 117 and 301. C. Owner shall retain services of qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following tests: 1. Obtaining, making samples and performing laboratory and field testing specified. 2. Provide reports to Special Inspector and Owner giving information on materials and testing performed. 3. Reports shall indicate whether or not materials meet specifications. 4. Concrete strength tests: a. Comply with ASTM C39/C39M for testing and ASTM C31/C31 M or C192/C192M for preparation of cylinders. b. Field tests: Sample in accordance with ASTM C172; make and test 3 cylinders from each sample on basis of not less than: CONCRETE WORK 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 03 00 10 ms1869 1) One sample from each day's placement for each class of concrete. 2) One sample from each 150 cu yd (120 cu m). 3) One sample for each 5,000 sq It (460 sq m) of surface area for slabs or walls. 4) For a given class of concrete, if frequency of testing specked above would provide less than 3 samples, sample at least 3 randomly selected batches or each batch if 3 batches or fewer are required. c. Cylinders shall be laboratory cured. Test one laboratory cured cylinder at 7 days and other two at 28 days for average strength. d. If tests indicate deficient strength as defined by ACI 318, Contractor shall immediately adjust mix to increase average of subsequent test results and, when directed, perform drilled core testing, ASTM C42/C42M. Testing and remedial work shall be at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Slump tests: a. Sample on basis specified above for field strength tests; comply with ASTM C172 and C143/C143M. b. If slump exceeds Specifications, promptly remove batch from Work and dispose of off-site at location selected by Contractor. Do not add water in excess of specified water -cement ratio to batch to achieve desired slump. 6. Air content tests: a. Sample on basis specified above for field strength tests. b. Obtain samples from concrete at point of discharge from chute or pumper hose. c. Determine air content by pressure method; comply with ASTM C231. d. If air content does not meet Specifications, remove deficient concrete from Work. 7. Temperature tests: a. Sample on basis specified above for field strength tests. b. Comply with ASTM C1064/C1064M. c. If temperature does not meet Specifications, remove deficient concrete from Work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cement: Keep clean, dry, and free from weather damage. B. Aggregates: Stockpile each gradation separately on clean, noncontaminating surface. R RT2 PRODUCTS r 2.01 CEMENT A. c Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II. B. High -early -strength Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type III. May be used in cement at Contractor's option, unless specified otherwise, to achieve 28 -day C. Use only 1 brand of each type of cement. D. Slag cement: Comply with ASTM C989; Grade 100 or 120. 2.02 AGGREGATE rypNed or a ■.1 at %lays. M Z 0 on A. Regular aggregate: Strong, durable, well -graded minerals conforming to ASTM C33 requirements for grading, deleterious substances and soundness. B. Aggregates not conforming exactly to above specifications may be used provided: 1. Special tests or actual service establish that such aggregates will produce concrete of quality specified. 2. An Addendum to Specifications is issued prior to receipt of Bids; no deviations will be permitted after receipt of Bids. C. Coarse aggregate nominal size: 1. 1-1/2" to No. 4 (38 mm to 4.75 mm): Use for all concrete unless specked otherwise. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1869 SECTION 03 00 10 - Page 3 2. 3/4" to No. 4 (19 mm to 4.75 mm): Use for slabs and thin sections and areas where clear spacing between reinforcing bars is less than 3" (75 mm). 2.03 FLY ASH A. Comply with ASTM C618; Class F or C. Report chemical analysis of fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D5759. B. Fly ash for total Project shall be obtained from single source. C. Design concrete mixes to include fly ash in amount of approximately 15% to 20% of cement by weight. D. May be used at Contractor's option for all concrete, except not permitted for high early strength concrete. 2.04 WATER A. Clean, fresh, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, acid, sags, organic materials, or other substances that maybe deleterious to concrete or steel. Mix water shall comply with ASTM C1602. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Water -reducing and set -controlling admixture, ASTM C494/C494M, type as required. Use for all concrete. B. Air entraining agent, ASTM C260. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use for foundations and exterior concrete. Do not use for interior slabs. 2.06 REINFORCING A. Bars: 1. ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (420) deformed bars. 2. Bend bars cold to conform to required details. 2.07 VAPOR BARRIER A. Polyethylene film, clear: In accordance with ASTM E1745. B. Minimum 10 mil (0.25 mm) thickness. C. Use where shown. 2.08 FORMWORK A. Forms: 1. Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood, 5/8" (15 mm) thick minimum, conforming to DOC PS 1, Grade B -B, Class I or II. 2. Removable metal forms with surfaces equal to Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood. 3. Fiber tube forms: Cylindrical fiber reinforced forms. B. Form ties: Type leaving no metal within 1" (25 mm) of finished surface after removal of forms. C. Form coating: 1. Wood forms: Nonstaining mineral oil or commercially produced form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and curing, and will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces, "Nox-Crete Form Coating," by Nox-Crete Chemicals, or equal. 2. Metal forms: Treat surfaces as recommended by manufacturer before placing reinforcing. N O 0C-) l —1 -fl �• r rV CD A. Forms: 1. Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood, 5/8" (15 mm) thick minimum, conforming to DOC PS 1, Grade B -B, Class I or II. 2. Removable metal forms with surfaces equal to Douglas fir, exterior type, concrete form plywood. 3. Fiber tube forms: Cylindrical fiber reinforced forms. B. Form ties: Type leaving no metal within 1" (25 mm) of finished surface after removal of forms. C. Form coating: 1. Wood forms: Nonstaining mineral oil or commercially produced form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and curing, and will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces, "Nox-Crete Form Coating," by Nox-Crete Chemicals, or equal. 2. Metal forms: Treat surfaces as recommended by manufacturer before placing reinforcing. CONCRETE WORK 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 03 00 10 ms1869 3. Fiber tube forms: Treat surfaces as specified for wood forms or as recommended by manufacturer. 2.09 JOINT MATERIALS A. Expansion and isolation joint filler. Preformed nonextruding and resilient nonbituminous type, ASTM D1752, Type 1; use where shown. B. Expansion and isolation joint sealant: 1. Horizontal joints: "Sonolastic SL2," multicomponent polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 2. Vertical joints: "Sonolastic NP -2," multi-component polyurethane base by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 3. Provide primer as recommended by manufacturer. C. Sawed control joint sealant: 1. "Masterfill 300," 2 -part flexible 100% solids epoxy joint filler, by BASF Construction Chemicals, or equal. 2. Use for sawed control joints. 2.10 BENTONITE WATERSEALS A. Size: 1"x 3/4" (25 mm x 19 mm). B. Use: Where specifically shown. C. Manufacturer: American Colloid Company "Waterstop-RX Cold Joint Water Stop Volclay Waterproofing Systems," or equal. 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. liquid membrane -forming compound: 1. ASTM C309, Type 1 with fugitive dye, except Type 2 with white pigment for surfaces exposed to direct rays of sun. 2. Do not use compounds containing wax, oil, resin, varnish, or other bases that will prevent bonding s of finishes such as floor coverings, tile, additional concrete, paint, and similar applied finishes. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for 4particular application. o C? '' B. Plastic film: n ry+� 1. Polyethylene plastic film, white, nonstaining, conforming to ASTM D2103. c�')� r 2. Minimum 4 -mil (0.1 mm) thickness. r 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are spe,forgarticurn application. f'1 3 v Caw _ C. Absorptive mat: 1. Cotton fabric, burlap fabric, or burlap -polyethylene material woven or bonded to pr4Ant separation. 2. Material shall be clean and nondetrimental to concrete or finish. 3. Use for curing at Contractor's option except where other products are specified for a particular application. 2.12 SURFACE FINISH MATERIALS A. Curing and sealing compound: 1. Initial curing and sealing application: "Vocomp-20" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 2. Intermediate and final sealing application: "Vocomp-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 3. Final application immediately before turning slab area over to Owner: "Vocomp-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., or equal. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1869 SECTION 03 00 10 - Page 5 4. Use: where shown. 2.13 GROUT A. Regular grout: 1. One part portland cement to 3 parts fine aggregate with sufficient water to maintain adequate workability. Substitute white cement for normal portland cement to match color of adjacent concrete. 2. Minimum strength: 4,500 psi (31 Mpa) at 28 days. 3. Use for patching. B. Nonshrink grout: 1. Nonmetallic and free of chloride, gypsum or corrosive -type materials, ASTM C1107, Grade C, formulation suitable for application. 2. Minimum strength: 5,000 psi (34.5 Mpa) at 28 days. 3. Use for grouting beneath baseplates, bearing plates, equipment bases, and where shown. 2.14 CONCRETE DESIGN AND USE A. Each concrete design mix shall be established in strict accordance with ACI 318 by proportioning on basis of either experience and/or trial mixtures. B. Strength classifications: C. A E. Class Specified Compressive Strength, f'c Required Average Compressive Strength, fcr A 1 4,500 psi 5,700 psi Class Specified Compressive Required Average Strength, f Compressive Strength, fcr A 1 31 MPa 39.3 MPa N Required average compressive strengths: Produce concrete of average strengtl5s note0bova ess test results substantiate a lower permissible average strength based on standard"QviabM criteri2 Set forth in ACI 318. Strengths listed above are 7 -day strengths for concrete using highiearh -stren Z cement and 28 -day strengths for concrete using other type cements. ? �Ln r Maximum water -cement ratio: 0.45 by weight. Where pozzolan fly ash is used, wat ce4nt plu pozzolan ratio shall not exceed specified ratio. — iJ Air entrainment: Concrete is assigned to Exposure Category F2 in accordance wi(h ACI and shall contain entrained air within following limits. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size, in. Total Air Content, Percent By Volume Exposure Classes F2 and F3 3/8 7.5 1/2 7 3/4 6 1 6 1-1/2 5.5 2 5 3 4.5 Nominal Maximum Total Air Content, Percent By Volume Aggregate Size, mm Exposure Classes F2 and F3 9.5 7.5 13 7 CONCRETE WORK 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 03 00 10 ms1869 2.15 19 6 25 6 38 5.5 51 5 76 4.5 F. Workability: 1. Proportions of concrete shall produce a mixture, suited to placement methods, which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement and embedded items. Segregation of materials or presence of free water will not be permitted. 2. Slump of concrete: Use minimum practical; vary within limits given to suit placement conditions; in no case is slump to be increased by addition of water in excess of design mix quantity: Type of Construction Slump, in. Minimum Maximum All concrete unless noted otherwise 2 5 Type of Construction Slump, mm. Minimum Maximum All concrete unless noted otherwise 50 125 G. Class A concrete: Use for all concrete unless specified otherwise. H. Water-soluble chloride ion content, maximum: Concrete is assigned to exposure Category C1, and shall comply with requirements of Chapter 19 of ACI 318-2014. READY -MIX CONCRETE A. Provide concrete from an established, approved ready -mix plant. Ready -mix plant equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA QC -3. B. Equipment and methods: Conform to ASTM C94/C94M. 2.16 FINISHED CONCRETE A. Blended hydraulic cement mix design: Comply with ASTM C595. %Z'? J Ti B. Provide following: C-) 1. Fly ash: Provide replacement rate of 15% of total cementitious materials. Provide 25% total materlrrm- —rn rrrrrr��� , 2. Slag cement: replacement rate of of cementitious o7D - v PART 3 EXECUTION mx O 3.01 PREPARATION oT A. Construct forms strong, straight, adequately braced and securely fastened. B. Install vapor barrier where shown. C. Remove laitance from previously placed or existing concrete; thoroughly clean surface before placing additional concrete. D. Apply form coating on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1869 SECTION 03 00 10 - Page 7 E. Do not apply form coating where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive special finishes which may be affected by agent. Bxr➢� a W_Cel 12 [KKi] 11W ty :4111:1 A. Clean transporting equipment, reinforcing, and embedded items before placing concrete. Remove water and debris from places to be occupied by concrete. B. Place no concrete until forms, reinforcing, and embedded items have been verified as adequately supported and accurately placed. Place no concrete over water -covered, muddy, or frozen soil. C. Immediately remove concrete where water, soils, or other deleterious substances are permitted to mix with concrete, form or embedded item movement occurs, or inadequate consolidation is obtained. D. Hot weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature exceeds 90°F (320C). 2. Conform to ACI 305R recommendations and requirements. E. Cold weather concreting: 1. Applies to concrete placed when ambient temperature is below 40°F (4'C)- 2. Conform to ACI 306R recommendations and requirements. 3. If temporary heating facilities used are of type which produce an atmospheric condition of high carbon dioxide content, seal off concrete in such manner that no damage will result to concrete surface. ro 0 F. Employ best industry practices to prevent segregation during placing. Do not clop cone'wte more than 5'(1500 mm). Use tremied or pumped concrete to provide proper placement. qA& ir*ers approximately 18" (450 mm) deep. G. Place concrete continuously in each section until completed. Permit not more]AP 30 minute between depositing adjacent layers of concrete within each section, unless ari a&lptafte set�rder is used in concrete mix. -- H. H. Thoroughly compact, puddle, and vibrate concrete into corners and around reinforcin&dnd embedded items. Use internal vibration where size of section permits. I. Maintain concrete placing temperature between 50°F (11°C) and 90°F (32°C) except as specked for Hot and cold weather concreting. J. Place sections of concrete in sequence that eliminates shrinkage effects to greatest extent practicable. K. 'Protect concrete from injury due to sun, cold weather, running water, construction operations, and other causes until properly cured. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Remove scale, loose flaky rust, dirt, grease, curing compound, and other coatings that would impair bond. B. Install slab -reinforcing bars in correct position by use of preformed bolsters and spacers, except concrete blocks may be used to position bars in concrete placed on grade. Concrete block shall have compressive strength equal to that of surrounding concrete. C. Space bars properly and tie securely in position before placing concrete. Tack welding to keep reinforcing in place is not permitted. CONCRETE WORK 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 03 00 10 ms1869 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Install only where shown or where specifically permitted. B. Provide keyway 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep covering approximately 1/3 area of construction joint, unless shown otherwise. C. Install bentonite waterseal where shown or specified. D. Location where not shown: 1. Contractor shall locate joints using the following guide for Owners Representative's review. 2. Near center of self -supported slabs, beams, and girders unless beam intersects girder at this point, in which case joints in girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice beam width. 3. Underside of deepest beam at walls and piers. 4. At other places least likely to impair strength and appearance. 5. Provide additional shear reinforcement where requested by Owner's Representative. 6. Maximum pour unit shall be less than 50'(15 m) in any dimension unless specified otherwise. E. A delay, until concrete is no longer plastic, shall occur after placing concrete for columns or walls before placing concrete for slabs, beams, or girders supported thereon. F. Slabs -on -grade: Place concrete in continuous side-by-side strips. Saw -cut control joints as soon as possible after concrete hardens. Allow initial shrinkage of concrete to take place (ideally 90-120 days) before applying sealant. 3.05 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS A. Formed joints: Make exposed edge of concrete slightly rounded with edger at joints to contain joint sealant. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Set preformed material securely in place before placing concrete. C. Install joint filler to within joint width (1/2" (12 mm) minimum) of exposed surface. Fill remainder of joint with joint sealant. v 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS —' N A. Install items required under this contract to be embedded in concrete. Install itAs�quri ed by?Mrs for embedding in concrete, if so instructed before placing concrete. - rc3 ut <1 a M B. Fasten embedded items securely in proper position before placing concrete. M S v om _ C. Conduit or pipe embedded in slabs or walls: jy oo 1. Locate in center of slab or wall and space not closer than 3 diameters on center; loc% to avoid impairing strength of concrete. 2. Coordinate placing of reinforcing with conduit or pipe location. Do not cut reinforcing to clear conduit or pipe. D. Aluminum pipe shall not be embedded in concrete. Where aluminum projects into or rests against surface of concrete, coat surfaces of aluminum to prevent direct contact with concrete. 3.07 GROUTING A. Roughen concrete surfaces by light chipping to remove laitance to approximately 1/2" (12 mm). Do not expose reinforcing steel. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE WORK ms1869 SECTION 03 00 10 - Page 9 B. Remove materials which might interfere with bond; prepare surfaces in strict conformance to manufacturer's instructions. C. Mix, place, and cure grout in strict accordance to manufacturer's instructions. D. Remove shims after grout is placed. Fill shim voids with grout. 3.08 FINISHING A. Flatwork: 1. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. 2. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains. 3. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing operations is not permitted. 4. Apply curing compounds and similar materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during or after finishing. 5. Trowel finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. Steel trowel to smooth, uniform finish, free of defects; steel trowel second time to final burnish finish; use edger on exposed edges. c. Use on interior floor slabs. 6. Float finish: a. Float surface to true, even plane. b. Float second time to uniform finish with wood or cork float; use edger on exposed edges. c. Use on equipment foundations and tops of structure foundations. o 7. Roughened finish: a. Roughen surface with rake or stiff broom to minimum depth of 1/4"(6 b. Use on surfaces to receive additional concrete or grout. 8. Broomed or belted finish: �� a. Float surface to true, even plane. .n b. Steel trowel to smooth, uniform surface. y c. Broom with fiber brush or drag burlap belt across surface indirection trwjs&�asei graffi<n�v. d. Use on sidewalks and exterior slabs at door entrances. -;K N B. Formed surfaces: y 00 1. Remove fins, projections, and loose material. ?. Clean surfaces of form oil. 3. Patch honeycomb, aggregate pockets, voids, and holes as follows: a. Chip out until sound concrete is exposed to minimum depth of 1" (25 mm). b. Prepare patching mortar with approximately 2 parts normal portland cement, one part white cement, 9 parts fine aggregate; vary proportions of cement as necessary to match color of adjacent concrete. c. Saturate surfaces with water and fill cavities with patching mortar. 4. Fill holes left by form ties with patching mortar. 5. Cure patches as specified for concrete. 3.09 FORM REMOVAL A. Minimum time before removal after placing concrete, unless permitted otherwise: 1. Footings: 24 hours. 2. Walls, piers, and columns: 48 hours (24 hours for metal -lined forms). 3. Self -supported beams and slabs: 14 days. 4. Time specified above represents cumulative time during which temperature of concrete is maintained above 50°F (11°C) and for concrete without set -controlling admixtures. B. Reduce removal time by half for high -early -strength cement concrete. C. In any event, do not remove supporting forms and shoring until concrete has acquired sufficient strength to safely support own weight plus construction loads. CONCRETE WORK 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 03 00 10 ms1869 D. Take care when removing forms that concrete is not marred or gouged and that corners are true, sharp and unbroken. E. Reshoring and backshoring: Conform to requirements of Section 2, ACI 301. 3.10 CURING A. Cure all concrete; begin curing as soon as possible after placement of concrete. B. Use of liquid membrane -forming curing compound permitted for all concrete except where product would impair bond of other applied materials to surface, where surface curing and sealing product is specified for use, or where other method of curing is specified for particular use. C. Plastic film curing: 1. Dampen surface of concrete and lay plastic film with minimum 6" (150 mm) side laps and free of wrinkles; tape side laps. 2. Hold film in place with lumber or use similar provisions to prevent exposure of concrete for 7 days after placing. 3. Immediately repair tears in film. D. Water curing: 1. Keep concrete continuously wet for 7 days after placing. 2. Use on concrete surfaces not receiving compound or plastic film curing. 3. Clean, nonstaining absorptive mat may be used with water curing. 4. Do not use for curing cold weather concrete. 3.11 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUND A. Initial curing and sealing application shall be applied immediately after concrete has sufficiently set to allow application without damaging surface. B. Second application shall be applied 28 days after slab is cast. C. Final application shall be applied immediately before turning the slab area over to Owner. 3.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Formwork: Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integriVf concrete ' and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. $ B. Mixing equipment: Return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used t eipmer" ` c->-< C. Moisture curing: Prevent water run-off. -+c') m <f p. END OF SECTION o 1) A. L. Bickford X* o 2) W. T. Turechek —I 26710.01.00 METAL FABRICATIONS ms1869 SECTION 05 50 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Other steel, iron, and metal items. B. Miscellaneous metal. C. Welding materials. D. Anchor rods for installation of other steel, iron and metal items. E. Adhesive anchors. F. Mechanical anchors. G. Masonry anchors. H. Shop painting. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: List of manufactured materials proposed, identifying manufacturer and type. B. Test Reports: ICC -ES evaluation reports for post -installed adhesive anchors, mechanical anchors, masonry anchors provided to verify conformance to specifications. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for other steel, iron or metal items as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice. 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and tyke of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details wheref2pplicable. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. o(.12� M c.� 3. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCErrI --in CJi A. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 3 B. Perform fabrication in accordance with AISC 303-10 "Code of Standard Practicj;�or Stq4Buildings and Bridges'. m C. Perform erection in accordance with AISC 303-10 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Adhere to product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage. C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather. METAL FABRICATIONS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 05 50 00 ms1869 PART PRODUCTS 2 01 MATERIALS A. Steel plates and shapes: 1. Structural W -shapes: ASTM A992/A992M Grade 50. 2. Structural M -shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. 3. Structural S -shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. 4. Structural T -shapes: Cut from structural W -shapes, M -shapes, or S -shapes. 5. Structural HP -shapes: ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50. 6. Channels and angles: ASTM A36/A36M. 7. Round hollow structural sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. 8. Rectangular hollow structural sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. 9. Structural pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. 10. Structural plates and bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M. C. Standard bolts: ASTM A307. D. Threaded rods: ASTM A36 E. Nuts: 1. ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) Heavy hex type. 2. ' Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized. F. Washers: 1. ASTM F436 (ASTM F436M); Type 1, Furnish clipped or beveled washers where required. 2 Finish: Hot dipped galvanized. r 1\K11d,C110:1f_1161 A. Steel: AWS D1.1; type as required for materials being welded. f'xr'k? ••t1 I [y : [@]:a :1@7 91.1 29 o_ A. Provide anchor rod assemblies for: J N 1. Other steel, iron, and metal items furnished under this Section. �� ..... 2. Equipment and structures furnished by others, where detailed on Drawings. n r ut T B. Anchor rods: . y; 1 n 1. Type: ASTM F1554; Grade 36. � 7G v 2. Shape: Straight. p7t 3. Plate washers: ASTM A36/A36M. �o 4. Provide washers and heavy hexagon heads and nuts on anchor bolts unless specified.o[herwise. 5. Provide double nuts for anchor bolts used for installation of machines and other equipment subject to vibration. 6. Galvanize anchor bolts, nuts and washers. C. Threaded rods: 1. Type: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized. 2.04 ADHESIVEANCHORS A. Threaded rods anchored in concrete with 2 -component blend of resin and hardener. Filler material may be mixed with resin and hardener in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 26710.01.00 METAL FABRICATIONS ms1869 SECTION 05 50 00 - Page 3 B. Anchor rod system shall have ICC approval for use in cracked concrete and for seismic conditions and shall have passed mandatory creep tests requirements of AC 308. C. Threaded rod type: 1. All -threaded. 2. Standard: ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. Use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. High-strength: ASTM All 93/A193M, Grade B7, galvanized. 4. Stainless steel: ASTM F593 (AISI 304). D. Manufacturer: "HIT -RE 500 -SD System" by Hilti; "SET -XP" by Simpson Strong Tie, or equal. 2.05 MECHANICAL ANCHORS A. Torque controlled wedge -type with expanding cone. B. Size and locations: As shown or required for equipment installation. C. Ductile, Category 1, approved for use in seismic applications, cracked and uncracked concrete, and shall have ICC approval in accordance with AC 193. D. Type: 1. As indicated on Drawings: 2. Expansion anchor: a. Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): Carbon steel with a eWroplated zinc. b. Stainless steel. c. Manufacturer: "Kwik -Bolt TZ" by Hilti, "Strong -Bolt 2" by Simpson Stag-Tie,Z4equ� Cn rn 2.06 MASONRY ANCHORS -� { A. Masonry anchor rods: 771 C) 1. All -threaded. �n a 2. Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): ASTM F1554, Gr i6,mlvano. 3. Stainless steel: Threaded ASTM F593 (AISI 304) 4. Provide washers and heavy hexagon heads and nuts on anchor bolts unless specify d otherwise. B. .Solid -core masonry anchors (anchored in grout -filled or solid masonry): 1. Use unless masonry anchors are noted on Drawings as "Adhesive Hollow Masonry Anchors." .2. Type: a. Adhesive anchor: "HIT-HY-70 Adhesive System" by Hilti, or equal. 1) Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. 2) Stainless steel: ASTM F593 (AISI 304). b. Mechanical expansion anchor: "Kwik Bolt 3" by Hilti, or equal. 1) Standard (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): Hot -dip galvanized steel. 2) Stainless steel. 3. Fill hollow core masonry cells with grout where anchors will be installed. C. Adhesive hollow masonry anchors: 1. Manufacturer: "HIT-HY-70 Adhesive System" by Hilti with screen; or equal. a. Standard rod (use unless indicated otherwise on Drawings): ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized. b. Stainless steel rod: Threaded ASTM F593 (AISI 304) 2. Use for nonstructural anchoring of light weight equipment or where specifically identified for use on Drawings. Resulting anchor loads shall be less than manufacturer's allowable loads. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING A. Surface preparation: Remove oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign elements by "Power Tool Cleaning" in accordance with SSPC-SP3. METAL FABRICATIONS 26710.01.00 Page 4 — SECTION 05 50 00 ms1869 B. Shop primer: 1. Apply one shop coat of Tnemec Co., Inc., "10 Rust Inhibitive Primer," or equal. 2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions including recommended coverage. 3. Coordinate color with Owner for steel not receiving finish coatings. C. Omit shop prime coat from surfaces subject to field welding or to be embedded in concrete. D. Omit shop prime coat from galvanized surfaces. E. Leave unpainted steel clean and free from rust. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Anchor miscellaneous items securely to structural steel framing, concrete or masonry. B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. C. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. D. Field weld components where indicated on Drawings. E. Perform field welding and inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates for metal items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 ANCHOR RODS A. Install embedded anchor rods as shown on Drawings. i '. B. Coat threaded portion of anchor rods with oil or grease and wrap with protective tape at9ne bolts are :positioned for new construction. Tape shall remain in place until rods are secuLa . � 3.04 ADHESIVE ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE MASONRY ANCHORS n rA A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. =rn � Mz► n B. Perform work using manufacturer's standard equipment including adhesive car�pmps, enslrM guns, mixer tubes and extensions, brush, and air nozzle for compressed air cle* of i�eles. v Contractor shall possess equipment at site prior to start of installation and workos shall&monstrate knowledge of procedure for installing anchors prior to installation. —r C. Use hammer drill except where holes are within 6" (150 mm) of edge of concrete or masonry, core drill holes. D. Inspect existing concrete and masonry at anchor locations for soundness. Report to Engineer cracked, deteriorated or weak concrete or masonry detected from drilling operation or from inspection. 3.05 MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND MECHANICAL MASONRY ANCHORS A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 26710.01.00 METAL FABRICATIONS ms1869 SECTION 05 50 00 - Page 5 B. Use manufacturer's installation equipment. 3.06 FIELD PAINTING A. Apply one field coat of primer to cleaned surfaces of bolts, new welds and abrasions to shop coat after erection. B. Do not paint galvanized steel work. C. After erection, repair hot -dip galvanized coatings in accordance with ASTM A780. This includes surfaces where shop -applied galvanized coatings have been damaged, removed, or omitted. END OF SECTION 1) A. L. Bickford 2) W. T. Turechek ti 0 O =+ -�� N r r M �� s D N r 26710.01.00 SPECIALTY DOORS AND FRAMES ms1869 SECTION 08 30 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rolling service doors. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings indicating pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and details, anchorage methods, hardware location, and installation details. 1.03 CLOSETOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data for shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, control adjustments, and spare part sources. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cookson Co. B. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. C. North American Rolling Door. D. Overhead Door Corp. E. Raynor Garage Doors. EF. Materials referenced in this Section are manufactured by Cookson, unless noted otherwise. • 2p2 ROLLING SERVICE DOORS A., Series ESD20 "Thermiser" insulated rolling door, with bottom weatherseal, exterior guide, and internal hood seals for exterior use: 1. Curtain slat: Galvanized steel/galvanized steel (no paint finish). Manufacturer -recommended gage based on performance requirements. Minimum 24/24 gage, Grade 40, ASTM A653 galvanized steel zinc coating. 2. Slat finish: SpectraShield® coating system. Colors selected by Owner from manut2gurer's standard colors after award of Contract. is =i a. ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsin nts�Q pre on for chemical bonding, gray baked -on base coat and gray baked -on po leC r film co, b. Zirconium treatment followed by baked -on polyester powder coat. MiOmItmol 2..5 mils(G.G65 mm) cured film thickness; ASTM D3363. —!n 1 c. Pencil hardness: H or better. ---'9 3 M 3. Insulation: 7/8" (22 mm) foamed -in-place, closed cell urethane. p;a _ 0 4. Total slat thickness: 15/16" (24 mm). 5. Operation: Chain -hoist. D p 6. Size and location: See Door Schedule on Drawings. —r B. Components: 1. Endlocks: a. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon endlocks on alternate slats each secured with two 1/4" (6 mm) rivets. b. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load. SPECIALTY DOORS AND FRAMES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 08 30 00 ms1869 2. Insulated bottom bar: a. Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and exterior skin slat to match curtain material and gage. b. Minimum 4" (75 mm) tall x 1-1/16"(30 mm) thickness. c. Finish to match slats. 3. Guides: a. Minimum 3/16" (4.76 mm) stainless steel angles. b. Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. c. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bell mouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. d. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar. e. Finish: Type 304 stainless steel; No. 4 finish. 4. Brackets: a. Fabricate from minimum 3/16" (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. b. Finish: Corrosion Inhibitive. Zirconium treatment followed by corrosion inhibitive baked -on zinc -enriched gray polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. 5. Hood (exterior mount, sloped): a. Minimum 24 gage stainless steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. b. Provide minimum 1/4" (6 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. c. Finish: Type 304 stainless steel; No. 4 finish. 6. Counterbalance: a. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03" per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. b. Locks: Master-keyable cylinder operable from coil side of bottom bar, options f40311 types of operation. Standard mortise cylinder. 7. Weatherstripping: Bottom bar. C:) a. Manually operated doors: Replaceable, bulb -style, compressible EDP"W(cetQendiP@4mto guides. b. Guides: Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side ofiiy�tain. u1 c. Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil. M, a rn = d. Lintel seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow. v 8. Hood and operator covers: a. Metal cover shall protect coil or operator from exterior weather, debris orlw meet OSHA or UL 325 safety requirements. —j b. Finish: Type 304 stainless steel; No. 4 finish. 9. Vision panels: a. 10"x 1-1/2" x 3/4" thick (250 x 38 x 19 mm) oval acrylic panes set with double -sided foam glazing tape and fully contained within slat assembly. b. Refer to drawings for number and placement. c. Smaller vision panels not acceptable. 2.03 OPERATION A. Manual control guard chain hoist: 1. Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide. 2; Chain hoist shall include integral brake mechanism that will immediately stop upward or downward travel and maintain door in stationary position when hand chain is released. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within limits. 26710.01.00 SPECIALTY DOORS AND FRAMES ms1869 SECTION 08 30 00 - Page 3 B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit, align, and adjust door assemblies level and plumb; provide smooth operation. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust door assembly. B. Clean doors and frames. C. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION 1) A. Baharani 2) C. M. Chamberlin t c r --4 : <m C') m M 3> o 26710.01.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ms1869 SECTION 08 41 13 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum frames, and storefront framing. B. Anchors, brackets, and attachments. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings indicating system and component dimensions, components within assembly, framed opening requirements and tolerances, anchorage and fasteners, infills, and affected related work. B. Three samples, 4" x4" (100 mm x 100 mm) in size, illustrating prefinished aluminum surface. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: Hardware shall conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. o O 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING n � ryn -? -t -v .� A. Deliver materials to Site and store in dry, protected location to prevent damage.n'"- r --4 n B. factory provide -applied strippable coating to protect prefinished aluminum surfaei§'n 3 �1 CS 1.07 WARRANTY _ T V n N A. Provide 3year manufacturer's warranty. Warranty shall cover complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System shall provide for expansion and contraction within system component caused by a cycling temperature range of 170°F (77°C) without causing detrimental effects to system or components. 1. Maximum deflection of 1/175 of span. 2. Allowable stress with safety factor of 1.65. 3. System shall perform these criteria under wind load requirements for construction area. B. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with IBC 2012 code. Limit mullion deflection to U175, or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. C. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 08 41 13 ms1869 D. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft (0311/seem2) of assembly surface area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 0.3" wg (75 Pa), as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. E. Water leakage: None when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with pressure difference of 8 psf (384 PA). F. System shall accommodate, without damage to system or components, or deterioration of perimeter seal: Movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded aluminum: ASTM 8221; 6063-T5 alloy and temper. B. Sheet aluminum: ASTM 8209. C. Sheet steel: ASTM A446; galvanized. D. Steel sections: ASTM A36; shapes to suit mullion sections. E. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Specified systems shall include all required accessories, consisting of, but not limited to, the following: All anchorage devices, shims, fasteners, trim and flashing materials. Extended sills shall be included at window units where indicated. Metal sills shall be thermally broken. B. Type 4: Nominal 2" (50 mm) wide by 6" (150 mm) deep framing system. 1. "Trifab" by Kawneer Co., Inc. 2. "400 Series" by Tubelite Inc. 3. "Thermo Set" System by United State Aluminum Corporation. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. 0 B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and comers. Make joints and connections flush, hairl5e, and" - weatherproof. •S7 CCA C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. n"< N I D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. ff;) `oma = 0 - E. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. o r F. Reinforce and prepare frames for hardware and other electronic devices. 2.05 FINISHES A. Exposed aluminum surfaces: Color and finish selected by Owner. B. Concealed steel items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386. C. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 26710.01.00 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ms1869 SECTION 08 41 13 - Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive framing materials. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of adjacent conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of wrap or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Install sill flashings. E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from plane: 0.03"M (0.78 mm/m) maximum or 0.25'730'(6 mm/9 m), whichever is less. B. Misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 0.015" (0.4 mm). 3.04 CLEANING w 0 A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. o =+ _h r � rn B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water. a�ieddith so(1,-. clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces cle .n N r- C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceprle gsealAnt manufacturer. ?� — Ii END OF SECTION ry i J 1) A. Baharani 2) C. M. Chamberlin 26710.01.00 GLAZING ms1869 SECTION 08 80 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass types. B. Glazing materials and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 4100 —Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples of glazing and components. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. buardian Industries. B. Interpane. C. Pilkington. D. PPG Industries, Inc. E. - Viracon, Inc. o F. Materials referenced in this Section are manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc., cgfM nefRd otherwise. 2.02 GLASS TYPES 'tn cn :< m A. Type 11: o' ^ 1. Low -E glass, insulating double -glazed unit, with heat -strengthened gray exl litejhd he'dtt strengthened clear float interior lite, with Sungate 100Low-E coating. o 2. Quality: q3 glazing select. "j 3. Thickness: 1" (25 mm), consisting of 2 lites of 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass with 1/2" (13 mm) sealed air space. 4. Use: Aluminum storefront alternate in accordance with Section 01 20 00. 2.03 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing compound: Modified oil type, nonhardening, knife grade consistency; color to be selected by Owner after award of Contract. B. Butyl sealant: Single -component; Shore A durometer hardness of 10-20; black color; nonskinning. C. Silicone sealant: Single -component, solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; nonbleeding; nonstaining; color: to be selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors after award of contract. GLAZING 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 08 80 00 ms1869 D. Extruded neoprene or EPDM gaskets. E. Confine compatibility of glazing sealants with glass manufacturer. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Material and size as recommended by glazing and frame manufacturers. B. Spacer shims: Material and size as recommended by glazing and frame manufacturers. C. Glazing tape: Preformed butyl -compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; coiled on release paper; black color. D. Glazing clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for Work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. a B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, if recommended by sealant manufaaafer. r --s n Ln 3.03 INSTALLATION =< rnrn A. Comply with CPSC 16 CFR C1, FGMA Glazing Manual and SIGMA standards. N J B. Install glass in frames in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Completed installation shall be weathertight and secure, withstanding normal temperature changes, wind loads and live loads, without failure, including glass breakage and component failure. D. Do no outside glazing in damp or dusty weather or when temperature is below 40°F (4°C). E. Protect glass from breakage. At large panels, use cross streamers of tape attached to frames but held off glass surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove nonpermanent labels, wash, and polish both faces of glass. Comply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. B. Remove and replace any damaged or defective glass. END OF SECTION 1) A. Baharani 2) C. M. Chamberlin 26710.01.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ms1869 SECTION 09 96 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. On-site surface preparation and field painting of surfaces as indicated in "Painting Schedule," this Section. 1.02 WORK EXCLUDED A. Do not paint following materials, items, and areas unless specifically indicated in "Painting Schedule." 1. Surfaces of glass, china, vitreous enamel, chrome -plating, rubber, stainless steel, brass, bronze, copper, aluminum, fiberglass, plastic, and galvanized metal. 2. Lighting fixtures, electrical cabinets, control panels, transformers, and panel boards. 3. Exterior surfaces of concrete. 4. Concrete surfaces. 5. Concrete floors, stairs, and equipment foundations. 6. Switchplates, nameplates, and finish hardware. 7. Lubrication fittings, valve stems, and shafting. 8. Cast iron floor drains, manhole frames, cover, and steps. 9. Contact surfaces of moving parts and machined surfaces of equipment. 10. Piping underground or embedded in concrete. 11. Louvers. 12. Factory prefinished equipment except touch-up. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 50 00 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications: Shop priming on miscellaneous metals. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ro 0 A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturers product data for each coating, including generic description -G7 leftechnIM data, surface preparation, and application instructions. >--t -o 2. Manufacturers standard warranty. n"< cr r -=r n M B. Quality assurance: =�r1n g 1. Manufacturers certification that coatings comply with specified requirementO ar€f uitab®r intended application. c 2. List of a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and complexity to As Work Anclude for each project: a. Project name and location. b. Name of owner. c. Name of contractor. d. Name of engineer. e. Name of coating manufacturer. f. Approximate area of coatings applied. g. Date of completion. 3. Coatings applicator(s) credentials including experience and NACE or other certifications. Owner reserves right to reject proposed applicator based on inexperience or lack of credentials. 4. Coatings application work plan to include: a. Surface preparation standards and general overview of procedures for each type of coating/metal/service. Surface preparation work plan shall include blast media, equipment, and measures for containing blast residues. Blast media containment is defined as preventing media entering pipes, drains, and sumps, and appropriate draping and drops to retain and collect bulk of blast media residue allowing residue to be removed from Site and properly disposed of. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 09 96 00 ms1869 b. Coating information for each service shall include coating manufacturer, type, environmental conditions required for application, drying and recoat times, and special manufacturers instructions. c. Quality control plan to ensure proper surface preparation and blast profile, correct coatings, uniform application of each coat, and conformance to required thicknesses. Quality control plan shall identify method(s) used to verify coating thicknesses are obtained including measurement types, frequencies, and reporting. d. Contractor shall adhere to coating application work plan, quality control plan, and manufacturer's instructions. e. Verification test results showing test locations, method, and thickness. f. Quality control and other testing forms to be used for documenting conformance to Contract Documents. 5. Demonstrate blasting techniques to Owner for each type of blast required. Blast demonstrations will be performed on metal specimens of same metal as being used and coated on project. After concurrence by Owner on acceptability of blast results for each type of blast, each representative specimen will be coated with a clear polyurethane coat and used as a quality control reference during surface preparation work. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Manufacturer's color samples showing full range of standard colors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Specialize in manufacture of coatings with a minimum of 10 years successful experience. 2. Able to demonstrate successful performance on comparable projects. 3. Single -source responsibility: Coatings and coating application accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer. 4. Selected manufacturer shall provide list of local or regional coating vendors who hay ibeen in business for at least 5 years. o o -+ B. Applicator's qualifications: yc? m 1. Experienced in application of specified coatings for a minimum of 5 years 0 ect-Af sim"k size and complexity to this Work. cI r 2. Applicator's personnel: Employ persons trained for application of specified _ngs. a rn C. Preapplication meeting: Convene preapplication meeting 2 weeks before start of lica on ot® coating systems. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this sey ion, including Contractor, Owner, Engineer, applicator, and manufacturer's representative. Review th@3ollowing: 1. Environmental requirements. 2. Protection of surfaces not scheduled to be coated. 3. Surface preparation. 4. Application. 5. Disinfection. 6. Repair. 7. Field quality control. 8. Cleaning. 9. Protection of coating systems. 10. One-year inspection. 11. Coordination with other work. D. Mock-ups: Prepare 10' x 10' mock-up for each coating system specified using same materials, tools, equipment, and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and application. Obtain Engineer's approval of mock-ups. Retain mock-ups to establish intended standards by which coating systems will be judged. 26710.01.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ms1869 SECTION 09 96 00 - Page 3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying: 1. Coating or material name. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Color name and number. 4. Batch or lot number. 5. Date of manufacture. 6. Mixing and thinning instructions. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in a clean dry area and within temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. 3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturers shelf life limits. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather: 1. Air and surface temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Surface temperature: Minimum of 5°F (3°C) above dew point. 3. Relative humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative humidity range in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 4. Precipitation: Do not prepare surfaces or apply coatings in rain, snow, fog, or mist. r. 5. Wind: Do not spray coatings if wind velocity is above manufacturer's limit. 6. Protect surfaces and work from elements as necessary to provide appropriagconditis for application and curing. �� r"- �. 7. Provide acceptable environmental conditions including heating, cooling, and YerZatin�or �+' coatings application and curing if seasonal weather prevailing at time of coatilgr*pf tion r� conducive to coatings application. tr1 � B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or an arMZW in accordance with AWWA D102. e O C. Dust and contaminants: 1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. 2. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminants during coating application and curing. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carbonline. B. DuPont. C. Induron. D. Pittsburg Paints. E. Sherwin Williams Company. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 09 96 00 ms1869 F. Tnemec Company, Incorporated. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coating materials listed under "Coating System" are manufactured by Tnemec Company, except as indicated otherwise. B. Paint accessory materials: Linseed oil, turpentine, and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve finishes specified of high quality and approved manufacturer. C. Paints: Ready -mixed except field catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly dispersing to complete homogeneous mixture. D. Paints to have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. E. Coating systems: 1. System A: a. Type: Aromatic/Epoxy/Urethane. b. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP 6, 1.8 mil blast profile, 1.5 to 2.0 mil range. 2. Primer: Zinc -rich, epoxy or aromatic urethane suitable for exterior, non immersion g rvice and compatible with intermediate and finish coats. Series 90-97. a. Zinc content, minimum: 80% by weight in dry film. O b. Solids content, minimum: 60% mixed C-.) rrn c. OFT 2.5 to 3.5 mils. y'-- 1 -0 d. Intermediate coat: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II DFT 2.5 to 3.5 mil's Ln I e. Finish coat: Series 1073 or 1074 Endura -Shield, DFT 2.5 to 3.5 mils. Irlrn f. Total DFT: 7.5 to 10.5 mils. - M 3 g. Use: Exterior steel surfaces, non -immersion. c� 3. System B: a. Type: Coal tar epoxy. b. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP 10, 2.0 mil blast profile. c. Primer: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline ll, DFT 3.0 to 5.0 mils. d. Finish coat: Series 46H-413 Hi -Build Tneme-Tar. DFT 14.0 to 20.0 mils. e. Total DFT: 17.0 to 25.0 mils. f. Use: Exterior below grade steel surfaces. 4. System C: a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP 5, 1.8 mil blast profile, 1.5 to 2.0 mil range. b. Primer: Series 446 Perma-Shield, DFT 7.0 to 10.0 mils. c. Finish coat: Series 446 Perma-Shield, DFT 7.0 to 10.0 mils. d. Total DFT: 14.0 to 20.0 mils e. Alternate: Induron Cermasafe Ceramic Filled amine cured epoxy. Spray applied 2 wet coats. Total DFT: 25 to 36 mils. f. Use: Interior and exterior steel surfaces, non -immersion (severe exposure). 5. System E: a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP 5, 1.8 mil blast profile, 1.5 to 2.0 mil range. b. Primer: 1) Hydrophobic aromatic polyurethane suitable for immersion service in wastewater and compatible with finish coats. Solids content, minimum: 70% mixed. 2) Series 446 Perma-Shield,. DFT 7.0 to 10.0 mils. 3) Finish coat: Series 446 Perma-Shield, or equal. DFT 7.0 to 10.0 mils. 4) Total DFT: 14 to 20 mils. 5) Alternate: Induron Cermasafe Ceramic Filled amine cured epoxy. Spray applied 2 wet coats. Total DFT: 25 to 36 mils. Finish color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. c. Coats shall have differing colors to assist with uniform application. d. Use: Immersion including 1' above liquid level or non -immersion steel. 6. System G: a. Surface preparation: Solvent clean. 26710.01.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ms1869 SECTION 09 96 00 - Page 5 F. Colors shall be selected after award of Contract. b. First coat: 27-1255 Typoxy, epoxy-polyamide coating, 3.0 mils OFT. c. Second coat: 74 Endura -Shield, high -build acrylic polyurethane enamel, 3.0 mils OFT. d. Use: Exterior galvanized steel surfaces, nonimmersion (mild exposure). 7. System H: a. Type: Vinyl ester b. Surface preparation: Brush-off blast cleaning for concrete and white blast cleaning for steel. c. First coat: 120-5002 Vinester, vinylester, 12.0 mils OFT. d. Second coat: 120-5001 Vinester, vinylester, 12.0 mils OFT. e. Use: Digester interior concrete walls and steel surfaces. 8. System I: a. Type: Epoxy. b. Surface preparation: Clean and dry. c. Primer: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline It. OFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils. d. Finish coat: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II. OFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils. e. Total OFT: 8.0 to 12.0 mils. f. Use: Interior concrete masonry. 9. System J: a. Type: Vinyl-acrylic/acrylic-epoxy. b. Surface preparation: Clean and dry. c. Primer: Series 51-792 PVA Sealer. DFT 1.0 to 2.0 mils. d. Finish coat: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline It. DFT 5.0 to 7.0 mils. e. Total DFT: 5.0 to 8.0 mils. f. Use: Interior gypsum drywall and plaster. 10. System L: a. Type: Epoxy/urethane. b. Surface preparation: Clean and dry. c. Primer: Factory primed. d. Intermediate coat: Series 27 Typoxy. 2.0 to 3.0 mils OFT. e. Finish coat: Series 73 Endura -Shield. 2.0 to 3.0 mils OFT. f. Total DFT: 4.0 to 6.0 mils. g. Use: Exterior and interior primed ferrous metals. 11. System M: a. Type: Epoxy. b. Surface preparation: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions o c. Primer: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline It. OFT 3.0 to 5.0 mils. d. Finish coat: Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II. OFT 4.0 to 6.0 mils. C:) rn e. Total OFT: 7.0 to 10.0 mils f. Use: Asphaltic -coated ductile iron pipe. c>� r 12. System N: tc rn a. Type: Acrylic. Gr y, b. Surface preparation: Clean. Dry and contaminate free. c. Primer: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete. DFT 4.5 to 8.0 mils. 7ft d. Finish coat: Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete. OFT 4.5 to 8.0 mils. o e. Total DFT: 9.0 to 16.0 mils. -i f. Use: Nonimmersion concrete. 13. System P: a. Finish coat: 2 coats Armorseal 1000 HS, B67 Series. b. Use: Concrete floors. 14. System Q: a. Type: Epoxy b. Surface preparation: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Manufacturer: Phenicon HS Flak Filled, Part A -920 -R -A11, Part B -700-C-825, Sherwin- Williams, or equal. d. Use: Concrete spill containment. F. Colors shall be selected after award of Contract. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 09 96 00 ms1869 401119 191 Z 3.01 PAINTING–GENERAL A. Provide surface preparation, materials, equipment, and labor for painting specified. B. Apply coating materials and finishes to surfaces of new exposed Work, except surfaces specifically excluded hereinafter. Existing construction shall be painted only where disturbed by new work. C. Prime unprimed field -fabricated material in manner specified in this Section. D. Touch up factory -applied and other completed finishes using methods and materials which produce repaired surface closely matching original finish. E. Remove rough areas of structural steel using grinder or other applicable power tools to smooth rough areas on structural steel resulting from cutting and welding. F. Paint surfaces of physical hazards in accordance with OSHA Section 1910.144. G. Determine compatibility of primers with paints to be applied over them. If priming, undercoating, or finish coating specified does not conform in every way to recommendations of manufacturers, prepare schedule of recommended coatings and submit to Owner for review. Any resulting changes shall be made at no additional cost to Owner. ._371A[W-1we7k, 0 A. Examine areas and conditions under which coating systems are to be applied. t35ify Owner of areas or conditions not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application untilt"cco gable areas or conditions have been corrected. - --o CIn 3.03 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED -4 C1 m M A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated from damage_du&g sur. ace v ' preparation and application of coatings. N B. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. C. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from Site. D. Protect electrical plates, nameplates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings, prior to painting operations. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. E. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated. 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather: 1. Air and surface temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Surface temperature: Minimum of 5°F (3°C) above dew point. 3. Relative humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative humidity range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Precipitation: Do not prepare surfaces or apply coatings in rain, snow, fog, or mist. 5. Wind: Do not spray coatings if wind velocity is above manufacturer's limit. 26710.01.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ms1869 SECTION 09 96 00 - Page 7 B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or enclosed areas in accordance with AW WA D102. C. Dust and contaminants: 1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. 2. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminants during coating application and curing. 3.05 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Surface preparation shall conform to recommendations of paint manufacturer and these Specifications to ensure satisfactory performance of each coating system. B. Rooms and spaces: Broom -clean before field painting is started. C. Surfaces, before painting and between coats, shall be dry, smooth and free from dust, rust, loose mill scale, grease, grit, and frost. D. Wire brushing shall be used only to remove loose dirt. E. Galvanized steel not phosphatized and aluminum surfaces: Wash clean with solvent in accordance with SSPC-SP1; scrub wetted surfaces with metal scouring pad. F. Iron and steel: 1. Cleaning methods: Conform to applicable requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council: a. Solvent cleaning: SSPC-SP1. 2. Power tool cleaning: SSPC-SP3. a. Commercial blast cleaning: SSPC-SP6. b. Near -white blast cleaning: SSPC-SP10. c. White blast cleaning: SSPC-SPS. 3. Blast cleaning requirements: a. Nonsubmerged: SSPC-SP6. b. Submerged or buried: SSPC-SP10. O -� c. Digester and sludge equalization tank interior submerged or nonsubme�lt,♦�tei;�j SSPC9.I SP5. 4. Cleaning for other field painting: SSPC-SP3. 5. Removal of materials such as grease and oil: SSPC-SP1. -+n 6. Surface irregularities from blasting shall be approximately 30% of total paint 4*%M r!2 mil O thickness. oma' 7. Blast profile requirement for all SSP6-SP10 abrasive blast -cleaned surfaces *De' 1. -p il. G. Masonry: 1. Curing time: Minimum 60 days. Surface moisture must conform to requirements listed hereinafter. 2. Patch cracks and holes with mortar or patching compound. 3. Remove chalk, dust, dirt, and efflorescence by scraping and brushing. H. Concrete: 1. Curing time: Minimum 60 days. Surface moisture must conform to requirements listed hereinafter. 2. Remove dust, form oil, and curing compounds. 3. If smooth, etch by washing with solution of muriatic acid; remove laitance to secure proper bond of paint. 4. Wash clean with water. 5. Areas subject to immersion shall be brush -blast cleaned. I. Plaster: 1. Curing time: Minimum 28 days. 2. Remove protrusions by scraping. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 09 96 00 ms1869 3. Remove grease and oil by hot cleaning solution of 2 Ib. of trisodium phosphate to each gallon of water. 4. Wash clean with water. 5. Patch voids and cracks; sand Flush. J. Hollow metal and factory -finished equipment: 1. Clean off oil and grease by use of proper solvent. 2. Remove scale and rust by scraping or with wire brushes. 3. Touch up abrasions and marred spots of surface coating. K. Gypsum board: 1. Prepare gypsum board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. 3. Sand joint compound smooth and feather edge. 4. Avoid heavy sanding of adjacent gypsum board surfaces, which will raise nap of paper covering. 5. Do not apply putty, patching pencils, caulking, or masking tape to drywall surfaces to be painted. 6. Lightly scuff -sand tape joints after priming to remove raised paper nap. Do not sand through primer. L. Wood: 1. Prepare wood surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, surface deposits of sap or pitch, and other contaminants. 3. Seal knots and pitch pockets. 4. Sand rough spots with the grain. 5. Fill cracks and holes with approved materials after primer is dry. Sand flush with surface when filler is hard. 6. Lightly sand between coats. 3.06 APPLICATION a CD �+ A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. V B. Mix and thin coatings, including multicomponent materials, in accordance with_"uf"rer'sr' instructions. r r . C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination. D. A` Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits. N E. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified dry film thickness. G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems. H. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using specified primer. 0:1 M-11:1 A. Materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated: Repair or replace damaged materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated. B. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of minor damage shall be acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, or color. 26710.01.00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS ms1869 SECTION 09 96 00 - Page 9 C. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions coatings that exhibit film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems. D. One-year inspection: 1. Owner will set date for one-year inspection of coating systems. 2. Inspection shall be attended by Owner, Contractor, and manufacturer's representative. 3. Repair deficiencies in coating systems as determined by Owner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for surface preparation and application of coating systems. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces. 3.10 PROTECTION OF COATING SYSTEMS A. Protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction. 3.11 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Upon completion of Work leave premises neat and clean. 3.12 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Apply specified coatings to items indicated in schedule below: Item System Exterior Items Hollow metal doors and frames — L Steel lintels L Steel guard posts f9 L Miscellaneous exposed ferrous metal a L Cement plaster — N J Ferrous piping and valves nonsubmer ed –C A Miscellaneous nonsubmer ed ferrous metals unless otherwise s ecified A J Coilingdoors L Interior Items 3 Hollow metal doors and frames –J L Steel lintels L Concrete masonry I Miscellaneous exposed ferrous metals L Pumps and motors nonsubmer ed C Ferrous piping and valves nonsubmer ed C Miscellaneous nonsubmer ed ferrous metals unless otherwise specified) C Exposed coated ductile iron pipe M Coiling doors I L B. Refer to Section 40 23 36 for piping color code. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 09 96 00 ms1869 C. Omission of paint from contact surfaces of connections where high-strength bolts are used shall conform to AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." D. Metals furnished under this Contract requiring primer shall have primer applied in shop, unless specified otherwise. E. Apply field coats to cleaned surfaces of bolts, field welds, omissions, and abrasions to shop coats. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) N O �_ C? Cn to rn _� r� cn r— _<rrn s y t'j ry J 26710.01.00 WINDOW BLINDS ms1869 SECTION 12 21 00- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Curtain strips and accessories. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, operating features, and material list. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Samples: Two samples, 10" (250 mm) long illustrating strip materials and finish, type and color for each accessory. D. Quality assurance data: Manufacturer's Installation Instructions including special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with installation and placement of mounting rods. 1.05 WARRANTY A Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty. PART PRODUCTS 201 MANUFACTURERS A. Akon Curtain and Divider. o B. Materials referenced in this Section are manufactured by Akon Curtain and Differ unless J notm otherwise. Equivalent products from other manufacturers are acceptable. p � r" .�++ C7� 1 2.02 CURTAIN A. Type: Clear, flat, heavy-duty. -< * _ 0 B. Material: PVC vinyl. q O J C. Size: 60" (1.5 m) wide, 9'-0" (2.7 m) long; 0.120" gage. D. Mount: 1. Sliding mount from ceiling. 2. Use appropriate mount for hollow core pre -cast concrete plank roof deck. 3. Manufacturers recommended size and quantity of rods and brackets for mounting. 4. Material: Stainless steel. E. Provide unit with necessary hardware for complete installation. WINDOW BLINDS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 12 2100 ms1869 PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify ceiling is ready to receive work. B. Verify structural supports are correctly placed. 3.02 EXISTING WORK A. Patch surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's specifications, standards, and procedures. B. Secure in place with fasteners. C. Install curtain strips plumb, level, and true with connecting hardware. END OF SECTION 1) A. Baharani 2) C. M. Chamberlin N O r= ti r. :Grn Cn <` L- N O :Grn a 3 0 y 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SERVICES SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 20 05 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Motor starters. B. Factory -wired panels. C. Wiring. D. Equipment guards. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Factory -wired panel: Control or electrical panel included with mechanical equipment wired in factory by equipment supplier. All wiring within panel completed at factory and panel has terminals for incoming power wiring. B. Power wiring: Circuitry carrying electrical energy from panelboard or other central distribution point to motor through motor starter protection devices and disconnect, or to main terminals in FWP; and final connections. Power wiring and raceway as specified in Division 26. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: Certified records, indicating that procedures used and welding operators employed are in compliance with codes referenced in article "Quality Assurance." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: New materials and equipment shall bear manufacturer's name, model number, or other identification marking. B. Standard product shall be of latest design with published properties of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of specified material or equipment for minimum 5 years. O � C. Unless otherwise indicated, equipment of same type in same room shall matchfi*, anTn design.�'--� 0 —� D. Standardization: Equipment and its devices shall be of same manufacturer; or sm3 must be� approved and warranted by equipment manufacturer Z 1 " o=- a E. Building codes and permits: �x 1. Obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assisilContra br, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. co 2. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for prosecution of Work, which are applicable at time of opening of Bids. Pay charges of utility service companies for connections to Work. Owner will pay charges of such companies for capital costs related thereto. 3. Give notices and comply with laws, ordinances, building and construction codes, rules, and regulations applicable to Work. If Contractor observes Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith, give Engineer prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate Modification. 4. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that Work is contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, and without such notice to Engineer, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. However, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SERVICES SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with all trades regarding location and size of pipes, equipment, ducts, openings, light fixtures, and other similar items mutually located in same or adjacent spaces. B. Drawings are diagrammatic; however, items on Drawings are shown at approximate locations. Contractor shall modify locations of equipment, piping, ducts, etc to suit actual conditions, and provide for access and clearances. 1. Route piping and ducts parallel to building lines, except for slope. 2. Protection of electrical equipment: Avoid locating equipment, piping, ducts, etc, over electrical equipment. As approved by Owner, provide drip pans over electrical equipment where locating equipment, piping, ducts, etc. above electrical equipment is unavoidable. C. Due to scale of Drawings, not all items are shown on drawings. Provide items not shown but required for complete operating systems. D. Due to scale of Drawings, do not scale Drawings to determine exact locations. Locations shall be determined by field measurements or other means. E. Make minor modifications in Work required by interferences (structural, work of other trades) following notification to Engineer. F. Order of priorities: 1. Recessed lighting fixtures. 2. Ductwork system. 3. Slopped nonpressurized plumbing piping including, but not limited to, waste, ven{y and roof drains. 4. Refrigeration piping. do C/2 5. Sprinkler piping. - �^ 6. HVAC piping. y� 7. Pressurized plumbing piping including, but not limited to, water, natural ga4gr, fSr@sse air and vacuum. 8. Electrical conduit. 3 9. Control air piping or conduit._ ` D N 1.06 OPENINGS, SLEEVES, AND CHASES -J A. Each equipment and piping supplier shall provide: ` 1; Opening and hole information through floors, walls, and roofs for its work; including all pipe, conduit, duct sleeves, inserts, hangers, and flashing and sealant for those openings and holes. 2. Exact information to others as to size, depth, and location of such openings before construction is in place; and delivery and setting in place of boxes, sleeves, inserts, and forms for its work in time ' for installation in all locations. 3. Cutting, patching, and restoration to accommodate Contractor's failure to provide specified data in time for openings to be left or to accommodate boxes, sleeves, inserts, or forms after construction. 4. Skilled craftsman to cut, patch, rebuild, restore, replace, refinish, and repaint new construction that has been cut, disturbed, or marred to original new condition; for installation of new, exposed, concealed, underground, or underfloor work; for admission of new work and equipment; for installation of new equipment and new work in new construction; for complete restoration of pipe, duct, or equipment covering disturbed or marred by its personnel. 5. Cutting: a. Use core drill or radial saw. b. Cutting of lintels, structural steel, or reinforcement not permitted. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SERVICES SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 20 05 00 - Page 3 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design is based on specified or scheduled equipment. Modify work to incorporate changes for alternate, "or equal", or substitute manufacturer's equipment at no additional cost. Changes shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Equipment dimensions. 2. Framing and support. 3. Manufacturer recommended maintenance clearances and access. 4. Pipe connections, location and sizes. 5. Duct connections, location and sizes. 6. Electrical requirements including, but not limited to: a. Wire sizes. b. Conduit. c. Disconnects. d. Starters. e. Breakers. f. Fuses. g. Switches. h. Transformers. 2.02 MOTORS AND STARTERS A. Motors shall be ODP squirrel cage induction motors in NEMA frames suitable for operation on 480 -volt ac, 3-phase, 60 Hz, as specified in Division 26, unless noted otherwise. B. Where variable frequency drives are specified provide induction duty motors as specified in Division 26. C. 'Motors shall have 1.15 service factor rated at 40°C ambient temperature (Class B insulation) with 40°C temperature rise. 2.03 FACTORY -WIRED PANEL A. Provide as part of equipment package; including starters, interconnecting wiring, including field wiring, between panel and associated equipment disconnects (except for disconnects indicategWn Drawings on line side of factory -wired panel, control transformers, integral control devices and prOvired controls; ready for final control and power connections. 2.04 WIRING I A. Provide wiring not indicated on Drawings including temperature control wiring, flitc s, corn modules, smoke detectors part of specified HVAC control systems, and electric 8l c�duitWire nnd— connections related to mechanical equipment controls. o V 9E •• B. Automatic temperature control wiring for control work specified in Section 23 09 13 shall Ofurnished and installed by control manufacturer. 2.05 GUARDS A. Provide guards for drives on equipment that are belt, chain, or gear -driven or with rotating elements such as shaft couplings, sheaves, and shafts with projecting set screws and keys. B. Belt guards shall enclose both pulleys and belts on exposed sides; 14 -gage (1.8 mm) galvanized steel top and bottom with expanded or solid metal front locked into rim. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SERVICES SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 C. Assembly shall be supported by supplementary steel. Provide for greasing, oiling, adjusting, and checking of equipment. D. Provide coupling guards on direct connected units. E. Comply with UL safety requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Work provided shall be complete and operable, and shall include required accessories, specialties, fastenings, supports, auxiliary building steel, and similar items. B. Determine required location, arrangement, and quantities of equipment and materials from Drawings. C. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. D. Power wiring and interconnection of electrical accessories specified under this Division will be performed under Division 26 unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 1) J. J. Bovenkamp 2) ro 0 o c� C i C.) r ` vV0 L� D >J PIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION - ACS6 Stanley Consultants INC TEMP, OF 100 200 300 353 3 PRESS, PSIG 150 1 135 1 110 100 wa MATERIAL, ASTM IA53GR B TYPE E OR S (NOTE 6) a NOMINAL PIPE SIZES AND SCHEDULE 1/2" - 24" STD z TYPE THREADED SOCKET WELD BUTT WELD FLANGED 0 USE FOR PIPE SIZES 1/2" - 2" NONE 2-1/2" - 24" NONE MATERIAL, ASTM A197 A234 WPB PRESS CL, ASME B16.3 150 Z MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS MATCH PIPE ASME B16.25 M WELDING END UNIONS GROUNDJOINTI NONE MATERIAL, ASTM A105 PRESS CL, ASME 816.5 150 rn w FACING FF SERRATED i GASKETS, ASME 816.21 FULL FACE 1/16" SYNTHETIC FIBER WITH NBR BINDER, GARLOCK BLUE-GARD 3000 OR EQUAL, UNLESS SPECIFIED LL OTHERWISE. BOLTING A307 GR B STUD BOLTS & A194 GR 2H HEX NUTS GENERAL NOTES & COMMENTS: 1. BACKING RINGS NOT PERMITTED. 2. BUTT WELD END PREPARATIONS A. NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESSES 0.375" AND LESS: CONFORM TO ASME B16.25, FIGURE 2, DETAIL (A). 3. BUTT WELD FITTINGS MAY BE WPB SEAMLESS OR WPBW WELDED. 4. FLANGE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND VALVES ONLY. 5. FLANGES SHALL BE WELD NECK OR SLIP-ON. 6. FOR HOT WATER SERVICE AT PRESSURES ABOVE 100 PSIG AND TEMPERATURES ABOVE 220 °F, THREADED PIPE SHALL BE SCHEDULE 80 SEAMLESS, A53 GR B OR A106 GR B. ^� gA Ln �re7 G� a R7 rn ASML CLASS 125 TYPE E OR S CARBON STEE 1 GENERAL 1 -Oct -O8 DDB MSW MAE NO. ACS6 0 REVISION 0 28 -Apr -06 AGP JJN MAE NO. REVISION DATE DESIGNI CHECK APVD qiwp PIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION - ACU1 Stanley Consultants INC. a 3 TEMP, °F 100 150 200 250 PRESS, PSIG 150 150 135 125 MATERIAL ASTM B88 HARD DRAWN COPPER Z TUBING SIZE AND WALL THICKNESS THRU 6" TYPE K 81, ITYPE L F z TYPE SOLDERED, FLANGED WHERE REQUIRED n SOLDER ASTM B32 GRADE Sb5 (95-5 TIN ANTIMONY) to ASME B16.18 CAST COPPER ALLOY TYPE ASME 816.22 WROUGHT COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY z F CONNECTIONS TO FERROUS DIELECTRIC UNIONS OR FLANGES r PIPING OR EQUIPMENT GENERAL NOTES & COMMENTS: 1. THIS PIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION SHALL NOT BE USED FOR STEAM OR CONDENSATE, OR FOR FLAMMABLE OR TOXIC LIQUIDS OR GASSES. USE FOR COMPRESSED AIR SHALL BE LIMITED TO 3" NOMINAL SIZE AND LESS. 2. SOLDER SHALL BE "LEAD-FREE" (LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.2% LEAD). O � Ra ■' r Ln M � 3 c .. N -J ASME CLASS 125 HARD DRAWN COPPER 1 ADDED NOTE 2 26 -May -06 TJL MRF MAE NO. ACU1 0 REVISION 0 14 -Dec -04 AAM AG PMAE NO. REVISION DATE DESIGN CHECK APVD `_, PIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION - ADI1 Stanley Consultants INC a 3 TEMP, °F 120 PRESS, PSIG 150 w MATERIAL DUCTILE IRON ANSI/AWWA C1 51 /A21.51 E SIZES (INCLUSIVE) 3" THRU 48" a MINIMUM THICKNESS CLASS 53 ANSI/AWWA C1 50/A21.50 Z TYPE THREADED FLANGE ANSI/AWWA C1 15/A21.15 RATED WORKING PRESSURE 250 PSI MINIMUM ANSI/AWWA C1 15/A21.15 TYPE FLANGED ANSI/AWWA Cl 10/A21.10 m MATERIAL DUCTILE IRON OR GRAY IRON z RATED WORKING PRESSURE 150 PSI MINIMUM ANSI/AWWA Cl 10/A21.10 k GASKETS FULL FACE, 1/16" RED RUBBER (SBR) ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 LL BOLTS ASTM A307 GR B NUTS ASTM A194 2H HEAVY HEX GENERAL NOTES & COMMENTS: 1. PROVIDE CEMENT-MORTAR LINING AND SEAL COAT PER ANSI/AWWA C1 04/A21.4. w 0 r �-� � r rn =` a m o Go 150 PSIG AT 120-F DUCTILE IRON PIPE NO. ADI1 0 REVISION 0 14-Dec-04 AAM AGP MAE NO. REVISION DATE DESIGN CHECK APVD IqPIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION - APE5 Stanley Consultants INC 3 TEMP, °F 1 73 1 140 1 180 PRESS, PSIG 150 1 110 1 100 O MATERIAL I ASTM F876 CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX), HDB = 1250PSI (737) z MATERIAL DESIGNATION CODE PEX 5306, 5206, 5106, 5006 ZTUBING ASTM F876 AND F877 NOMINAL PIPE SIZE AND SDR 3/8" - 2" 9 y TYPE INSERT COMP. COMP. RING MECHANICAL COLD FLARING PUSH-FIT SLEEVE z F STANDARD F1807,F2159, F1865, F1960 F1961 F877 F2854 LL F2834 F2080 USE FOR SIZES 3/8" - 2" 3/8" - 2" 3/8" - 2" 3/8" - 3/4" 3/8" - 2" 1/2" - 1 1/4" GENERAL NOTES & COMMENTS: 1. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND FITTINGS AND PPI STANDARDS. 2. MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CONTINUOUS HOT WATER CIRCULATION 140 °F TO MAINTAIN CHLORINE RESISTANCE. 3. MAXIMUM SIZE FOR RADIANT HEATING WATER 2". 4. PROVIDE SWEAT ADAPTERS FOR CONNECTION TO COPPER TUBING. 5. INSULATION NOT REQUIRED UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 6. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PIPING MANIFOLD WHERE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. 7. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL PLUMBING CODE FOR DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS. _TTINGS SHALL BE SELECTED TO COMPLY WITH LOCAL PLUMBING CODE. 8. MATERIALS IN CONTACT WITH POTABLE WATER SHALL BE CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCQVIT SF/AN I STANDARD 14 - PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS, NSF/ANSI STANDARD 61 -1301 ING R/ATER'� §YSTEM COMPONENTS - HEALTH EFFECTS, AND ANSI/AW WA C904. 2--G 1 1 9. TUBING INSTALLED IN CEILING CAVITY PLENUM SHALL BE PERMITTED PER NFPA 90A F'iT EXHIBITS Fn FLAME SPREAD INDEX OF 25 OR LESS AND A SMOKE DEVELOPMENT INDEX OF 50 OR LESS WHEN v ESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E84. CHECK MANUFACTURER'S LIMITATIONS. 10. INDOOR INSTALLATION ONLY. PREVENT FROM OVEREXPOSURE TO SUNLIGHT (UV LIGHT). 11. FOR RADIANT HEAT APPLICATIONS CONTAINING OXIDATIVE OR FERROUS PARTS, UTILIZE TUBMG WITH AN OXYGEN DIFFUSER BARRIER. (NOT ALLOWED FOR POTABLE WATER). 12: ELECTROFUSION FITTINGS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 140 "F MAXIMUM USAGE TEMPERATURE PER ASTM F1055. - 150 PSIG AT 73°F PEX TUBING 1 GENERAL 31-Mar-17 "0JC MAE NO. I gpE5 0 REVISION 28-Apr-O6 AGP JJB MAE NO. REVISION DATE DESIGN CHECK APVD 9— M-ftwo PIPE CLASS SPECIFICATION -ASS3 Stanley Consultants INC TEMP, °F 40 150 3 PRESS, PSIG 5 5 MATERIAL, ASTM - TUBING A240 TYPE 300 SERIES STAINLESS STEEL z MATERIAL - JACKET POLYETHYLENE, UV RESISTANT (NOTE 4) 3/8"-l" 0.010" f NOMINAL PIPE SIZES AND WALL THICK. 1 1/4--2- 0.012" MATERIAL, ASTM IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI LC 1 / CSA 6.26 z IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI LC 1 / CSA 6.26 AND TYPE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION GENERAL NOTES & COMMENTS: 1. FOR USE IN NATURAL GAS AND LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) SYSTEMS. 2. PIPING SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS SHALL CONFORM TO ANSI/CSA/IAS LC-1. 3. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL CODES. 4. ASTM E84 FIRE RESISTANCE: FLAME SPREAD RATING SHALL NOT EXCEED 25, SMOKE DENSITY RATING SHALL NOT EXCEED 50. 5. TEST PRESSURE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 54. 6. UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO LOCAL CODES AND NFPA 54, INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE, AND MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 7. FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS SHALL NOT BE USED BELOW SLABS OR BUILDINGS. 8. PIPING SHALL BE BONDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 54, NFPA 70, MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION, AND LOCAL CODES. 9. TUBING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. �v 10.1 PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PIPING MANIFOLD WHERE NOTED O AWI S. 11.APPLY CSA APPROVED STRIKER PLATES IN PUNCTURE THREAT AREAS. n cn 12. OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODESPAND NItPA 54.-. . �� cn :<r a Fn '" s D p 00 5 PSIG AT 150 OF CSST w/ PE Jacket NO. ASS3 0 REVISION 0 6-Oct-09 AJU MNM MAE NO. REVISION DATE IDESIGNI CHECK APVD 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS PIPING ms1869 SECTION 20 05 13 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe materials. B. Fittings, unions, flanges, and couplings. C. Welding fittings. D. Piping identification. E. Pipe coating and wrapping. F. Tie rods. G. Pipe joining methods. H. Cleaning and protection. I. Leakage tests. J. Thrust restraints. K. Piping schedules. 1.02 DEFINITIONS 1� A. Pipe Class Specifications define pipe materials, dimensional standards, and wa5thickneo6. Also defined are other components of piping system, including fittings, joints, flanges, VW co4ectioln methods as applicable. Maximum allowable working pressure and associated tetnpieratoe are, provided for reference. Some Pipe Class Specifications also include notes and?6fiime& that - provide additional direction on use, limitations, and installation of piping syste —. , m � 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 70 _ A. Quality assurance data: D N 1. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for pipe, fittings, accessories, and specialties. 2. Welding procedure specifications and welding operator performance qualifications in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, upon request. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: 1. Piping construction criteria shall conform to requirements of ASME B31 as applicable. Work shall also comply with applicable state and local codes. 2. Piping connected to pressure parts under jurisdiction of ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code": In accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code" and state and local codes. 3. Piping not covered by ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code": In accordance with ASME B31 "Code for Pressure Piping" and state and local codes. 4. Comply with applicable requirements of state and local plumbing codes including but not limited to NSF 61 requirements for potable water piping and fittings. B. Certifications: New materials and equipment shall bear manufacturer's name, model number, or other identification marking. C. Pipe spools shall contain piece identification mark on each end of spool. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 D. Piping material shall be new. Materials showing signs of scaling or rust will be rejected. E. Welding requirements: 1. Qualification of welding procedures to be used and welding operators shall be in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX. 2. Welding materials and procedures for piping shall conform to ASME B31 and applicable state and local regulations. 3. Employ certified welders in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, and AWS D1.1. 4. Welding inspection personnel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS QC1. 5. Maintain records in accordance with requirements of ASME B31. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Weld end larger than 2" (50 mm): Fit pipe with protective end caps. Seal with waterproof tape. B. Female opening 2" (50 mm) and smaller: Install plastic insert and seal with waterproof tape. C. Nonflanged nipples 2" (50 mm) and smaller: Fit pipe with plastic cap and seal with waterproof tape. D. Flanged opening: Bolt 1/2" (13 mm) waterproof disk with 1/8" (3 mm) rubber gasket. Use at least half available holes. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessory material shown on Drawings and as necessary for complete piping system with connections to equipment. Provide drains required to drain low points in piping and vents required to vent high points in piping. Provide piping for testing, startup, cleaning, and operation of system. B. Provide pipe, fittings, valves, and accessory material necessary for following piping not shown on Drawings: o 1. Vents and drains for equipment to which piping connections are made or whioTDare inMied under this Contract. Provide piping to drains from equipment including, but not limitt8 lev�alarrf>'ll r meter bodies, transmitters, steam trap blow connections. --1 2. Piping, not shown on Drawings, but required for proper operation of piping sy.%Kand1.Qquip, including drain valves required to drain all low points in piping and vent valves ire o ve all high points in piping for testing, start-up, and operation. rn �. rn 3. Metering instruments and regulating apparatus, including pressure gages, th e1j $, y-� controllers, traps, and other appurtenances as required for satisfactory oper f plphg sy3teRi and proper functioning of such instruments and controls. o 4. Flanges, unions, bolting material, gaskets, reducing fittings, bushings, and adapters rlquired to connect piping to equipment, valves, in line specialties, etc. 5. Temporary piping and accessories required for placing equipment and piping into initial service including, but not limited to, cleaning and hydrostatic testing. Arrangement of piping and supports shall be submitted to Owner for review. 6. Blind flanges, caps, or plugs of appropriate class to close unused openings in equipment or piping provided by others. 7. Flanges as required for connection to equipment by others. C. Piping arrangement: Fire protection, plumbing and HVAC piping are generally schematically routed. Contractor shall vary location of piping and duds to suit actual conditions, provide for access and clearances, and provide for thermal expansion. Field -fabricate and erect to provide workable arrangement with convenient access to valves and specialty items. Piping arrangement shall allow for thermal expansion and clearance after insulation is installed. 1. Route piping parallel to building lines, except for slope. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS PIPING ms1869 SECTION 20 05 13 - Page 3 2. Protection of electrical equipment: Avoid locating pipe, joints, specialties, valves, etc. over electrical equipment to meet requirements of Article 110 of NEC. Provide drip pans over electrical equipment as approved by Owner where routing of piping over electrical equipment is unavoidable. 3. For equipment, valves, etc. with connections less than line size, locate reducers at equipment or valves to minimize length of reduced diameter piping. 4. Contractor shall note on record drawings modifications made to piping systems. D. Provide pipe, fittings, accessories, and appurtenances required by each Pipe Class Specification. E. Maintain a minimum of 3" (75 mm) clearance between pipes. For insulated piping, clearance shall be from outside surface of insulation. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe materials, pressure class, schedule, and type of joints shall conform to Pipe Class Specifications referenced in Pipe Schedule. B. If pipe wall thickness specified is not available, use next heavier wall thickness. C. Comply with ASME B31 and, where applicable, ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code." 2.03 FITTINGS - GENERAL A. Material, wall thickness, and pressure class: As specified in article "Pipe Materials," unless otherwise noted. B. Use long radius fittings, except where noted on Drawings to use short radius fittings. C. Provide dielectric unions or flanges at connections between ferrous and nonferrinAr equipment. ,» r Ln Dr For soil and waste piping, use 450 Y fittings and long sweep quarter, eighth or sixt bends. rn 2.04 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A: Pressure class, material, and facing: As specified in article "Pipe Materials." D � B. Where union, flanges, and couplings are not specified in Pipe Class Specification, provide as follows: 1. Pipe size 2" (50 mm) and smaller: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; cast bronze or wrought copper unions for copper piping with soldered or brazed joints. For nonmetallic piping provide unions of same material as pipe. 2. Pipe size 2-1/2" (64 mm) and larger: Forged steel weld neck or slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping. For non-metallic piping, provide flanges of same material as pipe. Provide 1/8" (3 mm) thick preformed synthetic fiber gaskets, Garlock "Blue -Gard 3000," or equal. 3. Grooved end pipe: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and secure grooved pipe ends, designed to permit angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; C -shape composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; use galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. 2.05 WELDING FITTINGS A. Material and wall thickness: As specified in article "Pipe Materials." B. Use welding tees for socket -welded piping and for field -fabricated branch tees in butt -welded piping. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 C. Nozzle -welded branches or "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" will be permitted instead of butt welding tees for shop -fabricated steel piping provided that such nozzles are fabricated in accordance with ASME B31. Use tees for branches in non -steel piping. D. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching straight pipe to form tees, and similar construction will not be acceptable for pressure piping except where specifically permitted in Pipe Class Specifications. 2.06 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through building structure, except where otherwise shown on Drawings. B. Through footings: Service weight cast iron. C. Other locations below grade: Cast iron or standard weight wrought iron pipe. D. Above grade: Steel pipe, sheet steel not lighter than 16 U.S. Standard Gauge, or fiberglass with 1/4" (6 mm) minimum wall thickness; or thermoplastic construction, Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Link - Seal "Century -Line,' or equal. E. Size: 1. Foundations and footings: 4" (100 mm) larger than carrier pipe plus insulation where piping system is to be insulated. 2. Walls and floors: 2" (50 mm) larger than carrier pipe plus insulation where piping system is to be insulated. 3. Floors: Extend 4" (100 mm) above floor. 2.07 PIPE SLEEVE SEALS A. Type: General purpose. B., Construction: 1. Pressure plate: Reinforced nylon polymer. o 2. Bolts and nuts: Galvanized steel. o y 3. Sealing element: EPDM. rn C. Temperature limits: -40°F to 250°F. �n cit r D. Manufacturer: Pipeline Seal and Insulator/Thunderline "Link -Seal" Model C...m �r 3 rn C: :X 2.08 PIPE MARKERS 0 cA A. Type: Snap -on with arrows. 1. Lettering: a. Size: Use 1-1/4" high letters for pipes with outer covering 2-1/2" diameter or larger; use 3/4" high letters for pipes with outer covering smaller than 2-1/2". b. Lettering subject to review. 2. Banding: a. Snap on or nylon wire ties. b. Color code: To be furnished after award to Contract (in accordance with Owner's system). 3. Manufacturer: Seton "Setmark," or equal. B. Type: Self -sticking markers indicating contents of pipe. 1. Lettering: a. Size: Use 1-1/4" high letters for pipes with outer covering 2-1/2" diameter or larger; use 3/4" high letters for pipes with outer covering smaller than 2-1/2". b. Lettering subject to review. 2. Banding: 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS PIPING ms1869 SECTION 20 05 13 - Page 5 a. Type: Self -sticking tape, 2" wide; with direction flow arrows. b. Color codeTo be furnished after award to Contract (in accordance with Owner's system) 3. Manufacturer: Craftmark "Duramark System," or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install piping as shown on Drawings, as specified, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Hot and cold potable water piping and sanitary and storm drainage systems shall comply with state and local plumbing codes. B. Modify pipe routing as required to clear building structure, openings, lights, ducts, and work of other trades. C. Route piping parallel to building lines except for slope. D. Provide sufficient unions and flanges to permit removal of equipment. E. Spacing of piping shall be adequate to permit servicing valves and specialties and replacing sections of pipe. F. Install piping above suspended ceiling areas to allow for suspended ceiling panel removal. G. Slope pipe to permit complete draining. Install drain valves at low points. H. Provide nuts, bolts, gaskets, and washers for complete and proper installation. I. Warning tape shall be installed over each underground pipe. For underground non-metallic pipes, provide trace wire. 3.02 PROVISIONS FOR PIPE EXPANSION No A. Provide bends, offsets, or loops in piping not detailed on Drawings as requiredto it Roe —nexpansion due to temperature change and equipment movement. Arno B. Provide sufficient flexibility in copper piping to eliminate stress transmission to fixt0(" cn ,<r,7, a e-�7 ` .' C. See Section 20 05 29 for additional pipe expansion and support requirements. -} s 3.03 PIPE JOINING METHODS T> rV A. Comply with Pipe Class Specifications listed under article "Pipe Materials" and with requirements of ASME B31, unless otherwise indicated. B. Threaded joints: 1. Clean-cut threads, ream pipe ends, and remove burrs. 2. Apply suitable lubricating, noncorrosive, flexible pipe joint compound to male threads only. C. Flanged joints: 1. Clean mating surfaces of flanges. 2. Install gasket and tighten bolts evenly. D. Solderjoints: 1. Cut tube square, ream end, and remove burrs. 2. Clean tube end and fitting socket to bright metal. 3. Apply flux to both surfaces, preheat, and feed solder until joint space is filled. 4. Wipe off excess solder, leaving small fillet, remove excess flux. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 E. Press mechanical joints: 1. Press mechanical connections shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Cut tube square, ram end, and remove burrs. 3. Tubing shall be fully inserted into fitting and marked at shoulder. 4. Fitting alignment shall be checked against mark to ensure tubing is fully inserted into fittings. 5. Joints shall be pressed using tool approved by manufacturer. F. Weld joints: 1. Cut pipe square and prepare pipe ends for welding as required by ASME B31. 2. Workmanship shall conform to details and requirements of ASME B31. G. Brazed joints: 1. Cut tube square and prepare for brazing as required by ASME B31. 2. Workmanship shall conform to details and requirements of ASME B31. 3. Qualifications of brazing procedures and brazing operators shall be in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, Part C. H. Mechanical grooved joints: 1. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Ream each piece of pipe prior to erection. Inspect each piece of pipe and fittings before installing. 3. Coat pipe ends with lubricant to facilitate installation. Entire coupling installation shall be done in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. I. Bell, leaded, and plain -end joints: 21 1. Gasketed joints: Lubricate ends, install gasket, and use winch or jack to ptapipe t(=ther. 2. Calkjoint: Zen H a. Calk with oakum to 1" (25 mm) from end of bell. b. Fill with 1 continuous pour of lead, 1" (25 mm) minimum depth. c7 [ t r c. Calk sufficiently to forma tight seal. rr,a M J. Cast iron soil pipe to clay tile:o = Q 1. Cast iron pipe shall enter bell of clay tile or fitting. = 2. Wrap joint with 4" (100 mm) wide strip of asphalt -impregnated or fiberglasstmoth. O 3. Cast joint in block of concrete 24" (600 mm) long and 6" (150 mm) minimum cover;4einforce with wire mesh in concrete completely around joint. K. (huctile iron bell and spigot to carbon steel: j Roll ASTM A36 steel plate and weld to carbon steel pipe. 2. Plate thickness shall be as necessary to have outside diameter of steel pipe match outside diameter of ductile iron pipe. 3. Weld locking ring to steel pipe. 4. Contractor, at its option, may use oversized gaskets and weld only locking ring to steel pipe. L. Threaded pipe to cast iron pipe: Spigot connector. M. Other joints and joining methods: In accordance with Pipe Schedule and Pipe Class Specifications. 3.04 LEAKAGE TESTS A. Notify Engineer and Owner of intent to test piping at least 1 week prior to test. Test in presence of Engineer and Owner, unless notified otherwise. B. Refrigeration piping: 1. Joints and connections shall be examined for apparent faults before testing. 2. Test at not less than lower of design pressure or setting of pressure relief device protecting system. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS PIPING ms1869 SECTION 20 05 13 - Page 7 3. Test medium shall be nitrogen gas or refrigerant of type to be used in equipment. Use halide leak detector to locate small leaks. C. Vents and gravity drainage piping: Test in accordance with local plumbing code. D. Other piping: Test hydrostatically in accordance with ASME 831. E. Provide pumps, compressors, meters, gages, piping, fittings, accessories, and labor required to conduct tests. F. Isolate equipment that may be damaged by test pressure. G. Refit joints indicating leakage and replace defective pipe, fittings, and accessories. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove foreign material from pipes before erection. B. Close ends of partially erected systems. C. Remove temporary preservative coatings from valves and accessories. D. Flush or otherwise clean systems after erection. E. Orior to conducting final performance test, Contractor shall verify that strainers are clean. F. Contractor shall be responsible for malfunctioning of pumps, valves, controls, or other equipment due to presence of foreign material. Clean, repair or replace malfunctioning equipment at ncMost to Owner. — f_ o—+ f -' n y G. Disinfect potable water piping as required by health authority having jurisdiction; M H. Thoroughly flush lines after disinfection until extremities indicate same chlorine 7iistwal W9 supil7y water. -� r- 3.06 PIPE IDENTIFICATIONS D ,V A. Provide pipe markers on new piping exposed in equipment rooms, accessible pipe shahs+, unfinished basement areas, unfinished storage rooms, janitor's closets, tunnels, and other areas where directed. B. Install markers on both horizontal and vertical section of pipe at points where pipes pass through walls, floor, or ceiling, and at each valve. In tunnels, markers shall be no greater than 20' (6 m) apart, or 1 marker minimum for sections less than 20'(6 m). 3.07 PIPE SCHEDULE Piping Class Design Operating Design Operating Test Pipe Specification Temp. Temp. Pressure Pressure Pressure Testing Service Description nl "F 'F) (psig) (psig) (psig) Method rz� Compressed Air -- -- 150 100 — Initial service testing ASTM A53 Gr. ACS6 B Steel Potable Water: 60 45 125 60 188 H rostatic 2" and smaller ASTM 688 ACM Hard -Drawn Copper COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FACILITY SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 20 05 00 ms1869 Notes: Piping Class Design Operating Design Operating Test Pipe Specification Temp. Temp. Pressure Pressure Pressure Testing Service Description (') `F °F) (psig) (Psi sig) Method vt ASTM F876 APES `n rrn PEX v o co 4" and larger ASTM B88 ACU1 Hard Drawn Copper AWWA AD11 C151/A21.51 Cement -lined Ductile Iron Heatino Water: 180 150 125 75 188 Hydrostatic ASTM A53 Gr. ACS6 B Steel Natural Gas and Propane ASTM A53 Gr. ACS6 B Steel ASTM ASS3 A240/ANSI LC1 Corrugated Stainless Steel tubing Notes: 0) Where multiple Pipe Class Specifications are specified, selection of material is at Contractor's option. (2) Testing in accordance with ASME B31 unless noted otherwise. END OF SECTION o 1) J. J. Bovenkamp 0 -' 2) :74r - _ � `n rrn v o co 26710.01.00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 20 05 29 - Page 1 PART? GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design of pipe support systems, equipment support systems and supplementary support steel. B. Fabrication and installation of: 1. Pipe and equipment supports. 2. Supplementary support steel. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe or equipment support system: Collection of supports used to restrain movement and provide support to an entire piping system or equipment. B. Pipe or equipment support system design includes, but not limited to the following: 1. Determination of support locations, types of support, support reactions and displacements of pipe and/or equipment at support locations. 2. Verification that pipe support system meets requirements of article "Pipe Support System Design. C. Pipe or equipment supports: Hangers, guides, rollers, slide supports, springs, anchors, struts, snubbers, or any other devices used to restrain movement or provide support to pipe or equipment. D. Design categories of pipe supports are defined as follows. Following definitions are in o ition to definitions of information and materials defined by MSS SP -58. J 1. Completely engineered supports: O N a. Supports where the specific component size is established by the indiVidt�su rt desi b. Details of each support shall be prepared containing all information spet�ft€ in fSS S iri, article "Pipe Hanger Assembly Drawings." �n cn f. 2. Semi -engineered supports:rn a. Supports that are designed from similar support configurations from whicpej is manufacturer component size can be established and applied to a groul:rb r lim sup er . b. Loading and movement design criteria shall encompass most stringent cftiditionQf group. Bill of Material for each support need not be established. c. Supports may be field fabricated from stock materials. 3. Random supports: Supports which require no engineering and may be field -fabricated from stock materials. 4. Pre-engineered: Manufacturers published pipe support components. E. Supplementary support steel: All steel necessary to support pipe and equipment in addition to existing structure or new structure. Existing or new structure is typically structural steel, reinforced concrete or concrete masonry units. Hereinafter, existing or new steel is referred to as "existing steel'. 1. Supplementary support steel includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Steel beams, posts, hangers, diagonal braces, plates, cut shapes, epoxy grouted anchor rods, studs and other similar types of construction, as required for support of pipe and equipment. b. Localized stiffening of existing steel or supplementary support steel at pipe and equipment support connections. 2. Supplementary support steel shall include steel extending down to concrete floor slab where supporting pipe or equipment from above is prohibited by Engineer. 3. Supplementary support steel does not include standard pipe support hardware. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 20 05 29 m51869 1.03 PIPE AND PIPE SUPPORT DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES Design Responsibility Schedule Design 200°F to 375°F less than 200°F Temperature Pipe Size 2" diameter 2.5' to 4" 6" diameter 2" diameter 2.5' to 8" 10 diameter and smaller diameter and larger and smaller diameter and larger Pipe Support Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor System Desi n Pipe Support Random Semi- Completely Random Semi- Completely Design Category Supports, engineered Engineered Supports, engineered Engineered and Design by Supports, Supports, by Supports, Supports, Responsibility Contractor Contractor Contactor Contractor Contractor Contactor Supplementary Support Steel Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Design (except as noted below Design of Localized Stiffening of Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Existing and Supplementary Support Steel 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Piping plans and elevations drawings showing pipe support systems designed by Contractor. Drawings shall show pipe support (by use of symbol), support identification number and locations. Pipe support identification numbers shall use same format as that used by Engineer. Submittal required for all pipe supports. 2. Details for semi -engineered supports. Support details shall show localized stiffeniWf support steel at support connection, where applicable. o 3. Details for each completely -engineered support containing information spied in S SB, article "Pipe Hanger Assembly Drawings." Drawings shall show supplem st rid localized stiffening of support steel at support connection, where applicable t c1� B. Quality assurance data: Published pre-engineered standard pipe support compeer Fks utilized project. Include allowable loads. _rn 2 0 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE G CD A. Pipe hangers and supports, fabrication, and installation practices shall be in accordance with MSS SP -58. B. Contractors professional engineer's seal is not required for design of support where published pre- engineered standard supports with published ratings, loads, and movements are used. Pre- engineered standard supports (including all components) shall be certified by Contractor as acceptable for intended use on this project. See article "Pipe Support Design" for certification requirements. 26710.01.00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 20 05 29 - Page 3 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Drawings of existing structure are available. B. For existing structures, conduct necessary field measurements to determine or confirm structure dimensions, steel member locations and sizes, as applicable. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Anvil International. B. Bergen Power. C. Binder. D. Carpenter & Paterson. E. Cooper B -Line. F. Lisega. G. Piping Technology & Products. o C2 H. Or equal. n c/5 rri 2.02 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM DESIGN -)-G r rn --tom A. Pipe support system shall result in pipe stress conforming to requirements ofASt0t�jK1.land B B. Where possible, pipe support locations shall be located to prevent individual strucW[3�members from being excessively loaded to point that global stiffening of member is required. q C. Pipe support selection and application: Using pipe support spacing shown in International Mechanical Code with following additional requirements: 1. Additional supports are required at concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. 2. Support spacing values shall be reduced by 25% when pipe changes horizontal direction between supports. D. Provide seismic restraint of piping in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and International Building Code. Refer to MSS SP -127 for pipe support seismic design, selection, and application. E. Incorporate seismic limit ties, guides, and stops to resist lateral loads. F. Locate supports for pipe connected to equipment to limit equipment reactions to allowable reactions specified by equipment manufacturer. G. Supports for pipe that terminate at existing pipe connections shall accommodate thermal movement and loads imposed by existing pipe. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 20 05 29 ms1869 2.03 PIPE SUPPORT DESIGN A. Design all supports. B. Conceptual support details on Drawings do not represent a design and are intended only to convey MSS type of support assumed by Engineer. Modify support conceptual details as necessary to limit support and pipe stresses to allowables. C. Conform to MSS SP -58. D. Design supports such that total of pipe global and local stresses shall not exceed allowable stresses specified in ASME B31.1 and B31.9. E. Design of all welded attachments to pipe per ASME 831.1 and 831.9. Design of welded attachment shall not exceed allowable stresses specified in ASME B31.1 and B31.9. Welded attachment shall be of similar material as pipe. F. Design to accommodate hydrostatic testing of pipe when applicable. G. Where pre-engineered standard supports are used, Contractor's design requirements shall include: 1. Obtaining manufacturer's certification that manufacturer's support design conforms to above referenced standards. 2. Verification that loads for particular support application(s) do not exceed manufacturer's specified allowable support loads. 3. Where applicable, verification that pipe movement at support does not exceed manufacturers allowable. H. Include type, size and length of welds and type, size, and number of bolts required for attachment of pipe support to support structure. I. Where pipe routing is shown on Drawings, conduct necessary field measurements or analysis of Drawings if field measurements are not feasible as required to verify clearance and constructability of supports prior to support design and fabrication. Cost for redesign of supports and field modifications of new construction due to lack of field measurements or analysis of Drawings shall be borne by Contractor. J. Supports inducing torsion in existing structural. members are not permitted except wherertown on Drawings. o _rte vs K. Where supports connect to structural steel members and cause localized bendiDengme%er flan 8s or webs, stiffen member as necessary to limit localized bending stress to less thcur$ksi. tDesig, stiffeners and welds shall be by Contractor. -In ul 1 <r— r-M 2.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT DESIGN n. A. Design equipment support system, supports, and associated supplementary suPbrt steab 00 B. Base equipment support design upon following parameters: 1. Support loads. 2. Equipment movements at supports. 3. Equipment manufacturers requirements. C. Equipment support selection and application: MSS SP -58. D. Equipment support design: MSS SP -58. 26710.01.00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 20 05 29 - Page 5 E. Where equipment supports are designed by entity other than equipment supplier, obtain equipment supplier's approval of support system. 2.05 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Materials and manufacture: MSS SP -58 and ASME B31.1 and 831.9. B. Supports and accessory items shall have manufacturer's standard shop -applied primer and standard finish coat, unless specified otherwise. All supports shall be stainless steel. C. Provide insulation protection shields of sufficient size and gage to prevent crushing of insulation at supports. D. Supports for pipe designed to receive anti -sweat insulation shall be sized to allow vapor barrier and insulation to be continuous through support. Provide insulation saddles sized to prevent insulation damage at each support. E. Beam clamps: 1. For pipe sizes 6" and less, and/or piping loads under 600 lbs: Acceptable. 2. For pipe sizes 8" and larger, and/or piping loads greater than 600 lbs: Subject to approval of Engineer. F. Neither chains nor straps shall be used as permanent pipe supports. G. Pipe support component in contact with pipe shall be compatible with pipe material so that neither have a deteriorating action on each other. For piping under 150°F (66°C) a neoprene Awr may be used to isolate piping from clamp -on pipe support component. o � O N H. Stainless steel pipe in contact with carbon steel pipe support component shallapow with neoprene liner to prevent dielectric corrosion. 2.06 SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORT STEELm v rn A. Shapes: ASTM A6. cs ::u B. Material: ASTM A36 or A572, Grade 50, galvanized. J C. besign of supplementary support steel shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design". r D. Supplementary support steel that induces torsion in support member is not permitted. E. Design supplementary support steel as necessary to prevent excessive loads on pipe support inserts within concrete structure. Expansion anchors in concrete roof structure not permitted without written approval of engineer. F. Design supplementary support steel as necessary to prevent excessive loads in existing steel members due to pipe support loads. Supplementary support steel is subject to review by Owner. G. Furnish supplementary support steel with loose clip angles for attachment to structure. Bolt connections to existing columns or other existing steel insofar as practicable. Where connections are common connections with existing steel, new bolts, washers, and nuts shall be supplied under this contract. H. Supplementary support steel shall conform to requirements of Section 05 50 00. I. Welding to beam flanges permitted only where welds are parallel to and directly opposite webs. Submit other welding details to Owner for review. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS FOR FACILITY SERVICES PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 20 05 29 ms1869 J. Welding: AWS D1.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SUPPORTS A. Fabrication and installation: MSS SP -58. B. Pipe supports for piping systems requiring continuous vapor barriers: 1. Refer to Section 20 07 00 for list of systems with continuous vapor barrier requirements. 2. Use factory assembled, pre -insulated supports when available. 3. Refer to article "Pipe and Equipment Support" for pipe designed with anti -sweat insulation. END OF SECTION 1) J. J. Bovenkamp 2) N O V c3� =tom i r Crr*t a rn D O Co 26710.01.00 MECHANICAL INSULATION ms1869 SECTION 20 07 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating and jacketing, including, but not limited to: 1. Air ducts not supplied with factory- or shop -applied liner. 2. Piping systems. 3. Equipment insulation not otherwise insulated by equipment manufacturer. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Schedule for insulating materials, including adhesives, fastening methods, fitting materials, etc, and intended use. 2. Catalog sheets indicating conformance to ASTM Standards, density, thermal characteristics, jacket, surface burning characteristics, water vapor permeability. 3. Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. 4. MSDS and additional safety procedures required for installation. 5. Provide warranty information on materials 6. Provide VOC content information for all adhesive and sealants to be applied inside building. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory requirements: 1. Insulation shall meet requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. o 2. Products shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B with special regard to fire hazard clalumicatioan requirements of NFPA 255, including vapor barriers and adhesives. O c/n 3. Products shall possess flame spread rating of not over 25 without evidence pt -tired progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50 exceptos allowedry International Mechanical Code. 4. Insulation materials used in contact with austenitic stainless steel shall meet rg9�em ks of ASTM C795. 5. Materials shall be asbestos -free, fire -retardant, moisture -resistant, mildew-resi"sft9antpermin proof. N 6. Adhesives, sealants, mastics and other coatings: Compatible to mechanical surfaces, irrsillations, and jackets to which applied in both wet and dry state. Suitable for temperature of systems to which applied. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material to job site in original unbroken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness. B. Store insulation materials in clean dry indoor or covered location without direct contact with ground. Do not open packaging until ready to install insulation and close packaging when packaging is not empty. Handle insulation materials so as not to damage and dispose of packaging in accordance with site requirements. Insulation removed from packaging shall not be left uninstalled and exposed to elements. C. Protect insulation during storage and in erected state from damage. Remove and replace all damaged insulation and jacketing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: Perform Work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. MECHANICAL INSULATION 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 23 00 00 ms1869 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Mineral fiber: 1. Insulation: a. Type: ASTM C547, Type I. b. Temperature rating: -20 to 850°F (-29°C to 4540C). c. Density: 3 to 6 Ib/cu ft. d. Conductivity: Not more than 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft "F at mean temperature of 75°F (240C). 2. All -service vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) with self-sealing lap: a. Factory applied to insulation. b. Finish: White vinyl or white Kraft suitable for painting. c. Bench puncture resistance: 50 units minimum, test method ASTM D781. d. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum, test method ASTM E96, Proc. A. e. Jacket temperature rating: -20 to 150°F (-29°C to 65.50C). 3. Accessories: Adhesives, sealants, mastics and other coatings compatible with insulation system as recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Elastomeric: 1. Insulation: a. Type: ASTM C534, Type I, Grade 1. b. Size: Up to 1" (25 mm) thick. c. Temperature rating: -40 to 180°F (-40°C to 820C). d. Flame spread rating: No more than 25 tested by ASTM E84. e. Smoke developed rating: No more than 50 tested by ASTM E84. f. Conductivity: Not more than 0.28 Btu-in/hr-sq ft "F at mean temperature of 75°F (240C). g. Permeance: Not more than 0.10 perms per inch, test method ASTM E96, Proc. A. h. Water absorption by volume: Not more than 0.20%. 2. Accessories: Adhesives and sealants compatible with insulation system as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Cellular glass: N p 1. Insulation: oC-� cn a. Type: ASTM C552, Type II. D� v b. Temperature rating: -400°F to 800°F (205°C to 4270C).l... e-){ t c. Density: 6.1 to 8.6 Ib/cu ft. _tn cn d. Conductivity: ASTM C552.rn e. Permeance: 0.00 perms, maximum, test method ASTM E96, Proc. A. S 2. Accessories: Adhesives, sealants, mastics or coatings as recommended byMB6lati= manufacturer. D o 00 2.02 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Mineral fiber board: 1. Insulation: a. Type: ASTM C612. b. Density: 3.0 Ib/cu ft. c. Temperature rating: 0°F to 450°F (-17°C to 232°C). d. Conductivity: Not more than 0.24 Btu-in/hr-sq ft OF at mean temperature of 75°F (240C). 2. All -service vapor retarder jacket (ASJ): a. Factory applied to insulation. b. Finish: White vinyl or white Kraft suitable for painting. c. Bench puncture resistance: 50 units minimum, test method ASTM D781. d. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum, test method ASTM E96, Proc. A. e. Jacket temperature rating: -20°F to 150°F (-29°C to 65.5°C). f. Joints and seams: 6" (150 mm) wide glass cloth, 2 coats mastic. 3. Reinforced aluminum foil jacket (FRK): 26710.01.00 MECHANICAL INSULATION ms1869 SECTION 20 07 00 - Page 3 a. Factory applied to insulation. b. Finish: foil. c. Bench puncture resistance: 25 units minimum, test method ASTM D781. d. Permeance: 0.02 perms, maximum, test method ASTM E96, Proc. A. e. Jacket temperature rating: -20 to 150°F (-29°C to 65.50C). f. Joints and Seams: 3" (75 mm) wide tape. 4. Accessories: Adhesives and sealants compatible with insulation system as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.03 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS A. PVC jacket: 1. Material: ASTM D1784, Cell Class 16354. 2. Minimum thickness: 0.030" (0.76 mm). 3. Color: Integral color to match system color provided by Owner. 4. Use preformed fittings for sizes available from manufacturer. Other fittings may be mitered. 5. Use pre -curled jackets for available sizes. 6. Ultraviolet rating: Rated for outdoor use in high -UV applications and indoor applications. 7. Solvent weld adhesives: As recommended by PVC jacket manufacturer. 8. Tape: 5 mils minimum. As recommended by PVC jacket manufacturer. 9. Tacks: Stainless steel. B. Aluminum jacket: 1. Material: ASTM C1729, Type I, 0.016" (0.4 mm) thick, smooth finish, Type 3105 or 3003 aluminum. 2. Jacket cut to size with 2" (50 mm) overlap. Banded 12" (300 mm) oc; seam calked with aluminum color silicon sealant. 3. Banding with insulation less than 13" (330 mm) diameter: Type 304 stainless steel, 1/2" x 0.020" (13 mm x 0.5 mm). 4. Banding with insulation larger than 13" (330 mm) diameter, but less than 6'-0" (1.8 diameter: Type 304 stainless steel, 3/4" x 0.020" (19 mm x 0.5 mm) o `n rr PART *t EXECUTION 2.>� 3.01 PREPARATION -rc7 c-n rn a 1 �7 p�� �r s A. Do not install covering before piping and equipment has been tested. B. . Verify surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Verify insulation is dry befo$and dwc ng application. Finish with systems at operating conditions. X71 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Verify insulation is continuous through walls. Pack around pipes and fireproof self-supporting insulation material, fully seal. B. Insulate fittings, in-line specialties, and valves. Do not insulate unions, flanges necessary for maintenance of equipment, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Terminate insulation neatly with plastic material troweled on bevel. C. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions. D. Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. E. Install insulating materials with necessary joints and terminations to permit easy access and removal of equipment sections where inspection or frequent service or repair is required, and to allow for expansion. F. Insulate following systems for complete vapor barrier protection: MECHANICAL INSULATION 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 23 00 00 ms1869 1. Cold potable water piping. 2. Externally insulated ductwork. 3. Roof drain piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPING, VALVE, AND FITTING INSULATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. B. Apply insulation to piping with bonding adhesive, with butt joints and longitudinal seams closed tightly. C. Laps on factory -applied jackets shall be 1-1/2" (38 mm) minimum width firmly cemented with lap adhesive, or be pressure sealing type lap. D. Cover joints with factory furnished tape (2" [50 mm] minimum width) to match jacket, firmly cemented with lap adhesive. E. Install factory -molded insulation for fittings as indicated for valve insulation. F. For finishing of insulated pipe fittings, one piece PVC or aluminum fitting covers matching pipe jacket may be used. G. Taper terminations of pipe insulation ends. N H. Where thermal pipe shields are used at hanger locations, extend insulation thermal shielM Where vapor barrier is required, Contractor shall be responsible for continuity of vapor Tinier allperm". shield. rno I. Where thermal pipe shields are not used at hangers for piping with vapor barrie�atil sha be calcium silicate type to eliminate compression. Calcium silicate insulation shall for twicel"th of metal shield. , p Z ox - J. Insulation at anchors, secured directly to pipe surface, shall extend up anchor foraistanc"f 4 times insulation thickness. Assure vapor seal at termination of vapor barrier. co K. Piping and fittings not to be insulated: 1. Fire protection. 2. Sanitary waste. 3. Compressed air. 4. Natural gas. 5. Fuel oil. 6. Vent. 3.04 INSTALLATION -VENTILATION DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT A. Apply duct insulation evenly over duct surface, secured with bonding adhesive applied in transverse strips, 12" (300 mm) oc. Insulation for ductwork over 24" (600 mm) wide and underside and sides of ducts with rigid insulation shall be additionally secured with weld pin or stick clip fasteners not over 18" (450 mm) oc. Where weld pin fasteners are used, they shall be installed without damage to interior galvanized surface. Neatly clip pins back to each fastener. B. Where vapor barrier jackets are specified, pins shall be jacketed over with matching materials or grouted caps, and sealed vaportight. C. Cut and miter insulation without factory jacket to suit surface. Voids, seams, and joints shall be built up with insulating cement, finished to smooth surface, and covered with glass fabric applied as specified. 26710.01.00 MECHANICAL INSULATION ms1869 SECTION 20 07 00 - Page 5 D. For surfaces requiring vapor barrier jackets, apply 2 coats of vapor barrier mastic, after application of insulating cement. Embed layer of glass fiber reinforcing fabric between coats and finish with glass fabric applied as specified. E. Internally lined ductwork shall not be insulated. Refer to Section 23 3100. 3.05 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide insulation on piping, valves, and piping accessories where required. Minimum insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Mechanical Standard M-1008, unless noted below. B. Provide field -applied jackets on all piping, valves, and piping accessories where exposed as noted below. C. Piping insulation application schedule: Service Insulation Field Applied Thickness Jacket hick Potable Hot Water Piping (1400F) Mineral Fiber PVC M-1008 conditioned space Cellular Glass Elastomeric Potable Cold Water Piping (45°F) Mineral Fiber PVC 1/2" Cellular Glass (13 mm) Elastomeric Heating Water Piping (1800F) Mineral Fiber PVC M-1008 Cellular Glass Elastomeric Roof Drain Piping (20°F) Cellular Glass PVC 1/2' Elastomeric 13 mm 3.06 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE Item Insulation' Janet alinsulation T hick Odor Control Ducts exterior to building or outside Mineral Fiber board (ASJ) Alumigg r" 3" conditioned space 'Letters in parenthesis indicate factory applied jacket. —rc-) cn 1 END OF SECTIONfir- rn 1) J.J. Bovenkamp � s 2) J> rV MINIMUM NOMINAL INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES) (NOTE 2) FLUID TEMPERATURE RANGES 39°F a BELOW 40°F To 60°F 61°F io 104°F 105°F ro 140°F 141°F ro 200°F 201°F To 250°F 251°F To 350°F 351°F ro 400°F NOMINAL PIPE SIZE TEMPERATURE CONDUCTIVITY 0.22 - LESS THAN 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 2.5 1 - 1.25 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 3.0 1.5 - 3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 4 - 6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 8 &LARGER 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 NOTES: 1, INSULATION THICKNESSES ARE BASED ON ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA STANDARD 90.1. 2. ON OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT AND PIPING, THE INSULATING THICKNESS SHOWN ABOVE SHALL BE INCREASED 0.5'. 3. INSULATION THICKNESSES SHOWN ARE MINIMUM THICKNESSES AND DO NOT INCLUDE FINISHING OR SEALING COATS. 4. THE MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESSES ARE BASED ON INSULATION WITHIN THE FOLLOWING CONDUCTIVITY RANGES. N 0 O N vrnv n� �r 7��� FOR INSULATION WITH CONDUCTIVITY VALUES OUTSIDE THE GIVEN RANGaS,g IEMNIMUM . INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE ADJUSTED BASED ON THE FOLLOWING �51WIUIX 4 V CD K co lk T=r C1+tI -1 r WHERE: T= MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES. r= ACTUAL OUTSIDE PIPE RADIUS IN INCHES I= MINIMUM THICKNESS FROM ABOVE TABLE. K= CONDUCTIVITY OF ALTERNATE MATERIAL AT MEAN RATING TEMPERATURE INDICATED FOR THE APPLICABLE FLUID TEMPERATURE IN BTU-IN/HR FT-°F k= THE UPPER VALUE OF THE CONDUCTIVITY RANGE LISTED IN THE ABOVE TABLE FOR THE APPLICABLE FLUID TEMPERATURE. 3-GENERAL TA JJB MAE 7/13/2007 2- REV HEADING JBP SJS SJS 10/6/1995low op 1- REVS & CADD TRK SJS SJS 9/16/1994 Stanley Consultants INC REVISIONS DES CHK APP DATE SCALE: NONE MECHANICAL STANDARD PIPING AND EQUIPMENT NO. REV INSULATION INSULATION THICKNESS IVI-1UU8 3 CONDUCTIVITY MEAN RATING 100°F 125°F 150°F 200°F 250°F TEMPERATURE CONDUCTIVITY 0.22 - 0.25 - 0.27 - 0.29 - 0.32 - (BTU-IN/HR FT °F) 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.32 0.34 26710.01.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ms1869 SECTION 23 05 93 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures, general. B. Final reports. C. Contractor responsibilities. D. Preparation. E. Schedule of systems requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing services. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Prior to start of Work, submit name of organization proposed to perform services. Designate managerial responsibilities for coordination of entire testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Submit documentation to confirm organization qualifications. C. Submit 3 preliminary specimen copies of each of report fortes proposed for use. D. Fifteen days prior to Substantial Completion, submit 3 copies of final reports. Submit reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing which is postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of those services. N E. Schedule of start-up to Engineer. o C) -' N F. Contractor shall prepare instrument calibration reports in duplicate for each instry t acontrol Joop. Include instrument calibration data and status of equipment. Note any defie, ies yet to t� corrected on instruments that are suitable for operation (e.g.: broken lenses, faullgle�al AWdcatois on transmitters that can still perform correct output transmission) Contractor shall caKect thug deficiencies at earliest possible date. Copies shall be submitted for Resident Pr 'iepwsent�turE s review. Each calibration report shall be signed by Contractor's representative wi( Cing=st. UVJ 1. Electrical systems test reports: Typewritten, listing equipment used, person I* perso* performing tests, date tested, circuits tested, and results of tests. on 2. Form of final environmental test reports: a. Each individual final reporting form must bear signature of person who recorded data and that of testing, adjusting, and balancing supervisor of reporting organization. b. When more than 1 certified organization performs testing, adjusting, and balancing services, firm having managerial responsibility shall make submittals. c. Identify instruments of types that were used, and last date of calibration of each. d. Record and submit all data measured including air flow, liquid flows, pressure drops, motor loads and all other data requested in "Environmental Systems," this Section. G. At completion of Work, Contractor shall submit to Owner certification that equipment has been commissioned and is in operating condition in accordance with Contract Documents. H. Final reports: 1. Organization having managerial responsibility shall make reports. 2. Each forth: Bear signature of recorder, and that of supervisor of reporting organization. 3. Identify each instrument used and latest date of calibration of each. TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 23 05 93 ms1869 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with procedural standards of certifying association under whose standards service will be performed. B. Notify Engineer 3 days prior to beginning of operations. C. Accurately record data for each step. D. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of certification sponsoring association; either: 1. "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics Systems," by AABC, International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance" by TABB, or "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems," by NEBB. 2. Perform services under direction of supervisor who is designated and qualified under certification requirements of sponsoring association. 3. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with requirements of standards, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. 4. Accuracy of measurements shall comply with requirements of standards. E. Comply fully with procedural standards of certifying association under whose standards service will be performed. r� 1. Execute each step of prescribed testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures withdffiEomission. 2. Accurately record required data. O Zen m 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS D t Ln rT A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting, and balancing, verify that required "job conditiogre met, 1 •' 1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation. rn Z 0 2. Outside conditions are within reasonable range relative to design conditionso � —' 3. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic�puipm(n are in full operation. co B. Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of each of systems that require testing. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate services with Work of various trades to ensure rapid completion of services. B. Promptly report to Engineer any deficiencies noted during performance of services. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare each system for testing and balancing B. Cooperate with testing organization, provide access to equipment and systems. Operate systems at designated times, and under conditions required for proper testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Notify testing organization 7 days prior to time system will be ready for testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. Perform specified services with Contractor's qualified personnel, or employ and pay for qualified organization to perform specified services. 26710.01.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ms1869 SECTION 23 05 93 - Page 3 E. Perform testing of control station equipment, balancing of distribution system, and adjustment of terminal devices for HVAC systems of Project. F. Perform testing of hydronic systems, adjust and record liquid flow at each piece of equipment. G. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. 1. Make instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 2. Retain possession of instruments; remove from Site at completion of services. H. Furnish material, tools, and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of equipment, instrument and system: I. Provide information and assistance required, cooperate with test, adjust, and balance services. J. Comply strictly with specified manufacturer's or Engineer's procedures in starting up specified systems. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide and maintain tools and test equipment in first-class condition and quantities sufficient to assure successful performance and completion of required Work. B. Furnish and use materials in accordance with these Specifications. Materials shall be of first-class quality, free from defects or imperfections, of recent manufacture, unused and of classification and grade specified. C. Test equipment shall have recent calibration checks by equipment manufacturer or authorized facility to assure accuracy of commissioning process. N D. Piping system joint leak testing compound: "Leak -Tek," or equal. o C:) E. Anti -rust compound for packing gland threads and valve stems: "Moly-Cote" or "Fe2ro.1 n 3y -0 PART 3 EXECUTION cn r 3.01 PREPARATION Gr" 3 A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. M instnts available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. Retain possession of instruni5bts and remove at completion of services. B. Verify installation of system to be tested is complete and in continuous operation. C. Verify ambient conditions and related facilities are in full operation. 3.02 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Bearings: 1. Inspect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign materials. 2. Verify alignment. 3. Replace defective bearings, and those that run roughly or noisily. 4. Grease as necessary, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drives: 1. Adjust tension in V -belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed. 2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V -belts. 3. Clean; remove foreign materials before starting operation. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 23 05 93 ms1869 C. Motors: 1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value. 2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction. D. Piping systems: 1. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation. Replace flange gaskets which show any sign of leakage after tightening. 2. Inspect screwed joints for leakage. a. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust to form. b. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound, and remake joints. 3. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valves seats, and headers in fluid systems, to assure they are free of foreign materials. 4. Open air vents; remove operating elements. Clean thoroughly, replace internal parts and put back into operation. 5. Remove any rust, scale, and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. 6. Repair damaged insulation. 7. Vent gasses trapped in any part of systems. 8. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded connection. 9. Control valves: a. Inspect both hand and automatic control valves; clean bonnets and stems. r , b. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operatd3tithout galling. a --�� c. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system i�j;�ec%mplet d. Replace packing on any valve that continues to leak. 3'—i t e. Remove and repair bonnets that leak. n'< C.n f. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation ofi�dust compo after cleaning. o = Q 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 0 OD A. Perform testing of central station equipment, balancing of distribution systems, and adjusting of terminal devices for: 1. Air handling units. 2. Return, supply, and exhaust fans. 3. Air distribution systems. 4. Water distribution systems. 5. Heating terminal units. B. Air balancing: 1. Make measurements in accordance with recognized procedures and practices of certifying association. 2. Measure air volume discharged at each outlet and adjust air outlets to design air volumes within 10% over or under. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations for required air volume. Set speed to provide air volume at farthest distance without excess static pressure. 3. Measure and adjust air supply and exhaust fan units to deliver design conditions at 100%. 4. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. 5. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. 6. Evaluate building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return air conditions. 7. Evaluate space and zone temperature conditions to determine adequate performance of systems to maintain temperatures without draft. B. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. 9. Mark balancing dampers and cocks. 26710.01.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ms1869 SECTION 23 05 93 - Page 5 C. Hydronic balancing: 1. Make measurements in accordance with recognized procedures and practices of certifying association. 2. Measure and adjust water flow for design conditions, within 10% over or under. 3. Check conditions at heating coils for required performance at design conditions. 4. Check conditions at primary source equipment for performance of design conditions. 3.04 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS A. Commission controls and instruments prior to start-up to assure in situ performance in accordance with specifications under simulated operating conditions. Contractor to determine initial start-up conditions. B. Remove shipping stops from instruments before starting with procedures listed herein. Contractor shall have instruction manuals available, and shall install miscellaneous components such as charts, illumination, mercury, etc., which have been supplied separately but are integral parts of equipment. C. If any doubt exists as to correct method for calibrating or checking calibration of instrument, manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used. D. If any instrument cannot be property adjusted, it shall be immediately called to attention of Owner and report of its condition confirmed in writing. E. Instrument check: Verify data on nameplate with respect to conditions of range, operating temperature, specific gravity, and components as stated on unit specifications. Any discrepancies shall be immediately called to attention of Owner and report of condition confirmed in writing. F. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material, and are properly positioned intended service. _. �n N G. Test procedures: 1. Check handswitches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights. ? r 2. Check interlocking circuits installed for conformance to schematic diagrams a�t PSequence Operation." m a 3. Perform Work of placing in initial operation equipment installed or wired underkS coact, following instructions and recommendations of equipment manufacturers. .. a. After energizing and prior to start-up, check control circuits and programs'for pro�Qr sequence of operation and interlocking functions. b. Wiring changes required as result of such checks shall be properly identified by changing terminal strip and/or wiring markers. 4. Contractor shall provide necessary construction labor to make equipment final adjustments that are required to place systems in good operating condition, and furnish labor to assist in solving instrument or control problems. 5. Contractor shall calibrate instruments and components in accordance with manufacturer's calibration data over full operational range, prove instruments to be within published specification, accuracy, and affix calibration sticker. Instruments shall be calibrated individually and where applicable, as system Components which have adjustable features shall be carefully set for specific conditions and applications of this Project. Each calibration sticker shall be signed by Contractor's representative witnessing test. 6. Calibration sticker shall contain the following information: Equipment identification tag number, range of calibration, and date and name of person doing calibration. 7. Valves and operations: a. Control valves: Operation of control valve shall be verged within limits of practicality. Particular attention must be given to manufacturer's instructions and applicable nameplate data in reference to valve spring scale and actuation conditions. Pay close attention to bench set. b. Valve action: Check valve action for conformance to specifications (open or closed on power failure). TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 23 05 93 ms1869 B. Controllers; field mounted: Simulate "Set Point" and "Measured Variable" signals at controller, with separate regulated signals. Check operation as in Item "8., b." preceding. 9. Acceptable calibration standards: a. Vacuum or draft: 1) 0" to 5" w.c.: Inclined water filled manometer graduated in tenths and inches of water. 2) 5" to 25" Hg: Mercury manometer graduated in inches of mercury. 3) 5" to 60" H2O: Water manometer graduated in inches of water. b. Pressure: 1) 0" to 5" w.c.: Inclined water filled manometer graduated in tenths and inches of water. 2) 5" to 60" w.c.: Water manometer graduated in inches of water. 3) 3 to 25 psig: Mercury manometer graduated in psi. 4) 25 to 150 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-160 psi, 1/4 of 1% accuracy, 8-1/2" dial minimum. 5) 150 to 750 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-800 psi, 1/2 of 1% accuracy, 8-1/2" dial minimum. 6) 750 to 2,750 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-3,000 psi, 1/2 of 1% accuracy, 8-1/2" dial minimum. c. Differential: 1) 0" to 5" w.c.: Inclined water filled manometer graduated in tenths and inches of water. 2) 5" to 300" w.c.: Mercury manometer graduated in inches of water. 3) 5 to 25 psig: Mercury manometer graduated in psi. 4) Above 25 psig: Use pressure gages listed hereinbefore. d. Temperatures: 1) -20 to 250°F: Laboratory thermometers of suitable range. 2) Other ranges: Use thermocouple and precision potentiometer. e. Others: 1) Precision millivolt potentiometer: Portable. 2) Rotameter: Range, 6.5 to 65 cu cm/min of air. 3) Equipment as specified by manufacturer's instructions. 4) Wallace & Tiernan or Mansfield -Green pneumatic calibrator; range, vacuum to +24 psi: For vacuum, pressure, or differential. rs o END OF SECTION - a 11 J. J. Bovenkamp n 2}Cn D -i r m �rn s � o w 26710.01.00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS ms1869 SECTION 23 31 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ducts. B. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ducts. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Dud sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain scheduled sizes inside lining or insulation. B. Pressure class: 1. See application table for pressure class requirements for each duct system. 2. Pressure classes shall correspond to pressure classes defined by SMACNA in HVAC Dud Construction Standards Metal and Flexible — Third Edition. 3. Each pressure class shall be suitable for positive or negative pressure applications. C. Leakage class: 1. See leakage class table for requirements for each duct system. 2. Leakage classes shall correspond to leakage classes defined by SMACNA in HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, Second Edition 2012. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Guarantee ductwork to be free of vibration, chatter, objectionable pulsation, and excessiy.%Ieakage under all conditions of operation. o J 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS � r�_-- A. Shop Drawings: Duct fittings, including particulars such as gage sizes, welds, ar figimbon9. QUALITY ASSURANCE -<r- 1.05 _ A. Use material, weight, thickness, gage, construction, and installation methods as ined i(flollowing SMACNA publications: a, 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Metal & Flexible, Third Edition. 2. SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, Seventh Edition. B. Construct and install ductwork in accordance with provisions of International Mechanical Code. C. Perform leakage test as outlined in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual Second Edition 2012. D. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stainless steel sheet metal: 1. Cold -rolled stainless steel sheet capable of welding or double seaming without fracture. 2. Alloy: 304-2B. B. Sealant: 1. Water-based, water-resistant. 2. Fire -resistive. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 23 31 00 ms1869 3. Compatible with mating materials. 4. Elastomeric mastic 5. Maintain manufacturer's recommended temperatures during and after installation. 2.02 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK A. Construction: Polyester impregnated, filament wound fiberglass in accordance with ASTM D3982 and C582, with corrosion protection on inner surface and corrosion and UV protection on outer surface. B. Design: Duct design shall be suitable for use in seismic areas, and for use outdoors. Duct wall thickness shall be calculated for buried duct with minimum structural layer of 3/8" (10 mm). C. Corrosion resistance: Resistant to hydrogen sulfide, chlorine, and other gases encountered in wastewater treatment plants. D. Temperature limit: For transportation of air at 180°F (82°C), continuous service. E. Thermal conductivity: 3.0 Btu-in/hr-ft2°F (0.433 W/(m-K). F. Joints: Butt and wrap in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. G. Fabricate fittings, joints and other accessories in accordance with SMACNA recommendations for Thermoset FRP Ducts. H. Manufacturer: Yankee Plastic Company; Spunstrand, Inc. Perry Fiberglass, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION N 3.01 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION o A. Fabricate and install duct, fittings, reinforcement, and supports in accordance wf �llAW recommendations except as modified below. 1. Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between du$;r Vhe6 wid of duct exceeds 18" (450 mm), cross break for rigidity. Open corners are not ar4optable. rn 2. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 150 divergence wherever poss Qa�Zumr�7 divergence upstream of equipment shall be 300; convergence downstream �, ipn=t shau,pe 45° ;3. Provide easements where ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easer$nts exceed 10% of duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. B. Ductwork - general: 1. Construct ductwork so interior surfaces are smooth. Use rivets or nuts and bolts for fabricating ductwork. Sheet metal screws may be used on duct hangers, transverse joints, and other SMACNA-approved locations if screw does not extend more than 1/2" (15 mm) into duct. Seal fastener locations where leakage could occur and seal ductwork according to SMACNA recommendations with regard to pressure class of duct. 2. Use elbows, tees, lateral, crosses and accessory fittings as needed to fabricate duct systems. 3. Use elbows and tees with a centerline radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wherever space permits. When shorter radius must be used due to limited space, install sheet metal turning vanes through entire length of fitting. Where space will not allow use of shorter radius elbow or tee, install mitered fitting with double-wall turning vanes. Square throat -radius heel elbows shall not be acceptable. 4. Construct branch take off with 450 take off fitting connection 1-1/2 times area of branch duct. 5. Use splitter dampers and/or extractors only where manual volume dampers will not accomplish intended balancing. Use of splitter dampers and/or extractors shall not eliminate need for specified or indicated manual volume dampers. 6. Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct interior. 26710.01.00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS ms1869 SECTION 23 31 00 - Page 3 7. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate, or sag. 8. Fasten hangers to duct with nuts and bolts or surround duct with hanger strap to provide a single hanging point for round duct. Trapeze hangers may be used. Internal duct hangers not accepted. 9. Provide sufficient clearances between duct and beams, pipes, or other obstructions in building construction and for work of other trades. Check drawings showing work of other trades and consult with Engineer in event of any interference. Transform, divide, or offset ducts as required, in such a manner as to maintain same cross sectional area of duct as indicated on Drawings. Where it is necessary to take pipes or similar obstruction through ducts, ducts need not be enlarged if decrease in area does not exceed 10%. If decrease in area would exceed 10%, enlarge dud to maintain duct area not less than 90%. In all cases, provide a streamlined casement or collar designed in accordance with SMACNA and seal to prevent air leakage. 10. Provide frames constructed of angles or channels for coils, filters, dampers, or other devices installed in dud systems, and make connections to such equipment including equipment furnished by others. Secure frames with felt gaskets, nut, bolts, and washers. 11. Remove dirt and foreign matter from entire duct system and clean diffusers, registers, and grilles before operating fans and/or before balance begins. 12. Install motor -operated dampers and connect to or install equipment furnished by others. 13. At outside air intakes, install duct to pitch to intakes and to drain to outside of building. Solder or calk on airside seams to form watertight joints. Blank off unused portions of louvers with 1-1/2" (40 mm) board insulation with galvanized sheet metal backing on both sides. 14. Seal transverse joints and all seams. 15. Sealant shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer. 16. Use of tape without sealant shall not be acceptable C. Ductwork 3" (750 Pa) pressure class and greater: 1. Fabricate and install ductwork, fitting, and reinforcement in accordance SMACNA recommendations. 2. Field joints shall be slip type with sealer applied between joints and riveted. Apply ?Z450 mm) band of dud sealer on outside of joint and duct tape. o 3. Use of splitter dampers and/or extractors not allowed. p —' 4. Use elbows, tees, lateral, crosses and accessory fittings as needed to fabric{iustems l 5. Provide positive and negative relief fittings. > 6. Seal all joints, seams and wall penetrations. M D. Duct pressure test: �rrn ��"c 1. Perform pressure test on representative duct sections on Project totaling mi 455% o`GLI installed duct area for each pressure class above 3" w.g (750 Pa) and 100°/"' a duct systems located outdoors. Owner will select specific duct sections for testing. N 2. Pressure test ductwork with Contractor -furnished calibrated test apparatus. rn 3. Pressure test shall test duct system in sub systems as required to isolate equipment (AHU, Terminal unit, coils, etc) from duct system. 4. Conduct test at pressure rating of duct section, record data in a neat manner before allowing duct to be insulated. 5. Leakage rate shall not exceed allowable values for duct pressure class, seal class, and leakage class specified. Where leakage rate exceeds allowable rate from SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, locate leak sources, repair, and retest. If more than 10% of tested sections exceed allowable leakage rate, test 100% of duct system. 6. Leakage classes shall be as follows: Duct Pressure Class in. w.g. (Pa) Lea ka a Class Rectangular Duct Round or Flat Oval Duct 0.5(125) 16 8 1 250 16 8 2 500 16 8 3 750 8 4 4 1000 4 2 61500 4 2 10M 1 4 2 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 23 31 00 ms1869 7. If air leakage more than specified above is found during pressure testing and/or air balancing, locate and seal source of leakage. Repair any damage to insulation or other construction. E. Hangers and supports: 1. Support rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal ducts with support systems indicated in "Hangers and Supports" chapter of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. 2. Provide supports as required to maintain alignment. 3. Provide additional supports within 2'(0.6 m) of each elbow and 4'(1.2 m) of each branch intersection. F. Seismic restraint of ducts: Provide seismic restraint of all ducts in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual (1998 Edition with Addendum 1), and in accordance with local Building Code. Seismic Hazard levels shall D. G. Sealing requirements: 1. All Ducts a. Minimum of SMACNA Seal Class A b. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. c. Sealant shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer d. Use of tape without sealant shall not be acceptable. H. Fiberglass reinforced plastic duct: 1. Fabricate and install ductwork, fittings and reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and SMACNA recommendations. 2. Use elbows and tees with a centerline radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wli"ever space permits. When shorter radius must be used due to limited space, instaljtarningSane through entire length of fitting. Where space will not allow use of shorter radius 90 orrV, in itered fitting with double-wall turning vanes. Square throat -radius heel elbcwcc€4able. 3. Construct branch take off with 450 take off fitting connection 1-1/2 timesa jB of branch --1 n c -n 3 rn APPI ICATInN _e r- DuctApplication Duct Material I Minimum Pressure Classulatl_n Belt Filter Press Room Supply Stainless steel NA None -7c :- Duct Belt Filter Press Room Odor FRP NA 20 07 00 for dusKoexterior to Control Exhaust Duct I building END OF SECTION 1) J. J. Bovenkamp 2) 26710.01.00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ms1869 SECTION 23 33 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Balancing dampers. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Data concerning dimensions, capacities, ratings and appropriate identification. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: Manufacturers must have at least 5 years experience manufacturing duct accessories, of required types and sizes and whose products have been satisfactory used in similar service. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Fire dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: UL -listed and constructed in accordance with UL 555. 2. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers and Smoke Dampers: UL listed and constructed in accordance with UL 555S 3. Fusible links: UL -listed and constructed in accordance with UL 33. 4. Access doors: UL -listed. 5. Use material, weight, thickness, gage, construction, and installation method as outlined in: 6. SMACNA Dud Construction Standards - Metal & Flexible, Third Edition. 7. NFPA 90A - Standard for Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 8. NFPA 90B - Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 9. UL 214 - Test for Flame -Propagation of Fabrics and Films. o PART PRODUCTS C7 rrirt 2.01 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS 7-1 m M A. Rectangular dampers ''= M 1. Single blade dampers: a. Suitable for duds 12" (300 mm) in height and less and 36" (900 mm) in wJ0and4ess. b. Construction: Y IV 1) Frames: Galvanized steel minimum 20 -gage (0.9 mm) channel, or minimum ffb81" (2.1 mm) aluminum channel. 2) Blades: Single thickness, galvanized steel minimum 22 -gage (0.8 mm) for 18" (450 mm) wide and less and 20 -gage (0.9 mm) over 18" (450 mm) or aluminum minimum thickness of 0.080" (2.032 mm). Blades shall be stiffened as necessary. 3) Axles: Minimum 3/8" (10 mm) diameter galvanized steel for ducts 18" (450 mm) wide and less, minimum 1/2" (13 mm) diameter galvanized steel for ducts and over 18" (450 mm). Use stainless steel for stainless or aluminum ducts. 4) Bearings. Oil -impregnated bronze bearings or molded synthetic. 2. Multi -blade dampers: Suitable for all ducts. a. Frames: galvanized steel minimum 16 -gage (1.5 mm), or minimum thickness of 0.081"(2.1 mm) aluminum channel. b. Blades: opposed type, 6" (150 mm) maximum width, galvanized steel minimum 16 -gage (1.5 mm), or extruded aluminum minimum thickness of 0.125" (3 mm). c. Axles: Minimum 1/2" (13 mm) diameter galvanized or extruded. d. Bearings. Oil -impregnated bronze bearings or molded synthetic. e. Linkage: Galvanized steel located outside of air stream. For multi -section dampers, provide jackshaft for operation from one side. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 23 33 00 ms1869 B. Round dampers: 1. Single blade dampers. 2. Construction: a. Frame FRP in accordance with requirements for FRP duct in section 23 3100. b. Blades: Single thickness FRP in accordance with requirements for FRP duct in Section 23 31 00. Blade shall fully encapsulate shaft. c. Axles: Minimum 3/8" diameter or square stainless steel bar or pultruded FRP. d. Bearings: Molded synthetic. C. Provide with locking hand quadrant with damper position indicator. Where damper is located 6'-0" or more above finished floor provide chain wheel operator for operation of damper from floor. Where duct is externally insulated provide 2" (50 mm) minimum standoff bracket. D. Construct dampers over 48" (1.2 m) in width in multiple sections with mullions. E. Provide end bearings or other seals on dampers located in 3" (750 Pa) pressure class or higher ducts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Manual balancing dampers: 1. Install in branch ducts of supply, return low-pressure ductwork. 2. Install as far upstream from inlet or outlet as possible. N O END OF SECTION O =� 1) J. J.Bovenkamp r=c7 n 2) �--j rn r r m C) 26710.01.00 HVAC FANS ms1869 SECTION 23 34 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Centrifugal roof exhaust fans. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Catalog data showing selection and options. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimension drawings. 2. Fan curves. 3. Sound ratings. 4. Material of construction. 5. Weights. 6. Tag numbers. 7. Vibration isolation. 8. Motor data as specified. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insofar as practicable, provide fans of same manufacturer throughout. B. Test fans as complete units in accordance with applicable test code of AMCA. Fans shall be certified by AMCA. N A C. Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bearZSMCA cwiified rating seal _-:;n Vl D. Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturer's '� cI recommendations. 1 E. A Industrial Ventilation, 25th Edition, American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygaists. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS N m A. Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is cleaned, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Aerovent. B. Greenheck. C. Hartzell. D. Loren Cook. HVAC FANS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 23 34 00 ms1869 E. New York Blower. F. Twin Cities Fan and Blower. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide fans with variable pitch V -belt drives for 15 hp and smaller and fixed drives for 20 hp and larger. Provide variable pitch drive for purposes of initial system balancing on 20 hp and larger fans. Provide fixed pitch drives for final system balancing. V -belt drives shall be designed for 150% of motor rating. B. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Variable speed fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced for entire range of speed operation. C. Where fan drives are exposed, provide guards in accordance with applicable code requirements. Provision shall be made so tachometer may be used to verify fan speed without removing guard assembly. D. Fan size, fan class, wheel type, inlet type, capacity, arrangement, operating characteristics, and other special requirements shall be as scheduled. E. Fans shall be Class 1, unless otherwise indicated. N F. Equivalent fan selections shall not increase motor horsepower, increase noise Ieve$icrease tip speed by more than 10%, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20%, fan thatAecifieQiii r*t G. Explosionproof fans shall have explosionproof motor enclosure and electria4esspries AMCA Type A spark -resistant fan construction. ") cn tt r rrn 2.03 FINISHES rn 2 A. Application: All, unless specified or scheduled otherwise. x v o �o B. Aluminum components: None. C. Interior concealed steel components: Galvanized. D. Exterior or interior exposed to air stream: Polyester powder coat, 1.5 to 3 mils thickness, Loren Cook "Lorenized," Greenheck "Permatector," or equal. E. Heresite: 1. Applications: As scheduled. 2. Type: Heresite VR -504. 3. Thickness: 4 to 6 mils. 4. Provide Heresite UC -5500 UV -resistant coating for outdoor fans. 2.04 POWERED ROOF EXHAUST FANS: A. Construction: 1. Arrangement: Upblast or down blast, as scheduled. 2. Housing: Heavy -gage spun aluminum. 3. Wheel: Centrifugal, backward inclined aluminum. 4. Explosionproof as scheduled. B. Drive: As scheduled. 26710.01.00 HVAC FANS ms1869 SECTION 23 34 00 - Page 3 C. Bearings: 1. Regreasable with fittings extending outside of casing for ease of service. 2. Heavy-duty, self -aligning, pillow block, ball-bearing type. 3. L50 rated at not less than 200,000 hours. D. Accessories: 1. Unit -mounted disconnect switch. 2. Roof curbs: a. Adapter curb: Provided by equipment manufacturer to match existing roof curb. Field verify dimensions of existing curb. b. Minimum 12" (300 mm) from top of curb to finished roof surface. c. Insulation: 2" (50 mm) thick minimum on inside of curb. d. Curb shall adjust for roof or structure slope. Top of curb shall be level. 3. Factory -fabricated roof curb. 4. Hinged base. 5. Corrosion resistant fiberglass gravity damper. 6. Aluminum or fiberglass bird screen. 7. Lifting lugs. 8. Drive assembly vibration isolators. 9. Fan speed controller for direct drive units. E. Manufacturer: Loren Cook ACE, or equal by Greenheck, Hartzel, or Twin Cities Fan and Blower. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Provide sheaves as necessary for final air balancing. N C. Furnish and install miscellaneous hangers, steel, and supports to adequately sffport Construct sheet metal transition fittings as required to connect ductwork and equipment iamccor a wilhn requirements of Section 23 31 00. Provide flexible connections at fan inlet and or=t. D. Arrangement of components shall provide easy access to items requiring periotti OinY�llance� including, but not limited to belts, filters, and grease fittings. � rr*y 3 rn E. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. �� F. Where fan speed controller is provided, mount to fan housing. Use controller for lancirqpof direct drive fans. 3.02 INSTALLATION — ROOF MOUNTED FANS A. Mount on factory -fabricated curbs END OF SECTION 1) J. J. Bovenkamp 2) J. N. Gavin 2- A. Product Data: 1. List of proposed material identifying manufacturer, pe and model number for equipment to be provided for complete job. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets marked to indica specific type, model or catalog number of equipment to be provided. 3. Equipment drawings, elementary diagrams, hematics, wiring, performance curves, instruction manuals, and all other documentation nece ary for complete description of material being supplied and as required to support install on, commissioning and maintenance of equipment. Manufacturer's standard connection diag m or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted. Manufacturers technical descriptions, duct data sheets, and applicable manuals for use in protective device system coordination' cluding: Fuse manufacturer, type, ratings, nd protection curves. Circuit breaker manufacturer, ty ,trip setting ranges, and protection curves. C.. Relay trip device ranges, curve ,and setting manuals. d. ransformer damage curves. e. ratios and saturation cury f. tings. 5. List of n eplates 6. List of reco mended spare pa s required for equipment start-up, commissioning and operation. 7. List of speci maintenance to Is required for installation and operation of equipment. 8. If necessary, vide additio I data to clearly demonstrate that proposed alternate equipment meets or excee equipme as specified. 9. When requested Engin r, submit system information, including but not limited to, utility feeders, existing re s, ci uit breakers, fuses, and transformers. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenanc m als. Provide at minimum: 1. Itemized equipment li . 2. General description d techni I data. o 3. Receiving, storage, ' stallation, a testing instructions. o =. 4. Operating and mai enance proc res. n v� 5. Complete set of fi I drawings requir no further action. v' o 6. Complete docum tation of inspection Doc nd tests performed, including logs, cwroGs, and fai[7 certificates. mentation shall note a during testing. replacement of equipment or compeaentsrt(ti it m a 7. Spare parts list. 8. Lubrication re mmendations. s� 9. Warranty info ation. v ry s 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra material : Provide touchup paint in same type and color to repair at least 25% of finish -painted equipment sqtface. Paint shall be sufficient to perform touch-up painting in accordance with shop - applied matqtial instructions for repair painting. B. Each piece/of equipment shall be furnished with special tools as required for installation, maintenance, and dismqhtling of equipment. 1.Furni h in quantities as necessary to complete work on schedule. 2. Tool shall be new and shall become property of Owner. 3. Tools and intended use shall be identified in assembly instructions. Tools shall only be used for their intended purpose. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of equipment specified shall be recognized in industry for normally supplying this type of equipment. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. G neral electrical requirements for equipment, services, and 1. actory wiring. 2. w -voltage field wiring. 3. L -voltage splices and terminations. 4. EI rical enclosures. 5. Outl boxes 6. Pull b as and junction boxes. 7. Equipm nt safety grounding. 8. Fuses an fuse blocks. 9. Electrical eters. 10. Control rela . 11. Control switc s. 12. Pushbuttons. 13. Indicating lights. 14. Alarm and trip con cts. 15. Separately mounted ombination mot starters. 16. Local separate manua tarter. 17. Local separated low -volt a circuit reakers 18. Local separate disconnect witch 19. Dc motor starters. 20. General purpose distribution tr sformers. 21. Motor power factor correction citors. 22. Plates and covers. 23. Wiring devices, 24. Welding. 25. Welding receptacles. 26. Panelboards. 27. Circuit breakers 28. Shop finish. 29. Rust -inhibiting co ounds. 30. Galvanizing. 31. Packaging, iden ication, and tagging. 32. Equipment na plates. 33. Hardware. r 34. Logic syste factory testing. 35. Examinatio of Site. 36. Protectio of Work. 37. Equipm t and material installation. 38. Prote a devices settings and coordination. 39. Cabl nstallation. 40. Wiri devices, boxes, and fittings installation. 41. Gr riding and bonding. 42. P er factor correction installation. 43. F reproofing and fire ratings. 44. tartup and testing. 45 Testing and demonstration. 4 . Seismic requirements data sheet. 1.02 REI(ATED REQUIREMENTS Section 02 41 00 -Demolition: Demolition of electrical items. 1.03 including, but not limited to: N 0 o� rn �� � r �m A rn J v o w COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 1.03 I N FO RMATI ONALSU BM ITTALS A. Product Data: 1. List of proposed material identifying manufacturer, type and model number for equipment to be provided for complete job. 2. Manufacturers catalog sheets marked to indicate specific type, model or catalog number of equipment to be provided. 3. Equipment drawings, elementary diagrams, schematics, wiring, performance curves, instruction manuals, and all other documentation necessary for complete description of material being supplied and as required to support installation, commissioning and maintenance of equipment. Manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted. 4. Manufacturer's technical descriptions, product data sheets, and applicable manuals for use in protective device system coordination including: a. Fuse manufacturer, type, ratings, and protection curves. b. Circuit breaker manufacturer, type, trip setting ranges, and protection curves. c. Relay trip device ranges, curves, and setting manuals. d. Transformer damage curves. e. CT ratios and saturation curves. f. VT ratings. 5. List of nameplates 6. List of recommended spare parts required for equipment start-up, commissioning and operation. 7. List of special maintenance tools required for installation and operation of equipment. 8. If necessary, provide additional data to clearly demonstrate that proposed alternate equipment meets or exceeds equipment as specified. 9. When requested by Engineer, submit system information, including but not limited to, utility feeders, existing relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and transformers. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals. Provide at minimum: 1. Itemized equipment list. 2. General description and technical data. 3. Receiving, storage, installation, and testing instructions. 4. Operating and maintenance procedures. 5. Complete set of final drawings requiring no further action. 6. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including logs, curves, and certificates. Documentation shall note any replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing. 7. Spare parts list. 8. Lubrication recommendations. 9. Warranty information. 1[05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A., Extra materials: Provide touchup paint in same type and color to repair at least 25% of finish -painted equipment surface. Paint shall be sufficient to perform touch-up painting in accordance with shop - applied material instructions for repair painting. t � c B. ' Each piece of equipment shall be furnished with special tools as required for installatiorMaintenance, and dismantling of equipment. 1. Furnish in quantities as necessary to complete work on schedule. cn VJ 2. Tools shall be new and shall become property of Owner. 3> =i rri 3. Tools and intended use shall be identified in assembly instructions. Tools chalKpnly-be use their intended purpose. M m �s s rV Q '} N 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General electrical requirements for equipment, services, and installations including, but not limited to: 1. Factory wiring. 2. Low -voltage field wiring. 3. Low -voltage splices and terminations. 4. Electrical enclosures. 5. Outlet boxes 6. Pull boxes and junction boxes. 7. Equipment safety grounding. 8. Fuses and fuse blocks. 9. Electrical meters. 10. Control relays. 11. Control switches. 12. Pushbuttons. 13. Indicating lights. 14. Alarm and trip contacts. 15. Separately mounted combination motor starters. 16. Local separate manual starter. 17. Local separated low -voltage circuit breakers 18. Local separate disconnect switches. 19. Dc motor starters. 20. General purpose distribution transformers. 21. Motor power factor correction capacitors. 22. Plates and covers. 23. Wiring devices, 24. Welding. 25. Welding receptacles. 26. Panelboards. 27. Circuit breakers 28. Shop finish. 29. Rust -inhibiting compounds. 30. Galvanizing. 31. Packaging, identification, and tagging. 32. Equipment nameplates. 33. Hardware. 34. Logic systems factory testing. 35. Examination of Site. 36. Protection of Work. 37. Equipment and material installation. 38. Protective devices settings and coordination. C> _+ 39. Cable installation. z t? r� 40. Wiring devices, boxes, and fittings installation. 41. Grounding and bonding. 42. Power factor correction installation. ratings. r �� n 43. Fireproofing and fire ZrN 44. Startup and testing. 45. Testing and demonstration. }y 46. Seismic requirements data sheet. J 1.1V RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02 41 00 -Demolition: Demolition of electrical items. 4 - f�I>EYyM.I:Ibill 41Eel A. Coordinate with Owner early and late shipping handling at Site. 1.09 ms delivery schedules for items requiring storage and A. Electrical equipment shall be provided with anufacturees standard warranty, but not less than 1 year. PART RODUCTS 2.01 DESI CRITERIA A. Servi conditions: Provide equipm t and material suitable for intended service and installation at location dicated. B. Low -voltage uxiliary and control ower. 1. Electrical wer for ac contr and instrumentation equipment: a. Provide vices necess ry for proper operation and protection of equipment during electrical power sup ly and amb' nt temperature fluctuations specified. b. Design for c tinuous peration at any voltage from 85% to 110% of nominal voltage. Dropout volta shal a 60% of nominal for relays and 75% for contactors and starters. 2. Electrical power for d vices: a. Design for continu s operation on ungrounded station battery system, capable of maintaining opera o at any voltage from 80% to 112% of nominal voltage. .a b. Electrical device se d shall not impose ground connection on supply. o o -' C. Auxiliary power: Desig auxiliary uipment for low -voltage service, with electri t�dwe4signen operate from one of no inal electric ower sources as follows and as indicate�ojrawTgs: r cup D. Design equipm nt enclosure in accordance with seismic gwrements listed in most recent local building code and Data Sheets. 2.02 HAZARDOUS A. Areas whe flammable and combustible liquids, gases, and dusts are tta edand stored shall be classified _purpose of determining minimum criteria for design and insta on of electrical equipme to minimize possibility of ignition. B. Drawin indicate extent of each hazardous location, describing applicable vertical and horizontal limits o hazards and identifying each hazardous location by NEC Class, Division and Group. Design tion of either speck maximum operating temperature of equipment or temperature ranges may a o be indicated. Every effort will be made to locate electrical equipment in nonhazardous areas of fac' ities having hazardous locations. C. Electrical equipment in areas classified as hazardous shall be constructed and installed in accordance with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Equipment and components installed in hazardous area shall be rated and UL -listed for hazardous area class, division, and group designation. References for use in classification of areas and specification of requirements for electrical installation in such areas, include following: 1. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in Workplace. 2. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. Volts Phase F uency Vii12- = M — M t Sc D N C' 480Y/277 3 or 1 208Y/120 3 or 1 60 120/240 1 60 125 1 Dc D. Design equipm nt enclosure in accordance with seismic gwrements listed in most recent local building code and Data Sheets. 2.02 HAZARDOUS A. Areas whe flammable and combustible liquids, gases, and dusts are tta edand stored shall be classified _purpose of determining minimum criteria for design and insta on of electrical equipme to minimize possibility of ignition. B. Drawin indicate extent of each hazardous location, describing applicable vertical and horizontal limits o hazards and identifying each hazardous location by NEC Class, Division and Group. Design tion of either speck maximum operating temperature of equipment or temperature ranges may a o be indicated. Every effort will be made to locate electrical equipment in nonhazardous areas of fac' ities having hazardous locations. C. Electrical equipment in areas classified as hazardous shall be constructed and installed in accordance with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Equipment and components installed in hazardous area shall be rated and UL -listed for hazardous area class, division, and group designation. References for use in classification of areas and specification of requirements for electrical installation in such areas, include following: 1. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in Workplace. 2. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Paae 3 2. ISO certified. 3. When requested by Engineer, provide list of similar equipment installat/mentshall oyed identical equipment from manufacturer. B. Installer qualifications: 1. Installer shall be skilled in trade and shall have thorough knowledge of ment specified. 2. Cutting, drilling, trenching, o channeling necessary to properly install eperformed by competent skid crafts people in safe, professional man C. Regulatory requirements: Perform lectr codes as applicable to job site. D. Materials and equipment furnished for p E. Asbestos not allowed. F. Parts shall be manufactured to American and interchangeability. Metric sized com, approved. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, ship, handle, and store in accordance B. Ship equipment completely factory /assbshipping and handling limitations mshall be identified with equipment s C. Costs associated with sections,%ccessorie Contractor's responsibility. construction in accordancg(with NEC, local and state installation sh9tt be new, unused, and undamaged. sizes and gages to facilitate maintenance :d unless specifically requested and requirements. unless physi I size, arrangement, configuration, or )racticable. Shipping splits and required field assembly or appurtenances rec)yiring field assembly shall be D. Separately packaged pa and accessories shall be consolidated and ippe equipment. Mark each ntainer clearly to identify contents and as belo inc 1. Provide individual eatherproof itemized packing slips attached to out 'd, contents includ9d. Provide duplicate inside each container. 2. Attach master acking list, covering accessory items for equipment, to m+ 3. Mark each c ntainer with project identification number for equipment and followed b otal number of containers. I . together with with mairMuipment. oachg3tainerfor %%ee oY�quiper rWmber�cn a rn E. Equipment all be suitably protected during shipment, handling, and storage. IRM erlRc duringsh' mant shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. ZE Tr n F. Prote9rcoated surfaces against impact, abrasion, and discoloration. G. El(,'�Orical equipment and insulation systems shall be protected against ingress of moisture. eters if necessary to protect against moisture. Grease and protect exposed threads. I. Close pipe, tube, and conduit connections with rough usage plugs. Seal and tape open ends of piping, tubing, and conduit. J. Cover equipment openings to seal equipment. space K. Store materials in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 J. Cover equipment openings to seal equipment. K. Store materials in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with Owner early and late shipping and delivery schedules for items requiring storage and handling at Site. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Electrical equipment shall be provided with manufacturer's standard warranty, but not less than 1 year. ]_M i�;:id1R*]l]&i 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Service conditions: Provide equipment and material suitable for intended service and installation at location indicated. B. Low -voltage auxiliary and control power. 1. Electrical power for ac control and instrumentation equipment: a. Provide devices necessary for proper operation and protection of equipment during electrical power supply and ambient temperature fluctuations specified. b. Design for continuous operation at any voltage from 85% to 110% of nominal voltage. Dropout voltage shall be 60% of nominal for relays and 75% for contactors and starters. 2. Electrical power for do devices: a. Design for continuous operation on ungrounded station battery system, capable of maintaining operation at any voltage from 80% to 112% of nominal voltage. b. Electrical devices served shall not impose ground connection on supply. C. Auxiliary power: Design auxiliary equipment for low -voltage service, with electrical power designed to operate from one of nominal electrical power sources as follows and as indicated on Drawings: Volts Phase Frequency 480Y/277 3 or 1 60 120/240 1 60 D. Design equipment enclosure in accordance with seismic requirements listed inmost recent local building codes and Data Sheets. 2.02 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Areas where flammable and combustible liquids, gases, and dusts are handled and stored shall be classified for purpose of determining minimum criteria for design and installation of electrical equipment to minimize possibility of ignition. a 0 Cl) Cn B. Drawings indicate extent of each hazardous location, describing applicable l 4 horiziSrRat 'limits of hazards and identifying each hazardous location by NEC Class, Di6i4 and_Group li� Designation of either specific maximum operating temperature of equipmermp0ratur ranges may also be indicated. Every effort will be made to locate electrical equipmegltRi noogazarM areas of facilities having hazardous locations. E N N r 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 3 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Manufacturer of equipment specified shall be recognized in industry for normally supplying this type of equipment. 2. ISO certified. 3. When requested by Engineer, provide list of similar equipment installations that have employed identical equipment from manufacturer. B. Installer qualifications: 1. Installer shall be skilled in trade and shall have thorough knowledge of products and equipment specified. 2. Cutting, drilling, trenching, or channeling necessary to properly install equipment shall be performed by competent skilled crafts people in safe, professional manner. C. Regulatory requirements: Perform electrical construction in accordance with NEC, local and state codes as applicable to job site. D. Materials and equipment furnished for permanent installation shall be new, unused, and undamaged. E. Asbestos not allowed. F. Parts shall be manufactured to American industry standard sizes and gages to facilitate maintenance and interchangeability. Metric sized components not allowed unless specifically requested and approved. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, ship, handle, and store in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Ship equipment completely factory assembled unless physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make this impracticable. Shipping splits and required field assembly shall be identified with equipment submittals. C. Costs associated with sections, accessories, or appurtenances requiring field assembly shall be Contractor's responsibility. D. Separately packaged parts and accessories shall be consolidated and shipped together with equipment. Mark each container clearly to identify contents and as belonging with main equipment. 1. Provide individual weatherproof itemized packing slips attached to outside of each container for contents included. Provide duplicate inside each container. 2. Attach master packing list, covering accessory items for equipment, to main piece of equipment. 3. Mark each container with project identification number for equipment and container pulnber followed by total number of containers. CD _ E. Equipment shall be suitably protected during shipment, handling, and storage. Yo�gegcurred during shipment shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. -<_ C r F. Protect coated surfaces against impact, abrasion, and discoloration.�m rn _M _ G. Electrical equipment and insulation systems shall be protected against ingress 4(-ist4w UsJ ce heaters if necessary to protect against moisture. y J H. Grease and protect exposed threads. I. Close pipe, tube, and conduit connections with rough usage plugs. Seal and tape open ends of piping, tubing, and conduit. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 5 3. NFPA 497, Recommended Practice for Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous Classified Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. 4. NFPA 499, Recommended Practice for Classification of CombustiVe Dusts and of Hazardous Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Proc s Areas. 5. NFPA 654, Standard for Prevention of Fire and Dust ExploZer from Manufacturing, Processing, and Handling of Combustible Particulate Solids. 6. NFPA 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Tret andCollection Facilities. 2.03 FACTORY WIRING A. Select cable for electrical and environmental conditions installation, and suitable for unusual service conditions where encountered. 1. Proper temperature application cable shall be us throughout, but shall be not less than 90°C rated. 2. Conductors routed over hinges shall use extr exible stranding. 3. Cable insulation shall be rated for maximum rvice voltage used, but not less than 600 volts. 4. Splices not allowed. B. Panel, control cabinet, switchboard, motor c trol center, and switchgear wiring shall use flame retards t cross-linked polyethylene (XLP) flame retardant ethylene -propylene rubber (EPR) insulatio at meet or exceed requireme s of UL 44 for Types SIS, and XHHW. 1. Minimum 'ze: No. 14 AWG (1.5 m 2).Conductors: Annealed bare copper with fine stranding passing IE 1202 and UL 83 VW flame test. C. Instrumentation, the ocouple, and ermocouple extension wire shall use twisted shielded pairs/triads having flam retardant ross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, and chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) jacke . o 1. Minimum size: No. 16 1.0 mm2). N 2. Conductor type:� FTIa. Instrument: Anneals o r Class B stranding. P-:74 -o b. Thermocouple: Soli alloy. Cl -4 3. Provide each pairftriad ith shiel= to Ln 4. Shielding shall consist f aluminum- olyester tape and flexible strand tin -co Jo.=AWM1 5 mm2) coppdrain wi � b. Drain wire Zrfoeach i trument cable sha be insulated with spaghetti sleeve.Fe errof shie d wire shall be termin ed on grounded term I. v O 6. Cables shall pass EE 1202 and ICEA T-30 20 70,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame teMliand each -- conductor shall p s UL 83 VW -1 flame test. D. Terminations: 1. Conductor ter anal connectors shall be insulated, ring ngue, compression type connectors properly size for conductor and terminal. a. Connect rs shall be constructed of copper and shall b in -plated. b. Interior urtace of connector wire barrel shall be serrat , xterior surface of connector wire barrel all be furnished with crimp guides. 2. Uninsulat terminal connectors shall be used for conductors ter inated on devices equipped with indiv' ual fitted covers, such as, but not limited to, control swit as and lockout relays. 3. Connec' ns requiring disconnect plug and receptacle type devices s all be provided with factory- termin ed conductors on each plug and receptacle. a. PI gs and receptacles shall be factory wired into junction boxes cont ' 'ng terminal blocks for ernal connections. b. ; onductors on disconnect portion of plug -receptacle assemblies shall be in common jacket. 4. P or to shipment of equipment, remove temporary wiring installed in factory for equipment testing. 5. Current transformers shall terminate on shorting type terminal blocks. Ship with shorting jumpers installed. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 05.00 ms1869 E. Identification and labeling: 1. Provide conductor identification sleeve on each end of each internal conductor. Mark each sleeve with op to end destination identification with nonsmudging, permanent black ink. Sleeves shall be UV -re istant self-adhesive type or PVC, not less than 1/2" (13 mm) long. 2. Permanetly label each terminal block, terminal, conductor, relay, breaker, fuse block, and other auxiliary d vices to coincide with identification indicated on manufacturer's drawings. 2.04 LOW -VOLTAGE FIE L WIRING A. Nationally or internati ally recognized cable manufacturer shall pro/cea provided. 1. Metal -clad cable, C Type MC, may not be substituted in placeand conduit unless specified otherwise, r unless approved in writing. 2. Comply with code an Project requirements directly associated wf each cable type. B. Cables specified are for voltages 600 volts and below. C. Wiring shall be annealed, bare ppe D. Provide conductor identification sl v non -smudging, permanen----kink. resistant self-adhesive type or PVC, i shown on the: 1. Electrical oneline drawings 2. Cable schedule 3. Schematic drawings, E. Multi conductor cables and multi wire the conductor (i.e. P104-1, P104-2, j7 General-purpose building circuits routed entirely in < 1. Voltage rating: 600-v 2. Conductor: Class B, (4.0 mm2). with not less than unless specified otherwise. on each end of 94ery conductor. Mark each sleeve with typed, and written sigilives are not acceptable. Sleeves shall be UV - t less than (13 mm) long. Conductor identification as identify each conductor individually at each end of 4, P104-5) lfor used on interkr lighting circuits and general-purpose branch shall be single conl4uctor. or stranded, annealed, 3. Insulation: Polyvi chloride (PVC) complying with tkc 4. Jacket: Overall ear nylon jacket applied over condult resistant. 5. Cables shall ass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, UL Standard 6. Color codi : :ed copper, minimum size No. 12 AWG N 0 for type THHN or $WN. _+ r insulation, UL-liste699 gaMline Mil for Type THHN -I0HW&wire. —1 C-) a. provi conductor sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller in foil g colors rn 3 i 1) ource voltage of 208Y/120 volts: %? _ APhase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. N>a) c) Phase C: Blue. CI' d) Neutral: White. 2) Source voltage of 120/240 volts: a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. c) Neutral: White. 3) Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: a) Phase A: Brown. b) Phase B: Orange. c) Phase C: Yellow. d) Neutral: Gray. b. Sizes No. 6 AWG and larger shall be black and color -coded with field -applied tape. Installations in dry or damp locations shall utilize THHN and installations in wet locations shall utilize THWN. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 b. Conductors on disconnect portion of plug -receptacle assemblies shall be in common jacket. 4. Prior to shipment of equipment, remove temporary wiring installed in factory for equipment testing. 5. Current transformers shall terminate on shorting type terminal blocks. Ship -with shorting jumpers installed. E. Identification and labeling: 1. Provide conductor identification sleeve on each end of each internal conductor. Mark each sleeve with opposite end destination identification with nonsmudging, permanent black ink. Sleeves shall be UV -resistant self-adhesive type or PVC, not less than 1/2' (13 mm) long. 2. Permanently label each terminal block, terminal, conductor, relay, breaker, fuse block, and other auxiliary devices to coincide with identification indicated on manufacturer's drawings. 2.04 LOW -VOLTAGE FIELD WIRING A. Nationally or internationally recognized cable manufacturer shall produce cable provided. 1. Metal -clad cable, NEC Type MC, may not be substituted in place of cable and conduit unless specified otherwise, or unless approved in writing. 2. Comply with code and Project requirements directly associated with use of each cable type. B. Cables specified are for voltages 600 volts and below. C. Wiring shall be annealed, bare copper with not less than 98% conductivity, unless specified otherwise. D. Provide conductor identification sleeve on each end of every conductor. Mark each sleeve with typed, non -smudging, permanent black ink. Hand written sleeves are not acceptable. Sleeves shall be UV - resistant self-adhesive type or PVC, not less than 1/2" (13 mm) long. Conductor identification as shown on the: 1. Electrical oneline drawings 2. Cable schedule 3. Schematic drawings, E. Multi conductor cables and multi wire circuits shall identify each conductor individually at each end of the conductor (i.e. P104-1, P104-2, P104-3, P104-4, P104-5) F. General-purpose building conductor used on interior lighting circuits and general-purpose branch circuits routed entirely in conduit shall be single conductor. 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Conductor: Class B, solid or stranded, annealed, uncoated copper, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) complying with NEC for type THHN or THWN. 4. Jacket: Overall clear nylon jacket applied over conductor insulation, UL -listed as gasoline and oil resistant. 5. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, UL Standard 83 for Type THHN or THWN wire. 6. Color coding: a. Provide conductor in following colors when available. 1) Source voltage of 120/240 volts: a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. o c) Neutral: White. 2) Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: p c m a) Phase A: Brown. -1 --- b) Phase B: Orange. r c) Phase C: Yellow. d) Neutral: Gray. rn b. When color coding not available provide black and color -coded with fili2itape.i7 7. Installations in dry or damp locations shall utilize THHN and installations in oc2ns shall utilize THWN. N c 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 5 C. Electrical equipment in areas classified as hazardous shall be constructed and installed in accordance with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Equipment and components installed in hazardous area shall be rated and UL -listed for hazardous area class, division, and group designation. References for use in classification of areas and specification of requirements for electrical installation in such areas, include following: 1. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in Workplace. 2. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 3. NFPA 497, Recommended Practice for Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous Classified Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. 4. NFPA 499, Recommended Practice for Classification of Combustible Dusts and of Hazardous Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. 5. NFPA 654, Standard for Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions from Manufacturing, Processing, and Handling of Combustible Particulate Solids. 6. NFPA 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. F�rk> • yiL�i C�] :� �ri9 I :3 I � I el A. Select cable for electrical and environmental conditions of installation, and suitable for unusual service conditions where encountered. 1. Proper temperature application cable shall be used throughout, but shall be not less than 90°C rated. 2. Conductors routed over hinges shall use extra -flexible stranding. 3. Cable insulation shall be rated for maximum service voltage used, but not less than 600 volts. 4. Splices not allowed. B. Panel, control cabinet, switchboard, motor control center, and switchgear wiring shall use flame retardant cross-linked polyethylene (XLP) or flame retardant ethylene -propylene rubber (EPR) insulation that meet or exceed requirements of UL 44 for Types SIS, and XHHW. 1. Minimum size: No. 14 AWG (1.5 mm2).Conductors: Annealed bare copper with fine stranding passing IEEE 1202 and UL 83 VW -1 flame test. C. Instrumentation, thermocouple, and thermocouple extension wire shall use twisted shielded pairs/triads having flame retardant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, and chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) jacket. 1. Minimum size: No. 16 AWG (1.0 mm2). 2. Conductor type: a. Instrument: Annealed copper Class B stranding. b. Thermocouple: Solid alloy. 3. Provide each pairRriad with shield. 4. Shielding shall consist of aluminum -polyester tape and flexible strand tin -coated No.18 AWG (0.75 mm2) copper drain wire. 5. Drain wire for each instrument cable shall be insulated with spaghetti sleeve. One end of shield wire shall be terminated on grounded terminal. 6. Cables shall pass IEEE 1202 and ICEA T-30-520 70,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame test, and each conductor shall pass UL 83 VW -1 flame test. N D. Terminations: 1. Conductor terminal connectors shall be insulated, ring tongue, compression typie c©r ectors.' properly sized for conductor and terminal. =4 v a. Connectors shall be constructed of copper and shall be tin-plated. c,)-< — b. Interior surface of connector wire barrel shall be serrated; exterior surfigar& cdAectol wire barrel shall be furnished with crimp guides. <r— -D m 2. Uninsulated terminal connectors shall be used for conductors terminated iceequi peed with individual fitted covers, such as, but not limited to, control switches anc ei9c0 lays; 3. Connections requiring disconnect plug and receptacle type devices shall bWVrovidedwith factory - terminated conductors on each plug and receptacle. tm a. Plugs and receptacles shall be factory wired into junction boxes containing terminal blocks for external connections. Page 8 - SECTION 26 05 00 5. Conductors shall be cabled together with nonhygroscopic fillers. 6. Cover cable assembly with helically applied binding tape with imum 10% overlap. 7. Color coding: Insulated conductors shall have col/priing n meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E2 color code (K2 color code). 8. Each cable shall be identified by means of surfacendicating manufacturer, number of conductors, size, voltage rating, and UL listing as e tray. Cables shall pass IEEE 38370,000 Btu/hror ICEA10,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests for armored cables. 10. emperature rating: 90°C for normal operation inations K. Instruntation cable installed indoor or outdoor 1. Vol a rating: 300 -volt. 2. Cond ors: Annealed, bare copper, Class t 3. Insulati : Flame-retardant polyvinyl chlori 4. Jacket: ame-retardant, heat-, moisture- ai 5. Pairs/triad Each twisted with lay not a cee 6. Color code: sulated conductors shal ave 2 color code ( color code): Pairs bl ck/red 7. Assembly: a. Each pair or t d shall be s wrapped with m imum lap shall have overall uminur b. Flexible strand tin -c ted between twisted cond r 8. Each instrumentation cabl : manufacturer, conductor ze, , 9. Cables shall pass UL 1 1, 70 in cable tray, conduit, and ducts: (stranded, minimum size No. 16 AWG (1.0 mm2). (PVC). d sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC). iing 2" (50 mm). colored insulation meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E - Triads black/red/blue. b together with aluminum/polyester tape shield helically 15% of tape width and isolation tape. Entire cable assembly polyester tape shield helically wrapped. 08 AWG (0.75 mm2) copper drain wire shall be helically wound and tape shield. be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating id quantity, UL listing. W Btu/hr flame test. L. Thermocouple extension ble circuited i ble tray or conduit: 1. Voltage rating: 300 oR. 2. Conductors: a. No./:White olid alloy (+Chromel / -Co b. No.olid alloy (+Chromel / -Alun c. No.olid alloy (+Iron / -Constant 3. Insulatioretardant polyvinyl chloride a. Typple (+) and red (-). b. Typow (+) and red (-). C. Typ(+) and red4. Jacket:rdant, heat, moisture, and Code: tan); ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "EX". ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "KX". ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "JX". h), color code: polyvinyl chloride (PNC); color 0 a. Ty a EX: Purple. O b. T pe KX: Yellow.� n m-71 C. ype JX: Black. r 5. As mble insulated conductors with 1-1/2" to 2-1/2" (38 mm to 63.5 mm) d I�jll 6. A sembly: Provide with helically applied, laminated aluminum/polyester tap hie withi" inimum lap of 15% of tape width. Flexible strand tin -coated No.18 AWG ((Q 2) co drain wire shall be helically wound between twisted conductors and tape:st iov. �$\© 7 Cables shall pass UL 1581, 70,000 Btu/hr flame test. m M. Provide high-temperature wire around process equipment operating at temperatures standard cable ratings. 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Temperature rating: Up to 1000°C. 3. Conductor: Stranded, "A" nickel. 4. Insulation: Layers of ceramic fiber braids. 5. Jacket: Overall metallic sheath. N. Category 6 communication cable circuited in tray, conduit or used for field wiring internal to cabinets. 1. Conductor: Solid, bare copper minimum No. 23 AWG. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 7 G. Single -conductor, low -voltage power cable for motors, feeders, in conduit, duct bank, or cable tray: 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Conductor: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, mir 3. Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), complying be sunlight resistant and cable tray (CT) rated. 4. Jacket: None. 5. Color coding: Black. 6. Wire shall be identified by surface marking indicatin manu tenal, voltage rating, UL symbol, and listed typ circuits, and do circuits routed im size No. 12 AWG (4.0 mm2). NEC Type XHHW-2. Insulation shall conductor size, conductor 7. Ca es shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, UL 1 1, VW -1 vertical flame test, or ICEA T-29-520, 210, Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests for armo cables. 8. Temper ure rating shall be 90o C for normal eration in wet or dry locations. H. Multiconductor, l -voltage power cables for mgfors, feeders, and branch circuits routed in cable tray, conduit or duct ban 1. Voltage rating: 6 -volt. 2. Conductors: Anne d, bare copper, 3. Insulation: Cross-link polyethylene 4. Jacket: Flame-retardan , heat-, mois 5. Color coding: Insulated p se condL accordance with ICEA Meth 4. E indicating manufacturer, numb of suitable for cable tray use. 6. Phase conductors shall be cable t conductor and fillers. Ground wi a si 7. Cover cable assembly with heli ally 8. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 7 ,000 test for armored cables. 9. Temperature rating: 90°C fo normal s B, stranded, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.0 mm2). PE) complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. -, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC). irs shall be black and shall have printed numbers in cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing luctors, size, metal, voltage rating, and UL listing as ether with Class B stranded, bare copper groupang shall comply with requirements of UL 1277.igro app' d polyester binder tape with minirn 10 erlal;I % Btu/hr ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hrioca y flambe D -t operation i wet or dry locations. cn t r- I. Multiconductor, low -voltage poNer cables for motors fe om adjustable speed dri3ESt astalf;�(jgp. 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. n 2. Conductors: Annealed, are copper, Class B, stranded, inimum size No. 1 G (Sb mm2) 3. Insulation: Flame-retar ant, cross-linked polyethylene (XL E) complying wit physicl�nd electrical requirements or NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame -retard nt, polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 5. Armor/shield: Conti ously welded and corrugated high condu ity aluminum. 6. Ground conductors: 3 segmented Class B strand, annealed copp conductors sized to meet requirements of UL 569. 7. Marking: Insulate phase conductors shall be black and shall have pri numbers in accordance with I EA Method 4. Each cable shall be identified by mean of surface ink printing indicating manuf cturer, number of conductors, size, metal, voltage rating, d UL listing. 8. Cables shall pa IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr or ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr rtical tray flame tests for armor cables, and individual conductors UL -approved and marked wi FT -4 designation. 9. Rated for Cie s 1, Div. 1 hazardous locations. 10. Conductors all be temperature rated for 90°C maximum continuous operating tempe lure in wet or dry I ations. J. Multiconducto cable for control, interlocks, current transformers (CTs), voltage transformers (VT routed in cab tray and conduit: 1. Voltage ting: 600 -volt. 2. Condu tors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, control and interlock cables minimum size No. 14 AWG (2.0 mm2). For VTs cables minimum size shall be No.12 AWG (4.0 mm2); for CTs cables minimum size shall be No. 10 AWG (6.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) or complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat-, moisture-, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 5. Conductors shall be cabled together with nonhygroscopic fillers. 6. Cover cable assembly with helically applied binding tape with minimum 10% overlap. 7. Color coding: Insulated conductors shall have colored insulation meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E2 color code (K2 color code). 8. Each cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, number of conductors, size, voltage rating, and UL listing as rated for cable tray. 9. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr or ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests for armored cables. 10. Temperature rating: 90°C for normal operation in wet or dry locations K. Instrumentation cable installed indoor or outdoor routed in cable tray, conduit, and ducts: 1. Voltage rating: 300 -volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 16 AWG (1.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat-, moisture-, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 5. Pairs/triads: Each twisted with lay not exceeding 2" (50 mm). 6. Color code: Insulated conductors shall have colored insulation meeting ICEA Method 1, Table E- 2 color code (K2 color code): Pairs black/red; Triads black/red/blue. 7. Assembly: a. Each pair or triad shall be cabled together with aluminum/polyester tape shield helically wrapped with minimum lap of 15% of tape width and isolation tape. Entire cable assembly shall have overall aluminum/polyester tape shield helically wrapped. b. Flexible strand tin -coated No. 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) copper drain wire shall be helically wound between twisted conductors and tape shield. 8. Each instrumentation cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, conductor size, and quantity, UL listing. 9. Cables shall pass UL 1581, 70,000 Btu/hr flame test. L. Thermocouple extension cable circuited in cable tray or conduit: 1. Voltage rating: 300 -volt. 2. Conductors: a. No. 16 AWG solid alloy (+Chromel /-Constantan); ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "EX". b. No. 16 AWG solid alloy (+Chromel /-Alumel); ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "KX". c. No. 16 AWG solid alloy (+Iron /-Constantan); ANSI and ASA/ISA Type "JX". 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), color code: a. Type EX: Purple (+) and red (-). b. Type KX: Yellow (+) and red (-). c. Type JX: White (+) and red (-). 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat, moisture, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC); color code: a. Type EX: Purple. b. Type KX: Yellow. c. Type JX: Black. 5. Assemble insulated conductors with 1-1/2" to 2-1/2" (38 mm to 63.5 mm) twisted lay. 6. Assembly: Provide with helically applied, laminated aluminum/polyester tape shield, with minimum lap of 15% of tape width. Flexible strand tin -coated No.18 AWG (0.75 mm2) copper drain wire shall be helically wound between twisted conductors and tape shield. 7. Cables shall pass UL 1581, 70,000 Btu/hr flame test. o J � M. Provide high-temperature wire around process equipment operating at temperer e foedinggM standard cable ratings. y -i 9 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Temperature rating: Up to 10000C. 3. Conductor: Stranded, "A" nickel. 4. Insulation: Layers of ceramic fiber braids. 5. Jacket: Overall metallic sheath. Dx N N s 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 7 G. Single -conductor, low -voltage power cable for motors, feeders, branch circuits, and do circuits routed in conduit, duct bank, or cable tray: 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Conductor: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. Insulation shall be sunlight resistant and cable tray (CT) rated. 4. Jacket: None. 5. Color coding: Black. 6. Wire shall be identified by surface marking indicating manufacturer, conductor size, conductor material, voltage rating, UL symbol, and listed type. 7. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr, UL 1581, VW -1 vertical flame test, or ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests for armored cables. 8. Temperature rating shall be 90o C for normal operation in wet or dry locations. Multiconductor, low -voltage power cables for motors, feeders, and branch circuits routed in cable tray, conduit or duct bank: 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 12 AWG (4.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) complying with NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat-, moisture-, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 5. Color coding: Insulated phase conductors shall be black and shall have printed numbers in accordance with ICEA Method 4. Each cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, number of conductors, size, metal, voltage rating, and UL listing as suitable for cable tray use. 6. Phase conductors shall be cabled together with Class B stranded, bare copper grounding conductor and fillers. Ground wire size shall comply with requirements of UL 1277. 7. Cover cable assembly with helically applied polyester binder tape with minimum 10% overlap. 8. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr or ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame test for armored cables. 9. Temperature rating: 90°C for normal operation in wet or dry locations. I. Multiconductor, low -voltage power cables for motors fed from adjustable speed drives, any installation. 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, minimum size No. 10 AWG (6.0 mm2) 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) complying with physical and electrical requirements for NEC Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 5. Armor/shield: Continuously welded and corrugated high conductivity aluminum. 6. Ground conductors: 3 segmented Class B strand, annealed copper conductors sized to meet requirements of UL 1569. 7. Marking: Insulated phase conductors shall be black and shall have printed numbers in accordance with ICEA Method 4. Each cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, number of conductors, size, metal, voltage rating, and UL listing. 8. Cables shall pass IEEE 383 70,000 Btu/hr or ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr vertical tray flame tests for armored cables, and individual conductors UL -approved and marked with FT -4 designation. 9. Rated for Class 1, Div. 1 hazardous locations. 10. Conductors shall be temperature rated for 90°C maximum continuous operating terpgerature in wet or dry locations. J. Multiconductor cable for control, interlocks, current transformers (CTs), voltag4ri sforrmers (VTb routed in cable tray and conduit: -> G 1. Voltage rating: 600 -volt. � 2. Conductors: Annealed, bare copper, Class B, stranded, control and inted4 cables minir�gpy size No. 14 AWG (2.0 mm2). For VTs cables minimum size shall be No.12:A B (4]1 mm2),'f6r CTs cables minimum size shall be No. 10 AWG (6.0 mm2). 3. Insulation: Flame-retardant, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) or complyir�with Type XHHW-2. 4. Jacket: Flame-retardant, heat-, moisture-, and sunlight -resistant; polyvinyl chloride PVC). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 4. Where permitted by safety codes and standards, provide without covers. Neither step -type terminal blocks nor angle mounting of terminal blocks allowed. 5. Fuses may be mounted on terminal blocks. 6. Maximum 2 conductors in accordance with termination point. Terminal blocks for external connections shall leave from centrally mounted location, not from individual devices in enclosure. 1. Group -in instrument and control compartment for easy accessibility. 2. Provide sufficient space on each side of each terminal block to allow orderly arrangement of leads to be terminated on block. 3. Locate auxiliary equipment in compartments, enclosures, or junction boxes so service personnel will have direct access without interference from structural members and instruments without removal of barriers, cover plates, or wiring. 4. Do not mount terminal blocks in compartments containing cables or buses operating at voltages above 600 volts. 5. Size for wire sizes of incoming conductors as necessary. J. Install shorting -type terminal blocks nearest current transformer in accessible location for each set of CTs supplied with equipment furnished, no other shorting -type terminal blocks allowed, unless specified otherwise. K. Install -din -rail mounted miniature circuit breakers (MCB) for protection of VT circuits on line and load side. Breakers shall have alarm contacts wired to terminal blocks. L. Terminate each conductor in multiconductor control cable or as shown on Drawings. Provide 10% spare terminals for circuit modifications. M. Each control switch and lockout relay shall have minimum of 4 spare normally open and 4 spare normally closed contacts wired out to terminal blocks. N. Cable designations shall be visible after installation without requiring physical movement of cable. 2.06 CABLE SEPARATION A. Use following general practices for cable separation for all levels of cabling. CJv N o B. Z=n H Cables of like signal levels and power levels shall be grouped together in like rlie4ayQ C. Different voltage class group levels shall run in separate raceways. —tc7 r CA j- JrM Z D. Circuit cables dedicated to unit shall be run in separate raceways from other r� 0 E. Redundant power supply circuit cables shall not be run in same raceway. x N rn F. If wires are same level and same type signal, group those wires from one cabinet to any one specific location together in multi -conductor cables. G. When unlike signals must cross in trays or conduit, cross in 90° angles at maximum spacing. Where it is not possible to maintain spacing, place grounded steel barrier between unlike levels at crossover point. H. Voltage class group levels: 1. MV — Medium -voltage 2. P — Power Low -voltage 3. C — Control Power (discrete signal, loop power, < 125 -volt control power) 4. S — Low Level Signal (analog and digital data) 5. F — Fire protection system signaling circuit. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 9 2. Insulation: Fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP) insulated singles. 3. Insulated conductors: Unshielded, twisted 4 pairs enclosed with a spline fluorinated ethylene ,,,propylene filler material. 4. ble assembly shall be covered with clear "Flamearrest" jacket, sequentially marked at 2' (600 m intervals. Ripcord shall be integrally installed to allow easy removal of jacket material. 5. Each ommunication cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printinindicating manuf urer, model, or catalog number. Cable shall meet ANSI/TIA 568-02 CAT6. 6. Cables s all be capable of passing UL flame test Type CMP. O. Uninsulated andsulated grounding conductors: 1. Voltage rating: 00 volts, green XHHW-2, whe/insulated. 2. Conductors: Clas B, stranded, bare copper. P. Pin and socket connecto re not allowed. 2.05 LOW -VOLTAGE SPLICES AND T MINATIONS A. Splices, except as in lighting and g eralpurposed below, not allowed unless specifically indicated on Drawings or equired for nt. B. Temperature rating of splices and be rated no less than 75°C. J C. Splices allowed in lighting and genera/segbt o e power circuits. 1. Provide wire and cable connectorgh nductivity, corrosion area equal to at least current carrypaa of wire or cable. 2. General lighting and general-purilding wer circuits: a. Twist -type, insulated sprin nnectors for s 'ces on solid or than No. 6 AWG. b. Use indent, hex screw, bolt clamp -type conne ors, with or solid or stranded cond ctors No. 6 AWG and large c. Apply insulating 600 Olt tape. ctn 1 with.mntact xs smaner spli�ceess on D. Insulating tapes and com ounds for terminations and splices sh be UL -listed for intended use, location, and voltage by anufacturer. E./onductors tion of cond tors to equipment with bolted connections: compress' n type lugs: pressio ugs for cables 250 kcmil and larger shall have at least lamping elements of pressio indents, and provision for at least 2 bolts for joining to app atus terminals. ping nd tools used for securing conductors in compression type co ectors or terminal lugs ll be ade for purpose and conductor sizes involved. mpi tools shall be ratchet -type preventing tool from opening until crimp a ion is completed. ls hall be product approved by connector manufacturer. F.s: nductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Marathon 1500 Series. nductors larger than No. 4/0 AWG: Terminate to tinned copper bus bar drilled and tapped with ndard NEMA sized and spaced holes. G. Coordinate sizes and types of conductor terminals for 600 -volt power cable terminations in equipment with furnished conductor and terminal connector data. H. Provide 600 -volt rated terminal blocks for instrumentation and control conductors for connection to circuits external to specified equipment, and for internal circuits crossing shipping splits. 1. Use crimp -on terminals matching termination point terminations in manufacturer -furnished panels. Splices not allowed. 2. Terminal blocks for thermocouple extension wire: Buchanan "Medium Duty" with thermocouple contacts or Marathon 200 Series with Omega Engineering, Inc. Type TL terminal lugs. 3. Furnish with white marking strips. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 2. Terminal blocks for thermocouple extension wire: Buchanan "Medium Duty" with thermocouple contacts or Marathon 200 Series with Omega Engineering, Inc. Type TL terminal lugs. 3. Furnish with white marking strips. 4. Where permitted by safety codes and standards, provide without covers. Neither step -type terminal blocks nor angle mounting of terminal blocks allowed. 5. Fuses may be mounted on terninal blocks. 6. Maximum 2 conductors in accordance with termination point. Terminal blocks for external connections shall leave from centrally mounted location, not from individual devices in enclosure. 1. Group -in instrument and control compartment for easy accessibility. 2. Provide sufficient space on each side of each terminal block to allow orderly arrangement of leads to be terninated on block. 3. Locate auxiliary equipment in compartments, enclosures, or junction boxes so service personnel will have direct access without interference from structural members and instruments without removal of barriers, cover plates, or wiring. 4. Do not mount terminal blocks in compartments containing cables or buses operating at voltages above 600 volts. 5. Size for wire sizes of incoming conductors as necessary. J. Install shorting -type terminal blocks nearest current transformer in accessible location for each set of CTs supplied with equipment furnished, no other shorting -type terminal blocks allowed, unless specified otherwise. K. Install din -rail mounted miniature circuit breakers (MCB) for protection of VT circuits on line and load side. Breakers shall have alarm contacts wired to terminal blocks. L. Terminate each conductor in multiconductor control cable or as shown on Drawings. Provide 10% spare terminals for circuit modifications. M. Each control switch and lockout relay shall have contacts wired out to terminal blocks. N. Cable designations shall be visible after installation without requiring physical movement of cable. 2.06 CABLE SEPARATION A. Use following general practices for cable separation for all levels of cabling. B. Cables of like signal levels and power levels shall be grouped together in like raceways. C. Different voltage class group levels shall run in separate raceways. D. Circuit cables dedicated to unit shall be run in separate raceways from other unit. E. Redundant power supply circuit cables shall not be run in same raceway. F. If wires are same level and same type signal, group those wires from one cabinet to any one specific location together in multi -conductor cables. G. When unlike signals must cross in trays or conduit, cross in 900 angles at maximum sparing. Where it is not possible to maintain spacing, place grounded steel barrier between unlikejevels.Wcrossover V point. :.� N H. rn Voltage Gass group levels:�- 1. MV — Medium -voltage =i C-1 V0 (� 2. P—. Power Low -voltage ;-fir— m 3. C — Control Power (discrete signal, loop power, < 125 -volt control power). r 4. S—Low Level Signal (analog and digital data) `�-'x � 5. F — Fire protection system signaling circuit. t� rV r 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 9 N. Category 6 communication cable circuited in tray, conduit or used for field wiring internal to cabinets. 1. Conductor: Solid, bare copper minimum No. 23 AWG. 2. Insulation: Fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP) insulated singles. 3. Insulated conductors: Unshielded, twisted 4 pairs enclosed with a spline fluorinated ethylene propylene filler material. 4. Cable assembly shall be covered with clear "Flamearrest" jacket, sequentially marked at 2'(600 mm) intervals. Ripcord shall be integrally installed to allow easy removal of jacket material. 5. Each communication cable shall be identified by means of surface ink printing indicating manufacturer, model, or catalog number. Cable shall meet ANSIfTIA 568-C.2 CAT6. 6. Cables shall be capable of passing UL flame test Type CMP. O. Uninsulated and Insulated grounding conductors: 1. Voltage rating: 600 volts, green XHHW-2, when insulated. 2. Conductors: Class B, stranded, bare copper. P. Pin and socket connectors are not allowed. 2.05 LOW -VOLTAGE SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices, except as in lighting and general purpose power circuits specified below, not allowed unless specifically indicated on Drawings or required for connection to equipment. B. Temperature rating of splices and terminations shall be rated no less than 75°C. C. Splices allowed in lighting and general-purpose power circuits. 1. Provide wire and cable connectors of high -conductivity, corrosion -resistant material with contact area equal to at least current carrying capacity of wire or cable. 2. General lighting and general-purpose building power circuits: a. Twist -type, insulated spring connectors for splices on solid or stranded conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. b. Use indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp -type connectors, with or without tongue for splices on solid or stranded conductors No. 6 AWG and larger. c. Apply insulating 600 -volt tape. D. Insulating tapes and compounds for terminations and splices shall be UL -listed for intended use, location, and voltage by manufacturer. E. Termination of conductors to equipment with bolted connections: 1. Use compression type lugs: 2. Compression lugs for cables 250 kcmil and larger shall have at least 2 clamping elements of compression indents, and provision for at least 2 bolts for joining to apparatus terminals. 3. Crimping hand tools used for securing conductors in compression type connectors or terminal lugs shall be made for purpose and conductor sizes involved. 4. Crimping tools shall be ratchet -type preventing tool from opening until crimp action is completed. 5. Tools shall be product approved by connector manufacturer. F. Terminals: 1. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Marathon 1500 Series. 2. Conductors larger than No. 410 AWG: Terminate to tinned copper bus bar ddg!g ar> QappeFWJh standard NEMA sized and spaced holes. ='—a 9 G. Coordinate sizes and types of conductor terminals for 600 -volt power cable termlljiQns`in equips it with furnished conductor and terminal connector data. � 7 �a � H. Provide 600 -volt rated terminal blocks for instrumentation and control conductor' -or corir ction to circuits external to specified equipment, and for internal circuits crossing shippirr�'splits. — 1. Use crimp -on terminals matching termination point terminations in manufacturer-fumi ed panels. Splices not allowed. 12- C. Boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) d ep, sized to accommodate devices and number of conductors in accordance with NEC. Equi7esur plaster ring or cover as necessary for flush finish. D. Exposed co duit systems shall have surface -mounted boless specified otherwise. Boxes for exposed wiri6q in nonhazardous, noncorrosive, and noeatherproof locations shall be malleable iron, cadmiumYinish or cast aluminum alloy, minimum (l 00 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep. E. Enclosures shallas required for areas in which 1. Install boxes flu in masonry construction; d 2. Recessed boxes here fixture will be mount shape or 4"(10es0 m sq uIIare by 1 junction box, boxs be minimum 3. Outlet boxes for wall co cealed t 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, min um. 4. Floor boxes for floor outlets. a. Cast -metal with threade of plate. b. Watertight and have leveling c. Minimum 4"(100 mm) diame between adjusting ring and t 5. Construct floor outlets for combir housing, and steel bracket to allc construction shall meet UL 514 a. Entire housing shall be re b. Once assembled, PVC h9bs c. Coordinate outlet requir ei 6 Floor boxes in 2 -hour rated Poon listed for 2 -hour rated flooro. 2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Furnish th y ainstalled and as specified. e gnforerintended use. shall be minimum 4"(100 mm) and octagonal in ) deep with round plaster ring. Where used as mm) square by 2-1/8" (53 mm) deep. I signaling systems shall be 4" (100 mm) square by plaster ring and cover plate. brass flange ring and brass duplex flap cover ustment screws for adjusting cover plate to finished floor. 3-1/2" (88 mm) deep with approved gasket or seal data, and power outlets of steel base, PVC wiring and activation load-bearing support. Box able for unrbqtricted access. ig shall be ca ble of carrying 6,000 Ib (2722 kg) load. s with commune tion system requirements. shall be secured i cored hole and shall be UL classified and A. Furnish junction boxes and/pull boxes were shown on Drawings, nd where necessarM facilitate pulling wires and cables v/uhhout damage. � n r� rn B. Provide nameplates for Oull and junction boxes. Nameplate shall inclu a unit ji(entifjer (na f the pull and junction b ,voltage, electrical circuit number(s) or function f th"Bptrid�encl sure. See nameplate sectio for sizing and spacing of letters. <rn A M C. Above ground boxe shall be formed from sheet steel, with corners folded in cuFefy welowith inward flange on e h of 4 edges. =r N rn D. Drill box for mou ing and attachment of cover; galvanize after fabrication. E. Cover shall be ade of one-piece galvanized steel and provided with stainless steel round head machine scre F. Box and coAr shall be made of code gage steel, or heavier if shown on Drawings. G. Boxes shall be minimum 4-1/2" (113 mm) deep. Size shall be in accordance with NEC. Use next larger standard size when necessary in accordance with manufacturer standard sizes. H. Provide pull and junction boxes without knockouts for field drilling. I. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which installed and in accordance with requirements specified. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 -Page 11 I. Voltage class group level minimum cable separation distance for parallel routing circuits: J. Fire prote\system signaling circuits shall not be in same raceway s other voltage class groups. 2.07 ELECTRICARESA. Size juncull boxes, and enclosures inaccordanc with requirements of NEC. B. Provide nfor ectrical enclosures. Nameplat hall include unique identifier (name) of the electrical volta , electrical circuit number(s or function of electrical enclosure. See nameplatr sizing Ind spacing of letters. C. Junction boxes and pull boxes 4\100 mm) trade ize or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, or cast ferrous meWIT MA ratd for installed location. Do not use concentric knockouts. D. NEMA rating of junction boxes, pull boxe nd electrical enclosures larger than 4" (100 mm) trade size in any dimension shall be as follow , un s required otherwise. 1. NEMA rati/NEMA electrical enclos es insta din nonhazardous locations: o a. Indoor: 1) Dronmentally c trolled area: MA 12.E N 2) Cowet or ho down area: NEM X 3) OuNEMA C-> -< t � 2. Construct t -meta lectrical enclosures from rei orced steel plate caole6nuppdrtdevices moon o ithin enclosure without deflectio Steel plate thiclefMs I co to UL require.3. Enclosuresb of adequate strength to support mounted ponents5i Ag sRmenhfid installation4. Field -drill centrances.5. Provide elel enclosures located in outdoor, wet, or hose down ar s with space heaters completely within enclosure. Provide: a. >pace nearer. b. Ad stable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. C. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. 6. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into or out of closure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. 7. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. 8. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above dew point under specified service conditions. E. Space heaters shall be rated for 240 volts ac minimum, and shall be sized for operation on applied voltage of 120 volts ac. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings: 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEMA type. 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters and stainless steel bug screens. 2.08 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems shall be sheet metal, galvanized or cadmium plated. B. Provide nameplates for outlet boxes. Nameplate shall include source panel and circuit number. MV P CS/F MV 0" 6" 12" 24° P 6" 0" 12" 12" C 12" 12° 0" 6" S/F 24" 12" 6" 0° J. Fire prote\system signaling circuits shall not be in same raceway s other voltage class groups. 2.07 ELECTRICARESA. Size juncull boxes, and enclosures inaccordanc with requirements of NEC. B. Provide nfor ectrical enclosures. Nameplat hall include unique identifier (name) of the electrical volta , electrical circuit number(s or function of electrical enclosure. See nameplatr sizing Ind spacing of letters. C. Junction boxes and pull boxes 4\100 mm) trade ize or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, or cast ferrous meWIT MA ratd for installed location. Do not use concentric knockouts. D. NEMA rating of junction boxes, pull boxe nd electrical enclosures larger than 4" (100 mm) trade size in any dimension shall be as follow , un s required otherwise. 1. NEMA rati/NEMA electrical enclos es insta din nonhazardous locations: o a. Indoor: 1) Dronmentally c trolled area: MA 12.E N 2) Cowet or ho down area: NEM X 3) OuNEMA C-> -< t � 2. Construct t -meta lectrical enclosures from rei orced steel plate caole6nuppdrtdevices moon o ithin enclosure without deflectio Steel plate thiclefMs I co to UL require.3. Enclosuresb of adequate strength to support mounted ponents5i Ag sRmenhfid installation4. Field -drill centrances.5. Provide elel enclosures located in outdoor, wet, or hose down ar s with space heaters completely within enclosure. Provide: a. >pace nearer. b. Ad stable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. C. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. 6. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into or out of closure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. 7. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. 8. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above dew point under specified service conditions. E. Space heaters shall be rated for 240 volts ac minimum, and shall be sized for operation on applied voltage of 120 volts ac. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings: 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEMA type. 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters and stainless steel bug screens. 2.08 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems shall be sheet metal, galvanized or cadmium plated. B. Provide nameplates for outlet boxes. Nameplate shall include source panel and circuit number. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 12 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 C. Boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, sized to accommodate devices and number of conductors in accordance with NEC. Equip with plaster ring or cover as necessary for flush finish. D. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface -mounted boxes unless specified otherwise. Boxes for exposed wiring in nonhazardous, noncorrosive, and nonweatherproof locations shall be malleable iron, cadmium finish or cast aluminum alloy, minimum 4" (100 mm) square, 1-1/2"(38 mm) deep. E. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which they are installed and as specified. 1. Install boxes flush in masonry construction; design for intended use. 2. Recessed boxes where fixture will be mounted shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) and octagonal in shape or 4" (100 mm) square by 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep with round plaster ring. Where used as junction box, boxes shall be minimum 4" (100 mm) square by 2-1/8" (53 mm) deep. 3. Outlet boxes for wall concealed telephone and signaling systems shall be 4" (100 mm) square by 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, minimum. Furnish with plaster ring and cover plate. 4. Floor boxes for floor outlets: a. Cast -metal with threaded conduit entrances, brass flange ring and brass duplex flap cover plate. b. Watertight and have leveling and adjustment screws for adjusting cover plate to finished floor. c. Minimum 4" (100 mm) diameter and 3-1/2" (88 mm) deep with approved gasket or seal between adjusting ring and box. 5. Construct floor outlets for combination signaling, data, and power outlets of steel base, PVC housing, and steel bracket to allow feed through wiring and activation load-bearing support. Box construction shall meet UL 514A requirements. a. Entire housing shall be removable for unrestricted access. b. Once assembled, PVC housing shall be capable of carrying 6,000 Ib (2722 kg) load. c. Coordinate outlet requirements with communication system requirements. 6. Floor boxes in 2 -hour rated floors shall be secured in cored hole and shall be UL classified and listed for 2 -hour rated floors. 2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Furnish junction boxes and pull boxes were shown on Drawings, and where necessary to facilitate pulling wires and cables without damage. B. Provide nameplates for pull and junction boxes. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) of the pull and junction box, voltage, electrical circuit number(s) or function of the electrical enclosure. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. C. Above ground boxes shall be formed from sheet steel, with corners folded in and securely welded with inward flange on each of 4 edges. D. Drill box for mounting and attachment of cover; galvanize after fabrication. E. Cover shall be made of one-piece galvanized steel and provided with stainless steel roupA head machine screws. J F. Box and cover shall be made of code gage steel, or heavier if shown on Drawinggc-) [- >::� v G. Boxes shall be minimum 4-1/2" (113 mm) deep. Size shall be in accordance witrm . Tse ne t� larger standard size when necessary in accordance with manufacturer standard -v rn H. Provide pull and junction boxes without knockouts for field drilling. F) � N 1. Enclosures shall be as required for areas in which installed and in accordance witl�i requirep "ents specified. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 11 I. Voltage class group level minimum cable separation distance for parallel routing circuits: J. Fire protection system signaling circuits shall not be in same raceway as other voltage class groups. 2.07 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES A. Size junction boxes, pull boxes, and enclosures in accordance with requirements of NEC. B. Provide nameplates for electrical enclosures. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) of the electrical enclosure, voltage, electrical circuit number(s) or function of electrical enclosure. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. C. Junction boxes and pull boxes 4" (100 mm) trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, or cast ferrous metal NEMA rated for installed location. Do not use concentric knockouts. D. NEMA rating of junction boxes, pull boxes, and electrical enclosures larger than 4" (100 mm) trade size in any dimension shall be as follows, unless required otherwise. 1. NEMA rating for electrical enclosures installed in nonhazardous locations: a. Indoor: 1) Dry environmentally controlled area: NEMA 12. 2) Corrosive wet or hose -down area: NEMA 4X 3) Outdoor: NEMA 4X. 2. Construct noncast-metal electrical enclosures from reinforced steel plate capable of supporting devices mounted on or within enclosure without deflection. Steel plate thickness shall conform to UL requirements. 3. Enclosures shall be of adequate strength to support mounted components during shipment and installation. 4. Field -drill conduit entrances. 5. Provide electrical enclosures located in outdoor, wet, or hose down areas with space heaters completely wired within enclosure. Provide: a. Space heater. b. Adjustable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. c. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. 6. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into or out of enclosure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. 7. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. 8. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above dew point under specified service conditions. N O E. Space heaters shall be rated for 240 volts ac minimum, and shall be sized for opPdation c'oapplied voltage of 120 volts ac. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings'- : r? ryt —n 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEA dte. -v 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters`and stun ss steel b screens. <ryl s M 2.08 OUTLET BOXES ;t N A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems shall be sheet metal, galvanized or cadmiumilated. B. Provide nameplates for outlet boxes. Nameplate shall include source panel and circuit number. My P C S/F My 0" 6" 12" 24' P 6" 0" 12" 12' C 12" 12" 0" 6" S/F 24" 12" 6' 0' J. Fire protection system signaling circuits shall not be in same raceway as other voltage class groups. 2.07 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES A. Size junction boxes, pull boxes, and enclosures in accordance with requirements of NEC. B. Provide nameplates for electrical enclosures. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) of the electrical enclosure, voltage, electrical circuit number(s) or function of electrical enclosure. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. C. Junction boxes and pull boxes 4" (100 mm) trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron, or cast ferrous metal NEMA rated for installed location. Do not use concentric knockouts. D. NEMA rating of junction boxes, pull boxes, and electrical enclosures larger than 4" (100 mm) trade size in any dimension shall be as follows, unless required otherwise. 1. NEMA rating for electrical enclosures installed in nonhazardous locations: a. Indoor: 1) Dry environmentally controlled area: NEMA 12. 2) Corrosive wet or hose -down area: NEMA 4X 3) Outdoor: NEMA 4X. 2. Construct noncast-metal electrical enclosures from reinforced steel plate capable of supporting devices mounted on or within enclosure without deflection. Steel plate thickness shall conform to UL requirements. 3. Enclosures shall be of adequate strength to support mounted components during shipment and installation. 4. Field -drill conduit entrances. 5. Provide electrical enclosures located in outdoor, wet, or hose down areas with space heaters completely wired within enclosure. Provide: a. Space heater. b. Adjustable thermostat with set point temperature indicator. c. One miniature circuit breaker protective device. 6. Space heaters, thermostat, and protection shall not interfere with cable into or out of enclosure, or with maintenance or replacement of devices within enclosure. 7. Use of space heaters shall not change or discolor any painted surface. 8. Space heater capacity shall maintain enclosure internal temperature above dew point under specified service conditions. N O E. Space heaters shall be rated for 240 volts ac minimum, and shall be sized for opPdation c'oapplied voltage of 120 volts ac. Outdoor electrical enclosures with ventilating openings'- : r? ryt —n 1. Louver on outdoor electrical equipment and protect in accordance with NEA dte. -v 2. Equip openings on outdoor electrical equipment with fine mesh filters`and stun ss steel b screens. <ryl s M 2.08 OUTLET BOXES ;t N A. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring systems shall be sheet metal, galvanized or cadmiumilated. B. Provide nameplates for outlet boxes. Nameplate shall include source panel and circuit number. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 13 J. Underground boxes shall be specifically designed and constructed for intended installed location, and s be either pre -formed concrete or PVC. Covers shall be capable of wit ending, without failure, typ of traffic in general area. K. If pull a junction boxes are exposed in and around architecturally fi had surfaces, paint box to match fim of nearby surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. L. Bolton fundi box covers 3'-0" (900 mm) square or larger, or eavier than 25 Ib. (11 kg) shall have permanent rigi andles. Covers larger than 3'-0" x 4'-0" (90 mm x 1200 mm) shall be split. 2.10 EQUIPMENT SAFETY OUNDING A. Install exposed raceway edrically continuous. Con it and tray shall not be considered to be only ground conductor. B. Furnish equipment that is part o 'ntegral shippi unit or assembly with bare copper ground conductor extending to central ground conn ion lug. g shall be suitable for field connection to local ground. Electrical equipment shall be consi ed a device that is energized. C. Single -point ground connections requir or proper operation of electronic equipment shall be insulated from equipment safety grou ch connections shall be extended, using insulated cable, to sing/ensolated termination point itabla r field connection to appropriate ground sys em. 0 D. Conduat contain power circ s shall have and conductor installed insidaonduit�rou%d , conduhall be bonded toe ipment or tray o uct ground at both ends. � � � ��1i E. Providund bushing on ch conduit containing p war circuit. Connect grou®_Osh'&s to Cher inside osure and to an osure ground lug or groun us. rf Q I Use NWG conduct r for ground bushings trade siz 1-1/2" (38 mm) and aiFM S Grounshings large han 1-1/2" (38 mm) shall be sized accordance with regoi*nemh of NO but in se shall t y be smaller than No. 8 AWG. z v o w F. Grounductor Uninsulated, Class B standard, round soft dra uncoated copper as defined in NEMA71 an NEMA WC 74, unless specified otherwise. G. HardwCI ps, bolts, washers, nuts, and other hardware used with ounding conductor shall be copperp r alloy, high copper alloy, or silicon bronze. 2.11 CONTROLITCHESA. Multist rotary -type rated 120 volts ac or 125 volts dc, 3 amperes, 30mm NE s required. B. Handles shall be black, fixed, modern, pistol grip type. Provide engraved black plastic pl,otes with targets. C. Provide with colored LED lamps. D. Provide nameplates for each control switch and lamp. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) and function of the control switch and lamp. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. 2.12 PUSHBUTTONS A. Standard 30mm NEMA pushbuttons shall be heavy, industrial -type rated 120 volts ac or 125 volts dc, 3 amperes, as required. B. Provide with colored LED lamps. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 14 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 C. Provide nameplates for each pushbutton. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) and function of the pushbutton. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters ° 2.13 INDICATING LIGHTS A. Status 30mm NEMA indicating lights shall be high-intensity, cl*er, LED -type for panel mounting. B. Provide nameplates for each indicating light. Nameplate shaxinclude unique identifier ;(name) and function of the indicating light. See nameplate section for siting and spacing of letters C. Coordinate indicating light colors with indicated cond energized when condition exists and shall be de-ene 1. Red: Equipment energized; such as motor runni 2. Green: Equipment de -energized; such as motor 3. Amber: Equipment abnormality; such as motor 4. White: Monitoring of control power or trip coil; trip coil monitor. Light is on during normalcir it coil. 5. Blue: Loss of control power. 2.14 ALARM AND TRIP CONTACTS tion as follows. Indicating lights shall be gi d when condition does not exist: i , valve open, or breaker closed. opped, valve closed, or breaker open. rp, breaker trip, or relay trip. ch as lockout relay trip coil monitor or breaker operation and off during loss of power or loss of A. Alarm cont s for remote annunciation sh I be suitable for operation at 120 volts ac and`t5 volts dc. Contacts all be rated at least 0.5 se it able SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBI ION A. Enclosed, 3-phase, full -voltage, on a g, B. Complete combination starter hall have ' imum interrupting rating of 65 kA or greater if specified elsewhere or indicated on Or wings. C. Starter enclosures shall he a enclosure NEMA rati specified herein. D. Starters shall have front over -mounted nameplate identi . g the starter, matching information shown on Drawings. See nam late section for the required text, to ize and spacing of letters. E. Provide combination arter with microprocessor -based contactor a integral electronic overload protection; minimu ize shall be NEMA 1. B. Alarm contacts sh be normally close C. Trip contacts for remote ip shall be amperes make or break, 'imum. a pere make and break, minimum. � contacts that open to alarm condition. able for operation at 125 volts do and shallb�sG�ted 5 0 CD MOTOR STARTERS rsin unless indicated otherwise. F. Each phase shall ave microprocessor -monitored current sensor for motor run overload, phase loss and phase u balance protection. 1. Provide Cies II ground fault protection; set to 20% of maximum continuous ampere inc and have delay f 20 seconds and run delay of 1 second to prevent nuisance trip on start. 2. Single-sp ed starters shall be furnished with 3 current sensors. 2 -speed starters shall be furnished with 6 current sensors. G. Starters shall be furnished with motor circuit protectors (MCP) rated 600 -volt. 1. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, trip -free toggle mechanism. 2. Starters shall have external manual breaker -operating handle with provisions for up to 3 padlocks. 3. Access door shall be interlocked with motor circuit protector, so door cannot be opened while breaker is closed except by interlock override. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 14 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 2.13 INDICATING LIGHTS A. Status 30mm NEMA indicating lights shall be high-intensity, cluster, LED -type for panel mounting. B. Provide nameplates for each indicating light. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) and function of the indicating light. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters C. Coordinate indicating light colors with indicated conditions as follows. Indicating lights shall be energized when condition exists and shall be de -energized when condition does not exist: 1. Red: Equipment de -energized; such as motor stopped, valve closed, or breaker open. 2. Green: Equipment energized; such as motor running, valve open, or breaker closed. 3. White: Power on. 2.14 ALARM AND TRIP CONTACTS A. Alarm contacts for remote annunciation shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts. Contacts shall be rated at least 0.5 -ampere make and break, minimum. B. Alarm contacts shall be normally closed contacts that open to alar condition. 2.15 SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. Enclosed, 3-phase, full -voltage, nonreversing, unless indicated otherwise. B. Complete combination starter shall have minimum interrupting rating of 65 kA or greater if specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings. C. Starter enclosures shall have enclosure NEMA rating specified herein. D. Starters shall have front cover -mounted nameplate identifying the starter, matching information shown on Drawings. See nameplate section for the required text, text size and spacing of letters. E. Provide Soft Starts (Allen Bradley SMC3) starter with microprocessor -based contactor and integral electronic overload protection; minimum size shall be NEMA 1. F. Each phase shall have microprocessor -monitored current sensor for motor running overload, phase loss and phase unbalance protection. 1. Provide Class II ground fault protection; set to 20% of maximum continuous ampere rating and have delay of 20 seconds and run delay of 1 second to prevent nuisance trip on start. 2. Single -speed starters shall be furnished with 3 current sensors. 2 -speed starters shall be furnished with 6 current sensors. G. Starters shall be furnished with motor circuit protectors (MCP) rated 600 -volt. 1. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, trip -free toggle mechanism. 2. Starters shall have external manual breaker -operating handle with provisions for up to 3 padlocks. 3. Access door shall be interlocked with motor circuit protector, so door cannot be opened while breaker is closed except by interlock override. 4. Starter contactor shall mechanically operate auxiliary contacts. Each startacshall i&Jude auxiliary contacts required for application, plus 2 spare NO and 1 spare NC contac�2 5. Provide membrane -style pushbutton control module and LED lights, red ajb ert�l dicatRi�7 lights shall be provided as minimum on all starters Additional lights may by f ire�lf ind' d or schematics, to control starter functions and indication. Pushbuttons and L4%shQgbe clfelly identified. -< r— t�� 6. Verify and match control power transformers, overload protection, and si sta td acryal equipment furnished. 7. Size control power transformers (CPT) to supply control circuit and additional loaNd g simultaneously. Minimum CPT size shall be 100 volts -amperes for Size 1 starte"nd 150 volts - amperes for Size 2 and larger starters. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 13 J. Underground boxes shall be specifically designed and constructed for intended installed location, and shall be either pre -formed concrete or PVC. Covers shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, type of traffic in general area. K. If pull and junction boxes are exposed in and around architecturally finished surfaces, paint box to match finish of nearby surfaces, unless indicated otherwise. L. Bolt -on junction box covers 3'-0" (900 mm) square or larger, or heavier than 25 Ib. (11 kg) shall have permanent rigid handles. Covers larger than 3'-0" x 4'-0" (900 mm x 1200 mm) shall be split. 2.10 EQUIPMENT SAFETY GROUNDING A. Install exposed raceway electrically continuous. Conduit and tray shall not be considered to be only ground conductor. B. Furnish equipment that is part of integral shipping unit or assembly with bare copper ground conductor extending to central ground connection lug. Lug shall be suitable for field connection to local ground. Electrical equipment shall be considered any device that is energized. C. Single -point ground connections required for proper operation of electronic equipment shall be insulated from equipment safety ground. Such connections shall be extended, using insulated cable, to single insolated termination point suitable for field connection to appropriate ground system. D. Conduits that contain power circuits shall have ground conductor installed inside conduit. Ground conductor shall be bonded to equipment or tray or duct ground at both ends. E. Provide ground bushing on each conduit containing power circuit. Connect ground bushings together inside enclosure and to enclosure ground lug or ground bus. Use No. 8 AWG conductor for ground bushings trade size 1-1/2" (38 mm) and smaller. Ground bushings larger than 1-1/2" (38 mm) shall be sized in accordance with requirements of NEC, but in no case shall they be smaller than No. 8 AWG. F. Ground conductor: Uninsulated, Class B standard, round soft drawn uncoated copper as defined in NEMA WC71 and NEMA WC 74, unless specified otherwise. G. Hardware: Clamps, bolts, washers, nuts, and other hardware used with grounding conductor shall be copper, copper alloy, high copper alloy, or silicon bronze. 2.11 CONTROL SWITCHES A. Multistage, rotary -type rated 120 volts ac, 3 amperes, 30mm NEMA as required. B. Handles shall be black, fixed, modern, pistol grip type. Provide engraved black plastic escutcheon plates with targets. C. Provide nameplates for each control switch and lamp. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) and function of the control switch and lamp. See nameplate section for sizing ap4spacing of letters. o C J 2.12 PUSHBUTTON� S A. Standard 30mm NEMA pushbuttons shall be heavy, industrial -type rated 120 vim, i7rnpefs as required. �m m B. Provide with colored LED lamps. tv [� C. Provide nameplates for each pushbutton. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (nare*) and function of the pushbutton. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 16 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 2.18 LOCAL SEPARATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Three -pole, heavy-duty, rated 600 -volt with continuous current rating as shown on Drawings and as required by load. 1. Type: Either molded -case or blade. j2. Switches shall use high -conductivity copper for current carryiriparts. B. Nwitches shall be positive, quick -make, and quick -break mech isms. 1 Switch assembly plus operating handle shall be integral rt of enclosure base. 2. Each switch shall have handle whose position is easily r cognizable and which can be locked in n" and "Off'position with 3 padlocks. "On" and "OfP' positions shall be clearly marked. C. Switche hall be UL -listed with ampa= rating. W door inter) s that prevent door from being opened D. Fused and non- sed switches shall have front cove matching inforrnat n shown on Drawings. See narry Nameplate shall hav at least 4 lines of text that coir 1. Line 1: Disconn nique identifier (name) 2. Line 2: Voltage 3. Line 3: Appropriate des 'ption and Room 127). 4. Line 4: Appropriate descrip n and 2.19 PLATES AND COVERS A. Provide finish plates and covers of and communication outlets. pplicable, switches shall have defeatable operating handle is in "On" position. iunted nameplate identifying the switch, ie section for sizing and spacing of letters. of from which power is derived, (i.e. Fed from HP1, of connected load (i.e. Load:Exhaust fan Room 255). type and size for wiring and cootrol devices, signal, B. Mark each plate, cover and blankco er with a nah and circuit number. See nameplate action for sizir engraved plate, use self -sticking, ear membrane, covers 4"x4" and smaller. Handw tten labels not al N to indicated function, voTMa soWe panr� spacing of letters. Unlei' cate@ to bg�, sistant labels with typed t�lettgrs for r oordinate color with adj sudi1rn C. Raised cover galvanized steel ales acceptable for use on ace -mounted outletlio�s irk unfinished areas where weath roof plates are not required. x � N D. For weatherproof installation ,cover plates shall be Basketed and ra for NEMA Type 4 inalollation. E. Device plate mounting he are shall be countersunk and finished to mat late. 2.20 WIRING DEVICES A. Where more than one sh device is indicated in same location, mount devices in gan under common plate. B. Switches for contro of ac lighting panel load circuits, single -pole, 3 -way, and 4 -way, shall be pre m, heavy-duty specification -grade, and meet FS W -S -896E. Switches shall be rated for use at 120 or 277 volts and 20 amperes minimum. C. Device color, if not shown on Drawings, shall be coordinated to match adjacent finishes. D. Wall switches requiring pilot light indication shall have red LED pilot light when toggled "On. E. Pulse control of lighting contactors shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, momentary, double -throw, and center"Off." 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 15 4. Starter contactor shall mechanically operate auxiliary contacts. Each starter shall include auxiliary contacts required for application, plus 2 spare NO and 1 spare NC contacts. 5. Provide membrane -style pushbutton control /nh le and LED lights red and green indicating lights shall be provided as minimum on all sAdditional ligh may be required if indicated on schematics, to control starter functions and ion. Pushbu ons and LEDs shall be clearly identified. 6. Verify and match control power transformerload pro ction, and sizes of starters to actual eq ent furnished. 7. Size c trol power transformers (CPT) to suntro ircuit and additional loading simultan usly. Minimum CPT size shall beolt amperes for Size 1 starters and 150 volts- amperes°T Size2and larger starters. 8. CPTs shall h e primaryleads protected, ondary lead protected and one secondary lead grounded. Pro a DIN rail -mounted, miniacuit breakers for protection. Fuses not allowed. 9. Starters for syste with system voltage of lts or less shall not require CPT. 10. Two -speed starters a reversing starters smechanically and electrically interlocked so only one set of contacts an be closed at antime. 2.16 LOCAL SEPARATE MANUAL A. Separately enclosed manual starters, hal a provided with adjustable, bimetallic, Class 10 ambient - compensated, integral overload relay a axed magnetic short-circuit trip mechanism designed to trip at 12 times maximum current rating. B. Starters shall use high -conductivity c per for rrent carrying parts. N C. Size starters for motors served in cordance with C and manufacturers recommend ons. O�' D. Mount manual starters in enclos res with NEMA rating f area as specified. E. If applicable, starters shall be L -listed and CSA -certified for up installationsC)n tI r �r F. Accessories shall be avail le for auxiliary contacts, trip alarm, un -voltage 1*4, a4shu for field installation. �� — 3> o G. Starters shall be pad -lo able with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off" position. to H. Starters shall have fr t cover -mounted nameplate identifying the starter, matchin formation shown on Drawings. See n meplate section for the required text, text size and spacing of le s. 2.17 LOCAL SEPARATE LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide 3 -pole, olded-case, separately enclosed circuit breakers of interrupting rating of 65 kA at rated voltage, nless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide ith thermal and instantaneous trip elements. 2. Breakelig shall use high -conductivity copper for current carrying parts. Breaker enclosures shall have NEMA type enclosure as specified. B. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, and trip -free toggle mechanism. Thermal elements shall withstand sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affecting calibration. C. Circuit breakers shall have "On," "Off," and "Tripped" indication and shall be pad -lockable with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off" position. 1. Breakers rated over 70 amperes shall be rated 100% and have adjustable electronic trip units. 2. Breakers shall be capable of adding alarm, lockout, shunt trip, and under -voltage as options. D. Provide nameplates for each separate circuit breaker enclosure. Nameplate shall include unique identifier (name) of the circuit breaker, description or name of the load, voltage, and the source "Fed from" electrical circuit number. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 16 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 2. Each switch shall have handle whose position is easily recognizable and which can be locked in "On" and "Off' position with 3 padlocks. "On" and "Off' positions shall be clearly marked. C. Switches shall be UL -listed with ampacity rating. Where applicable, switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent door from being opened while operating handle is in "On" position. D. Fused and non-fused switches shall have front cover -mounted nameplate identifying the switch, matching information shown on Drawings. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. Nameplate shall have at least 4 lines of text that consist of 1. Line 1: Disconnect unique identifier (name) 2. Line 2: Voltage 3. Line 3: Appropriate description and location from which power is derived, (i.e. Fed from HP1, Room 127). 4. Line 4: Appropriate description and location of connected load (i.e. Load:Exhaust fan Room 255). 2.19 PLATES AND COVERS A. Provide finish plates and covers of appropriate type and size for wiring and control devices, signal, and communication outlets. B. Mark each plate, cover and blank cover with a nameplate to indicated function, voltage, source panel and circuit number. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of letters. Unless indicated to be engraved plate, use self -sticking, clear membrane, UV -resistant labels with typed black letters for covers 4"x4" and smaller. Handwritten labels not allowed. Coordinate color with adjacent surfaces. C. Raised cover galvanized steel plates acceptable for use on surface -mounted outlet boxes in unfinished areas where weatherproof plates are not required. D. For weatherproof installations, cover plates shall be gasketed and rated for NEMA Type 4 installation. E. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to match plate. 2.20 WIRING DEVICES A. Where more than one flush device is indicated in same location, mount devices in gangs under common plate. B. Switches for control of ac lighting panel load circuits, single -pole, 3 -way, and 4 -way, shall be premium, heavy-duty specification -grade, and meet FS W -S -896E. Switches shall be rated for use at 120 or 277 volts and 20 amperes minimum. C. Device color, if not shown on Drawings, shall be coordinated to match adjacent finishes. D. Wall switches requiring pilot light indication shall have red LED pilot light when toggled "On." N E. Pulse control of lighting contactors shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, momentary, do®e-throw, and center "Off."CIO ' -7 7 tin rn " F. Standard convenience outlets: Premium, heavy-duty, specification -grade, dup1 wire grou 20 -ampere, 125 -volt for 120 -volt circuits, and rated 250 -volts for 240 or 208 -vol£ "h its%D F_ -<r- G. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFI) receptacles: Duplex, 20 -ampere, and 125 WI[%R fethroijpb type. CD7KtV H. Isolated ground (IG) outlets: Duplex, 3 -wire, with isolated grounding terminal, 20�amper%!and 125 volts. Outlets shall be orange in color, unless specified otherwise. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 15 8. CPTs shall have primary leads protected, one secondary lead protected and one secondary lead grounded. Provide DIN rail -mounted, miniature circuit breakers for protection. Fuses not allowed. 9. Starters for systems with system voltage of 120 volts or less shall not require CPT. 10. Two -speed starters and reversing starters shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked so only one set of contacts can be closed at any one time. s 2.16 LOCAL SEPARATE MANUAL STARTERS A. Separately enclosed manual starters, Soft Starts (Allen Bradley SMC3) shall be provided with adjustable, integral overload relay and short-circuit trip mechanism designed to trip at 12 times maximum current rating. B. Starters shall use high -conductivity copper for current carrying parts. C. Size starters for motors served in accordance with NEC and manufacturers recommendations. D. Mount manual starters in enclosures with NEMA rating for area as specified. E. If applicable, starters shall be UL -listed and CSA -certified for group installations. F. Accessories shall be available for auxiliary contacts, trip alarm, under -voltage release, and shunt trip for field installation. G. Starters shall be pad -lockable with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off' position. H. Starters shall have front cover -mounted nameplate identifying the starter, matching information shown on Drawings. See nameplate section for the required text, text size and spacing of letters. 2.17 LOCAL SEPARATE LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide 3 -pole, molded -case, separately enclosed circuit breakers of interrupting rating of 65 kA at rated voltage, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide with thermal and instantaneous trip elements. 2. Breakers shall use high -conductivity copper for current carrying parts. Breaker enclosures shall have NEMA type enclosure as specified. B. Each breaker shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, and trip -free toggle mechanism. Thermal elements shall withstand sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affecting calibration. C. Circuit breakers shall have "On," "Off," and "Tripped" indication and shall be pad -lockable with 3 padlocks in "On" and "Off" position. 1. Breakers rated over 70 amperes shall be rated 100% and have adjustable electronic trip units. 2. Breakers shall be capable of adding alarm, lockout, shunt trip, and under -voltage as options. D. Provide nameplates for each separate circuit breaker enclosure. Nameplate shall includ"nique identifier (name) of the circuit breaker, description or name of the load, voltage,; agd the source "Fed from" electrical circuit number. See nameplate section for sizing and spacing of:letters. m n 2.18 LOCAL SEPARATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES -q n to A. Three -pole, heavy-duty, rated 600 -volt with continuous current rating as shown ciln !ps anM required by load. _? 0 1. Type: Either molded -case or blade. 2. Switches shall use high -conductivity copper for current carrying parts. — 0 B. Switches shall be positive, quick -make, and quick -break mechanisms. 1. Switch assembly plus operating handle shall be integral part of enclosure base. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 18 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 2.24 RUST -INHIBITING COMPOUNDS A. Protect uncoated machined and ferrous surfaces subject to corrosion with rust -inhibitor compounds. B. Rust -inhibitor compounds used to protect surfaces of equipment and piping exposed to feedwater or steam shall be completely water-luble. C. Coat surfaces to be field welded th consumable rust -inhibitor compounds that will not affect quality of weld. D. External gasket surfaces, flange f ces, couplings, rotating equipment shafts and bearings shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated wr h rust -inhibitor compounds. GALVANIZING A. Galvanized structural steel mem ers and steel assemblies shall be pickled after fabrication. Remove scale, rust, grease, and other im urities, then hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM. B. If vanized member is to be b ted, structural bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM. 2.26 IDENTIFICANON AND TAGGING A. Conduits inside anholes, han holes, building entrance pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be provided with _g a (1 mm) s finless steel identification tags, with 1/4" (6 mm) started letters and numbers. _, 1. Attach conduit Ident ion ags with stainless steel banding. Tag positi6Rtlyitl bareadilMible for inspection. 2. Raceway tags shall provid , s minimum: r r a. Identification tags of ca a ontain within conduits.iC-) rs b. Voltage class. -Grrin rn p. 7 a B. Cables passing through or termi ating in me les, hand holes vaults, and pult6d5ies shall bep identified with a 3.5 inch X 2 inc black/yellow s laminating, rigid vinyl tag, held in plapa with two plastic cable ties within 18" of ca le entering or exits the manhole, handhole vaults, a6&pull boxes, (unless indicated to be a 19 -gag (1 mm) stainless stee ' entification tags with stamped lettering). Typed tag shall provide circuit id tification information, nu er of conductors in cable, voltage and the "to/from location for the cable. Handwritten tags are not al ed. C. Provide cable tags for each telec munications cable or wire located i 11 boxes manholes, handholes, and vaults. Cables sh I be identified with a 3.5 inch X 2 inch bl yellow self -laminating, rigid vinyl tag held in place with tw plastic cable ties within 18" of cable enterin r exiting the manhole, handhole, vaults and pul boxes. Typed information on tag shall include t cable number, cable use, "to/from" location, and t e number of fiber strands or copper conductors. He ritten labeling is unacceptable. D. Provide power, control, and instru entation cables with permanent type identification markers with typed cable numbers and fromfto i ormation at each point of termination. Cable numbers and fromfto information will be provided for circ its not associated with low -voltage panelboards. 1. Position cable markers to be r dily visible for inspection. 2. Cable numbers shall match th se as shown on cable schedule and drawings. 3. Provide wire tags at each termination point for each conductor. Tags shall be permanent, wrap around, heat -shrinkable type with typewritten information. E. Color -code power conductors with electrical tape or provide with colored jacket. 1. Source voltage of 208Y/120 volts: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 17 convenience outlets: Premium, heavy-duty, specification -grade, duplex, 3 -wire, grounding, e, 125 -volt for 120 -volt circuits, and rated 250 -volts for 240 or 208 -volt circuits. G. Gro d fault circuit interrupter (GFI) receptacles: Duplex, 20 -ampere, and 125 volts, feed -through type. H. Isolated g nd (IG) outlets: Duplex, 3 -wire, with isolated grounding terminal, 20 -ampere, and 125 volts. Outlet shall be orange in color, unless specified otherwise. I. Provide namepla s for each switch, Nameplate shall include area served our panel and circuit number. 2.21 WELDING A. If special welding requireme s are required for any piece of a ipment during installation, requirements shall be stated o manufacturer's shop drawin of affected part. B. Furnish detailed welding requirem is with equipment s pment. 2.22 2.23 CIRCUIT BREAKERS \ A. Molded -case, thermal -magnetic, bolt -in, "Off," and "Tripped" position. B. Branch circuit breakers used for lighting C. Breakers having multiple poles shall b D. Interrupting rating shall be not less an achieve required short circuit inte uptin N O in 'vid ly front replaceable, and shall vind to "OnR 4 r a r ci uits all be switch duty rated, "SWD�<s rn manufacture as common trip type.= 0 :*;:K D Q';?ed interrupting ratin of panelboards, and not series O to 3 rating. E. Provide handle clips for 10%, r minimum of 2 whichever is gr ter, for breakers to prevent casual operation. If no breakers ar indicated for installation, then prow eon breakers labeled as spare. F. Breakers, and provisions r future breakers, shall be provided in qu tides, poles, and ampere ratings shown on Drawi s. G. Molded -case circuit eakers used in ac and do panelboards and ac load nters shall be bolt -on type, G -frame size. SHOP FINISHES A. Manufactureo standard coating systems shall be factory -applied. Coating systems hall provide resistance t corrosion caused by weather and industrial environments. 1. Surfag6s inaccessible after factory or field assembly shall be protected for life of eipmenl. 2. Pain)6d surfaces shall be filled to provide smooth, uniform base for painting. 3. Su aces requiring field welds shall not be coated within 3" (75 mm) of field weld. B. Crydting material and application techniques shall conform to regulations of air quality agency having jurisdiction. C. Exterior surfaces of control and electrical equipment, including panels, cabinets, switchgear, transformers, and motors shall be manufacturer's standard colors unless specified otherwise. D. Apply high-temperature coating systems to uninsulated equipment operating at temperatures at or above 200OF(93°C). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 18 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 D. External gasket surfaces, flange faces, couplings, rotating equipment shafts and bearings shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with rust -inhibitor compounds. N O `, ^> C7 N rn s N 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 17 I. Provide nameplates for each switch, Nameplate shall include area served, source panel and circuit number. 2.21 WELDING A. If special welding requirements are required for any piece of equipment during installation, requirements shall be stated on manufacturers shop drawing of affected part. B. Furnish detailed welding requirements with equipment shipment. 2.22 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -case, thermal -magnetic, bolt -in, individually front replaceable, and shall visibly indicate "On," "Off," and "Tripped" position. B. Branch circuit breakers used for lighting circuits shall be switch duty rated, "SWD." C. Breakers having multiple poles shall be manufactured as common trip type. D. Interrupting rating shall be not less than interrupting rating of panelboards, and not series rated to achieve required short circuit interrupting rating. E. Provide handle clips for 10%, or minimum of 2 whichever is greater, for breakers to prevent casual operation. If no breakers are indicated for installation, then provide on breakers labeled as spare. F. Breakers, and provisions for future breakers, shall be provided in quantities, poles, and ampere ratings shown on Drawings. G. Molded -case circuit breakers used in ac and do panelboards and ac load centers shall be bolt -on type, G -frame size. 2.23 SHOP FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard coating systems shall be factory -applied. Coating systems shall provide resistance to corrosion caused by weather and industrial environments. 1. Surfaces inaccessible after factory or field assembly shall be protected for life of equipment. 2. Painted surfaces shall be filled to provide smooth, uniform base for painting. 3. Surfaces requiring field welds shall not be coated within 3" (75 mm) of field weld. B. Coating material and application techniques shall conform to regulations of air quality management agency having jurisdiction. C. Exterior surfaces of control and electrical equipment, including panels, cabinets, switchgear, transformers, and motors shall be manufacturers standard colors unless specified otherwise. N D. Apply high-temperature coating systems to uninsulated equipment operating at tgmperaf2es at or above 200°F (93°C). C-) r1t 2.24 RUST -INHIBITING COMPOUNDS =4 A. Protect uncoated machined and ferrous surfaces subject to corrosion with rust-i4por coompou�rd� m = B. Rust -inhibitor compounds used to protect surfaces of equipment and piping expto W8dwatQJ steam shall be completely water-soluble. _ 70 C. Coat surfaces to be field welded with consumable rust -inhibitor compounds that will not affect quality of weld. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 20 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 3/8" high capital letters, 3 letters per linear inch with 1/4" high space between lines of text. J. Equipment larger than 24" wide and up to 36" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, transformers, disconnects, switchboards etc. Nameplate shall Ipe centered at the top of the enclosure and utilize 1' high capital letters, 1 letters per .833 linear inch ith 3/8" high space between lines of text for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space betwee lines of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per lineAr inch with 3/8" high space between lines of text. K. Equipment larger than 36" wide and up to 50"vJide, such as pull boxes, panels, switchboards etc. Nameplate shall centered at 70" AFF or at the t p of the enclosure. Utilize 1.5" high capital letters, 1 letters per 1.3 linear inch with 3/8" high space tptween lines of text for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space between lines of text. The rem ning data on the nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch with 3/8" high ppace between lines of text. L. Equipment larger than 50" wide, such as pull centered at 70" AFF or at the top of the enclo: mch with 1/2° high space between lines of tax b een lines of text. The remaining data on per ar inch with 3/8" high space between II M. Motor starte-r&4hall have front cover -mounts shown on Drawi Nameplate shall have 1. Line 1: Starter u ' e identifier (name) 2. Line 2: Voltage, 3. Line 3: Type (FVNR, FV 4. Line 4: Appropriate descriptio nd loce Room 127). 5. Line 5: Appropriate description and I N. Motor starters, either separately mounted o identifying related equipment. Where sepa have engraved or etched legends ("start," ". O. Provide control stations with nameplates ids shall have engraved or etched legends as s P. Provide circuit breakers within main switcht identifying related equipment being served. Q. Provide equipment label, marking, and/or si NFPA 70E. 2.28 HARDWARE A. Provide hardware including, but not limited nuts needed for installation. B. Hardware smaller than 3/4" (19 mm) shall electrical equipment. C. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 2.29 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS Poxes, panels, switchboards etc. Nameplate shall Pre. Utilize 2" high capital letters, 1 letters per 1.5 linear for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space he nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters nes of text. N nameplate identifying the starter, matcQ information least 5 lines of text that consistDf D -t rn L r ,n from which power is derived, 05Ld fW HPCo,"- m of connected load (i.e. 15 hp v9iRt4rpun; Room -255). .c N m%)a otor control centers, hall havEnameplates cindicating lights are used, starters shall p,"own on Drawings. ig related equi ant. Control and indicating lights on Dra%iings. and distribution switchboard"ith nameplates per requirements of latest edition of NFPA anchor bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, wire NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and A. Supports of structural steel or manufactured framing members shall be fabricated from lightweight stainless steel channel approved by manufacturer for intended use, provide required rods, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and accessories. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 19 d. Neutral: White. 2. Source voltage of 120/240 volts: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Neutral: White. 3. Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: Phase A: Brown. b. hose B: Orange. c. ase C: Yellow. d. Ne traI Gray. 4. Source Itage of 240/120 -volt delta: High -leg systems shall not be used w' out Engineer approval. 5. Service ent\ipment uipment ground conductors shall be bare Copp or green insulated conductor. bonding conductors shall be bare copper.6. Isolated groors shall be insulated; green in color with in gral yellow stripe. No substitution2.27 EQUIPMENT NAMA. Nameplates shte white -over -black plastic such t t face is white with black engraved letters securelyh mi mum of 2 self -tapping, sta' less steel screws or permanent adhesive. B. Provide nameplate for field devices a identification shown on electrical one C. Placement and location of nameplate shall nbk equipment or enclosure. Bring to the attention the natural ventilation of the equipment or eno accommodate proper placement on the enc!0s Eqth nameplate shall include description and tag ed from" source and circuit number, 0 the manufacture data names ofae ^w-q� Engineer or Owner if nam ingeres wRl1 Relocate or modify the siz@4o the gamepMMo -1 A rn D. Placement Placement and location of nameplate sh not interfere 'th the natural ventilatiS heAquiprrjeo:or enclosure. Bring to the attention of the ngineer or Owne ' nameplate intertere�iWEh th3hatu�rSV ventilation of the equipment or enclos re. Relocate or modi the size for the nalpneplate,§ accommodate proper placement on a enclosure. �0 E. Equipment 3"w or less, such s boxes, panels, cover plates, co of switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, and control re ys, etc. Nameplate shall be centered the top of the equipment of the equipment and utilize 1/8' igh capital letters, 10 letters per linear inc with 1/16" high space between lines of text. F. Equipment larger than 3" ide and up to 6" wide such, as boxes, panels cover p es, control switches, push button thermostats, heat trace heads, starters, light fixtures etc. meplate shall be centered at the top o he enclosure and utilize 3/16" high capital letters, 9 letters per ear inch with 1/8" high space be een lines of text. G. Equipment lager than 6" wide and up to 11" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, starters, light fixtures etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the enclosure and 1/4" high capital letters, 5.3 letters per linear inch with 1/4" high space between lines of text. H. Equipment larger than 11" wide and up to 16" wide, such as pull boxes, starters, transformers, disconnects, panelboards etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the enclosure and utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch -for the unique identifier (name), and %" space between lines of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 3/16" high capital letters, 6 letters per linear inch with 1/8" high space between lines of text. I. Equipment larger than 16" wide and up to 24" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, starters, transformers, disconnects, panelboards etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the and utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space between lines COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 20 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 5. Service entrance and equipment ground conductors shall be bare copper or green insulated conductor. Equipment bonding conductors shall be bare copper. 6. Isolated ground conductors shall be insulated, green in color with integral yellow stripe. No substitutions. 2.27 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be laminated white -over -black plastic such that face is white with black engraved letters securely fastened with minimum of 2 self -tapping, stainless steel screws or permanent adhesive. B. Provide nameplate for field devices and equipment. Each nameplate shall include description and tag identification shown on electrical one line or P&ID's, "Fed from" source and circuit number. C. Placement and location of nameplate shall not cover the manufacture data nameplates of the equipment or enclosure. Bring to the attention of the Engineer or Owner if nameplate interferes with the natural ventilation of the equipment or enclosure. Relocate or modify the size for the nameplate to accommodate proper placement on the enclosure. D. Placement and location of nameplate shall not interfere with the natural ventilation of the equipment or enclosure. Bring to the attention of the Engineer or Owner if nameplate interferes with the natural ventilation of the equipment or enclosure. Relocate or modify the size for the nameplate to accommodate proper placement on the enclosure. E. Equipment 3" wide or less, such as boxes, panels, cover plates, control switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, and control relays, etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the equipment of the equipment and utilize 1/8" high capital letters, 10 letters per linear inch with 1/16" high space between lines of text. F. Equipment larger than 3' wide and up to 6" wide such, as boxes, panels cover plates, control switches, push buttons, thermostats, heat trace heads, starters, light fixtures etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the enclosure and utilize 3/16' high capital letters, 9 letters per linear inch with 1/8" high space between lines of text. G. Equipment larger than 6" wide and up to 11" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, starters, light fixtures etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the enclosure and 1/4" high capital letters, 5.3 letters per linear inch with 1/4" high space between lines of text. H. Equipment larger than 11' wide and up to 16" wide, such as pull boxes, starters, transformers, disconnects, panelboards etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the enclosure and utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch for the unique identifier (name), and W space between lines of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 3/16" high capital letters, 6 letters per linear inch with 1/8" high space between lines of text. I. Equipment larger than 16" wide and up to 24" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, starters, transformers, disconnects, panelboards etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the and utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space between lines _ of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 3/8' high capital letters, 3 letters per linear inch with 1/4" high space between lines of text. o J. Equipment larger than 24' wide and up to 36" wide, such as pull boxes, panels $ foWp ers, TT disconnects, switchboards etc. Nameplate shall be centered at the top of the eurrd utilil" high capital letters, 1 letters per .833 linear inch with 3/8" high space between 109sef teAfor ttya— unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space between lines of text. The remaining Qg"n th® nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch with 3/8" high space be4Rmn linps of t ::0 a K. Equipment larger than 36" wide and up to 50" wide, such as pull boxes, panel Witchtraerds L Nameplate shall centered at 70" AFF or at the top of the enclosure. Utilize 1.5 gh cao,&il letters, 1 letters per 1.3 linear inch with 3/8" high space between lines of text for the unique identifier (name), 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 19 2.25 GALVANIZING A. Galvanized structural steel members and steel assemblies shall be pickled after fabrication. Remove scale, rust, grease, and other impurities, then hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM. B. If galvanized member is to be bolted, structural bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM. 2.26 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Conduits inside manholes, hand holes, building entrance pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be provided with 19 -gage (1 mm) stainless steel identification tags, with 1/4" (6 mm) stamped letters and numbers. 1. Attach conduit Identification tags with stainless steel banding. Tag position shall be readily visible for inspection. 2. Raceway tags shall provide, as minimum: a. Identification tags of cables contain within conduits. b. Voltage class. B. Cables passing through or terminating in manholes, hand holes vaults, and pull boxes shall be identified with a 3.5 inch X 2 inch black/yellow self -laminating, rigid vinyl tag, held in place with two plastic cable ties within 18" of cable entering or exiting the manhole, handhole vaults, and pull boxes, (unless indicated to be a 19 -gage (1 mm) stainless steel identification tags with stamped lettering). Typed tag shall provide circuit identification information, number of conductors in cable, voltage and the "to/from location for the cable. Handwritten tags are not allowed. C. Provide cable tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in pull boxes manholes, handholes, and vaults. Cables shall be identified with a 3.5 inch X 2 inch black/yellow self -laminating, rigid vinyl tag held in place with two plastic cable ties within 18" of cable entering or exiting the manhole, handhole, vaults and pull boxes. Typed information on tag shall include the cable number, cable use, 'to/from' location, and the number of fiber strands or copper conductors. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. D. Provide power, control, and instrumentation cables with permanent type identification markers with typed cable numbers and from/to information at each point of termination. Cable numbers and from/to information will be provided for circuits not associated with low -voltage panelboards. 1. Position cable markers to be readily visible for inspection. 2. Cable numbers shall match those as shown on cable schedule and drawings. 3. Provide wire tags at each termination point for each conductor. Tags shall be permanent, wrap around, heat -shrinkable type with typewritten information. E. Color -code power conductors with electrical tape or provide with colored jacket. 1. Source voltage of 208Y/120 volts: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. c3 d. Neutral: White. p --+ 2. Source voltage of 120/240 volts: n H w T a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Neutral: White. �n r 3. Source voltage of 480Y/277 volts: a. Phase A: Brown. O 0 b. Phase B: Orange. D N c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. 4. Source voltage of 240/120 -volt delta: High -leg systems shall not be used without Engineer approval. -JY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 22 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1669 F. Sheet metal junction boxes, equipment enclosures, sheet metal raceways, and similar items mounted on earth -bearing walls shall be separated from wall not less than 1/4" (6 mm) by corrosion -resistant spacers. G. Provide mounting associated hardware for junction boxes, equipment enclosures, raceways, cable trays, fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical devices. H. Outdoor electrical enclosures housing terminal strips, fuses, shall be provided with a flat concrete working surface dimen Working Spaces. Subs tions, switchgear, motor control centers, and similar at Perm s ntly sealed at base. Openings into equipment shall' entrance birds, rodents, and insects the size of wasps and 1. Sealing aterial at base shall be concrete grout. 2. Small cra1qs and openings shall be sealed from inside 3. Large open gs shall use galvanized screen mesh. 4. For arc-resis n, equipment sealing material at and el requirements. 3.04 TRIP SETTING COORD114ATION A. Motor overload protection hall be selected and set jnformation. Size motor circ ' protectors to coordir `overload protection. Submit sbQ1mary of settings t '1. Equipment project identifice n number. 2. Nameplate information. 3. Overload device trip range. 4. Overload device setting. 5. Trip device rating. 6. Trip device setting if different from rate /1ue. B. Set protective devices and verify devices a and adjust settings of protective devices in recommendations and Engineer document C. Confirm overcurent protection for gen nameplate rating. 1. If Contractor -provided transformer energizing, increase overcurrent d 2. Coordinate work with Owner. 3.05 CABLE INSTALLATION purpose s and other electronic equipment to the NEC table 110.26(A)(1) lent located outdoors shall be reened or sealed as to prevent daubers. silicone sealant. shall be per manufacture Contractor based on final motor nameplate with motor starting characteristics and vner, list: 0 within manufacturer'sal aril. Veflfj,'1�et, with equipment manuer Un r rib ion transformers is]Qed o!6Vansb�i er res higher overcur nt device ratiniftwevent tripp g on and conductors in a ordance witttjoEC. N ua A. Prior to installation of each cable or cable group into assigned raceway, verhat raceway has been correctly sized. 1. Where raceway is not indicated in cable schedule or on Drawings, size in accor ce with requirements of NEC. 2. If cable or raceway size indicated on Contract Documents is inadequate, notify Engineer. B. Replace cables pulled into wrong raceway or cut too short to rack and train. C. Do not reinstall cables installed in wrong raceway and removed. Discard cables unless inspected and accepted by Owner's Representative in writing. D. Carefully lay or pull circuits in cable tray so neither cables nor tray is damaged. E. Protect cables from dirt, water, oil, damaging chemicals, and from physical injury prior to, and during installation. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 21 B. Rods, all -thread, anchors, inserts, clamps spacers, shims bolts and accessories shall be stainless steel. 2.30 LOGIC SYSTEMS FACTORY TESTING A. Prior to shipment, test electrical equipment containing solid-state logic systems in accordance with manufcturer's standard tests for minimum of 120 hours under power. 1. Co ponents tested shall include electronic devices; power supplies, input-output devices, oper or interface devices, and interconnecting cables provided with system. 2. SystenNshall be tested as complete assembly. Testing of individual components or modules not allowed 6k system tests. 3. Provide pr ramming logic diagram and sequence of operation documentations; B. System test shall in lude: 1. Means of confirm g logic or mathematical design response of system input. 2. Test shall repeatedly c service with loads on v service. 3. Adjustment of power sou both high and low power system through operations system is components equivalent to those voltages to high and low vice voltage limits. C. System shall be tested and verified requirements of IEEE C37.90. D. Perform tests with solid-state logic syste which associated electrical equipment is PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Contractor shall be responsible for installed shall be capable of withsp 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect installed Work activity in immediate m B. Damage occurring to conditions existing per 3.03 INSTALLATION simulating changes in expected to perform in will be experienced in actual correct operation of system at of providingsurge withstand capability in accordance with N O IY'. d to ambient temperature app�priate ta ervi�pr �S? � `11 C) � r rity with Proje Site conditions. Equipnt€n�furnished and M severe co itions that will be encohitered. 10 ,ide temporary and removable to prevent damage. ilding or equipment during installation shall to damage at no additional cost or delay to for installed products. Control aired or replaced to or Owner. A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturer'scommendations and Drawings. B. Details for equipment and systems installed in accordance with industry standard techniques will not be furnished. C. Installation details furnished on Drawings shall be followed unless found to be unsafe, inappropriate for equipment specified, or unachievable due to site conditions. D. Install equipment indicated on Drawings as furnished by others, unless noted as installed by others. E. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings, equipment shall be installed plumb, square, and level. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 22 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 B. System test shall include: 1. Means of confirming logic or mathematical design response of system by simulating changes in system input. 2. Test shall repeatedly cycle system through operations system will be expected to perform in service with loads on various components equivalent to those which will be experienced in actual service. 3. Adjustment of power source voltages to high and low limits. Verify correct operation of system at both high and low power source voltage limits. C. System shall be tested and verified capable of providing surge withstand capability in accordance with requirements of IEEE C37.90. D. Perform tests with solid-state logic system exposed to ambient temperature appropriate to service for which associated electrical equipment is designed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarity with Project Site conditions. Equipment furnished and installed shall be capable of withstanding most severe conditions that will be encountered. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. B. Damage occurring to building or equipment during installation shall be repaired or replaced to conditions existing prior to damage at no additional cost or delay to project or Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers recommendations and Drawings. B. Details for equipment and systems installed in accordance with industry standard techniques will not be furnished. C. Installation details furnished on Drawings shall be followed unless found to be unsafe, inappropriate for equipment specified, or unachievable due to site conditions. D. Install equipment indicated on Drawings as furnished by others, unless noted as installed by others. E. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings, equipment shall be installed plumb, square, and level. N O F. Sheet metal junction boxes, equipment enclosures, sheet metal raceways, and similar it®s mounted on earth -bearing walls shall be separated from wall not less than 1/4" (6 mm) buysi�resista� spacers. ,� -y G. Provide mounting associated hardware for junction boxes, equipment enclosure1{poewh&9ab, ca a trays, fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical devices. 7<tr- -p _ n _ H. Outdoor electrical enclosures housing terminal strips, fuses, starters and other efeafrbn shall be provided with a flat concrete working surface dimensioned to the NEC table 11 Working Spaces. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 21 and 3/8" space between lines of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch with 3/8" high space between lines of text. L. Equipment larger than 50" wide, such as pull boxes, panels, switchboards etc. Nameplate shall centered at 70" AFF or at the top of the enclosure. Utilize 2" high capital letters, 1 letters per 1.5 linear inch with 1/2" high space between lines of text for the unique identifier (name), and 3/8" space between lines of text. The remaining data on the nameplate utilize 1/2" high capital letters, 2.5 letters per linear inch with 3/8" high space between lines of text. M. Motor starters shall have front cover -mounted nameplate identifying the starter, matching information shown on Drawings. Nameplate shall have at least 5 lines of text that consist of 1. Line 1: Starter unique identifier (name) 2. Line 2: Voltage, 3. Line 3: Type (FVNR, FVR) 4. Line 4: Appropriate description and location from which power is derived, (i.e. fed from HP1, Room 127). 5. Line 5: Appropriate description and location of connected load (i.e. 15 hp water pump Room 255). N. Motor starters, either separately mounted or contained in motor control centers, shall have nameplates identifying related equipment. Where separate control and indicating lights are used, starters shall have engraved or etched legends ("start," "stop," etc.) as shown on Drawings. O. Provide control stations with nameplates identifying related equipment. Control and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends as shown on Drawings. P. Provide circuit breakers within main switchboards and distribution switchboards with nameplates identifying related equipment being served. Q. Provide equipment label, marking, and/or signage per requirements of latest edition of NFPA 70 and NEPA 70E. Y IS=7/c\:71Pi9a1:7q A. Provide hardware including, but not limited to, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, wire nuts needed for installation. B. Hardware smaller than 3/4" (19 mm) shall match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment. C. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 2.29 STRUCTURALSUPPORTS A. Supports of structural steel or manufactured framing members shall be fabricated from lightweight stainless steel channel approved by manufacturer for intended use, provide required rrg6y, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and accessories. o :s: M vn B. Rods, all -thread, anchors, inserts, clamps spacers, shims bolts and accessorie3 gall 63 stainIJ1 steel. C-) "< -C) % -Qr 2.30 LOGIC SYSTEMS FACTORY TESTING <m a rn A. Prior to shipment, test electrical equipment containing solid-state logic systems t'h'acdWanc9 with manufacturers standard tests for minimum of 120 hours under power. 1. Components tested shall include electronic devices; power supplies, input-output vices, operator interface devices, and interconnecting cables provided with system. 2. System shall be tested as complete assembly. Testing of individual components or modules not allowed as system tests. 3. Provide programming logic diagram and sequence of operation documentations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 24 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 S. Final inspection shall be made after cables are in place. Where supports, bushings, and end bells deform cable jacket, provide additional supports. T. Splices, joints, and connections shall be made only methods specified and instructions of cable manufa Drawings. U. Rough -in wiring terminated in junction boxes shall h in box for connection to equipment and receptacles. V. Circuit information for circuits originating from pa circuits are identified on circuit schedule. Do not Panelboard circuits are indicated as individual runs. in accordance with rules of NEC. Perform work ass Bost to Owner. 3.06 WIRING WVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS A. Install ga nized or cadmium plated, threaded, 1. Embeddkd in concrete walls, ceiling, and 6 2. Outdoor a sed faces of masonry walls. 3. Locations wh a weatherproof cover is reqs B. Install galvanized or ca ium plated sheet steel 1. Indoor exposed faces masonry walls. 2. Interior partition walls. 3. Joist supported ceilings. C. Rigid PVC device boxes shall beinsta d in exp D. ,Telephone and communication conduit E. 'Install fire system wiring in dedicated conduit ssible junction boxes in accordance with Splices not allowed unless shown on at least 8" (200 mm) of free conductor coiled is indicated on panel schedules. Other receptacle loads with lighting loads. s may be combined into common conduits with combining of circuits at no additional iron boxes and fittings in: by code or this specification. s in: o J CA '-0 A—t L r nonmetallic conduit systo!S C r.,. � a have separate junction bon end �ll MOW 1> N F. Finish openings so standard sized cover plates ca be u d. Oversized plates not allowed. G. Mount wall switches 3' 6" (1,066 mm) above finish floor or g de unless specified otherwise. After circuits are energized, test wall switches for proper peration. H. Outlets: 1. Standard mounting height: 18" (450 mm) abov finished floor, unless ecified otherwise. 2. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, orerooms, and other ro s where equipment may be hosed down: 4'-0" (1.2 m) above finish floor or grade. 3. Surface -mount welding receptacles 4'-0" (1.2 m above finished floor or grade. 4. After circuits are energized, test each receptacl for correct polarity. 5. Test GFCI receptacles for proper operation. 6. Mount wall thermostats 5'-6" (1.6 m) above finished floor unless noted otherwise. Thermosta mounted shall be suitably insulated from wall temperatures. I. Communication outlets shall be 18" (450 mm) above finished floor unless required otherwise. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down shall be 4'-0" (1.2 m) above floor. J. Clock outlets shall be located 7'-0" (2.1 m) above finished floor or grade. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 23 F. Cables shall be cut sufficiently long to conform to contour of trays, with particular attention paid to vertical inside bends. G. Remove excessive slack so cables lie parallel to sides of trays. H. Multiple single -conductor power cables No. 1/0 AWG (50 mm2) or larger installed in cable tray that constitute si Ig power circuit shall be grouped together in triplexed or quadriplexed arrangement. Maintain ca a spacing to be 2.15 x O.D. of largest conductor in group or adjacent group. I. Multiconducto ower cables No. 4/0 AWG (120 mm2) or larger installed in cable tray shall be installed n single layer A maintained spacing of not less than 1 cable diameter of largest cable. J. Fasten cables to d4ble tray with rated nylon ties to hold cables in place. Fasten cables to vertical cable tray every 18" (450 m) and to horizontal cable tray every 3' m). K. Provide flexible round etal tape, CO2 propelled polyet ene cord, nylon rope, or manila rope in each conduit for future cable o Ilina. L. Cable damage caused by i ropy considered for any cable pull ha underground or overhead. 1. NEC requirements shall be Lh over 300' (90 m), and for insU 2. Monitor pulling tension during recommended by cable manu 3. To avoid damage from excess cable manufacturer's recom 4. Pulling mechanisms, manu mechanism. pulling tensio and excessive sidewall pressures shall be req/nconduit mechanized cable pulling machine, whether installed �d . Calculations shall be performed for duct bank runs IIg�tiover 100' (30 m). nitable. Tension shall not exceed maximum or 5. During installation, obs er shall achieved during pull. pressure at bends, pulling tension shall not exceed shall have rated capacity in tons legibly marked on watch dynamometer and record maximum tension /nded If excessive str n develops, stop pullin operation at once. Determine difficulty and correct. Provide recor of dynamometer readin to Engineer. oN Inform Own prior to cable pulls. p =. not use wo en wire cable grips. Only use pu\expense es for pulling cablesc) y -77 soon as c le is pulled into place, remove pyes and reseal cable? -1 n� t Mreliable onfreezing type of swivel or swivel ton between pulling r0nd�je to r vent and strain. rn _ Nse bricants compatible with the cable jackees of promote flarri f ApaFmion a3"� nded by cable manufacturer.oOe of each cable reel shall be carefully inspecmove p truding nails, fastenings, or other that might damage cable. rform visual inspection for flaws, breaks, or as in cable eath as cable leaves reel. Pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit inn. 2. Damage to sheath or finish of cable shall be sucause for rejec g cable. 3. Cable damaged during installation shall be replno expense to er. P. Permanent radius of each bend after cable installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Q. Cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located parallel to surfaces of cable sheath. Install to provide adequate support without deformation of cable jackets or insulation. R. Provide adequate cable end lengths. Properly install in junction boxes and manholes to avoid longitudinal strains and distorting pressures on cable at conduit bushings and duct end bells. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 24 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 I. Multiconductor power cables No. 410 AWG (120 mm2) or larger installed in cable tray shall be installed in single layer with maintained spacing of not less than 1 cable diameter of largest cable. J. Fasten cables to cable tray with rated nylon ties to hold cables in place. Fasten cables to vertical cable tray every 18° (450 mm) and to horizontal cable tray every 3' (1 m). K. Provide flexible round metal tape, CO2 propelled polyethylene cord, nylon rope, or manila rope in each conduit for future cable pulling. L. Cable damage caused by improper pulling tension and excessive sidewall pressures shall be considered for any cable pulls that require use of mechanized cable pulling machine, whether installed underground or overhead. 1 � = 1. NEC requirements shall be used as guideline. Calculations shall be performed for duct bank runs over 300'(90 m), and for installations in conduit over 100'(30 m). 2. Monitor pulling tension during installation of cable. Tension shall not exceed maximum recommended by cable manufacturer. 3. To avoid damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends, pulling tension shall not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Pulling mechanisms, manual or power type, shall have rated capacity in tons legibly marked on mechanism. 5. During installation, observer shall constantly watch dynamometer and record maximum tension achieved during pull. a. If excessive strain develops, stop pulling operation at once. Determine difficulty and correct. b. Provide records of dynamometer readings to Engineer. c. Inform Owner prior to cable pulls. 6. Do not use woven wire cable grips. Only use pulling eyes for pulling cables. 7. As soon as cable is pulled into place, remove pulling eyes and reseal cable. M. Insert reliable nonfreezing type of swivel or swivel connection between pulling rope and eye to prevent twisting under strain. N. Only use lubricants compatible with the cable jacket and does not promote flame propagation as recommended by cable manufacturer. O. Outside of each cable reel shall be carefully inspected. Remove protruding nails, fastenings, or other objects that might damage cable. 1. Perform visual inspection for flaws, breaks, or abrasions in cable sheath as cable leaves reel. Pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit inspection. 2. Damage to sheath or finish of cable shall be sufficient cause for rejecting cable. 3. Cable damaged during installation shall be replaced at no expense to Owner. P. Permanent radius of each bend after cable installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Q. Cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located parallel to surfaces of cable,+ sheath. Install to provide adequate support without deformation of cable jackets or insulation. N O R. Provide adequate cable end lengths. Properly install in junction boxes and m 6holes tesavoid longitudinal strains and distorting pressures on cable at conduit bushings and:tROens3,P}' ells. —n S. Final inspection shall be made after cables are in place. Where supports, buffs*, aM end rM deform cable jacket, provide additional supports. c� r -v M rn T. Splices, joints, and connections shall be made only in accessible junction DO)MZacc::§danclOh methods specified and instructions of cable manufacturer. Splices not allowe?Rn essWown on Drawings. ry V- U. U. Rough4n wiring terminated in junction boxes shall have at least 8' (200 mm) of free conductor coiled in box for connection to equipment and receptacles. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 23 Substations, switchgear, motor control centers, and similar equipment located outdoors shall be permanently sealed at base. Openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed as to prevent entrance of birds, rodents, and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. 1. Sealing material at base shall be concrete grout. 2. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant. 3. Large openings shall use galvanized screen mesh. 4. For arc -resistance equipment sealing material al and method shall be per manufacture requirements. 3.04 TRIP SETTING COORDINATION A. Motor overload protection shall be selected and set by Contractor based on final motor nameplate information. Size motor circuit protectors to coordinate with motor starting characteristics and overload protection. Submit summary of settings to Owner, list: 1. Equipment project identification number. 2. Nameplate information. 3. Overload device trip range. 4. Overload device setting. 5. Trip device rating. 6. Trip device setting if different from rated value. B. Set protective devices and verify devices are operating within manufacturers tolerances. Verify, set, and adjust settings of protective devices in accordance with equipment manufacturer recommendations and Engineer documentations. C. Confirm overcurrent protection for general purpose distribution transformers is based on transformer nameplate rating. 1. If Contractor -provided transformer requires higher overcurrent device rating to prevent tripping on energizing, increase overcurrent device and conductors in accordance with NEC. 2. Coordinate work with Owner. 3.05 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation of each cable or cable group into assigned raceway, verify that raceway has been correctly sized. 1. Where raceway is not indicated in cable schedule or on Drawings, size in accordance with requirements of NEC. 2. If cable or raceway size indicated on Contract Documents is inadequate, notify Engineer. B. Replace cables pulled into wrong raceway or cut too short to rack and train. C. Do not reinstall cables installed in wrong raceway and removed. Discard cables unless inspected and accepted by Owner's Representative in writing. N D. Carefully lay or pull circuits in cable tray so neither cables nor tray is damaged fin. y E. Piotect cables from dirt, water, oil, damaging chemicals, and from physical inA4nor[@, and d61y� ng installation. �n F. Cables shall be cut sufficiently long to conform to contour of trays, with particAFAttentjgn paFn vertical inside bends. G. Remove excessive slack so cables lie parallel to Fides of trays. = _ n H. Multiple single -conductor power cables No. 1/0 AWG (50 mm2) or larger installed in cable tray that constitute single power circuit shall be grouped together in triplexed or quadriplexed arrangement. Maintain cable spacing to be 2.15 x O.D. of largest conductor in group or adjacent group. 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 5 G. Following shall be available locally either on control panel display and remotely through communication interface: 1. Drive ready. 2. Drive running. 3. Current, amps. 4. Line -line voltage, volts. 5. Output horsepower, hp. 6. Speed, rpm. 7. Frequency, Hz: Digital readout. 8. Drive alarm conditions. a. Missing run or start permissive. b. Low control voltage. c. Microprocessor problem. d. 1/0 addressing problem. e. Loss of speed reference. f. Common trouble alarm. 9. Drive fault conditions requiring immediate attention, and may indicate impending shutdown of drive. a. Source undervoltage. b. Source overvoltage. c. Source loss of phase. d. Source reverse phase sequence. e. Load overcurrent. f. Overspeed. g. Ground fault. h. Dc Link overvoltage. H. Provide communications interface for remote monitoring and control of VFD using Ethernet communications. 2.12 DRIVE DIAGNOSTICS A. Provide comprehensive diagnostics for maintenance and troubleshooting including: 1. Self -test of microprocessor drive control system. 2. LED indicators for status indication on control boards. 3. Convenient maintenance test points. 2.13 COOLING A. Provide integral filtered ambient air cooling by natural convection or forced air cooling system as required to maintain drive equipment at its full current rating. 2.14 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING '7 A. Securely attach nameplates with self -tapping stainless steel screws. Adhesive r epla%g not I , acceptable. S2 r B. Lettering shall be black on white background. 4r `n [, PART 3 EXECUTION r- 3.01 PREPARATION t' — ro A. Clean interior and exterior of equipment prior to placing into service. Debris shall be removed and appropriately discarded. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 B. Perform manufacturer's recommended start-up and commissioning tests prior to placing into service. C. Correct deficiencies with VFD and other furnished equipment until system operates as required for installed equipment, at no cost to Owner. D. Refinish marred spots to match original finish. N O_ J �n � N rT1 C-)-� 7 r =crn -v m � Z riT N r N C.7 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 5 5) Drive running indication. G. Following shall be available locally either on control panel display or by use of readouts and LEDs, and remotely through communication interface: 1. 've ready. 2. D e running. 3. Cu nt, amps. 4. Line- a voltage, volts. 5. Outpu orsepower, hp. 6. Speed, m. 7. Frequen , Hz: Digital readout. 8. Drive ala conditions. a. Missing n or start permissive. b. Low cont I voltage. c. Microproc sor problem. d. I/O address g problem. e. Loss of spe reference. f. Common troub alarm. 9. Drive fault condition requiring immediate attention, a may indicate impending shutdown of drive. a. Source undervolta b. Source overvoltage. c. Source loss of phase. d. Source reverse phase quence. e. Load overcurrent. is Overspeed. g. Ground fault. h. Dc Link overvoltage.�T --4ni •' H. Provide communications interface fo re to monitoring and control of VFD usiO65her� v communications. -s-53 _ 2.12 DRIVE DIAGNOSTICS j9 r A. Provide comprehensive di nostics for maintena a and troubleshooting including: 1. Self -test of micropro ssor drive control system. 2. LED indicators for tus indication on control bo s. 3. Convenient main nance test points. 2.13 COOLING A. Provide inte al filtered ambient air cooling by natural conv 'on or forced air cooling system as required t maintain drive equipment at its full current rating. 2.14 IDENTIF ATION AND TAGGING A. ecurely attach nameplates with self -tapping stainless steel screws. dhesive nameplates not B. Lettering shall be black on white background. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean interior and exterior of equipment prior to placing into service. Debris shall be re oved and appropriately discarded. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 2.10 IgARMONICS MITIGATION A.\Highe output filters, as required, such that motor insulation will not be damaged. B.onal equipment is necessary to meet IEEE 519 requirements, it shall be through use of one or f following: ut isolation transformer. t line reactor. u armonic trap filter with series reactor. he ulse rectifier. us f r.link re ctor. C.anufactu r shall select and approve equipmt provided. 2.11 DRIVE CONTROL A. VFD shall use control s tegy that i minimizing motor heating. B. Drive regulator and control: igitaI 1, Speed regulation. 2: Current regulation. 3. Load angle regulation. 4. Drive protection. 5. Drive diagnostics. 6. System sequencing C. VFD regulator and c trol functions D. Drive shall have inimum of 3 prog 10 Hz. efficiency, performance, and power factor while design with following functions: E. Provide 44e with local and remote controls: 1. L to 2 -position maintained switch on fronto nclosure for selection of "Local" or "Remote" ntrol. 2. ndividual momentary buttons for "Local," "Start," a "Stop." Speed reference potentiometer. Operation: 1. Switch in "Local" position: Drive shall operate at speed set by tentiometer when local "Start" button is pushed. "Stop" button shall stop equipment without dela . 2. Switch in "Remote" position: Drive shall be remotely controlled. Loca tentiometer, "Start" button, and "Stop" button shall have no effect on operation. a. Speed control shall regulate motor speed corresponding to remote speed signal. b. When incoming signal is varying, rate of change of motor speed shall be limited by pre- selected acceleration/ deceleration rate. c. Drive shall be programmable to either run at constant speed as determined by minimum speed setting, last signal, preset speed, or to shut down, upon loss of speed signal. Remote speed signal falling below lower limit of range shall also be considered as loss of speed signal. Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. d. If remote speed signal is above range upper limit, drive shall run at speed corresponding to upper limit. e. Alarms and indication: 1) Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. 2) Drive failure alarm. 3) Drive fault alarm. 4) Drive in remote and local control indication. o_ —� ca N —t -v Grr—n M stored on nonvolatile memory. o= _ 0 prohibited frequency ranges with adfastablespan of 0 to 0 E. Provide 44e with local and remote controls: 1. L to 2 -position maintained switch on fronto nclosure for selection of "Local" or "Remote" ntrol. 2. ndividual momentary buttons for "Local," "Start," a "Stop." Speed reference potentiometer. Operation: 1. Switch in "Local" position: Drive shall operate at speed set by tentiometer when local "Start" button is pushed. "Stop" button shall stop equipment without dela . 2. Switch in "Remote" position: Drive shall be remotely controlled. Loca tentiometer, "Start" button, and "Stop" button shall have no effect on operation. a. Speed control shall regulate motor speed corresponding to remote speed signal. b. When incoming signal is varying, rate of change of motor speed shall be limited by pre- selected acceleration/ deceleration rate. c. Drive shall be programmable to either run at constant speed as determined by minimum speed setting, last signal, preset speed, or to shut down, upon loss of speed signal. Remote speed signal falling below lower limit of range shall also be considered as loss of speed signal. Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. d. If remote speed signal is above range upper limit, drive shall run at speed corresponding to upper limit. e. Alarms and indication: 1) Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. 2) Drive failure alarm. 3) Drive fault alarm. 4) Drive in remote and local control indication. 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 3 F. Design motors furnished to meet NEMA MG1, Part 31 for VFD service. G. Symbols shall conform to ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/CSA Z99. H. Printed circuit boards shall be completely tested and bumed-in, in accordance with UL347A before being assembled into completed VFD. 2.04 INPUT POWER A. System shall be capable of maintaining rated torque and speed with bus voltage deviations of +10% and frequency deviations of t5%. B. Line notching, transients, and harmonics on incoming line shall not affect VFD performance. C. Below 70% bus voltage, motor will be allowed to coast. If bus voltage is restored within 2 seconds, system can be started, if selected. If bus voltage is not restored within 2 seconds, system shall be automatically shut down. Automatic or manual restart shall be selectable from control panel. D. VFD shall have provisions for input line reactor to be incorporated into VFD enclosure. E. Drive efficiency shall be 95% or higher at rated load. 2.05 OUTPUT POWER A. Operating mode: 1. Frequency at 60 Hz and below: Constant volts per Hz mode. 2. Above 60 Hz: Selectively operate in either constant volts per Hz mode or constant voltage extended frequency mode. B. Rated output voltage: Programmable for either 80 to 240 volts or from 320 to 480 volts depending on 3-phase motor nameplate rating. A. VFD shall be capable of minimum of 110% of rated full -load current in continuous operation, in accordance with NEC Table 430.250. 2.06 OPERATING RANGE A. Speed range: 6 to 60 Hz. Both minimum and maximum speeds shall be field -adjustable. B. VFD shall not have electrical resonance within operating speed range. C. VFD shall be able to speed search and immediately pick up spinning motor in either forw4d or reverse direction. u n m 2.07 TORSIONAL REQUIREMENTS1>- 4 ro A. VFD, motor, and equipment load shall not develop adverse speed dependent osc&et�s. m <� 2.08 NOISE X p N 0 A. Drive shall not cause motor audible noise to increase more than 3 dB at 3' (1 m) ali&e rate¢Amoise level for operation on full voltage starter. 2.09 MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT POWER FACTOR A. PF 0.90 lagging, or higher, at any speed or load without use of power factor correction capacitors. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 2.10 HARMONICS MITIGATION A. Provide output filters, as required, such that motor insulation will not be damaged. B. If additional equipment is necessary to meet IEEE 519 requirements, it'shall be through use of one or more of following: 1. Input isolation transformer. 2. Input line reactor. 3. Input harmonic trap filter with series reactor. 4. Higher pulse rectifier. 5. Mirus filter. 6. Dc link reactor. C. Drive manufacturer shall select and approve equipment provided. 2.11 DRIVE CONTROL A. VFD shall use control strategy that maximizes efficiency, performance, and power factor while minimizing motor heating. B. Drive regulator and control: Digital microprocessor design with following functions: 1. Speed regulation. 2. Current regulation. 3. Load angle regulation. 4. Drive protection. 5. Drive diagnostics. 6. System sequencing. C. VFD regulator and control functions shall be stored on nonvolatile memory. D. Drive shall have minimum of 3 programmable prohibited frequency ranges with adjustable span of 0 to 10 Hz. E. Provide drive with local and remote controls: 1. Mount HIM on the front of the control cabinet for local control. 2. Remote operation will be by the PLC via Ethernet. Operation: 1. Switch in "Local" position: Drive shall operate at speed set by HMI 2. Switch in "Remote" position: Drive shall be remotely controlled. Local HMI shall have no effect on operation. a. Speed control shall regulate motor speed corresponding to remote speed signal. b. When incoming signal is varying, rate of change of motor speed shall be limited by pre- selected acceleration/ deceleration rate. c. Drive shall be programmable to either run at constant speed as determined by minimum speed setting, last signal, preset speed, or to shut down, upon loss of speed signal. Remote speed signal falling below lower limit of range shall also be considered as loss of speed signal. Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. .v d. If remote speed signal is above range upper limit, drive shall run at spel!�corresMnding to upper limit. -*En r" —n e. Alarms and indication: >._i b 1) Loss of remote speed signal shall be alarmed. c--� 2) Drive failure alarm. Icy 3 (� 3) Drive fault alarm. - m 4) Drive in remote and local control indication. —� Z 5) Drive running indication. x N Q N !.a 26710 01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 3 F. Design motors furnished to meet NEMA MG1, Part 31 for VFD service. G. Symbols shall conform to ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/CSA Z99. H. Printed circuit boards shall be completely tested and burned -in, in accordance with UL347A before being assembled into completed VFD. 2.04 INPUT A. System shall N capable of maintaining rated torque and speed with bus voltage deviations of +10% and frequency dqviations of t5%. v B. Line notching, tran�jents, and harmonics on incoming line shall not affect VFD C. Below 70% bus volts ,motor will be allowed to coast. If, bus voltage is r ored within 2 seconds, system can be started, selected. If bus voltage is not restored within econds, system shall be automatically shut down. utomatic or manual restart shall be select a from control panel. B. Rated output voltage: Programmable for ejther 80tQ 240 volts or from 320 to 480 volts depending on 3-phase motor nameplate rating. A. VFD shall be capable of minimum of(' 0% of rated full -I d current in continuous operation, in accordance with NEC Table 430.2 2.06 OPERATING RA/NGE A. Speed rangeh minimum and maximum speeds sh be field -adjustable. B. VFD shall noesonance within operating speed range.C. VFD shall bearch and immediately pick up spinning motor i either forward or reverse direc2.07 TORSIONAL RE A VFD, motor, and equipment load shall not develop adverse speed dependent 208 NOISE A. Drive shall not cause motor audible noise to increase more than 3 dB at 3' (1 m) above rated noise level for operation on full voltage starter. 2.09 MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT POWER FACTOR A. PF 0.90 lagging, or higher, at any speed or load without use of power factor correction capacitors. N J D. VFD shall have provisions fo input line reactor to be incorporate nto VFD enclosure. rnj E. Drive efficiency shall be 95% or ' her at rated load. v� { 'o C!n 2.05 OUTPUT POWER �r m c --t A. Operating mode: o 1;3 1. Frequency at 60 Hz and below: Const t volt per Hz mode. 2. Above 60 Hz: Selectively operate in eithe c stant volts per Hz mode or ci3Hstant V�age extended frequency mode. B. Rated output voltage: Programmable for ejther 80tQ 240 volts or from 320 to 480 volts depending on 3-phase motor nameplate rating. A. VFD shall be capable of minimum of(' 0% of rated full -I d current in continuous operation, in accordance with NEC Table 430.2 2.06 OPERATING RA/NGE A. Speed rangeh minimum and maximum speeds sh be field -adjustable. B. VFD shall noesonance within operating speed range.C. VFD shall bearch and immediately pick up spinning motor i either forward or reverse direc2.07 TORSIONAL RE A VFD, motor, and equipment load shall not develop adverse speed dependent 208 NOISE A. Drive shall not cause motor audible noise to increase more than 3 dB at 3' (1 m) above rated noise level for operation on full voltage starter. 2.09 MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT POWER FACTOR A. PF 0.90 lagging, or higher, at any speed or load without use of power factor correction capacitors. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 D. Completed drive shall be tested for at least 3 hours with induction motor connected. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. During delivery and storage, handle equipment to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. B. Store equipment and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTU EF A. Allen Bradle\yV 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRI A. VFD shall convert in ming fixed frequency 3-phase ac power into v cable frequency and voltage for controlling speed of 3- ase ac motor. otor magnetization current suitable B. Motor voltage shall be variN with frequency to maintain de7que for eliminating need for moto erating. C. VFD shall be sinusoidal PWM typ drive with sensor -less tector control capability. Control techniques other than PWM, not ac ptable. D. Components: rl X01 1. Full -wave diode rectifier to convert su ly ac to fi ed do voltage. 2. Dc link capacitors. 3. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) p w section, dual rated for either vaRfale orconst torque applications. 4. VFD shall be microprocessor -based with L nd LCD display to monitor op e co�dition 5. Separate control and power terminal boar yr E. VFD shall be of modular construction for ea of access control and power wiring, and maintenance. F. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure for use in rmal, nonhazardou dustrial environment. G. Enclosure doors shall include electro chanical interlocking syste with safety switch and electrical interlocks tied to main breaker. Whe ver doors are open, safety gro nd switch shall connect plus, minus, and neutral do buses to grou d to ensure stored energy is disch ged. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where manufacturer determin96 an input drive transformer, input filter, or output er is required to meet installation requiremen they shall also be provided. B. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) shall be defined as terminals on input side of circuit brea directly feeding each individual drive. C. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at each PCC shall not exceed 5%, as recommended for General Systems as listed in Table 10.2 of IEEE Standard 519. D. Harmonic current distortion at PCC shall not exceed limits listed in Table 10.3 of IEEE Standard 519. E. Design drive to provide 50,000 hours mean time between failures (MTBF) when specified preventative maintenance is performed. 26710.01 00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low -voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) designed for use on 3-phase induction motor. 19430�Ii!IYa]:LTifa\I[O T1__1116 a1"Wrdt0/-l_� A. Product Data: 1. Completed Data Sheets for each different drive provided. Identify any special accessories required to match with driven load. ,t 2. Complete list an accompanying data for any special equipment required for operation and maintenance of VFD. 3. Receiving, storage, installation, and testing instructions. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Submittal document index and submittal schedule. 2. Plots of typical efficiency vs. speed and torque curves. 3. Harmonic analysis calculations specific to each installation showing total harmonic voltage and current distortion at PCC. Information to demonstrate that harmonic currents generated by drives will not cause power distribution system to experience harmonic distortion exceeding limits recommended by IEEE Standard 519. Describe product features and equipment furnished to meet harmonic distortion requirements of this Specification. 4. Mean Time -to -Failure data. 5. Standard production testing procedures for drives, certified factory test data and results after completion of factory testing. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified outline, general arrangement, assembly, and installation drawings, that includes front view, dimensions, and weight. 2. Elementary diagrams (3 -line diagrams) and schematic control diagrams of complete VFD system showing terminal block terminations, device terminal numbers and internal wiring diagrams. 3. Certified drawings of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for conduit entry/exit locations and indicating space available for cable terminations. 4. Nameplate drawing. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals. Provide, at minimum: 1. Final copies of documents listed above. 2. Operating and maintenance procedures. 3, Spare parts lists with pricing. o 4. Installation field reports and Data Sheets updated to reflect field installation conditions=; 5. Copies of warranty. n �i 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and manufacture according to latest editions of applicable NEMA, UL, NFIPArAEE-,*nd ANS' standards. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall have produced similar electricahe'quipmeat for minimum period of 5 years. '-o C. When requested by Engineer, provide acceptable list of similar equipment installations complying with requirements of this specification. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 D. Completed drive shall be tested for at least 3 hours with induction motor connected. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. During delivery and storage, handle equipment to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. B. Store equipment and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 17_1=.1 &� 9 361 111,10161 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Bradley Powerflex 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency 3-phase ac power into variable frequency and voltage for controlling speed of 3-phase ac motor. B. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for eliminating need for motor derating. C. VFD shall be sinusoidal PWM type drive with sensor -less torque vector control capability. Control techniques other than PWM, not acceptable. D. Components: 1. Full -wave diode rectifier to convert supply ac to fixed do voltage. 2. Dc link capacitors. 3. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) power section, dual rated for either variable or constant torque applications. 4. VFD shall be microprocessor -based with LED and LCD display to monitor operating conditions. 5. Separate control and power terminal boards. E. VFD shall be of modular construction for ease of access to control and power wiring, and maintenance. F. Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure for use in normal, nonhazardous industrial environment. G. Enclosure doors shall include electromechanical interlocking system with safety switch and electrical interlocks tied to main breaker. Whenever doors are open, safety ground switch shall connect plus, minus, and neutral do buses to ground to ensure stored energy is discharged. N O 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS -, _o N A. Where manufacturer determines an input drive transformer, input filter, or out* r i aequirM meet installation requirements, they shall also be provided. B. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) shall be defined as terminals on input side oiC uit 6�ake4MctIy feeding each individual drive. _ �� tV C. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at each PCC shall not exceed 5%, as recommended fK)General Systems as listed in Table 10.2 of IEEE Standard 519. o D. Harmonic current distortion at PCC shall not exceed limits listed in Table 10.3 of IEEE Standard 519. E. Design drive to provide 50,000 hours mean time between failures (MTBF) when specified preventative maintenance is performed. 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 S\TIONAL LUDES Avoltage variable frequency drive (VFD) designed for use on 3-phase induction motor. 1.02 INAL SUBMITTALS Aata:eted Data Sheets for each different drive provided. Identify any special accessories to match with driven load. plet list an accompanying data for any special equipment required for operation and tena a of VFD. iving, s rage, installation, and testing instructions. B. Quality assurance- 1. Submittal docum t index and submittal schedule. 2. Plots of typical effic ncy vs. speed and torque curves. 3. Harmonic analysis _Sri ulat ions specific to each instal ion showing total harmonic voltage and current distortion at P& Information to demonstr a that harmonic currents generated by drives will not cause power dist ' ut recommended by IEEE SWRI meet harmonic distortion req 4. Mean Time -to -Failure data. 5. Standard production testing I completion of factory testing. rt mix' • Til i [i] � bY�ll di I I tr y_1 �� A. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified outline, g view, dimensions, 2. Elementary diagra showing terVrawir 3. Certified dr entry/exit to 4. Nameolat system to exper' nce harmonic distortion txceedirtgyimits 1519. Descr' product features and equip��t fur�nshed ta'� ments of t ' Specification. 1 a r dur for drives, certified factory test dataa�Ld res6 & aftr- 3a N :ment, ass bly, and installation drawings, that includes front Ks (3 -line diagrams) and schlamatic control diagrams of complete VFD system clock terminations, device to al numbers and internal wiring diagrams. of cable termination compartm@qts showing preferred locations for conduit and indicating space available f cable terminations. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Oper ion and maintenance manuals. Provide, at minimum: 1. inal copies of documents listed above. Operating and maintenance procedures. Spare parts lists with pricing. 4. Installation field reports and Data Sheets updated to reflect field insta tion conditions 5. Copies of warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and manufacture according to latest editions of applicable NEMA, UL, NFPA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall have produced similar electrical equipment for minimum period of 5 years. C. When requested by Engineer, provide acceptable list of similar equipment installations complying with requirements of this specification. ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 05 33 ms1869 3.07 PENETRATIONS A. Provide required penetrations in floors, walls, or roofs. Penetrations shall be kept to minimum, as small as possible, and installed in neat manner. Surrounding surfaces damaged during installation of penetrations shall be included as part of this work. B. Seal penetrations in walls, floors, ceilings, and enclosures. Provide f e stops for electrical raceway penetrations. Maintain original fire rating that existed prior to comm cement of work. Do not install fire seal for wire openings until interconnecting wiring of equipment proven to operate properly. C. Sle ves: 1. ovide for passage of conduits through walls, floors, or c struction; set sleeves through concrete before platen 2. Ma rials Rigid conduit or pipe securely fastened in posit 3. Cut s eve flush with floor where conduit enters equipme (75 mm) above floor. 4. Sleeves through exterior building walls: Install conduit in exterior anular space around conduit with plastic backer compressio as recommended by backing manufacturer acrylic polym sealant. 5. Sleeves throug ns c waterproof construction shall be fla D. Penetrations required a sealed. Openings shall E. Patch and finish openings and appearance. walls, floors, or ceilings are core -drilled, do not iackharr in existing walls and F. Cut or punch penetrations in wall paIs. External weather tight seal. G. Limit penetrations in roofs to applications why equipment. When required, flash and apply se weathertight bond and seal. Materials shall be 101111-�Tiyi I V AVY&\'/_1Z II'7 S6YA*9 A. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's B. Connections shall be made such that they maintain Set sleeves in masonry during otherwise extend sleeve 3" :enter of sleeve. Pack interior and cd sized to fit annular space in Seal interior and exterior of joint with type. shall be provided and grouted or rs to match original material in plrnposition ation shall be flashedIke bto prQwde cn Ir =tC-, for connection to specifit<Rce of. rn after installation of con8tft pride a with roofing system. :ex D O rating ckenclosure and system. C. Locations and quantities shown on Drawings area proximate. Make a ' stments as required to eliminate field interferences or to meet requireJens of NEC. Provide Eng er with information regarding new locations. D. To access interior, locate to permit full removalovers, orsuch that doorscan be oned more than 100°. Mount at height as indicated, or asrequiby NEC, whichever is more restrictive. E. Support wireways and boxes independently of conduits by means of stainless steel bolts, screws, hangers, and other suitable means. END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram 26710.01.00 ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY ms1869 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 5 H. Apply coat of zinc chromate to zinc -coated conduits where protective coating is damaged. Couplings and unions: 1. Threaded conduit couplings shall join metal conduit with conduit ends butted. Where standard threaded couplings cannot physically be used, join metal conduit using conduit unions or split couplings. 2. Use ground -seat type, watertight unions where union may be submerged. 3. Install coupling nut in upper -most union to prevent entrance of water into union when used in vertical or inclined conduit runs. J. Bends: Run of conduit shall not contain more than equivalent of three 900 bends, including offsets at outlets or fittings. Use only manufacturer -approved conduit bending equipment. Do not use deformed or crushed conduits. K. Threads: Cut ends of conduit with saw; do not use wheel cutter. Conduit end shall have same number of threads as present from factory. Apply coat of zinc chromate to steel conduit threads and apply anti -seize compound containing powdered zinc or lubricating graphite to aluminum conduit threads. L. Use expansion joints as required such that no more than 6" (152 mm) allowance for expansion or contraction of conduit occurs. 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT % A. Connect equipment that moves due to vibration, normal operation of mechanism hefel.�l expansion, in relation to supported conduit using flexible conduit. Install junction 67*s avrequireel- Provide green ground wire. _a n c1i B. Flexible metal conduit 1-1/2" (38 mm) and larger shall be installed with external Ip6�-_And "ernall grounding conductor. T %� 3.05 SPECIAL FITTINGS r A. Hazardous areas: 1. Rigid conduit shall be used in areas designated as Class 1 areas classified as hazardous locations in accordance with NEC. 2. Explosion proof flexible couplings where a flexible member is required in a conduit system to accomplish difficult bends or to allow for movement or vibration of connected equipment. B. Fittings installed outdoors or in damp locations shall be weathertight. Outdoor fittings shall be of heavy-duty construction. 3.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports of structural steel or manufactured framing members shall be fabricated from lightweight stainless steel channel approved by manufacturer for intended use, provide required rods, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and accessories. B. Clamps: Stainless steel iron 1 -hole straps, beam clamps, or other device with necessary bolts and expansion shields. C. Adjustable hangers: Use to support horizontal runs only. Use trapeze -type supports for parallel runs of conduit. Install U -bolts at end of each run and at each elbow. Install conduit clamps every third intermediate hanger for each conduit. Hanger rods shall be 3/8" (10 mm) minimum diameter threaded stainless steel rods. D. Conduits supports mounted on concrete surfaces: Fasten with self -drilling tubular expansion shell anchors with externally split expansion shells, single cone expanders, and annular break -off grooved chucking cones. ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 26 05 33 ms1869 C. Areas designated for, but not limited to; access, maintenance, hatchway, tube removal, and expansion shall be kept clear of field -routed raceway. D. Exposed raceway runs shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to dominant surfaces with right- angle turns made with symmetrical bends or fittings. E. Install exposed raceway minimum of 6" (150 mm) from outside surface of insulation and lagging on hot water pipes, steam pipes, and other heat sources. Install minimum of 12" (300 mm) from uninsulated heat sources. Avoid long runs parallel to heat sources. F. Use expansion fittings where necessary. When expansion or deflection will be greater than 6" (152 mm) or greater than fitting is designed to accommodate, provide junction boxes solidly mounted on each side of expansion joint and connect with flexible, liquidtight conduit, or adjust conduit sections to limit expansion to less than 6" (152 mm). G. Support raceway independently from equipment, and temporary or movable structures. H. At minimum, identify raceways at both ends with raceway numbers. Markers shall be adhesive, UV - resistance type with 1" (25 mm) high lettering. 3.02 USES AND LIMITATIONS A. Refer to NEC for guidelines regarding use, and limitation of each type of conduit. Follow NEC except as specified otherwise herein, or as shown on Drawings. B. PVC-RGS: Acceptable for corrosive areas. Install conduit system in accordance with manufacturer's installation manual. Installer shall be certified by manufacturer to install coated conduit. N O C. LFMC: 1/2"(13 mm) minimum size; 5'(1.5 m) maximum length. n cn D. RTRC: Use in such installations as, but not limited to, petrochemical, wastewatbL`Temii-MI, pu�d paper, bridges, tunnels, docks, piers, and cooling tower and vicinity. May be use 8otAlocalmis with approval from Engineer. -Cr- 1 rTl a 3.03 RIGID CONDUIT c? 3 A. Conduits not shown on Drawings shall be sized in accordance with NEC. o B. Conceal conduit in finished areas. C. Drainage: Avoid water pockets in conduit runs; provide suitable fittings at low spots in exposed conduit where pockets cannot be avoided. Weep holes not permitted in conduit. D. Conduit ends: 1. Cap spare conduits with fittings designed for intended use. 2. Conduit terminating in panels or enclosures where exposed to entrance of foreign material shall be plugged with commercial duct -sealing compound around conductors. 3. Cap conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign material. E. Where practicable, provide 3" (75 mm) stubbed up conduit for conduit entering into bottom of freestanding equipment. Coordinate locations with equipment. Terminate with grounding bushings. F. Clean and swab inside of conduit by mechanical means to remove foreign materials and moisture before wires or cables are installed. Cleaning method shall not damage interior surface of conduit. G. Bushings: Provide at termination of conduit not terminated in hubs and couplings. Insulating bushings with 150C rated insulating inserts in metal housings shall be provided on conduit 1-1/4" (31 mm) and larger. Insulating bushings shall be grounding type. Standard bushings shall be galvanized. 26710.01.00 ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY ms1869 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 3 E. Fittings: Cadmium or zinc -plated steel or malleable iron. Compression type with tapered hub and synthetic rubber gasket and ground ferrule for making positive ground contact with steel core, designed to prevent outerjacket from pulling away from steel core. Connectors shall have insulated insert in throat. Suitable for grounding through 1-1/4" (31 mm) trade size, provide ground wire lug for sizes 1-1/2" (38 mm) and larger. 2.07 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, POLYVINLY CHLORIDE (PVC) A. Material: PVC Schedule 40, and Schedule 80. Schedule 40 shall be rated for above -grade installation. B. Fittings, elbows, and accessories: Connect to conduit by solvent -type cement process. Material shall be same as conduit. C. Transition for connection of plastic conduit to rigid metal conduit shall be threadless solvent -type cement connection to PVC, with threaded connection to rigid metal conduit. 2.08 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General use areas, protected or indoor: Galvanized sheet steel with a metal thickness meeting UL 50. Provide removable covers attached with round head silicon bronze machine screws. B. Process or wet locations, indoor or outdoor: Galvanized steel or aluminum with gasketed covers attached with stainless steel hardware using raintight hubs. C. Hazardous areas: UL -approved for area classification. D. Where required for elbows, fittings, and accessories to be fumished by same manufacturer as conduit, boxes shall also be fumished by conduit manufacturer or by supplier approved by manufacturer. 0 2.09 WIREWAY A. Metal gage thickness shall conform to NEC. B. NEMA 3R: Minimum 16 -gage galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, gaskeet�drip-sshieldMr, with stainless steel screws, weatherproof. rn �J C. NEMA 4X: Minimum 14 -gage Type 304 stainless steel with neoprene gasket, h e%c cover, stainless steel external screw clamps, and external mounting tabs. y CA D. NEMA 12: Minimum 16 -gage steel with baked enamel finish with gasketed, hinged cover with stainless steel screws, dust -tight. E. Screws shall be guarded to prevent damage to wire installation. F. Provide fittings, supports, end plates, and accessories as required. PART EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Coordinate timing of installation and locations of raceway with other trades. Do not block access or impede construction. B. Locations of above grade raceway indicated on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate actual locations in field to avoid conflicts with other equipment. ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 26 05 33 ms1869 F. Conduit bodies: Threaded or threadless type, cast metal or malleable iron type with zinc or cadmium coating. Covers shall have solid gaskets and captive screw fasteners. G. Running thread not acceptable. 2.03 RIGID METAL CONDUIT, STEEL, POLYVINYL CHLORIDE COATED (PVC-RGS) A. Requirements of article "Rigid Metal Conduit- Steel (RGS)" shall apply. B. Coating: Apply minimum 40 -mil, gray polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating over exterior and apply urethane coating uniform and consistent to interior of conduit. Internal coating shall be nominal 2 mil thickness. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating, not acceptable. Protect conduit threads by urethane coating. PVC coating shall have been investigated by UL as providing primary corrosion protection for rigid metal conduit. C. Fittings, and conduit bodies: Threaded type, PVC -coated. PVC coating on outside of conduit couplings shall have series of longitudinal ribs, 40 mils in thickness, to protect coating from tool damage during installation. Manufacturer of couplings, fittings, and conduit bodies shall be same as conduit manufacturer. Hazardous location fittings shall be manufactured prior to application of plastic coating, and shall be UL -listed. D. PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to conduit shall afford sufficient flexit@& to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30°F (-10C). O=. ^- rTJ Mn 2.04 RIGID METAL CONDUIT, ALUMINUM (RAC) D --.I -v 31 r A. Material: Aluminum alloy No. 6063-T1 in accordance with NEMA C80.5, and UL6—�4� rn rn a B. Fittings: Threaded type, aluminum alloy containing not more than 0.40% copper. p= = 0 i C. Conduit bodies: Threaded or threadless type, fabricated from aluminum alloy or ckmium-fated malleable iron. Covers shall have solid gaskets and captive screw fasteners. D. Running thread not acceptable. 2.05 FLEXIBLE EXPLOSIONPROOF COUPLINGS A. Material: Brass or stainless steel. B. Construction: Liquidtight rugged design to withstand explosive pressure, mechanical abuse, wire duct liner. C. Fittings: Two threaded male end fittings or one female union and one male threaded end fitting. 2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Material: Mild steel, galvanized B. Construction: One continuous length steel strip of uniform weight and thickness and shaped in interlocking convolutions; fabrication shall result in smooth interior surface. C. External coating: Provide outer jacket of tough extruded polyvinyl. Jacket shall be positively locked to steel core and be sunlight resistant and listed as oil resistant. D. Continuous integral grounding strip: Required in sizes 1-1/4" (31 mm) and smaller. Ground wire shall be required for larger sizes. 26710.01.00 ABOVE -GRADE RACEWAY ms1869 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Above grade conduit, wireway, boxes, and associated accessories for support, securing, and protection of electrical wiring. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. List of proposed materials identifying manufacturer and type to be furnished. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, marked as necessary to indicate specific type, model or catalog number for equipment to be furnished for project. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Component and accessories data sheets. 2. Installation information. C. Such other similar information as Engineer may request. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall be manufacturer of major components within assembly and shall be ISO certified. 2. Manufacturer shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 5 yearV= p N B. Regulatory requirements =c-� rn 1. Equipment shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with applicab4 requirWhents4A-- following: NFPA 70; NEMA C80.1, C80.3, C80.5; UL 1, UL 6, UL 360, UL 65Pt?E 79&1 UL tr11" UL 1242; and NEMA TC2, TC3, TC6 & 8, TC9, and RN1. —{n 2. Standards of foreign organizations shall not be used without written approvat q—m EVeer.m PART PRODUCTS c� � tv 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION cs A. Raceway systems and accessories shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Exposed and concealed conduit. 2. Elbows, fittings, and accessories. 3. Hardware for support, securing, and protection. 4. Wireways. 2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT, STEEL (RGS) A. Material: Mild steel tube with continuous welded seam in accordance with NEMA C80.1, and UL 6. B. Exterior and Interior protective coating: Metallic zinc applied by hot -dip galvanizing or electro - galvanizing. Apply final coat of transparent zinc chromate to exterior. Exterior and interior coatings applied to conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking. C. Thread pitch shall conform to ANSI/ASME 61.20.1. Taper shall be 3/4"/ft (62.5 mm/m). D. Each length of conduit shall have UL listing label. E. Couplings, unions, and fittings: Threaded -type, galvanized steel. SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 05 03 ms1869 F. Bump motor for proper rotation and run motor uncoupled from mechanical load for a minimum of 20 minutes prior to coupling to load. END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram N O -J �m o� v co 26710.01.00 SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS ms1869 SECTION 26 05 03 - Page 5 D. Fit motor terminal box with neoprene gaskets. E. Main terminal boxes shall be capable of rotation in 900 increments to permit connection on any one of four sides. F. Provide motor lead seal and separator gasket between motor frame and terminal box. G. Provide main terminal boxes with threaded conduit entrances. H. Motor leads shall have oil -resistant insulation. I. Terminate main lead electrical connections with tinned lugs. 2.14 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Securely attach embossed or stamped, stainless steel nameplates with stainless steel screws or pins. B. Nameplate shall contain standard information in accordance with NEMA MG -1 40.1 and as follows: 1. Year of manufacture. 2. Type of bearing lubricant and specification number. 3. Arrow indicating direction of rotation for main lead connections. 4. Bearing type and manufacturer's part number. C. If identification number cannot be included on motor nameplate, provide separate stainless steel equipment identification nameplate in accordance with equipment identification as provided by Owner. N D. Motor power and space heater circuits may be derived from different sources. Covers dSnotor terminal boxes containing space heater leads shall be provided with nameplate$ading:Z3SOLAiG MOTOR AND HEATER CIRCUITS BEFORE REMOVING COVER". ��11 2.15 VARIABLE SPEED MACHINES cJ7 A. Motors defined on the Data Sheet for variable speed application shall be inverters rattand operated over the speed range defined. o B. Provided motors with external cooling fans to force cool the machine if the operational sped range defined on Data Sheet reduces integral fan performance below required levels to maintain maximum temperature rise. C. Electrically insulate both drive end and nondrive end bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Motors furnished with space heaters shall have heaters connected to temporary source of power capable of being monitored during storage. C. Maintain temporary power until motors are installed in final position and normal power source is permanently energized. D. Store motors and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. After machine is installed into final location but before startup, maintain motor space heaters electrical supply. SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 26 05 03 ms1869 G. Shaft and bearings for belt -connected motor shall withstand normal belt pull of equipment furnished and momentary and continuous overloads due to acceleration caused by incorrect belt tension. H. Bearings for motors driving vertical pumps, including in-line pumps, shall be designed to carry 200% of maximum thrust, up and down, that pump develops during starting and stopping, and while operating at any capacity on rated performance curve. 1. Minimum momentary up -thrust capacity shall be equal to 30% of down -thrust at rated capacity. 2. Thrust bearings for in-line pump motors shall be the motor non -drive end bearing. I. Motors rated 100 hp and above for nonVFD applications shall have non -drive end bearing insulated to prevent against circulating shaft current. J. Motors shall have metallic bearing isolators on each bearing. K. Furnish vertical motors coupled to vertical pumps with non -reversing ratchets and bolted couplings with case drip shields. 2.10 LUBRICATION SYSTEM A. System shall be capable of operating at least 8,000 hours without requiring addition of grease or complete change of grease. B. Provide system with readily accessible grease inlet and outlet plugs in bearing housings to enable regreasing while motor is in service. 2.11 FANS A. Fan material shall be nonsparking bronze alloy or conductive plastic. AluminumLbronze=opper, or copper alloy not acceptable. � _n 2.12 SPACE HEATERS D� A. Provide low surface -temperature space heaters for motors installed outdoors, ar4ox torWted or larger installed indoor or outdoor. Mount on inside of motor frame or winding i nd%m= U7 _ B. Sheath temperature at 110% of rated voltage, when operating at ambient tempero�re, shl not exceed 200°C or cause motor insulation temperature to exceed 130 °C, whichever is morvestrictive. C. Space heaters shall be rated and designed to operate at voltages as specified on Data Sheets. Space heaters shall be suitable for installation in hazardous areas as defined by NFPA, if motor is specified to be installed in a hazardous area. D. Route space heater power leads to dedicated terminal box for control and space heater leads. 2.13 MOTOR TERMINAL BOXES A. Equip each motor with terminal boxes. B. Size motor lead terminal box to allow for bending radius and stiffness of motor supply cables, and for terminating grounding conductor. 1. Frame size 445T and below: Cast iron terminal box shall beat least twice usable volume specified in NEMA MG -1, and not less than 24 in3 (393.3 cm3). 2. Frame size exceeding 445T: Cast iron, cast steel, or steel plate terminal box sized according to NEMA MG -1, Figure 20-3. C. Motor leads shall have brass or stainless steel ferrules embossed with appropriate lead number, or leads imprint with lead number. Tagging of main leads shall be in accordance with MG -1, Part 2. 26710.01.00 SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS ms1869 SECTION 26 05 03 - Page 3 E. Provide motors with stainless steel replaceable automatic drainage fittings. Locate drain holes at low point of motor in final mounted position. F. Drill and tap for ground lug connection. Locate bolt holes on motor frame, external to, and on same side as terminal box. Provide hole size as follows: 1. Motors up to 50 hp: 1/4-20 unified inch coarse thread (UNC). 2. Motors over 50 hp and up to 200 hp: 3/8-16 UNC. 3. Motors over 200 hp: 1/2-13 UNC. G. For interchangeability, multiple motors provided as part of same system or on same piece of equipment shall have similar motor frame sizes to minimize number of different frame sizes and associated mounting dimensions. H. Mount motor on equipment skid and provide provisions for alignment adjustments and belt tightening. Motor shall be factory mounted and aligned to equipment prior to shipment. 2.07 STATOR AND STATOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulation: Multiple dips and bakes of insulating varnish. B. Windings shall be copper. C. Windings shall be random -wound coils with class of insulation as stated on Data Sheets. 2.08 ROTOR AND SHAFT ASSEMBLIES A. Motor shaft shall be machined, carbon steel capable of transmitting torque produced by motor. B. Rotor cage shall be fabricated aluminum, or integrally die-cast aluminum. C. Rotor shall be epoxy -coated. N O D. Dynamically balance motors by one of following means: p —� 1. Drilling out parent metal in such a manner that structural strength of rotor is tfoQeaaed. -% 2. Use balance washers securely pinned in place. 1"—+ -0 3. Chiseling, sawing, or use of solder or similar deposit materials to achieve ba -6e isdgt r acceptable. "t n r— a M 2.09 BEARINGS A. Anti -friction type bearings shall be grease lubricated and have minimum rated Iif?L10 wi�p median life no less than 50% of L10 life, as defined by ABMA. Reliability of each bearing shall be greater than 90%. B. Ball bearings shall be vacuum -degassed steel, motor quality. C. Construct and provide bearing and bearing housing seals to prevent dirt or moisture from entering motor. D. Provide interior bearing caps or other suitable means to prevent lubricant from entering motor. E. Integrally cast bearing supports as part of motor end bell. Rabbet end bell to stator assembly to ensure proper bearing alignment and air gap spacing. F. Design bearings so damage does not occur by axial rotor movement during motor startup and shutdown. SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 26 05 03 ms1869 C. Marathon. D. Reliance. E. U.S. Motors. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish motors either separately or as integral part of mechanical system. Motor horsepower and torque characteristics shall be coordinated with driven piece of equipment by manufacturer. B. Motor rated power shall exceed driven equipment maximum load by 15% unless otherwise agreed by Owner. Service factor shall not be considered in this calculation. 2.03 ENCLOSURE SYSTEM A. Provide weather enclosure and cooling class type as specified on Data Sheet. Furnish motors with frames 182T and above with lifting eyes arranged so lifting slings do not become entangled in accessories mounted on motor. B. Treat materials potentially exposed to process fluids with rust preventing compounds such as Cosmoline, Rust -Veto, or equal. C. Do not use copper or copper alloy for air coolers. N O D. Bolts and nuts exposed to environment shall be of galvanized steel. —' yn rn +1 2.04 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY A. Motors shall be capable of operating within design characteristics for system sour(tRage as rn specified on Data Sheets. - = v ::K B. Design motors for full -voltage, across -the -line starting unless specified otherwise. ,T O 2.05 CHARACTERISTICS A. Torque characteristics shall conform to standard NEMA design letter designation and shall be appropriate for mechanical load served. Motor speed and rotation shall be that required by the driven equipment. Motors shall have torque characteristics adequate to "break away" driven load and to accelerate load to rated speed in length of time that is at least 2 seconds less than the hot locked rotor thermal damage time of motor. B. Motor locked -rotor current shall not exceed 650% of full load current. C. Efficiency at rated load shall meet or exceed NEMA Premium efficiency levels. 2.06 MOTOR FRAME A. Type: Heavy-duty, using cast iron or welded steel construction. B. Machine sealing parts to high -accuracy to minimize breathing. C. If specified for hazardous areas, motors shall be enclosed and UL -listed for class, division, and group designation in accordance with NEC Article 500. D. Motor frame, end brackets, fan covers, drip shields, and bearing housing shall be corrosion -resistant. Motor supporting feet shall be an integral part of frame. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 27 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Final start-up and checkout shall be completed prior to Owner acceptance of project. B. Electrical installation shall be complete in every detail and capable of normal operation in presence of Owner or Owner's Representative to verify its readiness. 3.11 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide equipment, material, and installation in accordance with seismic requirements as indicated on Data Sheets. t n c'1 r r— m C Z D �� N 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 28 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 DATA SHEETS N O DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA SITE CONDITIONS Seismic Requirements I Site Class D <r -v rn SDs — Design Spectral Ground Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 seconds m 0.109g s N Ip — Component Importance Factor 1.25 Ro — Structure Response Modification Factor ca 2. ap — Component Amplification Factor Refer to Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-10 By Manufacturer Specific local Building Code and specific sections on seismic requirements used in equipment design _ By Manufacturer END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram N O n M I <r -v rn m O� s N Q iV ca 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 27 DATA SHEETS DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA SITE CONDITIONS Seismic Requirements Site Class D Sos — Design Spectral kround Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 seconds 0.109g Ip — Component Importance actor 1.25 Rp — Structure Response Mcation Factor 2. ap — Component Amplification F or Refer to Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-10 By Manufactu r Specific local Building Code and speci sections on seismic_ requirements used in equipment design By Manu LI 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram 26710.01.00 SMALL AND MEDIUM 3-PHASE MOTORS ms1869 SECTION 26 05 03 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low -voltage, 3-phase, fractional and integral horsepower induction electric motors 1/2 to 50 hp. 1.02 WORK BY OTHERS A. Motor foundations and foundation anchor bolts. B. R e C. Final pl D. Power, 1.03 ACTION SI , unloading and storing of motors. and assembly. grounding connections. A. Shop Drawings: 1. Complete and accurate to Sheets. 2. General description and ted ical data cut sheets. 3. Certified outline drawings that lude dimensions, v enclosure construction, and locate of accessories. 4. Recommended long term and short storage re( 5. List of recommended start-up and spar arts for eq 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance man 1. Final reviewed set of drawings listed above. 2. Operating and maintenance procedures. 3. Warranty information. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall manufacture major cor 2. Manufacturer shall have produced similar B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Motors shall be in accordance with appl and UL 1004. 2. Standards of foreign organizations shall 1.06 DELIVERY, AND HANDLING A. During delivery and handle equipment to B. Ship equipment to job Site for PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Baldor. B. Lincoln Motors. ]ht, lifting points, center of gravity, 'ements and procedures. type of motor, including bearings. de, at minimum: N Q C) _:n CA4 D-1 of motor and shall be TSS it for minimum period of vl r rn e requirements of NEMA MG-1jNFPA 7Z,iE®2, CA be used without written approval from Engineer. damage, denting, or scoring. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 25 V. Circuit information for circuits originating from panelboards is indicated on panel schedules. Other circuits are identified on circuit schedule. Do not combine receptacle loads with lighting loads. W. Panelboard circuits are indicated as individual runs. Circuits may be combined into common conduits in accordance with rules of NEC. Perform work associated with combining of circuits at no additional cost to Owner. 3.06 WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS A. Install galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings in: 1. Embedded in concrete walls, ceiling, and floors. 2. Outdoor exposed faces of masonry walls. 3. Locations where weatherproof cover is required by code or this specification. B. Install galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes in: 1. Indoor exposed faces of masonry walls. 2. Interior partition walls. 3. Joist supported ceilings. C. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic conduit systems. D. Telephone and communication conduit systems shall have separate junction boxes and pull fittings. E. Install fire system wiring in dedicated conduit system. F. Finish openings so standard sized cover plates can be used. Oversized plates not allowed. G. Mount wall switches 3'-6" (1,066 mm) above finished floor or grade unless specified otherwise. After circuits are energized, test wall switches for proper operation. H. Outlets: 1. Standard mounting height: 18" (450 mm) above finished floor, unless specified otherwise. 2. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and other rooms where equipment may be hosed down: 4'-0" (1.2 m) above finished floor or grade. 3. Surface -mount welding receptacles 4'-0" (1.2 m) above finished floor or grade. 4. After circuits are energized, test each receptacle for correct polarity. 5. Test GFCI receptacles for proper operation. 6. Mount wall thermostats 6-6" (1.6 m) above finished floor unless noted otherwise. Thermostats mounted shall be suitably insulated from wall temperatures. I. Communication outlets shall be 18" (450 mm) above finished floor unless required oth%Wise. Outlets outdoors, garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipmenL may Dosed down shall be 4'-0" (1.2 m) above floor. o n J. `. Clock outlets shall be located T-0" (2.1 m) above finished floor or grade. D n –C — �o 3.07 GROUNDING AND BONDING <m -v M s A. Electrical system and equipment grounding shall be installed in accordance witC q0 shao conform to following, where applicable: _ 1' Ground conductors shall be bare or green -insulated in accordance with NEC. b 2. Cable shall be soft -drawn copper or copper bar, sized in accordance with drawings and NEC, but . not smaller than No. 12 AWG. 3.. Ground cable splices and joints inaccessible upon completion of construction shall meet requirements of IEEE 837 and shall be exothermic weld or compression system type. 4. Ground cable through exterior building walls not in conduit shall enter within 3' (1 m) below finished grade and shall be provided with water stop. 5. Provide ground loop around building perimeter unless other ground grid configuration is indicated on drawings. Ground cable near base of structure shall be in undisturbed earth and approximately COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 26 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 3' (1 m) from structure. As a minimum, provide ground rods at each corners of building structure bonded to ground loop, ground rod spacing shall not exceed 100' (30 m). 6. Copper ground conductor in addition to conduit connection shall ground each piece of electrical equipment. 7. Copper or high -conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps shall make ground connections to equipment and ground buses. Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be made by clamp -type lugs added under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and added through enclosures other than explosionproof, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers not permitted. 8. Bond grounding system to non-cathodically protected metallic water piping by connection to first flange inside building from main that will form good ground connection. Make connection with copper bar or strap by drilling and tapping flange and providing bolted connection. Do not bond grounding system to cathodically protected pipes. 9. Ground conductors on equipment shall be formed to contour of equipment and finely supported. 10. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be minimum 3/4" (19 mm) diameter by 10' (3.0 m) long, with copper jacket bonded to steel core. 11. Make connections to ground grid where shown on Drawings. 12. Verify connections by performing continuity checks. 3.08 FIREPROOFING AND FIRE RATINGS A. Maintain fire -resistive integrity during construction. B. Penetrations through fire -resistive structures shall be sealed with fire -resistive material compatible with construction penetration. C. Where required by codes, local building officials, or fire marshal, furnish UL fire sealing systems and install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. �a1:i 0117a1 z 141 *11 UK A. Clean equipment interiors and exteriors prior to start-up and testing. B. Unless specified otherwise, tests performed shall be standard tests listed by ANSI/IEEE for intended equipment. C. Equipment shall be checked and placed in service ready for operation. D. Circuits shall be electrically tested after installation. Test power and motor circuits prior to final connection to equipment. Splices shall be complete prior to testing. 1. Provide equipment and labor required for testing. 2. Circuit failing to test satisfactorily shall be replaced or repaired, and retested at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Check power and motor circuits, do power, and control circuits for: a. Correct terminations. Q v' b. Continuity. ,j n c. Unintentional shorts and grounds. n 4. Check power conductors for correct phasing. 1 5. Motor circuits shall be checked for proper rotation and motors "bumped" t"enly coTect n9cc ne rotation. ^� b 6. Control, instrumentation, and thermocouple wire shall be checked for corrermlation4 continuity, freedom from shorts or grounds, and identification. N 7. Current transformer wiring shall be loop checked by injecting current at one end b6loop and checking with clip -on ammeter at each field termination point to assure continuity -And phase identification. 8. Voltage transformer wiring shall be tested by applying voltage at one point and checking with voltmeter phase rotation meter and phase angle meter at each field termination point to assure continuity, identification and phase shift. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ms1869 SECTION 26 05 00 - Page 25 3.07 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Electrical system and equipment grounding shall be installed in accordance with NEC and shall conform to following, where applicable: 1. G and conductors shall be bare or green -insulated in accordance with NEC. 2. Ca le shall be soft -drawn copper or copper bar, sized in accordance with drawings and NEC, but not alter than No. 12 AWG. 3. Grou cable splices and joints inaccessible upon completion of const ction shall meet require ants of IEEE 837 and shall be exothermic weld or compressi n system type. 4. Ground ble through exterior building walls not in conduit shall ent within 3' (1 m) below finished g de and shall be provided with water stop. 5. Provide gro nd loop around building perimeter unless other gro d grid configuration is indicated on drawings. round cable near base of structure shall be in u isturbed earth and approximately 3' (1 m) from s lure. As a minimum, provide ground rods each comers of building structure bonded to grou loop, ground rod spacing shall not exce 100' (30 m). 6. Copper ground ductor in addition to conduit connectio shall ground each piece of electrical equipment. 7. Copper or high -con ctivity copper alloy ground lugs clamps shall make ground connections to equipment and grown uses. Connections to enclo res not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall b made by clamp -type It dded under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled an added through enclos res other than explosionproof, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Grou cable connection to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding re ova' a access overs not permitted. 8. Bond grounding system to non thodically otected metallic water piping by connection to first flange inside building from main t t will fo good ground connection. Make connection with copper bar or strap by drilling and t pin ange and providing bolted connection. Do not bond grounding system to cathodically pro pipes. 9. Ground conductors on equipment sha a formed to contour of equipment and firmly supported. 10. Ground rods not described elsewher s II be minimum 3/4"(19 mm) diameter by 10'(3.0 m) long, with copper jacket bonded to eel re. 11. Make connections to ground grid ere sh n on Drawings. 12. Verify connections by perfonnin ontinuity ecks. o —+ C.) N 3.08 FIREPROOFING AND FIRE RATING A. Maintain fire -resistive integrity d ring construction. rn Ln B. Penetrations through fire -res' tive structures shall be seal with fire -resistive maWal cfnrnpat®a with construction penetratio o C. Where required by code , local building officials, or fire marshal, mish UL fire sealing systems and install in accordance w' manufacturers recommendations. 3.09 STARTUP AND TESTI G A. Clean equipment interiors and exteriors prior to start-up and testing. B. Unless specified otherwise, tests performed shall be standard tests listed by A I/IEEE for intended equipment. C. Equipment shall be checked and placed in service ready for operation. D. Circuits shall be electrically tested after installation. Test power and motor circuits prior to final connection to equipment. Splices shall be complete prior to testing. 1. Provide equipment and labor required for testing. 2. Circuit failing to test satisfactorily shall be replaced or repaired, and retested at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Check power and motor circuits, do power, and control circuits for: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26710.01.00 Page 26 - SECTION 26 05 00 ms1869 101161 a. Correct terminations. b. Continuity. c. Unintentional shorts and grounds. 4. Check power conductors for correct phasing. 5. Motor circuits shall be checked for proper rotation and motors 'bumped" to verify correct machine rotation. K 6. Control, instrumentation, and thermocouple re shall be checked for correct termination, continuity, freedom from shorts or grounds, d identification. 7. Current transformer wiring shall be loop the ked by injecting current at one end of loop and checking with clip -on ammeter at each field ermination point to assure continuity and phase identification. Voltage transformer wiring shall be tested y applying voltage atone point and checking with voltmeter phase rotation meter and phas angle meter at each field termination point to assure ntinuity, identification and phase shift. A. Final start-kand checkout shall be complkted prior to Owner acceptance of project. B. Electrical install on shall be complete in tvery detail and capable of normal operation in presence of Owner or Owner's Fepresentative to verifk its readiness. 3.11 SEISMIC A. Provide equipment, material,'e0d instaltion in accordance with seismic requirements as indicated on Data Sheets. 0 -1 Y rn !� N c1r 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 3 3. Gasket: Styene butadiene rubber. 4. Fitting joints: ype similar to that used for pipe; AWWA C110, C111, C115, or C153. 5. Restrained joinAt pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where'unbalanced forces exist. Use ipe manufacturer's standard restrained joints rated at specified test pressure for buried piping leng s. G. Gaskets: 1/8" thick, 60-7tkDurometer full -face type suitable for passing sludge with a solids content ranging between 2% and o. H. Accessories: 1. Hex head bolts: ASTM F5 2. SAE washers on nuts and b 3. 6" (150 mm) manual tapering Type 304 stainless steel. compatible with installed fiberglass piping. I. Manufacturer: Green Thread NOV er Glass Systems, or equal. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Application: Effluent water piping. Option r replacement sludge piping installation in digester building. I B. Design conditions: 1. Pressure: 150 psi working pressure and 20 psi test 2. Temperature: 200°F maximum. C. Material: Schedule 10S, seamless or straight -sea d A312. D. Fittings: Class WP or CR, Grade 304L, confoyfiing to E. Flanges: ANSI 816.5, Class 150, Ty;anufacture, 3 with Type 3( F. Pipe and fittings: Pickled at point of scrub G. Piping: Shop fabricated by wel ' g to maximum extent F H. Field joints: Flanged, weldRed orjoined with roll grooved Feed Pump I, Grade TP304L, conforming to ASTM M A403 or Victaulic grooved type N bolts and nuts. a O "a -� T wash until disco) n is7RmoveU. ctic I. Field weldir>Wy�ll I�nininfzed. I. Roll grooved couplin �m 1. Manufacturer: /aulic Type 77S, or equal. W 2. Materials: a. Coupling: Galvanized ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. b. Bolts and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193. c. Gaskets: Grade E EPDM flush seal type by Victaulic, or equal. 3. Pressure rating: Suitable for test pressure specified for piping system in Pip g Schedule. 4. Pipe support systems shall be in accordance with coupling manufacturers gui lines. 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE A. Location: Process piping less than 4" (100 mm) in diameter B. Conform to: 1. Sizes less than 4" (100 mm): ASTM D1785. 2. Sizes 4"-15" (100 mm — 375 mm): ASTM D3034, SDR 35. C. Material: PVC. Minimum Cell Classification 12454 as defined in ASTM D1784 except pipe meeting ASTM F789 shall be Cell Class 12164B. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 3 3. Gasket: Styrene butadiene rubber. 4. Fitting joints: Type similar to that used for pipe; AWWA C110, C111, C115, or C153. 5. Restrained joints: At pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where unbalanced forces exist. Use pipe manufacturer's standard restrained joints rated at specified test pressure for buried piping lengths. G. Gaskets: 1/8" thick, 60-70 Durometer full -face type suitable for passing sludge with a solids content ranging between 2% and 6%. H. Accessories: 1. Hex head bolts: ASTM F593, Type 304 stainless steel. 2. SAE washers on nuts and bolts. 3. 6" (150 mm) manual tapering tool compatible with installed fiberglass piping. I. Manufacturer. Green Thread NOV Fiber Glass Systems, or equal. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Application: Effluent water piping. Option for replacement sludge piping for BFP Feed Pump installation in digester building. B. Design conditions: 1. Pressure: 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi test pressure. 2. Temperature: 200°F maximum. C. Material: Schedule 10S, seamless or straight -seam welded, Grade TP304L, conforming to ASTM A312. D. Fittings: Class WP or CR, Grade 304L, conforming to ASTM A403 or Victaulic grooved type. E. Flanges: ANSI B16.5, Class 150, Type 304 with Type 304 bolts and nuts. F. Pipe and fittings: Pickled at point of manufacture; scrub and wash until discoloration is removed. G. Piping: Shop fabricated by welding to maximum extent practical. Field welding shall be minimized. H. Field joints: Flanged, welded, or joined with roll grooved couplings conforming to AWWA C606. I. Roll grooved couplings: 1. Manufacturer: Victaulic Type 77S, or equal. 2. Materials: a. Coupling: Galvanized ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. b. Bolts and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193. c. Gaskets: Grade E EPDM flush seal type by Victaulic, or equal. 3. Pressure rating: Suitable for test pressure specified for piping system in Piping Schedule. 4. Pipe support systems shall be in accordance with coupling manufacturers guideline+ 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES rn M A. Location: Process piping less than 4" (100 mm) in diameter <-)-G — --i C") �n B. Conform to: -<r-a M f. Sizes less than 4" (100 mm): ASTM D1785. = Q 2. Sizes 4"-15" (100 mm - 375 mm): ASTM D3034, SDR 35.E N D C. Material: PVC. Minimum Cell Classification 12454 as defined in ASTM D1784 except p@@ meeting ASTM F789 shall be Cell Class 12164B. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 4 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 D. Minimum wall thickness and shape shall produce following minimum pipe stiffness when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 with maximum deflection of 5%. 1. ASTM D1785: 46 psi (317 kPa). 2. ASTM D3034, SDR 35: 46 psi (317 kPa). E. Joints: 1. Flexible, elastomeric type; ASTM D3212. 2. Gasket materials: ASTM F477. F. Fittings: Meet requirements of applicable pipe and joint specifications. G. Pipe design and installation shall result in installed pipe having deflection of less than 5%. 2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Location: Force main less than 4" (100 mm) in diameter. B. Material and class: ASTM D2241,160 psi (1,100 kPa), SDR 26. C. Joints: Integral bell with elastomeric gaskets. D. Fittings: Cast or ductile iron, furnished by pipe manufacturer and rated for 200 psi (1,380 kPa). PVC fittings meeting requirements of AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 may be used. E. Restrained joints: 1. Fittings: Series 2500 bell restraints, EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal. 2. Straight PVC pipe: Series 1600 restraint harness, EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal. F. PVC pipe materials may not be used in areas where there is likelihood pipe will be exposed to significant concentrations of pollutants comprised of low -molecular weight petroleum products or organic solvents or their vapors. G. Wire for location of plastic piping: No. 12 (4 mm2) solid copper, THHN insulation in yellow or orange color. 2.05 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE SYSTEM PIPING A. Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipe (CPVC): 1. Service: Exposed sodium hypochlorite carrier pipe. 2. Material: CPVC, ASTM F441, Schedule 80, socket -type. 3. Joints: Solvent -welded with solvent cement suitable for continuous exposure to sodium hypochlorite. 4. Fittings: CPVC, ASTM F439, Schedule 80, socket -type. Maximum bend angle of fittings shall be 45°. 5. Flanges: Socket -type, flat -faced PVC, conforming to ASTM D1784, Schedule 80 for connecting to equipment. N O B. Braid reinforced polyvinyl chloride (PVC) hose: v —' 1. Service: Sodium hypochlorite carrier hose within containment pipe and at §ERon Rnts w'fir shown on Drawings. M 2. Type: Multi -ply, braid -reinforced, clear hose suitable for continuous sodium octMrite sfrfte and pressures of 150 psi. -<r- 3. Material: Flexible PVC, compatible with sodium hypochlorite. _M -0 1� 4. Couplings: Provide hose clamps or other connection devices suitable for s�r'4e and pre specified. Coupling materials shall be suitable for continuous sodium hypo bloriteWrvice. Couplings in buried hose shall be located only in sodium hypochlorite man oles. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 4 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 E. Minimum wall thickness and shape shall produce following minimum pipe stiffness when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 with maximum deflection of 5%. ASTM D1785: 46 psi (317 kPa). 2. ASTM D3034, SDR 35: 46 psi (317 kPa). T 1. Fle ble, elastomeric type; ASTM D3212. 2. GaskW materials: ASTM F477. F. Fittings: Meregwrements of applicable pipe and joint specifications. G. Pipe design and stallation shall result in installed pipe having deflection of less thap 5%. 2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE\(PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Location: Force main Is than 4" (100 mm) in diameter. ss: B. Material and claASTM 2241, 160 psi (1,100 kPa), SDR C. Joints: Integral bell with Blast eric gaskets. D. Fittings: Cast or ductile iron, furn hed by pipe fittings meeting requirements of A A C900 i urer and rated for 200 psi (1,380 kPa). PVC C905 may be used. E. Restrained joints: 1. Fittings: Series 2500 bell restraint , BAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal. 2. Straight PVC pipe: Series 160 est int harness, EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal. F. PVC pipe materials may not b used in area wh significant concentrations o ollutants Compri d organic solvents/the,,rpors. G. Wire for locationiping: No. 12 (4 mm2) chlor. 2.O9 SODIUM A. SYSTEM PIPING erethere is likelihood pipe will be expo§6W to of low -molecular weight petroleum profcts or O N .mow so copper, THHN insulation lollo . r orapp --a n ut � :< = R1 v MChl nated polyvinyl chloride pipe (CPVC): y Service: Exposed sodium hypochlorite carrier pipe. 2. Material: CPVC, ASTM F441, Schedule 80, socket -type. 3. Joints: Solvent -welded with solvent cement suitable for continuous xposure to sodium C- hypochlorite. 4: Fittings: CPVC, ASTM F439, Schedule 80, socket -type. Maximum be angle of fittings shall be 45`. 5. Flanges: Socket -type, flat -faced PVC, conforming to ASTM D1784, Schedu 0 for connecting to equipment. B. Braid reinforced polyvinyl chloride (PVC) hose: 1. Service: Sodium hypochlorite carrier hose within containment pipe and at injection points where shown on Drawings. 2. Type: Multi -ply, braid -reinforced, clear hose suitable for continuous sodium hypochlorite service and pressures of 150 psi. 3. Material: Flexible PVC, compatible with sodium hypochlorite. 4. Couplings: Provide hose clamps or other connection devices suitable for service and pressure specified. Coupling materials shall be suitable for continuous sodium hypochlorite service. Couplings in buried hose shall be located only in sodium hypochlorite manholes. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 5 C. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe: 1. Service: Buried sodium hypochlorite containment pipe, exposed sodium hypochlorite containment pipe, and sodium hypochlorite vent pipe. Sodium hypochlorite distribution containment piping om sodium hypochlorite building to point of application. 2! Itiple sodium hypochlorite carrier pipes may be grouped in a single containment pipe where sho non drawings. 3. Mate I: PVC, ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, socket -type. 4. Joints: olvent-welded with solvent cement suitable for continuous exposure to sodium 5. Fittings: a. PVC, AS D2467, Schedule 40, socket -type. b. Maximum nd angle of elbow fittings: 450 . c. Long radius 00 elbows may be used. 6. Containment pipe hall be sloped toward sodium hypochlorite manholes. There shall be no low points and a maxim m of one high point between manholes to provide for leaks in kpdium hypochlorite carrier h se to drain to sodium hypochlorite manholes. 2.06 VALVES A. Valves shall be type shown on awinc B. Insofar as practicable, use valves o on C. Provide special tools required for repa D. Pressure class, body material, bonnet -I specified. Unless specified elsewhere, than 150 psig. and as specified herein. one manufacturer ig and disasswf b E. Laying dimensions of flanged valves: I al F. Valves shall open by turning oper or in a and type of valve. valves provided. i material: As shown in standards and as be designed for a working pressure of not less with ANSI 816.10. G.. Provide valves with manufa rer's name and pressur rat H. Valve connections: 1. Provide valves able to connect to adjoining piping < valves. 2. Th/eror pipe sizes 2-1/2" (64 mm) and smaller, ui 3. Flaexposed pipe sizes 3" (75 mm) and larger. 4. Meoint for buried pipe 3" (75 mm) and larger. 5. rew to solder adapters for copper tubing. 2.07 GATE VALVES A. Design and manufacture: AVWVA C500. B. Use valves of one manufacturer insofar as practicable. direction. o _ g clearly markedsid®gf bodyn :nom � .� .^)-C pecified for pipe3t�fy. r K& pipe ess therwise speTIQ. s 7J .c; w C. Pressure rating: 200 psi (1,370 kPa) for 12" (300 mm) and smaller; 150 psi (1,030 12" (300 mm). D. Body material: Ductile or cast iron. E. Bonnet: Bolted. F. Trim: Brass or bronze. larger than LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 3.02 INSTALLATION A. In3tall in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Pe rf m manufacturer's recommended start-up and commissioning tests prior to placing into service. i C. Correct eficiencies with VFD and other furnished equipment until system op ates as required for installed uipment, at no cost to Owner. D. Refinish mar d spots to match original finish. N 0 O -+ �1 0 c ->-<r z C r or7l i M 0 FINISH GRADING 26710.01.00 Page 2 -SECTION 31 22 19 ms1869 B. Slope finish grade to provide positive surface drainage away from buildings and other structures. C. Finish grade shall be free of all holes, rills, or gullies caused by erosion or construction operations. D. Finished ground level shall be firm to prevent sinkage pockets when watered. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) r' c Y • i �• N O "A 0 M !^ c m s. �7 Ox 3 p•1 V � 3> O 26710.01.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1869 SECTION 3123 16-16 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil and material testing. B. Excavation, backfilling, and grading for structures. C. Dewatering. D. Protective and support systems and associated work. E. Disposal of excess or unsatisfactory materials. F. Underground obstructions. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Support system (per OSHA): Structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring, which provides support to adjacent structure, underground installation, or sides of an excavation. B. Protective system (per OSHA): Method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from materials that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from collapse of adj qWt structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching systems, and otheCWstems that provide necessary protection. ? � c i "n 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner will retain services of qualified professional soils consultant and testing (pb tor� rn B. Responsibilities of soils consultant and testing laboratory shall include: o'.7; v 1. Sampling, testing, and approval of backfill materials prior to and during placonent. r a 2. Sampling and testing to determine moisture -density and maximum density character ttics of materials in accordance with ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698. 3. Observation of placement, selection of test locations, and testing of material during placement to determine that uniformity of compaction and specked compaction requirements are met. Determine in-place densities in accordance with ASTM D1556, D2167, or D2922, as applicable. Determine moisture contents in accordance with ASTM D2216 or D3017, as applicable. Conduct one test for every 1,000 sq ft (93 m2) of backfill material placed. 4. Inspection and approval of soil at bottom of excavations under foundations, considering settlement and toad -bearing characteristics of soil and design bearing capacity. 5. Providing reports to Owner giving information on materials and testing performed. 6. Making recommendations to Owner where deviations from Specifications occur or conditions are considered undesirable. 7. Binding reports and recommendations in one report at end of Project and giving one copy to Owner. C. Responsibilities of Contractor shall include: 1. Providing samples of backfill materials to testing laboratory. 2. Notifying soil consultant and testing laboratory a minimum of 5 working days before commencing work that requires testing and minimum of 3 working days notice of any work requiring testing thereafter. 3. Providing access in field for compaction testing and inspection and testing of natural bearing soils. 4. Allowing inspection and approval of subgrades and fill layers by soil consultant before further Work in that area is performed. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 3123 16-16 ms1869 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance data: 1. Test reports on samples of all backfill materials. 2. Laboratory compaction test reports establishing moisture -density relationships and maximum densities for all backfill materials. 3. Field in-situ compaction test reports including layouts identifying field test locations and elevations. 4. Test reports and records used to determine adequacy of soils at bottom of excavations including layouts identifying field test locations and elevations. 5. Recommendations for corrections where deviations from Specifications occur or where conditions are considered undesirable. 1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protect underground facilities encountered during excavation. Provide support of facilities as required to facilitate excavation and project construction. Repair, without compensation, existing active facilities damaged during operations. B. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Owner provides directive and notification to resume work. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL BACKFILL A. Use material removed from excavations as backfill material, if suitable, unless shown or specified otherwise. N 0 B. Exclude debris, large stones, rocks, roots, organic material, expansive material aiP�Perdsleterloq materials. my t C. Type: Excavated or imported material conforming to one of following ASTM D241 l ifiddrSoil Classification System) classifications: GW, GP, SW, or SP. _C fr*t a {n �7 = D. Use for all backfill except where specified otherwise. a 2.02 GRANULAR FILL A. Type: Clean, medium or coarse sand conforming to ASTM D2487 (Unified Soil Classification System) classification SW. B. Material: Free of earth, clay or other foreign substances. C. Use: Place granular fill under interior slabs -on -grade where removal of existing slab has left depressions or voids. 2.03 CRUSHED ROCK A. Clean crushed rock. B. Size and grading: 1" (25 mm) maximum, 10 to 35% passing No. 8 (2.38 mm) sieve, not over 15% passing No. 50 (0.30 mm) sieve, and not over 6% passing No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. C. Material: Free of earth, clay, or other foreign material. D. Use: 12" minimum layer below exterior slabs. 26710.01.00 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ms1869 SECTION 3123 16-16 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Prior to construction operations, verify governing dimensions and elevations. Take photographs to record any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other facilities potentially affected by construction operations. Prepare list of such damages, verified by dated and signed photographs by Contractor and Owner. These documents will be record of existing conditions prior to start of construction. B. Survey adjacent properties, structures, and facilities that may be influenced by excavation operations, establishing elevations at fixed points to act as bench marks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. Locate datum level used to establish benchmark elevations sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by movement resulting from construction activities. C. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, or more often as may be necessary due to construction activities, employing a licensed land surveyor or registered professional engineer, licensed in the State of Iowa. Maintain accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Owner if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident. Promptly perform whatever is necessary in order to stabilize existing elements. 3.02 EARTH EXCAVATION N O_ A. Excavate as required for construction work. Extend excavation sufficient distanc8romanl--n footings to allow for placement and removal of forms. Stockpile topsoil on site for-iiae. rn B. Use special care when excavating under and around existing facilities. Support�s j 1g f&ities nd earth under facilities to prevent settlement resulting from construction operations. -r— rn _rn a Z C. Excavation for soil supported foundations: o V 1. Excavate to elevations shown or specified. Soils consultant shall inspect andoprovesoil at foundation levels shown. N 2. Proofroll bottom of excavation with 25 -ton (22.7 metric ton) pneumatic -tired roller. Notify Owner of any soft spots which are detected. 3. If soils consultant determines that bearing capacity of soil is unsuitable at foundation levels shown: a. Notify Owner of subsurface conditions and discontinue Work in area until Owner provides directive and notification to resume Work. 4. Fill with crushed rock, at no expense to Owner, unauthorized excavations carried below bottoms of foundation levels shown. 5. Where concrete is placed directly on natural soil, trim excavations by hand to remove material disturbed by machine excavation; produce neat, plane surface at elevation of bottom of footing. 3.03 BACKFILL A. Backfilling around structures: 1. Backfill only after concrete has attained 85% of specified 28 -day compressive strength. 2. Prevent displacement of construction during backfilling operations; backfill opposite sides of structures simultaneously. B. Backfill to elevations or grades required for drainage. Maintain surface and slopes for drainage during operations. C. Placement: 1. Maintain surfaces free of water, debris, and excessively wet, and other deleterious materials. 2. Place backfill materials in successive horizontal layers not more than 8" (200 mm) in loose depth. 3. Place materials at proper moisture content for obtaining densities as specified. Generally maintain within -1% to +3% of optimum. 4. Material too dry or too wet to compact properly: Moisten or aerate to extent necessary to produce desired results. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 3123 16-16 ms1869 D. Compaction: 1. Compact backfill to at least 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557 or D698. 2. Perform sampling and testing in each layer of backfill placed to confirm adequacy of compaction. Minimum of one sample and test for each 1,000 sq ft (93 m2) of each layer. 3. Do not use pneumatic tired rollers, sheeps-foot type heavy mechanical tamping rollers or heavy vibratory compactors within 6' (1.8 m) of structure, walls, pipes, or other construction which might be damaged by compaction equipment. 4. If tests indicate inadequate compaction, remove, replace and recompact material until compliance with these specifications is achieved. 3.04 DEWATERING A. Furnish, install, and remove dewatering equipment necessary to drain and keep excavations free of water under all circumstances. B. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and into existing or new structures; promptly remove any water accumulated. C. Maintain dewatering operations until Work area is accepted as complete. 3.05 SITE GRADING A. Grade areas disturbed by construction operations. B. Finish grade to smooth, uniformly sloping surfaces to elevations required for drainage. C. Fill depressions and provide for positive drainage away from buildings and structures. D. Finish with 4" (100 mm) layer of topsoil. 0 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL oA —' A. Dispose of excess and unsuitable excavated material off site in disposal area obA'* by.Zontr8ttl7f except excavated topsoil shall be stockpiled at site and reused. r B. Dispose of debris, large stones, rocks, roots, and organic materials off site in dis areiEobtai by Contractor. o — END OF SECTION D — 0 1) A. L. Bickford 2) W. T. Turechek 26710.01.00 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES ms1869 SECTION 32 11 23 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base including subgrade preparation, hauling, spreading, moisture control, compacting, and material tests. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Laboratory test results indicating conformance to "Materials," this Section. B. Moisture -density laboratory tests verifying conformance to ASTM D698. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate shall be gravel, crushed gravel, crushed quartzite, crushed limestone, or crushed slag meeting following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve 1-1/2" 100 1" 90-100 1/2" 60-90 No.4 30-45 No. 16 10-40 No. 200 4-12 B. Percent of loss shall not exceed 45 in accordance with AASHTO T96 and 25 in acdcordanitwith AASHTO T104, 5 -cycle, sodium sulfate solution. Plasticity index shall not exceed 4 in accordance with AASHTO T90. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Prior to placing aggregate base, prepare subgrade 1. Strip topsoil, vegetation and other objectionable material from construction areas. Average depth assumed to be 6" It 50 mm). Stockpile clean topsoil at job site. Dispose of vegetation and other objectionable material at off-site location selected by Contractor. 2. Excavate, remove and satisfactory disposal of excess excavated materials taken from within Project area, construction of subgrades, ditches, and incidental work, and removal and satisfactory disposal of unstable and unsuitable materials and their replacement with satisfactory materials where needed 3. In cuts for drives, roads, and parking areas, scarify top 6" (150 mm) of subgrade, moisture condition as necessary, and compact to minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Proof -roll subgrade by making 3 passes with heavy pneumatic -tired roller to detect localized zones of unstable material. Perform proofrolling only when groundwater is not present and subgrade is not saturated. Roller shall have a gross weight of not less than 25 tons (22.6 metric tons) and shall consist of not less than 4 wheels revolving in one transverse line. Under working conditions, roller shall develop a compression at not less than 650 Ib/in (12 kg/mm) width of tire tread. B. Moisture content shall be sufficient to prevent segregation of aggregate and to obtain satisfactory compaction. Use of a central mixing plant to obtain moisture content will be permissible, but wetting aggregate in cars, bins, stock piles, or trucks will not be permitted. N =l7 N �-< cn = t c-) �n in ,5�:D - a B. Percent of loss shall not exceed 45 in accordance with AASHTO T96 and 25 in acdcordanitwith AASHTO T104, 5 -cycle, sodium sulfate solution. Plasticity index shall not exceed 4 in accordance with AASHTO T90. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Prior to placing aggregate base, prepare subgrade 1. Strip topsoil, vegetation and other objectionable material from construction areas. Average depth assumed to be 6" It 50 mm). Stockpile clean topsoil at job site. Dispose of vegetation and other objectionable material at off-site location selected by Contractor. 2. Excavate, remove and satisfactory disposal of excess excavated materials taken from within Project area, construction of subgrades, ditches, and incidental work, and removal and satisfactory disposal of unstable and unsuitable materials and their replacement with satisfactory materials where needed 3. In cuts for drives, roads, and parking areas, scarify top 6" (150 mm) of subgrade, moisture condition as necessary, and compact to minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Proof -roll subgrade by making 3 passes with heavy pneumatic -tired roller to detect localized zones of unstable material. Perform proofrolling only when groundwater is not present and subgrade is not saturated. Roller shall have a gross weight of not less than 25 tons (22.6 metric tons) and shall consist of not less than 4 wheels revolving in one transverse line. Under working conditions, roller shall develop a compression at not less than 650 Ib/in (12 kg/mm) width of tire tread. B. Moisture content shall be sufficient to prevent segregation of aggregate and to obtain satisfactory compaction. Use of a central mixing plant to obtain moisture content will be permissible, but wetting aggregate in cars, bins, stock piles, or trucks will not be permitted. AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 32 11 23 ms1869 C. Construct base in layers not more than 4" (100 mm) compacted thickness, except that if tests indicate desired results are being obtained, compacted thickness of any layer may be increased to a maximum of 8" (200 mm). D. Immediately after material has been placed with spreader, compact with tamping roller, vibratory roller, pneumatic -tired roller, or with combination of any roller types to a density of not less than 95% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D698. E. Compaction of top layer shall continue until aggregates are completely interlocked and stable and all movement of material stops. Give top layer final rolling with 3 -wheel or tandem roller. F. If any subgrade material is worked into base material during the compacting or finishing operations, remove granular material within affected area and replace with new aggregate. G. In-place field density and moisture tests: Perform tests conforming to ASTM D1556 and ASTM D2216 at frequency of 1 test per lift for each 2,000 sq yd (1672 sq m) or fraction thereof. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) N d J N rvi C-)� L r 7 v 0 26710.01.00 CONCRETE PAVING ms1869 SECTION 32 13 13 - Page 1 IZl[iitei:lzNI \fi 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland cement concrete pavement including reinforcement; mixing, hauling, and placement, finishing, and curing of concrete; integral curb; and joints. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for reinforcing steel. B. Quality control data: Submit prior to commencing concrete placement. 1. Tests, or certificates of compliance with standards specified for: a. Cement: From each shipment. b. Aggregates: For each size aggregate from each source of aggregate, for grading, deleterious substances, and soundness. c. Admixtures, joint sealers, and curing materials. 2. Testing laboratory reports: a. Proposed concrete design mix. b. Laboratory test reports on concrete beams taken in field in accordance with AASHTO T23 and AASHTO T177. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform testing of materials, mix design, and beams. -.A n y B. Refer to Section 01 40 00. --41� I PART 2 PRODUCTS �� rn 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS rT _ A. Cement: 7 F 1. Normal Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. High -early -strength Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type III. May be used instead of normal Portland cement at CONTRACTOR's option. B. Aggregate: 1. Regular aggregate: Strong, durable, well -graded minerals conforming to ASTM C33 requirements for grading, deleterious substances, and soundness. 2. Use aggregates not conforming exactly to above specifications provided: a. Special tests or actual service establish that such aggregates will produce concrete of quality specified. b. An Addendum is received prior to receipt of Bids; no deviations will be permitted after receipt of Bids. 3. Coarse aggregate: 1" to No. 4, AASHTO M80 (No. 57) or ASTM C33 (No. 57). C. Water: Clean, fresh, free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, acid, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. D. Admixtures: Air entraining agent, ASTM C260. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Storage of materials: 1. Cement: Keep clean, dry, and free from weather damage. 2. Aggregates: Stockpile each gradation separately on clean, noncontaminating surface. CONCRETE PAVING 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 32 13 13 ms1869 2.02 CONCRETE DESIGN A. Class of concrete: 1. Class: C. 2. Strength: 4,000 psi. 3. Maximum gallons of water per sack of cement: 5.5. 4. Slump: 1/2" to 2". B. Concrete strength: 1. Strength listed is minimum 28 -day flexural strength. 2. Strength of high -early -strength cement concrete; 7 -day strength equal to 28 -day strength of normal Portland cement concrete. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Bars: ASTM A615 or A617, Grade 40. B. Wire fabric: ASTM A185. C. Remove scale, loose flaky rust, dirt, and other coatings which would impair bond. 2.04 JOINT SEALER A. Use either hot -poured joint sealer in accordance with AASHTO M173 or preformed elastomeric joint seal in accordance with AASHTO M220. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMING ^' 0 A. Side forms shall have a height, without horizontal joint, at least equal to designe nee3 of pavement at its edge, except additional height represented by integral curb may J by I g extra forms upon top of main form. Use flexible or curved forms for curves havir@=-tom a / of A 00' o�ieas. cn B. Attach curb forms rigidly to side forms, using fastenings by manufacturer of formq< rb forrn shM extend the plane of pavement forth without variation of more than 1/8". Set top ctrl i foFA at elevation of top of curb being built, except at curb runouts. y� D C. Forms shall be clean before being set and coated with form oil before concrete is placed adWbinst them. 3.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Install reinforcement prior to vibration. Bars shall be supported by chairs. B. When welded wire fabric is used, first strike off concrete at elevation specified for fabric and then place fabric sheets flat. Deposit concrete and vibrate in such a manner as not to displace or distort fabric. 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Construct transverse contraction joints as detailed on Drawings. Saw joints at a time dependent on characteristics of concrete and rate at which its temperature changes. It shall be after concrete has hardened to extent that objectionable tearing of edges will not occur and before time that random cracking would be likely to occur if joint were not sawn. This may be as soon as 4 hours after placement in hot weather. B. Construct longitudinal joints as detailed on Drawings and substantially true to line. Saw longitudinal joints as soon as possible after concrete has hardened and no later than 48 hours after placement. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE PAVING ms1869 SECTION 32 13 13 - Page 3 C. Construct expansion joints as detailed on Drawings. Take care when depositing concrete to prevent movement of or damage to joint assembly. Set substantial reference stakes or markers showing exact location of joint prior to placing concrete. After finishing equipment has passed over joint, check for movement. If movement is in excess of 0.5', correct installation to its intended position immediately. 3.04 MIXING OF CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Measure and proportion concrete materials accurately. Tolerance for measuring all materials shall be 1%. B. Mix concrete materials by one of following methods: 1. At site of placement in paving mixer. 2. In construction or stationary mixer to be used for Work on Project only. 3. Ready -mixed or truck -mixed from approved plant. 3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Design and Drawings are based on using paving mixer or stationary mixer with placement of concrete in double -lane widths. B. Pavement constructed using ready -mixed concrete shall be placed in single4ane widths only and without extra compensation for additional joints, dowels, tie bars, reinforcement, or extra concrete required. C. Deposit concrete upon supporting surface in a manner which will minimize disturbance of reinforcement and segregation. Deposit concrete to full depth of pavement in single opgtion. J D. Operate vibrating units as recommended by manufacturer. Pan and tube vibrators*alkl operaw at not less than 3,500 vibrations per minute. Internal vibrators shall be operatedakUpt ILS thar1JJ00 vibrations per minute. co -G cI r �n E. End of run: r 3s rn 1. Whenever 30 minutes or more have elapsed since last concrete has beendsja�sited$n suggrgde or base, or if such a delay is anticipated, install approved header. Shape tq�jt:Poss sectio pavement and place so that upper edge will conform to crown of pavement �fiTld inst4on subgrade or base perpendicular to surface and at right angle to center line of pavemE'ht. 2. Vibrate concrete against header and finish with edging tool. 3. Remove header and supports before paving resumes. Vibrate cold joint to integrate fresh concrete with previously placed concrete to maximum extent practicable. 3.06 INTEGRAL CURB CONSTRUCTION A. Construct integral curb preceding initial set in concrete but following finishing of main slab. Proceed as rapidly as finishing operations on slab will permit and complete in same working day as slab is placed. B. Use freshly mixed concrete in plastic, workable condition. Do not use concrete which has dried or partially hardened or requires retempering. C. Extend transverse joints in slabs through curb directly over joint in slab and make same depth. 3.07 FINISHING A. Promptly after concrete has been placed, vibrated, and consolidated, strike off surface with screed to true section, line, and grade. Surface shall have uniformly gritty texture, such as produced by burlap or carpet drag with edges rounded. CONCRETE PAVING 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 32 13 13 ms1869 B. Longitudinal elements of pavement surface shall not deviate from a straight line by more than 1/8" when tested with 10' straightedge. Areas not meeting this requirement may be required to be removed and replaced, or otherwise satisfactorily corrected at CONTRACTOR's expense. 3.08 JOINT SEALER INSTALLATION A. Heat hot -poured joint sealers in thermostatically controlled kettle to temperature required for use but not above that recommended by manufacturer. Slightly overfill transverse joints without soiling adjacent pavement. Longitudinal joints shall be flush or not more than 1/8" below pavement surface. Remove filling material in excess of foregoing requirements. B. Install preformed elastomeric seals as recommended by manufacturer. Seal shall be below level of pavement surface by approximately 1/8" (3 mm) but not more than 1/4" (6 mm). Filler shall be in one piece for full length of transverse joint. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Weather limitations: 1. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent good workmanship. Do not use aggregates containing frozen lumps. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade. 2. Concrete mixing and placing may be started if temperature is at least 34°F and rising. At time of placement, concrete shall have a temperature of at least 40°F. Placement of concrete shall stop when temperature is 38°F and falling. B. Make 1 concrete beam when placing normal portland cement concrete in T23 for each day's placement. Test at 28 days. C. Slump test: Consistency determined in accordance with AASHTO T119. Ord unvibrated concrete shall be 1" to 2" (25 mm to 50 mm) and for vibrated conn mm to 38 mm). Limits may be increased if required to obtain satisfactory wor excess of 3" (75 mm) not permitted. Take as many slump tests as required to D. Maintain air content at 8.0% measured by pressure method, with tolerance of t2%, on grade just prior to consolidation. Target air content for nonslip forth paving shall 3.10 PROTECTION A. Cure by one of following methods: 1. Waterproof paper method. 2. Polyethylene sheeting method. 3. Wetted burlap method. 4. Membrane curing compound. B. Cure for at least 72 hours, prior to removal of curing covering. a vL'iG AASk;l" �0 (umr yto 1/2" ('n W'Sps iq� mn nnru �../ en mg4ured 7.0% 1.5% C. Use membrane curing compound of a type suitable to conditions occurring on site at time concrete is placed and apply by spraying at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. During cold weather conditions, protect concrete less than 36 hours old against freezing when temperature forecast is for 32°F or below. E. Protect pavement from damage due to rain. 26710.01.00 CONCRETE PAVING ms1869 SECTION 32 13 13 - Page 5 F. Normal portland cement Type I pavement shall not be subjected to traffic of any type until concrete has aged 7 days and has a modulus of rupture of 575 Ib or more per square inch. High -early -strength Portland cement Type III pavement may be opened in 48 hours if modulus of rupture is 575 Ib or more per square inch. [:IIIOZG]A :10JI SPI 1) J.M. Brady 2) N L? J co � N r 26710.01.00 SIDEWALKS ms1869 SECTION 32 16 23 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forming. B. Portland cement concrete sidewalk. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland cement concrete sidewalk: See Section 32 13 13. B. Aggregate: 1. Clean crushed rock or gravel. 2. 100% passing 1/2" (13 mm) sieve and not over 4% passing No. 16 sieve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMING A. Lumber of not less than 2" (25 mm) nominal thickness or steel of equal rigidity, held securely in place by stakes or braces with top edges true to line and grade. 3.02 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK A. Concrete 1. Thickness: 6" (150 mm). o 2. Width: As shown on Drawings. 3. Finish: Broom. o cn y 4. Joints: Divide surface with grooves constructed at right angles to center lire ooVW shall ' extend to 1/4 the depth of concrete, shall be not less than 1/8" (3 mm) nor r0hanr 1/4" (�) in width and shall be edged with an edging tool having a 1/4" (6 mm) radiu . slab%hall e longer than 6' (1.8 m) nor less than 4' (1.2 m) on any one side. Joints shall ted to pr"" e optimum visual appearance. 70 5. Edges: Finish with edging tool having 1/4" (6 mm) radius.7c Y B. Subgrade: Tamp or roll until thoroughly compacted. o C. Expansion joints: 1. Material: 3/4" (19 mm) preformed joint filler with top of filler placed 1/4" below surface of concrete. 2. Locations: At intervals not more than 100' in length of sidewalk or as shown on Drawings. Locate to create least visual detraction possible. D. Backfill: After concrete has been cured and forms removed, backfill spaces along edges of sidewalk to required elevation with excavated material. Material shall be compacted until firm and face neatly graded. E. Maintenance of surfaces: 1. Pavement damage due to settlement of backfill: Repair for period of Bond. 2. Depressions more than 6" (150 mm) deep in aggregate surfaced areas: Fill to grade for period of Bond. SIDEWALKS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 32 16 23 ms1869 3.03 PROTECTION A. Curing: See Section 32 13 13. END OF SECTION 1) J.M. Brady 2) rag C-)� �, r rn �rn a oo N F 26710.01.00 SEEDING ms1869 SECTION 32 92 19 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish grading. B. Seeding and fertilizing. C. Erosion control. D. Maintaining seeded areas until acceptance. 1.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Water supply: 1. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for and provide adequate supply of potable water at its expense. 2. Furnish necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for adequate watering of turf areas, as needed. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supply producer's guaranteed statement of analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed seed content inert material, net weight, year of production, and date and locWn of packaging of seed. O C/2 B. Supply manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, types of nutrient wQht ofipaN�ilizer. ci 1 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING �r rrn A. Deliver grass seed in original sealed packages bearing producer's guaranteed oterrl�nt of "'rp�' lysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed seed content, inert ml, year of production, date and location of packaging, and net weight. Packages shall be labeled i onformance to U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act, and seR laws of the State of Iowa. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged will be rejected. B. Fertilizer supplied in closed containers shall be delivered in waterproof bags showing weight, types of nutrients, and manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis. C. Fertilizer supplied in bulk shall be accompanied by bill -of -lading giving weight, types of nutrients, and certificate of manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, for each shipment. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GROWING MEDIA A. Fertilizer: 1. Preplanting fertilizer: Dry commercial ready -mixed material, produced in pelleted or granular form; uniform in composition and free flowing. Analysis shall be 10-10-10. 2. Postplanting fertilizer: Dry commercial ready -mixed composition and free flowing. Analysis shall be 10-10-10. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall be derived from ureaforrnaldehyde. 3. Prilled fertilizer: Blend of coated prills and uncoated prills, analysis 16-7-12 plus iron, as manufactured by Sierra Chemical Company, Newark, California, or equal. B. Limestone: Agricultural grade ground limestone having calcium carbonate equivalent of not less than 80%. Either pelleted or ground to such fineness that 40% will pass 60 -mesh (250 Nm) sieve and 90% will pass 8 -mesh (236 Nm) sieve. SEEDING 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 32 92 19 ms1869 2.02 SEED A. Seed shall be seed of latest season's crop, State Certified by the State of Iowa. B. Seed mixture: North and South Plant Lawns and Grass Areas Proportion by Weight Adelphi Kentucky bluegrass 70% Creeping red fescue 10% Manhattan perennial rye 20% 2.03 MULCH A. Straw mulch: Stalks from harvested oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice, and shall be in air-dry condition and free of noxious weed seeds, mold, and other objectionable material. Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. B. Wood cellulose fiber mulch: Virgin wood cellulose fiber, specially prepared for hydraulic application, and shall contain no germination or growth inhibiting factors. Dye an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of its application. Fiber shall contain not in excess of 10% moisture. Fitfigshall have property of becoming uniformly dispersed and suspended when agitated in wat formin9j homogeneous slurry, and when hydraulically sprayed on soil surface, shall formr-lif grounn cover that readily absorbs water and allows percolation to underlying soil. -";::q -u c11 r 2.04 ACCESSORIES rn r*t a A. Asphalt: Conform to ASTM D977 for "Emulsified Asphalt," Grades SS -1, CSS -1 -13r for o "Liquid Asphalt," Grade RC -70. � N B. Soil stabilizer: Nontoxic synthetic or organic tackifier specially prepared for use as mulch Eck. C. Excelsior blanket: Mat of interlocking curled wood excelsior, with consistent thickness, and fiber evenly distributed. One side of blanket shall be covered with mesh of woven cotton cord, twisted paper cord, or biodegradable extruded plastic mesh, with openings not less than 5/8" x 3/4" (16 mm x 19 mm), and not exceeding 1-1/2" by 3" (38 mm by 75 mm). Minimum weight of blanket shall be 0.95 Ib/sq yd (0.52 kg/m2). American Excelsior Co., or equal. D. Jute matting: Plain, uniform open -weave of new (unused) and unbleached single jute yam. Loosely twisted construction and shall not vary in thickness by more than one-half its normal diameter. E. Paper mat: Knitted construction of polypropylene yarn with uniform openings interwoven with strips of biodegradable paper. F. Fiber mat: Bulky structure of entangled nylon monofilaments, melt -bonded at intersections, forming stable mat of suitable weight and configuration. Minimum weight 7.75 oz/sq yd (260 g/m2). G. Staples: 11 -gage (3 mm) wire, "U" shaped, with minimum crown width of 1" (25 mm) and minimum leg length of 8" (200 mm). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISH GRADING A. Refer to Section 3122 19 for finish grading requirements. 26710.01.00 SEEDING ms1869 SECTION 32 92 19 - Page 3 3.02 FERTILIZING A. Uniformly apply preplanting fertilizer at rate of 10 Ib/1,000 sq ft. B. Incorporate amendments into soil to an average depth of 1" (25 mm) by raking, rototilling, disking, harrowing, or other method. C. Do not apply grass seed and fertilizer at same time, in same machine. 3.03 SEEDING A. Turfed area: Establish turf to limits of graded areas not to be covered by buildings or structures, planting areas, paving, or other surfacing; and on any original turf areas disturbed by new construction. B. Planting time: 1. Sow seed only at times of year when temperature, moisture, and climatic conditions will promote germination and plant growth. 2. No seed shall be sown during high winds, when soil is frozen or snow covered, or when soil is excessively wet or dry, or in any other condition unsatisfactory for planting. 3. Sow seed immediately after preparation of seedbed. At time of seeding, soil shall be friable, and moist but not muddy, with top 2" (50 mm) cleaned of stones or debris over 1" (25 mm) in any dimension. Soil surface shall be smooth and free of irregularities. C. Sowing: 1. Sow seed at application rate as follows with mixture specified: a. Lawn and grass areas: 4 Ib/1,000 ftz (175 Ib/acre). 2. Method of sowing shall be Contractor's option. 3. When broadcast seeder is used, seed shall be uniformly distributed and then covered to an average depth of 1/4" (6 mm) by means of light harrow, cultipacker, hand rake, or other device. 4. When grass seed drill is used, drill shall be operated generally perpendicular to direction of surface drainage whenever practical. Seed shall be drilled uniformly to average depth of 1/4" (6 mm). 5. When drop seeder is used, seed shall be uniformly distributed with no gaps. If seeder is not equipped with means to cover seed, seed shall be covered to average depth of 1/4" (6 mm) by means of light harrow, cultipacker, hand rake, or other device. 6. When hydraulic planter/mulcher is used, it shall have continuous agitation action whi 4keeps seed mixed in uniform distribution in water slurry until pumped from tank. a. Apply slurry within one hour after seed is added to tank. Seed which is adbwed te*maion mixed in slurry for longer than one hour will not be accepted for use. S? mo b. Application of prilled fertilizer with seed in single operation maybe substi for gpplicaj= of preplanting and postplanting fertilizer. �n cr r- ('ii 3.04 MULCHING �� 2 CD A. Apply mulch to seeded areas within 24 hours after seeding. D B. Seeded areas not designated to receive erosion control materials shall be mulched by one of following methods: 1. Apply straw mulch uniformly by hand, blower, or other equipment. Apply straw to be anchored by pinning or crimping at rate of 90 Ib/1,000 sq ft (440 kg/1,000 mz). Apply straw to be anchored with asphalt or soil stabilizer at rate of 70 Ib/1,000 sq ft (340 kg/1,000 m2). 2. Apply wood cellulose fiber mulch by hydraulic planter/mulcher that has continuous agitation action keeping mulch mixed in uniform distribution in water slurry until pumped from tank. Mulch shall be applied at rate of 28 Ib/1,000 sq ft (140 kg/1,000 mz) on level grades and 35 lb/1,000 sq ft (170 kg/1,000 m2) on slopes exceeding 5:1 ratio. Mulch application may be combined with seeding in a single operation with hydraulic equipment. SEEDING 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 32 92 19 ms1869 C. Anchoring: 1. Straw mulch may be anchored by pinning or crimping into soil with a straight serrated disk or other equipment. 2. Straw mulch may be anchored with asphalt at rate of 12 gal/1,000 sq ft (490 1/1,000 mz). Asphalt may be applied as film immediately after mulch is in place, or may be applied simultaneously with straw from blower equipment. 3. Straw mulch may be anchored with soil stabilizer applied as film immediately after mulch is in place, or simultaneously with straw from blower equipment. Apply soil stabilizer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Wood cellulose fiber mulch may be anchored with soil stabilizer included in hydraulic mulch slurry. Apply soil stabilizer in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 EROSION CONTROL A. Immediately after seeding has been performed, apply erosion control matting to areas with slopes greater than 10 %. B. Excelsior blanket: 1. Lay either parallel or perpendicular to slope, with netting on top and fibers in contact with soil. 2. Stapling: a. Strip ends: 1'(300 mm) centers. b. Adjoining strip ends: Butted snugly, common row of staples on V(300 mm) centers. c. Edges: 6'(1,800 mm) centers. d. Adjoining edges: Butted snugly, common row of staples on 6'(1,800 mm) centers. e. Strip centers: 6'(1,800 mm) centers. C. Jute or paper mat: 1. Lay either parallel or perpendicular to slope. o 2. Upslope edge of jute or paper mat shall be buried in 6" (150 mm) deep anchor slot.=, 3. Adjoining strip ends: Up slope end of each strip shall be buried in anchor 6tnStriP�lapp " (300 mm) with up-slope section on top. y p .n 4. Fiber mat: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. n-< 5. Stapling:�n rn a. Strip ends: 6" (150 mm) centers. Grn a b. Strip edges: 3'(900 mm) centers. a c. Strip centers: 3' (900 mm) centers. o c 3.06 CLEANUP A. Clean up daily during progress of Work and at completion. B. Remove from Project site surplus materials and any debris resulting from turfing Work. C. Turfed areas shall be neatly dressed and finished. Walks, paved areas, and adjacent walls and windows shall be flushed clean. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Assume responsibility for proper care of turfed areas from time of completion of turfing operations on any part of project and for duration of turf establishment period. Turf establishment period shall not begin until planting on entire Project is approved by Owner. Turf establishment period shall be for 45 consecutive growing days, or until final acceptance, whichever period is less. A "growing day" shall be defined as any calendar day exclusive of those days from November 15 to March 1, subject to adjustment of those days authorized by Owner, depending on prevailing conditions. B. Costs of reseeding or remulching required because of faulty operations or negligence on part of Contractor shall be borne by Contractor. Any areas reseeded shall have turf establishment period beginning upon reseeding or resodding and of duration as hereinbefore specified. Owner will assume risk for loss or damage due to beneficial occupancy of Project in any part, vandalism, damage by 26710.01.00 SEEDING ms1869 SECTION 32 92 19 - Page 5 animals or fire, or losses due to curtailment of water by local authority, or due to "Acts of God" (floods, winds of 60 mph or more, or heavy hail). C. Watering: Water turfed areas immediately after planting and thereafter as necessary to maintain adequate moisture for promotion of deep root growth. Water shall be applied in such a way that ruts will not be made in soil surface. D. Fertilizing: Within 5 days of inspection and acceptance of turf, uniformly apply postplanting fertilizer at rate of 10 Ib/1,000 sq ft. E. Mowing: Mow turfed area to average height of 2" whenever height of grass reaches 3". F. Protection: Provide temporary protective fences, barriers, and signs where deemed necessary by Owner. G. Reseeding: When directed by Owner, reseed areas on which original seed has failed to grow. Reseeding shall be performed as specified herein for seeding, and in manner that will cause minimum disturbance to existing stand of grass. H. Remulching: When directed by Owner, remulch areas on which original mulch has eroded, washed, or blown off. Remulching shall be performed as specified herein for mulching, and in manner that will cause minimum disturbance to existing stand of grass. 3.08 ACCEPTANCE A. Upon written request by Contractor, or expiration of establishment period, whichever comes first, ,Owner will inspect turf areas. B. At time of inspection, turf shall exhibit healthy, vigorous growth, shall be uniform in color and quality, and shall be reasonably free of weeds, diseases, or other visible imperfections. C. At time of inspection, grassed area shall contain no bare spots greater than 2 sq ft (0.20 m2) in size. D. Any turf areas not accepted by Owner shall be replanted. E. Upon final acceptance of turf area, remove temporary fences, barriers, and signs installed for protection of that area. Contractor will be relieved of further responsibility for care and maintenance of accepted area. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) N O O .J rA nC � _ D ., 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 05 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic control system requirements for furnishing hardware, unconfigured software, configuration and programming, training, testing, startup and commissioning. 1.02 WORK BY OTHERS A. Installation of control system equipment furnished under this Contract by Contractor, under coordination with Integrator. See Section 40 96 15 Control System Operational Description for Integrator contact information. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terms defined to describe use and performance of instruments used process industry and in accordance with ISA SP51.1 as follows: 1. Accuracy: Degree of conformity of indicated value to a recognized accepted standard value, or ideal value. 2. Availability: Ability of device or system to be used or acquired over a period of time. 3. Redundancy: Amount of duplication for purpose of preventing failure of entire system upon failure of single component. 4. Reliability: Probability that a device or system will perform its objective adequately, for period of time specified, under operating conditions specified. 5. Repeatability: Ability to reproduce, among a number of consecutive measurements, output for same operating conditions, approaching from same direction for full range traverses,, o_ B. Network diagram: Diagram detailing major components and communication inteIDonnec*s of—n system. Diagrams shall show interfaces between equipment, communication hi#_AQV dil is including differentiating between fiber optics and copper cables, and listing comnIII, tiogs protfM. III, N C. Following definitions will be used in project correspondence and documentation. ner Ng estarn common library of terminology to be used by all parties. r n Z 1. Initialization — Process by which initial values of mode, setpoint and output of�trotWock set. 2. Running — State in which device, which has been commanded to start, has aXieved Jnmanded state. 3. Stopped — State in which device, which has been commanded to stop, has achieved commanded state. 4. Tripped — Device has been stopped by something other than an operator command either within control system or external to control system. 5. Failed — State in which device, which has been commanded, has not achieved requested state within predefined time period. 6. Electrical Protection — Tripping of device for electrical reasons, changed device state independent of any system output or command, i.e. overcurrent, undervoltage, etc. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Training plan containing course outlines and schedules for training to be provided on-site. B. Factory demonstration test procedure. C. Factory test schedule: Provide agenda for factory testing listing sequence in which system components shall be checked. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance manual, for information only: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 05 00 ms1869 1. Complete instruction manuals and parts lists covering installation, operation, and maintenance of panel -mounted devices. Manuals shall include interface drawings defining terminal numbers and functions for interface with other instruments and equipment. 2. Schematic and wiring diagrams for each panel and enclosure. Show color of wire, termination points, terminal numbers, cable, and wire numbers. 3. Manufacturers data and or specification sheets for control system equipment, showing design parameters, equipment catalog designations, calibration range, features and options provided. All sheets shall be identified with corresponding identification numbers. B. Prior to project closeout: 1. Final operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Provide submittals updated to reflect 'as -built" conditions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor shall be certified under International Standards Organization (ISO9001) Quality Guidelines. 2. System integrator: Company specializing in programming systems specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. Contractor shall demonstrate minimum of 5 years experience for projects of similar size and complexity involving control systems with continuous process operation, PID loop control, data communications, graphic screens and reports in similar applications. B. After functional testing is witnessed by Owner and Owner representative, necessary corrections shall be made to system to satisfaction of Owner before system is shipped. C. Manufacturers qualifications: Contractor shall use manufacturers whose equipment wil2gntinue to be manufactured for a period of at least 3 years or who will maintain a stock of offpatib et"spare Ws for a period of 10 years after startup of control system. Cl) Cn g tt D. Regulatory requirements: Work shall be in accordance with applicable requiremerksref f I�wingr codes and standards. --i c-) 1. Electronic Industry Association (EIA) 232-D — Interface Between Data Termirlg�_quipTnt a Data Communication Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange o: 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) :;E'er a. ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 —Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) TestFror Protection Relay Systems b. ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 —Trial Use Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Trans -receivers 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70 — National Electrical Code b. 85 — Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. AB -1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers b. ICS -1 — General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems c. ICS -2 — Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies d. ICS -4 — Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use e. ICS -6 — Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 5. International Society of Automation (ISA): a. ANSI/ISA-50.00.01 — Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process Instruments b. ANSI/ISA-51.1 — Process Instrumentation Terminology. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental design conditions. 1. Outdoor: a. Temperature: -20 to 120°F. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 05 00 - Page 3 b. Humidity: 10 to 100%. 2. Indoor: a. Temperature: 50 to 110°F. b. Relative humidity: 10% - 90%, noncondensing. 3. Control room: a. Temperature: 50 to 90°F. b. Relative humidity: 30%- 65%. B. Equipment located in BFP room shall be Unclassified. C. Equipment located in Digester Building basement (location of BFP Feed Pumps) shall be rated for Class 1 Division 1. D. Electrical supply characteristics: 1. 120 -volt, single-phase, 60 Hz. E. Instrument air source: None in BFP room. F. Control signals: 1. Analog: a. Voltage: 24 -volt dc. b. Range: 4 to 20 mA. c. Load impedance: 0 — 750 ohms, minimum. 2. Discrete: a. Voltage: 120 -volt ac. b. Contact type: Form C (1 NO, 1 NC), minimum. c. Rating: 5 amperes at 120 -volts ac, minimum. i�rF�ri9a1:7;7_1 1CA A. Provide 1 -year warranty. Warranty shall not begin until final acceptance of system by OWNER. B. Specified availability shall be maintained throughout warranty period. Failure to achi�m specified availability may at OWNER option result in extension of warranty period untiMecifie"erfoq=ce has been met for a continuous period equivalent to warranty period. PART PRODUCTS r 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS rrr, A. System operation shall maintain constant duty cycle regardless of upsets, op —iior activities, or remote access of system from LAN. 13 B. Process variables shall be scanned, limit checked, broadcast and updated on monitor displays each second, synchronously. C. Software maintenance functions shall not affect any drop in system except during download procedures. D. System components shall be of solid-state, standardized, modular, plug-in construction. Modules shall be removable without need for rewiring. E. Equipment shall be provided with operation indicating lights, test panels and other features to assist in testing and diagnostics. On-line self-diagnostic routines shall run automatically and notify operator of any malfunctions and location of malfunction. F. Owner shall receive latest hardware technologies until equipment is purchased. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 40 05 00 ms1869 G. Provide special tools, test equipment, and software required for system installation, operation, and maintenance. Reliability: 1. Control system shall operate in wastewater plant environment with high degree of reliability. 2. Hardware shall consist of latest solid-state technology and packaged to operate in environment required. 3. Control software shall implement simple, predictable, high-level task -specific organizations of modules. 4. Failure of one drop will not affect any other drop in system. 5. On-line diagnostics shall be provided to disconnect drop from process data highway should malfunction occur. 6. Diagnostics shall be provided to quickly define failed part. Graphical representation for card -level diagnostics shall be provided. Maintainability: 1. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in production of same. Where more than one unit of same item is required, items provided shall be identical. 2. Contractor shall define number of different printed circuit cards, power supplies, and connectors required in system. 3. Maintenance procedures shall be simple, straightforward and well documented. 4. Software tools required to maintain, expand, reconfigure, and reload system shall be provided with each workstation. J. Communications: 1. Communication system shall provide redundancy such that single failure does not affeg operation.— a. Process data highway failure shall be reported to system immediately. �,C.12 -� b. System shall be capable of automatic detection and wrapping. rn rn 2. Provide redundant process data highway. Process data highway shall be higg -' paved gtilizingFol bus/star topologies, in accordance with ANSI 802.3. --rcj Ln 3. Highway data communication: -G r" z„ M a. Communication bus: Distributed controllers shall be interconnected with �MQhrolivhputo network. :�ex b. Redundancy: Network shall implement redundant copper media backbony, c. Communication processors: Separate data highway network interface cards at ez drop shall handle inter -drop communication and data transmission. d. Communication rate: Up to 100 MB/sec, sufficient to support at least 200,000 periodic data point values each second. Process variable information shall be available to every drop in system at least every 100 milliseconds. e. Communication media: Data highway backbone shall be copper media. Communication between highway and drops shall be copper media as required to meet system speed requirements. f. Communication protocol: Data highway communication shall use both synchronous and asynchronous modes. g. Reliability: No single drop point of failure shall disable any part of data highway. Self - diagnostics shall cause any drop to disconnect itself from system upon detection of any unrecoverable error. 4. Management information communication: a. Communication Bus: Workstations shall interconnect to process data highway for new IAN. It shall be possible for remote devices to interconnect via bridges, switches, or routers. b. Communication protocol: Network shall be TCP/IP compliant. c. Redundancy: When used in redundant configuration network shall be capable of automatic error detection and wrapping when failure of primary bus or device is detected. 5. Data highway drops: a. Each data highway drop shall have universal access to process point variables in system wide global database. 26710.01.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 05 00 - Page 5 b. Each drop functional processor shall provide intelligence to perform drop's task and interface with global database. c. Each drop shall be reconfigurable and serviceable, including removal from highway, without affecting other drops. d. Drop shall be physically distributed anywhere in plant. e. Drop shall be able to be added in parallel without affecting currently operating drops. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Belt Filter Press Integration 1. General Integration Work: a. Three (3) new Belt Filter Presses shall each provide new back panels sized to replace those in corresponding, existing BFP control panels located in the control room adjacent to the BFP room. Existing back panels being removed and equipment thereon shall be turned over to OWNER. b. New BFP vendor shall provide logic/programming and related information for BFP system operation, for Integrator and Owner use. 1) THIS INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTOR AND/OR INTEGRATOR LATER, AS DESIGN DEVELOPS. c. Internal panel wiring shall be remapped to confirm and identify all instrumentation termination locations. d. Panel wiring no longer in service or made obsolete shall be removed. 2. SCADA Work: a. Modify graphic and database to remove PLC 1/0 points not used with new BFP equipment. b. Modify graphic and database to add PLC 1/0 points used with new BFP equipment, as defined in PLC 1/0 Listing. c. Relink or add BFP control and monitoring points to existing SCADA control screens. Modify or add graphic screens as required, in coordination with OWNER. 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accuracy: System shall report values conforming to standard values indicated by field instruments. N O B. Availability: Overall system availability (operator workstation to field instruments) shalM 99% over 30 -day test period. System is defined as available during periods where redu co"onenFTVut of service and network is still functional. ,-- o C. Reliability: Overall system reliability shall be 99% over 30 -day test period. �n =Grn a D. Repeatability: System shall produce consistently acceptable results over 30-de6W per&d. e E. Screen access and update within network shall be less than 2 seconds. 30 - PART PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRAINING A. Provide training at Owner's site facilities following site acceptance tests. Training shall include aspects of operator's interface, system operation, and maintenance. Purpose of training session will be to answer questions by operations and maintenance personnel, which have arisen out of initial use of system during site acceptance. B. Furnish training programs to train Owner personnel in administration, configuration, operation, and maintenance of control system. Contractor shall provide basic required training and recommend additional training programs for Owner. C. Provide copies of training material for Owner. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 40 05 00 ms1869 D. Provide training to familiarize Owner' personnel with system. Training shall be oriented toward installed equipment and software and satisfy requirements for following. 1. General training: Familiarize project management personnel, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel with control system overview, philosophy, major hardware components, reporting, and data retrieval. 2. Operator training: a. System equipment operation, both individually and collectively as operating system. b. Procedures required to operate and to modify each process from operator's workstation. c. Normal and abnormal startup and shutdown operating conditions. d. Operatodcontrol system interactions in conjunction with use of process information system functions. E. Training shall be taught by person with significant training experience. Instructor and course materials shall be approved in advance of training. F. Tuition costs associated with training shall be included with Bid. For on-site training, food, lodging, and travel expenses for trainer shall be included. G. Courses shall be scheduled such that courses do not overlap to allow same personnel to attend more than one training course. H. Training shall be scheduled by system supplier minimum of 30 days in advance of start of training END OF SECTION 1) Z. M. Carter 2) S. A. Warren C N _. Q _O +J -0 •1 rT1 1 M o� �x = Q 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, a d accessories for wastewater process piping system. B. polyvinyl chloride sewer p e; ductile iron pipe (DIP), stainless steel pipe, fiberglass pipe, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pi , high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, and sodium hypochlorite pipe. C. Chemical injectors. D. Manholes and accessories. E. Connections to existing system, an for pipes of dissimilar materials. F. Concrete encasement. G. Relocation of water mains. H. Repair of damaged water mains and services; sanitary and st sewers; and sanitary service connections. I. Tests. A. Product Data: Include data on manufacture ' catalog ata for pipe, pipe joints, gaskets, frames, lids, and gratings. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Submit certificates from manuf turer evidencing comp nce with standards listed herein for pipe, pipe joints, frames, lids, and ratings. 2. Certification by nationally r ognized, independent organi tion that components,Ypaterials, and treatment chemicals in c tact with potable water conform t ANSI/NSF �(u�ard�8or @7+ applicable. -o =t � -< CA 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE —. r a +� A. Welding materials nd procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applic le S(, abq Regu�s. B. Employ certifi welders in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1. C. Compon ts, materials, and treatment chemicals that come into contact with p table water shall be certifie for conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 or 61, as applicable. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) A. Location: Process piping greater than 4" (100 mm) in diameter and less than 64" (1,600xnm) in diameter. B. Design: AWWA C151. C. Manufacture: AWWA C151. D. Wall thickness: WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 1. Buried: a. 4" through 12": Pressure Class 350. b. 14" through 20": Pressure Class 250. c. 24' through 64': Pressure Class 200. 2. Exposed (flanged): AWWA C115 Class 53. E. Fittings: 1. Buried, mechanical 4"- 48"(100 mm -1,200 mm) or push -on 4"- 64" (100 mm - 1.600 mm) joints: AWWA C110 or C153. 2. Exposed, flanged joints 4"- 64" (100 mm - 1,600 mm): AWWA C110 or C153 with long radius bends on sludge service. F. Joints: 1. Buried: Mechanical (4'-24"(100 mm -600 mm)) or pushon (4" - 64" (100 mm - 1,600 mm)), AWWA C111. 2. Exposed: Flanged (4"-64'(100 mm -1,600 mm)), AWWA C111. 3. Gasket: Styrene butadiene rubber. 4. Fitting joints: Type similar to that used for pipe; AWWA C110, C111. C115, or C153. 5. Restrained joints: Use pipe manufacturers standard restrained joints rated at specified test pressure for buried piping lengths. G. Pipe and fittings exterior coating: Asphaltic coating, AWWA C151. H. Interior coating and lining: 1. Bituminous coating: AWWA C151. 2. Cement lining: AWWA C104; standard thickness with bituminous seal coat. I. Underground ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be wrapped with 8 -mil polyethylene encasement in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5-10 installation method. 2.01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE (FRP) A. Location: 6" (150 mm) or smaller sludge pressure pipe systems. B. Design: ASTM D2996, ASTM 4024, ASTM D5685, ASTM D2925. C. Test Methods: ASTM D2992, ASTM D1599, ASTM D2105, ASTM D2412. D. Material: 1. Pipe shall be manufactured by filament winding process using an amine cured epoxy thermosetting resin to impregnate strands of continuous glass filaments. 2. Pipe shall be heat cured. 3. Pipe shall have resin -rich corrosion barrier reinforced with surfacing veil. a. Corrosion barrier shall have a minimum resin content of 80%. - b. Minimum thickness of corrosion barrier: 30 mil nominal. 4. Pressure rating of 232 psig (1,600 kPa) and continuous operation at temperature up to 200 OF (93°C). o E. Fittings: an m "n 1. Fittings shall be manufactured using the same materials as the pipe. -D 2. Fittings may be manufactured by compression molding, spray-up/contact mol®g,'�or Vent -- winding methods. -'ln 3. Fittings shall be adhesive bonded matched tapered bell and spigot orflanged :Crn M 4. Flanges shall have ANSI B16.5 Class 150 bolt hole patterns. �£ N F. Joints: ' ry 1. Buried: Mechanical (4'-24'(100 mm -600 mm)) or push -on (4'-64"(100 mm- 1,60b mm)), AWWA C111. 2. Exposed: Flanged (4"-64'(100 mm- 1,600mm)), AW WA C111. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories for wastewater process piping system. B. polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe; ductile iron pipe (DIP); stainless steel pipe, fiberglass pipe, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, and sodium hypochlorite pipe. C. Chemical injectors. D. Manholes and accessories. E. Connections to existing system, and between pipes of dissimilar materials. F. Concrete encasement. G. Relocation of water mains. H. Repair of damaged water mains and services; sanitary and storm sewers; and sanitary service connections. I. Tests. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include data on manufacturers catalog data for pipe, pipe joints, gaskets, frames, lids, and gratings. B. Quality assurance data: 1. Submit certificates from manufacturer evidencing compliance with standards listed herein for pipe, pipe joints, frames, lids, and gratings. 2. Certification by nationally recognized, independent organization that components, materials, and treatment chemicals in contact with potable water conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 or 61, as applicable. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding materials and procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable State Labor Regulations. B. Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1. C. Components, materials, and treatment chemicals that come into contact with potable water shall be certified for conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 or 61, as applicable. c PART PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) A Location: Process piping greater than 4 diameter. B. Design: AWWA C151. C. Manufacture: AWWA C151. D. Wall thickness: D ^o' --r -.in (100 mm) in diameter and less than 64" QPOO-mm) inM s 0 M WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 1. Buried: a. 4" through 12": Pressure Class 350. "_through 20": Pressure Class 250. c. 24" thro ugh 64": Pressure Class 200. 2. Ex\on ed): AWWA C115 Class 53. E. Fitting 1. Bunical 4"- 48" (100 mm -1,200 mm) or pL joiC110 or C153. 2. Exed joints 4"- 64" (100 mm - 1,600 mm): beqe service. F. Joints: 1. Buried: Mechan\piping " (100 mm - 600 i AWWA C111. 2. Exposed: Flang(100 mm -1,600 3. Gasket: Styrenerubber. 4. Fitting joints: Tythat used for pipe 5. Restrained jointniu cturer's sp pressure for buring s. G. Pipe and fittings exterior coating: 4" - 64" (100 mm - 1,600 mm) C110 or C153 with long radius push -on (4" - 64" (100 mm -1,600 mm)), AWWA C111. AWWA C110, C111, C115, or C153. dard restrained joints rated at specified test AWWA C151. H. Interior coating and lining: 1. Bituminous coating: AWWA C151. 2. Cement lining: AWWA C104; stand d th\ped minous seal coat. I. Underground ductile iron pipe and fitti gs shith 8 -mil polyethylene encasement in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105 1.5-1hod.2.01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE (F P) A. Location: 6" (150 mm) or small sludge pres. B. Design: ASTM D2996, ASTM 024, ASTM D5685, ASTM D2925. E. Fittings: ,/ 1. Fittings shall be manufactured using the same materials as the pipe. 2. Fittings may be manufactured by compression molding, spray-up/contact molding, or filament winding methods. 3. Fittings shall be adhesive bonded matched tapered bell and spigot or flanged. 4. Flanges shall have ANSI B16.5 Class 150 bolt hole patterns. F. Joints: 1. Buried: Mechanical (4" - 24" (100 mm - 600 mm)) or push -on (4" - 64" (100 mm -1,600 mm)), AWWA C111. 2. Exposed: Flanged (4"-64" (100 mm -1,600 mm)), AW WA C111. N O 99 , ASTM D1599, ASTM D2105, ASTM D2412.c C. Test Methods: A/er o rrQD. Material:1` Pipe shall betured by filament winding process using an amine curdthermosettinimpregnate strands of continuous glass filaments.2. Pipe shall beed.rn3. Pipe shall harich corrosion barrier reinforced with surfacing veil. E�a. Corrosioshall have a minimum resin content of 80%.b. Minimums of corrosion barrier: 30 mil nominal.4. Pressureratpsig (1,600 kPa) and continuous operation at temperature up ttT200 OF (93°C). E. Fittings: ,/ 1. Fittings shall be manufactured using the same materials as the pipe. 2. Fittings may be manufactured by compression molding, spray-up/contact molding, or filament winding methods. 3. Fittings shall be adhesive bonded matched tapered bell and spigot or flanged. 4. Flanges shall have ANSI B16.5 Class 150 bolt hole patterns. F. Joints: 1. Buried: Mechanical (4" - 24" (100 mm - 600 mm)) or push -on (4" - 64" (100 mm -1,600 mm)), AWWA C111. 2. Exposed: Flanged (4"-64" (100 mm -1,600 mm)), AW WA C111. 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 7 DATA SHEETS LOW VOLTAGE VFD Equipment Name: Tag No.: REV. M DESCRIPTION UNITS/ OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Manufacturer N/a ALLEN BRADLEY Catalog/Serial No. We POWERFLEX _ Ge ral: Driv Equipment PUMP Motor WIMA Design _ _ Nominal rating Voltage NEMA V Design B 480 System Ope ting Frequency Hz 60 _ _ Motor NameplaV Voltage V 460 Motor Nameplate orsepower Hp _ _ Cable Information: Power Cable Incoming ocation Top/Bottom 8 OM Power Cable Exit Locatio Top/Bottom OTTOM Maximum Expected Cable L gth _ Site Information: ft 50 Maximum Ambient Temperature °F 120 - - Minimum Ambient Temperature °F 32 Design: - r.o Rectifier Type PWM No of Pulses, Minimum O THD at Point of Common Coupling (PCC) % 5% Available Short Circuit Current at PCC IcA 65 C�) Lit Mean Time Between Failure (MTFB), Minimum Hrs 50,000 t Maximum Input Voltage Variation % +/-10 Maximum Input Frequency Variation % +/-5 Lj - Drive Efficiency, Minimum Displacement Power Factor, minimum u 0.9 Programmable Output Voltage Range V - 320-480 Overvoltage Capability of System Volt e, Min. % 110 Speed Range Hz -Hz 6-60 Minimum Programmable Prohibit req. Ranges "t'3 Prohibited Freq. Range Span Hz - Hz 0 —10 Enclosure: NEMA RatingNEMA t Dimensions z L x W x H By Man cturer Weight lbs By Manu urer Cooling Method Air/Water By Manufacibier Controls: Local /Remote Switch Y/N Y Start and Stop Push Buttons Y/N Y Local Speed Reference Potentiometer/Adjustment Y/N Y Programmable Speed Setting Y/N Y Local LCD or LED Readout Panel Y/N Y Local and Remote Alarm Indication Y/N Y Monitoring of VFD Fault Conditions Y/N Y Communication Interface Ethernet TCP/IP LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 DATA SHEETS Equipment Name: LOW VOLTAGE VFD Tag No.: REV. # DESCRIPTION UNITSI OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Communication Interface - Ethernet TCP/IP Accessories: Input Isolation Transformer Y/N By Manufacturer Input Line Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer Input Harmonic Filter Trap with Series Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer O� x Output Filter Y/N By Manufacturer ,y Mirus Filter Y/N By Manufacturer DC Link Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer Special Accessories Required: Y/N By Manufacturer END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram N O ci-� lD rn -v O� x s N 0 D ,y c.� 26710.01.00 LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ms1869 SECTION 26 29 23 - Page 7 DATA SHEETS LOW VOLTAGE VFD Equipment Name: Tag No.: REV. # DESCRIPTION UNITS/ OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Manufacturer N/a ALLEN BRADLEY Catalog/Serial No. N/a POWERFLEX General: _ Driven Equipment - PUMP Motor NEMA Design NEMA Design B Nominal Operating Voltage V 480 System Operating Frequency Hz 60 Motor Nameplate Voltage V 460 Motor Nameplate Horsepower Hp Cable information: Power Cable Incoming Location Top/Bottom BOTTOM Power Cable Exit Location Top/Bottom BOTTOM Maximum Expected Cable Length it 50 Site Information: Maximum Ambient Temperature °F 120 Minimum Ambient Temperature °F 32 Design: Rectifier Type - PWM No of Pulses, Minimum THD at Point of Common Coupling (PCC) % 5% Available Short Circuit Current at PCC kA 65 Mean Time Between Failure (MTFB), Minimum Hrs 50,000 Maximum Input Voltage Variation % +/-10 Maximum Input Frequency Variation % +/-5 Drive Efficiency, Minimum % 95 Displacement Power Factor, minimum pu 0.9 Programmable Output Voltage Range V -V 320-480 Overvoltage Capability of System Voltage, Min. % 110 Speed Range Hz -Hz 6-60 Minimum Programmable Prohibited Freq. Ranges Qty 3 Prohibited Freq. Range Span - FI Hz 0 -10 Enclosure: NEMA Rating NEMA 1 0 Dimensions L x W x H By Manufacturer —+ Weight lbs By Manufacturer �? rn Cooling Method' - AirMlater By Manufacturer onVols: —n `D ocal /Re(n6te Switch YM Y • -a 'Btart and top Push Buttons Y/N Y - %a Local Spgad d Reference Potentiometer/Adjustment Y/N Y - •• Programirreble Speed Setting YM Y ,p Local LCD or LED Readout Panel Y/N Y Local and Remote Alarm IndicationY/N Y Monitoring of VFD Fault Conditions Y/N Y 26710.01.00 FINISH GRADING ms1869 SECTION 3122 19 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subgrade to receive topsoil. B. Placing topsoil. C. Finish grading. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil supply: 1. Supply topsoil as necessary. 2. Use topsoil stockpiled on Site. Supply topsoil necessary in addition to that stockpiled. B. Imported topsoil: Natural, friable loam typical of productive soils in locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, from well drained site free of flooding, not in frozen or muddy condition, not less than 2% organic matter, and pH value of 5.9 to 7.0. Free from subsoil, slag, clay, stones, lumps, live plants, roots, sticks, foreign matter and any material that may be harmful to plant growth. N 'J C. Existing topsoil: Natural, fertile soil capable of sustaining vigorous plant growl of in fQen o muddy condition. Free from subsoil, slag, clay, stones, lumps, live plants, forei mtteond am 1 material that may be harmful to plant growth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION _ :21- A . A. Preparation shall not start until outside construction Work has been completed. D r B. Protect existing underground improvements from damage. C. Scarify subgrade to a depth of at least 4" (100 mm) by disking, harrowing, or other method. Surface shall be left rough to provide a good bond with topsoil. D. Remove roots, clods, stones, and any other debris larger than 2" (50 mm) in any dimension from surface. 3.02 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Place topsoil on graded areas to be turfed, and as indicated on Drawings B. Spread evenly, shape, and firm topsoil to a minimum depth of 6" (150 mm). Do not spread topsoil when topsoil or subgrade is frozen, or when excessively wet or dry. C. Thoroughly till soil to a minimum depth of 4" (100 mm) by roto -tilling, disking, harrowing, or other method. Soil shall not be tilled when it is frozen, excessively wet or dry, or otherwise untillable. D. Remove from site, rocks, clods, roots, or other foreign materials larger than 1" (25 mm) in any dimension. 3.03 FINISH GRADING A. Grade to uniformly sloping surfaces and to elevations shown on Drawings. LOW -VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 26 29 23 ms1869 DATA SHEETS Equipment Name: LOW VOLTAGE VFD Tag No.: REV. # DESCRIPTION UNITS/ OPTIONS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Accessories: Input Isolation Transformer Y/N By Manufacturer .<r Input Line Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer Input Harmonic Filter Trap with Series Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer Output Filter Y/N By Manufacturer Mirus Filter Y/N By Manufacturer DC Link Reactor Y/N By Manufacturer Special Accessories Required: Y/N By Manufacturer END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. Ingram ;E� OCIO E9•, T C,) -<D-4 (A r .<r = m a 0 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 5 C. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe: 1. Service: Buried sodium hypochlorite containment pipe, exposed sodium hypochlorite containment pipe, and sodium hypochlorite vent pipe. Sodium hypochlorite distribution containment piping from sodium hypochlorite building to point of application. 2. Multiple sodium hypochlorite carrier pipes may be grouped in a single containment pipe inhere shown on drawings. 3. Material: PVC, ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, socket -type. 4. Joints: Solvent -welded with solvent cement suitable for continuous exposure to sodium hypochlorite. 5. Fittings: a. PVC, ASTM D2467, Schedule 40, socket -type. b. Maximum bend angle of elbow fittings: 450 . c. Long radius 900 elbows may be used. 6. Containment pipe shall be sloped toward sodium hypochlorite manholes. There shall be no low points and a maximum of one high point between manholes to provide for leaks in sodium hypochlorite carrier hose to drain to sodium hypochlorite manholes. 2.06 VALVES ' A. Valves shall be type shown on Drawings and as specified herein. B. Insofar as practicable, use valves of only one manufacturer for each type of valve. C. Provide special tools required for repacking and disassembling valves provided. D. Pressure class, body material, bonnet -type, and trim material: As shown in standards and as specified. Unless specified elsewhere, valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig. E. Laying dimensions of flanged valves: In accordance with ANSI B16.10. F. Valves shall open by turning operator in a counterclockwise direction. G. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. H. Valve connections: 1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves. 2. Threaded for pipe sizes 2-1/2" (64 mm) and smaller, unless otherwise specified. 3. Flanged for exposed pipe sizes 3" (75 mm) and larger. 4. Mechanical joint for buried pipe 3" (75 mm) and larger. 5. Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing. 2.07 GATE VALVES A. Design and manufacture: AWWA C500. B. Use valves of one manufacturer insofar as practicable. C: Pressure rating: 200 psi (1,370 kPa) for 12' (300 mm) and smaller; 12' (300 mm). D. Body material: Ductile or cast iron. E. Bonnet: Bolted. F. Trim: Brass or bronze. L% V ;<n N 150 PS4,90 001) for rger than m = D� N v m WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 6 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 G. Use type permitting repacking under pressure when wide open. H. Packing: Stuffing box with nonasbestos packing or double O-ring. I. Stem arrangement: 1. Exposed cast iron valves: Rising stem with handwheel. 2. Buried: Nonrising stem with 2" (50 mm) wrench nut. J. Disc: Solid wedge disc type. K. Direction of opening: Turn left to open. L. Insofar as practicable valves shall have joint end designed for type of pipe installed. M. Interior coating: Epoxy, AWWA C550. N. Quality standard, buried valves: 1. Mechanical joint ends: Mueller Co. A-2360-20, or equal. 2. Flanged and mechanical joint ends: Mueller Co. A-2360-16, or equal. 2.08 RESILIENT -SEATED GATE VALVES A. Design and manufacture: AWWA C509. B. Use: At Contractor's option, use instead of gate valves for effluent water (EW) service. C. Pressure rating: AWWA 200 psi (1,380 kPa). D. Body and gate material: Ductile or cast iron. E. Bonnet: Bolted. F. Stem and trim: Bronze. G. Use type permitting repacking under pressure when wide open. H. Packing: O-ring. 1. Stem arrangement: Nonrising stem with 2" (50 mm) wrench nut for mechanical joint end valves, rising stem for flanged end valves. J. Resilient seat: Applied to gate. K. Direction of opening: Turn left to open. L. Joint: Mechanical joint. c J �+ M. Interior coating: Epoxy;AWWAC550.n m N. Provide handwheel operator on exposed valves; provide valve box for barieKvalves. Ecsalves positioned 7'-0" (2.1 m) or more above floor level with chain wheel with e4eimextb0ding b 3'-0" (1 m) above floor. <rn 'V rn O. Quality standard: Clow "RNV'valve, Mueller "Resilient Seat," American -V-A e a1%bHydr080 CRS" valve, or equal. %' ca WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 G. Use type permi ing repacking under pressure when wide open. H. Packing: Stuffin box with nonasbestos packing or double O-ring. - I. Stem arrangemen 1. Exposed cast i n valves: Rising stem with handwheel. 2. Buried: Nonrisin stem with 2" (50 mm) wrench nut. J. Disc: Solid wedge distype. K. Direction of opening: T n left to open. L. Insofar as practicable M. Interior coating: Epoxy; N. Quality standard, buried valv 1. Mechanical joint ends: h 2. Flanged and mechanical shall have joint end designed for type of pipe installed. C550. 2.08 RESILIENT -SEATED GATE VALVES !r Co. A-2360-20, or equal. ends: Mueller Co. A-2360-16, or equal. A. Design and manufacture: AWWA C 9. B. Use: At Contractor's option, use instea of gate valves for effluent water (EW) service. C. Pressure rating: AWWA 200 psi (1,380 k ). D. Body and gate material: Ductile or cast iron. E. Bonnet: Bolted. F. Stem and trim: Bronze. G: Use type permitting repacking under pr re when H. Packing: O-ring. I. Stem arrangement, onrising stem with 2"(50 mm) stem for flan nd valves. J. Resilient seat: Applied to gate. K. Direction of opening: Turn left to open. L. Joint: Mechanical joint. M. Interior coating: Epoxy; AWWA C550. open. ro o )> I N my C h ut for mechanicaj�A n&lve nsing -<r- r^ A I A F s v _ N. Provide handwheel operator on exposed valves; provide valve box for buried valves. Equip valves positioned T-0" (2.1 m) or more above floor level with chain wheel with chain extending to T-0" (1 m) above floor. O. Quality standard: Clow "R/W" valve, Mueller "Resilient Seat," American Valve and Hydrant "80 CRS" valve, or equal. ms1869 2.09 CHECK VALVES A. Type: Swing typd B. 3" (75 mm) or larg 1. Cast iron bod outside lever 2. Manufacturer for water, wastewater, and sludge service. C. Smaller than 3"(75 1. Bronze body, si working pressu 2. Manufacturer: 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. Type: Manual. 40 23 36 - Page 7 bronze mounted, bronze faced disc, stainless steel hinge pins, and adjustable id weight or spring arranged to assist in closing. pd model: Dresser Industries, Inc., M & H Style 159-02 or 259-02, or equal. access cover with bronze and composition disc seats rated for 200 psi No. 41, Nibco Scott T -413Y, or equal. B. Water or wastewater servic : 1. Nonlubricated 100% pip area rectangular ported design with bolted pressure rating both dire ions. . 2. Plug: Eccentric, resilient- ced plug with entire surface covered. / 3. Seat: 90% nickel chrome ised. 4. Body: Cast iron (semisteel) onfori 5. Bushings: Permanently lubri ated, grit seals. 6. Packing: a. Type permitting repacking 'thi b. Adjustable without disassem l� 7. End connections: 125 Ib flanged. 8. Operator: a. 3" (75 mm) and less: Lever; pr b. 4" (100 mm) and larger: Worm positioned 7'-0" or more abov above floor. c. Provide buried valves with a d. Manufacturer: DeZurik ode valve shall have full ning to ASTM A126 Clas . stainless steel upper d lower bushings sealeadV means of J >utremoving b net. O cj�o of valve or tuator. t r cfi a in id ended stem where shown. _ S g r actuator su table for 125 psi pressure' fgwp aIves o level with chainwheel with chain exteJing to40" (1.0 m) w PEF, and required adapters. C. Sludge service: 1. Nonlubricated 100% ipe area rectangular p\bonnet. ign with bolted bonnets; valve shall have full pressure rating bo directions. . 2. Plug: Eccentric esilient-faced plug with ente covered. 3. Seat: 90% n' el chrome raised. 4. Body: Ca iron (semisteel) conforming to A6 Class B. 5. Linin ody interior shall be lined with glassa struvite deposition. 6. Bushings: Permanently lubricated, stainless r and lower bushings sealed by means of grit seals. 7. Packing: a. Type permitting repacking without removet.b. Adjustable without disassembly of valve or.8. End connections: 125 Ib flanged. 9. Operator: a. 3" (75 mm) and less: Lever; provide extm where hown. b. 4" (100 mm) and larger: Worm gear actuator suitable for 12 si pressure. Equip valves positioned T-0" or more above floor level with chainwheel with hain extending to T-0" (1.0 m) above floor. c. Provide buried valves with valve box, cover, and required adapters. d. Manufacturer: DeZurik Model PEF, or equal. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 7 2.09 CHECK VALVES A. Type: Swing type for water, wastewater, and sludge service. B. 3" (75 mm) or larger: 1. Cast iron body, bronze mounted, bronze faced disc, stainless steel hinge pins, and adjustable outside lever and weight or spring arranged to assist in closing. 2. Manufacturer and model: Dresser Industries, Inc., M & H Style 159-02 or 259-02, or equal. C. Smaller than 3" (75 mm): 1. Bronze body, screwed access cover with bronze and composition disc seats rated for 200 psi working pressure. 2. Manufacturer: Crane No. 41, Nibco Scott T -413Y, or equal. 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. Type: Manual. B. Water or wastewater service: 1. Nonlubricated 100% pipe area rectangular ported design with bolted bonnets; valve shall have full pressure rating both directions. . 2. Plug: Eccentric, resilient -faced plug with entire surface covered. 3. Seat: 90% nickel chrome raised. 4. Body: Cast iron (semisteel) conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. 5. Bushings: Permanently lubricated, stainless steel upper and lower bushings sealed by means of grit seals. 6. Packing: a. Type permitting repacking without removing bonnet. b. Adjustable without disassembly of valve or actuator. 7. End connections: 125 Ib flanged. 8. Operator: a. 3" (75 mm) and less: Lever, provide extended stem where shown. b. 4" (100 mm) and larger. Worm gear actuator suitable for 125 psi pressure. Equip valves positioned T-0" or more above floor level with chainwheel with chain extending to T-0" (1.0 m) above floor. c. Provide buried valves with valve box, cover, and required adapters. d. Manufacturer: DeZurik Model PEF, or equal. C. Sludge service: 1. Nonlubricated 100% pipe area rectangular ported design with bolted bonnets; valve shall have full pressure rating both directions. . 2. Plug: Eccentric, resilient -faced plug with entire surface covered. 3. Seat: 90% nickel chrome raised. 4. Body: Cast iron (semisteel) conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. 5. Lining: Body interior shall be lined with glass to minimize struvite deposition. 6. Bushings: Permanently lubricated, stainless steel upper and lower bushings sealed by means of grit seals. 7. Packing: a. Type permitting repacking without removing bonnet. cn b. Adjustable without disassembly of valve or actuator. j _4 a 8. End connections: 125 Ib flanged. -9. Operator: —i C-) �n a. 3" (75 mm) and less: Lever; provide extended stem where shown. v b. 4" (100 mm) and larger: Worm gear actuator suitable for 125 psi pressu;S Tquipnalve positioned 7-0" or more above floor level with chainwheel with chain exteGtd>rtg t03'-0" O above floor. _ c. Provide buried valves with valve box, cover, and required adapters. d. Manufacturer: DeZurik Model PEF, or equal. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 8 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 D. Refer to Drawings for existing plug valves requiring new motor actuators as specified in this Section. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. PVC piping: 1. Type: Full port, double -union, socket end connections. 2. Material: PVC. 3. Working pressure: Not less than 150 psi. 4. Manufacturer: Nibco Chemtrol, or equal. B. Service air piping: 1. Type: Conventional -port, threaded end connections. 2. Material: Bronze. 3. Working pressure: Not less than 125 psi. 4. Manufacturer: Nibco 580 Series, or equal. C. Sodium hypochlorite service: 1. Type: Full port, double -union, socket end connections. 2. Material: CPVC. 3. Working pressure: Not less than 150 psi. 4. Valves shall be vented to allow escape of gas which comes out of solution. 5. O -rings: Viton. 2.12 SOLENOID VALVES A. Refer to Section 40 91 00-13. B. Type: 2 -way. C. Enclosure: NEMA4X. D. Coils: Class H high-temperature construction. Suitable for continuous duty. E. Electrical power: 120 -volt grounded, single-phase, 60 Hz, ac. F. Manufacturer: ASCO, or equal. 2.13 PRESSURE SAFETY VALVE A. Service: Maintain constant upstream pressure in effluent water system within close limits. B. Type: Pressure sustaining valve. C. Size and connection: 6" (150 mm), flanged. D. Body and cover: Ductile iron. E. Diaphragm: Nylon reinforced Buna-N rubber. 0 F. Seat, disc guide and cover bearing: Bronze or stainless steel. C �l n� rn G. Disc: Buna-N rubber. H. Stem, nut and spring: Stainless steel. Cry m I. Maximum working pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa g). x tV Q J. Range of adjustment: 0 to 25 psig (0 to 35 kPa g). rV W WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 8 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 D. Refer to Dra Ings for existing plug valves requiring new motor actuators as specified in this Section. 2.11 BALL VALVES / A. PVC piping: 1. Type: Full p , double -union, socket end connections. 2. Material: PV 3. Working press e: Not less than 150 psi. 4. Manufacturer: ' co Chemtrol, or equal. B. Service air piping: 1. Type: Conventional ort, threaded end connections. 2. Material: Bronze. 3. Working pressure: No ess than 125 psi. 4. Manufacturer: Nibco 58 Series, or equal. C. Sodium hypochlorite service: 1. Type: Full port, double-unio , socket end connections. 2. Material: CPVC. 3. Working pressure: Not less th n 150 psi. 4. Valves shall be vented to allow scape of gas which comes out of 5. 0 -rings: Viton. / 2.12 SOLENOID VALVES A. Refer to Section 40 9100-13. B. Type: 2 -way. C. Enclosure: NEMA 4X. C D. Coils: Class H high-temperature nstruction. Sui ble for continuous duty. No E. Electrical power: 120 -volt unded, single-phase, 60 z, ac. On C/31 F. Manufacturer: ASCO requal. n < r r 2.13 PRESSURE SAFE VALVE :<rn a Pi'I A. Service: intain constant upstream pressure in effluent water stem within clt Rhmif D _. B. Ty Pressure sustaining valve. C. Size and connection: 6' (150 mm), flanged. D. Body and cover: Ductile iron. E. Diaphragm: Nylon reinforced Buna-N rubber. F. Seat, disc guide and cover bearing: Bronze or stainless steel. G. Disc: Buna-N rubber. H. Stem, nut and spring: Stainless steel. I. Maximum working pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa g). J. Range of adjustment: 0 to 25 psig (0 to 35 kPa g). 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 9 L'�J� -Fi7 rl'iillirl L. Maximum flow M. Manufacturer: C 2.14 TEMPERATURE ire: 150°F (650C). 2,000 gpm (7,570 I/m) Automatic Control valves, or equal. VE A. Type: Globe, 2 -way. B. Service: Effluent water. C. Mainline size: 6" (150 mm). D. Size: 4" (100 mm). E. Designations: TCV-8802A F. Body: Cast iron, 125 Ib flanged ends. G. Plug: Type 416 stainless steel. H. Characteristic: Equal percentage. I. Packing: PTFE V -ring. J. Retainer and seat ring: Stainless steel. r K. Flow action: Up. L. Seat tightness: Class IV. O N ...'.' D� nt M. Design parameters: C -) NI 1. Maximum flow, gpm: 350. 2. Minimum flow, gpm: 90. �(- s 3. Maximum pressure, psig: psig. = 0 4. Normal inlet pressure, p a. Maximum flow, ps 35. D b. Minimum flow, p g: 55. W 5. Outlet pressure, ps' a. Maximum flo psig: 28. b. Minimum fl , psig: 48. 6. Effluent water emperature, F: 42-75. N. Actuator: Ele is as specified in this Section. O. Manufactu r: Fisher Controls EZ, or equal. 2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. Location: Digester Building 8600 Ground Floor 1. Type: Globe. 2. Service: Effluent water. 3. Mainline size, in: 6. 4. Size, in: 3. 5. Body: Ductile iron, 150 Ib flanged ends. 6. Diaphragm material: Buna N. 7. Trim: Stainless steel. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 9 K. Maximum temperature: 150°F (650C). L. Maximum flow rate: 2,000 gpm (7,570 Um) M. Manufacturer: Cla-Val Automatic Control valves, or equal. 2.14 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE A. Type: Globe, 2 -way. B. Service: Effluent water. C. Mainline size: 6' (150 mm). D. Size: 4' (100 mm). E. Designations: TCV-8802A F. Body: Cast iron, 125 Ib flanged ends. G. Plug: Type 416 stainless steel. H. Characteristic: Equal percentage. I. Packing: PTFE V -ring. J. Retainer and seat ring: Stainless steel. K. Flow action: Up. L. Seat tightness: Class IV. M. Design parameters: 1. Maximum flow, gpm: 350. 2. Minimum flow, gpm: 90. 3. Maximum pressure, psig: 70 psig. 4. Normal inlet pressure, psig: a. Maximum flow, psig: 35. b. Minimum flow, psig: 55. 5. Outlet pressure, psig: a. Maximum flow, psig: 28. b. Minimum flow, psig: 48. 6. Effluent water temperature, F: 42-75. N. Actuator: Electric as specified in this Section. O. Manufacturer: Fisher Controls EZ, or equal. 2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE - A. Location: Digester Building 8600 Ground Floor E r 1. Type: Globe. 2. Service: Effluentwater. 3. Mainline size, in: 6. 4. Size, in: 3. 5. Body: Ductile iron, 150 Ib flanged ends. 6. Diaphragm material: Buna N. 7. Trim: Stainless steel. C) ::En D i _m P= A N r m 0 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 8. Seat tightness: Standard. 9. Flows: a. Maximum flow, gpm: 350. b. Minimum flow, gpm: 90. c. Inlet pressure, psig: 75-100. d. Outlet pressure, psig: 35-65 adjustable. e. Effluent water temperature, F: 42-63. 10. Actuator: Pilot operated, utilizing system fluid. pilot line. 11. Pilot and pilot line material: Stainless steel. 12. Manufacturer: ClaVal Model 90-01, or equal. Provide strainer as required by manufacturer for B. Location: Digester Building 8500 Basement: 1. Type: Globe. 2. Service: Effluent water. 3. Mainline size, in: 1. 4. Size, in: 3/4. 5. Body: Cast iron, NPT screwed ends. 6. Seal: Diaphragm, No. 1 trim. 7. Diaphragm material: Stainless steel. 8. Trim: Stainless steel. 9. Plug, retainer and seat: Type 416 stainless steel. 10. Seat tightness: Standard. 11. Flows: a. Maximum flow, gpm: 10. b. Minimum flow, gpm: 3. c. Inlet pressure, psig: 75-100. d. Outlet pressure, psig: 35-65 adjustable. e. Effluent water temperature, F: 42-63. 12. Actuator: Self-contained. 13. Actuator diaphragm material: Stainless steel. 14. Manufacturer. Fisher Controls 95H, or equal. C. Location: Scum spray valve vaults. 1. Type: Globe. 2. Service: Effluent Water. 3. Main line size, in: 1. 4. Size, in: 3/4. 5. Body: ASTM B62 threaded -bronze, union bonnet. 6. Stem: Silicon brass, rising. 7. Disc: Teflon. 8. Packing: TFE impregnated nonasbestos fibers. 9. Pressure class: 150 psi. 10. Manufacturer: Nibco Model T-235, or equal. 2.16 VALVE OPERATORS AND VALVE ACCESSORIES N d A. Provide standard wheel operators for gate valves, unless otherwise specified. 3 -� B. Plug valves: Standard lever operators. :En n� rn -0 -� r C. Ball valves: Standard lever operators. "; n <r- -v M D. Handwheels: m c� = Q 1. Maximum force applied to rim of handwheel, to seat or unseat valve again; u I dif"ntial operating pressure, shall be limited to 75 Ib. N idion 2. Provide heavy steel impact handwheels or enclosed bevel gear with hammer blow where necessary to conform to 75 Ib maximum applied force limitation. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 8. Seat tightness: ndard. 9. Flows: a. Maximum flow, pm: 350. 9 b. Minimum flow, g 90. c. Inlet pressure, psi 75-100. d. Outlet pressure, ps : 35-65 adjustable. e. Effluent water temp ture, F: 42-63. 10. Actuator. Pilot operated, tilizing system fluid. Provide strainer as required by manufacturer for pilot line. 11. Pilot and pilot line material: Stainless steel. 12. Manufacturer: ClaVal Mode 90-01, or equal. B. Location: Digester Building 8500 sement: 1. Type: Globe. 2. Service: Effluent water. 3. Mainline size, in: 1. 4. Size, in: 3/4. 5. Body: Cast iron, NPT screwed ends. 6. Seal: Diaphragm, No. 1 trim. 7. Diaphragm material: Stainless steel. 8. Trim: Stainless steel. 9. Plug, retainer and seat: Type 416 stainle steel. 10. Seat tightness: Standard. 11. Flows: a. Maximum flow, gpm: 10. b. Minimum flow, gpm: 3. c. Inlet pressure, psig: 75-100. d. Outlet pressure, psig: 35-65 adjustable. e. Effluent water temperature, F: 42-63. 12. Actuator. Self-contained. ro 13. Actuator diaphragm material: Stainless steel. o 14. Manufacturer: Fisher Controls 95H, or equ 0 m D C. Location: Scum spray valve vaults. 11. Type: Globe. f2. Service: Effluent Water. fir- rn 3. Main line size, in: 1. CD i4. Size, in: 3/4. ;Ir 5. Body: ASTM B62 t aded-bronze, union bonnet. y - B. Stem: Silicon br s, rising. - 7. Disc: Teflon. 8. Packing: E impregnated nonasbestos fibers. 9. Pres a class: 150 psi. 10. Manufacturer: Nibco Model T-235, or equal. 2.16 VALVE OPERATORS AND VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Provide standard wheel operators for gate valves, unless otherwise specified. B. Plug valves: Standard lever operators. C. Ball valves: Standard lever operators. D. Handwheels: 1. Maximum force applied to rim of handwheel, to seat or unseat valve against full differential operating pressure, shall be limited to 75 Ib. 2. Provide heavy steel impact handwheels or enclosed bevel gear with hammer blow action where necessary to conform to 75 Ib maximum applied force limitation. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 11 3. Other valve handwheels shall be direct connected and of sufficient size to allow seating and unseating of valve against full differential operating pressure without the use of auxiliary tools. 4. Provide opeting nut or lug for air wrench valve operation on valves requiring hammer blow action. 5. Provide mech ical gear operators with adjustable limit stops. E. Provide locking devi* where shown on Drawings. Owner will provide locks. F. Provide chain wheel op�tors for manual valves with handwheel operators in horizontal plane located 6' -6" (2 m) above floor, less otherwise noted. Provide sufficient chain to bring operation down to 6'- 6" (2 m) above floor. h Jill V/:I i!I/a1�Ul01MLIIi!1TL110*1 A. Provide vents at high points aNd drains at low points of piping. Provide as shown and as required for piping furnished including non tailed piping. B. Drain and vent valves, except wh re noted otherwise: 1. Piping 2" (50 mm) and smaller. 1/2" (13 mm) ball. 2. Piping 2-1/2" (64 mm) through(125 mm): 3/4" (19 mm) ball. 3. Piping 6" (150 mm) and larger: 1/4" (32 mm) ball. 2.18 BALL VALVE A. Type: 3 -way, 3 -position true union ball B. Provide half -turn diversion of flow, shut-off n, 1. Position 1 interconnects center port with 2. Position 2 interconnects center port with 3.; Position 3 shuts off flow. C. Molded plastic body with union -type pig connection for each of 3 ports. D. Flow directiZst, ed b andle position. E. Materials: 1. Body, hion nut, ball and end connect : PVC. 2. O-rings.3. Seats:4. Stem an steel. F. Prov' stem extension, stem guide(s), and operating handle G. Manufacturer: Chemtrol Model T45M3 Diverter, or equal. 2.19 CHEMICAL INJECTORS A. Type: Retractable injection quill which can be removed without B. Location: Sodium hypochlorite injection points where shown on C. Rating: 150 psi, minimum. D. Corporation stop: Brass. E. Solution tube: 6" (150 mm) long CPVC pipe. F. Tip configuration: 45° beveled, face upstream. of water main. ro 0 C3 �.p X* �+ y rnv ---i� C r r � rn a M showwf��h Dr_awingllo 'y N w of water main. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 11 3. Other valve handwheels shall be direct connected and of sufficient size to allow seating and unseating of valve against full differential operating pressure without the use of auxiliary tools. 4. Provide operating nut or lug for air wrench valve operation on valves requiring hammer blow action. 5. Provide mechanical gear operators with adjustable limit stops. E. Provide locking devices where shown on Drawings. Owner will provide locks. F. Provide chain wheel operators for manual valves with handwheel operators in horizontal plane located 6'-6" (2 m) above floor, unless otherwise noted. Provide sufficient chain to bring operation down to 6'- 6" (2 m) above floor. 2.17 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES A. Provide vents at high points and drains at low points of piping. Provide as shown and as required for piping furnished including nondetailed piping. B. Drain and vent valves, except where noted otherwise: 1. Piping 2" (50 mm) and smaller: 1/2" (13 mm) ball. 2. Piping 2-1/2" (64 mm) through 5" (125 mm): 3/4" (19 mm) ball. 3. Piping 6" (150 mm) and larger: 1-1/4"(32 mm) ball. 2.18 BALL VALVE A. Type: 3 -way, 3 -position true union ball valve. B. Provide half -tum diversion of flow; shut-off necessary. 1. Position 1 interconnects center port with Run Port 1. 2. Position 2 interconnects center port with Run Port 2. 3. Position 3 shuts off flow. C. Molded plastic body with union -type piping connection for each of 3 ports. D. Flow direction clearly marked by handle position. E. Materials: 1. Body, handle, stem, union nut, ball and end connector: PVC. 2. O -rings: Viton or EPDM. 3. Seats: Teflon (TFE). 4. Stem extension: Carbon steel. F. Provide stem extension, stem guide(s), and operating handle for installation shown on Drawings. G. Manufacturer: Chemtrol Model T45M3 Diverter, or equal. 2.19 CHEMICAL INJECTORS A. Type: Retractable injection quill which can be removed without shutdown of wtttcgma B. Location: Sodium hypochlorite injection points where shown on Drawings. n -G C. Rating: 150 psi, minimum. M z = 1V D. Corporation stop: Brass. E. Solution tube: 6" (150 mm) long CPVC pipe. F. Tip configuration: 45° beveled; face upstream. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 12 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 G. 150 psi rated stainless steel restraint hook. H. Stainless steel limit chain. I. Spring loaded CPVC ball check valve with Viton seals and titanium coated spring. J. Sodium hypochlorite hose: Provide 6'(2 m) length upstream of check valve. 2.20 WATER MAIN AND SERVICES RELOCATION AND REPAIR ACCESSORIES A. Ductile iron pipe: AWWA C151, pressure Class 350. B. Fittings: AWWA C110. C. Joints: Restrained Mechanical or push -on; AWWA C111. D. Coat pipe and fittings with bituminous coating in accordance with AWWA C151. E. Line pipe and fittings with cement mortar and bituminous seal coat in accordance with AWWA C104. F. Connections to existing mains: 1. Nonpressure locations: Cutting -in sleeves, Clow F-1220, or equal. 2. Pressure locations: Tapping split tees, Clow F-5205, or equal. G. Water service accessories: 1. Corporation stops: Mueller Co. H-15000, or equal. 2. Curb stops: Mueller Co. H-15204, or equal. 3. Service boxes complete with lid and plug: Mueller H-10316, or equal. 2.21 SEWER MAIN AND SERVICE CONNECTION REPAIR ACCESSORIES A. Flexible coupling: Fernco "Strong Back RC 1000 Series Coupling," or equal. 2.22 VALVE BOXES A. Provide valve box for each buried valve. B. Valve box shall be complete, assembled unit consisting of adjustable box and extension stem with 2" (50 mm) square operating nut. C. Box section: Hand -adjustable to required depth through coupling gland with O-ring seal. D. Stem assembly: Telescoping design with torque capacity of 1,000 ft -Ib (1,356 N -m). E. Equip lower end of box with self -centering alignment ring to center box over valve nut. F. Lid shall drop into valve box top, rotate 90° to retain, and lock in place with single bolt. m G. Arrange entire assembly to prevent dirt and grit from entering valve box asserrig" m H. Lid shall be marked "Water" or "Sewer" as appropriate and have directional arr0-119r open rotaEisr� =icy to 1 1. Materials:r— (i� Materials: -<r = 1. Valve box, base, alignment ring, and top: High-density polyethylene. OM 0 2. Extension steel: Galvanized steel tubing. E N 3. Bolts and screens: Stainless steel. D IV 4. Lid: Cast iron. n0 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 12 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 G. 1\psisrateddstlairilteshs steel restraint hook. H. Steelimicain.I. SdeCPVC ball check valve with Viton seals and titanium coated spring. J. Sodium hyjfpchlorite hose: Provide 6'(2 m) length upstream of check valve. 2.20 MANHOLES A. Construct eccentrhp top manholes of RCP. B. Precast concrete m holes: 1. Reinforced concr a pipe; ASTM C76 Class II, Wall B, or ASTM C478. 2. Eccentric top. 3. Joints: Rubber ring sket in conformance to ASTM C443. 4. Pipe blockouts at base. Factory -fabricated. 5. Separate floor slab or in I floor and wall riser sectio ay be used. 6. Shop- or field -apply asph waterproofing: "Hydroci 00 or 7006" as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Produ , Inc., or equal. 2.21 MANHOLE ACCESSORIES A. Manhole steps: 1. Polypropylene encapsulaAoreq steel rod. 2. Minimum dimensions: Cents of ASTM C478. 3. Steps shall be free of shnslip surface and have end lugs to prevent feet from slipping off step. B. - Manhole frame and lid: 11 1. Gray cast iron or stile iron; minimum clear o n 2. Model: 'Neon -K- R-1642, East Jordan Iron Wor 6060, ore I, for shallow manhole slab construc 3. Lid: "Ne ah" self-sealing with continuous gasket 0 24" (600 mm).0 N 1040, or equaY�r ,t Lim "Ne " R- concealed pick C. Wats t covers: - � _ (7 1. rMinimum clear opening; 24" (600 mm): "Neenah" R-191 East Jordd@ n WtRks No. 1045 ZPT, or equal. y -- 2. Provide with neoprene gasket, stainless steel bolts, and mac 'ned bearing surfacTs. 3. Provide where shown or where manhole rim is below ground a vation. D. Manhole ladders: Aluminum 2 -section extension ladders; maximumo side dimension of side rails, 20" (500 mm); rung spacing, 12" (300 mm). E. Cover lifts: Provide 2 cover lifts specially designed for concealed pickhole t)pe lid furnished. F. Use flexible, watertight connection device between manhole wall and sewer pipe for sanitary sewer manholes and where shown on drawings: ASTM C923. G. Manhole chimney seal: 1. Interior seal: a. Required for manholes in paved areas. b. Rubber sleeve: Extruded or molded from high-grade rubber compound conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM C923. Sleeve shall be minimum 3/16" (5 mm) thick, double - pleated with minimum unexpanded width of 8" (200 mm) and shall be capable of expansion to 10" (250 mm) when installed. Upper and lower contact surfaces shall have multiple, continuous sealing fins molded into sleeve. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 13 c. Steel bands: Expandable, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240, Type 304. Bands shall be 16 -gage (1.25 mm) by 1-3/4" (45 mm) wide minimum. Screws, bolts, and nuts shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM F593 and F594, Type 304. d. Manufacturer: Cretex, Manhole Chimney Seal, or equal. 2. Exterior seal: a. Required\expansiwhen nholes with watertight covers and where shown on Drawings. b. Rubber sExtruded or molded from high-grade rubber compound conforming to applicablrements of ASTM C923. Sleeve shall be minimum 3/16" (5 mm) thick, double - pleated wmum unexpanded width as required for installation and shall be capable of 2" (50 mm) i when installed. Upper and lower contact surfaces shall have multiple, continuoing ins molded into sleeve. c. Steel banpan able, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240, Type 304. Bands shall be 16tJa5 mm by 1-3/4" (45 mm) wide minimum. Screws, bolts, and nuts shall be stainlessonforms g to ASTM F593 and F594, Type 304. d. Manufactretex, nhole Chimney Seal, or equal. 2.22 WATER MAIN AND SERVICES RELOCATION AND REPAIR ACCESSORIES A. Ductile iron pipe: AWWA C151, pressu Class 350. B. Fittings: AWWA C110. C. Joints: Restrained Mechanical or push on; A A C111. D. Coat pipe and fittings with bituminous coating in a cordance wi WWA C151. E. Line pipe and fittings with cement mortar and bitumin u eal coat in accordance with AWWA C104. F. Connections to existing mains: o 1. Nonpressure locations: Cutting -in sleeve ,Clow F-1 0, or equal. 2. Pressure locations: Tapping split tees low F-5205, o equal. D_ y D� G. Water service accessories: 1. Corporation stops: Mueller C . H-15000, or equal. �n C r 2. Curb stops: Mueller Co. H 204, or equal. �r 3. Service boxes complete ith lid and plug: Mueller H-10316, or ual. Z 0 2.23 SEWER MAIN AND SERV E CONNECTION REPAIR ACCESSORIES N W A. Flexible couplin low "Band -Seal Repair Coupling," or equal. 2.24 VALVE BOXES A. Provide valve box for each buried valve. B. Valve box shall be complete, assembled unit consisting of adjustable box and extensi stem with 2" (50 mm) square operating nut. C. Box section: Hand -adjustable to required depth through coupling gland with O-ring seal. D. Stem assembly: Telescoping design with torque capacity of 1,000 ft -Ib (1,356 N -m). E. Equip lower end of box with self -centering alignment ring to center box over valve nut. F. Lid shall drop into valve box top, rotate 900 to retain, and lock in place with single bolt. G. Arrange entire assembly to prevent dirt and grit from entering valve box assembly. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 13 J. Manufacturer: American Flow Control "Trench Adapter," or equal. 2.23 UNIONS A. Provide for pipe assembly and to allow removal of connecting equipment. B. Use: Pipe 2' (50 mm) and smaller; for larger piping use flanges or flexible couplings as specified or shown. 2.24 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Style: 1. Single arch for water and wastewater service. 2. Double arch for aeration air headers. B. Construction: High-strength fabric and elastomer, reinforced with metal rings or wire. Fill arch with abrasion -resistant soft rubber stock for joints used on wastewater service. C. End connections: Flanges integral with body of joint and drilled to match ANSI 816.1 125 Ib and to conform to companion metal flanges of pipe line. D. Materials: 1. Elastomer: a. Tube: Chlorobutyl, neoprene or EPDM. b. Cover: 1) Indoors: Same as tube. 2) Outdoors: EPDM. 2. Reinforcing: a. Fabric: Polyester. b. Metal rings: Steel. 3. Retaining rings: Galvanized steel. E. Pressure ratings: 1. Pump discharge piping: 100 psi. 2. Pump suction piping: 50 psi. 3. Aeration air piping: 25 psi. F. Temperature rating: 225°F minimum. G. Axial movement: 1. For water and wastewater service, and aeration air piping at blowers. a. Compression: 3/8" (10 mm) minimum. o b. Elongation: 3/16" (5 mm) minimum. — 2. For aeration air headers: 0 y y ij T : a. Compression: 3/4" (19 mm). b. Elongation: 1/2" (13 mm). �. C r H. Control units: Provide tie bolts and accessories to prevent excessive elongatiort7<r— m r • I. Manufacturer: General Rubber Corporation, Mercer Rubber Company, or equate X N 0 ' D 2.25 SLEEVE COUPLINGS o A. Construction: Steel middle ring, without pipe stop, 2 steel followers, 2 rubber compound wedge section gaskets suitable for maximum temperature of 240°F, and required number of track -head steel bolts to properly compress gaskets. B. Harness -type lugs, tie rods, and nuts shall be furnished and installed where shown on Drawings. Harness -type connections shall be capable of withstanding working pressure of 100 psi (689 kPa). WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 14 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 C. Provide gap of not less than 1" (25 mm) nor more than 2" (50 mm) between ends of pipe. 2.26 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports as necessary to support piping properly. Unless detailed on Drawings, hanger types shall comply with MSS 58 and MSS 69. 2.27 PIPES THROUGH WALLS AND SLABS A. Refer to Drawings for pipe penetration details. B. Cast or ductile iron wall pipes: 1. Provide with intermediate flange. 2. Material, thickness, and ends shall match connecting piping. 3. Provide tapped holes where wall pipes are flush with concrete. 4. Use where shown for pipes passing through floors or walls. C. Wall sleeves: 1. Use where shown for pipes passing through floors, walls, or roof slabs. 2. Materials: Cast iron with intermediate flange on piping 3" (75 mm) and larger; galvanized steel pipe with anchor ring or lugs on piping smaller than 3" (75 mm). 3. Sleeve length: Extend 2" (50 mm) above floors, flush with other surfaces. 4. Clearance: As recommended by seal manufacturer. 5. Seal: Mechanical, link -type, modular, field assembled, insulating, positive -sealing; "Link -Seal" by Thunderline Corp., or equal. 6. Fire -rated floors and walls: Link -Seal "Pyro Pac," or equal. 2.28 PIPING IDENTIFICATION m d PART A. Identify piping system with W.H. Brady Company Type B-500, or equal, markers attached to pipe where pipe passes through walls and at 20'(6 m) intervals in exposed areas. B. Markers shall identify pipe contents in accordance with names and abbreviations shown in piping schedules in this section and on Drawings. Markers shall also indicate direction of flow. C. Marker color shall conform to following table. Pipe service not listed in table shall match existing pipe marker color system in use at plant. PIPE COLOR CODING SCHEDULE Pipe Service Colors Aeration Air Light Green Service Air Dark Green Fuel Oil Safety Orange Natural Gas and digester gas Safety Yellow Effluent Water and Seal Water Tan Potable Water Light Blue Sodium Hypochlorite a All Sewage, Overflows, and Drains MBrow!]j -All Slud e, Scum, and Filtrate to n N D. "erior piping does not require painting. Paint exterior natural gas pipe Safet ellowKcolor equal to standard Tnemec color. Submit to Owner for review. w E. Colors shall be equal to standard Tnemec colors and shall be submitted to Owner for review. EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION N 0 J C rn 1 �-- rn a to n N D. "erior piping does not require painting. Paint exterior natural gas pipe Safet ellowKcolor equal to standard Tnemec color. Submit to Owner for review. w E. Colors shall be equal to standard Tnemec colors and shall be submitted to Owner for review. EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 14 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 H. Lid shall be marked "Water" or "Sewer" as appropriate and have directional arrow for open rotation. I. Materials: 1. Valve box, bas 2. Extension stee 3. Bolts and scre 4. Lid: Cast iron. J. Manufacturer: 2.25 UNIONS alignment ring, and top: High-density polyethylene. Galvanized steel tubing. 3: Stainless steel. Flow Control "Trench Adapter," or equal A. Provide for pipe assembly d tc allow removal of connecting equipment. B. Use: Pipe 2" (50 mm) and sm er, for larger piping use flanges or flexible couplings as specified or shown. 2.26 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Style: 1. Single arch for water and wastew ter service. 2. Double arch for aeration air heade . B. Construction: High-strength fabric and at stomer, reinforced wi metal rings or wire. Fill arch with abrasion -resistant soft rubber stock for joi used on waste er service. C. End connections: Flanges integral with body f joint drilled to match ANSI B16.1 125 Ib and to conform to companion metal flanges of pipe Ii v D; Materials: 1. Elastomer: a. Tube: Chlorobutyl, neoprene PDM. b. Cover: 1) Indoors: Same to �n {n as . r— 3 2) Outdoors: EPDM. 2. Reinforcing: C:) a. Fabric: Polyester v b. Metal rings: St I. 3. Retaining rings: alvanized steel. E. Pressure ratings 1. Pump dis arge piping: 100 psi. 2. Pumps tion piping: 50 psi. 3. Aer ' n air piping: 25 psi. F. Temperature rating: 225°F minimum. G. Axial movement: 1. For water and wastewater service, and aeration air piping at blowers. a. Compression: 3/8" (10 mm) minimum. b. Elongation: 3/16" (5 mm) minimum. 2. For aeration air headers: a. Compression: 3/4" (19 mm). b. Elongation: 1/2" (13 mm). H. Control units: Provide tie bolts and accessories to prevent excessive elongation. I. Manufacturer: General Rubber Corporation, Mercer Rubber Company, or equal. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 15 2.27 SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. Construction: Steel middle ring, without pipe stop, 2 steel followers,;irubber compound wedge section gaskets suitable for maximum temperature of 240°F, and required number of track -head steel bolts to properly compress gaskets. B. Harness -type lugs, tie rods, and nuts shall be furnished and installed where shown on Drawings. Harness -type connections shall be capable of withstanding working pressure of 100 psi (689 kPa). C. Provide gapf not less than 1" (25 mm) nor more than 2" (50 mm) between ends of pipe. 2.28 HANGERS AND S PORTS A. Provide hangers an supports as necessary to support piping properly. Unless detailed on Drawings, hanger types shall co ply with MSS 58 and MSS 69. 2.29 PIPES THROUGH WALLS AND SLABS A. Refer to Drawings for pipe phnetration details. B. Cast or ductile iron wall pipes: o 1. Provide with intermediate fla6ge. 2. Material, thickness, and ends Nall match connecting piping. C3 CA 3. Provide tapped holes where wa ipes are flush with concrete. -o �r 4. Use where shown for pipes passi through floors or walls. 1 C. Wall sleeves: 1. Use where shown for pipes passing th � 2. Materials: Cast iron with intermediate fl pipe with anchor ring or lugs on piping sn 3. Sleeve length: Extend 2" (50 mm) above 4. Clearance: As recommended by seal ma 5. Seal: Mechanical, link -type, modular, fiel Thunderline Corp., or equal. 6. Fire -rated floors and walls: Link -Seal ;Pv 2.30 PIPING IDENTIFICATION ._ �r flo/(75 f slabs. _ om) and larger jAni�tl steel ar tDrs surfaces. _ insulating, positive -sealing; "Link -Seal" by Pac,""pr equal. A. Identify piping system with W.H. ady Company Type B-50 or equal, markers attached to pipe where pipe passes through w and at 20'(6 m) intervals in\osebdareas. B. Markers shall identify pipe ontents in accordance with namereviations shown in piping schedules in this sectio and on Drawings. Markers shall alsdirection of flow. C. Marker color shall nform to following table. Pipe service not listed in marker color sys em in use at plant. PIPE COLOR CODING SCHEDULE Pipe Service Colors Aeration Air Light Green Service Air Dark Green Fuel Oil Safety Orange Natural Gas and digester gas Safety Yellow Effluent Water and Seal Water Tan Potable Water Light Blue Sodium Hypochlorite Safety Yellow All Sewage, Overflows, and Drains Gra All Sludge, Scum, and Filtrate Brown shall match existing pipe 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 15 A. Store, handle, join, lay, and otherwise install pipe in conformance to pipe manufacturer's recommendations. B. Before installation, verify all measurements at site; make necessary field measurements to accurately determine sewer make-up lengths or closures. C. Use proper pipe unloading and handling procedures to prevent damage to pipe and coating. D. Carefully protect joint material from injury while handling and storing pipe; support pipe to keep weight off joint material; use no pipe with joints deformed, gouged, or otherwise impaired. E. Keep pipe clean of dirt and foreign matter; clean bell and spigot surfaces of pipe with gasket -type joints and paint with lubricant recommended by manufacturer prior to jointing pipe; conform to manufacturer's recommendations. F. Touch-up abraded pipe coatings. G. At connections to structures: Use 3 short pieces, each 2'-0" (750 mm) long. H. Joints shall be kept clean and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Prepare trench in accordance with Section 31 23 00. J. Minimum earth cover: 5'-0", unless shown otherwise. K. Plug or cap and block pipe ends or fittings left for future connections. L. Uncover existing pipe, to which connections are to be made, sufficiently ahead of pipe laying operations to determine fittings required. M. Make connections between existing and new pipe with specials and fittings to suit actual conditions. N. Follow recommendations of pipe manufacturer. O. Gravity sewers: 1. Commence at lowest point in line; lay spigot ends pointing in direction of flow. 2. Lower pipe carefully into trench; lay true to line and grade. 3. Provide smooth, uniform invert; spigots shall bear against bell shoulders. 4. Check each length of pipe for defects and hairline cracks at ends prior to lowering ie trench. No 5. defective pipe shall be used. 3) -' Line and grade: C/1t a. Set offset hubs or laser system as required from bench marks and refenee p6igts promWed -6. by Engineer, n-< — b. Check grade of each pipe; check line of every other length of pipe. --t C') %0 backfilling < r" m Stepping on pipe before not allowed. M 3 7. , 8. Plug lifting holes with grout. CD PVC pipe installation shall result in installed pipe having deflection of less WaAA%!� 0 C� N t O r WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 16 - SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 Force main: 1. Minimum cover: 5'-0" (1.5 m). 2. Lay to line and grade as shown. 3. Use suitable fittings where grade or alignment requires offsets greater than those recommended by pipe manufacturer. 4. Clean and inspect each section of pipe prior to lowering into trench. 5. Provide thrust restraint by restrained joints where piping changes direction, changes size and at deadends. 6. Install thrust restraints in accordance with requirements shown on Drawings. Installation of restrained joints shall be confirmed by Owner prior to backfilling. 3.02 PIPE JOINTS AND METHODS A. Welding: 1. Metallic arc process with inert gas root pass (TIG), in accordance with AWS. Use stainless steel electrodes for welding stainless steel -to -stainless steel and stainless steel -to -carbon steel. 2. Store and redry electrodes, as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Upon completion of weld, attach weld number, welder's identification, and other identification to pipe adjacent to weld. Permanently mark with identification by electric etching, or by blunt -nosed continuous or interrupted -dot die stamps. 4. Weld slip-on flanges on both front and back. 5. Seal weld thermometer wells and piping noted on Drawings or Specifications as seal -welded. 6. Weld end preparations: In accordance with Section 20 05 13 and pipe class specifications included in the Project Manual. Backing rings not allowed. 7. Comply with Owner's regulations before and during welding procedures. 8. Shielded arc or coated electrodes specifically designed for pipe material. 9. Use only 1 welding operator on each joint. 10. Thoroughly grind or wire brush each weld pass and remove welding slag and defective material before next pass is applied. 11. Welds shall be neat; remove excessive spatter by chipping or grinding. B. Threaded joints: 1. Thread type: ANSI B2.1 taper pipe thread. 2. Clean-cut threads; ream pipe ends and remove burrs. 3. Apply suitable lubricating, noncorrosive, flexible pipe joint compound to male threads only. C. Solder joints: 1." Cut tube square, ream end, and remove burrs. Z Clean tube end and fitting socket to bright metal. Apply flux to both surfaces; preheat if required. 4. Heat fitting; feed solder until joint space is filled. 5. Wipe off excess solder; leave small fillet. f 6. Remove flux. N �-• D. Flanged joints: o 1. Make up flanges prior to completing last weld in connecting piping; alignment)fgipirgshall be - correct without forcing or drifting. rn 2. Coat bolt threads with suitable lubricant, Crane "Anti -Seize" thread compoung1eguH. r E. Solvent -cemented joints: Conform to ASTM D2855. � r -v _rn m F. Provide dielectric unions or flanges at connections between ferrous and nonferrrir3 pin$8nd as connections between nonferrous piping and ferrous equipment. t� ry N 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 16 – SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 D. Interior piping does not require painting. Paint exterior natural gas pipe Sffety Yellow in color equal to standard Tnemec color. Submit to Owner for review. E. Colors shall be equal to standard Tnemec colors and shall be submitted to Owner for review. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE A. Store, handle, join lay, and otherwise install pipe in conformance to pipe manufacturer's B. Before installation, ve 'fy all measurements at site; make necessary field measurements to accurately determine sewermak up lengths or closures. C. Use proper pipe unloadi and handling procedures to prevent damage to pipe and coating. D. Carefully protect joint mate 'al from injury while handling and storing pipe; support pipe to keep weight off joint material; use no pip with joints deformed, gouged, or otherwise impaired. E. Keep pipe clean of dirt and for ' n matter, clean bell and spigot surfaces of pipe with gasket -type t joints and paint with lubricant redymmended by manufacturer prior to jginting pipe; conform to manufacturers recommendations. F. Touch-up abraded pipe coatings. G. At connections to structures: Use 3 H. Joints shall be kept clean and each 2'-6"(750 mm) long. with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Prepare trench in accordanc ith Section 3 23 00. J. Minimum earth cover: -0", unless shown othe ise. K. Plug or cap an ock pipe ends or fittings left for f ure connections. L. Uncover fisting pipe, to which connections are to be ade, sufficiently ahead of pipe laying oper ns to determine fittings required. M. Make connections between existing and new pipe with specr s and fittings to suit anal conditions. r N. Follow recommendations of pipe manufactures �c? ti � � D 19 O. Gravity sewers: c7-< cn r 1. Commence at lowest point in line; lay spigot ends pointing in dire n oF��. rn 2. Lower pipe carefully into trench; lay true to line and grade. _ M a S 3. Provide smooth, uniform invert; spigots shall bear against bell Is — 0 4. Check each length of pipe for defects and hairline cracks at ends prior t weringinto trench. No defective pipe shall be used. _ 5. Line and grade: a. Set offset hubs or laser system as required from bench marks and reference points provided by Engineer. b. Check grade of each pipe; check line of every other length of pipe. 6. Stepping on pipe before backfilling not allowed. 7. Plug lifting holes with grout. 8. PVC pipe installation shall result in installed pipe having deflection of less than 5%. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 17 P. Force main: 1. Minimum co\rade ' (1.5 m). 2. Lay to line aas shown. 3. Use suitablehere grade or alignment requires offsets greater than those recommended by pipe man.4. Clean and inch section of pipe prior to lowering into trench. 5. Provide thrunt by restrained joints where piping changes direction, changes size and at deadends. 6. Install thrust in accordance with requirements shown on Drawings. Installation of restrained jol b confirmed by Owner prior to backfilling. 3.02 PIPE JOINTS AND METHODS A. Welding: 1. Metallic arc process with inert as root pass (TIG), in accordance with AWS. Use stainless steel electrodes for welding stainles steel -to -stainless steel and stainless eel -to -carbon steel. 2. Store and redry electrodes, as n cessary, in accordance with ma acturer's recommendations. 3. Upon completion of weld, attach Id number, welder's identifi tion, and other identification to pipe adjacent to weld. Permanentl mark with identificatio y electric etching, or by blunt -nosed continuous or interrupted -dot die sta ps. No 4. Weld slipon flanges on both front an back. 5. Seal weld thermometer wells and pipin noted on swings or Specificatisweld 6. Weld end preparations: In accordance 'th Se n 20 05 13 and pipe clascifrtAtions' included in the Project Manual. Backing in not allowed. �� r 7. Comply with Owners regulations before during welding procedures. m 8. Shielded arc or coated electrodes sp ' Hca designed for pipe material. �r a 9. Use only 1 welding operator on eac joint. ? 10. Thoroughly grind or wire brush e h weld pas and remove welding slag antl��Dfectivgmaterial before next pass is applied. =j N 11. Welds shall be neat; remov excessive spatter b hipping or grinding. B. Threaded joints: 1. Thread type: ANSI 1 taper pipe thread. 2. Clean-cut thread , ream pipe ends and remove burrs. 3. Apply suitable ricating, noncorrosive, flexible pipe joint ompound to male threads only. C. Solder joints: 1. Cut to square, ream end, and remove burrs. 2. Cie tube end and fitting socket to bright metal. 3. ly flux to both surfaces; preheat if required. 4. <Heat fitting; feed solder until joint space is filled. 5. Wipe off excess solder; leave small fillet. 6. Remove flux. D. Flanged joints: 1. Make up flanges prior to completing last weld in connecting piping; alignm t of piping shall be correct without forcing or drifting. 2. Coat bolt threads with suitable lubricant, Crane "Anti -Seize" thread compoun , or equal. E. Solvent -cemented joints: Conform to ASTM D2855. F. Provide dielectric unions or flanges at connections between ferrous and nonferrous piping and at connections between nonferrous piping and ferrous equipment. 3.03 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1669 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 17 B. Where not otherwise detailed, locate valves for convenient operation from floors. Provide chain wheels and chains as required for operation from floor level. C. Install as recommended by manufacturer to prevent distortion of body. D. Tighten valve glands as work is erected, and again as required after placing in service. E. Replace any gland packing which is deteriorated or in unsatisfactory condition. F. Install air release and airtvacuum valves at high points as shown on Drawings or as specified. 3.04 PLUG VALVE INSTALLATION A. Service: Digester gas. B. Install valves with seat on inlet side. Where possible, install valves with shaft in horizontal position and plug rotating up in open position. Provide externally adjustable closed position stop on all valves. 3.05 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Provide thrust restraint by restrained joints where buried pressure piping changes direction, changes size, and at dead ends. B. Install thrust restraint in accordance with requirements shown on Drawings. C. Installation of restrained joints shall be confirmed by Owner prior to backfilling. 3.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 20 05 29 for pipe support spacing. B. Devices in contact with copper piping shall be copper plated. C. Arrange hangers for adjustment of load and pipe elevation after installation. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED PIPE NOT DETAILED A. Install essentially as indicated and required; modify as required to clear building structure and openings, lights, ducts, and other services. B. Route parallel to building lines and other piping. C. ; Provide sufficient unions and flanged connections to permit dismantling and removing equipment. D.. Spacing: Adequate to permit servicing valves and specialties, and replacing sections oUipe. co E. Grade: Slope to permit complete draining. <5 t D� M F. Flexibility: Prevent excessive forces or moments on equipment. C7 -C r Ct Vent and drain valves: �r rn 1. Provide vents at high points and drains at low points of water piping. m = 2. Vent valves: 1/4° (6 mm) globe. M N 0 3. Drain valves: T' a. Piping up to 5" (125 mm): 3/4° (19 mm) ball. N c b. Piping 6"(150 mm) and larger: 1-1/4'(32 mm) ball. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 18 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 3.08 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Connections to existing manholes and catch basins. 1. Cut hole in existing manhole at elevation shown. 2. Remove dirt and debris. 3. For sanitary sewers, install flexible watertight connection device in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Insert new sewer pipe flush with inside of manhole or catch basin. 5. Grout new pipe in place for storm sewers. 6. Reconstruct manhole bottom to suit new connection. B. Connections to existing sewer: 1. Build new manhole around existing sewer. 2. Break out existing sewer inside of manhole and construct bottom to suit new connection. C. Plug existing sewers where indicated; fill pipe with concrete for minimum length of 2' (600 mm). D. Connect no storm drains to sanitary sewer. E. Connect no sanitary service drains to storm sewer. 3.09 CONNECTION BETWEEN PIPES OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS A. Connection between concrete and other dissimilar pipe materials 12" (300 mm) and smaller in diameter: Install flexible coupling in accordance with ASTM C425. B. Connection between concrete and other dissimilar pipe materials larger than 12" (300 mm) in diameter: 1. Construct 6" (150 mm) thick concrete collar around joint; extend collar 12" (300 mm) each way from joint. 2. Reinforce with welded wire fabric. 3. Provide flexible, watertight connection device (rubber or elastomeric gasket) on non -concrete pipe to provide water tight seal. C. Connection between 2 different types of pressure pipes: 1. Use suitable manufactured connection. 2. Design pressure same as for pipe. 3. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.10 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Pour concrete beneath and around pipe after pipe jointing is complete. o J B. Encase with 8" (200 mm) minimum thickness as measured at outside of pipe bav%jr fWwidth of ir'ench bottom. C. Pie 2demporary pipe supports under barrel per pipe length; 1 near bell and 1 nearO Jigot end. m S ^-1 D. Mvide adequate ties and braces to prevent displacement or flotation during encase�ent, .s 3.1 M NEW -SEWER OR FORCE MAIN PARALLELING WATER MAIN '' N _ ro A. Mere water main paralleling new sewer or force main is less than 10' (3 m) horizontally from sewer drforce main, notify Engineer. B. Obtain authorization from Engineer to relocate sewer or force main to obtain 10' (3 m) of horizontal separation if possible. If impossible to relocate sewer, bottom of water main shall be at least 18" (450 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 18 – SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 B. Where not otherwise detailed, locate valves for convenient operation from floors. Provide chain wheels and chains as required for operation from floor level. C. nstall as recommended by manufacturer to prevent distortion of body. D. Ti ten valve glands as work is erected, and again as required after placing in service. E. Repla a any gland packing which is deteriorated or in unsatisfactory condition. F. Install ai%ITALLATION se and air/vacuum valves at high points as shown on Drawings oras specified 3.04 PLUG VALVi A. Service: Digest gas. B. Install valves with at on inlet side. Where pX11y ves with shaft in horizontal position anQplug rotating up open position. Provideable closed position stop on all valves. 3.05 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Provide thrust restraint by size, and at dead ends. B. Install thrust restraint in C. Installation of restrained 3.06 HANGERS AND buried pressure piping changes direction, changes requirements shown on Drawings. confirmed by Owner prior to backfilling. A. Refer to Section 20 29 for pipe support\aetd B. Devices in con with copper piping shalllated. C. Arrange he ers for adjustment of load antion after installation. N O 3.07 INSTALLAT N OF EXPOSED PIPE NOT DE-+ C7 0 rye�r A. Ins essentially as indicated and requiredrequ ed to clear buildinWS—cturgand openings, lights, ducts, and other services.cn M B. Route parallel to building lines and other piaC. Provide sufficient unions and flanged connermit dismantlin nd rervTing equipment. D. Spacing: Adequate to permit servicing valves and specialties, and replacing sections of pipe. E. Grade: Slope to permit complete draining. F. Flexibility: Prevent excessive forces or moments on equipment. G. Vent and drain valves: 1. Provide vents at high points and drains at low points of water piping. 2. Vent valves: 1/4" (6 mm) globe. 3. Drain valves: a. Piping up to 5" (125 mm): 3/4" (19 mm) ball. b. Piping 6"(150 mm) and larger: 1-1/4"(32 mm) ball. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 19 3.08 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM i A. Conn tions to existing manholes and catch basins. 1. Cu ole in existing manhole at elevation shown. 2.Rem ve dirt and debris. 3. For sa itarysewers, install flexible watertight connection device in accordance with manufa urers recommendations. 4. Insert ne sewer pipe flush with inside of manhole or catch basin. 5. Grout new ipe in place for storm sewers. 6. Reconstruct anhole bottom to suit new connection. B. Connections to exis 'g sewer: 1. Build new manho around existing sewer. 2. Break out existingwer inside of manhole and construct bottom to suit ne connection. C. Plug existing sewers wher indicated; fill pipe with concrete for minimum le th of 2+000 mm). D. Connect no stone drains to E. Connect no sanitary service 3.09 CONNECTION BETWEEN PIPES OF A. Connection between concrete and diameter: Install flexible coupling in sewer. to storm sewer. B. Connection between concrete and other diss diameter: 1. Construct 6" (150 mm) thick concrete lar from joint. 2. Reinforce with welded wire fabric. C. Connection between 2 different typ s of pressure 1 Use suitable manufactured c nection. 2. Design pressure same as f pipe. 3. Install in accordance with anufacturer's recc 3.10 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT pipe materials larger than 12" (300 mm) in joint; extend collar 12" (300 mm) each way A. Pour concrete beneat nd around pipe after pipe jointing is compilip B. Encase with 8" (20 mm) minimum thickness as measured at outside o ipe barrel, or full width of trench bottom. C. Use 2 temporary pipe supports under barrel per pipe length; 1 near bell and 1 ar spigot end. D. Provide adequate ties and braces to prevent displacement or flotation during enca ment. 3.11 NEW SEWER OR FORCE MAIN PARALLELING WATER MAIN A. Where water main paralleling new sewer or force main is less than 10' (3 m) horizontally fro sewer or force main, notify Engineer. B. Obtain authorization from Engineer to relocate sewer or force main to obtain 10' (3 m) of horizontal separation if possible. If impossible to relocate sewer, bottom of water main shall be at least 18" (450 mm) above top of sewer, and in separate trench or on undisturbed shelf to one side of sewer with at least 3'(900 mm) horizontal separation. J 0 I 1 �-< erials 12" (300 mn`4A a smiler in C425. y N pipe materials larger than 12" (300 mm) in joint; extend collar 12" (300 mm) each way A. Pour concrete beneat nd around pipe after pipe jointing is compilip B. Encase with 8" (20 mm) minimum thickness as measured at outside o ipe barrel, or full width of trench bottom. C. Use 2 temporary pipe supports under barrel per pipe length; 1 near bell and 1 ar spigot end. D. Provide adequate ties and braces to prevent displacement or flotation during enca ment. 3.11 NEW SEWER OR FORCE MAIN PARALLELING WATER MAIN A. Where water main paralleling new sewer or force main is less than 10' (3 m) horizontally fro sewer or force main, notify Engineer. B. Obtain authorization from Engineer to relocate sewer or force main to obtain 10' (3 m) of horizontal separation if possible. If impossible to relocate sewer, bottom of water main shall be at least 18" (450 mm) above top of sewer, and in separate trench or on undisturbed shelf to one side of sewer with at least 3'(900 mm) horizontal separation. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 19 mm) above top of sewer, and in separate trench or on undisturbed shelf to one side of sewer with at least 3'(900 mm) horizontal separation. C. If impossible to maintain required clearance, sewer shall be constructed of ductile iron pipe conforming to AWWA C151. 1. Horizontal separation of at least 2' (600 mm) shall be provided. 2. Pressure test at 30 psi (207 kPa) for 1 hour to assure watertightness before backfilling. 3. Maximum allowable leakage shall be 0.1 gal/hr/1,000 ft/in (0.5 I/hr/100m/100 mm) diameter. D. Obtain authorization from Engineer to relocate force main to obtain 10' (3.0 m) of horizontal separation if possible. If impossible to relocate force main to provide 10' (3.0 m) separation, at least 4' (1.2 m) of horizontal separation shall be provided. 3.12 NEW SEWER OR FORCE MAIN CROSSING WATER MAIN A. Notify Engineer if: 1. New sewer crosses over water main. 2. Sewer crosses underwater main and vertical clearance is less than 18" (450 mm). 3. New force main crosses over or underwater main and vertical clearance is less than 18" (450 mm). B. If sewer crosses under water main, relocate water main to provide minimum 18" (450 mm) vertical clearance, for minimum of 10' (3 m) each side of sewer. Locate center of standard length of water main pipe over sewer. C. If relocation of water main to obtain required clearance is not practical or if sewer crosses over water main, construct sewer with one full length, 20' (6 m) minimum, of ductile iron pipe conforming to AWWA C151; center both sewer and water main pipe lengths at crossing. D. If force main crosses over or under water main and vertical clearance is less than 18" (450 mm) obtain authorization from Engineer to relocate force main to provide at least 18" (450 mm) vertical clearance. 3.13 RELOCATION OF WATER MAINS A. Minimum cover: 5'(1.5 m). B. Relocate where shown or required by conflict with sewers. Field verify size in advance for timely reconstruction. C. Use suitable fittings where grade or alignment requires offsets greater than those recommended by pipe manufacturer. D. Use cutting -in sleeves or tapping split tees where required to make connections to exist water mains. o —+ E. Inspect each section of pipe for defects prior to lowering into trench. �S2 rc#y'pv i1 R F. r Cleaning and disinfection: C-) ao r r 1. Immediately prior to lowering into trench: �tr+7 " 1 a. Clean interior of all foreign material and dirt. =CMb. Thoroughly swab or spray interior and ends with 1% hypochlorite solutjph� N 0 f 2. During laying prevent ground water, soil and other foreign material from enZ6ting pine. 3. After laying and leakage tests are completed, and before main is put into service: o a. Inject solution of calcium hypochlorite and water at slow rate, minimum initial chlorine residual in mains shall be 50 mg/I. b. Let stand for 24 hours and test chlorine residual; minimum chlorine residual shall be 25 mg/I. c. Repeat above steps as necessary to secure desired minimum residual. d. After successfully maintaining chlorine residual outlined above, flush main until chlorine residual equals chlorine content of supply water. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 20 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 4. Make connections to existing mains; place calcium hypochlorite inside relocated main prior to making connection. G. Provide thrust restraints by restrained joints where piping changes direction. 3.14 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WATER MAINS AND SERVICES A. Contractor shall repair breaks in existing lines caused by construction operations. B. Water mains: Replace with pipe equal in type and quality to that damaged. Repair sleeves shall be mechanical joint split sleeve. C. Water services: 1. Pipe: Copper, ASTM B88 Type K. Replace entire section of pipe between main and curb box. 2. Provide corporation stops, curb stops, and service boxes complete with lid and plug as required 3. If lead piping is encountered, contact Owner and record location. Damaged lead piping shall not be repaired. Replace with Type K copper where specified above. 4. Where curb box lids are located in new pavement, install flush with new pavement and provide plastic pipe sleeve in pavement. 3.15 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS A. Contractor shall repair or replace breaks in existing sewers caused by construction operations. Provide temporary connections if required. B. If pipe is damaged by construction operations such that it requires replacement, the following material shall be used: 1. Pipe: a. PVC, ASTM D1785: Minimum Pressure Class for pipe less than 4" (100 mm): 46 psi. b. Ductile iron; AWWA C151. C. D. m E. Pipe Size Minimum Pressure Class 4" thru 12" 200 mm thru 300 mm 350 14" thru 20" 350 mm thru 500 mm 250 24" thru 64" (600 mm thru 1,600 mm) 200 2. Connections: a. Flexible coupling in accordance with ASTM C425 for pipes 12"(300 mm) and smaller. b. Concrete collar minimum of 12" (300 mm) either side of joint and 6" (150 mm) thick for pipes larger than 12" (300 mm). buctile iron replacement pipe shall extend minimum of 2' (600 mm) beyond both sides of new sewer trench. (� N r o Provide positive slope to match existing sewer. _. - n N �= nt �eparate payment will not be made for these repairs but will be considered incidemwo cEmstrur" pf sewers. c-)—< r -t [� - c7 .o 3.16" REF(AIR OF SANITARY SERVICE CONNECTIONS =ern 'V M A. Repair breaks in existing lines caused by construction operations. ➢x N N B. Provide positive slope from house to sanitary sewer. C. Pipe replacement material: 1. Pipe shall be minimum thickness AWWA C151, Pressure Class 350 ductile iron. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 20 – SECTION 40 22t36 ms1869 C. If impossible to aintain required clearance, sewer shall be constructed of ductile iron pipe conforming to A A C151. 1. Horizontal se ration of at least 2'(600 mm) shall be provided. 2. Pressure test a 30 psi (207 kPa) for 1 hour to assure watertightness before backfilling. 3. Maximum allow le leakage shall be 0.1 gaUhr/1,000 ft/in (0.5 I1hr1100m1100 r m) diameter. D. Obtain authorization fr m Engineer to relocate force main to obtain 10' (3.0 m) of horizontal separation if possible. If impossibl o relocate force main to provide 10'(3.0 m) separation, at least 4'(1.2 m) of horizontal separation sh be provided. 3.12 NEW SEWER OR FORCE MAI\war NG WATER MAIN A. Notify Engineer if: 1. New sewer crosses ovein. 2. Sewer crosses under wnd vertical clearance is less than 18" (450 mm). 3. New force main crosseder water main and vertical clearance is less than 18" mm). B. If sewer crosses under water main, rel to water main to provide minimum 18" (450 m) vertical clearance, for minimum of 10' (3 m) each 'de of sewer. Locate cenZstandardcrorngth of water main pipe over sewer. C. If relocation of water main to obtain required c arance is not practisses over water main, construct sewer with one full length, 20' m) minimum, of dforming to �AW WA C151; center both sewer and water mai ipe lengths at cr D. If force main crosses over or underwater main am authorization from Engineer to relocate force main 3.13 RELOCATION OF WATER MAINS A. Minimum cover. 5'(1.5 m). B.' Relocate where shown or required by reconstruction. C. Use suitable fittings where grade or pipe manufacturer. , sewers. requires offsets lance is less than 18" (450 mm) obtain least 18" (450 mm) vertical clearance. N O verify size in ar�qnce 64—imely D=•r ter than thos1Pe&mr 19ndeclj6y �r- m rn a D. Use cutting -in sleyofpe split tees where required to make co ectionssting wate� mains. D E. Inspect each sectefects prior to lowering into trench. F. Cleaning and disi 1. Immediately prior to lowering into trench: a. Clean interior of all foreign material and dirt. b. Thoroughly swab or spray interior and ends with 1% hypochlorite solution. 2. During laying prevent ground water, soil and other foreign material from entering pipe. 3. After laying and leakage tests are completed, and before main is put into service: a. Inject solution of calcium hypochlorite and water at slow rate; minimum initial chlorine residual in mains shall be 50 mg/I. b. Let stand for 24 hours and test chlorine residual; minimum chlorine residual shall be 25 mg/l. c. Repeat above steps as necessary to secure desired minimum residual. d. After successfully maintaining chlorine residual outlined above, flush main until chlorine residual equals chlorine content of supply water. 4. Make connections to existing mains; place calcium hypochlorite inside relocated main prior to making connection. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SUCTION 40 23 36 - Page 21 G. Provide thrust restraints by restrained joints where piping changes direction. 3.14 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WATER MAINS AND SERVICES A. Contrafjor shall repair breaks in existing lines caused by construction operations. B. Water mates: Replace with pipe equal in type and quality to that damaged. Repair sleeves shall be mechanica oint split sleeve. C. Water service 1. Pipe: Cop r, ASTM B88 Type K. Replace entire section of pipe between main and curb box. 2. Provide corp ration stops, curb stops, and service boxes complete with lid and plug as required. 3. If lead piping i encountered, contact Owner and record location. Damaged lead piping shall not be repaired. R lace with Type K copper where specified above. 4. Where curb box'ds are located in new pavement, install flush with new pavement and provide plastic pipe sleev in pavement. 3.15 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS A. Contractor shall repair or rlace breaks in existing sewers caused by construction Provide temporary connecti ns if required. B. If pipe is damaged by constru ion operations such that it requires shall be used: 1. Pipe: a. PVC, ASTM D1785: Mini um Pressure Class for pip s b. Ductile iron; AWWA C151. the following material N O_ than 4" (100&m): 4q*i. Pipe Size Xinimum Pressure Class 4"thru 12" 200 mm thru 300 m 350 14' thru 20" 350 mm thru 500 rrA 250 24" thru 64" (600 mm thru 1,6Kmrnix 200 2. Connections: a. Flexible coupling i ccordance with b. Concrete collar nimum of 12" (300 larger than 1 300 mm). rn v C425 for pipes 12" (300 mm) and smaller. ither side of joint and 6" (150 mm) thick for pipes C. Ductil/poive ment pipe shall extend minimum o 2' (600 mm) beyond both sides of new sewer trench D. Providpe to match existing sewer. E. Separwill not be made for these repairs but will considered incidental to construction of sewers. 3.16 REPAIR OF SANITARY SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Repair breaks in existing lines caused by construction operations. B. Provide positive slope from house to sanitary sewer. C. Pipe replacement material: 1. Pipe shall be minimum thickness AWWA C151, Pressure Class 350 d the iron. 2. Joints: Push -on or mechanical. 3. Connection between existing service pipe and new repair pipe shall be by flexible couplings. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 21 2. Joints: Push -on or mechanical. 3. Connection between existing service pipe and new repair pipe shall be by flexible couplings. 4. Each service connection replacement shall consist of at least 2 pieces of pipe with joint centered in pipe trench. 5. Size: Match existing. 3.17 MANHOLES A. Standard manholes: 1. Conform to details shown. 2. 48" (1.2 m) and larger pipe base: Standard tee section (RCP). Pipe class same as main sewer. B. Drop connections: Conform to details shown; use at locations shown. C. Stub connections: 1. Provide where shown; make stub full length of pipe projecting from manhole at elevation shown. 2. Plug end with concrete stopper with joint similar to pipe; wedge 2" x 4" (50 mm x 100 mm) wood strut between stopper and wood block against wall of excavation. D. Set manhole rims flush with pavement grade. Slope if required to match street profile or side slope. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Gravity sewers, sanitary: 1. Conduct infiltration test on sewers located entirely below ground water table and conduct exfiltration test on sewers located partially or entirely above ground water table. Tests shall be conducted before connection of any sanitary services. 2. Manhole exfiltration test: Plug connecting pipes and fill sanitary sewer manhole with water to depth used in testing line or 6' (1.8 m) minimum; allow water to stand minimum of 2 hours and refill to original elevation; after minimum of 30 minutes, record difference in elevation and convert to gallons per hour lost. 3. Maximum allowable exfiltration or infiltration: 100 gal/mile/inch (1.85 I/100m/01.0 mm) diameter of sewer per 24-hour day in any test section, including manholes. 4. Visible leakage at joints, or leakage in excess of that specified, shall be repaired at Contractor's expense. 5. Furnish and install all plugs, measuring devices, and other equipment. 6. Maximum length of test section: 1,600'(460 m). 7. Conduct tests in accordance with details shown. 8. Low pressure air testing may be used at Contractor's option. Low pressure air test shall be in general accordance with: a. ASTM C828 for vitrified clay pipe. b. ASTM C924 for reinforced concrete pipe 24" (600 mm) and smaller. c. ASTM C1103 for reinforced concrete pipe larger than 24" (600 mm). d. ASTM F1417 for plastic and ductile iron pipe. 9. Replacement of existing sewers which have service connections maybe exempted from leakage testing requirements. _ N O B. Gravity sewers, storm: O gn _ � 1. No tests for leakage required. g.;-;pooloints 2. Visually inspect interior joints; any joints or sections of line having defective excessive infiltration, shall be corrected at Contractors expense. -gin r C. Gravity sewers, alignment test: af'''t M = m 1. Check alignment by lamping, laser, or other approved survey method. a v 2. Sewers 15" (375 mm) and larger, maximum misalignment: D •• a. Vertical: 0.20'(60 mm). rV o b. Horizontal: 0.50' (150 mm). 3. Sewers smaller than 15" (375 mm): Lamp shall be visible through section of pipe lamped. WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 22 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 4. Misaligned, displaced, or otherwise defective sewer shall be repaired or replaced at Contractors expense. D. Pressure mains and relocated water mains: 1. Furnish and install all materials and equipment necessary. 2. Flush out line before test to remove air; insert taps if necessary to blow off air trapped in line. 3. Pressure test for 2 hours at 100 psi (690 kPa) at lowest point in line under test; maximum pressure variation during test: 5 psi (35 kPa). 4. Leakage test: Perforrn concurrently with pressure test. Maintain 100 psi (690 kPa) pressure for 2 hours; measure water supplied to maintain test pressure within 5 psi (35 kPa) of test pressure by pumping from drum or by similar means. Compute maximum allowable leakage by formula. L = SD S 133,200 L = Maximum allowable leakage in gallons per hour S = Length of pipe test in feet D = Nominal pipe diameter in inches P = Average test pressure, psig 5. Locate and repair or replace all defective pipe or fittings until leakage is within the specified allowance. E. Flexible sewers, deflection test: Installed pipe deflection shall be tested by Contractor with rigid ball or 9 -arm mandrel or other approved "Go -No Go" device. Sewer shall be tested no sooner than 30 days after backfilling. Pipe with deflection exceeding 5% shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner. F. Air piping and digester gas piping: Test pneumatically, in accordance with ANSI B31.1 at pressures specified. Provide compressors, meters, gages, piping, fittings, accessories, and labor required to conduct tests. G. Digester gas service valves shall be dry seat tested for gas service by manufacturer prior to shipment. 3.19 PIPING SCHEDULES A. Refer to Piping Schedules specified and to SCI standards referenced. Pipe materials and accessories not specified by SCI standards are specified herein. B. Deviation from piping specification: 1. If pipe wall thickness specified is not available, use next heavier wall thickness. 2. Allow 10% additional wall thickness for pipe wall thinning on steel pipe bends. EXPOSED PIPING SCHEDULE Piping System Size, Inch Test Pressure, Pipe and Fittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Joints Spew T ec. r psi m SH Sodium All 150 Reinforced Coupling 402316R B 336 "0&23 gypochlorite Carrier Flexible ip Hose PVC M m S dium P All 150 CPVC Solvent 40 23BID?40 23 36 �i Hypochlorite Carrier Welded N ren Pipe Sodium Hypochlorite All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 Containment Pipe Welded WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM 26710.01.00 Page 22 — SECTION 40 23 36 ms1869 4. Each service connection replacement shall consist of at least 2 pieces of pipe with joint centered in pipe trench. 5. Size: Match existing. 3.17 MANHOLES A. Standard manholes: 1. Conform to details hown. 2. 48" (1.2 m) and lar er pipe base: Standard tee section (RCP). Pipe class same as main sewer. B. Drop connections: Conf to details shown; use at locations shown. C. Stub connections: 1. Provide where shown; ake stub full length of pipe projecting from manhole at elevation shown. 2. Plug end with concretes pper with joint similar to pipe; wedge 2"x 4" (50 mm x 100 mm) wood strut between stopper an wood block against wall of excavation. D. Set manhole rims flush with pa ment grade. Slope if required to match street profile or side slope. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Gravity sewers, sanitary: d 1. Conduct infiltration test on sewe located entirely below ground water to a andgnduct exfiltration test on sewers located artially or entirely above ground wateI7T�ts sPV h'Sl�e conducted before connection of an sanitary services. j -0 .... ? 2. Manhole exfiltration test: Plug conn cling pipes and fill sanitary sewer e with wa depth used in testing line or 6' (1.8 minimum; allow water to stand min of911ou refill to original elevation; after minim of 30 minutes, record difference ip Vati nd art to gallons per hour lost. (� 3. Maximum allowable exfiltration or infiltr ion: 100 gal/mile/inc 0 rriT) diameter of sewer per 24-hour day in any test sectio includin as. Zy 4. Visible leakage at joints, or leakage in a at specified, shall be repaired at eontractor's 5. 6. 7. 8. U expense. Furnish and install all and other equipment. Maximum length oft ection: 1,500'(460 Conduct_"cordance with details show . Low pre sure air testing may be used at Contra or general accordance with: a. ASTM C828 for vitrified clay pipe. b. ASTM C924 for reinforced concrete pipe 24" (6 c. ASTM C1103 for reinforced concrete pipe large d. ASTM F1417 for plastic and ductile iron pipe. Replacement of existing sewers which have service testing requirements. option. Low pressure air test shall be in mm) and smaller. ian 24" (600 mm). may be exempted from leakage B. Gravity sewers, storm: 1. No tests for leakage required. 2. Visually inspect interior joints; any joints or sections of line havi defective pipe, poorjoints, or excessive infiltration, shall be corrected at Contractors expense. C. Gravity sewers, alignment test: 1. Check alignment by lamping, laser, or other approved survey method. 2. Sewers 15"(375 mm) and larger, maximum misalignment: a. Vertical: 0.20'(60 mm). b. Horizontal: 0.50' (150 mm). 3. Sewers smaller than 15" (375 mm): Lamp shall be visible through section of pipe lamped. 4. Misaligned, displaced, or otherwise defective sewer shall be repaired or replaced at Contractors expense. 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 23 D. Pressure mains and relocated water mains: 1. Furnish and install all materials and equipment necessary. 2. Flush out line before test to remove air; insert taps if necessary to blow off air trapped in line. 3. Pressure test f r 2 hours at 100 psi (690 kPa) at lowest point in IiAi3 under test; maximum pressure vari ion during test: 5 psi (35 kPa). 4. Leakage test: erform concurrently with pressure test. Maintain 100 psi (690 kPa) pressure for 2 hours; measur water supplied to maintain test pressure within 5 psi (35 kPa) of test pressure by pumping from um or by similar means. Compute maximum allowable leakage by formula. L = Maximu allowable leakage in gallons per hour S = Length c pipe test in feet D = Nominal Rpe diameter in inches P = Average t t pressure, psig 5. Locate and repair or rep all defective pipe or fittings until leakage is within the specified allowance. \\ E. Flexible sewers, deflection test: nstalled pipe deflection shall be tested by ContracCwwith rigid ball or 9 -arm mandrel or other approv "Go -No Go" device. Sewer shall be tested.ro soor+er than days after backfilling. Pipe with deflecti exceeding 5% shall be removed and rd o c Owner. 1 F. Air piping and digester gas piping: Te t pneumatically, in accordance nwith31.1at pr"i es specified. Provide compressors, mete ,gages, piping, fittings, accesb�equiradAn conduct tests.G. Digester gas service valves shall be dry se tested for service byr prls to shipment. 3.19 PIPING SCHEDULES A. Refer to Piping Schedules specified and to CI andards referenced. Pipe materials and accessories not specified by SCI standards are spa ' ed here . B. Deviation from piping specificatio ' 1. If pipe wall thickness specif is not available, us next heavier wall thickness. 2. Allow 10% additional we ickness for pipe wall th ning on steel pipe bends. EXPOSED PIPING SCHED E Piping System Size, Inch Test Pressure, Pipe an ittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Join Spec. Type Spec. psi SH Sodium All 150 Reinforced Coupling 40 23 36 Ball 402336 Hypochlorite Carrier Flexible Hose PVC Sodium All 150 CPVC Solvent 40 36 Ball 402336 Hypochlorite Carrier Welded Pipe Sodium Hypochlorite All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 Containment Pipe I I IWelded D Drain <4 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 b II 4023 36 Welded 26710.01.00 WASTEWATER PROCESS PIPING SYSTEM ms1869 SECTION 40 23 36 - Page 23 EXPOSED PIPING SCHEDULE Piping System Size, Inch Test Pressure, Pipe and Fittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Joints Spec. Type Spec. Spec. psi psi D Drain <4 All PVC Solvent 402356 ball 40 23 36 40 23 36 D Drain < 4 10 Welded Push -on 40 23 36 Plug 40 23 36 2:4 10 Ductile Iron Flanged 40 23 36 plug 40 23 36 EW; Effluent Water, <4 125 PVC, Solvent 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 EWD except where Potable Water Stainless Welded 20 05 112EQ N passing through godium All Steel Flanged 40 23 36 gate 402336 AU3 36 wall. 24 Ductile Iron Flexible HW Potable Hot Water tochlorite rier Hose r PVC 20 05 13 ball 20 05 23 HWS; Heating Water All 150 150 PVC 20 05 13 40 23 20 05 23 HWR Supply and Return Hypochlorite Welded N POL Liquid Polymer All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 Welded POS Polymer Solution All 125 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 Welded PW Potable Water All 20 05 13 ball 20 05 23 SL' 'Includes all TWAS, All 100 Fiberglass Welded 40 23 36 plug 40 23 36 PS, SL, DS, TS, Stainless Flanged HS, and CS inside Steel Grooved" Digester Area, also Push -on decant piping, effluent water passing through walls. STD Storm Drain 20 05 00 including Roof Drains V Vent <4 10 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 --- 40 23 36 Welded >_4 Ductile Iron Flanged 40 23 36 40 23 36 " Grooved joints shall be same type as specified in this Section for aeration air piping. BURIED PIPING SCHEDULE Piping System Size, Inch Test Pressure Pipe and Fittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Joints Spec. Type Spec. psi DS Di ested Sludge All 150 Ductile iron Push -on 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 D Drain < 4 10 PVC Push -on 40 23 36 Plug 40 23 36 >=4 Ductile iron Push -on 40 23 36 PI 40 23 36 NG Natural Gas All 15 20 05 1 p14 20 05 23 PW Potable Water 20 05 112EQ N SH godium All 150 Reinforced Coupling 40 23 BW AU3 36 yyp-- Flexible r tochlorite rier Hose r PVC Sodium All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 Z , • 1 0 Hypochlorite Welded N Containment PipeI IN EXPOSED PIPING SCHEDULE Piping System ze, I h Test Pressure, Pipe and Fittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Joints Spec. Type Spec. psi DS Digested Sludge 24 10 Ductile Iron Flanged 402336 plug 402336 EW; Effluent Water, <4 125 PVC, Solvent 40 23 36 ball 402336 EWD except where >=4 Stainless Welded 40 23 36 ug 402336 NG passing through All 15 Steel Flanged 40 23 36 gate 40 23 36 PW wall. t4 Ductile Iron 20 05 13 HW Potable Hot Water All 150 Reinforced Coupling 20 05 13 ball 20 05 23 HWS; Heating Water All 15 Flexible 20 05 13 20 05 23 HWR Supply and Return PVC POL Liquid Polymer All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 Hypochlorite Welded J PO$ Polymer Solution All 125VC I Solvent 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 Welded PW Potable Water All 200513 ball 20 05 23 SL* *Includes all TWAS, All 100 Fiber ss Welded 40 23 36 plug 40 23 36 PS, SL, DS, TS, Stainla Flanged HS, and CS inside Steel Grooved" Digester Area, also Push -on decant piping, N effluent water passing through N T walls. 'C-) STD Storm Drain 20 05 00 n { including Roof Drains -Gr V Vent <4 10 P Solve t 40 23 36 O� 40 Welde �x * >_4 Ductile Iron Flanged 40 23 36 %'' 40 23 36 Grooved joints shall be same type as ecified in this Section for aeration air p ing. BURIED PIPING SCHEDULE Piping System Size, Inch Test Pressure Pipe and Fittings Valves Abbrev Service Material Joints Spec. Type Spec. psi DS Digested Sludge All 150 Ductile iron Push -on 40 23 36 ball 40 23 36 D Drain <4 10 PVC Push -on 40 23 36 lug 40 2336 >=4 Ductile iron Push -on 40 23 36 ug 402336 NG Natural Gas All 15 200513 plilk, 20 05 23 PW Potable Water 20 05 13 SH Sodium All 150 Reinforced Coupling 40 23 36 Ball 40 23 36 Hypochlorite Flexible Carrier Hose PVC Sodium All 150 PVC Solvent 40 23 36 Hypochlorite Welded J Containment Pipe , I I I END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 26710.01.00 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING ms1869 SECTION 40 41 13 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric, self-regulating heating cable and components for heat tracing and freeze protection of water, air, fuel, oil, and sewage lines. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit with Bid: Manufacturers technical data/cut sheets on each product to be used. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit after design and 30 days before shipment. 1. Isometric drawings showing heater circuit, location of power connections, end tefWations, tees, splices, and control schematic where applicable. �nT n 2. Plan view drawings with dimensions. p A 3. Calculations. i 4. 5. Wiring and termination drawings. Heating cable voltage and ampacity. CA B. Quality assurance data: 1. Master drawing index. 2. Interface coordination details.N 3. Component and accessories list. 4. Ratings and nameplate information. 5. Installation information. 6. Certified production test reports. 7. Test reports for previous design, and documentation showing previous design ratings and configurations. 8. Documentation showing UL and FM system listing. 9. Circuit breakdown table showing following for each circuit: a. Heater model number. b. Circuit length. c. Circuit breaker size. d. Steady-state amperage load of each circuit. e. Initial 1,000 volts do Megger readings. 10. Maximum heating MI cable sheath temperature calculations in accordance with either FM or CSA methods. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation, maintenance, and installation manuals including one complete set of final drawings. 1. General description and technical data. 2. Receiving, storage, installation, and testing instructions. 3. Operating and maintenance procedures. 4. Complete documentation of inspections and tests performed, including any logs, curves, and certificates. Documentation shall note any replacement of equipment or components that failed during testing. 5. Commissioning test plan and checkoff list. 6. "As -Built" Record Drawings: During system installation, maintain separate hard copy set of device location floor plan drawings, schematic wiring diagrams and point-to-point device wiring diagrams to be used for Record Drawings. Set shall be kept up to date, reflecting changes and additions made to system. Copies of final "as built" Record Drawings shall be provided to Owner in DWG format using latest version of AutoCAD. 7. Warranty data. 8. Spare parts lists. PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 41 13 ms1869 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. ISO 9002 certified. 2. Shall have produced similar electrical equipment for minimum period of five (5) years. 3. When requested by Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be furnished. A. Design, fabricate, furnish, install, and test UL -listed and FM approved electric heat tracing system, including, but not limited to: 1. Heating cables. 2. Temperature sensors. 3. Temperature controllers. 4. Enclosures. 5. Auxiliary equipment and controls. B. Heat trace piping, drains, valves, traps, and accessories as indicated on P&ID(s), pipe code schedule, line list, mechanical insulation specification, or design drawings. C. Instrument tubing shall be heat traced if connected to piping that is also heat traced. D. Supply of materials related to power supply connections are covered in other sections. E. Design equipment enclosure in accordance with seismic requirements listed in most recent local building codes and Data Sheets. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Design, manufacture, and test in accordance with minimum applicable requirements of Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM), IEEE 515 and 622, NFPA 70, and UL 746B. 2. Standards of foreign organizations shall not be used without written approval from Engineer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Heat trace components shall have nonprorated warranty against manufacturing defects for period of 10 years. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare detailed packing lists and shipping notification for items shipped. B. During delivery and storage handle equipment to prevent damage, denting, or scoring. C. Store equipment and their components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction debris, and physical damage in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS o A. Chromolox. CO rrri �-< B. Raychem �-� �, r C. Co �r- rn Thermon. -<m A D. Or equal. D 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — A. Design, fabricate, furnish, install, and test UL -listed and FM approved electric heat tracing system, including, but not limited to: 1. Heating cables. 2. Temperature sensors. 3. Temperature controllers. 4. Enclosures. 5. Auxiliary equipment and controls. B. Heat trace piping, drains, valves, traps, and accessories as indicated on P&ID(s), pipe code schedule, line list, mechanical insulation specification, or design drawings. C. Instrument tubing shall be heat traced if connected to piping that is also heat traced. D. Supply of materials related to power supply connections are covered in other sections. E. Design equipment enclosure in accordance with seismic requirements listed in most recent local building codes and Data Sheets. 26710.01.00 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING ms1869 SECTION 40 41 13 - Page 3 2.03 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide recommendation for attachment of equipment enclosure to foundation or structural supports with design drawings, as applicable. Method of attachment will take into account seismic requirements of job site as indicated on Data Sheets. 2.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide detailed design using standard heat -tracing design software. As minimum, design shall provide following: 1. Circuit identification number. 2. Maintain temperature. 3. Line size and insulation. 4. Heat loss for pipe, valves, and supports. 5. Amount and type of heating cable required. 6. Spiral requirements. 7. Heating cable service voltage. 8. Heating cable power output at maintain temperature. 9. Minimum and maximum maintain temperature vs. minimum and maximum ambient tAmperatures. 10. Circuit breaker and transformer sizing. o J B. Coordinate heat tracing design with system design temperatures, insulation typ %Asulan t thicknesses, and pipe supports, as indicated on drawings, pipe code schedule, rM914st, pe supper schedule, and mechanical specifications. )-< 1 r SELF-REGULATING HEATING CABLES—<I- 2.05i = o� A. Heat -tracing systems for use at temperatures up to continuous exposure of 2500F—ji i. *and intermittent exposure temperature of 420°F (215°C) shall use self-regulating type,16f heatlit cable. B. Self-regulating heating cable shall vary its power output relative to temperature of surface of pipe or vessel. Design cable such that it can be crossed over itself and cut to length in field. C. Design self-regulating heating cable for useful life of 20 years or more with "power on" continuously, based on following useful life criteria: 1. Retention of at least 75% of rated power after 20 years of operation at maximum published continuous exposure (maintain) temperature. 2. Retention of at least 90% of rated power after 1000 hours of operation at maximum published intermittent exposure temperature. Testing shall conform to UL 7468. 2.06 FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Heating cable shall consist of two 16 AWG or larger nickel -plated copper bus wires, embedded in self- regulating polymeric core that controls power output so that cable can be used directly on plastic or metallic pipes. Cables shall have temperature identification number (T -rating) of T6 (185°F or 65°C) without use of thermostats. B. Each heat tracer circuit shall have EPD (Equipment Protection Device) style breakers or controllers as an approved ground fault protection device. C. Heating cable shall have tinned copper braid with resistance less than heating cable bus wire resistance as determined in type test (ASTM, 8193, Sec. 5). Protect braid from chemical attack and mechanical abuse by modified polyolefin or fluoropolymer outerjacket. D. To provide rapid heat -up, to conserve energy, and to prevent overheating of fluids and plastic pipe, heating cable shall have following minimum self-regulating indices. Self-regulating index is the rate of change of power output in watts per degree Fahrenheit or watts per degree Celsius, as measured between temperatures of 50°F (10°C) and 100°F (38°C) and confirmed by type test and published data sheets: PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 40 41 13 ms1869 Heating Cable (Watt/ft) S.R. Index(Watt/OF) S.R. Index(Waft/OC). 3 0.038 0.068 5 0.060 0.108 8 0.074 0.133 10 0.100 0.180 E. To ensure self-regulating heating cable does not increase power output when accidentally exposed to high temperatures resulting in thermal runaway and self -ignition, cable shall produce less than 0.5 watt per foot (1.64 watts per meter) when energized and heated to 350°F (177°C) for 30 minutes. After test, if cable is reenergized, it shall not have an increasing power output leading to thermal runaway. F. Self-regulating heating cable shall retain at least 90% of its original power output after having been cycled 300 times between 50°F (10°C) and 210°F (990C), allowing at least 6 minutes of dwell time at each temperature. G. Heating cable shall have continuous exposure (maintain) capability up to 150°F (65°C) and intermittent exposure capability up to 185°F (85°C). 2.07 PROCESS TEMPERATURE WITH NO STEAM EXPOSURE A. Heating cable shall consist of two 16 AWG or larger nickel -plated copper bus wires, embedded in self- regulating polymeric core that controls power output so cable has temperature identification number (T -rating) of T4 (275°F or 135°C) without use of thermostats. B. Each heat tracer circuit shall have EPD style breakers or controllers as an approved ground fault protection device. No C. Heating cable shall have tinned copper braid with resistance less than heating bire _` resistance as determined in type test (ASTM, B193, Sec. 5). Protect braid fro�em�1 j nicabattack4wd mechanical abuse by fluoropolymer outer jacket. n-< 1 —+C-' cn D. Self-regulating heating cable shall retain at least 90% of its original power outp jctMr having A cycled 300 times between 50°F (10°C) and 300°F (110°C), allowing at least 6 ri s offtwell f at each temperature. zd E. Heating cable shall have continuous and intermittent exposure capability up to 225°F (11M). 2.08 SYSTEMS FOR DIVISION 1 CLASSIFIED HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS A. Requirements are in addition to those specified above. B. Self-regulating heating cable shall be specifically FM -approved or CSA -certified for use in Division 1 locations. All Class I, Div I designs must be reviewed by manufacturer. C. Ground fault protection device set at 30 mA, with nominal 100 ms response time, shall be used to protect each circuit. D. Temperature identification number (T -rating) of cable used shall comply with FM and CSA requirements as applicable. E. Connection methods used with cable shall be compatible and approved as part of system manufactured and supplied by heating cable vendor for use in Division 01 location. F. Heating cable shall have continuous and intermittent exposure capability up to 225°F (1100C). Heating cable shall have continuous exposure (maintain) capability up to 250°F (121 °C) and intermittent exposure capability up to 420°F (215°C or 250 psi steam). 26710.01.00 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING ms1869 SECTION 40 41 13 - Page 5 G. For plastic pipe and vessel applications, heating cable shall have continuous exposure capability up to 150°F (65°C) and intermittent exposure capability up to 185°F (85°C). 2.09 LONG LINE SYSTEMS A. Freeze protection for distances between 500' up to 1000'(152 m up to 304 m). 1. Heating cable shall consist of two 10 AWG nickel -plated copper bus wires embedded in self- regulating polymeric core that controls power output so that cable can be used directly on plastic or metallic pipes. Cables shall have temperature identification number (T -rating) of T6 (185°F or 85°C) without use of thermostats. 2. Each heat tracer circuit shall have EPD style breakers or controllers as an approved ground fault protection device. 3. For all 3-phase heating cables, a 70mA ground fault device is recommended to minimize nuisance tripping due to long heating cable lengths and high voltage heating cable. 4. Heating cable shall have tinned copper braid with resistance less than heating cable bus wire resistance as determined in type test (ASTM, B193, Sec. 5). Protect braid from chemical attack and mechanical abuse by fluoropolymer outerjacket. 5. Heating cable shall have continuous exposure capability up to 150°F (65°C) and intermittent exposure capability up to 185°F (850C). 2.10 TERMINATIONS FOR SELF-REGULATING HEATING CABLES A. Connection components used to terminate self-regulating heating cables, includingy2wer compactors, splices, tees, and connectors, shall be approved for respective area classifi9tion aappro as system with particular type of heating cable in use. 4 .� B. Do not use terminations which are manufactured by vendors other than cabli-Aufd&rer. C. Power connection shall have an LED power indications S D. End Seal shall be an LED indicating type E. Components shall be rated NEMA 4X. 2.11 MINERAL INSULATED CABLE SYSTEMS A.. Heat -tracing applications with continuous exposure (maintain) temperatures above 250°F (121°C) or intermittent exposure temperatures above 420°F (215°C) shall use factory -terminated, mineral - insulated -type (MI) cables. B. MI cable shall be magnesium oxide insulated, with copper or alloy conductors and an Incoloy 825 sheath. Join heating section of cable to cold lead made of Incoloy 825. C. Each cable shall be factory -terminated to required length, consisting of lengths required for pipe or equipment, plus an allowance for areas of additional heat loss such as valves flanges fittings, supports, and like, plus reasonable excess to allow for field variations. Cold lead section shall be 7' (2.1m) long unless otherwise specified. D. Maximum heating cable sheath temperature shall be in accordance with either FM or CSA method of calculation. E. Ship each cable with catalog number marked on outside of package, and permanent metallic cable tag containing heating cable length, wattage, voltage, and current draw. If cable has been designed for hazardous location, tag shall also indicate area classification and heat -tracing circuit number. 2.12 THERMOSTATS AND CONTACTORS A. Freeze protection systems shall operate using self-regulating control or with thermostat and contactor. PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 40 41 13 ms1869 B. Provide required NEMA enclosure types for each installed location. 2.13 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING A. Attach nameplates with self -tapping, stainless steel screws. Adhesive nameplates are not acceptable. B. Lettering shall be black on white background. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory testing: Cables shall be capable of passing 2.5 kV dielectric test for one minute (ASTM D2633) after undergoing 0.5 kg -m impact (BS 6351, Part 1, 8.1.10). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations referenced practices, guidelines and applicable codes. Fumish necessary interconnections, services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified. Install power conductors, control signals and grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise and surges from adversely affecting system operation. B. Where possible, install wiring in dedicated conduit throughout. Cable shall not be pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes, junction boxes, or similar fittings with other conductors. N C. 4o not install heating circuits until pipes and equipment have met required tests inclucg pneumatic leak tests. CD c7 rn "j1 D. Permanently fix signs to outside of finished thermal insulation for visibility frorrampnd level. shall read: "Electric Traced" Cabinets shall be labeled with identification as lgy4ed4R Ow r their representative. G rn m t " _,;;a 3 E. Installation shall be inspected by Owner or their representative and megger tegj-j4shaee coeted before insulation is installed. 7 w 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test procedure: Measure heater circuit continuity and insulation resistance between braid and bus wires with 2,500 volt do megohmmeter. Energize system and demonstrate operation and functionality. Measure ampacity of circuit to verify value is approximately in accordance with design calculation. B. Timing: Perform tests after pipe insulation has been installed and prior to installation of wall or ceiling panels. C. Testing shall be witnessed by Owner or their representative. D. Megger readings shall be independent of heater length. Circuits yielding unacceptable readings must be repaired or replaced. E. Submit records of test data to Owner. F. Correct any and all deficiencies observed during final checkoff at no cost to Owner until equipment and system components operate properly. G. Installation field reports shall be included in all maintenance, operation and installation manuals. 26710.01.00 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING ms1869 SECTION 40 41 13 - Page 7 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Maintain qualified field service engineer to assist installer in training, system commissioning, and basic troubleshooting. N O_ O A J N -00 D � C r Gm a rn �x D N O PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 40 41 13 ms1869 DATA SHEETS SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Equipment Name: Belt Filter Press Exhaust Duct Exterior of Building Tag No.: Rev. DESCRIPTION UNITS SPEC DATA VENDOR DATA Manufacturer Crn By Manufacturer Catalog/Serial No. By Manufacturer SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS D Ambient Temperature °F Freeze Protection Altitude Ft 650' Hazardous Area Y/N N Specific local Building Code and specific sections on seismic requirements used in equipment desi n _- By Manufacturer Voltage 120/208/480 120 END OF SECTION 1) J. N. Gavin 2) L. E. INGRAM J Crn s (� D re 26710.01.00 COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 80 00 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide supervision, labor, coordination, tools, material, equipment, and services required to perform commissioning and start-up of each respective item of equipment and systems furnished and/or installed as a part of this contract. B. Provide supervision, labor, and assistance to manufacturer's field representative and technical directors of installation for equipment installed as a part of this Contract. Follow specified procedures and instructions provided by these representatives. Representatives will not be present at all times. Owner or Owner's Representative will determine when representatives are required. C. Provide construction labor required for commissioning process necessary to support schedule as determined by Owner or Owner's Representative, including initial total plant startup. 1. Plant startup will proceed on a schedule determined by Owner or Owner's Representative and may entail 24-hour per day activity until startup is complete. 2. Owner will provide operators for commissioning process. Owner or Owner's Representative will determine when startup has been completed. 3. Startup refers not only to startup of total plant but also to individual systems requiring checkout prior to total plant startup. � 0 D. Verify operation performance of equipment and associated accessories for cgnpliani%as de"bed in Contract Documents. -rn rTt E. Document test inspections. it ::.4 Cl) F. Verify application of operation and maintenance manuals, record documents, spaglistingrVnd other items as may be specified for supporting of piping systems and equipmerm 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS�o A. Quality assurance data: 1. Commissioning responsibilities list including breakdown of each trades responsibilities during commissioning activities. 2. Sample documentation for tests and inspections required by Code Authorities. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record documents: 1. Provide alignment and vibration tolerances and readings after adjustments for devices and systems defined below. 2:. Provide instrument calibration reports for each field and panel device furnished and/or installed as part of this contract. Completed calibration reports shall include, but not be limited to: a. Equipment: Instrument tag number, manufacturer, model number and serial number. For valves, include fail position, model number of actuator, model number of positioner (if included) and power requirements. b. Service: Application, building, floor, and area. c. Test data: Test equipment used, test performance data for instrument in "As Found" and "As Left" conditions. d. Date of calibration and name of individual performing calibration. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Assure participation and cooperation of specialty contractors under its jurisdiction as required for commissioning process. COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 80 00 ms1869 B. Checkout each piece of equipment and each system with approved checklist to ensure Contract Document conformance prior to start-up. C. Keep track of commissioning activities with acceptance for operation checklist. Refer to mechanical and electrical technical specifications for specific requirements and JMH1I for individual equipment and component requirements. D. Develop detailed commissioning documents for Owner's approval. E. Conform to Owner's plant operating procedures for commissioning and startup of equipment. 1. Notify Owner, in writing, 1 day in advance of commissioning of equipment or systems. 2. Notify Owner, in writing, 1 day in advance of startup of equipment or systems upon completion of commissioning process. 3. Upon completion of start-up, equipment or systems shall be turned over to Owner and tagged as accepted. No additional work on or operation of equipment or systems shall be allowed by Contractor without written consent of Owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Piping system joint leak testing compound: "Leak -Tek," or equal. B. Anti -rust compound for packing gland threads and valve stems: "Moly-Cote" or "Fel-Pro." 2.02 TEST EQUIPMENT A. _Provide test equipment required for commissioning and startup of equipment. B. Provide and maintain tools and test equipment in first-class condition and quantities sufficient to assure timely, successful performance and completion of required Work. C. Test equipment shall have recent calibration checks by equipment manufacturer or authorized facility to assure accuracy of commissioning process. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Installation verification: 1. Prior to system start-up, the Contractor, Owner, and Ownefs Representative shall 9nduct final installation verification audit. Contractor shall be responsible for completee.S �qss of YaFk to Owner's satisfaction including change orders and punch list items. Audit shall incluvbAut ra0f be lirwifad to, checking of: 0 a. Piping specialties including balancing, control, and isolation valves. n--{ r r b. Control sensor types and locations. =r, cn c. Identification of piping, valves, equipment, controls, etc.r s„ rn d. Major equipment, fans, valves, starters, gages, thermometers, etc. - M e. Documentation of prestart-up tests performed, including manufacturer oryTests. 2. If Work is found to be incomplete, incorrect, or nonfunctional, Contractor skall takesprrective action before system start-up work proceeds. If during system start-up additional items are found, Contractor shall take corrective action before system start-up is completed. B. Operation verification: 1. After system equipment, wiring, piping, and component installation has been verified, system start-up and calibration shall commence. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for operation and control of installed systems. 3. During system checkout, operation checklist shall be filled out to verify system operation. 4. Owner and/or Owner's Representative shall verify system operation with responsible Contractor. 26710.01.00 COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 80 00 - Page 3 3.02 EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING A. Bearings: 1. Inspect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign materials. 2. Verify alignment. B. Drives: 1. Inspect for cleanliness; clean and remove foreign materials before starting operation. 2. Adjust drives for all alignment of sheaves, V -belts, and couplings. 3. Adjust tension in V -belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed. C. Lubrication: 1. Lubricants for initial operation shall be furnished by Contractor. 2. Lubricants required for storage and flushing of equipment furnished shall be furnished by Contractor. 3. Lubricate bearings and fill oil reservoir prior to operation. Perform lubrication in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. After Contractor lubricates equipment, Contractor shall affix a tag to equipment stating lubricant used, quantity, date lubricated, and name of person lubricating equipment. 5. Submit 2 volumes of lubrication requirements to Owner at site for each item of equipment furnished requiring lubrication. D. Motors: 1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value. 2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction. N O E. Pumps: o -+ 1. Check mechanical seals and packing for cleanliness and adjustment before;l6fBnghomp.n 2. Verify that pump and connecting piping are free of dirt, debris, and scale befgrlircuuRing I gzid through pumpr 3. Check running clearances. �r m a F. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance. Provide factory authorized persdi�for. justrt� when needed. Y N G. Remove any rust, scale, and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. 3.03 PIPING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING A. Check settings of pipe hangers. B. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded connection, using approved compound. 1. Examine flanged joints: a. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation. b. Replace flange gaskets that show any sign of leakage after tightening. Z Inspect screwed joints: a. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust to form. b. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound, and remake joints. C. Vent gasses trapped in any part of liquid systems. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems. D. After system has been placed in operation: 1. Clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valves seats, and headers in fluid systems, to assure they are free of foreign materials. 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 2153 - Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of Section 0173 19. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. As specified in Section 09 96 00. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide inspection and testing by service representative as specified in Section 01 43 33. B. Describe installation to CONTRACTOR. C. Inspect and accept installation for compliance with warranty requirements. D. Direct and witness equipment testing prior to plant startup. E. Test equipment to show it can achieve performance and design requirements specified. END OF SECTION 1) J.M. Brady 2) v 0 rn N T C r �r o rn m oT� � _ )> _ SLUDGE PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 43 21 53 ms1869 Q. Manufacturer: Boerger, Netzsch, or equal. 2.03 MOTORS A. Standards: Applicable parts of NEMA MG1. B. Type: Horizontal, squirrel -cage induction, solid shaft. Provide grease -lubricated ball bearings. C. Enclosures: TEFC, suitable for NEC Class I, Group D, Division 2 locations. D. Starting: Reduced voltage for variable speed pumps. E. Ratings: 1. Continuous duty. 2. Nameplate motor horsepower shall be not less than maximum required pump input for maximum conditions of head and capacity specified. 3. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. 4. Service factor: NEMA standard. F. Insulation and temperature rating: Class B insulation for use in 40°C ambient. G. Efficiency: 1. Motors shall be high-energy efficient -type. 2. Nominal full -load efficiency determined in accordance with NEMA MG1-12.54.1. 3. Nameplate identification in accordance with NEMA MG1-12.54.2. 4. Nominal full -load efficiency shall equal or exceed values listed in Table 12-6B of NEMA MG1- 12.55 for various motor speed and enclosure types. H. Motors used with variable speed pumps shall be completely coordinated with pumps and variable speed drive system for intended duty. I. Winding temperature switches: Dual thermostats for each motor stator windings in accordance with Section 26 05 03. 2.04 SHOP FINISHING A. Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be sandblasted to commercial grade finish SSPC SP6; and given 1 shop coat of Tnemec "66-1211 Epoxoline Primer" epoxy primer, 4.0 mdft. B. Coat machine -finished surfaces with suitable corrosion preventative compound. o C. Motors shall be manufacturer's standard finish painting. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Permanently attach stainless steel nameplate to pump. 1. Equipment number (see Drawings). 2. Serial number of pump. 3. Capacity in gpm. 4. Pumping head in feet. 5. Speed, rpm. 6. Manufacturer's name. 7. Size and type of pump. 8. Design pressure. .yn � co -f cJt r -=t n Nameplate shall conW;IlovVg inf[Mition: D ro B. Provide progressive cavity and rotary lobe pumps with cast -in or permanently attached direction -of - rotation arrow. 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 21 53 - Page 3 H. Pumps of same type shall be products of single manufacturer. 2.02 ROTARY LOBE PUMPS A. Designation on Drawings: Bek Filter Press Pumps No. P8810A, P8820A, P8830A. B. Type: Rotary lobe, positive displacement, suitable for pumping anaerobically digested primary and waste activated sludges. C. Quantity: 3. D. Performance 1. Normal operating capacity: 130 to 250 gpm (16 Ips). 2. Rated operating point: 250 gpm (16 Ips) at 55 (17m) TDH. 3. Maximum pump speed at rated point: 300 rpm. 4. Maximum Motor Size: 15 hp. Motor size shall be selected to provide the torque required to meet the design operating point(s) and the starting torque for sludges. 5. Pumps shall be suitable for pumping sludge with following solids concentration by weight and shall be capable of passing spheres of following sizes without clogging or damaging pumps: 4% solids; 2" (50 mm) diameter. E. Materials: 1. Ductile or cast iron core dual lobe -type rotors, covered with urethane or Buna-N having Durometer hardness 65-72.. 0 2. Impeller housing: Cast or ductile iron. , 3. Shaft: Carbon steel with replaceable stellite-coated stainless steel sleeves Aha�pas*g thMW gland area. >� i-0 4. Gear case: Cast or ductile iron. 1 5. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel. e -t7 6. Replaceable Radial liners: Hardened carbon steel, XAR400 or equal. G r- a f S F. Lobe rotors shall have controlled tolerances to prevent metal -to -metal or urethane to ontacP D fV G. End cover: Removable, to provide complete access to pumping chamber without disconneiRrig pipe work or disturbing glands or bearings. H. Rear of pump casing and front cover shall be protected with replaceable wear plates. I. Shaft bearings: Heavy-duty roller or ball bearings; oil or grease lubricated; no bearings in pumping chamber. J. Side suction port design, with Gooseneck flanged suction and discharge connections drilled and faced to 125 Ib (860 kg) ANSI B16.1. K. Seals: Double mechanical seal, specifically intended for sludge. Pumps shall be constructed with an oil -filled intermediate chamber between the pump casing and the gearbox for lubrication and cooling of the mechanical seals. L. Baseplate: Provide gutter lip and 1" (25 mm) threaded drain connection. M. Pump discharge pressure switch: Provide pump pressure switches on each pump discharge line. N. Motor and pump mounting: Piggyback in-line, shafts with belt and pulley drive. O. Belt guard: Provide belt guard of OSHA -approved design. Attach with wing nuts for ease of removal. P. Pump shall utilize an existing Allen Bradley variable frequency drive, coordinate with Owner SLUDGE PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 43 21 53 nri 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide following spare parts for each pump if used: 1. 2 complete sets of mechanical seals and o -rings. 2. 2 complete sets of rotors/rotor tips and o -rings. 3. 1 complete set of axial protection plates. 4. 1 complete set of radial liners. 5. 2 complete sets of front and back wear plates 6. 1 set of drive belts. 7. 1 complete set of bearing. 8. 1 set of special tools. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer engaged primarily in design and fabrication of rotary lobe pumps for at least the last 10 years. 2. Minimum of 100 similar units installed and operating successfully in U.S. 3. Authorized service center capable of servicing pumps within 250 miles of project site. 4. Units shall be product of single manufacturer. B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of HI, NFPA 70, : IEEE, ANSI, NEMA except as otherwise shown or specified. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, store, and protect pumps as recommended by manufacturer and as specified in Section 01 60 00. 1.08 WARRANTY Ar. Warranty supplied equipment and components for a period of 24 months from date of contract completion. PART PRODUCTS o 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS C-) m —n A. Provide drive units, accessories, specials, and similar items required for compteJ sta�tion. r+ =-t n B. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at flow conditions stated her6ptF4hot&excerSU noise, vibration, heating, cavitation, or damage to pump. o 0 C. Shafts: Accurately grind and machine surface to ensure interchangeability of shafts and -parts attached to shaft and be of sufficient size to transmit required horsepower. D. Pump support shall accommodate hydraulic thrust forces; no supplementary support will be provided. E. Equip pumps with flanged suction and discharge connections conforming to 125 Ib (860 kPa) ANSI B16.1. F. Design pumps for ease of dismantling for inspection and maintenance. Coupling guards shall be secured with wing nuts for ease of removal. G. Materials or features not specified herein shall be manufacturer's standard for equipment and shall be suitable for specified service conditions. Pumps and motors shall be engineered and designed as complete, coordinated functioning units. 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 21 53 - Page 1 17_13itC3=11,1=1 :7_L� 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rotary lobe pumps, motors, and accessories. B. Equipment list: Item Equipment Number BFP Feed Pum P8810A BFP Feed Pum P 8820A BFP Feed Pump P 8830A 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Identification of manufacturer and manufacturer's representative to which unit responsibility is assigned. 2. Manufacturer's information, including catalog data, performance curves and tables, specification sheets and product literature that shows equipment meets specified performance and design criteria and operating conditions. 3. Manufacturer's warranty information. B. Design submittals: 1. Characteristic performance curves for pumps, showing total dynamic head, efficiency, and brake horsepower plotted against capacity in gpm (Ips). For variable speed applications, submit curves for both maximum and minimum operating speeds. 2. Certified shop test curves. C. Test reports: Motor data and motor test data. o 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS J A. Shop Drawings showing equipment, dimensions, and materials. N B. Submit copy of this Section with addenda and referenced sections with addenda, witl*c"Tragr�enph. check -marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requestedc4ltionc and4....JJ clarifications from specified requirements. 1. If deviations and clarifications from Specifications are indicated and requested 6FyCON1tcj'CTOR, provide detailed written justification for each deviation and clarification. 2. Failure to include copy of marked -up specification sections and or detailed justifications for requested deviation or clarification will result in rejection of submittal with no further review and consideration. 1104 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance information in accordance with requirements of Section 0178 23. 1. Operation Manual(s): a. Detailed step-by-step procedures required for start-up, operation, and shut -down. b. Include manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and manufacturer's representative. 2. Maintenance Manual(s): a. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. b. Include piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of installed system. 26710.01.00 GRAPHIC SCREEN REQUIREMENTS ms1869 SECTION 40 96 45 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements for graphic screens. B. Configuration. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Graphic screens layout and configuration. Color copies of each standard and custom operator graphic screen including static, dynamic, trend, and alarm summary screens. 1.03 GRAPHIC SCREEN REQUIREMENTS A. Integrator shall remap new equipment 1/0 with existing graphic screens insofar as appropriate. Graphical components of 1/0 points deleted shall also be deleted. Primary focus is on Belt Filter Press replacements, but Owner may request graphical updates related to BFP Feed Pumps and Polymer Pumps. HVAC controls and monitoring graphics, insofar as connected to SCADA, shall be updated as appropriate. B. For bidding purposes, assume graphic screen (modification or creation) quantities as follows: 1. BFP System Overview (1). 2. Belt Filter Presses (3). 3. BFP Room HVAC and/or BFP Exhaust Odor Scrubber (1). 4. Belt Filter Press Feed Pumps (1). 5. Polymer Pumps (1). C. Graphic screens shall include but not be limited to following: A. Typical system overviews. 2. Trend and alarm screens. 3. Equipment status screens with indication of equipment run hours, totalized flows, etc. 4. Plant systems based on P&IDs and electrical one -line diagrams. , 5. Other miscellaneous screens as required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONFIGURATION ro 0 A. Graphic screen configuration and development shall be responsibility of Integrata5 —' ='=C) Nn PART 3 EXECUTION >:74 c7-< r NOT USED .m t11 v rn END OF SECTION Q .z: .. 1) Z. M. Carter' r;y 2) S. A. Warren 26710.01 .00 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ms1869 SECTION 40 96 15 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control system configuration standards. B. Control system description. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 05 00 — Common Work Results for Process Systems. B. Section 40 94 43-13 — PLC Input / Output Listing. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: Logic update drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Integrator shall implement logic in accordance with existing equipment being replaced, modified as required for new equipment. See Part 3 of this Specification Section for Integrator contact information. B. Equipment replaced in kind shall reuse equipment, instrument and relevant 1/0 tags, as coordinated with owner. New tags, as necessary, shall be coordinated with owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONFIGURATION STANDARDS A. Following subparagraphs are standard and apply as required for complete project. B. Analog controllers: 1. Each software controller consists of proportional -integral -derivative (PID) control algorithm and Auto -Manual station. 2. With station in "Manual," operator directly determines value of controller output signal and controller disabled to prevent windup. 3. With station in "Auto," controller generates control output (CO) signal to minimize difference (error) between process variable (PV) and setpoint (SP). 4. Controller shall provide bumpless transition between "Auto" and "Manual" positions. 5. Controller types: a. Direct acting: Increases output signal when process variable greater than setpoint. b. Reverse acting: Decreases output signal when process variable greater than setpoint. 6. When controller service off-line, controller output forced to "0" placing controlled device in de - energized position. C' C. Cignal select logic: C� 1. Process variable signals processed as required for input to software controller wherxWore than - one transmitter installed. -- G -.3 c a. Low. � n b. High. `� ■ i �.:i c. Average. C.)—C — C.1 .: d.. Median. —ic �o r 7.' Each logic select control block consists of following: ; Crri rn a. Two or three process inputs. s C CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 96 15 ms1869 b. Signal select logic: 1) Compares process input values and determines logic signal. 2) During normal operation, desired logic signal selected as block output. c. Software selector switch: Allows operator to choose between process inputs and selected signal. d. Deviation, low, and high alarms: 1) Logic compares each process value with selected signal for deviations. 2) If logic detects deviation of 5% or greater for 1 process input, system alarms operator of process input malfunction. 3) When 3 process inputs used, if logic shows 5% or greater for all process inputs, system transfers software controller to "Manual" and alarms operator. D. Process variable bad quality (BQ); controller actions when process variable in BQ: 1. For 1 process variable: Reject controller to "Off." 2. For 2 (redundant) process variables: Select other signal and reject controller to "Off." 3. For 3 (triple redundant) process variables: If 2 BQ, then reject controller to "Off." E. Pump control functions: 1. "On": Breaker "Closed". 2. "Standby": a. If running pump Trips or other automatic start logic satisfied, then standby pump shall automatically "Start." b. Control system alerts operator on failure of "Running" pump and operation of "Standby" pump. F. Variable Frequency drive (VFD) control: 1. Applications: a. Belt VFDs. b. Fan VFDs. c. Pump VFDs. 2. VFDs controlled at local control station or remotely from control system operator display. 3. Local controller equipped with "Local -Off -Remote" (LOR) selector switch. Also interchangeably known as Hand -Off -Auto, respectively. a. "Local": 1) Maintenancettesting position for drive operation without interference from control system. 2) VFD shall operate at speed corresponding to VFD software PID controller output. b. "Off": VFD operation secured. c. "Remote": VFD operation controlled by operator input, control logic, and/or field interlocks as applicable to specific application. 4. Normal operation: a. LOR in "Remote" and motor operation controlled from control system operator display. b. VFD starter controlled by operator from control system through software station with following functions: 1) "Run" or "Start"P'Stop" commands. 2) "Forward" command (if applicable). 3) "Reverse" command (if applicable). c. VFD analog output controlled by analog controller. N m G. Valve control logic - discrete: 1. Each "On -Off" valve controlled at local control station or remotely from cont>06pstepperat(n display. --f -0 Normal operation C-) -< — ^` �- a: Remote controlled from control system operator display. cr b. Valve controlled from control system through software "Open/Close" staif'gFA (unless nqM otherwise). c. When valve in "Manual," operator controls output. IV rn (*_ d. When valve in "Auto," control logic (applicable to specific application) ge3erns volye operation. 26710.01.00 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ms1869 SECTION 40 96 15 - Page 3 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: BELT FILTER PRESS A. Belt Filter Presses BFP-1, BFP-2 and BFP-3 1. New Belt Filter Presses BFP-1, BFP-2, and BFP-3 shall be programmed and reintegrated into existing plant control system PLC, editing or overwriting existing control logic. 2. Allen Bradley configured logic for existing systems shall be replicated to serve new equipment, including packaged Belt Filter Presses 1, 2 and 3. New address locations shall be remapped into replicated logic as required. Logic associated with 1/0 points deleted shall be removed from configuration. 3. Existing plant control of BFP systems shall remain; new equipment shall conform to existing plant control strategy, with modifications coordinated with Owner. 4. Existing, respective BFP Master Control Panel hardware functionality shall remain, including Hand -Off -Auto (Local -Off -Remote) selector switches, E -Stops, pilotlights (indicating lights), pushbuttons, and VFD interface modules. BFP Master Control Panel Backpanels shall replace the existing control equipment. B. Belt Filter Press Local Control Panels (furnished with equipment for BFP frame mounting) shall provide only local controls for maintenance, similar to existing. Selector switches shall only initiate equipment control when respective BFP Master Control Panel LOR selector switch is in Local. When switch is in Local position, hydraulic pump shall start and belt drive shall be enabled. 1. Selector Switch for Forward/Reverse. 2. Selector Switch for Extend/Retract. 3. E -Stop pushbutton. C. Existing BFP Feed Pump flowmeter configurations shall be verified to be in coordination with new BFP Feed Pumps and new BFPs operating capacities. Reconfigure as required. D. Belt Filter Press Feed Pumps 1. New BFP Feed Pumps shall operate via new, Owner -furnished and installed VFDs. Operation shall replicate that of existing system. Modify setpoints, control logic and 1/0 point mapping as required, in coordination with Owner. E. Polymer Pumps 1. New Polymer Pumps shall operate via new VFDs. Operation shall replicate that of existing system. Modify setpoints, control logic and 1/0 point mapping as required, in coordination with Owner. 2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: BFP EXHAUST ODOR SCRUBBER A. Scrubber shall run continuously if any BFP is running. BFP Room Exhaust Fans shall be disabled during scrubber operation. Disablement of BFP Room Exhaust Fans shall cease when all BFPs are off. B. -Scrubber package control panel shall provide common alarm to SCADA. PART 3 EXECUTION N O 3,01 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR A. •ESCO Automation, an ESCO Group Company, Marion, Iowa.rri n N 1. Contact: Mr. Mike Denning 2. Telephone 319-377-5641 or 319-739-2218. —+n r =gy m s M B. No substitutions without Owner's written permission. c� END OF SECTION tv 1) Z. M. Carter tv 2) S. A. Warren o 26710.01.00 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ms1869 SECTION 40 96 15 - Page 3 H. Valve contr logic — discrete: 1. Each " n -Off' valve controlled at local control station or remotely from control system operator display. 2. Equip ea h valve with "Local -Off -Remote" (LOR) selector switch and local operator control. a. "Loca : 1) Ma tenance/testing position for valve operation without interference from control system. 2) Val operates as determined by "Open -Stop -Close" (OSC) switch position. b. "Off": Va a operations secured. c. "Remote": alve operation controlled by operator input, control logic, and/or field interlocks as applicable t specific application. d. Local operat controls: 1) OSC: a) "Open". Opens valve. b) "Stop": alve movement stopped in current position upon release of 'Open" or "Close" s itch. c) "Close": C sea valve. 2) OC: "Open" or" losed" only. 3. Normal operation a. LOR in "Remote" and Ive operation controlled from control system operator display. b. Valve controlled from c trol system through software "Open/Close" stations (unless noted otherwise). c. When valve in "Manual," o erator controls output. d. When valve in "Auto," contr I logic (applicable to specific application governs valve operation. 4. Abnormal operation: Control sy em monitors LOR and alerts operator hen switch not in "Remote' position. 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: BELT 1LTER PRESS A. Belt Filter Presses BFP-1, BFP-2 and BFP- 1. New Belt Filter Presses BFP-1, BFP-2, nd BFP- all be programmed and reintegrated into existing plant control system PLC, editin or o riting existing control logic. 2. Allen Bradley configured logic for existing tems shall be replicated to serve new equipment, including packaged Belt Filter Presses , 2 nd 3. New address locations shall be remapped into replicated logic as required. Logic ociat with 1/0 points deleted shall be removed from configuration. 3. Existing plant control of BFP stems shall rem 'n; new equipment shall conform fxisting plant control strategy, with modi ations coordinated ' h Owner. _+ 4. Existing, respective BF aster Control Panel har are functionality sha1?vwwin cludiT" Hand -Off -Auto (Loc ff-Remote) selector switche E -Stops, pilotlights �atingights)," pushbuttons, and D interface modules. BFP Mast Control Panel BackQan6ls s qll regaee the existing contr quipment. -1n ay �<rn m B. Belt Filter P s Local Control Panels (furnished with equipme t for BFP frameBoatinifshall;pmyide only local controls for maintenance, similar to existing. Selector witches shall o�AitigWequiprrient control when respective BFP Master Control Panel LOR selector itch is in Loll. -- 1. Selector Switch for Forward/Reverse. ^' 2. Selector Switch for Extend/Retract. 3. E -Stop pushbutton. C. Existing BFP Feed Pump flowmeter configurations shall be verified to be in c rdination with new BFP Feed Pumps and new BFPs operating capacities. Reconfigure as required. D. Belt Filter Press Feed Pumps 1. New BFP Feed Pumps shall operate via new, Owner -furnished and installed VFDs. Operation shall replicate that of existing system. Modify setpoints, control logic and 1/0 point mapping as required, in coordination with Owner. CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 40 96 15 ms1869 E. Polymer Pumps 1. If provided, new Polymer Pumps shall operate via new VFDs. Operation sAall replicate that of existing system. Modify setpoints, control logic and 1/0 point mapping as required, in coordination with Owner. 2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: BFP EXHAUST ODOR SCRUBBER A. Scrubber shall run continuously if any BFP is running. BFP Room Exhaust Fans shall be disabled during scrubber operation. Disablement of BFP Room Exhaust Fans shall cease when all BFPs are off. B. Scrubber package control panel shall provide common alarm to SCADA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR A. ESCO Automation, an ESCO Group Company, Marion, Iowa. 1. Contact: Mr. Mike Denning 2. Telephone 319-377-5641 or 319-739-2218. B. No substitutions without Owner's written permission. END OF SECTION 1) Z. M. Carter 2) S. A. Warren N O_ CD C*)-< -<r- 3 r :�rn M oA = o D ro 0 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 96 15 ms1869 1) Compares process input values and determines logic signal. 2) During normal operation, desired logic signal selected as block output. c. Software selector switch: Allows operator to choose between process inputs and selected signal. d. Deviation, low, and high alarms: 1) Logic compares each process value with selected signal for deviations. 2) If logic detects deviation of 5% or greater for 1 process input, system alarms operator of process input malfunction. 3) When 3 process inputs used, if logic shows 5% or greater for all process inputs, system transfers software controller to "Manual" and alarms operator. D. Process variable bad quality (13% controller actions when process variable in BQ: 1. For 1 process variable: Reject controller to "Manual." 2. For 2 (redundant) process variables: Select other signal and reject controller to "Manual." 3. For 3 (triple redundant) process variables: If 2 BQ, then reject controller to "Manual." E. Pump control functions: 1. "On": Breaker "Closed". 2. 'Standby": a. If running pump Trips or other automatic start logic satisfied, then standby pump shall automatically "Start." b. Control system alerts operator on failure of "Running" pump and operation of "Standby" pump. F. Pump control logic — constant speed 1. Pump motor controlled remotely from control system operator display. ,, 2. Normal operation: o a. Pump operation controlled from control system operator display througar V; --� "Start"/"Stop" stations (unless noted otherwise).? �o b. When pump in "Manual," operator controls output. c. When pump in "Auto,' control logic (applicable to specific application) goi n pump operation. fir- T 3 G. Variable Frequency drive (VFD) control: D 1 1. Applications: a. Belt VFDs. 3' o b. Fan VFDs. c. Pump VFDs. 2. VFDs controlled at local control station or remotely from control system operator display. 3. Local controller equipped with "Local -Off -Remote" (LOR) selector switch. Also interchangeably known as Hand -Off -Auto, respectively. a. "Local": 1) Maintenance/testing position for drive operation without interference from control system. 2) VFD shall operate at speed corresponding to VFD software PID controller output. b. "Off': VFD operation secured. c. "Remote": VFD operation controlled by operator input, control logic, and/or field interlocks as applicable to speck application. 4., Normal operation: a. LOR in "Remote" and motor operation controlled from control system operator display. b. VFD starter controlled by operator from control system through software station with following functions: 1) "Run" or "Start"/"Stop" commands. 2) "Forward" command (if applicable). 3) "Reverse" command (if applicable). c. VFD analog output controlled by analog controller. 26710.01.00 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ms1869 SECTION 40 96 15 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Control system configuration standards. B. Control system description. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 05 00 - Common Work Results for Process Systems. B. Section 40 94 43-13 - PLC Input / Output Listing. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: Logic update drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Integrator shall implement logic in accordance with existing equipment being replaced, modified as required for new equipment. See Part 3 of this Specification Section for Integrator contact information. B. Equipment replaced in kind shall reuse equipment, instrument and relevant 1/0 tags, as coordinated with owner. New tags, as necessary, shall be coordinated with owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONFIGURATION STANDARDS A. Following subparagraphs are standard and apply as required for complete project. B. Analog controllers: 1. Each software controller consists of proportional -integral -derivative (PID) control algorithm and Auto -Manual station. 2. With station in "Manual," operator directly determines value of controller output signal and controller disabled to prevent windup. 3. With station in "Auto," controller generates control output (CO) signal to minimize d(erence (error) between process variable (PV) and setpoint (SP). o —' 4. Controller shall provide bumpless transition between "Auto" and "Manual" ionPn 5. Controller types: a. Direct acting: Increases output signal when process variable greater isn Sett. r b. Reverse acting: Decreases output signal when process variable great- n setpoin 6. When controller service off-line, controller output forced to "0" placing control deNpe ino� energized position. ot � _ l`./ C. Signal select logic: 3' 1. Process variable signals processed as required for input to software controller when more than one transmitter installed. a. Low. b. High. c. Average. d. Median. 2. Each logic select control block consists of following: a. Two or three process inputs. b. Signal select logic: Ala M�1-16 40 94 4343 - PLC INPUT I OUTPUT LISTING ISSUE DATE: 30-Aug-17 qiwW CITY OF IOWA CITY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT REVISION NO: 0 Stanley Consultants we BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION VO TYPE SIGNAL CALIB RANGE PANEL ALARM SETPOINTS PID NO. VOLTAGE DISPLAY RANGE AH / AHH COMMENTS REV. ORIGIN "0"/'I* STATE AL/ALL POLYMER PUMP STOP COMMAND DO N.O. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NSTOP/STOP / EST. CITY:4 PRINT DATE: 22 -Aug -17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 5 of 5 40 94 43-13 - PLC INPUT / OUTPUT LISTING ISSUE DATE: 30-Aug-1; CITY OF IOWA CITY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT REVISION NO: 0 StanleyCA�15UIt8r11S INC BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION YO TYPE SIGNAL CAUS RANGE PANEL ALARM SETPOINTS PID NO. VOLTAGE DISPLAY RANGE AH IAHH COMMENTS REV. ORIGIN "0"/"1"STATE AL/ALL BFP DISCHARGE CONVEYOR RUNNING DI N.O. MAIN �'' SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:1 BFP FEED PUMP FAIL DI N.C. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NFAIL/FAIL / EST. OTY:3 BFP FEED PUMP RUNNING DI N.O. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:3 BFP ODOR SCRUBBER COMMON ALARM DI N.O. MAIN SCADA SEE SPECIFICATION 40 9615. 120 VAC / A TBD NALARM/ALARM I EST. OTY:i BFP ODOR SCRUBBER RUNNING STATUS DI N.O. MAIN SCADA SEE SPECIFICATION 40 9615. FROM SCRUBBER 120 VAC / A TBD NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:1 POLYMER PUMP FAIL DI N.C. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NFAIL/FAIL / EST. OTY:4 POLYMER PUMP RUNNING DI N.O. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:4 BFP FEED PUMP START COMMAND DO N.O. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NSTART/START / EST. OTY:3 BFP FEED PUMP STOP COMMAND DO N.O. MAIN SCADA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NSTOP/STOP / EST. OTY:3 BFP ODOR SCRUBBER ENA�LFn�Q Nq H+�/1p0 N.C. MAIN SCADA SEE SPECIFICATION 40 96 15. �n 120 VAC / A T8313 Alla TBD NENABL/ENABL / EST. OTY:1 BFP ODOR SCRUBBER RUNNING I$TATVS TQ_ d3S f fill HVAC INTERLOCK •7 . I ��nn 11��,'- N.C. MAI SCADA / SEE SPECIFICATION 40 9615. A TBD NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:1 POLYMER PUMP START COMMA DO U 120 VA SDA CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. A MN NSTART /START / P: PRINT DATE: 22-Aug-17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 4 of 5 BFP BELT DRIVE STOP COMMAND VDO BFP1-MCP NSTOP/STOP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. ETHERNET. EST. OTY: 3 BFP GRAVfTV BELT DRIVE START COMMAND VDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NSTART/START / EST. CITY:3 BFP GRAVITY BELT DRIVE STOP COMMAND VDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NSTOP/STOP / EST. OTY:3 PRINT DATE: 22 -Aug -17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 3 of 5 40 94 43-13 - PLC INPUT I OUTPUT LISTING ISSUE DATE: 30 -Aug -17 CITY OF IOWA CITY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT REVISION NO: 0 Stanley Consultants INC. BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION 1/0 TYPE SIGNAL CALIB RANGE PANEL ALARM SETPOINTS PID NO. VOLTAGE DISPLAY RANGE AH /AHH COMMENTS REV. ORIGIN "P'/"1"STATE AL ALL BFP BELT DRIVE START COMMAND VDO BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NSTART/START / EST. CITY:3 BFP BELT DRIVE STOP COMMAND VDO BFP1-MCP NSTOP/STOP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. ETHERNET. EST. OTY: 3 BFP GRAVfTV BELT DRIVE START COMMAND VDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NSTART/START / EST. CITY:3 BFP GRAVITY BELT DRIVE STOP COMMAND VDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NSTOP/STOP / EST. OTY:3 PRINT DATE: 22 -Aug -17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 3 of 5 dde40 94 43-13 - PLC INPUT I OUTPUT LISTING ISSUE DATE: 30-Aug-17 CITY OF IOWA CITY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT REVISION NO: 0 Stanley Consultants INC BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION 1/0 TYPE SIGNAL CALIB RANGE PANEL ALARM SETPOINTS PID NO, VOLTAGE DISPLAY RANGE AH /AHH COMMENTS REV. ORIGIN "0"/"1"STATE AL/ALL BFP ALARM SILENCE DO N.O. MOM BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NSILENC/SILENCE / EST. OTY:3 BFP SYSTEM RESET DO N.O. MOM BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NRESET/RESET / EST. OTY:3 BFP WASHWATER PUMP START COMMAND DO N.O. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NSTART/START / EST. OTY:3 BFP WASHWATER PUMP STOP COMMAND DO N.O. MAIN BFP14CP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM NSTOP/STOP / EST. OTY:3 BFP BELT DRIVE SPEED FEEDBACK VAI 0 to 100 % BFP14 CP / ETHERNET, A / / EST. OTY:3 BFP GRAVITY BELT SPEED FEEDBACK VAI 04t 100 % BFP1-MCP / ETHERNET. A / / EST. QTY: 3 BFP BELT DRIVE SPEED COMMAND VAO 0 to 100 % BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A / / EST. OTY:3 BFP GRAVITY BELT SPEED COMMAND VAO 010100 % BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A / / EST. OTY:3 BFP BELT DRIVE RUNNING VDI BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:3 BFP GRAVITY BELT DRIVE RU VDI VDI BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL / ETHERNET. A \gol ^ J �t1J J NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:3 BFP AUTO1 VDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. �+Q7 S 1 4 :11 �MIMAND ETHERNET. A T NASTART/ASTART / EST. OTY:3 BFP AUTO STOP COMMANDVDO BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. / ETHERNET. A �' NASTOP/ASTOP / EST. OTY:3 4 PRINT DATE: 22-Aug-17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 2 of 5 40 94 43-13 - PLC INPUT I OUTPUT LISTING ISSUE DATE: 30-Aug-17 CITY OF IOWA CITY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT REVISION NO: 0 Stanley Consultants w- BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION 1/0 TYPE SIGNAL CALIB RANGE PANEL ALARM SETPOINTS PID NO. VOLTAGE DISPLAY RANGE AH/AHH COMMENTS REV. ORIGIN "0"/"1"STATE AL/ALL BFP BELT BROKEN- DI N.C. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NBROKE/BROKEN / EST. CITY:3 BFP BELT OVERTRAVEL DI N.C. MAIN BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NOVRTVL/OVRTVL / EST. QTY:3 BFP DEWATERING MODE THICKENERIPRESS DI N.O. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM THICKNR / PRESS / EST. QTY: 3 BFP FAULT DI N.C. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NFAULT/FAULT / EST. OTY:3 BFP HOA SWITCH IN AUTO DI N.O. MAIN SFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NAUTO/AUTO / EST. OTY:3 BFP POSTWASH CYCLE ON DI N.O. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NON/ON / EST. QTY: 3 BFP PREWET CYCLE ON DI N.O. MAIN BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC / A SYSTEM OFF / ON / EST. CITY: 3 BFP RUNNING DI N.O. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NRUNNG/RUNNG / EST. CITY:3 BFP TENSIONER HYDRAULIC PRESSURE OK DI N.C. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. 120 VAC A SYSTEM NOK/OK / EST. CITY:3 BFP TENSIONER HYDRAULIC PUMP RUNNING DI N.O. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. -{ / A 01� 1 f�YIA011RUNNG/RUNNG / EST. CITY: 3 BFP TENSIONER HYDRAULIC UNIT ON/OFF DI `' n. . BFP7-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. A C� 2 n2 L L��YS$7 432%,L'OeFF/ON / EST. pTY:3 BFP WASHWATER PUMP RUNNING DI N.C. MAIN BFP1-MCP CHARTER BASIC PROPOSAL. A TE ' .4RUNNG/RUNNG / EST. OTY:3 PRINT DATE: 22-Aug-17 PROJECT: 26710 PAGE NO: 1 o15 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 40 94 43-13 ms1869 2. Serial: a. VAI -Analog Input. b. VAO - Analog Output. c. VDI - Discrete Input. d. VDO - Discrete Output. e. VSOE- Sequence of Events. G. Signal: 1. Analog: 4 - 20 mA. 2. Thermocouple: Type E. 3. RTD: a. 100 -ohm Pt. 4. Digital: N.O. MAIN, N.C. MAIN, N.O. MOM, or N.C. MOM, where: a. Contact type: N.O. (Normally Open) or N.C. (Normally Closed). b. State: MAIN (maintained) or MOM (momentary). H. Voltage: Defines voltage utilized for 1/0 point. For relay outputs, voltage refers to what is applied to relay contacts (as opposed to what voltage is applied to relay coil). 1. 24 volt -dc. 2. 120 volt -ac. I. Origin: 1. System - sourced from control system. 2. Field - externally powered. J. Calib Range: Lists 1/0 points calibrated range in engineering units. K. Display Range: Lists 1/0 points display range in engineering units. L. "0" / "1" State: For digital 1/0, lists conditions for zero state and one state (i.e., "0" state = NOPEN when valve is in not open position, and "1" state = OPEN when valve is in open position). M. Panel: Defines panel where 1/0 point assigned. 1. BFP#-MCP. (Main or Master BFP Control Panel, typical of three (3).) a.. Where # = 1, 2 or 3 for respective BFP unit. 2. SCADA. (Existing SCADA interface panel(s).) a. At minimum, existing panel with Ethernet Switch capacity and hardwire capacity is South Sludge Processing Station SSPRS Control Panel, located adjacent to BFP Master Control Panels; otherwise, coordinate other SCADA interface panel use with Owner.) N. Alarm setpoints: 1. AH / AHH: Lists 1/0 point alarm high (AH) and alarm high -high (AHH) setpoints. 2. AL / ALL: Lists 1/0 point alarm low (AL) and alarm low -low (ALL) setpoints. N O. Software Functions: Not used on 1/0 List. New BFP 1/0 shall replicate exis�g respZive 1/0 software functions (status, alarm, indicating, trending, etc.) -gin to D� r P. COMMENTS - Indicates any additional special requirements or features fora Wicrjar I/O I. 1. Common comments: ::4n CA a. "Charter Basic Proposal" indicates 1/0 based on BFP manufacturer6Rsic£pntrol me, less extended -system equipment such as BFP feed pump and BFk9=harJG con r 1/0, which shall be reintegrated as appropriate for a complete system. x - III...JJi END OF SECTION 1) Z. M. Carter 2) S. A. Warren 26710.01.00 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING ms1869 SECTION 40 94 43-13 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 40 96 15 — Control System Operational Description. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING A. Refer to attached PLC Input/Output Listing for 1/0 listing. B. Attached 1/0 List shall be a guide for bidding purposes, and may not include all necessary hard and soft 1/0 for a complete system. 1. For Belt Filter Press systems, the attached 1/0 Listing includes typical 1/0 for a single BFP unit (BFP-1) for clarity, rather than duplicating for BFP-2 and BFP-3. 1/0 Listing is based on Charter Machine Company's Typical Controls literature, and may require fewer or more points and/or alternate signal parameters. 2. 1/0 List includes typical 1/0 for interlock between existing HVAC exhaust fan controlle6new BFP exhaust odor scrubber control and existing SCADA. Specific interconnections shall boetermined in the field. See Section 40 96 15 for Control System Operational DescriptioE N n m C. 1/0 tags 1. 1/0 tags shall be reused, where applicable.c.n(r 2. No 1/0 tags are provided on attached 1/0 List, only descriptions and signal tya 3. Any new 1/0 tags shall be coordinated with Owner. 3 rn 3.02 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING: O A. Sort Order: PLC Input/Output Listing is sorted by Panel, then by 1/0 Type and then by Service Description. B. Tag No.: Defines unique alphanumeric identifier of input/output point. C. PID No.: Not Used. D. Rev.: Indicates current revision of 1/0 point. 1. Add -1/O point added to contract in specified revision. 2. Del -1/O point deleted from contract. E. Service Description: Description of 1/0 points service function. F. 1/6 Type: Identifies 1/0 points as analog or discrete and input or output relative to control system. 1. Hardwire: a. AI - Analog Input. b. AO - Analog Output. c. DI - Discrete Input. d. DO - Discrete Output. e. RO - Relay Output. f. RTD - Resistance Temperature Detectors. g. SOE - Sequence of Events. h. TC - Thermocouple Input. COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 40 80 00 ms1869 3.06 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS A. Receiver instruments: Perform 9 -point span test (0%, 25% increasing, 50% increasing, 75% increasing, 100%, 75% decreasing, 50% decreasing, 25% decreasing, 0%) verifying linearity and hysteresis by impressing measured signal into input or signal connections on instrument. B. Controllers (panel or control room mounted): 1. Check for proper operation and adjust in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Vary process input signal and check output signal for direction. 2. Set initial proportional band, reset rate, and rate time as recommended by manufacturer. It may be necessary to determine process dynamics in actual operation before settings can be made. 3. Control loops shall be observed for operability and conformance to Specifications by impressing simulated input signal at primary element and checking response of final control element. C. Integrators, ratio relays, etc.: 1. Check in conformance to manufacturer's recommendations. Receiver integrators shall be calibrated for proper operation and multiplication factor by feeding maximum input signal for specified period of time with stopwatch. 2. Check in conformance to manufacturer's recommendations. Ratio signals shall be simulated to check proper ratio settings and output. D. Graphics panel: If possible, trip each alarm actuator (field device) in sequence and observe Graphics. Check "acknowledge" and "test" pushbuttons. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE FOR OPERATION A. Each piece of equipment installed by this contract shall carry "Acceptance for Operation Checklist." Each checklist shall be signed by the Contractor's Representative and Owner, or Owner's Representative. Each list shall have applicable blanks filled in and attached to items indicating that it is prepared for operation. B. Owner will accept equipment and systems for operation when construction has been substantially completed by Contractor. "Acceptance for Operation" shall mean Owner will assume operational and routine maintenance duties. "Acceptance for Operation" does not relieve Contractor from responsibilities related to defective materials and workmanship; neither does it constitute final acceptance of materials and equipment. C. After Owner has accepted a system for operation, Contractor shall continue to perform following as requested and scheduled by Owner at no additional cost to Owner until final acceptas&e: 1. Troubleshooting, adjustments, and repairs until system operation and pe5ormanee is aQ=table. 2. Assist instrument and control personnel with instrument calibration. :!E-zc-) rNTI 3. Craft labor as required. D-1 9 D. After Owner has accepted a system for operation, Contractor shall continueply hnil" services when needed until final acceptance. Mn = v 3.08 TRAINING A. Coordinate and direct training of personnel for operation and maintenance of systems a d equipment specified. B. Provide Owner's selected staff with adequate training to fully operate and maintain the individual systems. Training shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 1) Z. M. Carter 2) S. A. Warren 26710.01.00 COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS ms1869 SECTION 40 80 00 - Page 5 a. Calibrate instruments individually and where applicable, as system (i.e. transmitter, controller and control valve). b. Verify control system components calibration meets published accuracies over full operational range. c. Defective equipment: If any instrument cannot be properly adjusted or does not meet manufacturer's specifications, immediately call to attention of Owner and report of its condition confirmed in writing. Repair or replace equipment furnished as part of this contract. d. Calibration of supplementary supply and output pressure gages contained on instruments will not be required. Follow defective equipment guidelines if gage is found to be faulty. 3. Complete calibration report form for each instrument and control device. 4. Calibration Stickers: Upon successful calibration, affix calibration sticker to instrument or control component. Calibration sticker shall contain equipment identification number, calibrated range or switch set and reset conditions, date of calibration, due date for next calibration, and name of person performing calibration. 5. Check instrument and control wiring for proper operation. a. After energizing and prior to start-up, check control circuits and programs for proper sequence of operations and interlocking functions. b. Correct any wiring changes required as result of checks including properly changing terminal strip and/or wiring markers, and associated documentation including schematics and termination diagrams. D. Test procedures: 1. Analog devices: Include 9 -point span test (0%, 25% increasing, 50% increasing, 75% increasing, 100%, 75% decreasing, 50% decreasing, 25% decreasing, 0%) verifying linearity and hysteresis meets specified values. 2. Discrete devices: Use multiple state changes to verify set point, reset point, and deadband. E. Acceptable calibration standards: 1. Vacuum or draft: a. 0" to 5" w.c.: Inclined water -filled manometer graduated in hundredths of inches Eater. b. 5" to 25' Hg: Mercury manometer graduated in tenths of inches of merc15. -+ c. 5" to 60" w.c.: Water manometer graduated in tenths of inches of water. -;:c,) rNrt d. Electronic: Digital manometer, ±0.25% full scale accuracy, 3.5 -digit LCD7dii aiay, Mnges I to 19.99" w.c. and 0 to 199.9" w.c., ±1 LSD. n"< Ln 2. Pressure: -ate 0" to 5' Inclined in hundredths 4"- a. w.c.: water -filled manometer graduated of s cl�pater.� b. 5" to 60" w.c.: Water manometer graduated in tenths of inches of water. p c. 3 to 25 psig: Mercury manometer graduated in tenths of psi. d. 25 to 150 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-160 psi, 1/4 of 1% accuracy, 89i/2" di inimum. e. 150 to 750 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-800 psi, 1/2 of 1% accuracy, 8-1/2" dia minimum. f. 750 to 2,750 psig: Precision pressure gage, 0-3,000 psi, 1/2 of 1% accuracy, 8-1/2" dial minimum. g. Electronic: Digital manometer, ±0.1% full scale accuracy, 3.5 -digit LCD display, ranges of 0 to 19.99 psig, 0 to 199.9 psig, and 0 to 1,999 psig, ±1 LSD. 3. Differential: a. 0" to 5" w.c.: Inclined water -filled manometer graduated in hundredths of inches of water. b. 5' to 300" w.c.: Mercury manometer graduated in tenths of inches of water. c. 5 to 25 psig: Mercury manometer graduated in tenths of psi. d. Above 25 psig: Use pressure gages specified. e. Electronic: Digital differential manometer, ±0.1% full scale accuracy, 5 -digit LCD display, ranges of 0 to 200" w.c. and 0 to 2,000" w.c., ±1 LSD. 4. Temperatures: a. -20 to 250°F: Laboratory thermometers of suitable range. b. Other ranges: Use thermocouple and precision potentiometer. c. Electronic: Digital thermometer, ±0.1% of reading accuracy, 4 -digit LCD display, ±1 LSD. 5. DC process signal calibrator: 2 -wire transmitter simulator: a. 4-20 mA range: ±0.5% full scale accuracy, 4 -digit LCD display, ±1 LSD. b. 10-50 mA range: ±0.06% full scale accuracy, 4.5 -digit LED display, ±1 LSD. COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 40 80 00 ms1869 2. Open steam traps and air vents; remove operating elements. Clean thoroughly, reinstall internal parts and put back into operation. E. Repair damaged insulation. 3.04 INSTRUMENT PIPING COMMISSIONING A. Branch instrument air headers shall be blown down and leak tested prior to time air is admitted to any instrument. Purpose of blowing down header is to remove moisture, foreign particles, etc., to assure cleanliness of header. Larger outlets shall be blown first and ultimately each supply line shall be disconnected at instrument and blown. 1. In testing branch headers, pressurize header to 120 Ib, close valves, and observe pressure loss during 30 -minute period. A loss of greater than 2% will be considered excessive. 2. If leakage is excessive, perform bubble test to locate leaks in main header, and at joints in individual instrument supply lines. 3. Perform necessary repairs to air header and retest until satisfactory. B. Pneumatic tubing circuits shall be blown down and tested for continuity, restrictions, tightness, and elimination of leaks. 1. Test for continuity, restrictions, and plugging shall consist of applying 35 psig air supply to input end of tubing under test, with tubing disconnected from instruments and open to atmosphere. 2. Reasonable flow of air shall be present at open end of tubing. If tubing leads to more than 1 unit or piece of equipment, same procedure shall be followed at each unit after reconnecting tubing to previous unit. 3. Test for tightness and elimination of leaks shall be that outlined in procedure entitled "Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test," latest revision, Recommended Practice, RP7.1, of Instrument Society of America. 4. Wherever possible, instrument or instruments at outlet end of tubing shall remain connected to tubing during test so that instrument may be tested simultaneously, provided instrument has suitable pressure rating. 5. Appropriate allowances shall be made in extending duration of length of test to offset additional volume of instrument. Where tubing terminates in large valve diaphragm housing or other large volume, tubing may be disconnected, plugged, and tested. 6. After tubing test has been completed, tubing shall be reconnected to various units involved, and broken connections shall be bubble -tested. 7. In testing diaphragm control valves or other large volumes for leaks, use small rotameter and 35 psig air supply. Rate of flow indicated by rotameter shall not exceed 5.0 sid cc/miZof air. 8. In event instrument air is not available during time that commissioning is r d, Wply ^'yl instrument quality air from portable compressor or bottled dry air or nitrogeN-•i v 3.05 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION COMMISSIONING rte— z„ A. Check out controls and instruments prior to start-up to assure in situ performancp�macodanh Contract Documents under simulated operating conditions. Contractor to date rnyr inif*start-up conditions. r.� B. Prior to commissioning: 1. Remove shipping stops from instruments before starting with procedures specified. 2. Contractor shall have instruction manuals available. 3. Install miscellaneous components including charts, illumination, mercury, etc., furnished separately. 4. Verify nameplate data with respect to conditions of range, operating temperature, specific gravity, and components as stated on unit specifications. Discrepancies shall be immediately called to attention of Owner and report of its condition confirmed in writing. C. Commissioning responsibilities: 1. Verify instrument installation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for calibrating control system components including instruments, switches, valves, etc. SLUDGE PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 43 21 53 ms1869 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide following spare parts for each pump if used: 1. 2 complete sets of mechanical seals and o -rings. 2. 2 complete sets of rotors/rotor tips and o -rings. 3. 1 complete set of axial protection plates. 4. 1 complete set of radial liners. 5. 2 complete sets of front and back wear plates 6. 1 set of drive belts. 7. 1 complete set of bearing. 8. 1 set of special tools. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer engaged primarily in design and fabrication of rotary lobe pumps for at least the last 10 years. 2. Minimum of 100 similar units installed and operating successfully in U.S. 3. Authorized service center capable of servicing pumps within 250 miles of project site. 4. Units shall be product of single manufacturer. B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of HI, NFPA 70, IEEE, ANSI, NEMA except as otherwise shown or specified. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, store, and protect pumps as recommended by manufacturer and as specified in Section 0160 00. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty supplied equipment and components for a period of 24 months from date of contract completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide drive units, accessories, specials, and similar items required for complete installation. B. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at flow conditions stated herein without excessive noise, vibration, heating, cavitation, or damage to pump. C. Shafts: Accurately grind and machine surface to ensure interchangeability of shafts antgarts rettached to shaft and be of sufficient size to transmit required horsepower. 0 N r— D. cFump support shall accommodate hydraulic thrust forces; no supplementary s�U4 wi 4e prov d�d. E. —Equip pumps with flanged suction and discharge connections conforming to 1254 43a) r °ANSI 816.1. =C� v M m oZ { F. -'Design pumps for ease of dismantling for inspection and maintenance. CouplirifEArdt;4hhall IJ1P t%secured with wing nuts or self -tapping screws for ease of removal. �> N G.r Materials or features not specified herein shall be manufacturer's standard for equipment and shall be suitable for specified service conditions. Pumps and motors shall be engineered and designed as complete, coordinated functioning units. 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 21 53 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rotary lobe pumps, motors, and accessories. B. Equipment list: Item Equipment Number BFP Feed Pump FA BFP Feed Pum P 8820A BFP Feed Pump P 8830A 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Identification of manufacturer and manufacturer's representative to which unit responsibility is assigned. 2. Manufacturer's information, including catalog data, performance curves and tables, specification sheets and product literature that shows equipment meets specified performance and design criteria and operating conditions. 3. Manufacturers warranty information. B. Design submittals: 1. Characteristic performance curves for pumps, showing total dynamic head, efficiency, and brake horsepower plotted against capacity in gpm (Ips). For variable speed applications, submit curves for both maximum and minimum operating speeds. 2. Certified shop test curves. C. Test reports: Motor data and motor test data. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings showing equipment, dimensions, and materials. B. Submit copy of this Section with addenda and referenced sections with addenda, with each paragraph check -marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations and clarifications from specified requirements. 1. If deviations and clarifications from Specifications are indicated and requested by CONTRACTOR, provide detailed written justification for each deviation and clarification. 2. Failure to include copy of marked -up specification sections and or detailed justifications for requested deviation or clarification will result in rejection of submittal with no further review and consideration. 1.04 CLOSEOUT, SUBMITTALS c A. Operation and maintenance information in accordance with requirements of Secip21 W3. M 1. Operation Manual(s): 3> __4 -v a. Detailed step-by-step procedures required for start-up, operation, and si ttdbwn— R t r b. Include manufacturers name, model number, parts list, and manufacturizamprAntat�re• r j 2. Maintenance Manual(s): �rn a. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs,a9ddrouResho it guide. b. Include simplified wiring and control diagrams of installed system. D N 0 SLUDGE PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 43 21 53 ms1869 P. Belt guard: Provide belt guard of OSHA -approved design. Attach with wing nuts or secure latch mechanism for ease of removal. O. Pump shall utilize an existing Allen Bradley variable frequency drive, coordinate with Owner R. Manufacturer: Boerger, Lobeline, or Engineer approved equal. 2.03 MOTORS A. Standards: Applicable parts of NEMA MG1. B. Type: Horizontal, squirrel -cage induction, solid shaft. Provide grease -lubricated ball bearings. C. Enclosures: TEFC, suitable for NEC Class I, Group D, Division 2 locations. D. Starting: Reduced voltage for variable speed pumps. E. Ratings: 1. Continuous duty. 2. Nameplate motor horsepower shall be not less than maximum required pump input for maximum conditions of head and capacity specified. 3. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. 4. Service factor: NEMA standard. F. Insulation and temperature rating: Class F insulation for use in 40°C ambient. G. Efficiency: 1. Motors shall be high-energy efficient -type. 2. Nominal full -load efficiency determined in accordance with NEMA MG1-12.54.1. 3. Nameplate identification in accordance with NEMA MG1-12.54.2. 4. Nominal full -load efficiency shall equal or exceed values listed in Table 12-66 of NEMA MG1- 12.55 for various motor speed and enclosure types. H. Motors used with variable speed pumps shall be completely coordinated with pumps and variable speed drive system for intended duty. I. Winding temperature switches: Dual thermostats for each motor stator windings in accordance with Section 26 05 03. 2.04 SHOP FINISHING A. Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be sandblasted to commercial grade finish SSPC SP6; and given 1 shop coat of Tnemec "66-1211 Epoxoline Primer" epoxy primer, 4.0 mdft. B. Coat machine -finished surfaces with suitable corrosion preventative compound. C. Motors shall be manufacturer's standard finish painting. 2.f- IDENTIFICATION ice. A. Permanently attach stainless steel nameplate to pump. 1. Equipment number (see Drawings). Z Serial number of pump. 3. Capacity in gpm. 4. Pumping head in feet. 5. Speed, rpm. 6. Manufacturer's name. 7. Size and type of pump. N 0 O G* Nameplate shall contag OVAO info_ on: �— tT1 =C M �� fV � N ry r 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 21 53 - Page 3 H. Pumps of same type shall be products of single manufacturer. 2.02 ROTARY LOBE PUMPS A. Designation on Drawings: Belt Filter Press Pumps No. P881 OA, P8820A, P8830A. B. Type: Rotary lobe, positive displacement, suitable for pumping anaerobically digested primary and waste activated sludges. C. Quantity: 3. D. Performance 1. Normal operating capacity: 130 to 250 gpm (16 Ips). 2. Rated operating point: 250 gpm (16 Ips) at 55 (17m) TDH. 3. Maximum pump speed at rated point: 300 rpm. 4. Maximum Motor Size: 15 hp. Motor size shall be selected to provide the torque required to meet the design operating point(s) and the starting torque for sludges. 5. Pumps shall be suitable for pumping sludge with following solids concentration by weight and shall be capable of passing spheres of following sizes without clogging or damaging pumps: 4% solids; 2" (50 mm) diameter. E. Materials: 1. Ductile or cast iron core dual lobe -type rotors, covered with urethane or Buna-N having Durometer hardness 65-72.. 2. Impeller housing: Cast or ductile iron. 3. Shaft: AISI 4140 carbon steel. . 4. Gear case: Cast or ductile iron. 5. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated galvanized steel. 6. Replaceable Radial liners: Hardened carbon steel, XAR400 or equal. 7. Transition Nozzles: 316L stainless steel. F. Lobe rotors shall have controlled tolerances to prevent metal -to -metal or urethane -to -metal contact. G. End cover: Removable, to provide complete access to pumping chamber without disconnecting pipe work or disturbing glands or bearings. H. Rear of pump casing and front cover shall be protected with replaceable wear plates. I. Shaft bearings: Heavy-duty roller or ball bearings; oil or grease lubricated; no bearings in pumping chamber. J. Side suction port design, flanged suction and discharge connections drilled and faced to 125 Ib (860 kg) ANSI B16.1. Flanged suction and discharge connections shall be transitional reducer/increasers from pump suction/discharge opening size to 6" round pipe size. K. Shaft construction: The shafts shall be non -sludge -wetted. The rotor/shaft connection shall be lubricated with quench fluid of the intermediate chamber. Sludge wetted rotor/shaft cor"ctions are not acceptablecoo o L. SealsSingle acting mechanical seal with two seal faces, specifically intended f��geTumpSnII t be constructed with an oil -filled intermediate chamber between the pump casi thUearba r �^ lubrication and cooling of the mechanical seals. �n MBaseplate: Pump and drive fitted on common base,. O� 0 M. I_.. � N C. N. Pump discharge pressure switch: Provide pump pressure switches on each pUrnp disct.rdrge line. 0 O. Motor and pump mounting: Piggyback in-line, shafts with belt and pulley drive. FILED 1011 SEP 19 PM 2: 22 CITY CLERK COW CITY, ICN''k` -11A C SO112E6 I a bw S. s k IF"EG 26710.01.00 SLUDGE PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 43 21 53 - Page 5 8. Design pressure. B. Provide rotary lobe pumps with cast -in or permanently attached direction -of -rotation arrow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 19. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. As specified in Section 09 96 00. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide inspection and testing by service representative as specified in Section 0143 33. B. Describe installation to CONTRACTOR. C. Inspect and accept installation for compliance with warranty requirements. D. Direct and witness equipment testing prior to plant startup. E. Test equipment to show it can achieve performance and design requirements specified. END OF SECTION 1) J.M. Brady 2) N C5_ f1 <<i fy*1 rr ; ..... M :'-C: S rT - C- . ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 2 ms1869 B. Outdoor air characteristics: 1. Temperature: -20°F to 105°F. 2. Relative humidity: 30%to 100%. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Guarantee completely installed system for 2 years following final acceptance with a warranty against defects in workmanship and materials. Warranty shall be limited to parts and labor for necessary repairs within warranty period. B. Repairs shall be made within 60 days after manufacturer is notified of defect. C. Normal maintenance items not covered by warranty. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Purafil. B. BioAir. C. Integrity. D. Or equal. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide complete odor scrubber system consisting of: 1. Blower system to remove air from room ducting and pressurize for flow through scrubber system. 2. Transitional plenum from 36'(1 m) round duct to scrubber system connection. 3. Dual dry media and housing. 4. Pre -filter. 5. Discharge stack with inline silencer, rain hood and bird screen. 6. Sound Enclosure. 7. 316 ss grounding rod one (1) per vessel. 8. Control/instrumentation/motor starter panel. 9'. Ancillary devices necessary for complete and operational system. B. Performance 1. The media and unit must be capable of removing a minimum of 99.5% of up to 5 ppm Ii2S, up to 3 ppm of methyl mercaptans, up to 10 ppm, of ammonia. 2. The physical media is required to last for 10 years. i. C. Sizing 1, Adequate media with capacity to remove average loading concentrations of 1 ppm 1-12S, 4 ppm ammonia, and 2 ppm methyl mercaptans for a period not less than 3 years when operated up to 15 hours per day five days per week shall be provided. 2. System shall be of adequate size for 9500 scfm air rate at approximately 9.55 inches of water column inclusive of prefilter, final filter, media, and external duct system losses. 3. System shall be a 3 -pass unit using dual media mix with design airflow, face velocity of 100 ft/min. D. Arrangement 1. The unit shall be arranged for horizontal airflow through vertically oriented, separate media beds. The media beds shall be arranged in series to assure maximum contaminant removal efficiency. The system shall be a draw through design with the motor and blower enclosed inside the unit 2. The unit shall be equipped with gasketed side access ports for servicing of components. N 0 C?Nrr r G Cr a rn rn o� 3 v _ A. Provide complete odor scrubber system consisting of: 1. Blower system to remove air from room ducting and pressurize for flow through scrubber system. 2. Transitional plenum from 36'(1 m) round duct to scrubber system connection. 3. Dual dry media and housing. 4. Pre -filter. 5. Discharge stack with inline silencer, rain hood and bird screen. 6. Sound Enclosure. 7. 316 ss grounding rod one (1) per vessel. 8. Control/instrumentation/motor starter panel. 9'. Ancillary devices necessary for complete and operational system. B. Performance 1. The media and unit must be capable of removing a minimum of 99.5% of up to 5 ppm Ii2S, up to 3 ppm of methyl mercaptans, up to 10 ppm, of ammonia. 2. The physical media is required to last for 10 years. i. C. Sizing 1, Adequate media with capacity to remove average loading concentrations of 1 ppm 1-12S, 4 ppm ammonia, and 2 ppm methyl mercaptans for a period not less than 3 years when operated up to 15 hours per day five days per week shall be provided. 2. System shall be of adequate size for 9500 scfm air rate at approximately 9.55 inches of water column inclusive of prefilter, final filter, media, and external duct system losses. 3. System shall be a 3 -pass unit using dual media mix with design airflow, face velocity of 100 ft/min. D. Arrangement 1. The unit shall be arranged for horizontal airflow through vertically oriented, separate media beds. The media beds shall be arranged in series to assure maximum contaminant removal efficiency. The system shall be a draw through design with the motor and blower enclosed inside the unit 2. The unit shall be equipped with gasketed side access ports for servicing of components. 26710.01.00 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 1 1]_1itai Ci4214:L1, 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dual Media Odor Control Scrubber System. B. Scrubber Blower System. 1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Characteristic performance curves for blowers, showing total dynamic head, and brake horsepower plotted against capacity in scfm. 2. Motor data. 3. Control panel information including wiring diagrams. 4. Identification of manufacturer and manufacturer's representative to which unit responsibility is assigned. 5. Manufacturer's information, including catalog data, performance curves and tables, specification sheets and product literature that shows equipment meets specified performance and design criteria and operating conditions. B. Quality assurance data: Written warranty. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings showing equipment, dimensions, materials, weights, motor, and connection provisions for ducting and electrical power. B. Performance curve showing flow, TDH, blower speed, and horsepower. C. Manufacturer's written performance guarantee. D. Performance test results. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance information in accordance with requirements of Section 0 g8 23. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ac-) rn —n A. Qualifications: C-) I 1. Manufacturer engaged primarily in design and fabrication of single and duaTiotrp m96 od rr control systems for wastewater service for at least the last 10 years. =ern a 2. Minimum of 50 similar units installed and operating successfully in U.S. Ej;:iD _ B. The manufacturer shall be a single source provider of equipment, media, and fESting sewices and be certified to ISO -9001:2008 standards. Re -sellers of equipment and media will not be aWpted. C. The manufacturer shall also manufacture media in their own facility to ISO -9001:2008 standards D. The manufacturer shall have local, factory -trained representatives. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Equipment shall be located outdoors at wastewater treatment plant with low concentrations of background atmospheric hydrogen sulfide and ammonia. ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 4 ms1869 B. Each media bed shall be contained between separate corrosion resistant support grids and perforated sheet metal to provide media support while imposing a minimum resistance to airflow. C. The media containment sections shall be separated to assure filling and removal of individual beds as required. New media shall be poured in bulk into the top of the unit through access hatches and shall be filled a minimum of 7" (178 mm) above the bed to prevent airflow bypass. Spent media shall be vacuumed from the bottom of the unit through standard 4" (102 mm) vacuum ports. D. A minimum of 72" (1828 mm) of service clearance are recommended in order to sample the media beds from sample ports. 2.07 Motor Starter/Control Panel A. NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel enclosure. B. Motor starter: FVNR, ATL, with overload heaters, NEMA sized for 20 hp, 460 VAC, 3 phase motor. C. Control power transformer, 460/120 VAC, with fused primary and secondary. D. Main circuit breaker, magnetic, with front -panel operating handle. j E. Operator interface and display: 1. "Hand -Off -Auto" selector switch. 'moo 2. Indicating lamps (all lamps are push -to -test style): a. "Fan Off".cr b. "Fan Running". tCr- F. Control panel shall communicate with plant SCADA system via Ethernet. 1 x 1. Blower motor shall start and stop in when selector switch is in Auto based orRwgnals from SCADA system. 2. Panel shall report blower motor status to SCADA. 3. Panel shall provide common alarm signal to SCADA for scrubber system alarms. 2.08 Instrumentation A. Differential Pressure: A gage shall be included with the scrubber to permit local read-out of pressure drop through the prefilter and media. The gauge shall be a 0-3" as manufactured by Dwyer. Unit shall ship separately and shall be field mounted by contractor. B. Gauges to be Magnehelic type 2.09 Outlet Silencer A. The system shall be provided with a silencer on each exhaust stack. B. This package shall consist a circular silencer with outer casing of aluminum or fiberglass. C. Circular silencers shall be made of not less than 22 gauge aluminum or equivalent fiberglass and properly stiffened to ensure structural integrity. D. Acoustically absorptive fill except for reactive (no media) silencers shall be inorganic glass fiber of a proper density to obtain the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof and impart no odor to the airstream and bagged in fiberglass cloth including acoustic spacer. 26710.01.00 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 3 3. The unit shall shall contain media sampling ports located on each media bed; these shall extrude from the unit approximately 2" (51 mm) outward from the bed on both sides of the unit. The ports shall be located in the center of the media bed and shall be covered with a PVC cap. 4. Standard 4" (102 mm) vacuum truck ports shall be located at bottom of media bed. 5. Grating shall be located on top of unit at all locations where fill ports are not located. 6. Unit Access a. Provide OSHA approved aluminum ladder with cage at inlet plenum area. b. Railing shall be provided around all top area with a section that can be disconnected for media loading only. c. Manufacturer is responsible for insuring ladder and railings are compliant with regulations 7. Discharge stack shall be provided at outlet with rain hood and bird screen. 8. Inlet transition shall be provided from the mist eliminator to the contractor's duct connection. The contractor is responsible for all incoming ductwork. 2.03 Materials A. The Deep Bed Scrubber housing shall be fabricated of aluminum or fiberglass. B. The unit shall be provided with side access hatches and gaskets for servicing of components. Stainless steel latches shall have a positive locking action and shall include an encapsulated standard steel shaft. C. All hinges shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Housing materials shall be weatherproof and suitable for outdoor operation. E. Unit shall come fully assembled and shipped on a 3" (76 mm) aluminum skid base. F.. Aluminum name plate shall be provided, permanently riveted to the unit. Nameplate shall be engraved with the scrubber type, order number and serial number. 2.04 Pre -filter A. Unit to be designed to accommodate a medium efficiency (30%) pleated particulate filter with high service life. B. Hinged access doors with gaskets shall allow for the filter to be replaced. C. Pressure taps and gages shall be installed to permit a local read out of the pre -filter preMre drop. O�+ 2.05 Blower Section 3>� !:J '•n A. Unit to be furnished with a 20 Hp, 3-phase 460V, 60 Hz TEFC motor and blowe9el a fled V r'* drive and airfoil wheel to assure even, quiet airflow at a rate of 9,500 cfm. <hnr— 'a B. The Deep Bed Scrubber shall contain an enclosed blower assembly for outdolilatwzn and emd attenuation. C. Provide a minimum of 30" (762 mm) for service clearance at blower assembly. W D. Equip blower with condensate drain port. 2.06 Media Bed Section A. The media bed section shall include three (3) 12" (308 mm) deep beds. The 151 and 2nd pass of media shall be Odorcarb Ultra and the 3'd pass shall be Odormix SP media ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26710.01.00 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 6 ms1869 e. Nominal pellet diameter: 1/16" (1.587 mm). f. Sodium permanganate content: 12% minimum. D. Odorkol Media 1. Odorkol Media shall be a premium grade, activated carbon with a high surface area available for adsorption. a. Moisture content: 5.0% maximum. b. CTC: 55 minimum. c. Base material: activated carbon. d. Bulk density: 30-32 Ibs/ft3 (0.48-0.51 g/cc) +5%. E. Odormix SP Media 1. The Odormix SP Media shall consist of an equal mix (by volume) of Purafil ESD's Odoroxidant SP Media and Odorkol. 2. Odormix SP media shall be UL Classified Class 1. F. Media must be Non -Hazardous before and after it is spent. G. Only UL certified media will be accepted in this aluminum vessel with companies that contain additional product liability on their systems. Companies lacking this liability and UL certification will not be accepted. Strictly Carbon medias will not be accepted due to their frequent ability to for bed fires. H. The manufacturer must open their facilities to the engineer and owner at a2ltime ding production of the media and equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION t rn Ln 3.01 INSTALLATION �I�"rn A. Refer to Section 01 73 19. a:A 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A `a A. Provide inspection and testing by service representative as specified in Section 0143 33. B. Describe installation to Contractor. C. Inspect and accept installation for compliance with warranty requirements. D. Direct and witness equipment testing prior to plant startup. E. Test equipment to show it can achieve performance and design requirements specified. F. Prepare testing report. 3.03 Acceptance A. Satisfactory installation, operation and performance of the required test shall be the basis of acceptance of the equipment. B. While taking a gas concentration from the dry media scrubber outlet, if the hydrogen sulfide, methyl mercaptans, other tested gas concentration exceeds 10 ppb the system shall not be accepted. C. If moisture or air flow is less that the design throughout the entire test period the unit shall also not be accepted. 26710.01.00 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 5 E. Interior partitions for circular silencers shall be secured with galvanized steel radial mounting brackets welded to the partition and the outer silencer casing. The radial brackets shall be installed full length and at 120 degree angles to each other to assure uniform spacing for consistent aerodynamic and acoustic performance. F. Mounting and support silencer with proper guide wires, supports, etc. 2.10 Media Bed Section A. The media bed section shall include three (3) 12" (308 mm) deep beds. The 15' and 2nd pass of media shall be Odorcarb Ultra and the 3rd pass shall be Odormix SP media or equivalent medias. B. Each media bed shall be contained between separate corrosion resistant support grids and perforated sheet metal to provide media support while imposing a minimum resistance to airflow. C. The media containment sections shall be separated to assure filling and removal of individual beds as required. New media shall be poured in bulk into the top of the unit through access hatches and shall be filled a minimum of 7" (178 mm) above the bed to prevent airnow bypass. Spent media shall be vacuumed from the bottom of the unit through standard 4" (102 mm) vacuum ports. D. A minimum of 72" (1828 mm) of service clearance are recommended in order to sample the media beds from sample ports. 2.11 Media A. Medias specified herein are based on Purafil. Equivalent medias from alternate suppliers can be proposed. B. Odorcarb Ultra Media 1. The Odorcarb Ultra Media shall consist of manufactured, generally spherical porous pellets. The pellets shall be formed from a combination of powered activated carbon, alumina, and other and proprietary chemicals to enhance the capacity for removal of odorous gases. The pellets shall also chemically react to produce solid reaction products within the media. 2. Odorcarb Ultra Media shall have the following physical properties: a. Moisture content: 35% maximum. b. Average crush strength: 35% minimum - 70% maximum. c. Average abrasion: 4.5 maximum. d. Bulk density: 40 lbs/ft3 (0.64 g/cc) +5%. o e. Nominal pellet diameter: 1/16" —1/8" (1.587 mm). o =. f. 1-12S Removal Capacity: 0.3g/cc. wl7 rn g. Removes 18.8lbs of 1-12S per cubic foot minimum. ro 3. Odorcarb Ultra Media shall be UL Classified Class 2. r 4. Odorcarb Ultra Media shall be capable of absorbing and removing odorouses(houg the entire pellet. :ern 3X - CD CD - Q C. Odoroxidant SP Media ^';3z 1. Odoroxidant SP Media shall be manufactured of generally spherical, poro�rpellets-formed from a combination of powdered activated alumina and other binders, suitably impregnatddtivith potassium permanganate to provide optimum adsorption, absorption, and oxidation of a wide variety of gaseous contaminants. The potassium permanganate shall be applied during pellet formation, such as the impregnant is uniformly distributed throughout the pellet volume and is totally available for reaction. 1. Odoroxidant SP Media a. Moisture content: 35% maximum. b. Average crush strength: 35% minimum - 70% maximum. c. Average abrasion: 4.5% maximum. d. Bulk density: 50 Ibs/ft3 (0.8 g/cc) +5%. 26710.01.00 PROGRESSING CAVITY METERING PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 46 33 46- Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Progressing cavity polymer metering pumps, motors, and accessories. B. Equipment list: Item Equipment No. Polymer Metering Pump P 9321A Polymer Metering Pump P 9322A Polymer Metering Pump P 9323A Polymer Metering Pump P 9326A 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0143 33 — Manufacturer's Field Services. B. Section 0173 19 — Installation Requirements C. Section 26 05 03— Small and Medium 3 -Phase Motors. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1V O O � A. Product Data: 1-4 -v 1. Characteristic performance curves for pumps, showing total dynamic head,a akAorse owe plotted against capacity in gpm. A 2. Motor data. —M A 3 3. Identification of manufacturer and manufacturer's representative to which uni€ ng ility i� assigned. 4. Manufacturer's information, including catalog data, performance curves and tables, sR29ification sheets and product literature that shows equipment meets specified performance and design criteria and operating conditions. B. Quality assurance data: Written warranty. i [iL!_[Q1 PL 61111=1 L I 1 ■ IF_116y A. Shop Drawings showing equipment, dimensions, materials, motor, and connection provisions for piping and electrical power. B. Performance curve showing flow, TDH, pump speed, and horsepower. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance information in accordance with requirements of Section 01 78 23. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Spare parts: Each unit shall be furnished with manufacturers repair kit that shall include all parts required for disassembly and reassembly including as minimum the following: 1. One complete stator assembly. 2. One complete universal joint set. 3. One complete set of packing. 4. One complete set of bearing 5. Other spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer 26710.01.00 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION ODOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT ms1869 SECTION 44 31 16 - Page 7 D. Should the equipment not be accepted on initial testing, the manufacturer shall have the opportunity to adjust or modify the equipment and operating conditions. E. The additional testing shall be performed at no expense to the Owner. F. If modifications or adjustments are made which would affect the air flow design rate, the air handing system (fan, drive, etc.) shall be modified or replaced accordingly to maintain the air flow design rate. G. Should the installed equipment not meet the performance specifications upon re -testing, the Contractor shall remove the installed equipment and replace it with equipment which meets the specifications at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall make all necessary supporting systems changes in order to provide a properly installed operating system. H. No time extension shall be guaranteed for testing, re -testing, modifications or replacement of equipment. 3.04 Report A. A summary report shall be prepared for the media performance testing and the performance testing and submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for review and acceptance. B. The report shall include a one page executive summary, description of test protocol, table of results showing airflow, inlet air results, and outlet air results. 3.05 Analytical Services A. The manufacturer shall, after start up, provide lab analysis service to predict the remaining life style of the media. free of charge B. Such service shall be provided at the manufacturer's expense for a period of ten years. C. The manufacturer shall be able to provide in-house lab analysis of the equipment media predicting the remaining life cycle of the media. Such service shall be provided at the manufacturer's expense. D. Such service shall be provided at the manufacturer's expense for a period of at least ten years. END OF SECTION 1) J.M. Brady 2) N =� _o r 1 -4 0 n-< vt 1 -r �7 p M O� T+ ca 26710.01.00 PROGRESSING CAVITY METERING PUMPS ms1869 SECTION 46 33 46- Page 3 2.03 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP A. Type: Progressing cavity, positive displacement. B. Minimum number of stages: 2. C. Quantity: 2. D. Operating conditions: 1. Flooded suction. 2. Normal operating capacity range: 1 gpm at 185' to 30 gpm at 185'. 3. Pump speed at normal operating range: 125 rpm to 600 rpm. 4. Rated for operating up to: 30 gpm at 185' TDH. 5. Maximum pump speed at rated point: 850 rpm. 6. Pumps shall be suitable for pumping polymer solution viscosity 2,000 centipoises, specific gravity of 1.05 and with 0.5% solids by weight and shall be capable of passing spheres of 0.16"(4 mm) diameter. 7. Motor horsepower; 3. E. Materials: 1. Case: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 25. 2. Stator: Buna-N or nitrile synthetic rubber. 3. Rotor: High carbon, high chrome tool steel with minimum 0.01" chrome plate. 4. Drive shaft: Tool steel, chrome plated through packing areas. 5. Base: Fabricated steel or cast iron. F. Frame: Rigid skid -type frame base for pump drive and motor. Cradle -type permitting rotaon of suction to any position. o C") ; *r G. Stator: 1 -piece molding bonded to metal housing. %— t { 1 H. Rotor: Helical -type. C71 Gr3 n I. Shaft: Design to support axial and radial loads. Pin -type sealed universal joints. M J. Bearings: Grease -lubricated radial and thrust bearing. B-10 life of bearing shall %weed 1,000 hours. W K. Seals: Packed stuffing box with lantern ring and ductile iron split gland. Provide threaded fitting for grease lubrication. L. Baseplate: Common base for pump and drive with gutter lip and 1" (25 mm) threaded drain connection. M. Gear reducer: Provide gear reduction between drive motor output shaft and pump drive shaft for required speed range. N. Coupling guard: Provide coupling guard of OSHA -approved design. Attach with wing nuts for ease of removal. 2.04 MOTORS A. Type: Horizontal, squirrel -cage induction, solid shaft. Provide grease -lubricated ball bearings. B. Enclosures: TEFC. C. Operation: Variable speed. D. Ratings: 1. Continuous duty. PROGRESSING CAVITY METERING PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 46 33 46 ms1869 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer engaged primarily in design and fabrication of progressing cavity pumps for wastewater service for at least the last 10 years. 2. Minimum of 50 similar units installed and operating successfully in U.S. B. Units shall be supplied by one manufacturer for commonality and shall be the same manufacturer supplying the progressive cavity sludge pumps. Refer to Section 43 2153. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Equipment shall be located indoors in heated, ventilated building. B. Indoor air characteristics: 1. Temperature: 50°F to 104°F. 2. Relative humidity: 30% to 100%. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Guarantee completely installed system for 2 years following final acceptance with a warranty against defects in workmanship and materials. Warranty shall be limited to parts and labor for necessary repairs within warranty period. B. Repairs shall be made within 60 days after manufacturer is notified of defect. C. Normal maintenance items not covered by warranty. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Robbins and Myers, Moyno. B. Netzsch Incorporated, Nemo. C. Seepex. D. Or equal. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS o J A. Provide drive units, accessories, specials, and similar items required for compO"stAtion. M B. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at flow conditions specified vdtiieat exaessivt"se, vibration, heating, cavitation, or damage to pump. =tc-)c-n 1 r— m,,, C. Shafts: Accurately grind and machine surface to ensure interchangeability of an�arts attached to shaft and be of sufficient size to transmit required horsepower. a r D. Pump support shall accommodate hydraulic thrust forces; no supplementary support wj&e provided. E. Equip pumps with flanged suction and discharge connections conforming to 125 Ib ANSI B16.1. F. Design pumps for ease of dismantling for inspection and maintenance. Coupling guards shall be secured with wing nuts for ease of removal. G. Materials or features not specified shall be manufacturer's standard for equipment and shall be suitable for specified service conditions. Pumps and motors shall be engineered and designed as complete, coordinated functioning units. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Continuous belt filter press equipment for nominal 2 -meter belt filter presses as specified and required to provide a complete and operating system for dewatering temperature -phased (Thermophilic - Mesophilic) anaerobically digested sludge. B. Digested sludge is a combination of primary sludge and secondary sludge from a liquid treatment process that at times experiences enhanced biological phosphorus removal. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including: general arrangement, outline drawings, dimensions, size, weight, foundation loadings performance data, and motor horsepower. 2. Control description and 1/0 list for all equipment provided by belt filter press manufacturer. 3. Hydraulic belt tensioning system, if provided, including manufacturer literature and oil flow rate, pressure, and type requirements. 4. Motor size and model number. 5. Control panel dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing entire belt filter press assembly, including material list and desertion of all components, structural members, auxiliary items and devices. r 2. Details of any additional equipment, structural items, and devices required conforg to aa"ble space (Reference: paragraph 2.02)..c r9 3. Recommended platform layout for accessing critical components of equipi'mmm- 4. For all motors, data including type, size and model number; assembly dravd.n Sc, op&tionland maintenance manual, rated size of motors with calculations supporting seleetgDnotorsize,—,n temperature rating. _ rn ��tt 5. Complete control panel and local control panel details, wiring diagrams shod II ek�:ctrica� connections to motors and variable speed controls, and logic diagrams. V .• 6. Control diagrams and process and instrumentation diagrams relating to subrfted a'ment. 7. Drawing and catalog information detailing all control devices in control cabinets as well as overall panel layout interconnection diagrams and construction. 8. Detailed installation drawings, showing size and location of all equipment, piping, electrical, instrumentation and structural connections. 9. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 10. Anchor bolt requirements for cast -in-place construction. C. Calculations certified by a professional engineer registered in Iowa, documenting structural design of frame and rollers per requirements specified. Calculations shall be submitted within two weeks of contract award. D. Written report of field test results. E. Proposed on-site testing and start-up procedures. F. Training course outline and proposed class materials. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operating and maintenance information for proposed equipment. B. Extended warranty PROGRESSING CAVITY METERING PUMPS 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 46 33 46 msl869 2. Nameplate motor horsepower shall be no less than maximum required pump input for maximum conditions of head and capacity specified. 3. Voltage: 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz. E. Motors used with variable speed pumps shall be inverter duty and shall be suitable for operation with variable speed drive. F. Meet applicable requirements of Section 26 05 03. 2.05 SHOP PAINTING A. Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be sandblasted to commercial grade finish SSPC SP6; and given 1 shop coat of Tnemec "66-1211 Epoxoline Primer" epoxy primer, 4.0 mdft. B. Coat machine -finished surfaces with suitable corrosion preventative compound. C. Motors shall be manufacturer's standard finish painting. 2.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Permanently attach stainless steel nameplate to pump. 1. Equipment number (see Drawings). 2. Serial number of pump. 3. Capacity in gpm. 4. Pumping head in feet. 5. Speed, rpm. 6. Manufacturer's name. 7. Size and type of pump. 8: Design pressure. Nameplate shall contain following information: B. Provide progressing cavity pumps with cast -in or permanently attached direction -of -rotation arrow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 01 73 19. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. As specified in Section 09 96 00. 0 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES CD Z A. Provide inspection and testing by service representative as specified in Sectiongl:]t rn 33 ��B. Describe installation to Contractor. U7� C. rn Inspect and accept installation for compliance with warranty requirements. 5;0 s _ 0 c D. Direct and witness equipment testing prior to plant startup. D c.a E. Test equipment to show it can achieve performance and design requirements specified. END OF SECTION 1) J.M. Brady 2) 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Continuous belt fitter press equipment for nominal 2 -meter belt filter presses as specified and required to provide a complete and operating system for dewatering temperature -phased (Thermophilic - Mesophilic) anaerobically digested sludge. B. Digested sludge is a combination of primary sludge and secondary sludge from a liquid treatment process that at times experiences enhanced biological phosphorus removal. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including: general arrangement, outline drawings, dimensions, size, weight, foundation loadings performance data, and motor horsepower. 2. Control description and 1/0 list for all equipment provided by belt filter press manufacturer. 3. Hydraulic belt tensioning system, if provided, including manufacturer literature and oil flow rate, pressure, and type requirements. 4. Motor size and model number. 5. Control panel dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings showing entire belt filter press assembly, including material list and description of all components, structural members, auxiliary items and devices. 2. Details of any additional equipment, structural items, and devices required to conform to available space (Reference: paragraph 2.02). 3. Recommended platform layout for accessing critical components of equipment. 4. For all motors, data including type, size and model number; assembly drawings, operations and maintenance manual, rated size of motors with calculations supporting selected motor size, temperature rating. 5. Complete control panel and local control panel details, wiring diagrams showing all electrical connections to motors and variable speed controls, and logic diagrams. 6. Control diagrams and process and instrumentation diagrams relating to submitted equipment. 7. Drawing and catalog information detailing all control devices in control cabinets as well as overall panel layout interconnection diagrams and construction. 8. Detailed installation drawings, showing size and location of all equipment, piping, electrical, instrumentation and structural connections. 9. Setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 10. Anchor bolt requirements for cast -in-place construction. C. Calculations certified by a professional engineer registered in Iowa, documenting structural design of frame and rollers per requirements specified. Calculations shall be submitted within two *%eks of contract award. o D. ',Written report of field test results. v y ~ �+ v 'n (; E. Proposed on-site testing and start-up procedures. _; ` F. - Training course outline and proposed class materials. O ?7 2 r 1 1io§ t_.. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS N A.' Operating and maintenance information for proposed equipment. i B. Extended warranty BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 C. Installation list. D. Certificate of Unit Responsibility attesting that manufacturer accepts unit responsibility in accordance with requirements of this Section. No other submittal material will be reviewed until certificate has been received and found to be in conformance with these requirements. Format shall be as provided in Form A. E. Training Certification as specified within 30 days of training. F. Affidavit as specified prior to contract completion. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. One set of any tools required for servicing belt finer presses shall be provided. In addition, following spare parts shall be provided: 1. Two complete sets, replacement belts (The belts shall not be provided until a period of time after start up, to allow evaluation of performance of installed belts.) 2. Two complete sets of doctor blades including all fasteners, brackets and appurtenances necessary for mounting on press frame 3. Cams, if used, for doctor blades 4. Gravity, wedge and shower box seals 5. One complete set, water spray nozzles 6. One bearing of each size and type used on each machine and subassembly 7. One complete set, all belt positioning and tensioning devices B. Spare parts shall be protected, labeled, and boxed. Special tools shall be Proto, or equal, with name of Owner engraved on each. Tools shall be furnished in a painted metal mechanic's toolbox fitted with a lock hasp. The words "Belt Filter Press Tools" and name of Owner shall be neatly stenciled on cover. C. Furnish a list of additional recommended spare parts for an operating period of one year. This list shall describe each part, quantity recommended, and unit price of part. D. Furnish oil and grease required for initial operation. Products shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Provide storage instructions for equipment. C. Boxes, crates and packages will be inspected upon delivery. Damage components shall be replaced or repaired in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE l A. manufacturer qualifications: No .1. Minimum of 5 years' experience in design and fabrication of belt filter pressor slu "" j c, • dewatering in wastewater treatment plants. S c? rr able to demonstrate a minimum of 10 installations within United States in wabIr"ter"Hpplicatiew. similar to that herein specified. At minimum five of installations shall have ben1f�opjqtion ISM v minimum of five years. --+n rn A summary of required installations shall be submitted including: =� rn v - a. Location installed. b. Contact information of end user. r x N c. Year installed. v N d. Number of units and belt width. ry e. Type of sludge dewatered (e.g. primary, secondary, combination, digested, etc.). r BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 2 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 C. Installation list. D. \beenelved of Unit Responsibility attesting that manufacturer accepts unit responsibility in accordance rements of this Section. No other submittal material will be reviewed until certificate has and found to be in conformance with these requirements. Format shall be as provided E. Training C%SP'f'c'ified tion as specified within 30 days of training. F. Affidavit aprior to contract completion. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. One set of any tools quired for servicing belt filter presses shall be provided. In addition, following spare parts shall be p vided: 1. Two complete sets\shower ement belts (The belts shall not be provided until a period of time after start up, to allow en of performance of installed belts.) 2. Two complete setstor blades including all fasteners, brackets and appurtenances necessary for moupress frame 3. Cams, if used, for des r 4.: Gravity, wedge anr ox seals 5. One complete set,pra nozzles 6. One bearing of eaand a used on each machine and subassembly 7. One complete set, positio ing and tensioning devices B. Spare parts shall be protected, labeled, nd bod. ecial tools shall be Proto, or equal, wi name of Owner engraved on each. Tools shall fxe urnished Spin a painted metal mechanic's toolb ed with a lock hasp. The words "Belt Filter Press7T Is" and name of Owner shall be neat) nciled on cover. C. Furnish a list of additional recommended sp\andit s for an oper period of one year. This list shall describe each part, quantity recommended, price rt. D. Furnish oil and grease required for initial manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND 1.06 A. Deliver materials to Site to B. Provide storage uninterrupted progress of for equipment. shall be as recommended by C. Boxes, crates d packages will be inspected upon delivery. Da or repaired Xaccordance with manufacturer's instructions at no ro 0 O � nt cn componen4sshall be reMd al cost to Owne� 1 1 A. manufacturer qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years' experience in design and fabrication of belt filter pres\inop . dewatering in wastewater treatment plants. 2. able to demonstrate a minimum of 10 installations within United States in plications similar to that herein specified. At minimum five of installations shall havetion for a minimum of fiveyears. 3. A summary of required installations shall be submitted including: a. Location installed. b. Contact information of end user. c. Year installed. d. Number of units and belt width. e. Type of sludge dewatered (e.g. primary, secondary, combination, digested, etc.). 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 3 B. O ain all equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from,a single belt filte ress manufacturer. C. Unit r\nsibility:sibility:1. Tresponsibility as specified is assigned to belt filter press manufacturer for equipment sin this section. A certificate of unit responsibility shall be provided. 2. Tt r ponsibildy manufacturer shall coordinate selection, coordinate design, and shall pall echanical equipment assembly components such that all equipment components fud un r specification for equipment assembly, and all equipment components specified ere but ferenced in this specification, is compatible and operates reliably and properly to aspecifie performance requirements. Agents, representatives or other entities that are not adivision o riven equipment manufacturing corporation shall not be accepted as a ste for driven quipment manufacturer in meeting this requirement. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL A. The sludge filter press will be I ted in Sludge Processing Facility in a ventilated room as s The press will be floor mounted bpove center drainage sump. The press will be subjected to hosedown for cleaning purposes. The temperatures within press room may be expect between 40 and 100 degrees F; rel ive humidity will range between 50 and 100 per Y B. It maybe expected material discharge o each press will be in an actively .� st ands all quantities of digester gas may be presen The gas is expected to conta' etlt�arteiin cQncentrat ons of up to 70 percent, with remainder compri ed of orincioally carbon ide wit��to 24110 parts per million dissolved hydrogen sulfide and trace concentrations of methane will be present in agents (moisture, hydrogen sulfide gas, sulft materials shall be selected to provide approp exercised in manufacture of equipment to elii inaccessible areas where corrosion can take preventive measures. �er, oge hile it is v likel explosi+ , manufacturer is �dViseat �orro�ggive be present at all . A=rdingfy✓ e to corrosion anda effoRshall be s, unsealed overlap ngyplate�wnd similar allowing access for application of C. Controls: The press, along with associat90sludge and Nlymer pumps, will be operated at a variable rate to optimize combinations of feed e, polymer additi6q and belt speed for various conditions of sludg/nts. centration, organiGinorg is solids percentage d other characteristics. Control for feed pumppolymer pumps will b y plant SCADA system. D. Utilityces: 1. Wor belt clean prays will be strained plant effluent w er. The water pressure at press wge from 85 t 35 pounds per square inch. Water consu tion shall not exceed 120 gper minut . Water for cleaning sprays will be strained plan effluent, which is expected to cup to 1 mg/I chlorine, small quantities of biological floc an flute concentrations of inial sol nts. 2. Pr, i diluted solution form, will be pumped to press polymer/slud mixing section by a vpeed, positive displacement pump. 3. Por motors will be provided at 480 volts AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase. The m imum recommended beed for performance in accordance with paragraphs 1.02 Extended Li ited Warranty shall correspond to operation of drive motor at 480 volts AC, 60 Hz. E. Applied solids: 1. Anaerobically digested primary and waste sludge from treatment process will be pum d to press by dedicated, variable speed positive displacement feedstock pump. The ratio of prima o secondary solids is expected to vary between 0.75 and 1.5. The sludge is expected to cont quantities of industrial wastes including solvents, petroleum products, grit, hair, rags, grease, plastic and rubber goods, and organic solids in concentrations ranging from 1.5 to 5 percent. The filter press will be routinely operated with an inlet solids concentration of 1 to 2 percent. 2. Sludge delivered to press will have a temperature of 55 to 100 degrees F and will have a pH which may range from 5 to 8. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 3 B. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single belt filter press manufacturer. C. Unit responsibility: 1. The unit responsibility as specified is assigned to belt filter press manufacturer for equipment specified in this section. A certificate of unit responsibility shall be provided. 2. The unit responsibility manufacturer shall coordinate selection, coordinate design, and shall provide all mechanical equipment assembly components such that all equipment components furnished under specification for equipment assembly, and all equipment components specified elsewhere but referenced in this specification, is compatible and operates reliably and properly to achieve specified performance requirements. Agents, representatives or other entities that are not a direct division of driven equipment manufacturing corporation shall not be accepted as a substitute for driven equipment manufacturer in meeting this requirement. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The sludge filter press will be located in Sludge Processing Facility in a ventilated room as specified. The press will be floor mounted above center drainage sump. The press will be subjected to frequent hosedown for cleaning purposes. The temperatures within press room may be expected to range between 40 and 100 degrees F; relative humidity will range between 50 and 100 percent. B. It may be expected material discharged to each press will be in an actively digesting state, and small quantities of digester gas may be present. The gas is expected to contain methane in concentrations of up to 70 percent, with remainder comprised of principally carbon dioxide with up to 2000 parts per million dissolved hydrogen sulfide and trace quantities of nitrogen. While it is very unlikely explosive concentrations of methane will be present in room atmosphere, manufacturer is advised that corrosive agents (moisture, hydrogen sulfide gas, sulfuric acid, etc.) will be present at all times. Accordingly, materials shall be selected to provide appropriate resistance to corrosion and every effort shall be exercised in manufacture of equipment to eliminate crevices, unsealed overlapping plates and similar inaccessible areas where corrosion can take place without allowing access for application of preventive measures. C. Controls: The press, along with associated sludge and polymer pumps, will be operated at a variable rate to optimize combinations of feed rate, polymer addition and belt speed for various conditions of sludge concentration, organic/inorganic solids percentage and other characteristics. Control for feed pumps and polymer pumps will be by plant SCADA system. D. Utility services: 1. Water for belt cleaning sprays will be strained plant effluent water. The water pressure at press will range from 85 to 135 pounds per square inch. Water consumption shall not exceed 120 gallons per minute. Water for cleaning sprays will be strained plant effluent, which is expected to contain up to 10 mg/I chlorine, small quantities of biological floc and dilute concentrations of industrial solvents. 2. Polymer, in diluted solution form, will be pumped to press polymer/sludge mixing section by a variable speed, positive displacement pump. 3. Power for motors will be provided at 480 volts AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase. The maximum reammended belt speed for performance in accordance with paragraphs 1.02 Extended Limited Wa�'ranty 11 correspond to operation of drive motor at 480 volts AC, 60 Hz. rn { D E. Applied solids: -1. Anaerobically digested primary and waste sludge from treatment process wilt$gumped to r"s by dedicated, variable speed positive displacement feedstock pump. The ratio rim:lyy to t r c secondary solids is expected to vary between 0.75 and 1.5. The sludge ised tp Fonta© quantities of industrial wastes including solvents, petroleum products, grit, h' rags, ease, plastic and rubber goods, and organic solids in concentrations ranging from 1-.5 to 5 ¢. The . filter press will be routinely operated with an inlet solids concentration of 1 to 2 percent. 2. Sludge delivered to press will have a temperature of 55 to 100 degrees F and will have a pH which may range from 5 to 8. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 1.08 WARRANTY A. manufacturer of belt press shall provide an extended warranty for Owner. The warranty shall cover troubleshooting investigations, repair and replacement of parts due to defective materials or workmanship for durations listed below following date of Substantial Completion. Provide a certificate from belt press manufacturer which defines conditions and terms of warranty as outlined below. All costs for extended warranty shall be included in manufacturer's bid. The manufacturer's certificate of extended warranty for belt filter press equipment shall include following: B. Warrant frame and coating for a period of three years from date of Substantial Completion. Any defects or corrosion occurring within warranty period shall be repaired or replaced, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Warrant rollers and coating to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of three years from date of Substantial Completion. Neither rollers nor coating shall require preventive maintenance during warranty period. The warranty shall include all parts and labor and shall cover cost of repairing or replacing any item that fails during warranty period, provided damage is not due to misuse or neglect by others. D. Warrant complete bearing assembly, as specified herein, for a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion. The warranty shall include all parts and labor for repairing or replacing any bearing assembly part that fails during warranty period. E. Belt Life Guarantee: manufacturer shall guarantee that belt life of each belt furnished will not be less than 4,500 hours. Belts not providing this wearability under normal usage shall be replaced. Belts providing less than 2,000 hours shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. Belts providing more than 2,000 hours will be paid for by Owner on a pro rata basis. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Charter Machine Company. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The belt filter press shall be specifically designed for wastewater sludge service and shall be of continuous belt design with three distinct dewatering sections: gravity drainage, wedge compression, and roll pressurization, to yield cake solids concentration required under this section. Equipment employing other types of dewatering sections or combinations of dewatering sections other than those specified will not be accepted. Equipment utilizing prethickening devices such as added gravity belts, rotary prethickeners, or other such devices will also not be accepted. B. The machine shall be of type which, in wedge and roll pressurization zones, entrains sludge between ,no more than two continuous open meshed belts with a system of rollers and belt tensioning devices acting on rollers exclusively to provide ever increasing pressure as sludge advances to"rd discharge pointof machine. The gravity section may utilize a separate belt. o 0 C. Equipment provided under this specification shall be of industrial type, specificam6bsigAid fora dewatering of anaerobically digested sludge from a municipal wastewater treatrAb!r plan? C-) Z0 - 24D3 0 -2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.. Design requirements of unit specified shall be understood to establish minimum( reWts oAV The equipment, when installed and operating, shall meet or exceed specified mi num pe ormance requirements. w BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 4 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 1.06 WARRANTY A. manuf4turer of belt press shall provide an extended warranty for Owner. The warranty shall cover troubles ooting investigations, repair and replacement of parts due to defective materials or workman hip for durations listed below following date of Substantial Completion. Provide a certificate from belt ss manufacturer which defines conditions and terms of warranty as outlined below. All costs for ex1prided warranty shall be included in manufacturer's bid. The manufacturer's certificate of extended walKanty for belt filter press equipment shall include following: B. Warrant frame kd coating for a period of three years from date of Substantial Completion. Any defects or corrosn occurring within warranty period shall be repaired or replaced, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Warrant rollers and c ting to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of three years from date of Substantial Completi n. Neither rollers nor coating shall require preventive maintenance during warranty period. The we my shall include all parts and labor and shall cover cost of repairing or replacing any item that fai during warranty period, provided damage is not due to misuse or neglect by others. D. Warrant complete bearing ass6knbly, as specified herein, for a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion. The wa anty shall include all parts and labor for repairing or replacing any bearing assembly part that fails d ing warranty period. E Belt Life Guarantee: manufacturer sh I guarantee that belt life of each belt furnished will not b less than 4,500 hours. Belts not providing t wearability under normal usage shall be replaced. is providing less than 2,000 hours shall be placed at no additional cost to Owner. Be oviding more than 2,000 hours will be paid for by Owner n a pro rata basis. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Charter Machine Company. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The belt filter pre all be specifically designed for wastewafbrsludge service and shall be of continuous design with three distinct dewatering sections: gr 'ty drainage, wedge ee,pression, and roll ssurization, to yield cake solids concentration required u er this seSaton. Egagr ment empl ying other types of dewatering sections or combinations of dewa ring seM othw tharr"Me specified will not be accepted. Equipment utilizing prethickening devices uch aso d Ovity belts, rotary prethickeners, or other such devices will also not be accepted. --) -< t cn B. The machine shall be of type which, in wedge and roll pressurization zones, a trijainludgg between no more than two continuous open meshed belts with a system of rollers and b tieQon4* devip" acting on rollers exclusively to provide ever increasing pressure as sludge advan wai5disch'a ge point of machine. The gravity section may utilize a separate belt. c.a C. Equipment provided under this specification shall be of industrial type, specifically designed for dewatering of anaerobically digested sludge from a municipal wastewater treatment plant. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design requirements of unit specified shall be understood to establish minimum requirements only. The equipment, when installed and operating, shall meet or exceed specified minimum performance requirements. ms1 B. Design in accordance wit 1. Minimum overall belt 'dth, meters: 2.2. 2. Minimum effective filtra 'on areas, square feet: 140 total. 3. Gravity zone: 65. Area etermined on basis of only area supported by belt support grid. 4. Wedge zone: 38. Area termined on basis of only lower belt area supported by belt support grid. 5. High pressure zone: As ne ed to meet performance requirements. C. Design to accommodate solids up and including 5/8 inch in any dimension without jamming, clogging, or overflow. The press sha be designed for continuous operation under conditions set forth in this section. D. Configure to afford an unimpeded view o'ksludge in gravity dewatering section. E. Design belt filter presses for continuous F. The belt filter presses shall be of continuous b6lt design with three dewatering zones including a gravity drainage section, followed by a wedge z e and an increasing pressure, drum and roller zone to yield cake dryness required. The machine shat a of type, which entrains sludge between two continuous open meshed belts with a system of pe orated and solid rollers. A belt tegMn system shall act on these rollers exclusively to provide incre ing pressure as sludge advanceStoward discharge of machine. A third and separate belt will b allowed for gravity se� reg on standard configuration. Belt filter press shall be comple m4 with all necessary 4, gibr drivai . hydraulic system, control panel, alarm system, belts and elt wash system, aroy-Appurtenanc required for a complete and operable system. Dewatered Judge shall then beYpr9ve(i�om with scrapers (doctor blades) and belts shall then be washed p r to receiving add' s G. Machine shall be completely factory assembled and tested, otherwise speeffied tgrein.t e main frame assembly shall require only bolting to fl on ection of exterpa� piping -and electrical wiring. Flocculation devices, belts, pre -dew g drums, and o er equipment which ntht be damaged during shipping if mounted ain frame shall be insta ed following shipment by a representative of manufacturer. ectrical components located o machine shall be pre -wired at factory except connections b een machine and control panel whic will be completed in field. H. Machine shall be design6d and constructed in such a manner so as to N suitable for continuous heavy-duty use in umid and corrosive atmospheric environment. I. Routine enance shall be possible without taking machine out of servic Betts shall be rept le without requiring disassembly of belt filter presses. J. All parts requiring routine maintenance shall be readily accessible from outside o machine. Side panels, where furnished, shall be easily removable for access to machine's comp ents and shall be securely attached to frame when in place. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. As a minimum, press shall provide following performance characteristics when operating accordance with conditions presented in this section: B. Sludge Characteristics: 1. Type of sludge: anaerobically digested primary and waste activated sludge 2. Sludge Production: a. Design Annual Average Daily Sludge Production: 18,700 Ib/day dry solids. b. Design Maximum Month Average. Sludge Production: 26,250 Ib/day dry solids. 3. Sludge Consistency: a. Average Sludge Dry Solids: 1.6 percent. b. Minimum Sludge Dry Solids: 0.6 percent. c. Maximum Sludge Dry Solids: 2.1 percent. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 5 B. Design in accordance with: 1. Minimum overall belt width, meters: 2.2. 2. Minimum effective filtration areas, square feet: 140 total. 3. Gravity zone: 65. Area determined on basis of only area supported by belt support grid. 4. Wedge zone: 38. Area determined on basis of only lower belt area supported by bell support grid. 5. High pressure zone: As needed to meet performance requirements. C. Design to accommodate solids up to and including 5/8 inch in any dimension without jamming, clogging, or overflow. The press shall be designed for continuous operation under conditions set forth in this section. D. Configure to afford an unimpeded view of sludge in gravity dewatering section. E. Design belt filter presses for continuous operation. F. The belt filter presses shall be of continuous belt design with three dewatering zones including a gravity drainage section, followed by a wedge zone and an increasing pressure, drum and roller zone to yield cake dryness required. The machine shall be of type, which entrains sludge between two continuous open meshed belts with a system of perforated and solid rollers. A belt tension system shall act on these rollers exclusively to provide increasing pressure as sludge advances toward discharge of machine. A third and separate belt will be allowed for gravity section if required per standard configuration. Belt filter press shall be complete with all necessary motors, gear drives, hydraulic system, control panel, alarm system, belts and belt wash system, and appurtenances required for a complete and operable system. Dewatered sludge shall then be removed from belts with scrapers (doctor blades) and belts shall then be washed prior to receiving additional sludge. G. Machine shall be completely factory assembled and tested, unless otherwise specified herein. The main frame assembly shall require only bolting to floor and connection of external piping and electrical wiring. Flocculation devices, belts, pre -dewatering drums, and other equipment which might be damaged during shipping if mounted on main frame shall be installed following shipment by a representative of manufacturer. All electrical components located on machine shall be pre -wired at factory except connections between machine and control panel which will be completed in field. H. Machine shall be designed and constructed in such a manner so as to be suitable for continuous heavy-duty use in a humid and corrosive atmospheric environment. Routine maintenance shall be possible without taking machine out of service. Belts shall be replaceable without requiring disassembly of belt finer presses. J. All parts requiring routine maintenance shall be readily accessible from outside of machine. Side panels, where furnished, shall be easily removable for access to machine's components and shall be securely attached to frame when in place. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS N o A. As a minimum, press shall provide following performance characteristics when j*EbtinR accordance with conditions presented in this section: --j n–C — B! Sludge Characteristics: =;c -)t- `o 1. Type of sludge: anaerobically digested primary and waste activated sludgepr _ 2. Sludge Production: ox tv a. Design Annual Average Daily Sludge Production: 18,700 Ib/day dry sol. b. Design Maximum Month Average. Sludge Production: 26,250 Ib/day dy solids." 3. Sludge Consistency: a. Average Sludge Dry Solids: 1.6 percent. b. Minimum Sludge Dry Solids: 0.6 percent. c. Maximum Sludge Dry Solids: 2.1 percent. r M BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 d. Volatile Solids Content: 55 to 78 percent 4. Belt Filter Press Parameters: a. Hours of Operation: 15 hours/day, 7 days/week for maximum month average sludge production. b. Design Sludge Flow Rate to Press at Average Percent Dry Solids: 160 gpm per press. c. Design Sludge Dry Solids Weight to Press: (Maximum Month Average Sludge Production): 1,000 Ib/hr per press. d. Minimum Required Cake Dry Solids at Average Percent Feed Sludge Dry Solids: 20 percent. e. Minimum Solids Capture: 95 percent (filtrate solids plus washwater solids). f. Maximum Polymer Usage at Average Percent Feed Sludge Dry Solids: 23 Ib/dry ton of feed sludge dry solids. g. Number of Belt Filter Presses Required: 3. 2.05 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT A. The manufacturer is alerted to fact that sludge dewatering room layout is dictated by existing space available. The existing belt filter press layout is depicted in reference drawings contained in Request for Proposals. B. The belt filter press equipment shall not extend higher than 10 feet which allows nominally three feet of headroom with structural ceiling of existing building when mounted to existing floor elevation. Similarly, required space for maintenance of equipment on any side must be possible given constraints of existing room. See reference drawings contained Request for Proposals. C. The belt filter press equipment shall discharge dewatered cake onto existing horizontal belt conveyor. The existing conveyor belt runs at 2'-8" above existing floor elevation with side guards that extend to 3-7" above floor. Cake shall be dropped onto conveyor at a maximum height of 1'-6" above belt. Proposed equipment shall be configured to operate with existing conveyor configuration. Provide vertical box chute with flexible shields at conveyor/box interface to facilitate containment of sludge cake while allowing conveyor cake to transverse through chute. D. The manufacturer shall identify, as part of shop drawings for belt filter presses, complete layout of any platforms, access bridges and other auxiliary equipment recommended for operation or maintenance of equipment including visual inspection of top of gravity section. 2.06 MATERIALS A. Frame: Steel, ASTM A36, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A123. B. Splash guard, vertical box chute: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316LT C. Drum rollers: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316L. r ..� D. Rollers: Steel tube, ASTM A36,1/2" minimum coated with Rilsan nylon II or A5-A.3204ype 3-1161111 stainless steel. 1 -0 C-) r E. 'Roller shafts: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. �c f T' ��i "V rn F. Hydraulic piping: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. o N c :t M G. Plows and sludge distribution equipment: ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel,, Z' ted Uspecified. M H. ,Belt filter cloth: Monofilament polyester. I. Belt seam closures (for seamed belts): ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel. J. Spray headers: ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 6 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 d. Volatile Solids Content: 55 to 78 percent 4. Bel filter Press Parameters: a. \Fe rs of Operation: 15 hours/day, 7 days/week for maximum month average sludge uction. b. n Sludge Flow Rate to Press at Average Percent Dry Solids: 160 gpm per press. c. ig Sludge Dry Solids Weight to Press: (Maximum Month Average Sludge Production): 0 Ib r per press. d. imum equired Cake Dry Solids at Average Percent Feed Sludge Dry Solids: 20 percent. e. imum S Ms Capture: 95 percent (filtrate solids plus washwater solids). f. imum Po er Usage at Average Percent Feed Sludge Dry Solids: 23 Ib/dry ton of feed ge dry soli g. ber of Belt Fi r Presses Required: 3. 2.05 EQUIPMENYOUT A. The macturer is alerted to fa that sludge dewatering room layout is dictated by existing space availablhe existing belt filter pre layout is depicted in reference drawings contained in Request for Propls.B. The beltr press equipment shall not a end higher than 10 feet which allows nominally three feet of headrwith structural ceiling of existi building when mounted to existing floor elevation. Similaryuired space for maintenance of uipment on any side must be possible given constraints of existiom. See reference drawings cont ' ed Request for Proposals. 7 C. The belt filter press equipment shall discharge dew eyed cake onto existing horizontajjar6lt conveyor. .The existing conveyor belt runs at 2'-8" above existin floor elevation with side gua that extend to 3'-7" above floor. Cake shall be dropped onto conveyor"t a maximum height o -6" above belt. Proposed equipment shall be configured to operate with fisting conveyor figuration. Provide vertical box chute with flexible shields at conveyor/box inte ce to facilit containment of sludge cake while allowing conveyor cake to transverse through ch.. D. The manufacturer shall identify, as part of shop drawings for b 'ter presses, complete layout of any platforms, access bridges and other auxiliary equipment re mmen ed for operation or maintenance of equipment including visual inspection of top of gravit ection. 2.06 MATERIALS A. Frame: Steel, ASTM A36, hotXAM d ASTM A123. B. Splash guard, vertical box chu320, stainless steel, Type 316LT C. Drum rollers: ASTM A320, st Type 316L. _ O Z D. Rollers: Steel tube, A A36, 1/2" minimum coated with Rilsan nylon II orASZ"32-yp 3 stainless steel. D —t v E. Roller shafts: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. z�� �, r <rn F. Hydraulic piping: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. o: G. Pneumatic tubing: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. c.a H. Plows and sludge distribution equipment: ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel, coated as specified. I. Belt filter cloth: Monofilament polyester. J. Belt seam closures (for seamed belts): ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 7 K. Spray headers: ASTM A320, Type 316, stainless steel. L. Spray nozzles: AS 320, Type 316, stainless steel. M. Drainage pans: AST A320, Type 347L, 316L, stainless steel. N. Internal pressure piping. ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. O. Drains: schedule 80 PVC r ASTM 320, Type 316. P. Anchor bolts and miscellaneo\minimu re, including bolts, nuts and washers: TM A320, Type 316 stainless steel. Q. Mixing drum and head box: A0, Type 316L stainless steel. R. Control panels: ASTM A320, eel, Type 316L. S. Materials specified are considu acceptable for purposes o durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrma facturer may propose ernative materials for purpose of providing greater strength orequire stress limitations. wever, alternative materials must provide at least same quthose sp cifled for purpos . 2.07 CORROSION PROTECTION A. The ferrous metal and related components shall be galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM Al2: punching will be permitted on any portion of frame; B. All pre -painted purchased equipment such as cylinders etc., are to be painted with a manuf: applications. C. Control panel enclosures shall be NEMA 4X enclosure shall be white. , 2.08 FRAME c d by hot dip galvanizing. HCZAip abrication. No cuttingZrelding�nIIingA a anizing. ::Z rn ^C rotor gear boxes, hyd�tl6pn 1&aticr ndard sting finish suita�1tor severe rn 3 D of Type 316 stainless The"inside of A. The press frame shall be designed to qbcommodate all operating and static log with a factor of safety of not less than 5 and shall fu ion without deflection, deformation, or vib 'on which will in any manner degrade performance equipment. No disassembled component shall eigh more than 4,000 pounds. B. Frame design shall evenly dis ibute all loads to supporting building structural system. Fram can be multiple leg configuration for oor or pedestal installation or skids for floor installation. C. Lifting lugs shall be provided, and access platforms shall be recommended to afford convenient access to maintenance points throughout press. D. Splash guards shall be provided to confine all liquid to within confines of existing drain containment basin. Splash guards shall be designed to permit convenient access to all interior portions of press for maintenance purposes. E. In their principal load bearing direction, no unsupported frame spans greater than 84 inches will be permitted. The structural design of all framing members shall limit deflection to no more than 1/480 of span. Design maximum stresses shall not exceed 20 percent of material's yield strength. Upon completion of all fabrication work, all components of press' framing system shall be coated in accordance with requirements of paragraph "Corrosion Protection." 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 7 K. Spray nozzles: ASTM 320, Type 316, stainless steel. L. Drainage pans: ASTM A320, Type 347L, 316L, stainless steel. M. Internal pressure piping: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316. N. Drains: schedule 80 PVC or ASTM 320, Type 316. O. Anchor bolts and miscellaneous hardware, including bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A320, Type 316 stainless steel. P. Mixing drum and head box: ASTM A320, Type 316L stainless steel. O. Control panels: ASTM A320, stainless steel, Type 316L. R. Materials specified are considered minimum acceptable for purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The manufacturer may propose alternative materials for purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least same qualities as those specified for purpose. 2.07 CORROSION PROTECTION A. The ferrous metal and related components shall be protected by hot dip galvanizing. Hot -dip galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A123 after fabrication. No cutting, welding, drilling, or punching will be permitted on any portion of frame after galvanizing. B. All pre -painted purchased equipment such as electrical motors, gear boxes, hydraulic cylinders etc., are to be painted with a manufacturer's standard coating finish suitable for severe duty applications. C. Control panel enclosures shall be NEMA 4X constructed of Type 316L stainless steel. The inside of enclosure shall be white. f�rZ7•y:7_1JJ� A. The press frame shall be designed to accommodate all operating and static loads with a factor of safety of not less than 5 and shall function without deflection, deformation, or vibration which will in any manner degrade performance of equipment. No disassembled component shall weigh more than 4,000 pounds. B. Frame design shall evenly distribute all loads to supporting building structural system. Frames can be multiple leg configuration for floor or pedestal installation or skids for floor installation. C. Lifting lugs shall be provided, and access platforms shall be recommended to afford convenient access to maintenance points throughout press. „ o D. Splash guards shall be provided to confine all liquid to within confines of existinovin c fainme� �— basin. Splash guards shall be designed to permit convenient access to all inter*Qiornbf precc for maintenance purposes. -G - Cl) E. In their principal load bearing direction, no unsupported frame spans greater that>tWinc will R permitted. The structural design of all framing members shall limit deflection to nye t 1/4 ®f span. Design maximum stresses shall not exceed 20 percent of material's yield EWth. %on r completion of all fabrication work, all components of press' framing system shall bd coated in "accordance with requirements of paragraph "Corrosion Protection." c F. Frame shall have accurately machined and positioned seats for all bearings, arranged to ensure and maintain absolute alignment of all rotating elements under all loading conditions. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 G. Provide recommendation for anchor bolt system for cast -in-place installation using Type 316 stainless steel. 2.09 DRAINAGE A. Drainage pans shall be provided under all dewatering and belt washing zones to contain all liquids and conduct this material to drain sump to be incorporated into machine's support base. The drainage pans, shields and piping shall be designed to confine all spray and splashed liquids and to conduct these to sump. Drained connections shall be self -venting to prevent overflow. The main sludge inlet area shall include a high-level overflow which shall discharge, through appropriate piping to sump beneath press. A NEMA 4X float switch shall be provided in drainage pan. The switch shall be set to close when sludge receptor area is near overflow elevation. B. The low point of any drainage pan shall be provided with a connection for drain piping. Drainage piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC and shall be routed from each pan and shall terminate within confines of filtrate sump. C. The drainage pans shall extend a minimum of 3 -inches beyond belt width on both sides and shall have a minimum 1 -inch depth at any given point. The drainage pans shall be constructed of a minimum 14 -gauge Type 316L stainless steel. A. Both dewatering belts shall be provided with a washing system consisting of piping, nozzles, drip pans, and spray containment shields as required to clean area in contact with sludge prior to returning to pressing zones. B. Stainless steel nozzles shall be designed with a self-cleaning mechanism to provide cleaning action without disassembly or interruption of operation. C. Spray piping and nozzles shall be adequately braced and shall be of sufficient pressure rating to withstand pressure transients caused by sudden valve closures. D. Spray water shall be contained within press enclosure. 2.11 SLUDGE CONDITIONING A. The press shall be provided with a sludge conditioning system designed specifically for polymer aided flocculation of anaerobically digested sludges. The system shall be configured to prevent floc breakup during transport to gravity drainage section. The sludge conditioning device shall provide an appropriate, infinitely variable range of conditioning energies to assure economic flocculation of sludge under all conditions. B. 'The sludge conditioning system shall be mounted upstream of press and shall consist of an in line, nonclog, variable orifice, Venturi -type mixer with a polymer injection ring. Static mixers %W stationary baffles, modified check valves or mixers requiring electrical motors and controls, or tank$aith mechanical mixers shall not be acceptable. o —' C. `'The sludge/polymer mixer assembly shall be Type 316L stainless steel with ANAP�npa_l le fl rn r -The mixer assembly shall include an in-line polymer injection ring made of UHM$ZRDPEIow s lifting manifold, tubing and fittings between injection ring and manifold. Each polymer i n rin sh ;;inject polymer at a minimum of four points located 90 degrees apart around circ ncay�gf rine inside diameter of ring shall not be less than 6 -inches (diameter of sludge feed p N D' N N BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 8 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 F. Frame shall have accurately machined and positioned seats for all bearings, arranged to ensure and maintain absolute alignment of all rotating elements under all loading conditions. G. Provide recommendation for anchor bolt system for cast -in-place installation using Type 316 stainless steel. 2.09 A. Drainage pans shall be provided under all dewatering and belt washing zones to contain all liquids nd conduct this material to drain sump to be incorporated into machine's support base. The drainage p\he hields and piping shall be designed to confine all spray and splashed liquids and to conduct to sump. Drained connections shall be self -venting to prevent overflow. The main sludge inlet ahall include a high-level overflow which shall discharge, through appropriate piping to sump bh press. A NEMA 4X float switch shall be provided in drainage pan. The switch shall beset to chen sludge receptor area is near overflow elevation. B. Toint of any drainage pan shall be provided with a connection for drain piping. Drainage psh I be Schedule 80 PVC and shall be routed from each pan and shall terminate within cs o Itrate sump. C. Tainage ns shall extend a minimum of 3 -inches beyond belt width on both sides and shall hminimu 1 -inch depth at any given point. The drainage pans shall be constructed of a m 14-gau Type 316L stainless steel. 2.10 BELH SYSTEM A. Both dewatering belts s II be provided with a washing system consisting of piping, nozzles, drip pans, and spray contain nt shields as required to clean area in cont ct with sludge prior to returning to pressing zones. B. Stainless steel nozzles shall b designed with a s aping mechanism to provide cleaning action without disassembly or interrupts n of opera C. Spray piping and nozzles shall withstand pressure transien>-( D. Spray water shall Fie Contained within 2.11 SLUDGE 3tely braced and shall be of sufficient pressure rating to sudden valve closures. enclosure. A. TWpress shall be provided with a sludge conditiod flocculation of anaerobically digested sludges. The during transport to gravity drainage section. The sly appropriate, infinitely variable range of conditioning under all conditions. N O O system designed specificp6Rmer aided m shall be configured t nt-flpc brdaRUp nditioning device shalt provide-_M_ ;rgito assure economic floctuiRmn of 1ge to B. The sludge conditioning system shall be mounted upstream of pressmkd shall consist of an in line, nonclog, variable orifice, Venturi -type mixer with a polymer injection ring. tic mixers with stationary baffles, modified check valves or mixers requiring electrical motors and controls, or tanks with mechanical mixers shall not be acceptable. C. The sludge/polymer mixer assembly shall be Type 316L stainless steel with ANSI compatible flanges. The mixer assembly shall include an in-line polymer injection ring made of UHMW HDPE, flow splitting manifold, tubing and fittings between injection ring and manifold. Each polymer injection ring shall inject polymer at a minimum of four points located 90 degrees apart around circumference of ring. The inside diameter of ring shall not be less than 6 -inches (diameter of sludge feed piping). 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 9 2.12 FILTERING MEDIUM A. The filter belts shall be manufacturl of a continuous weave of monofilament polyester wires. Filter belts may be of split type or continu s. Seams for split belts must be designed to fail before belt, be repairable and facilitate replacement. The seam shall be designed to prevent interference with doctor blades or any other belt press equipm nt. Regardless of design, belts shall be suitable for convenient replacement by operating personnel. B. Belt seam closures shall be of stainless teel. Each belt shall be heat set, and all belt edges shall be double reinforced with 1/2" plastic band. Velt edges that are heat sealed only will not be acceptable. Each belt shall be pre -stretched to limit a ngation to less than 3% of overall belt length. All belts, including separate high-tension belts supped as part of machine, shall be capable of continuously withstanding a maximum tensile force of th a times maximum tension that belt will be subjected to under normal operation. 2.13 ROLLER ASSEMBLIES A. Drum rollers, if provided, shall have one inch mirtjmum diameter perforations'spaced at not more than 3". Scoop blades or similar devices shall be provijfed to extract filtrate froV center of drum. B. All rollers shall be designed for a maximum deflecti< loading. Maximum roller loading shall include roller drive and belt tension. Belt tension shall be based u width and drive tension shall be calculated on basis C. Nonperforated rollers shall be constructed of ASTM A coated as specified hereinafter, or from Type 316 stai or with stub shafts supported by double, separated directly to single end plates are not acceptable. A e certified welding operators in accordance with plica thickness shall be 1/2". Perforated rollers sh be con of 0.05 inch at enter when undue aximum ass forces a tension f s resfllling from belt not less an 200 pour iqo of b'i?n belt eed of not less 41i95j15 feet perinmute. -� —G a 3 36M or ASTM A 50ircetbo4eel aj� steel, each with a cq Wous ihrou�hishaft d pl as, all welded in plape.Aub*afts VOed (ding hall be performed t8 ;s Iifi;R and Ile A S Standards. Miniftm rollwvall struct of Type 316 stainless ste6PDrive rollers, regardless of material of construclWn shall be coated 'th a vulcanized rubber type coating. Drive rolle/aing ll be provided with dra' ge channels or other itable means to assist in removal of water and t slippage. D. All rollers e supported w' heavy-duty bearings in sealed, s ashproof enclosures. Bearings shall be seing, roller all bearing type, in horizontally split c st-iron housings with triple labyrinth slternatel earing shall be one piece machined bear g housing with a bolted and gasketed nd plat ith a quadruple seal. Bearings shall be out b and mounted and field replaceablout a ing factory alignment or without major disasse bly. Bearings shall have an ABMA L -1g 800,000 hours of operation based upon all forces an loads, including belt tension, ros and drive torque loads. Load calculations shall be bas d on both belts at a simultaneoIt tension of 50 pounds per lineal inch of belt and at a belt s eed of 15 feet per minute. E. Grease fittings shall be extended to face of press frame and shall be grouped ir\one location to facilitate maintenance operations. Bearings shall be regreaseable while press is vunning. 2.14 BELT TRACKING AND TENSIONING SYSTEMS: A. The press shall be provided with both tracking and tensioning systems to insure reliabl"peration. The belt tracking and tensioning system shall incorporate either hydraulic belt adjustments. All hydraulic piping tubing shall be rigidly and firmly anchored to structural frame of press. All lines shall be sized according to intended use and operating pressure with a factor of safety of not less than 10. B. Hydraulic systems shall include all pumps, reservoirs, piping, and controls for system operation. The hydraulic power pack, including pump, reservoir and pressure controls, shall be located in a position which does not impede access to press. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 9 li�.1131051*8]111IN A. The filter belts shall be manufactured of a continuous weave of monofilament polyester wires. Filter belts may be of split type or continuous. Seams for split belts must be designed to fail before belt, be repairable and facilitate replacement. The seam shall be designed to prevent interference with doctor blades or any other belt press equipment. Regardless of design, belts shall be suitable for convenient replacement by operating personnel. B. Belt seam closures shall be of stainless steel. Each belt shall be heat set, and all belt edges shall be double reinforced with 1/2" plastic band. Belt edges that are heat sealed only will not be acceptable. Each belt shall be pre -stretched to limit elongation to less than 3% of overall belt length. All belts, including separate high-tension belts supplied as part of machine, shall be capable of continuously withstanding a maximum tensile force of three times maximum tension that belt will be subjected to under normal operation. 2.13 ROLLER ASSEMBLIES A. Drum rollers, if provided, shall have one inch minimum diameter perforations spaced at not more than 3". Scoop blades or similar devices shall be provided to extract filtrate from center of drum. B. All rollers shall be designed for a maximum deflection of 0.05 inch at center when under maximum loading. Maximum roller loading shall include roller mass forces and tension forces resulting from belt drive and belt tension. Belt tension shall be based upon not less than 200 pounds per inch of belt width and drive tension shall be calculated on basis of a belt speed of not less than 15 feet per minute. C. Nonperforated rollers shall be constructed of ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 500 carbon steel and coated as specified hereinafter, or from Type 316 stainless steel, each with a continuous through shaft or with stub shafts supported by double, separated end plates, all welded in place. Stub shafts welded directly to single end plates are not acceptable. All welding shall be performed by qualified and certified welding operators in accordance with applicable AWS Standards. Minimum roller wall thickness shall be 1/2". Perforated rollers shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Drive rollers, regardless of material of construction shall be coated with a vulcanized rubber type coating. Drive rollers shall be provided with drainage channels or other suitable means to assist in removal of water and prevent slippage. D. All rollers shall be supported with heavy-duty bearings in sealed, splashproof enclosures. Bearings shall be self -aligning, roller or ball bearing type, in horizontally split cast-iron housings with triple labyrinth seals. Alternately bearing shall be one piece machined bearing housing with a bolted and gasketed steel end plate with a quadruple seal. Bearings shall be outboard mounted and field replaceable without affecting factory alignment or without major disassembly. Bearings shall have an ABMA L-10 rating of 800,000 hours of operation based upon all forces and loads, including belt tension, roller mass and drive torque loads. Load calculations shall be based on both belts at a simultaneous belt tension of 50 pounds per lineal inch of belt and at a belt speed of 15 f" per minute. tin rn E. :Grease fittings shall be extended to face of press frame and shall be grouped irMirJAIocE&n to_ facilitate maintenance operations. Bearings shall be regreaseable while press itimi4ingr r --t n uD 2.34 BELT TRACKING AND TENSIONING SYSTEMS: <rr1 -0 m � 3 ^ A. The press shall be provided with both tracking and tensioning systems to insur ceiii0blelMeratiP The belt tracking and tensioning system shall incorporate hydraulic belt adjustry*nts. Allrl�ydraulic piping shall be rigidly and firmly anchored to structural frame of press. All lines shall be sized 'according to intended use and operating pressure with a factor of safety of not less than 10. B. Hydraulic systems shall include all pumps, reservoirs, piping, and controls for system operation. The hydraulic power pack, including pump, reservoir and pressure controls, shall be located in a position which does not impede access to press. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 C. Belt tracking system: , 1. Automatic sensing devices shall be provided to actuate automatic belt tracking system and assure proper alignment of belts at all times. The sensing devices shall continuously monitor position of belt, allowing alignment roller to effect minor belt position adjustments continuously to maintain belt properly positioned within belt track. The belt tracking system shall be designed so that all belt position adjustments are performed smoothly without sharp, sudden movements of filter belt or alignment roller. The belt tracking system shall be designed to minimize belt and roller wear and extend working life of filter belts. 2. NEMA 4X limit switches shall be provided to detect malfunctioning of tracking system. The switches shall be designed to detect gross belt misalignment and shall open to indicate belt misalignment, initiate a shutdown signal, and activate a remote alarm. D. Belt Tensioning Assembly: 1. Hydraulically adjusted belt tensioning assembly shall be provided. Belt tension adjustment shall be through cylinder actuators for hydraulic systems acting on takeup roller hubs. 2. Tension adjustment devices acting on center of roller will not be permitted. Means shall be provided to maintain roller alignment and provide even tension throughout width of belt. Belt tension shall be variable and tension adjustment shall be possible while machine is in operation. Either system shall maintain a constant tension on belt regardless of cake thickness. A pressure gage or similar device shall be provided to indicate actual belt tension, and normal operating limits shall be indicated on face of gage. 3. The belt tensioning system shall be designed to ensure simultaneous and parallel movement of tensioning roller ends during adjustment and to accommodate at least 3 percent increase in belt length. Belt tension shall be infinitely variable and shall be adjustable without shutdown of machine. E. Hydraulic System 1. Each hydraulic system (one for each press) shall include hydraulic pump and motor, reservoir with sight glass, filters, valves, gages, piping, and controls required for system operation. Provide a suitable pressure switch in a NEMA 4X enclosure to activate an alarm on low hydraulic fluid pressure. The hydraulic system shall be designed for location up to 25 feet remote from belt filter press or may be incorporated in belt press framework. 2. The hydraulic pump motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled motor with Class F insulation, suitable for operation on 460 -volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz power. Space heaters, 120 -volt single-phase, shall be placed in each motor frame. 3. Hydraulic system components shall be mounted on a rigid common baseplate suitable for floor or wall mounting if remotely located. Baseplate shall be stainless steel. 4. Controls: a. Equipment described herein shall be contained within belt filter press control panel. b. Two combination circuit breaker/magnetic across line motor starters with 120 -volt control circuits for pump motors. Each starter shall have three thermal overload relays of melting alloy type. Each starter shall be provided with a normally closed starter contact for control of space heater fumished with motor. c. Control logic shall be provided for Owner to program within plant SCADA system. 2.15 GRAVITY DEWATERING SECTION N O A. The gravity dewatering zone shall accept flocculated sludge from sludge condi ' ing syst6m, apd— permit free water contained within conditioned sludge to readily separate from a*rain tM collection pan. D --t B. The gravity drainage section shall be fumished with a sludge inlet assembly con of a distriipn chute and leveling weir designed to evenly distribute conditioned sludge across 4fit eff ive vA of moving filter belt. The materials in contact with sludge in distribution area shallpe16L stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 14 -gauge. :F C. The conditioned sludge shall be contained on belt with adjustable containment barriers equipped with replaceable rubber seals to prevent leakage. The containment barriers shall be constructed of minimum 14 -gauge Type 316L stainless steel, and shall be mounted on both sides of belt and at BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 10 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 C. Belt track' g system: 1. Auto is sensing devices shall be provided to actuate automatic belt tracking system and assure prop alignment of belts at all times. The sensing devices shall continuously monitor position of belt, lowing alignment roller to effect minor belt position adjustments continuously to maintain belt p operly positioned within belt track. The belt tracking system shall be designed so that all belt positi adjustments are pertored smoothly without sharp, sudden movements of filter belt or alignm t roller. The belt tracking system shall be designed to minimize belt and roller wear and extend\oiding life of filter belts. 2. NEMA it switches shall be provided to detect malfunctioning of tracking system. The switchell be designed to detect gross belt misalignment and shall open to indicate belt misaligt, initiate a shutdown signal, and activate a remote alar. D. Belt Tensioning A embly. 1. A hydraulically r pneumatically adjusted belt tensioning assembly shall be provided. Beit tension adjustment shall a through cylinder actuators for hydraulic systems or bellows actuators for pneumatic syste acting on takeup roller hubs. Bellows type actuators shall be self -aligning type, designed fora wo 'ng pressure of 150 psig. 2. Tension adjustment evices acting on center of roller will not be permitted. Means shall be provided to maintain Iler alignment and provide even tension throughout width of belt. Belt tension shall be variab and tension adjustment shall be possible while machine is in operation. Either system shall mai in a constant tension on belt regardless of cake thickness. A pressure gage or similar device sh I be provided to indicate actual belt tension, and normal operating limits shall be indicated on face gage. 3. The belt tensioning system all be designed to ensure simultaneous and parallel movement of tensioning roller ends during justment and to accommodate at least 3 percent increase in belt length. Belt tension shall be in i itely variable and shall be adjustable without shutdown of machine. E. Hydraulic System 1. Each hydraulic system (one for each ress) shall include hydraulic pump and motor, reservoir with sight glass, filters, valves, gages, pipin , and controls required for system operation. Provide a suitable pressure switch in a NEMA 4X closure to activate an alar on low hydraulic fluid pressure. The hydraulic system shall be signed for location up to 25 feet remote from belt filter press or may be incorporated in belt press mework. 2. The hydraulic pump motor shall be totally a losed, fan cooled motor with Class F insulation suitable for operation on 460 -volt, 3-phase, 6 Hz power. S ac e -phase, shall be placed in each motor frame. 3. Hydraulic system components ounted n a rigid common baseplate suitabWor floor or wall mounting if remo cated. Baseplate shall a stainless steel. o 4. Contr ' r -C7 P! — 1 a. Equipment described herein shall be contained 'thin belt filter press coi*4arteh b. Two combination circuit breaker/magnetic across ' e motor starters witl[- 215�voltontr circuits for pump motors. Each starter shall have th a thermal overload l o eltin y type. Each starter shall be provided with a normally sed starter contaoral of dp heater furnished with motor. o � c. Control logic shall be provided for Owner to program wi in plant SCADA�ysttem- 2.15 GRAVITY DEWATERING SECTION c.a A. The gravity dewatering zone shall accept flocculated sludge from sludg conditioning system, and permit free water contained within conditioned sludge to readily separatem sludge and drain to a collection pan. B. The gravity drainage section shall be furnished with a sludge inlet assembly consisting of a distribution chute and leveling weir designed to evenly distribute conditioned sludge across entire effective width of moving filter belt. The materials in contact with sludge in distribution area shall be Type 316L stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 14 -gauge. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 11 C. The conditioned sludge shall be contained on belt with adjustable containment b$«iers equipped with replaceable rubber seals to prevent leakage. The containment barriers shall be constructed of minimum 14 -gauge Type 316L stainless steel, and shall be mounted on both sides of belt and at sludge feed end of gravity section. The side skirts shall be equipped with urethane seals or other elasticized materials to prevent spillage of sludge. The replaceable rubber seals shall be attached to containment IDarriers with a friction fit. D. The gravity dr ' age section shall be furnished with chicanes (plows) to adequately furrow conditioned sludge to proma drainage of water from sludge. All surfaces of chicanes and other devices contacting filter c th shall be coated with teflon or similar smooth material to prevent rapid deterioration of beX surface. Each row of chicanes shall be provided with a single lifting handle or automatic lifting syslern, designed to remove entire row of chicanes at least 6" from belt, out of sludge flow, to facilitate clea ing. Chicanes shall be designed to be individually adjustable laterally and shall pivot to allow them to ss over obstructions on belt. Each set of chicanes shall be mounted on a Type 316L stainless st I horizontal support bar. E. The gravity dewatering bel shall be supported to minimize belt sagging by either a grid, or a plate designed to minimize bell wbar and facilitate free drainage of filtrate. The support shall be a minimum 2 -inches wider than belt one h side. Wear strips, if used, shall be replaceable without removing or disassembling gravity section slqewalls and chicane assemblies. 2.16 WEDGE COMPRESSION SECTION A. Following gravity drainage section, shall exert continuously increasing N N 0 CD shall enter a low-pressure section wheedrpnver�ing be" e. 7'C 1 Means shall be provided to adjust angle o convergence while press is in operatiew UPpeHh opelators to optimize dewatering operations. Containr ent seals shall be provided on both SfdFhof wedge M compression section to prevent sludge from C. The wedge compression section shall be 2.17 ROLL PRESSURIZATION SECTION to permit liquid to e e thMligh both belts. A. Following wedge compression section, sludge she r a dewatering section of increasingly greater pressure, where two belts pass sequentially series rollers of decreasing diameter. B. The roller diameters and belt tensio . g system, in combina 'on, shall exert increasingly greater pressure as liquid is removed fr sludge, thereby effecting icient dewatering, yet assuring efficient capture of solids. 2.18 SCRAPER BLADES CHUTE A. Replaceable sefaper blades shall be provided to efficiently separated atered cake from belt. A discharge chute shall be provided to conduct cake to middle of belt cony or for removal. The scraper blade shall be mounted opposite a belt roller to insure efficient cake removX1. The pressure exerted by scraper blade against belt shall be adjustable while press is in operation. AcXstable weights on lever arms will not be an acceptable means of providing this feature. Operation of d for blades shall be in such a manner as to minimize wear to belt seam. B. Doctor blades shall have springs or counterweights to maintain pressure against be , constructed of rubber, plastic or fiberglass reinforced plastic, readily removable and positioned on ea b\do lt t discharge end of machine to effectively remove sludge cake from belts. All springs ane shall be of stainless steel. A lifting device shall permit movement of blades away from beltsng, all without machine shutdown. Alternately, hydraulic system can be used to operate and blades. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 11 sludge feed end of gravity section. The side skirts shall be equipped with urethane seals or other elasticized materials to prevent spillage of sludge. The replaceable rubber seals shall be attached to containment barriers with a friction fit. D. The gravity drainage section shall be furnished with chicanes (plows) to adequately furrow conditioned sludge to promote drainage of water from sludge. All surfaces of chicanes and other devices contacting filter cloth shall be coated with teflon or similar smooth material to prevent rapid deterioration of belt surface. Each row of chicanes shall be provided with a single lifting handle or automatic lifting system, designed to remove entire row of chicanes at least 6" from belt, out of sludge flow, to facilitate cleaning. Chicanes shall be designed to be individually adjustable laterally and shall pivot to allow them to pass over obstructions on bell. Each set of chicanes shall be mounted on a Type 316L stainless steel horizontal support bar. E. The gravity dewatering belt shall be supported to minimize belt sagging by either a grid, or a plate designed to minimize belt wear and facilitate free drainage of filtrate. The support shall be a minimum 2 -inches wider than belt on each side. Wear strips, if used, shall be replaceable without removing or disassembling gravity section sidewalls and chicane assemblies. 2.16 WEDGE COMPRESSION SECTION A. Following gravity drainage section, sludge shall enter a low-pressure section where converging belts shall exert continuously increasing pressure. B. Means shall be provided to adjust angle of convergence while press is in operation to permit operators to optimize dewatering operations. Containment seals shall be provided on both sides of wedge compression section to prevent sludge from escaping. C. The wedge compression section shall be configured to permit liquid to escape through both belts. 2.17 ROLL PRESSURIZATION SECTION A. Following wedge compression section, sludge shall enter a dewatering section of increasingly greater pressure, where two belts pass sequentially over series of rollers of decreasing diameter. B. The roller diameters and belt tensioning system, in combination, shall exert increasingly greater pressure as liquid is removed from sludge, thereby effecting efficient dewatering, yet assuring efficient capture of solids. 2.18 SCRAPER BLADES AND DISCHARGE CHUTE A. Replaceable scraper blades shall be provided to efficiently separate dewatered cake from belt. A discharge chute shall be provided to conduct cake to middle of belt conveyor for removal. The scraper blade shall be mounted opposite a belt roller to insure efficient cake removal. The pressure exerted by scraper blade against belt shall be adjustable while press is in operation. Adjustable weights on lever arms will not be an acceptable means of providing this feature. Operation of doctor blacp a shall be in such a manner as to minimize wear to belt seam. J =, rn N rr B. Doctor blades shall have springs or counterweights to maintain pressure againsft'4s, 4stru of rubber, plastic or fiberglass reinforced plastic, readily removable and positioned-orrOac"elt air �—� discharge end of machine to effectively remove sludge cake from belts. All spriags'and'I9rdwle shall be of stainless steel. A lifting device shall permit movement of blades away froaAW4s ferciplearif Mall Without machine shutdown. Altemately, hydraulic system can be used to opergg wd li4rdocto� blades. tV v C:� :> N BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 12 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 2.19 ELECTRICAL A. Control panel shall accept a 460 volt, 60 hz, 3-phase ac power input. A main disconnect circuit breaker and operator mechanism shall be included. When disconnect is in open position all power shall be removed from control system. B. All conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC, standard weight galvanized conduit with PVC coating, or standard weight conduit coated and lined with fusion applied epoxy as specified. Limit switches, float switches, and all other electrical devices shall be NEMA 4X enclosures with contact rated not less than NEMA A300. Conduit shall be routed to be protected by belt press frame where possible. C. Switches and other 120 -volt devices shall be wired in conduit to a labeled, gasketed, NEMA 4X junction box located on press frame. The junction box shall include terminal blocks for interface of all factory -wired devices with instrumentation and controls specified in herein. D. A mushroom head emergency stop push button station or emergency lanyard shall be provided on each side of machine. The device shall have a separate manual reset. E. Each belt filter press unit shall be provided with a nylon "pull cord" on both sides in ring supports to provide emergency shutdown of all belt filter press motors and appurtenant equipment. Trip switch contacts shall be DPDT. rated 10 amperes at 120 volts. 2.20 DRIVE UNIT A. The belts and rollers shall be driven by a variable frequency drive unit to achieve infinitely and uniformly variable speed adjustment while press is in operation through manual adjustment of a control device located on control panel. The variable frequency device, complete with 1:1 isolation transformer, shall be provided separately by belt press manufacturer for installation in motor control lineup specified. B. Drive motors shall be rated for inverter duty, variable frequency service designed for bilt drive purpose and rated as premium efficient motors. Motors shall have totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) enclosure. Motors shall be rated at 150% nameplate horsepower of required horsepower maximum service condition. Provide motor speed indicator readout for in main press control panel for all drives. Variable frequency drives for shall be furnished within press control panel. C. All portions of drive unit shall be totally enclosed with all gearing running in oil or grease lubricated and all drive chains and sprockets completely enclosed in a permanently greased housing. D. Speed reducer: AC motor driven, helical shaft mounted gear reducers, with a 1.15 service factor. Worm gear reducers shall not be acceptable. The speed reducer housing shall be cast iron or fabricated steel welded construction and shall be totally enclosed, dustproof, and oil tight. Speed reducers shall be rated for minimum AGMA Class II service. E. Drive controller: Drive motors shall be controlled by a single variable frequency drive. W variable frequency drive controller shall provide 0 —460 volts ac, 2 - 60 Hz output capable of dreg belt at from 3 to 15 feet per minute. n (A ^n ZE 2.21., CONTROLS C r --4C') rr7 A. Belt filter press system will be controlled from existing SCADA system. Belt fill s G"ipmgrri manufacturer shall provide control description and 1/0 list that will be installed i DA39ysterrn a third party. Control information submitted shall incorporate control of all system aXri E"y bermer press supplier including, belt filter press, hydraulic system (if provided)). Belt filtgy'press Wplier shall also provide control panels described herein. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 12 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 2.19 ELECTRICAL A. Control panel shall accept a 460 volt, 60 hz, 3-phase ac power input. A main disconnect circuit breaker and operator mechanism shall be included. When disconnect is in open position all power shall be removed from control system. B. All conduit shal be Schedule 40 PVC, standard weight galvanized conduit with PVC coating, or standard weight nduit coated and lined with fusion applied epoxy as specified. Limit switches, float switches, and all ther electrical devices shall be NEMA 4X enclosures with contact rated not less than NEMA A300. Conduit shall be routed to be protected by belt press frame where possible. C. Switches and other 0 -volt devices shall be wired in conduit to a labeled, Basketed, NEMA 4X junction box located o press frame. The junction box shall include terminal blocks for interface of all factory -wired devices w instrumentation and controls specified in herein. D. A mushroom head emerge cy stop push button station or emergency lanyard shall be provided on each side of machine. The vice shall have a separate manual reset. E. Each belt filter press unit shall aprovided with a nylon "pull cord" on both sides in ring supports to provide emergency shutdown o II belt filter press motors and appurtenant equipment. Trip switch contacts shall be DPDT. rated 10 mperes at 120 volts. 2.20 DRIVE UNIT A. The belts and rollers shall be driven b variable frequency drive unit to achieve infinitely and uniformly variable speed adjustment wh press is in operation through manual adjustment of a control device located on control panel. a variable frequency device, complete with 1:1 isolation .transformer, shall be provided separately bv belt press manufacturer for installation in motor control lineup specified. B.. Drive motors shall be rated for inverter duty, vaT and rated as premium efficient motors. Motors st enclosure. Motors shall be rated at 150% namep service condition. Provide motor speed indicator Variable frequency drives for shall be furnished % frequency service designed for bill drive purpose have totally enclosed fan cooled (TNF horsepower of required horse o aximum Bout for in mainaneHor all drives. C. All portions of drive unit shall be totally a with al all drive chains and sprockets cQwpWely enclosed in a D. Speed reducer: A&rndfor driven, helical shaft mounted gea Worm gear reducers shall not be acceptable. The speed red fabricated steel welded construction and shall be totally encl reducers shall be rated for minimum AGMA Class II service. T5Tpanel. _a— iG1J :>- running in oil � as&bric?ted and �ntly greased �g. lucers, with a_ sepacce fad 81'. housing sh3 " e cast fi on or kdustproof, and oil tiq. Speed E. Drive controller: Drive motors shall be controlled by a single variable equency drive. The variable frequency drive controller shall provide 0 – 460 volts ac, 2 - 60 Hz outp capable of driving belt at from 3 to 15 feet per minute. 2.21 CONTROLS A. Belt filter press system will be controlled from existing SCADA system. Belt filter p s equipment manufacturer shall provide control description and 1/0 list that will be installed in SCA&Asystem by a third party. Control information submitted shall incorporate control of all systems provided by belt filter press supplier including, belt filter press, hydraulic system (if provided)). Belt filter press supplier shall also provide control panels described herein. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 13 B. BFP master (main control panel for each belt filter presses shall be supplied with a stainless steel 33" x 57" backpaneltsubpanel that shall replace that within existing freestanding BFP main control panels. Panel shall accept 460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3-phase power and contain following main control components: 1. Variable frequency drive controller with short-circuit and overload protection for main belt drive, 2. Motor starters with short-circuit and overload protection for hydraulic pump. 3. Terminal landing strip shall be provided for control components and connection to existing SCADA system. C. Each belt filter press shall be supplied with a local control panel rate or NEMA 4X and constructed of stainless steel that shall be frame or wall mounted. Panel will be I ted locally to belt filter presses and shall contain selector switches required for maintenance panel/ ch included extending and retracting alt tensioning system and forward and reversing direction of ell movement, in addition to an ergency stop pushbutton. D. Mai ontrol panel shall be completely pre -wired and f or' tested prior to shipment. 1. M or starters: Full -voltage, nonreversing, IEC s le across line units. Coils shall be 120 volts ac. Alla radlXtyra le 140Mw/100 contactors. 2. Spe ons: Capable of outputting a 4 OmA do or 0-10 volts do setpoint control signal and accept do or 0-10 volts do status ignal. Controller shall be capable of PID control. Red Lion P48 al. 3. Pushbuttoneavy-duty, oil tight/wat ight, corrosion resistant units rated for NEMA 4X service. Contact blshall be rated for 10 pere continuous service. Allen Bradley Type 800 H, or equal. rs 4. Pilot lights: -duty, oil tight/w ertight, corrosion resistant units rated fQLNEMARC service. Units shall 0 Its ac trans rmer type. Allen Bradley Type 800 H, or N �^'y 5. Terminal bHig density Pring cage clamp style, with 600 -volt ratin goQass 280 'or equal. 6. Variable frcy drive. listed and shall be Allen Bradley Powerflex 40 Je, 3JIH protide for Ethernemunicati <ra M r*lPART 3 EXECUTION�3.01 INSTALLATION - GA. Belt filter pressII be completely facto assembled. Erection shall require only bolting to foundation andaction of external piping d wiring. 3.02 FIELD TESTING AONCOMPLIANCE PENALTI A. Functional t t: 1. PerfoV functional testing for each belt filter press \Owner's d. 2. Prior stem start-up, system components shall acted for proper alignment, proper connection, and satisfactory operation. 3. Manufacturers representative shall inspect installaec or lubrication and minor adjustments, provide certification that system coms hav een installed correctly and are ready for operation. Notify Owner and Engineer priemonstr 'ng machine operability. 4. Demonstrate machine is operable by successfully for two co ecutive 8 -hour days without mechanical, electrical, or control -induced malfunct B. Initial Performance test: 1. Performance test shall not begin until functional teas been completed to wner's and Engineer's satisfaction. 2. After start-up, manufacturer shall conduct a perfortest using Owner's sludge determine actual system operating conditions and verify that ets minimum requirements s ecified herein. 3. Prior to performance tests, manufacturer shall perform optimization testing as necessary to determine and recommend most effective type of polymer to produce specified performance. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 13 B. BFP master (main control panel for each belt filter presses shall be supplied with a stainless steel 33" x 57" backpanel/subpanel that shall replace that within existing freestanding BFP main control panels. Panel shall accept 460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3-phase power and contain following main control components: 1. Variable frequency drive controller with short-circuit and overload protection for main belt drive, 2. Motor starters with short-circuit and overload protection for hydraulic pump. 3. Terminal landing strip shall be provided for control components and connection to existing SCADA system. C. Each belt filter press shall be supplied with a local control panel rated for NEMA 4X and constructed of stainless steel that shall be frame or wall mounted. Panel will be located locally to belt filter presses and shall contain selector switches required for maintenance which included extending and retracting belt tensioning system and forward and reversing direction of belt movement, in addition to an emergency stop pushbutton. D. Main control panel shall be completely pre -wired and factory tested prior to shipment. 1. Motor starters: Full -voltage, nonreversing, IEC style across line units. Coils shall be 120 volts ac. Allen Bradley Style 140Mw/100 contactors. 2. Speed controllers: Capable of outputting a 4-20mA do or 0-10 volts do setpoint control signal and accept a 4-20mA do or 0-10 volts do status signal. Controller shall be capable of PID control. Red Lion P48 or equal. 3. Pushbuttons: Heavy-duty, oil tight/watertight, corrosion resistant units rated for NEMA 4X service. Contact blocks shall be rated for 10 -ampere continuous service. Allen Bradley Type 800 H, or equal. 4. Pilot lights: Heavy-duty, oil tight/watertight, corrosion resistant units rated for NEMA 4X service. Units shall be 120 volts ac transformer type. Allen Bradley Type 800 H, or equal. 5. Terminal blocks: High-density, spring cage clamp style, with 600 -volt rating. Wago Class 280, or equal. 6. Variable frequency drive: UL listed and shall be Allen Bradley Powerflex 400 style, and provide for Ethernet communications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Belt filter presses shall be completely factory assembled. Erection shall require only bolting to foundation and connection of external piping and wiring. 3.02 FIELD TESTING AND NONCOMPLIANCE PENALTIES A. Functional test: 1. Perform functional testing for each belt fitter press installed. 2. Prior to system start-up, system components shall be inspected for proper alignment, proper connection, and satisfactory operation. 3. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect installation, check for lubrication and minor adjustments, provide certification that system components have been installed correctly and are ready for operation. Notify Owner and Engineer prior to demonstrating machine operability. 4 Demonstrate machine is operable by successfully running for two consecutive 8-hoggays without mechanical, electrical, or control -induced malfunction. ._. ci ti 1 -.'* 'B. Initial Performance test: D� rn 7n 1. Performance test shall not begin until functional testing has been completecl:tDQwnss ander.. Engineer's satisfaction. =ac> 1 2. After �start-up, manufacturer shall conduct a performance test using Owner'gSl�ge t%deteM actual system operating conditions and verify that unit meets minimum requ8Wnts7becifipd.. herein. �� ry 3. ' Prior to performance tests, manufacturer shall perform optimization testing m necesi4iry to ` determine and recommend most effective type of polymer to produce specified performance. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 14 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 4. Owner shall provide sludge feed, water, electrical power, and sludge cake disposal necessary to conduct performance tests. Polymers required shall be provided by Owner at recommendation of manufacturer. 5. Cost of laboratory testing necessary to confirm performance for initial test shall be borne by Owner. 6. If, after a minimum of five 7 -hour test runs, with 3 rounds of sampling per run in opinion of Owner, system meets minimum performance requirements specified herein and supply sludge was within specified operating ranges of same paragraph, Engineer will recommend, by letter, that press met initial performance testing requirements and authorizes extended performance testing. 7. If, in opinion of Engineer, performance test results do not meet requirements specified herein and supply sludge was within specified operating ranges of same paragraph, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor of failure of initial performance testing. 8. In case of nonacceptable performance, manufacturer shall then have 30 days in which to perform at its sole expense, supplemental testing, equipment adjustments, changes or additions and to perform retest of nonacceptable system. C. Extended performance testing: 1. Do not begin until initial performance test has been completed to Owner's and Engineer's satisfaction. 2. Extended performance testing shall consist of a 60 -day performance period where manufacturer - trained Owner staff operate dewatering equipment utilizing coagulant and polymer combination utilized in initial performance testing. 3. Owner will make daily measurements of dewatering equipment performance - coagulant and polymer consumption, power use, influent solids characteristics, dewatered sludge cake solids concentration, solids capture, and average daily throughput. Results will periodically be communicated to equipment manufacturer. 4. Owner will also evaluate equipment operability and reliability during this performance period. 5. Equipment manufacturer has right to provide a representative onsite during testing period to observe equipment performance and operator activities. 6. Extended performance testing results will be reviewed by Owner and Engineer to determine: a. Belft filter press has met specified performance requirements b. Belt filter press has demonstrated its operability and reliability. c. Results will be shared with equipment manufacturer. 7. If extended performance test results are acceptable, Engineer will recommend, by letter, official acceptance of belt filter press. 8. If, in opinion of Engineer, performance test results do not meet requirements specified herein, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor of nonacceptable performance. 9. In case of nonacceptable performance, manufacturer shall then have 30 days in which to perform at its sole expense, supplemental testing, equipment adjustments, changes or additions including piping and chemical feed points, and to perform extended performance retest of nonacceptable system. 10. After retesting, should equipment fail to meet minimum specified performance requirements equipment will be rejected. Contractor shall replace failed equipment with different model units appropriate for meeting specified performance at no additional cost to Owner. As an alternative Contractor may elect to remove their failed equipment, provide full refund of cost of equipment to Owner and pay a penalty in amount of 25% to assist Owner in obtaining and installing alternate equipment. Failure to achieve specified performance criteria upon retesting shall constitute basis for Owner to seize performance bond as specified above. c 3.03 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING `n r r i "—r I A. Provide training in accordance with Section 0143 33. -iz ,h W r B. Upon completion of training, submit certification Form B provided at end of tht$,5e tio0av M CD 3.04 MANUFACTURER INSPECTION AND AFFIDAVIT :c - A. A. Furnished one or more experienced service engineers experienced in installation, adjustment, and start up in accordance with Section 0143 33. BELT FILTER PRESSES 26710.01.00 Page 14 - SECTION 46 76 21 ms1869 4. Owner shall provide sludge feed, water, electrical power, and sludge cake disposal necessary to conduct performance tests. Polymers required shall be provided by Owner at recommendation of manufacturer. 5. ost of laboratory testing necessary to confirm centrifuge performance for initial test shall be b me by Owner. 6. If, er a minimum of five 7 -hour test runs, with 3 rounds of sampling per run in opinion of Owner, syst meets minimum performance requirements specified herein and supply sludge was within sped i d operating ranges of same paragraph, Engineer will recommend, by letter, that press met initial p ormance testing requirements and authorizes extended performance testing. 7. If, in opin n of Engineer, performance test results do not meet requirements specified herein and supply slu a was within specified operating ranges of same paragraph, Engineer will notify Owner and ntr: , of failure of initial performance testing. 8. In case of non ceptable performance, manufacturer shall then have 30 days in which to perform at its sole expen , supplemental testing, equipment adjustments, changes or additions and to perform retest of n nacceptable system. C. Extended performance to 'ng: 1. Do not begin until initial rforrnance test has been completed to Owner's and Engineer's satisfaction. 2. Extended performance test g shall consist of a 60 -day performar�e period where manufacturer - trained Owner staff operate ntrifuge utilizing coagulant and p mer combination utilized in initial performance testing. 3. Owner will make daily measure nt; consumption, power use, influent I concentration, solids capture, and a communicated to equipment manufa 4. Owner will also evaluate equipment < 5. Equipment manufacturer has right to observe equipment performance and 6. Extended performance testing result a. Belft filter press has met specif b. Belt filter press has demonst Re c. Results will be shared wit quip 7. If extended performance tes esults acceptance of belt filter pr s. of centrifuge perfo nce - coagulant and polymer Is characteristic ewatered sludge cake solids rage daily thp6ghput. Results will periodically be Viand reliability during this performance period. a representative onsite during testing period to ill be re 'ewed by Owner and Engineer to determine: d performanbkrequirements d its operabilitNnd reliability. ment manufactu r. are acceptable, En 'neer will recommend, by letter, official 8. If, in opinion of Engineer erformance test results do not mi Engineer will notify O er and Contractor of nonacceptable 9. In case of nonaccep ble performance, manufacturer shall t at its sole expens supplemental testing, equipment adjusts piping and the ' al feed points, and to perform extended p requirements specified herein, ' 30 days is -which to perform anges or Aitions including system. 10. After retests ,should equipment fail to meet minimum specified pertorn en ill be rejected. Contractor shall replace failed equipment wi ereattmod�� �Qds r' to for meeting specified performance at no additional cost to Ow s altrlalive for may elect to remove their failed equipment, provide full refund in 25% to Owner in ofiequi t to and pay a penalty amount of assist obtaining �jpst g altr�ate ent. Failure to achieve specified performance criteria upon retests shall ' titute basis ger to seize performance bond as specified above. W 3.03 OPEVATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING A. Provide training in accordance with Section 0143 33. B. Upon completion of training, submit certification Form B provided at end of this section. 3.04 MANUFACTURER INSPECTION AND AFFIDAVIT A. Furnished one or more experienced service engineers experienced in installation, adjustment, and start up in accordance with Section 0143 33. 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869((�� SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 15 B. Upon completed installation, accepIRI � E -De testing, and completion of Owner's training, submit a signed affidavit certifying that supplier or manufacturer has observed and accepts that all stages of construction, installation�it g, nd jjt�i qg ve been adequately performed. The affidavit shall conform to form and style'?M 4(�'4viF1�N f a of this section. C. Provision of inspection, approval, anf.AYAfie" ,f�Iter press supplier or manufacturer shall in no way relieve manufacturer of any rggiopsib�� E�gdkements of this contract, including system installation, testing, commissioning, and guarantee specified above. 1) J. M. Brady 2) Y,6313I�AIIO i Z q Wd 61 d3S l I OZ x3113 26710.01.00 BELT FILTER PRESSES ms1869 SECTION 46 76 21 - Page 15 B. Upon completed installation, acceptable performance testing, and completion of Owner's training, submit a signed affidavit certifying that supplier or manufacturer has observed and accepts that all stages of construction, installation, testing, and training have been adequately performed. The affidavit shall conform to form and style of Form C provided at end of this section. C. Provision of inspection, approval, and affidavit by belt filter press supplier or manufacturer shall in no way relieve manufacturer of any responsibilities or requirements of this contract, including system installation, testing, commissioning, and guarantee specified above. END OF SECTION 1) J. M. Brady 2) � N O_ • _ C-) �! Vi C:)7C o iV �' N Form A. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATI10WORiW 0 CERTI JMgl1W-& Il"PejAMI7SIBILITY FOR SPECIFt9 JTMEM,'IOhN� 46 76 21 The undersigned manufkcturer of driven equipment ("manufacturer") accepts unit responsibility for all components of equipment furnished t the Project under specification Section _and for related equipment manufactured under sections and We have reviewed the requirents for this section, including but not limited to drivers, supports for driving and driven equipment and all othe specified appurtenances to be furnished to the Project by manufacturer. And, we have further reviewed, andm ified as necessary, the requirements for associated variable speed drives and motor control centers. We here certify that all specified components are compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified pe rmance and design requirements whether or not the equipment was furnished by us. We will make no claim nor tablish any condition that problems in operation for the product provided under this specification Section a due to incompatibility of any components covered by this Certificate of Unit Responsibility. Nor will we condition r void any warranty for the performance of the product of this specification Section due to incompatibility f any components covered under this Certificate of Unit Responsibility. Our signature on this Certificate of Unit the workmanship, quality, or performan , and . Our oblil Notary Public Commission expiration date Seal: ionsibility does not obligate us to take responsibility for, nor to warrant related equipment provided by others under specification sections i to warranty all equipment provided by us shall remain unaffected. Name of Corporation Address By: Duly Authorized Official a itle of official Form B. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION FORM Contract No: Specification Section: Equipment name: Manufacturer of equipment Rem: The undersigned manufacturer certifies that a service engineer has instructed the wastewater treatment plant operating personnel in the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment designated herein. Maintenance Check List (check aoorooriate spaces) Described normal oil changes (frequency) Described special tools required Described normal items to be reviewed for wear Described preventive maintenance instructions Date Described greasing frequency Signature of Authorized Representative Date Others: c• Manufacturer Signature of Contractor Representative Date Signature of Authorized Representative Date Signature of Authorized Representative Date c• v- rr C). r : rn y C7 1 C-) W r rr N Forth A. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION FORM CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIFICATION SECTION 46 76 21 BELT FILTER PRESSES The undersigned manufacturer of driven equipment ("manufacturer") accepts unit responsibility for all components of equipment furnished to the Project under specification Section _and for related equipment manufactured under sections , and We have reviewed the requirements for this section, including but not limited to drivers, supports for driving and driven equipment and all other specified appurtenances to be furnished to the Project by manufacturer. And, we have further reviewed, and modified as necessary, the requirements for associated variable speed drives and motor control centers. We hereby certify that all specified components are compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified performance and design requirements whether or not the equipment was furnished by us. We will make no claim nor establish any condition that problems in operation for the product provided under this specification Section are due to incompatibility of any components covered by this Certificate of Unit Responsibility. Nor will we condition or void any warranty for the performance of the product of this specification Section due to incompatibility of any components covered under this Certificate of Unit Responsibility. Our signature on this Certificate of Unit Responsibility does not obligate us to take responsibility for, nor to warrant the workmanship, quality, or performance of related equipment provided by others under specification sections , and . Our obligation to warranty all equipment provided by us shall remain unaffected. Notary Public Commission expiration date Seal: Name of Corporation Address By: Duly Authorized Official Legal Title of Official Date 0 J � �p iv. n ' -< -<F- "° m ��• -ry� W C 1 • , �'" N Name of Corporation Address By: Duly Authorized Official Legal Title of Official Date N O J � -< -<F- "° m rn �'" N FILED Form C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICAr►Q►�tFQ�M �miSEP- p1n1,1 1v Contract No. Specification sectio Equipment name:-- ,,,tw nku Contractor: JU 11M Manufacturer of equipment item: The undersigned manufacturer of the equipment item described above hereby certifies that he has checked the installation of the equipment and that the equipment, as specified in the project manual, has been provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and that the trial operation of the eauioment item has been satisfactory. Comments: Manufacturer Contractor Signature of Authorized Representative Signature of Authorized Representative Date Date Form B. MANUFACTR'S INSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION FORM Contractor: Manufacturer of equipment it The undersigned manufacture certifies that a service engineer has instructed the wastewater treatment plant operating personnel in the roper maintenance and operation of the equipment designated herein. Others: Maintenance Check List (check annrooriate soacbs) Described normal oil changes (frequency) Described special tools required Described normal items to be reviewed for wear Described preventive maintenance instructions Described greasing frequency Others: Manufacturer Signature of Authorized N O J of Contractor m kO Date Date / Signature of AuthVzed Representative Date Form C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FORM Contract No. _ �ecification section: Equipment name_: Contractor: Manufacturer of equipment item: The undersigned manufacturer of the equipment item described above hereby certifies that he has checked the installation of the equipment and that the equipment, as specified in the project manual, has been provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and that the trial operation of the equipment item has been satisfactory. Comments: Manufacturer Signature of Authorized Representative Date Contractor Signature of Authorized Representative Date N d u=� C-) rrT -nD- C-) -tc r <� -D M o 0 " N G F D S A R .. Lwu.REEGRE.YOu d° CONTRg TOR RESPONSIBLE FOR LOCATING ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. - SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT 4WRAPOLEONST SE OWA CITV.IOWA 53>4O 1 a CITY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT VICINITY MAP 4366 Napoleon St SE, Iowa City, IA 52240 T IOWA CITY, IOWA SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES iACRITV �EPEir[EPRn.W, ,rR m15RP(M E CITY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER � BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT �LWRE tt��neT A o cE� Mms�o�on A m AiM OEEUIiFD ,.RMI AT FULLSIff Mina IEHRIDffiLoromE °R'E Bim'. A. ntimba RI ERAm\.REM Mov 0 1 2 oluuru� _ FA �'y�`A xD. m+,Em REv a pyY 1K E.IRGIIRS A"PPO'ED G1 'E a Y II _ rlI_ NWM • • p:AE1VE: EI EI ES YY• 10 VK �MY® N'KOFavO4i •OI\EMOYN VCPixEyyP++^^0.+R vwm E A�oaE.LL��e¢xroao �•_/..J! Nw 1UF • • �o� si 6CE)L51CMVEo NPw roMA TM� MORE MVA •OF i n- o���NRUR,I�,:,PEM� pow. Rzwn. u\ - - IooD�°'I rmfnrvLgy�y�m� \\iOhR N{lAR6CxMCTNTINI.IY ( TV8f}W BtlI@NIPiPf LANE wItHE • f N.�S �\ OI OI 4INY4 T PDF Page 1 —r I F E ° C Stanley Consultants Nc- E CITY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA COVER AND VICINITY MAP OEEUIiFD ,.RMI AT FULLSIff °R'E Bim'. A. ntimba 0 1 2 3 N °MECMOR v, owTLaAE xD. m+,Em REv A"PPO'ED G1 0 o , 2 ] a 5 a T Bmn wTe ARRu,era vn F 10 AM STANLEY CONSULTANTS C3 METCALF & EDDY A -S5 A -SS CHARTER MACHINE COMPANY 770-K-1Line 770-K-0101 770 -K -0101 -INT TP00kB-031 3-DIMENSIONAL VIEW OF NEW BELT FILTER PRESS N 0 PDF Page 2 IIIIv ■v ■© ■c e Stanley Consultants INC. ... n7e1-37s. CRY O IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA INDEX AT FULL SIZE "^`-^' """"'"'"' -� CHECMD D -M- p, yryp„ qEy 0 1 Z 9 IN r pnoveD ,i,l p eAvxoreD G2 0 0 1 Z 9 0 5 8 7 9Dm MiE N1dKf DD 2H> e e e �e Cn.xnmser.. �. DRAWING INDEX SHEET ND. SHEET NAME G1 COVER AND VICINITY MAP 02 INDEX 63 GENERALLEGEND 04 ABBREVIATIONS - SHEETI GS ABBREVIATIONS - SHEET 2 GS PIPING SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT CODES DI ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION PLAN AND ELEVATION D2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN AND ELEVATION DS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION SECTIONS C1 SITE PLAN 31 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND LEGEND - SHEETI S2 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND LEGEND - SHEET 2 S3 STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS St STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION DETAILS Al ARCHITECTURAL PLAN AND ELEVATION MI MECHANICAL LEGEND - SHEET I M2 MECHANICAL LEGEND - SHEET 2 M3 BELT FILTER PRESS- GENERAL ARRANGEMENT M4 BELT FILTER PRESS -SECTIONS MS BELT FILTER PRESS - HVAC PLAN M7 BELT FILTER PRESS -NVACSECTIONS W BELT FILTER PRESS- HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS NO DIGESTER BUILDING MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN MIO DIGESTER BUILDING MECHANICAL PLAN AND SECTIONS E1 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND SHEET E2 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND SHEET E3 ELECTRICAL ONE -LINES E4 BELT FILTER PRESS - ELECTRICALPLAN ES DIGESTER BUILDING ELECTRICAL PIANS STANLEY CONSULTANTS C3 METCALF & EDDY A -S5 A -SS CHARTER MACHINE COMPANY 770-K-1Line 770-K-0101 770 -K -0101 -INT TP00kB-031 3-DIMENSIONAL VIEW OF NEW BELT FILTER PRESS N 0 PDF Page 2 IIIIv ■v ■© ■c e Stanley Consultants INC. ... n7e1-37s. CRY O IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA INDEX AT FULL SIZE "^`-^' """"'"'"' -� CHECMD D -M- p, yryp„ qEy 0 1 Z 9 IN r pnoveD ,i,l p eAvxoreD G2 0 0 1 Z 9 0 5 8 7 9Dm MiE N1dKf DD 2H> e e e �e Cn.xnmser.. �. PDF Page 3 v 1 3 4 1 s 1e1 ] 1 v v1 1. 1 n VIEW MARKERS GENERAL SYMBOLS GENERAL MATERIALS LEGEND NOTES SECTION A-SF1 �� BEgLArIGX ® Garn \ 1. ALL6VMBWSAN]IF®REWATYCW fi1NNMWTIISLEGEIU NM MISER ONTHIS SET cf dUWN05. G MFI CESgNAIESCU,IING %NE OF 6ECPIX1 yf,SP] �LAAWiNGNUABEq(51 WWWCX NEW IS CE61GN„E6 dRELTCI. ELEVATION B-SFi LIVED GUL FROIn'.vyiLN?lPN C? -C-. THE NUMBER IN THE rXIN1G1E NpLATE6ilE REVSIq! L\ ^VYBER IDEMIFIED THE LETTER 'A'Ilp1EpA]FIYTOTHE RIGHT OT �EX� I"��Xi �1 �R 6VI8N�a �°F 1 E"iINE °RANIXG, PRIXCIPPL ASPECTS OF REVEIWSIIF TILVOFV ROCK � O HFI ELEv+•.•: 7.. 6F1.8R UU6XED ROCK _� DE6G ESLDLA,DN DETAILC-SF1 G6F1 of OE uL aftsfz FIT,] �;�r',�,��s�„��D„B�"a�T:MN�S6 coxTRIwT IINTuuxo � sAxo cxu.PusiEq v SVBBnNIE LETTER OR NUMBER FOR ASTERISK FLIDBd' ELEyAIWN DF51pMnCN °'""°""F"` � CONCRETE i DIMENSIONSAND SCALELDLDMNIDENniILA^W pMEN510N5 ANM°aEIF/ATON6 MMNEDMI/S I.IA0.EPPPRO%INATE °B,AINFINOL pMEN51WA5 FOR CONSTRUCTION FROM l THE ENGINEER pMEH510N5 PNDgR ELEVRTMS MWF£°lrvus(i1 ME 0.55VMED P"p SXI.LL BE VERIFIED OF MODIFIED AS REQUIRED By THE coxmxiDR TO SUITEOVIPMEHi FURXISXED FIWL DIMENSIONS ME SVBIFLi l0 TxE 0.P9 Ew of THE ENpi£FA. ENsnxGaBlEm LNE � RENFgiLIN36N61N COXGiE,E pMEX51M5P"OrtM EIEVAnIXI6 Y.W£°nIW IH -I MVST BE YFPofIE➢INnE i1ELDBv THE CMIRACTOR � FAIBTMK CB'ELT IO BE REMP/FDOR RELOFAIEO N -N -if YhLCE°WIREiABRIC DIMENbION6AAE GENEPKLYTOEWE. NR 6NgILO1pi BE 5UlED. USE DIMEN6IW 5 6H0.hN NITS (NOT TO&VLEI ISSHFM" WLVNNEItE OIMEX610N I60BVgU6LY WTLi BLUE. W ����W�.LWAlE006JELT OmUNE Of iVNRE °BIECi $rEEL (1x SECTION) 1YIN-FERRW$ METAL NUMEAILSCALE VALUES II/T-1'tl. ETC) A%LYONLY AifVLLSIZE --- CENTER LINE ----------- "'°°E"°"E ® G`KI"`E`T°" FIELD MEASUREMENT NOTES E &AIFIGE BRE4K UNE ® ROIIOX WOCp IM BECT°IO E 1. NI DIYENSICN60F EL61NG CpI5TR11LngI MEIPAipOWIE CONIMCTOR6WILMARKL HECE86MV FEW NE/SWEMEM6 OF EA5nNG 5,N11LTWEb AND E°UPMFHI TO VFAIFY pMEX61pN6 5Xgy11 p1 pIAW.NGS, µD TO LETFRMNE DMENSIOib Fqi SN°NH. PRNM TO CON6TXVmNIH. FARORb, IHLLNSISrENLIE50R °MIS61p16 pSCOY£RED bWLLI BE REPgVEOIH WTEAMLBREVLIINE gYNVLp I''0 v 1MITNOTO THE DES'GN MC£ES610N4 ME 01 REFRESEMAiNEY✓iiHiN IWENry{qq QAI 1KKIR6 CQ4T6 FOR MOpRUTIOH50F NFN CONSTXVCPW, OUE iOLACK CF CONRRWLgH OF pMEN51CN6 BV FlEI➢MU6VREMEMS, bN01L RE BORNE BVCW,PACTOR 2 COMPACTpi 51ULLgEVIEW COMRILi MLUMEXiST°DEtERMINETHE EMPCi LOGTCN OF NI NCNKNID VERIFY SPAML 0.EUTIXISXIPS OF All NORK /M' OVESTIX! LOHLERNIIp LOUTOH OR SPATNI REUTI°NSHIPS SHNI BE SUBMITTED TO THE QYXENS REPRE6ENTATVE BPECIfK CpENNGOROF➢RE64X'MN®IHM WNL Lay���������I� RIGID IXBVIA,gN RIIIII� GTT IMBVUTpN �l v/1 (n ���! I.1 yI .-�j -� 9 D LOCATXNI6 MREWIPMEM, PIPELXIES, WCT40gKANDOMER SVCH ITEMS OF WDRI( WXFAE NOT pMFN 81WFDON piAWINGS.6NNLBE DETERMINED BYCONTWdTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROPER FITTING OF THE WORK IN PUCE OPENING WITNOGTIN°LOVER IPUN) GPEHHG WRN LIELKEREGPGTE COIER IPUN) � WSp9fV CCM1KK JpMINPWl1 GLASS (EIEVATON) ^ v• aJ�l �.I� B ROOM AND OPENING IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS-- IN DLVf OPENING �. � DI mMwvoFEMNG 1DI ROOMMIFRP3t ♦ LMSDNT'EIwINsw.wMIN PVNI F VIDI Lop.EA OPExNG -- GwwoGEnwNORAL R OR PL mpPEan MINE Q ORCL LExrERuxE c p pINETEq oq PoLND G B sWPNE cprsrgllcTaN.lDlxr R¢vWAn CC"S,RVLIICN JGMIXEWIAYI WT,11 WAlERBiIY m IrotwXEXEO caxeTRucrwx.IpM FOR LONBiMX:FpN JB_ d/ A B'iYNI] W. CEBLRIPTN)N OBOX ON., AWD GTE ®' KUOXEiNOCOxSTRUCTKKIJGMKI1H WAlERBFOP 0 B YM b. Awu. YMN. bn RF61 JIN wMMFm�YfaoNn CRY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA GENERAL LEGEND A A DEeoNED Aa+bY AT FULL SIZE D 1 2 ] N puwN D6wMm --•. e: CHECKED DwTNWs xo.3mvn REv. I 3 6 ] s • la Cnrnew�.�n n DwTNWs xo.3mvn REv. APPRv+ED +GIDY ^�� APPRovED G3 0 D 1 2 9 1 6 8 T Bon GTE Auwur3n »I] PDF Page 4 I1 ] ] e Ie ) I 0 IB 10 uAA E D B ABBR TERM ABBR IERY A.S. TERN AB®1 TERM XW I{LpYI\TT DNII NIINMTi HOUR RKi XEYNAY L LENGTH. µ9E LAT IFJ.NN3.VR lEYPERATURE UV UVATORV IB FVN1Np61 LC LOµ CEMER Li VHFALfEEi LFMc UOUIpigXi FLE%IBIE METAL LdiWR LO V:NOM: LONG LLBBBN LONOlEG6 MCXTO BALNµpIgRV011iK I. LONG LEO6 YLRTO GLXAXDVFAINK _ ICI LOH(i 1FO XgIQONLK LLV LONG TEG YI:FTILN WL VMR LOA LCWL{pFJKTO LOR LE<Ki1FFREMOIE I➢ LOW PoWT:]PX. M'WWER pK1F1 LPO LgIiED PET1tOLEW OA6 V1 LCCNAEYOTF IJ8 VTERB PER SECOND LT LEFT LTO LYYITNO LTV? lgHMflOXi LV LOW W)LibE LM LOULFR LWC qM CONCRETE LWi IFAVNG WARR TEMPERATURE YFTFA LpLIEHSIgII YEIERLOEWLEI AS ANN YFJIEIER IpMENNOH 1M YECILWNILµCXOR: Ytt1WMPFAE 1M0 Y/3+IlETq ' MAlIUA1 WR MATERIAL MAX MAMMVM NB M. Y.WN MBH lC0)BIVB PER XOIIN MCB TU11E LpiCUR BREARR MCC <gITRW CENTER MCLS GSE CIRCUIT BREAKER YCW WXTWWV80PEGlYq LLATI[E YG <RCIIIF PROTELIOR YECN FJ PER bTYR011:NILlIIMI.1gN RELY Q MN NWg1E: YETALIWlIE _ MIN NMYIAI MI6E MI6LELJAHEOUB � MJ MECI4WILALJOIXi rn MLO MAIN WG ONLY NO MA80NflV OPENING �Y MO0. MNMdFFAFMOTE OL NL1TOfl METKOLOEVMIBTOR:MOTgIOFFPATEO VN.VETNIDG MPRMOFOR pROTEL110X RFUY1.,BOC S YOPSIKK W& METERSPER8ECOHDBOF YG900 MEgUM YOLTME908 YVA MEGVOLiµPEREBOT YV11LC MEOgM VOLTAGE MOigi LOX1RMEEXIER NNIS MEDIUM VOLTPGE MOTOR BTµiEllBPL H NEWNORTX XE NORMAL CRGµN XC. NORMALLY CLOSED NO NORMALLY OPEN NEC NATIGNLL ELE<iRN.AL CODE XEW NATroNAL ELELLa1EAL IMxuFACLUpERSA580CNTKK1 NEfiC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL 6AfENCOOE NEVT NEVTPPI NF NFM FACE 0 FOR LON6IRVLIg11 l A A OY.VAI NFpA HI.TOWLFWE pROIE<igNA88OLNl1ON IO LE EGa1VigN pOpX GILD IPL9 GTE Nq NOT IN EOMRbi NO NUMBER NOY XOMIXU NPL W.TIOIUL PIPE TXRFAD NS HFM 6qE � 18 NOT iO6CA1F StanleyConSultants.�. G OUTSIDE NR W ON CENTER, OPEXLLOBE:OVEREVMEHT IISIow Arawe. MuwW, bws 3]T61�]1N WR OPEN{LO6EAEMOTE LYNeywiwYYlN.mm W i6gE LUMETER Cf OE FACE � GTY OF IOWA CRV WASTEWATER oq OPERATOR MTMiA<F 6inilgl BELT FILTER PRESS REPLAOEMEf1T PROJECT qLR W�wwTENYJCEAEMOIE IOWA CRY,IOWA CPHG OPENING Opp OWpyiE oq0 OVFaitawRoapRNN ABBREVIATIONS - SHEETI OY OPENdiOPAOBE OWU OCCVPATgNALBKEIYAND MEMIXAGOLNTb1 OFLD OVERLGO DESIGNED ✓•YINW P POLEpRANN pBCXWpT BCAIE'. FYJNE AT FULL SIZE Dw,iNMy p6D PIPINGBIN6TIVMENTATgN DVLRAY O T Z 9 N <NELLFp N0. aiLOJI REV %I PXEUMATq TO CURRENT"� MFRWEO JBNbY PA PIANLAW: PUBLIC OAGA FAL E L e A A AMPERE LF CURRENT LYLMIG %ISE EX6L E%4iW0 NNIE6N£µCxOR CLO LE0.lb:LCO11X0 Eli F%Ti1i0lON: FX1FRgR AS µCXR BWll61 (IJ CONFROL JOWF FACP FRiE NIAY CgITX0.pNEL A< ACRE, ALTERNATING LVR0.ENL CLO CLOSET FL FAL CLOSED NC ACCESS CONTROL Nfl WNORgN11H3) CLR LLCM FCO FLWREIENIWi PCB NR CIRCUIT NiFA%Eq FAR <EXTRIETER IpNEHSX)H) FCU iµ CqL VMF PCI µERICµ CONCRETE W3TIME CMP CORRUWTEp MELAL%PE Fp iIgE WMpER, FLOORpRNN bEUR ACCURATE CMU CONCRETE MA60NRV UNR FDH FW NGTION ACV AUTOMATIC CONTpOLVALVE CND LONWIT FE FIRE EXLINOp3NFA bVd ]VNYNITOINTD <ONIROLVKYE <NTG CONTACTOR ECC— RqE FMINOUIBNER GBXET AG IGC Bb CMLRL CONTROL FAq FbE KIEIOCNFpBNIRffBbT CNBC CONSOLE 0 FgEOUENLV TO CVRREM ILY1L IDOOD CXVR WNVEYM FALNRA<F ADJ MIYYM:MDNNGIAIUOTybIE) CO CLFAXWi FLR iWBN1FDIfL0011 K KIPNO: iRAYE:NIpOfpEOUEMLY CM WWW FALIABi:ROgl F NOPE fMMYEDI FLOOR COI! WWNg10N iLOMNE KG MOVEfM3WEOl ORAOE LQIM WYNIIXIW1gN i1RLLMDAYP6 AGRAR KMLFMTE CONC WNCENIRD:LCNLIIETE IX iLFABIE µ AMPERE HOUR CONN CONNEETIgN11DR) G FlKgE161 µU KLIMXIXMq UHrt WHT WXTXG110X:EgIPHV WS E iLELBLE YFTALCgIWR N ANALOG INPUT CONBL WNBTtUCT10H O AUL OPBX: FIBFPOPM NL AMPERE INTERRUPTING LURREXT(GPALRYI G WXTWLPAIEL OB FGi ON BOTTOM ALUMINUM CPT WXTROL POWER TRANSFORMER FOT FLAT ON TOP ALT ALTERNATE: ALTITUDE CR WNTROLREUY. CURRENT RELAY TRP FIBERGLASS gEwFOREED PIPE IVR PLA0Tg1 µP AMPERE Cb LWbCONTRW 6TATgX 6 FAR SIDE µT AMOUNT CT CERA1bC INE: WRRFMTRAN0Fg1YEq FEET FOOT µH ANNUNCIATOR LTR LEMFA G iWTINO µ3I ERgµ lUigNN 8iµ0ARW INSTITUTE LFM COXiRIX U FUSE AG L00011T%1T CN CABLE IELEVLgN fORWMD PRO% pROyWTE W WPPFA FI%LV0.E U NI%LYAYN/FA VXrt WLY WBq CE1TYElFp WUGEIGbEI IPVO APPROVED DID IT CUBIC fCOi GLLvµ VE1D1 ARCH MCXRECTVRE; MCMRECNRIL WN WBIC SUCH DV GROUND DETECTOR A6 MR SUPPLY WY WBq PETER EN GENERATOR ASCE µERICµ 6WR:TV OFLMLENOMEERB WYY CUBq MILLIMETER FI GROUNp FWLT WIERpVPTER Ab0 AW V6TµLE 6PEEp Dflh£ LU Yp LVBq YARD L ORTUNE P86Y ASSEMBLY p LEEP ND GROUND ASTM AMERICAN BpLIETYFOR iEOTWO WlERY16 LB WCT BµN P MADE AT AMPERE TRIP L9L WUBIE AN WrWUIM ATS µt01Mi1E LRµ8FER 8NRCX C9Y LELYEL PETER RS WLVINIEFp RWDBTEELCgIpM µ% AUXILIARY pC pgECi CVRREM TO WnIINO AKG µERgµ VMIE WIgE pLF p81NYULFD CONTROL SYSTEM GO W68UKLY WT BATTEN BATTERY CPL pRECi ONMFK LCNIRGL$ CAND G1P6VN VtlLLpIAO Ob BACK TO BALL pE0 DEGREES GNI GYP6UM Y BEM£EX CENIERfi:BOLT LMUEBOTTOM CMM0:01Rd1q COCE GET CftNL HIGH 00 WARD Ci GINNNG FOVNTAN NA HINDAUTO GORY BOUXpARV W pESEL DEME WTOa B ROSE BNB BE BOTX FACES p pGITK INPUT, WCLILE AON XGR HANGER BFF BELOW FINISH FLOG pY DIMENSION(S) MN WHpXOLE BRVM BITUMINOUS PIP DVGTILEINCH PIPE XID XIOMINRNBINOIBCNµGE Bl W6EWlE: GUIDING LINE PIA DIAMETER LLg4NETAL YW WIIOWO PAR O.M. HDOff+WTO &R BORER p6C DISCONNECT IO-0FfAENOTE BLW BELOW PBT DISTANCE RQONTK BLI BEµ18A 0EHLNMML: BE1QIMb KYEM pOTR DISTRIBUTION GX PoMT, NOR6EYW WXpHG pY pEYµDYEtFA GX ME68VRE6CpYY BACLOFCURB pl VR BW BOTTOM OF PICT p0 PORN OIIi%II;OrtrO TgEWVERYbTFAMGFNFFAJgi [.jH�TREW�RYSTEWMGENEFNGGEL BOiLOMOFFW1YpOEPMTYEMTRµSPo1RAllp! GHb1REHOTN.XVpiµ1KSUPPLY Wir040F GWi pp pEPMLLOW6TRVLNRK5EL11011 WiiON OF 6TFFlCPoLWVBIE POIE. p%IBLE EgMT; XNY11EX81p1 BOTLOY LpBT WUXF POLE. 6INGIE iX0.GN Id1 VOLTAGE 90TX WTTOM OF TREHCN pi ORNNUTNO. Y£NTUTIGI,µONR<ONOITgXIXO BABE PIATEpONN6PoWOi WAYcR NEATER BPO REMIND OWODRAWWG161 ERi2 BRM ORE.V(ER E EAST N CURRENT TO CURRENT BTV BRRISN THERMAL UNR G LX 49 IXPVLKKIiPUi OIVRI BETWEEN UT ENTERIXp AN iEMPF1UTVRE W CURRENT TO PXF11YATlc BSYT INUREMENT EO EOUPYFNFpiABI M IxBTRVYENi AP G CELMUS: CXAWLEL EE FD6E i0 F90E ID IN610E pMMETEP G GBIE EF CALX FILE: p]VL6TFAX E INVFAt EIEVniNX1 W 'GENET EO EROME OEIEMl011;WWWI OR9lE IF INSICE FA<E W UPAWM:fJDALLLV EJ F%PNIWNJONf IG ISOLATED GROUND LB RMOE BOLT: GTCN GSIH,CNCVR BRFANFR Fl ELEVATgN IML NI2RNEgATE 4ETILIJCCpIWR C TOC CFMIFA MCENIER F1EC FIFCTRIGI IN. INCNIE6) CCN CLOSED, LIRLNL iELENNW E1EV ELF/niOR INC INLET LLK WUPIJNO UPMRNE V0.TAOE iRNIBFORNER FMBEp EMBEDMENT IN6i INSTANTANEOUS CCW CWNIFRCLOCLNffiE EMER EMERGENCY INBTR INSTRUMENTATION CD CEILNOOIfFVBER EMB ENEROYYNIAGEMEMBVBTFM IN6UL INSULATION <EB CONCRETE EOWPYENTSAME FlR ELECTgY.µ METALJF TUWX3 IM INTERLIR LEMS CONTROL EYNSIdi3MgiRORIXO EO EXpLOBgX pROpf IMLN INTEgLOCL CFM CUBIC FEET PER YIN111E W EOVK 1N IMRRT CFB CUBIC FEET PER SECOND EW 6P EOVNLY SPACED W INTERINTgMLLbCENGNIIOWLTgN C. LEILNG ORLIF COPi EOVPYBNT AINCTIpI BOX Cl0 <VRe AND GUTTER ER EUEgOFNEr REMOTE .KIGOFialITO CMµ CHANNEL ES ELECTRICAL SUPPLY JOM CHEM CHEMICAL ESO EMERGENCY 6HVlpGN1 µEE 9Rµ'E CXFR EINMFER EST ESPYATE KCM IULOGRrWBFFR LUBq LENfYETpI EXOx CHARGER ET ExpM6gxrML XENR THOuswOLMcuuRUE GILq Pt CNEENEa PIALE ETC AT CETERA NO µOELOUi CIP G6iW p{gEE: G6i IRON PIPE Efq EXIBTINOTO REMMI XPL LICL RITE CIRC <IRCJUR EW FALX WAT KSEM KILODGM9 PFR BOUMECENIIMETEP EI6P UBT IRON SOILPIPE EKG ELELTRq WATER WOLFA q5M MLWRAMS PER BOUME NETER G WNBTRVCTOH.gIM EMR EMERINGNMIEq TEMPEMNgE IN XILOVOLt CAT LIRWR FXM EX1WISi LVA XILOVOLi µPERE CL CENTERLINE CLFMM'LE;CLOSE E%P FXP.WSgN, E%Po6ED LVM KKOVWi µPERE RFALTNE 1 ] ] A e e T e B m DPra.meinnn n BONEN I1 1 1 T 1 I 0 1 Z ] / 5 8 I I MAWEO� O i BLm Gre NJWsr BO ]mT PDF Page 5 + o a B B a P a a +01 1+ ABBR TEAM IABR TERM P8 PULLSOX SAFE 8W1rcHYMO PC PERSONAL COMPUTER; PONT OF CURVATURE STEM SYMMETRICAL PCB POWER CWCUTBREANER SYNC SYNCH H PLC POULANOCEMENTCONCRETE T TREAL'1S) PF POWER FACTOR mi TOP OF G PFD PROCESSFLCW DMGRMI TSB TOPANDSOTTOE O PFM POWER FACTOR SISTER W8 TERANALBLOCN PH PHASE TEC TERYINALaOF R POINT OFINTERBECTN)N CF XgtYDYFY CYNVE TIC TEST CONNECTOR TRIP CCI I PLATE , PROPERTVUNE TO ENGI pUN RC PROGRAMMABLE LOGO CONTRONFA TEL TOLOPHOSSE FLTF PLATFORM TEMP TOM., PYCB OWEN MANAGEMENT CONI INGTEY TER. TERMNK KIEL TND THREACEDI . ACT GIRT OF TANGENT TIN TXICINNESS) PP ] PN, SN POWER FAREI RU THRWON PRC DINT OF REVERSE CURVE TOB TW OF BOLT MOST RECAST TOC TOP OF CONCRETE TCP OF CURB RE POWER ROOF EMRM/BIER TW TOP OF GIRT, TOP OF ORATNG F PRESS REBBURE TOM TOP OF SAUDI F .1 ROECT, PROJECTED, PROJECTION TW TOP OF STEEL PBF OUNCE PER BOWRE FOOT TOW TCP OF VNLL PSI OUNCE MRSOUME INCH TER TRUI TRWIEA MAG OUNCE PER SQUARE NLN ORAE TS TUBULAR STEEL PT POINT OF TANGENCY TIMES TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR WC OLYWXVLCMOROE TEE TAIRTED "WR .GWEN T9 TVPUCN OTY QUANTITY UBC WMCRM BLLOING CODE RRIRELOCATED, REENS) UFC UNIFORM FIRE CODE M RESITANCE TO CURRENT W UNDERGROUND M RETURN NR UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE �2 RC REMOVE CROWN UPS UNINTERRUPTYIE POWER NARY �J RCDP REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERT WE W URINAL `n F� A E RCA REINFORCED CONCRETE ME UR Ufl11Y �-N / O, E.nt•P RCPT RECEPTACLE URT VEMIIAI di .l -Ci e'�a nEDGE GRAN ;ALT �1� SECT RECTANGLE A VOLTAMPERE 1— PUFF REFERENCE PA VOLT AMPERE REACTIVE I CS\ REfNO REFRIGERATOR VC VERTIcµ cVRYE ^^ �tlrl NENF REINFORCW VCU VOLUME CONTROL UNG �+IP RELOC RELOCATED VF0.T VERTICAL -- -mss REED REQUIRED m VARNBLEFREWENCYwNE - - A REV RE REVRSE; REVISION RETURN GRELE VIC RTICAL POINT OF CURVE •! PUGS RDIDGNVANISEDSTEEL WI VERTIC& POINT OF INTERSECTION SH REHEAT COL VFT VERT CALPONTOFTANGENCY RLA RATEOLOADAMR VE LTMETER SWITCH D My RELAY VED ABLE SPEW CME D RM ROOM Vf LTAGE TRµEFpRMER RMB RCOTMFANpwAE MTRU A. RO ROAMS OPENING SE,NVF VNAT ROW RIGHT OF WAY INTER: VEST; N1Cf'. YACEfUHGE RPM REV0.UTONSPERM11ME AS RR INASUROAD WEDAIiIOUi IT RIGHT AG TER CLOSET S SOUTH &L CLEANOUT 818 STARTHETOP OTN SA SUPPLYAN;BMOEARRESTOR OE FINDS 8&! SANITARYSEWER WW ATER GiWE 8C SLIP-CRITICM. WN &L HYDRAM;WATERHEVTER; SEW— SCHEDULE ATTHOUR C 80 BANITMY ATER MUST SALESC BEC RECON. TXERPROOF,WOIRONGPONT SEM MCI. TERSVRLY 8G SUPPLYGUEG E IG11T SN BNOWER OR CINFME818TAMLE SM SHEET .YYR OVER NM NMwR AR RFNBFUS 8I( SNN YLO MD CLFANOVT &SUN SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACNANO "ORI ICV CNEL.,. V&VE BLBEAV SNORT LEGS BACK TO BNA( AND VERTICAL SP SPACE O IBSIIED FOR LONSTRVCTDN A I A A T SPOT SINGLE POLE, COUBLETHROW Fp CEBCRIPrON p8ON CHNO A%D wTE SOUATDNB) BEST ENGLETINOW SINGLEPOLN 8 EPEC SLARE OUARE E BD LY SO SQUARE EMB METFA SOFT SOUMEFEET SON SQUARE MCNEB S cmakwit 80 M SQUARE MEIER I Y�VP w- 80YM SQUARE MIULMETEAS 82fbNAwNA. LAoiN, MTn SINS'. BB SERWLESNK N�'AMHIYI N� SST STARLESS STEEL 80IlGSTATE WRIP asw SY'NCBELELTORSATCX ' CRY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER I SHONTTRIP BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT eTBY STANDBY IOWA MY, IOWA aTO HTNIwRD;STCw OMN BTEE STIFFENER STL STEEL ABBREVIATIONS - SHEET 2 A 8HE STARTER A STILL STRVCTURL $IB STORM BEWEA GEBONF➢ 1RNT2 US BECONOARYUNITSIASTATOM AT RLLSiE. NONE W cX Dwmw NO a IW RED 1 B MBD S mcHm 0 1 2 AMRGaBN/D p o 1 2 I 5 8 8 E DATE NOUaT]BAIF 1 ] a A s a P a yDC t0 VFIMN10�\LNPF 11 + r 1 B t e e e T 1 e 1 r 1 +o SYSTEM CODES EQUIPMENT CODES NOTES ANMEwTIMM Mw.AR ox THIS LECExD DONE OEeLRPIICH BEM AEMTNWNR Rom, MITATgI NR A: Kro ACE ASH COLLECTOR SYSTEM ACVF A .VEM ACNO ACID WASTE CHAIN NOW µ%I LANY COOLING WATER A%B AI%ILIMY STEAM EB SCALER PLOWCOWN BG BOILER COMBUSTION AR " BONIER - COAL FIRED BOARD R11L.B. SEATING MICEMEATS BFW SCALER FEEDAATER SGV WTAA'E GAS BSP SOIRCAE MAC EIM BUILONG XFATMG SAAM BLD BONIER gwRH MUST SCI WKS ML4 MINE MWi flACILWPSN WPTER CA COMPRIF AIR VF% CONDENSER AIR EXTRACTION CCW CLOSED CYCLE COOLING WATER CLF CYCLE CHEMICAL FEED CLLN MNDEARER CLEWING CLWV CYCLE SWOUP COOF CYCLEONERLOW DEAN CHEMICAL DRMM CEM6 CGNTRM E41S4g9 MONITORING LEN CEMMTE CF KEY. FFFD.m CN8 CMLLDWATENIT. CHM C,R.WATERBYTA86 CHAR CMNIDWATERRETURN CHINS MLW CLFDWATFR&PLY ONTO C XYgiOGEN SYSTEM CHAR GRCUUTING WATER RETURN CMB GRCUUTING WATER WKLY CLO CHLORINE GAS cu CHLORINE UOUID CLS GILORNE SOLUTION MI, ..VACUUM OWN CIWLE WATER CD CONDENSATE CM CONTROL SYSTEM COJ CARBMI ON, AH vim cow CO. CCM —MUNuiwx COME CCMBMI.TIOR SEWER CR6 COW HEXUT S C6 CONDITIONED SLUDGE LSA COLLELTIOENTsIEM- 1RTM KX LN C. CENT CVIGf CVM CWATER CMWIHEMICAL I,CWH CONDENSER WATER YPACS CWLEMER RETURN WATER RETURN CWS CONDENSER WATER SYGFLY CWIR BLUFFERS IX M8 DBM O SYSTEM DOWowDIRECT LCORD WATER DOMESTIC UD WATE CLC DIRECT ppTK CONTROL 6v8TEM DOOM DAMS DOMESTIC HOT WATER DCMINUEDWJTWATETURN UUTION CAMS DEN%IQFO COSTES RETURN MG FAAPRPSWRF BUOGEw oEgxoxeowATpR suvxv DEN pg DPNH DS DIGESTED BWME DSL DIGESTED GLUME DMR DEMMFPAUZE WATER ESE EOUKWNW 0. EFFLUENT ECP CPROMOTERS FDL DRECTWRRHAPORNR EDRN EOVIPMEM Y EE FAWN CTRm ERGgCY PMYEt EARTEM EUFA EFW EFWEM COSTES EG ELECTRIUL GEMMINMI FM u6cRIcu FAwr TRACE MU ADLA,ANEOU6PMVER IE891HW OR M NOUAT030J! SCEWNEOUS FgORMMARRTISM TOBW 3RO MG NITROGEN R EC WRITXVSMIFIRS ER ER 2 A 416 OR 7 PONSTE4 31 A1.0RTMVPMKR FS RAATER ET THAISENVPOER GREATER TWW 36LV POSER NPOW ELPB UNIMERFGWER WPRV EVT EOUIPMENT Xi VENT VENT MREF M FLUEWATER FSIU E%TRACTpN CASCO& EXT, E%TRARON SRAM ACS TOM CORrROL BCNKM F- YD MERYATERCYGEM R FIWLL MFLUENT 11U FAV, FORCED WALT FG FUEL GAS FDR FUEL Gµ RECIRCULATION FMO FEEpYATAR RESITS VELAR µD DRNNS RO Fµ,INWCEDDX RT FILTRATE FM FORM NX 0 FLE qL PoF Fµ,ME GVES CCOE CODE CEMBER". ANE DMOSS M, A AERATOR FOR NEL OIL RETURN NM KOEOWLEHFCONCEXMNB MICIRO MR GRWrt ACCV FOS FUEL qL SUR. NEI ACU ISO VHrt MR V—NU AOT NF101LTPANBFER TCB NR&HE LOxiR0.6VbTE4 AIR OWES K iOV W6gLYERT FE 1Rg141NG FILTER EfTLUEM KIL AJRFILTERIVEMLT µAR WNF O LIXp11 I0NINOOXLVLI') A➢ ME PROTECTORS TPR rRq%UNG FILTER RECYCLE MRXAMM µU MR FEEWJATER SYSTEM THR TFI HAD BLUME µD µME WE GENERAL BUILDING EOUIPMAM TLOL TURBINE LIRE qL A IAV SO GASCIRCUUiNN NMO TJRJ%OWN ASC IDIIATA$EBPEEUCOMIIYRIER ,ELECTRONIC) SCAT C£NEMTgLCMUNGANDRIRGE TRNT TREATEDWATER AIMi/AIE BMEDORIL£11EGNNILIL) ATB W GRIT TS TRµYER.. RAT E.A. DRE GTU KEFFWEM TW TURBINE BFALSµO gWNs BACKMLOWARIEWRATUR, BELT A"PREie SAL' FOR mLFAR.ICOLRENRN TWAB THgNENEDYJASTEACINATEDBLIgBE SOX B4WOUSE IIRA mTRW .BLVRV TWTR TENPEA.wWrER EREANER 9LR HPREBWRECGCIWAS WNTFRRUPTIWE PpAER SCARLY R: MM .. BLS ISI HAND am xmp 65URENAT111NLw VAC YKMY ROOTER WA4TFw,INLwERANCLETC SON HAS MON PRESSURE 6TFAN K VBM BM 1gNR FAST AURP WATER RETUIIx VCR VINTIMURCOF CON. CAB FIRMSHEKIFMPWAARBLWIY VON WaSsm ACTNATEO MWOE C/Y GPILrtOR MM HOT REHEAT SYSTEM NU VLl9RP8MBKI8AND wMYnwR CAR HRWR HEAT RESERVOIR RETURN WCIL W.ViC fY'I CH COOLIES HIM HEATRESERVOIRBWRY WF WATERTRFATYEM CHARGES CLPP HANFR HEATINO WATER RETURN WFR WATER ORE ION ErcNwGE WrtFVATMR eGFRFEq Tµ% HHAS HEATING WATER SUPPLY WA WASTEWATERPROCES81 OONINOLWNBMEMPµEI IA N IAA,NEF LATINNKq AR .... WFJL WATER, W0.9NYMlER Mq CoNDERSDR MAC g CMg0.E CM OT R IW FOF WATER CO C0 ERM AMA CMPORCAM COOL NOTWATERRETWM MVS HTwATEROUPPLY OFFS PAMEL COMI.TOR(SO Y M6TMT NTME COMPACTOR IM:RFFIRMOB. ADS CALF COAT R .COIR YIXET wSTER C CAT CRANE U UUNTUND RYAS UNYMEMY TUBE CM rcr ISM UUS M MMR ECRU,7R, GAS CENTRIFUGE CENTRIFUGE C C COBE CUM LCCUBICLE OL RIXJR LUBEOLRETURN CAVALVE IOCB WBEMLBVRV CSS` MIRCIUAHOWATERMM UC LOAPROSUM OM 1E CYLMCER RCqETM M8 UNG LgNPREBSUREIN1MKw Of MKTEAAR% UB LOAMFAFTSON FIN MNMTOR CAN L6 uMESWVigN DC MMSAFERFCOVER MG FAAPRPSWRF BUOGEw PKIESTERCIABOODSTER OFF LV SB VMUN CAS DISTRIBUTOR DEOUCATOR, EJECTOR. EIC CW4 RECM.IIw D DLE LL YDFDLIGIAM MKi M ARIA FX LRAL BLV11FlYNCE ORI DAMET CAW MV. 10Y PRFBNRE C01 W IMIE SA MB FCNRM eTFAY CANE UN US SARGASSO MVMBTFNI ACO E ECMKY6R SURM YV@APWArER EOUGTM DO N3 wNww w EDW EMROENCYEKWAM MG NITROGEN EM'MMION.. XR EI IA'? COSTES EUV ELECTRIC OVERFLOW M OrERFLOW ELECTRICAL M.WMME ENO SEED OAW EPR EVAPOMigt DT0 OWRA,OW STORM C XUTER EMSTUNRADMINC AC P0USHEOC.NON5A1E FAR EV35 SINSAYTV.111 EYEWAMVBKETYBXONER ACRIDWIPW CONDENSATE UGTER EAD MRAMCONTROL SY6TEM EA. WI ES8T FO AL MRLEKIFMWEM IWST xo WOD A BMF RN RN MWN Fµ Fµ CR MQN RAD WMEDMWRAOE Fµ WILUMT FEV KI LIWOKKYMR FD FlRERE OR OR HETDVAL HEAT CET ECIOR MM RR.YLER SMUigN ENTCONNECigX FDP TRW! PR6EBB WAIFS FDR RECER P8 MEMRY 4LENF FAR EDDRKT FE PBC PDFABLE RAIR RETAdEYUTFR AE RACE RETURN ACINATEO BWME REF. REFRIGERAM UOUO REFS REFRFGRUCTION RFD RDOFORANSRAINB AMF RB EAE WRTER IUW VM1ER WIR MpATOR WATER RERUNS RV RMB RApArpS WATER wvvLY EA SEMCEAft SAY YIILEBKTE w SNTAMYROVER MA VM..GAR SCUBA C SWM EDW SOFICOUDWAAA 80 6WTMMWNI ELL WFFIM dOgDEw E BVUWEDq%EECUUTF FLSULFUR OMCAM W6 CAMS BEV, WUUMpD%VACWYGE FFLIIFAP BE sATISSE SEP EERT SAW IEI SAW eMTYMVW MM IFR M SLUDGE SLUDGE BN WRRIMTIAI 6R6 BCRFBtm RKV MVMR SB DM BBC SECR SNDA, OR 6T0 vD(SHMPWAHN STM DUY 8T6 S SVR SM4AWWV%M IACIE" SMBEIMCEYMIFR NAR SPNWAIDI TOED LMRRJ NSWO CCOE CESCRPFRIX A AERATOR M:B MICIRO MR GRWrt ACCV CONDENSER uMr NIR DOMEDR—WNWI CONO ACU ISO VHrt MR V—NU AD AIR OWES K FLARE ARRESTOR KIL AJRFILTERIVEMLT µAR WNF O LIXp11 I0NINOOXLVLI') ANL MRXAMM µU USHBUN ADURE XDVNi µD µME µi A IAV NR TELFAgEVALVE IME ASC IDIIATA$EBPEEUCOMIIYRIER ,ELECTRONIC) ARD AIMi/AIE BMEDORIL£11EGNNILIL) ATB AITONATC iRA19FRI 441iCH RAT E.A. MP BACKMLOWARIEWRATUR, BELT A"PREie SAL' SCALER PERSONATOR UNIT SOX B4WOUSE ED. EREANER 9LR SOLER BLS ISI SNR ROOTER WA4TFw,INLwERANCLETC SON mICINNIMgW,RC1FATVAREBIE M REI BM C CON. CAB wTET C/Y GPILrtOR CC wMYnwR CAR CXEMKJI FEELERECER CH COOLIES CI CHARGES CLPP MEANING PORT ORE ION ErcNwGE WrtFVATMR eGFRFEq Tµ% C OONINOLWNBMEMPµEI IA 1RPFE Mq CoNDERSDR CXBL CMg0.E CM GULECTR CO C0 ERM COO CMPORCAM COOL EVKpU ER OFFS PAMEL COMI.TOR(SO CDi COMPACTOR IM:RFFIRMOB. ADS CALF COMPUTER C CAT CRANE LRF UNYMEMY TUBE CM RINUNA CURRENMLERETIRMER M MMR OTF CENTRIFUGE CENTRIFUGE C ..MIDITMAER CUM LCCUBICLE CCYVB CAVALVE CONSTAMIE BOX )% CSS` MIRCIUAHOWATERMM CYL CYLMCER RCqETM M8 MTENTION515TERIA Of MKTEAAR% CEA MNMTOR CAN MNVR DC MMSAFERFCOVER MM PKIESTERCIABOODSTER OFF CARRIES CAS DISTRIBUTOR DEOUCATOR, EJECTOR. EIC MR D DLE DAMOANNER PER MKi M ARIA FX CM DAMET CAW AM D NRMAM SA US CANE UN US EAOMM"MAEIYOMIIF ACO E ECMKY6R EW EOUGTM DO EXINUBTFMR EDW EMROENCYEKWAM EO EM'MMION.. XR EI EVE,ATCA MM EUV ELECTRIC EW ELECTRICAL M.WMME ENO ENGINE EPR EVAPOMigt EVH XUTER EMSTUNRADMINC ENGIN FAR EV35 SINSAYTV.111 EYEWAMVBKETYBXONER IXC UGTER EAD EUMLST—., EA. WI ES8T FO IWST xo WOD A BMF FlREAIMMCpIJAL Fµ Fµ CR MQN FCU Fµ WILUMT FEV VE FD FlRERE OR OR HETDVAL HEAT CET ECIOR RMFlMDUMIEN ENTCONNECigX FDP FlMAMPER FDR RECER FDF FAR EDDRKT FE RMN OWEAEFIEMENi1MTER) COM DEBLIMIBM DEBCRPTgNEUEFVKWBVROEMREBTg1C ROUT I1gIWTOROJMEM g A F FlL EK O M ME HYDRANT LECREENCREWMESSCRUBBERMw Mt FIRE HOSE STATION RC FLOCCULATOR D F60 FIRE SMOFECAMPER FP FILTER IRESE UV�W DM4EA OR CECTECTORUPPLY FPB Fµ FONERE DIMMERP. FW FLUID PONFR UMT UNjMYDMULIC. ETC FµLUDGE FUR FURNACE NFATEXCXMNERUSACEA AV FLAY VALVE AUD FRET DRLD FNM TER XFAl91 MEN. CGLL ER.ND51111, SAF MT SGAT CFTER PIOWARESS CITY WASTEWATER BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CMV, CAWS OFC GENEMTOR RLVR RECFNEIgMR ELygMN;EIc ONCp FEMBFOR MINEC NA. GANI RIig W1 G &MMES TER HCL HFAER C. MIEMRDw SE HH WHDWLEE S@KVTOR EHAMµ H% HRWBTAIOH VOLWECHKIYRBWDEBViR1 R HBO HUMAN wCHINE INTERFACE _8W Tw HW HYDRAULICavEPATON STPANER HP HEATTPUMP SAFETY. XB HAND SECONDARY UNIT WBBTATIDM MR HEATER EATERCOIL W ICN HiT IOAP SWITCHBOARD M WM13FIER MMNU MWTCXOFM ..INEVERTIUTMOMT MM] - HOT WATER CORE M. LOC B TEHYNL B NA H CANCER TEBMNLBOXGV OF INDUCED CRAFTFAR TEIPAMTURECOMIICLVKH (SEIFACIN]) MC INMNUKMOTOR OTROl1F TRNMO E INECTERRxoVcroM NbTq OFAR MV INVERTER AN TNNEMAR ORE ION ErcNwGE WrtFVATMR eGFRFEq Tµ% bECT TRANSFER CRE". .M JUNCTION BOX 1RPFE M LE TRM BORATORYEWINMENT ED LABORATORY TwMEABWIIW LC W.TLwCENTER CAME U LDv LE CONTROL VALVE AT%M WLEW.CMOppvuvEp KNR3J COME MIRMIN LM LOWER 1MIrtJUTNRE CONTROL VALVE (NW M FILTNDI M METER ICOM KAlE0. WL NA%EIA AIR rt WXIFAXIMNfIMER BIRRV MC MOTOR OATR OFRRMGENIES Lm MOTDNNCAL URT'STATILN uN AAM ALECOR ME MIUELLE(E0CTRICA) EOLiYFCF MAN.VARNSIENIMRImwmvKM NWULTHAVOLET rDT W MANHOLE (ELECTRICAL) VOLUME ME E1MAMAN'EWBIN6TFVMFMAIIMR EM VARIABLE MR O% MX MALAR WtUSLEAN CONVOLTROL U.1ME VOLVMECOMROLCY IG MCWNLJOINi WCC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE M.E WBCEHAXEWBMECXFXIWLEOUIPNENi M VIBRATOR I W N I W W W LIY CPFRATm) VKV E VEATIOUBBB T ISO Of R WPUMP VACIAM PUMP Nm wTMFaPERATED DAMPER vARwMc a,EED DRNE YY Ip1ORCPEMTOR TRWBPOMER MDU MTW VERTER KVE WATERS WARNER YS LpTM DMRIFA RATERDSCRUES, BWMF1RE AMERcOURB M MR LRC.. ANSILATq. HWRAUU YM MWWFA 6WFG1 RESCINDMOSS W% MULTIPLEXER ARMROREMPTACLE COKER SMIFJER IAZU WRUNIT. WIIENWY DOOR REDUCTION rWhA IRMRMCRNER ONE OTORWOflNsiANW zm= CMDROLLED VM-CENOR BEU BLNXM IN PULLSOX PDF Page 6 DEBCRPTgNEUEFVKWBVROEMREBTg1C g A PCV MEBWRECOMRCAL V O RC PHOTOELECTRCCELL LECREENCREWMESSCRUBBERMw F E V _ O D PLP RMP a W AB Mm'AU UV�W DM4EA OR CECTECTORUPPLY NO, OEBCSPTW .. .1 MTE DIMMERP. PRE roAERROTEgWbTER FµLUDGE SU PRIMER NFATEXCXMNERUSACEA --q C-3 FRET DRLD M sEv,ICACRECOx]RWFEDVALVE (NMS MJFNMI MEN. CGLL ER.ND51111, w MaTMiAGEgTµD CFTER PIOWARESS CITY WASTEWATER BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CMV, CAWS T2. RLVR RECFNEIgMR ELygMN;EIc MIC MINEC NA. MPL &MMES CAI MIEMRDw SE ER S@KVTOR SMP VOLWECHKIYRBWDEBViR1 R STv _8W Tw SIR STPANER w SAFETY. WB SECONDARY UNIT WBBTATIDM MN W ICN SKID SWITCHBOARD om MWTCXOFM BSM MM] TB M. LOC B TEHYNL B 1B% TEBMNLBOXGV ICV TEIPAMTURECOMIICLVKH (SEIFACIN]) TEL TRNMO E FOR NbTq OFAR Tiit TNNEMAR TN% Tµ% TRIP TRANSFER CRE". TRIP 1RPFE TRP TRM TRS TwMEABWIIW MY CAME U O AT%M ARE TU COME MIRMIN N 1MIrtJUTNRE CONTROL VALVE (NW M FILTNDI W ICOM KAlE0. IPM WXIFAXIMNfIMER BIRRV UB ul URT'STATILN uN W MAN.VARNSIENIMRImwmvKM NWULTHAVOLET rDT WM VOLUME VARIABLE MR O% WUVAV' KU WtUSLEAN CONVOLTROL U.1ME VOLVMECOMROLCY WD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE NB VIBRATOR NJI VEATIOUBBB T WPUMP VACIAM PUMP WD W vARwMc a,EED DRNE W TRWBPOMER W.W WATERS WARNER LAVA RATERDSCRUES, SICU AMERcOURB M NIM RESCINDMOSS WE ARMROREMPTACLE COKER SMIFJER SA XVI WIIENWY %fMR IRMRMCRNER W zm= CMDROLLED VM-CENOR BEU BLNXM PDF Page 6 PED PAW.A)ARU V J wr xol KVEAB W NISSErapWWNGS. g A PCV MEBWRECOMRCAL V O RC PHOTOELECTRCCELL F E V _ O D PLP RMP a W AB Mm'AU RFL ,AML NO, OEBCSPTW .. .1 MTE PJP AN.U.IC CPBVOgR PRE roAERROTEgWbTER M Stanley Consultarft w - ]]Sbw Arenu, Muxa.v,IwA53]81 �]N �M1NeFmnwMrlM.mm SU PRIMER PRV ARESEUNERECUUTINEI --q C-3 PRESSUREMEET' VALVECAACULM OR INV PRESBURESEUEFI M sEv,ICACRECOx]RWFEDVALVE (NMS MJFNMI r �m w MaTMiAGEgTµD CFTER PIOWARESS CITY WASTEWATER BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CMV, CAWS T2. RLVR RECFNEIgMR ELygMN;EIc RE REEAMNCEEEDTMDE SECS REER PIPING SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT CODES ADS REER ME REUSORTTOR REg 6M R< RE q NFµ PED PAW.A)ARU V J AT FULL SIZE D 1 1 3 N I g A PCV MEBWRECOMRCAL V PoCV FRE.RE DIEREMU4 CONTROL VALVE RC PHOTOELECTRCCELL ME, ANEUNATIC EJECTOR PLC MOORAA. LOSO CONTROLLER PLP RMP a W AB Mm'AU RFL ,AML NO, OEBCSPTW .. .1 MTE PJP AN.U.IC CPBVOgR PRE roAERROTEgWbTER M Stanley Consultarft w - ]]Sbw Arenu, Muxa.v,IwA53]81 �]N �M1NeFmnwMrlM.mm SU PRIMER PRV ARESEUNERECUUTINEI M PULLSTATCN, PRESSUREMEET' VALVECAACULM OR INV PRESBURESEUEFI M sEv,ICACRECOx]RWFEDVALVE (NMS MJFNMI ML REESWRE VESSEL INR RECENM, mp16PMUMTOTAIK ElM w MaTMiAGEgTµD CFTER PIOWARESS CITY WASTEWATER BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CMV, CAWS ROT ggCE'TICIE RLVR RECFNEIgMR ELygMN;EIc RE REEAMNCEEEDTMDE SECS REER PIPING SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT CODES ADS REER ME REUSORTTOR REg 6M R< RE q NFµ RV aMNTYRCFVENIIUTCR RNS REINiX(AWE DEUCH. 1MSMY DMAN D.SCHMDT SCALE: NONE MIC REHEAT COB KY RELAY CHECKS pWNWB NO 1ETM IAC REV. O TMJ RCOFTCPUNT KPROVEOJMADY KPROhD SP MPNNE DED D 1 2 J t 5 6 P BLDwR AMpIBT84AJT f 2 3 S 5 S P e 1 10 S-- 11 PDF Page 7 t1 2 ] t 5 a i s Y 10 GENERAL NOTES: REMOVE E45TINO STOREFRONTN+NDONE +. CONTRACTOR 514 LL FIRM VERIFY DMEN616NS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. N TH 2 PROTECT E%RINOCONSTRUCPON AND EQUIPMENT TO REYAN FROM My Q DAMAGE DURING DEMOI N. O ]. USPISEOFCONSTNU TIOXOE6R1501FSRE. A SEE 51RUCTURK NOTES GREET S+FOR CONCRETE DEFNIIIION INGIM EMEMS k E]mtNGcuu MMu D]p1 840M -P I, 6 T-Dt¢ -P r -7 1M, i-Ot4 -p T -t114 -P 1-014 -p 4-31l k F n F 3W t' -P +1 qMECHANICAL FACECF EYNTIXG E%6TIXG 1'd X 7 PEDESTK /EANCUTAXOREI. 6UYP PIT 0 CONCRETE 81A5/ND PEOESiAl81TVP) E E T p a 4 N OF "w"ING µIBgGGRAOE E STNo TOP OF MISTINGRETE [To" PEpESiAl9 SUMP RT _ T flF�jl l¢pjj�R I� C`V ` E%9TNO SUMP ITvr) RTITw) /) 0 D 6cn BELT FILTER PRESS ROOM Tj--nrrl l -P cii SECTiONA-�'1 In� ON c DEMOLITION PLAN - — r c SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY 5b t4-t'd REMOVE MT. STOREFRONT WIpPNS Op�g�AB _SQTiOeIH IfF/ � Y 1 JUNNE MR WAB WL'Ali OEfiCN pNGN O.N. Mw MTE 6 � e Stanley Consultants INC CITY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA �4Qumemu` " ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION A PLAN AND ELEVATION A DEMOLITION ELEVATION DES%:NED ABMMRAFEFw tEDPOw SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY ATFULLSIZE °X"68O"� .�..�. ASND NORTH ELEVATION0 1 2 pREp%ED <DuteeBBu,.Tw.Naen ND aT,OR RDE IN 3 MPRDVED ODMtlFAIMABICIpg10 Dt 0 Q S scA+E +K=idAPPRwED 0 1 9 < 5 8 1 BOTDATE FMa�)5F50 mP + 2 3 4 1 6 1 s S Rl {Ivrn. n PDF Page 8 �Q s-.�.r��nlJ1,7JD711 s�IA.�AJJ��I�JAIDADDJ�11 � � ,..,vrrrr��, -'1"ifff�,'.���■�_ ■ hrr�flU�ifU(UfU(ffffif`��� �, � a : 1 ai ao •0 A6r0 ®\ti0rA60.7� V i , r i fjj dO :!:/. Si0%% : 1011DtiJlBl1% ••••••••••y� �r•t••r•vrrarurrr i%%1 Ir!'y �� `.i '. ' "iJ 70iwi .i/- I;IIh . �m��;mn, 0 r..Oo v o v iia.tii.`.►r�"i'�7sv��.i"evr���®��i.:�vire�w�:%, d i�rav�p�i�99�i�iv��.. .m:-'I•.,,�i ;n:•n%+.�!,�n Jsr,:�..w��o ��, S� - �• e / T 111; , � s •�StanleyConsultarft ,. 1 OF IOWA C" WASMWATI�R BELT FILTER PRESS REP�CEIYIENT PROJECT OWA CITY, IOWA MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEMOLITIONCITY PLAN • ELEVATION PDF Page 9 I 3 3 6 e T a i ro 11 ExEeiNG / ooD R(TEx9Mxp j FOR KR DM %P.REMOVL �L G G �\ $i 1, BEYGYEERPRES BELT FILLER PRESS wl fAxVEYOR - COM/EVOR % / v IOL iVASNEDROOR -Kw P -P SECTION A427 SCISE: IM'=1'17 01 E L ucxT(rvP1 E m BOTTOM ROOF SLAB P v N nrn D �� D n- �� :71rrn �Il 1 iIti �= fir a t SECTION 8-M G SME: W -1'P OS O A B O3 D3 BO_TTOM0._OOF S_IAB 0SFO I66UEO FOR COr51RUCMNI MY W JJW IT td' -P LESCRII DRDX CXI{D MVD dlE � R � e -FREPOREERSTINI FILTERPRESSFNDSLPPORT Stanley Consultants IN( PEDE6L.LL81m fgtSI CRY OF IOWA 01 WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT puna AxD PUTFORM IOWA CRY. IOWA 0.EMWED BY QNIER (TVP F00.3) rim MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL - _ TOcrRIsxEDrLooR� DEMOLITION SECTIONS A DE6gxED D.wTIMerJ.GMI _ SECTION C -M FUIL SIZE cREaiED a FEemFn RO. aFtan'•I�REv SLAVE: IM=I'd 03 0 tAT N •PPRwEO JeR.vxrL%mw "'PROVED D3 0 D 1 ] 3 1 5 6 7 San DLTE iDLirDF_. 3Ryr> r 2 3 1 1 1 1e1 1 1 1 1 0 m dPuwnwEvn= tr PDF Page 10 + T a . B B T s E +q GENERAL NOTES: \ `\ MMM 1. PROTECT FO CONDUIT AND HANDHOLD 2 EHCg6EFOCONWRIN DOOR CONTROL UNIT EOVIPMEM AND O AND DUmSUPPORT . _ l ' ]. PROWDE CURB CUT FOR NEW MINE PER CRY STANDARD. A PROVIDE tOf AGGREGATE WE GRAVEL CRNE TO FACILITATE 0FP6 REMOVAL Ao NO REP.MEMENT. a NI FROM DATBOTTOM OF DUCT AND FROMFAN I TOEFETIOVNDEOROUN DRRNN HEAFTWEANDI BVLA Ef DRANK II II TOM'SELOW GRADE. II II II__ If I II ________________ _ _ I 1 Vi Nx E I / //// E TZ --v 11' -SRM EW BOWgp(ryP FOR SI WE. ,BEE TYPICAL PERU l TALUED avwpvvm DmuLox Ono I I MOTE. I Po____ __________}_ ___R____ i I AxD vllD I ODF II R / // �TRi21TMO6FORYlEN PiNENMY.6EE NDTE6 \ I V EOVPYEM PAD FOR DOOR CORRIDOR. V -0,i UNIT eUPORT-BEF T'IPMALERTENpP EOUPYFM PAD DETON DNOBF AIN IOII BEPARAllg1 REYWE AND REFUGE I D 9-S `\ ■ AHD 0OOO CONTROL VDEWN% I b IT 7 ^' \ 0c» A --- _b __ I I SLUDG E O1 ---- V _ I HOLDIN REM dMMMMB TANK I c') INEiALLNEW t I �iLi� Ln HOEWAINEECTKKI -" r C EOUIPMT-.FA FOR 6UPORT-SEE T!O E%IEB REOUIPMEM PAD rn a DETAIL ON DW36R I -�_ t j✓ r I -. __..�_ - _, I I - I - D IBn11FDPMIXgOiINmgIN a DY Je onPmR --- SLUDGE PROCESSINGFAgL17Y ■ '�-- "" °EH""10M °nD" LXN°''P"° D°'� B I a o o a I It I Stanley consultants INC I ' I CITY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER I BELT FILTER PRREESSSSREPLACEMENT PROJECT I SITE PLAN SITE PLAN A xuE. r•IVII " DFaoxnD .I.aRADv ATFULLSIZE DRAWN DaMNOr SCALE: 1"•1V-0' D 1 29 N CHECKED D.MA W ME, Em,. REV. .BY APPROVED JND e r,,—T APPRO B. Ct 0 a D 1 2 9 d 5 ItT Ban RITE AUGM.M , 1 2 3 1 4 1 1 1• T • Y 10 11 STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA: 1. BUILDINGCODE: INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC(2012; PUBLISHED BY INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC. 2 ASCE 7.10 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES; PUBLISHED BY AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS. 3. STEEL DESIGN CODE: AISC W-10 SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS, ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD); PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. 4. CONCRETECESIGNCODE: BUILDINGCOOEREQOIREMENTSFOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, AC1318-11; PUBLISHED BY AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE. 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL: SEE SPECIFICATION. 6. CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH: 45M PSI AT 28 DAYS. T. REINFORCING STEEL: ASTM A615, GRADE 60, S. REQUIRED SAFE NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE: 2000 PSF. 0. FROST DEPTH: 4FEET. 10.FLOOR LIVE LOADS: SEE PLANS FIELD MEASUREMENT NOTES: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ARE APPROXIMATE; CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL NECESSARY FIELD MEASUREMENTS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, BREECHING AND EQUIPMENT TO VERIFY DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND TO PROVIDE DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN, PRIOR TO FABRICATION. COSTS FOR MODIFICATIONS OF NEW CONSTRUCTION, DUE TO LACK OF CONFIRMATION OF DIMENSIONS BY FIELD MEASUREMENTS SHALL BE BORNE BY CONTRACTOR. DIMENSIONS AND SCALE: DIMENSIONS ANDIOR ELEVATIONS MARKED THUS (3) ARE ASSUMED AND SHALL BE VERIFIED OR MODIFIED AS REWIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO SUIT EQUIPMENT FURNISHED. FINAL DIMENSIONS ARE SUBJECT TO THE REVIEW OF THE ENGINEER. DIMENSIONS AND/OR ELEVATIONS MARKED THUS (+1.) MUST BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE CONTRACTOR. DIMENSIONS ARE GENERALLY TO SCALE, BUT SHOULD NOT BE SCALED. USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN. NTS (NOT TO SCALE) IS SHOWN ONLY WHERE DIMENSION IS OBVIOUSLY OUT OF SCALE NUMERIC SCALE VALUES (1l{ITL', ETC) APPLY ONLY AT FULL SIZE SLOPE ARROW SLOPE MECHANICALANCHOR(MA) (EXPANSION ANCHOR, LINO) ANCHOR BOLT (M) 1 ADHESIVE ANCHOR (AA) CONCRETE DEMOLITION NOTES' 1. REMOVE CONCRETE TO LIMITS SHOWN. 2. AT LIMITS OF CONCRETE TORE REMOVED WHERE EXISTING CONCRETE IS TOREMAIN, PERFORM REMOVAL AS FOLLOWS: A WHERE LIMITS OF CONCRETE REMOVAL FORM A CORNER, CORE DRILL 13" DIA MINIMUM) CONCRETE AT CORNER PRIOR TO SAW CUTTING. OVER CUTTING BY SAW AT CORNERS IS NOT PERMITTED. B. INITIATE REMOVAL BY SAW CUT. SAW CUTS MAY BE MADE THROUGH ENTIRE THICKNESS OF CONCRETE UNLESS EXISTING REINFORCING IS SHOWN TO REMAIN AND EXTEND INTO SUBSEQUENT NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION. C. WHERE SAW CUTTING THROUGH ENTRE BECTON IS NOT POSSIBLE DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT OR WHERE NOT PERMITTED DUE TO RETENTION OF EXISTING REINFORCING, REMOVE CONCRETE BY PRE -DRILLING SERIES OF HOLES ALONG LINE OF REMOVAL TO WEAKEN CONCRETE AND THEN REMOVE CONCRETE BY USE OF HAND HELD JACK HAMMERS. D. EXISTING CONCRETE TO REMAIN SHALL NOT BE DAMAGED BY CONCRETE REMOVAL PROCESS. INSPECT CONCRETE TO REM MN AT DEMOLITION LIMITS AND REPORT TO ENGINEER ANY EVIDENCE OF DAMAGED CONDITIONS. CONCRETE DEMOLITION NOTES (CONTINUED) E. EXISTING REINFORCING BARS THAT ARE TO BE RETAINED SHALL NOT BE DAMAGED BY DEMOLITION PROCESS. DAMAGED BARS OR BARS BENT EXCESSIVELY BY DEMOLITION PROCESS SHALL BE CUT AND MECHANICALLY SPLICED AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. CONCRETE NOTES: 1. EXPOSED CONCRETE CORNER CHAMFER: I- UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE Z CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AS SHOWN MAY BE VARIED TO SUIT PLACING SEQUENCE PROVIDED THE RELOCATION, ADDITION, OR DELETION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO PREPARATION OF REINFORCING STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS. 3. PROVIDE PIPE SLEEVE FOR ALL PIPES AND CONDUITS THAT PASS THROUGH CONCRETE. MAKE SLEEVES IN WALLS FLUSH AND EXTEND SLEEVES IN FLOORS 4" ABOVE TOP OF FLOOR UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 4. PIPE AND PIPE SLEEVES FOR PIPES ARE NOT SHOWN. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. FINAL LOCATION SUBJECT TO ENGINEER'S APPROVAL- 5. PPROVAL5. PROVIDE SETTING TEMPLATES TO POSITION ANCHOR BOLTS PRIOR TO PLACING CW CRETE ACCURATELY POSITION BOLTS TO ASSURE CORRECT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL LOCATION TO MATCH STEEL OR EQUIPM ENT BOLT PATTERN. 6. ALL METAL FABRICATIONS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, OTHER THAN REINFORCING AND ANCHOR BOLTS, SHALL BE HOT -DIP GALVANIZED PETER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123 AND ASTM ANIS ASAPPLICABLE. T. CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE LOADED UNTIL IT HAS ATTAINED SUFFICIENT STRENGTH TO SAFELY WITHSTAND LOADING AND UNTIL REWIRED SHORING AND BRACING HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. & DO NOT PLACE LOADS WITHIN 6 FEET OF CONSTRUCTION JOINT IN SLABS FOR AT LEAST T DAYS AFTER SLAB IS PLACED. S. DO NOT PERFORM ANY OPERATIONS NEAR GROUND FLOOR SLAB PLACEMENT WHICH COULD CAUSE VIBRATION OR SETTLEMENT OF THE SUPPORTING SOIL STRATA FOR AT LEAST T DAYS AFTER SLAB IS PLACED. 10.CONSTRUCTION CRANE OR OTHER HEAVY ERECTION EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE PERMITTED ON SLABS. I I.CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PREVENTION OF FLOATATION OF STRUCTURES WRING CONSTRUCTION. 1200 NOT PLACE CONCRETE UNTIL REINFORCING STEEL PLACEMENT HAS BEEN VERIFIED BY SPECIAL INSPECTOR. 13.MAXIMUM LENGTH OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT IN MY DIRECTION, UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE: A SLABS: 50 FEET. B. OTHER SECTIONS: SO FEET. REINFORCING STEEL NOTES: 1. CONFORM WITH ACI 318 AND ACI STANDARD F } DETAILING OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT." I Z REINFORCING SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AROUND ALL CORNERS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 3. SHIFTREINFORCINGBARSTOCLEARANCHORBOLTSANDEMBEDDED ITEMS; OBTAIN ENGINEER'S APPROVAL AND ADD EXTRA REINFORCING BAR IF REQUESTED BY ENGINEER. CUTTING OF REINFORCING BARS NOT PERMITTED. 4. REINFORCING SHALL BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH CONSTRUCTION JOINTS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 5. TACK WELDING TO REINFORCING BARS IS NOT PERMITTED. 6. LAP OR MECHANICALLY CONNECT ALL 011 AND SMALLER BAR SPLICES AND WELD OR MECHANICALLY CONNECT ALL 014 AND LARGER BAR SPLICES UNLESS APPROVED OTHERWISE BY ENGINEER. T. MINIMUM BAR SPLICE LAP LENGTH SHALLBEAS SHOWN. WHERE LAP LENGTH IS NOT SHOWN W DRAWINGS, USE MINIMUM LENGTH SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING TABLE REINFORCING BAR MINIMUM BRUCE LAP LENGTH IN INCHES HAIRPIN SIZE UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE <t-112' BAR SIZE " 14 86 49 w NI NI 1110 111 TOP MRS 24 32 40 48 TO 60 W 102 113 OTHER BARS 19 25 31 37 M 62 TO M ST I REINFORCING STEEL NOTES WONTINUEDII A CLASS B SPLICE FOR tY 160,000 PSI, Bc • 4600 PSI, NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE, UNCOATED BARS AND FOLLOWING: 1.) CLEAR SPACING OF BARS z 2 BAR DIA AND COVER 2 BAR DIA, OR 2.) CLEAR SPACING OF BARS z DIA BAR AND COVER z DIA BAR, AND STIRRUPS OR TIES THROUGHOUT LAP NOT LESS THAN ACI CODE MINIMUM. B. TOP BAR ARE DEFINED AS HORIZONTAL BARS PLACED SO THAT MORE THAN 12' OF CONCRETE IS CAST IN THE MEMBER BELOW THE BAR. 8. LOCATE SPLICES WHERE SHOWN. WHERE NO SPLICES ARE SHOWN, TOP REINFORCING IN SLABS AND BEAMS MAY BE SPLICED IN MIDDLE ONE-HALF OF SPAN BETWEEN SUPPORTS AND BOTTOM REINFORCING MAY BE SPLICEDOVER OR NEAR SUPPORTS. 9. REINFORCING BAR SPLICES PERMITTED ONLY WHERE SHOWN OR APPROVED BY ENGINEER 10.EXTRA REINFORCING SHALL BE IN ADDITION TO REINFORCING SHOWN OR NOTED. i1.PROVIDE ONE M X 4'6" EXTRA DIAGONAL REINFORCING EACH FACE AT CORNERS OF ALL RECTANGULAR OPENINGS AND AT 45 DEGREES TO MAIN REINFORCING FOR CIRCULAR OPENINGS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 12. PROVIDE ONE M EXTRA REINFORCING ALONG OPENING EDGE EACH FACE; EXTEND BARS MINIMUM OF ZU" BEYOND EDGE OF RECTANGULAR OPENING AND BEYOND PERPENDICULAR PROJECTION OF ROUND OPENING ON REINFORCING BAR UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 11PROVIDE ONE M X VLE EXTRA DIAGONAL REINFORCING TOP BAR IN SLASSAT EACH FLANGE TIP OF STEEL COLUMNS PENETRATING FLOOR SLAB AND AT EACH RE-ENTRANT CORNER 14.ALL BARS INDICATED AS BEING BENT SHALL HAVE STANDARD SO DEGREE HOOKS UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 180 DEGREE HOOKS ARE AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE WHERE APPROVED BY ENGINEER 15.PROVIDE EXTRA HAIRPIN REINFORCING AROUND ALL ANCHOR BOLTS LARGER THAN &M'DIAMETER. EXTEND LEGS OF HAIRPIN THE STANDARD EMBEDMENT LENGTH. SPACE HAIRPINS, ALONG BOLT, 1-112' FROM SURFACEIWDATTON CENTERAROUND UPPER 113 OF ANCHOR BOLT EMBEDMENT is' MAXIMUM). ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER HAIRPIN SIZE UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE <t-112' 83 1318"TOTNCL IM >T 85 16.PROVIDE REINFORCING BAR DOWELS IN FOOTINGS OF THE SAME NUMBER, SPACING AND SIZERS COLUMN, PIER, OR WALL REINFORCING UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 17.ALL BARS SHALL BE SECURELY PLACED IN FINAL POSITION PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. PLACING BARS INTO WET CONCRETE IS PROHIBITED. 18.REINFORCING CONCRETE COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN: 11/2' WITH FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS; 2" FOR A BARS AND LARGER FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER; 3" WHEN DEPOSITED AGAINST EARTH; 34' FOR WALLS AND SLABS NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER. 10.CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED WITHIN FOLLOWING TOLERANCE RELATIVE TO FORMED OR UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACE: D SPECIFIED TOLERANCE COVER DIS 17D>12- N'E-1/8•,+1/4" 1 -1/8',+319' 141' 1In' OR +439' -3/0•,+1/2' GREATER NOTE: iHEO CP/ER TOLERANCES APPLY ONLY AT LOCAL ANOMALIES. •TOLE.Ax SUEE CHAIRS AND SPACERS FOR SPECIFIED COVER. PDF Page 11 c Stanley Consultants INC CRY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA STRUCTURAL NOTES AND LEGEND - SHEET 1 A DE8[wED wUfxFp10 ATFIRLSIM NMNx DSf . I. NOTE 0 1 2 3 N CHEa D NTDNxFD4) HD. ancDl REv. AVM D wPIC16aRD r-I� ,wlrwED S1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8. D<TE NNIDD8Ta4 zm STEEL NOTE& 1. WELD SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT DISTINGUISH BETWEEN REM AND SHOP WELDING. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AS MUCH WELDING AS PRACTICAL IN THE SHOP. CONTRACTORS SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW ALL WELDING AND DISTINGUISH BETWEEN FIELD AND SHOP WELDING. 2. WHERE FILLET WELD SIZES ARE NOT NOTED ON DRAWINGS, PROVIDE MINIMUM SIZE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS DIA, 5.10. ALL OTHER TYPE WELDS NOT SIZED ON DRAWINGS SHALL DEVELOP FULL STRENGTH OF M EMBERS ATTACHED. 3. SET ELEVATION OF BASEPLATES TO TOP OF BASEPLATE AND ANCHOR BOLTS TO TOP OF BOLT. DO NOT WORK FROM TOP OF CONCRETE- 4. ONCRETE 0. PROVIDE GALVANIZED FASTENERS FOR ALL BOLTED CONNECTIONS WHERE ONE OR MORE MEMBERS OR ELEMENTS ARE GALVANIZED MATERIAL. F 5. PROVIDE POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS THAT ARE APPROPRIATE FOR ATTACHMENT TO PRECAST HOLLOW CORE ROOF PLANKS WHERE PIPING, DUCTS, ODOR CURTAIN, OR OTHER ITEMS ARE HUNG FROM THE EXISTING SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY ROOF. I 6. MISCELLANEOUS ANCHOR BOLTS, MECHANICAL ANCHORS, ADHESIVE 1 ANCHORS, AND FASTENERS NOT INDICATED, BUT REQUIRED FOR ANCHORAGE OF EW IPM ENT AND MATERIALS, SHALL BE PROVIDED (AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER OF ITEMS). ANCHORAGE WILL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY ENGINEER 7. ANCHOR BOLT HOLES IN BASEPLATES SHALL BE SIZED AS FOLLOWS UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS: DIAMETER OF ANCHOR BOLT HOLE DIAM ETER SIB" 718" L6" 1111w. 718" 1 3116" 1" TO Y' ANCHOR BOLT DIA. I2" OVER Z' ANCHOR BOLT DIA." d3 i11J1gd:4\iD �: I.. ITEM IBC 2012 SECTION IBC M12 TABLE CONCRETE 17W 3 1706.3 BOLTS INSTALLED IN CONCRETE 1]06.3 1706.3 REINFORCING STEEL 1705.2.2.3 1706.22 STRUCTURAL WELDING 1705.2 NOTES HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING 1706.2 NOTE 0 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUFFICIENT ADVANCE WARNING OF ANTICIPATED WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION. IT SHALL BE THE DUTY OF THE PERSON DOING THE WORK AUTHORIZED BY A PERMIT TO NOTIFY THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR THAT SUCH WORK IS READY FOR INSPECTION. INSPECTION REQUESTS SHALL BE IN WRITING AND FILED AT LEAST TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE SUCH INSPECTION IS DESIRED. 2. IT SHALL BE THE DUTY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CAUSE THE WORK TO REMAIN ACCESSIBLE AND EXPOSED FOR INSPECTION PURPOSES. NEITHER THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR NOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER SHALL BE LIABLE FOR EXPENSES ENTAILED IN THE REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY MATERIAL REWIRED TO ALLOW INSPECTION. 3. ALL POST INSTALLED ANCHORS REQUIRE PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION PER MANUFACTURER REWIREMENTS A. REPORTS: SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL FURNISH TESTING AND INSPECTION REPORTS ON A WEEKLY BASIS TO THE CONTRACTING OFFICER, DESIGNER OF RECORD AND CONTRACTOR INDICATING THE WORK INSPECTED. DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF ME CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION, THEN, IF UNCORRECT TO THE DESIGNER OF RECORD AND CONTRACTING OFFICER. PDF Page 12 _ 8. WHERE HANGERS OR POSTS CONNECT TO TOP OR BOTTOM FLANGE OF 8. FINAL REPORT: SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL SUBMIT A FINAL REPORT HORIZONTAL WIDE -FLANGE BEAMS, FURNISH N8" WEB VERTICAL STATING WHETHER ME WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION WAS, STIFFENER PLATE ON EACH SIDE OF BEAM WEB, CONTINUOUSLY TO ME BEST OF ME INSPECTOR'S KNOWLEDGE, IN CONFORMANCE TO FILLET WELDED TO WEB AND FLANGE, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ME CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND ME APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF ME BUILDING CODE. IL WHERE EQUIPMENT HANGERS ATTACH TO BOTTOM OR TOP BEAM FLANGE, FURNISH MINIMUM 18" STIFFENER PLATE ON EACH SIDE OF 8. ME SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WEB, CANTINA W SLY WELDED TO WEB AND FLANGE. ME MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, OR PROCEDURES STIFFENBEAM BE T ATTACHES BEAM )LUG OF CONSTRUCTION SELECTED BY ME CONTRACTOR OR SAFETY 0 BOTTOM FLANGE AND PLATNGER BOTTOM FLANGE AND CONSISTS OF LUG PLATE IN PLANE OF AND CONSISO F PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS INCIDENT TO ME WORK OF ME LOCATED DIRECTLY BENEATH BEAM WEB. CONTRACTOR. 7. SUBSTITUTION AS A RESULT OF AN INSPECTION SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. INSPECTOR PRESUM ING M GIVE AUTHORITY TO CHANGE PROVISIONS OF ME CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY Y —i ME CONTRACTOR AS A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FOR REVIEW BY ME ) DESIGNER OF RECORD PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF WORK. CP _ �� 8. FIELD OBSERVATIONS BY DESIGNER OF RECORD ARE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR DETERMINING IF CONTRACTOR IS PERFORMING WORK IN �r ? GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH ME DESIGN INTENT CONVEYED IN � CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBSERVATONS DO NOT GUARANTEE —c CONTRACTORS PERFORMANCE AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS SPECIAL INSPECTION OR SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION. B. SPECIAL INSPECTON FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE IN J ACCORDANCE WITH ME QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS OF AISC 380. Stanley Cmultarft .x IIS bn Aumr, Mueoti,., bxa R]B� P& CRY CF KM'A CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA 0 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND LEGEND-1A EGEND - SHEET 2 A AT FULL SIZE ^`^T' —' 0 1 2 3 IN CNLONFD +)a'OD xo. 30]1A]1 RFv. L rPFROWo wNOFFORn AFFR�WP S2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ] Bcm wrl MKwsr SAm) 1 3 a P s e + e B IO GiNEAL 1 1. DESIGN FLOOR LIFE LOADS'. 60 -t AIINFORML�NT} OPO W tPSF .2 UN, G EWARO(IVPfM -!FF 11'-6W 'T JAUFWI2[T TER P.ESS6UPPORT: 11��\\NN��11//��{EMM����,�AM�E 1QI�L4EIMEOH G TfR. GUARD POST MEN, LOPDS. MAX OVR3N I n�MOIE• BNLL FILTER $5(Z ENT PAD RM Mm OP B�NTBTH WALL SEE 1YPFALI1rvTEL 1� I b iAµefMYER PM IMOTE6) S DT spy `P BB1��A))''�— f ` , 1BLTRATE IILL_ZZMMIIJ fO-P y- THE ELC OF THE I�THE SCRUBBERPANEL TO ASSUREMoHLARCLEAR CR BE R CONTROL ARDR LFIG DISTANCE THE SCR SEE SCRUBBER SLTO ASSUREECLFOR NORRLO LOCATION PER THE NEC.HEC. SEE SCRUBBER SHOP ORAWWG6 FOR FINAL LOCAigNOF CONTROL PANEL �- EOUPMEMPADFOROOOR li CON,ROLUNR6UPPORT- (ryPALLMOLMp) -I 9. PER EASTERN IM ELECTRIC RECL A MINIMUM OF IDV CLEARANCE SEETYPIGLEATEFORREOUIREO I MOUND MSTING TRANSFORMER EQUIPMENT. M WMEM PAD DETH ON CRAIG I I I� I I F z -P S -1 e -P b F b PMEDPORCT EONMPAW E 6UPPOST-NETYPFK E ENIERFJREOVIPNEM PAD CETHONMICN GOXCREIE P CONCRETE DOOR ? DOORO NJRiH E � N (iVPM11ACpigN6) b LM . T-Ot? 2-P i41/f t -O i -OL? P -P T -H? -P T-01? -P Y -]I? q D SOR BELT FlBURR PRESS D TYPICAL AGCMG?f C OETH Ox pM4N Cl � k c DR,vCe•M••vu p € M N I6R11 N g IT1'PIRON ROTARY DRUM CKEN THICKENER , 1 LNEW/ tI t ROOM 1MTCNTOPOF NEW SUMP SW rottP OF RUMP �' gUYP g Oo y SO G EMTM09uuv slAOTO 7 �I e ®Y yrp D ALLONSUOPEMEMSTMi dPNPRWDESEN GAME F b e E N PMIERSHLMERE IEW AMEABT COXC Y �) YEET. (TYP F FOR Cl. CT nnN D] CE Cl y I.A. IEDSTNG IERATIN p BVMI.� U, o 6UW—T • p lIM� SO N D ISSUED FOR coxsTRVCTON H M fBOtlMIT b N i/ RRP) GEscRWTON mGN DR.,pvaD NTE NoDC-F.— S ExMTYb FLOOR OR DRAx Imv PM ]I C] o pR B BOLTS BOLTS i-0% R31? 10 -OW F-31? 10 -TY! Y -E14 Stanley Consultants INC 3L Yr ArRnx. Mob. bw 4)e,JiN BELT FILTER PRESS ROOM CRY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS PLAN CE 6ONED AMCxFAIU OSQ. B,E w-ra STRUCTURAL SLAB PLAN AT FM SIZE p WN Cx6C" LT"A"REFD ub aT1m1 �.. - SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY 0 1 i 3 IN APPROVED AYCDAD ^ATE " S3 0 9 E suLE v..Ia 0 1 t 3 1 5 9 T ecm DATE NYDBT36'AI7 1 2 1 4 S e 1 • 0 IO ®MNLnmMP^N" n PDF Pape 13 _ a GENERAL NOTES: L 1. DESIGN FLOOR UNE LOADS'. n AUNIFORM LNELOADATNEW SUMP6F . 140P B. CONCENTRATED WE LOAD AT BELT FILTER PRESS SUPPORT :]]SM, I�BDUAND jiYP Fgt]I' E 1T -BW G TPgK PO6TRNSTALLE GVARO POSTDETALCN I 3 DESIGN EONPMENT LOADS LNO SL I XCCNRPRE66:DDKp OD]R CQYIXIX IINR OH EO NPYEM PID. IB D Np I g11BTEO TRANSFORMERS PADl19TE B1 i.---IglE6 I S PIIONOE lnTEt AT WCT OPEMWC M NORTHWALL SEE T WICAL VNTEL OETIUL ON D'Mt& �N➢TEP M A. wgIp1UTE THE LCG OF Yi OF THE AMORE _ IO -P y CONTROL C EARN GR DIST ER SCRUBBER COMRUBPANEL TO A650PE CLLR FOALING DISTANCE PER THE NEC SEE SCRUBBER SHOPOMWING6 FOR FINK LIX:RTpX OF �-EOUFMENT (IYP CONTROL PANEL PRO FOR WOR CONTROLUNTSUPPORT-BEE TFgKFXTEflgR EQUIPMENT 5 PER EASTERN IOW ELECTRIC IRECI, A MINIMUM OF 10Y CUUMNUICE REQUIRED MOUND EXISTING TRANSFORMER EQUIPMENT. PAID DUAL ON DING IN F O F T -P T -at IT b b m EOUFYENIPADFORgKT E 6UPPoRT-SEE IYPgK E ESTERIDREOUFYEMPAD N OET.LLON.. f • WNDRETE w4a+ETE b a ooaRPAo COON PAD NORiX N O J 0 (/)on n M Y E jMAT:LOCF.TONBI F MUTIyINO (� B-IOMT -P I.Olw -P T -71W -P i -DIG, -P T -Bl? T -P 1? -P 9-]19' (INP) -i n O Ll fXPBLOCNWiFOR BELT FILTER PRESS O O WPPDRTI ).SEE 7R,CAL _ _fff..������llf���SSB O pETABpI Dfq BA O � �� c D S e M �HA�u R�1 I: (1V91 ROTARY DRUM TRO EVER L }FIeIL ROOM 2 MATCH FOP OF NEW N. �' �' IAF V OO OO IEW �' G SUM SLAB TO TOP OF EXISTING SUMP 61ABT0 W4P SUMP 7 qy WYp y 7 O KLWI SLOPE TO MSTING GRAN. PRONDE BENTOW F �I iii M WATERSEALWNEAE MEW AND EMISTW CONCRETE 1]TT) IMEET.(ryP FOR al O O iM1 0 GO p - ` p IFX4nNa p PS TC �F%M1NG ED Oo Z-RQNG C. B SUMP S. • BIS & IA ` i/ 7 jiKl 0 IS D OGELFBIRL. AB R IB QGONI) FA WSCRIPTOX........LD IPVD MTE B O DW FLODR mal ED ANC OR B B0. B T-a6t rl f -al? D -6W f-]1?B-31T 3MIUMMED LA ]A bw AwNs. IN�M, bw RFBI JFM w'w WIMApMllsmm BELT FILTER PRESS ROOM CRY OF IOWA OW WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS PLAN A I A ABICLfORD " _ IW ++. Td STRUCTURAL SLAB PLAN F�i�D REr _ SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY ° 1 s N MINIONS, AMCIPORD SCALE Ire- APPROVED S3 0 mn MFTDBTBD ]M] 1 2 3 4 s L ) 8 1 ro Ei �Murmwa+w M PDF Page 14 1 1 3 1 D 1 . 1 S 1 a 1 ] 1 S S 10 11 EQUIPMENT— G ANCHOR BOLTS M5013TDP I EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FRAMING 13 TOP NOUOXENEO FACE OF SUM EDGE OF NEW CONCRETE IL ANCHOR BOLTS IBV EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER) AONT BENTONITE +'(MIN) NOMSXRINK GROUT AT SLCCKOUT GRADE I �KOCIODLT TO BE FILLEDMTM MATERS SiEREH W E%6nNGSLN ON GRADE NO.VSK(PROOF T AFTER EQUIPMENT 1. ET CONCRETE $LOPE tb'"T NPLACE MEETS EGSTNG TOSUMPPO FROSINED R NOP DF COSTING ` I ; 61RIPvrt ! ^ y F CO b GP.0MATE.AL 3 j b .� PN0130PAEL MSEDAND ^ + ROIrt- NNEEDED F y YPIANCXgi BOLT b TOM, UTBX TOM, VAM C(MIN)EMBED EXISTIXOBUB M i6B,W �' ��AP N 3-P VAPOR WARIER S OFEP f P &OCKOIT (BEYOND) SECTIONB-S4 TYPICAL EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT PAD DETAIL TYPICAL BLOCKOUi DETAIL 6VLE +'•+Nr m MGme ar.rNr uue P=ra EKenxp EXIBTNa E"13TSBM E FWNOATION E .PEMSED IMOEVSPNQCCNCRETE _ TOCP NE0_Fl P V P V CLACHORBOLTS b Ir4AxuaRlwLn _ BEMTp1NPEWATERSEAI 3'P MIEREXW CIXICRETE YFFR EIYTN° ExImNp SUB ON GRIPE i�13EW. T O GRAD ON OY'L0E SEE SEGigN BSN 1OR ADD, xOTES=NENWCONDAE MEETS METING AND AT a OUTS E^•7 O ° LOP41R1iT To ITT T INISHFSFLDOR TW OFNW t V V Sump PIT _ TSLFNNIBLIPSSWR IA A p n :,37 b iox ITuarSau Fi ^ b pNo13 + EX61MO SLAB b :. - M013TSB.W SEE SECTOR BSNigf ALq]ONAL Lj• OR BAR N013 i6WW T R1 NOTES MANORS MW CONCRETE b VAPO0. WWR4R MET. STINTING AND AT SLCCROUT6 6 3'P /r �— Q� v _ � J SECTIONC-S4 SECTIONS SECTION E_54 G &1LE. T=ra m SCALE T.ra O GDALF 1-1a m C P. ..D O STEEL PPE FORDNSULLATgH FEGIX CONCRETE (PAINTED) LLWI i K N .1?'.tII OR WXOM1LnTW N JT N OMVdH] REINFORCING REINFDRCIHG , M CSY)HDOItlX DSON OMD) AT9 MlE NO SURNAME B FACE SARISMKAAE EEDE TOADCOCKA6NEEOEO GROIRFILL LO ACCONOOATE ] -.t FIASXINO ( -N: I B LUT BIDL REOVM THEO MU. FLASHING MnI STAYNLEM. SOL ,\� •hl• DRIP A Stanley Consultants INC l:t T•V 1'N PLIDERM.+3 GROUT t 1M i8 f As NEEDED FNl91EO FLOOR M.=1�IOWA epuANT 15 MTNP ]u'owrmNEsrvE NDS. MMP MIN CITU WASTEWATER I PASSING BACK END "Is"• �...O�MN BELT FILTE SS REPLACEMENT PROJECT aexe XI( -Il RY:IOWA mN BENNp61LEN P310 STRUCTURAL 6 flYP iatq(GLLN LINTEL 1 :1.,.• STRUCTURAL MO I CATION DETAILS A•: (NO ALLOWABLE LINTEL SPAN IS SAH A SEEMED ABICKFORD TYPICAL LINTEL DETAIL TYPICAL POST -INSTALLED GUARDPOST DETAIL AT FULL SIZE 65GI.,.TO SC UE m]1AS WTED $ SLE: 11(('.18' U BCNE'. HINT -ILP 0 1 2 cMFC�SEO REV . 9 DN ARPROUED AMCKFORD �� APPIR D S4 0 0 1 Z 3 A 5 0 ] 8 c mm AUOUSTTSONN7 1 r_________I? { I? F _ I I WE VARIE9A,— COORDMTESVEWD SECTION .. ".1'a m RIGID INHVLLRTpH—� REMOVEMDREPI E • MOTE Stanley Consultants INC iEbwAwnw. Yei+. bin HTHId3M YNNwneM.mm WCRE�SEO FROM W TO Ir MERE CITY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY. IOWA STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION H.T A vNL1BN1Tlr SECTION .. ".1'a m RIGID INHVLLRTpH—� REMOVEMDREPI E TYPICAL BLOCKOUT DETAIL SGLLE: A=1'a i1MClgRIMTB r VBIINOBW BETE MEXHNI MCONCRETE N °MDE NJTEH NNERE XEW CONCRETE MEETH E%KTING AND AT XLOCNDIrtE 1 b b f y� b ON fFA➢F V/iPpq MgNlEq W13 TEB, EW F 1_D SECTIOND-SA ewe r=ra m TYPICAL GUARDPOST DETAIL awe 11?=1'a tL PNCXOR BOVS SECTIONS acALe r. ra m ExIBTINO EYJHPNO SECTIONE-Sl srxe r=ra m ' V 2(111 SFPY19 L �11Y'i� la ,4 lfA ,0\LA 1 IF IE ID • Stanley Consultants INC iEbwAwnw. Yei+. bin HTHId3M YNNwneM.mm CITY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY. IOWA STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION H.T A vNL1BN1Tlr a 9mx1l-r) AMCKPORD CRR D.SCNMM RM RR ORM aFAgrroPADN Exo MWBEMRIOs n pEy. TEEL LKFEL PLHmm AFRRovEo S4 M1EL D 1 ] ] 1 5 8 7 Sam wre Aa,wm]A 3m3 IxOTE WtNLQ`WIFYlIEL 6PAN69al 1H 1D..wnm..oa. TYPICAL LINTEL DETAIL arae 1 vr. ra TYPICAL BLOCKOUT DETAIL SGLLE: A=1'a i1MClgRIMTB r VBIINOBW BETE MEXHNI MCONCRETE N °MDE NJTEH NNERE XEW CONCRETE MEETH E%KTING AND AT XLOCNDIrtE 1 b b f y� b ON fFA➢F V/iPpq MgNlEq W13 TEB, EW F 1_D SECTIOND-SA ewe r=ra m TYPICAL GUARDPOST DETAIL awe 11?=1'a tL PNCXOR BOVS SECTIONS acALe r. ra m ExIBTINO EYJHPNO SECTIONE-Sl srxe r=ra m ' V 2(111 SFPY19 L �11Y'i� la ,4 lfA ,0\LA 1 IF IE ID • Stanley Consultants INC iEbwAwnw. Yei+. bin HTHId3M YNNwneM.mm CITY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY. IOWA STRUCTURAL MODIFICATION DETAILS A AT FULL SIZE i Z J N AMCKPORD CRR D.SCNMM RM RR ORM HwE: ASNOIED CHECKED AMCKFORD AERaoveo 1p, M11001 pEy. AFRRovEo S4 D D 1 ] ] 1 5 8 7 Sam wre Aa,wm]A 3m3 R • 1H 1D..wnm..oa. n PDF Page 15 1 9 B q a T e E 10 11 A GENERAL NOTES: p1 1. CONTRACTOR SMALL FIELOWRIFYDIMENSON$ PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. MIRiX O O G RGwno(TYP1 STAINLESS STEEL TNNLESSSTEEL FLMNING ETC AS NOVIOFOR.ER.HT CONTRV<TIOM Y•�µ�L I1I NG WOR. ANCHOR To OISOUO LArCS VP CCWCREIE Cb1q WGR PER MANUFACTURERS NSTRut1pNS TO FNS UREA \ SECURE HOOD INS LA MR RAFFLE N O MECHANICAL �wvm ROOM ccaYNBDGDRIIOCO CLOMAE fIMHNO r On N � � ppgL WEB �_� I NBYUlE0CM1NG GGGR � -I n HEAD G r- a SWE YI'. Td S ANCXORTO ffiT_,� U TING to �A! A tt I" CONCRETE MASONRY UNR ASO RY UNIT 1- gIGI01N5U WLKK1 �� F E flEMOVEAHDRE PIACE t OOg1 OYDES BY LgUNG FACE SRIC1t AS NEEDED IXffiTWO VERTF.K TOAC.WA's U. EARVK Wqf MA1VFACTfltER FUMA� ANG REINFORCING CURTAN SVSTEY 1HRUMlILFLI8XIN0 r INS GADLMHO VATH STINLESS STEEL I VMXIRVATXY DGORWRTARR MLIP ! BEMINO GCNEHD IXF ILL ON.U FLOCxS REMOVEANDCLEAN� = CUTA9 REV ANINOSFAINL - REOURED _ _ _ Y-VGAINI FROM BflMNARER REMOVAL OF EXISTING STOREFRONT WEEP SLOT BEAIAHT UA SS b ]PIECE SHEET ) C TAA Li CLEARANCE JAMB IVYE META COUANI SETIN ALCOM "•. 4 D L • BWE YY.1'd D LSHEET 4 OOgiWOE80ETOXD 1'�P u1Nrve.I01 BFIAHG6AIE A8� MIN9 IIMLBTFFl MUM. BELT FILTER PRESS ROOM IxaDDDDULATEDcwND EEMECMANru- G � - MEEr1EFA 6LEEVE 'a F LGILND DocrzsOrrGM BCR CaxG1ETE FAD SEAINT W/ r FINIBNORACE ! WHEN IMATIALL ROD GROUT FILL AL OGRES FLOOR PLAN c awe w•rd SILL TYPICAL HVAC DUCT PENETFtATION c -- OVERXFADCOl1Hf WOR ----- — -- - - - _ SCALE'. Wsl THRU EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL DETAIL $TTCM ROOFSW� tY-P LWE 11R-11 0 R FOR CONSTRUCTIW .N IH CC D1P0'YHT 6 BCRIFTNMI WW cXNo APVD WTE ° Stanley Gomdtnts ut b 'Yla M Aw��. Y W IA M'R SA1 JFM CITY Ol� IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT msux PANELspYPI IOWA CITY, IOWA ELEVATION A -At srue D!=rd Al ARCHITECTURAL A DOOR SCHEDULE PLAN AND ELEVATION A OPENING NUMBER TYPE NDTH HEIGHT MATERIAL FIRE RATING GU1t7NIi REMARKS �„,N,ED A°A""AF° _ AT FULL SIZE )NA. 101 Wf CD W 1P p li-P tt-P BFFEL tt.P BTffL FER WMIF/CINER MR YVIIF/LTYER O 1 AEFOR., p Iml REV. 2 3 W A'FRWEO C CHAMBERLIN MP �L A I 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 T S. DATE AUpYSFG¢yNT 1 2 3 4 1 5 S 7 e Y I 1G p -- n PDF Page 16 S >vw ox rxE iECEro wv ss IIGN9. SEE LP w o_ V! �� rn >� v CA <r t rn c rn LE cN cnNn Avw are ultants at nsi neo WASTEWATER CEMENT PROJECT MA :ND- SHEET 1 ' SCALE. NONE NO .F]I pJI REV. M1 0 rl D PDF Page 17 E.ENDWM N .J CA rn i cn ' s m D.TE t5 1nc IR iOJECT IEET 2 xf n�v 2 0 PDF Page 18 p S B IS n GENERAL NOTES: I. EACH BFR W FEED PIK SHALL BE EQUIPPED ANN ] POLYMER WACMN FEED LOCATIONS a POLYMER IN&GNDN FEED SHAM MOULDS HP LONG INURE MI�R A RI PoELWEp WJECi ONRINONEECXMSS CTION NGCMER 6 --. --. -- - r -- IS TOAECOMppNVREFERENCE PRAYING TF PRETERMACHIN. - --- -- -- -- ` _-_ - ----- ---- M,CONTRACTOR SXALLSUPPLYANO INSTALL?TT LONG W DIAMETER FLAMED SPOOL PIECES PER PRESS A TOTAL)AT THE REMAINING POLYMER B INJECTION LOCATIONS. CONNECT W DS ..MODIFY EXISTING POLYMER SOLVTON (ME)SYSTEM TO ROUTE EACH BFP IjL BFP UNIi] ILBFPUHIT-3 TO B'BFPMET IjL SFp LWrt-1 POLYMER FEED TO ITS]INJECTION LOCAMNS. PRONOEATBALLVKYE f GBMMi -- - - fPBdpA CONNECMIN FFEb1A AT EACH INJECTOR LOCATION SOD RMOSTMTUP,AETRTBFPEUPP RW.TIp EROPTIMWTIOXBV BE=SPOOL PIECES AND$PATCHING INLINE MIXER ASSEMBLY -- - LOCATKKNS TO DETERMINE BEST LOfATON IN THE SLUDGE PIPING FOR CPTMALkSTO MMCE °MUX(i $MCL FII SYS FIWE pSSEMBLE6 iO FNOVOE FINpL $Y$IEMCOIFIGURAlpH. F b b�a iC FOLWER ry+ELTION AND j LIT MWH3 VALVE wERION I YP -- � ROLWIR INJECTOR AIIG MWX°VKVERwrtKKN ICII:III � LI L,� �. pOLWER MJECTIOHANO MWN°VALVE PoSROH MAYOOF 9) SEE NOTES ON MAOFBI BEE NOTES ON RYR OF BI SEE NOTES ON TXIB pppVvlN° �7 T1 T11B Dp.UMN° g THIS DRAYNNO ;, NFNBFP _ ij ExlUuST.. - SFE OMMN3 My JUUUIMEGnNICAI ROOM it - ^.: L II - 1 I — -- I POLYMER INJECTION LOCATION I I DAD _ D POLYME TION LOCATION-]- N TOERMTMOd DE��ECTION BELTfILTER PRE66 ROOMPOLYMER FLANGE RTYPI a �v c IIIA <mI ap Al d ° C wXTNMROOM pF➢IACE POLYMER PUMPS ITYPOF1) 0 KNEDFORCONBON.J IN A CM A W.VIM] Iq DESCRIPTION IGBJGAIcNAG ARD MlE B ELECTRICAL I I ® e Stanley Consultants w IISbw prervw, MUF IF ..111.17. w.�.ebrMYmrrXM�bmm Y - CITY OF IOWA CATV WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT BELT FILTER PRESS - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT IOWA CITY' IOWA SCALE 1e'=1d BELT FILTER PRESS -GENERAL A ARRANGEMENT A DEBONED J.BRIDY AT FULL SIM I.A. OECNMm BCALF'. 1H° T -O" CXECMED D.MATNW MO ]t11W1 REV. 0 1 2C. w MfaOYED JM1MY ��� ArPnwEO M3 0 O 1 a 9 4 s e % BL9I w,E MJGIJBTxmI, I 2 a N E 5 7 a B ID Onrnm�AA�n II PDF Page 19 1 �-M z 3 a s s + Fs B M4 G BOTTOM ROOF SUH pf uoxrirvvl FPfiAIA FPbA'1A Fi8$iq F F F_ _ rp IBHEO FL00R E ..,.I 4.• . O_ Irn 'n SECTION A -M4 n n CA D SGLE B'B'=1'4 MB wrn a A U ......._....� .........___..___ —_ B0r10MR0%S' B tJ V c ..........''. D C O. Rconsrnucnox n DM s o4mmr FW �FIDSGNICHMII wlE L41fl'FYS� CONBIGIA ',,.. Q -, Stanley Consultants .K G o FINISHED FL00R� __—_—_ zzs wa. Awnw. Moraine, n1137813]61 :naw.eener�+wmm.wm OCP V —_-.__-- CFF, OF IOWA CR, WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CITY. IOWA BELT FILTER PRESS - SECTIONS A SECTION &M4 A SCALE NV=1'1r M3 DESGMED uealar AT FULL SIZE DRAWN G.scxMIDT scut. BIS'=7'-0' 0 2 9 W GnEcl(EG ..T. S xG. 'mh 0J1 REV. APPRGMED J.6RI 1 ��� AnRRovtO Ido O 0 1 2 9 4 5 P i Bpn DAit wcusra0 i%z 1 z 3 4 s s 7 e 1 �-M PDF Page 20 I 1 ] 1 9 1 4 15 B1 i 1 5 B 10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ' GENERAL NOTES: 1 r 1. PER EASTERN NNV ELECTRIC (REG), A MINIMUM OF 190 CLEARANCE REQUIRED MOUND ilT5TING TRANSFORMER EOVIPMENT. 0 O �NOTEI 10-P ITv,uLuroLxD) F 0 DI, L_. ---- RELOCATED EASTINGUNRHEATERS,G4sPIPWG, T E COMPRESSED AIR PIPING, DOMESTIC WATER, SODIUM RE TE BASTING UNIT XYPOLHLORITE LIP I NL, AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES XFATE NEWLC .N. TO ACCOMADATE NEW ODOR CONTROL DUCT REUSE MGOIFY NO PIPING TO REPLACE EPSnNO NO FEE REPLACE N PIPING SHALL BE ROOM PIPING 1. BELTCBSTWRX E E%ISTING FLUE LOCATIONS. RECONNECT HEATER. JFILTER f CONTRACTORJACKTA SEAL µY PENETRATICN OF CSST JPCKET. N c: —A CDP A •. 1?• M3 ---- EAST EXIST. FIST FIFA T. EXISTIT I —0 A V r ' r 1Te NOGG -1 531 ]RI CFM H]CFM MIT $G1 IS]LFM $G1 1�OFM SG, SG1 mCFM _ 1195 FEN — , � .FS I z. NO D E• f IDER NO A— .. :, ♦AAAA �, • . 11 EW5 S. MARE61 P• MNR ' 1M CAN _� 1 O T V ED -1 fAW]CFM I u v a• �. ..v v..�._ ... C � �• l �_ :.. z. x... 1P• q d`I EYSnxw. iPBAN x61 BUT FMb 1•WE6C1 TL F%M1A - _ .-- __ _... E61 �CFCMINSTAMADON 100F.RIAOUTETOALLOW _ f1 E6CF1 OF aoox CONTROL Doti. - 1N0CFN M II AAAA IL MNB A I I . FOR CONSTRUCIKKI JB NI JB REROUTE NO. CESC URTON OSGN CHAFROWTE HINSAVO TO MISS 0 ONTROL DUCT. •'µx _ _ r 1... I J u B - Stanley Consultants »K pSlmva Avenue, M—EA owa52751-S7Sf vwxabney[omulmed.mm C"FILTER FBNN '\/MIIII/�/ ff1MI\/�xxw Exw.DaT FAN FBAN I\j�I1F/�/YI1Cj\('I FB.bJA FP.YIIA BELT PRESS REPLACEMENTTER CT '1l ON ROOF ITYP FORA) 1l II \ IOWA CfIY.IOWA I T BELT FILTER PRESS - HVAC PLAN CESSH JBbJENN4MP SCALE: ATII IxeAwN MIDI $ BELT FILTER PRESS • HVAC PLAN S W CXECMEO lx ON NO m]1W1 REV. "PPRO'�D o Bcm wre DAYGL NSB G SCALE: 11T H 2 9�4 5 BTT I x s • sI 1 1 7 e 1 1 m LOvnear:o,w+LRn I x 3 . B s r _____________________________ ______ ------------------------------------------------------------- GENERAL NOTE IIS m 1. BE P EASTERN IOW E C""' 1 1 GCLEA..E PEOUREO AROUND OUTING TRANS O ENT. _ I 1017 G SEP 19 PM 2: 16 r—NOTE, P P CITY CLERK D � � IOWA CITY. 1010 00 0o I xoRTM -- RELOCATED E45TNO UNR HEATERS, DAR F PING, E E COMFRECCEO NR PI PRO. DOMESTIC YWTER ECO EA RELOGtEFTLSTNGVNR HVFOCMORITE FFINO, AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES HEATER TO NEW LCLATGN. REPNCF E%RTNGXGPME rOACCOFVDATE NEW OCORCONfROLDUCTRIBI MODIFY EAR-TING PIPING TO EPUSTING FLUE LOUTgN& FEE... FE, VNG XEAiFp. N BELT FR.TER ROOM. PFND SINLL BE CUT ARM.MCFFTAS SFECFML, CONTMLTOR8 REAL ANY PEMFTMTIOM R CUT YGXET. 7 12. NO, __.-- - FA6E Vl. Ip 86, -- 5G1 B - STM B7 1YOCf51 J9J CF.. EACT. EAST. 66, 86, 1%DLM ISi. ETIC1. SG1 — L4, .9C LfM C1M ^I?OLFM 11395 NG vM- NO A BE I P.MB TIMR 1.IMT E61 -I ItlJRM EG1 I itlJCFM „DEFINE li ,.-.� Ii P1EP ,. Atl CGM If r � �� i I #• 111111 I . � I1'� I. G S. NIYJ Imo. • P_�7._ � LTI 0• i L Z paTMO �. REPwGETO." F: fWBSR EC1 EGI - FVIRfA %IRM O 9i1 ._....-...._... NEWOFM F -.. INSTAUATNXR OOORCprtROLwCT. ED•1 IDIICFM 1W CFM WECFM I I ISWEO FOR =A"D RE0.0UTE FJUSIIW 1-�B ^ D CONSIHUC1pN NO. OEeCRNTpN o MYe N1O NW0.M . ARN t _ ' - li ANNE ODORwxma ouch I - -— Stanley Consultants�w- - -- - —_� -- - _ — ?E bw Mlv.Meui�.b..BilS,•1161 - -- �� Cm OP IOWA Cm WASTEWATER EEAMUSi FAR ® ® F®IA REPLACEMENT--RESS PROJECT BELT FlLTERP�AC ONROOF FOR � Im OW 1I" _ BELT FILTER PRESS -HVAC PLAN A DEEgNEO JBP'T)1W1P AT RILL SIZE auwN anLxxor ncn[: ta•=1'-0• CNECRED AIM.Tw xD, ilMEN RFv. 1`BCWM, EP BELT FILTER PRESS •HVAC PLAN =—r—�� AF,,NMEp ASPRovEo AUIn16TA, AIT MB G S E. IWmI'P 0 1 2 2 4 S S Z Ban DATE 2 S 4 s S r S i ,D ron•+nme.,r'v ,1 2 ] . ] B 1 9 ID e�ILED B 2011 SEP 19 PH 2: 17 D B07NROOF Saa,4�ITY CLERK MY, IOWA F E61 IIDCFN 10.1 im CiN Fla F IM1 N P. FP@JIA 4U FPIdOA I FPPA34 li S EE -._ __. TOCRWSREDROOR� SECTION A-M/ SCALE'. W=i'-0' MS D D A IB BOIIOMROO IPM3s + c f 1f. IN' Iw Ey1 EO,i O D MMIED FOR CCN51RDLlON Jp IN .9 SAM) XD. DEeCPIPLIOX OeOX LXAO AWD 8 ' 1NCFM IiW CFM B 4�COHGMA t N Stanley Consultants INC D �] I T6bw. Ar�.�.MeNn, b.. StRIJl81 "`�""m'�1°"' ao LFN _. �J __rocf_INISNEDFLODR CITY WASTEWATER CLTERPR -- --- - SS BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA IOWA SECTION & W SCALE:3C=1'�l MB BELT FILTER PRESS - A HVAC SECTIONS A LEWNEn A. ATRA1SIff DRAvx Dsclsmr euaE. 3B'-Td D 1 Y 3 INcx[clPn wNEmx NO. W'ml REv. AFwwED +BDYEXRYV i $ AFPR D D 1 3 3. S B T a. w1E Auwmmmn M7 0 PDF Page 21 ACCESSORIES A PE OVD. UOCNABL UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT M&ITCH WTH PREFER NEW ENCLOULURE FOR AREA INSTALLED NOTES I PROVDE DO STCM ROOF CUR B ACAPTE R FOR FAN TO CONNECT TO METRIC FOOF CURB NOTE: SUPPORTS AT 1D4K MAIUMUM SPACING, EXTERIOR DUCT SUPPORT DETAIL NO SCALE RAN PIPIN DIRT LED FPN(Ef5M 80XENLE TYPICAL GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATER DETAIL SCUNE'. NONE PDF Page 22 MV441ADW CONTROL MEL AS FOULOWL INTEELOCKEDIVOTH AHU-EBCA AND DIIALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY, UPON SIGNAL FROM ANOURC01A SMOKE DUCT DI EA-LAUST ME SHALL STOP B. MEN DOOR CONTROLSYBTEM IS OlERATIONALAS INDICATED 9YS.. FROM DOOR CONTROLSYSTEM COCSYSTEMSIVLLSTOPF4QdN&F93NAF9iAli ANOF9 k ONUSAIASXALLREMAIN IN OPERATIIXI. EVMVST FNIBSXPLLRESiMT Wr1EX ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IS NOT OPERATIONAL TEST STATION UNIT HEATER rN PRESSUREAND T MR NATURE INOLLFR pMN VKVE WINWNPT HOSE FITTING ADAPTER TYPICAL HOT WATER UNIT HEATER PIPING DETAIL SCALE . NGNE AT FULL SIZE R. 0 1 29 IN HE. AP PPROV D 1 2 3 4 5 6 ] 8 O DATE_ V J C7 y qn. n� 4 cn �rn s p PDF Page 24 •• -y Mail,� •✓1 � ` ' �r�`r � illi � L� � {•► u Iii •,� d� ONE �I�� �•�Fill �• i1� II.11111,11*,; . - II�II■.■IU�II-�' ul I� � t x > + � mom GENERAL NOTES: LL J. 1. NSLNL SLLVPGm 81F1DN 5CE VPIIE/Jl.. ( OFT Z NSTµ MVFGEO gSCNNRGE SDE PLOO VILYE OFA G O / 2011 SEP 19 PM 2: 17 MID CITY CLERK IOWA CITY, 10.14A no xDEt E\\ s e c ` / F Eno (NOT ALL i NDre .� i PIPING E _ SHOWN) E / a \ � 1 D � 0 y L e 3-DIMENSIONAL VIEW OF NEW PUMPS 00 e e DIGESTER BUILDING 8600 BASEMENT PLAN S E IW=Tff c c r� o Dsu Fdx OOHSTRIICIDN +D w .e MT oEscnvsrox Dnox cxw nvx° wTc S FYJSTWG PVING mN S !1 SIICIpN LEYEI _—_—_ ------ vd-I — � Stanley Consultants 9�. ��SUO1pX IEVEl �/ S-1 yf _—_—_ l�9UCiN1N LEVEL y.11'f_—_ � Lf �� i � vs nw. nv...r, mw�w.b.nszstam. xinr.NvbRwi.�ibN CITY OF OWA CITY WASTEWATER k_ �&$FNENT FLOOR — BELT FILTER REPLACEMENT PROJECT CITY, IOWA 8N9EMFNx TLOgI ..-IOWA ..WENTFLOOR 8.91R.: ... -8 +..-4 " .: ,,. DIGESTER BUILDING MECHANICAL SECTION A -M70 SECTION 84MO SECTION C-WQ PLAN AND SECTIONS A SCU Yf=IW MID SCNE:Yf•I'd MIO SCAEYC-V0 MID OESDNEO V AT FULLSI2 o.scxwDT ecus Aaintlicetetl ..C. 0 1 CHEO 2 9 N cxEcun Dxr,raNs xo. aFtao+ nEv. 0 9 z O 4 PsvnovEo +e°wr PPMWFD S e T eon D,, NiGucrox xWr M10 0 t z 3 4 5 e r s s to D.�+.��..•_.�. n PDF Page 25 t ] 1 ] 1 . 8 B i e B1 ID ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL PLANS ELECTRICAL NOTES: FEWPRMurvaNCL, ® NSE POWER PLANS LIGHTING PLANS SITE PLANS I. NOTE PULL 6 W IL YMBS AND ABBRERIAMN. SHOWN ON THIS FEW.CL.INCU �� LEGEND WY NOi AR£M d MW MM SEL OF OINGS R . UING, PRIMARY OR SECONDARY —A� ME0.µ40YERLMp CONDUIT TURNING DOWN C COHpPi. EXPOSED 2LE STRONG FIRE STOPPING MOUND FLOORSRACEWAYS OR G ---- HEW EOUIPMFM ENCLOSURE M%EO CAPACITOR FLUORESCENT FIXTURE TILE UL OED REST WELLS. ANDRE G --- EXISTING EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE LE VL LISTED FIRESTOP SYSTEMS, TXOMPBAHO BETTSOR MEW LOIC WTERLCCK O" LONq]TTLRNING UP ------ LOXp: T EMBEDDED OR IOSCORZPIMANY OROUNO EOVAL. MTTEMEB EP • ELECTRICAL SEC OAV -----K----- IREY INTERLOCK ______ IS ELECTRICAL SECONDARY 8'YERipAT1IXi OF pIMEHSpN$IN THE FIELD SMALL RE NE dWNGR'•u [ RLURESCENT FIpVRE NOR.. C...T11E CONTRACTOR FOR DENAlXN18 Po•FIBER lilt pURNGCd61RUElICN. -U IM`ERORWM]f.OWINIGTpNSCCbNi � � fiPMKOAY EMERGENCY C•LCYINMCATONS , I 11 TRANGRORYERRMNIF6%CATE6 O SIR WMING ROD T•TELEPHONE . ELECTRICAL UYTOT ORAµtXd ARE PARTIALLY LFA PRMARV\0.T/{£ 1. DCATER - II WNOENUESTOR DMGRAMMATIC. REFER TO ARCNITECTURAI STRUCTURAL . L9JJ _ 6RELgiOVRV W.TAGE IFMVA CONpBT�IHUXG1AiMXME. N PLACE MECRANKALANO NVACDRAWNGSFORGUCANCEON rrm1gNA'1 I PRESFMS %Ni FA MPXOOJRO HIMNGWCffiCEM FIXTURE DIMENSLONS, CEIUNG HEIGM5. DOOR SWNG5, RWM 1N/ MpLNE551WLE%VSE THREE O UURkNG M07ECTION AIR TERMINAL FINISHES bTRUCTURALANDAACNITEETURALGETNLS ICAT. PHASE IF HOTINDGI ASD W ADJUSTARE SPEED ALE NIF—NL- HGTTMCFD PIPE LOCATIONS OF DUCTS, PIPES AHO STRUCTURAL STEEL INSTALL MIMINGWDESCEM 11 -URE THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WITHOUT INTERFERING WITH ptJdO DUCTS. PIPES, STRUCTURAL BTEELOR OTHER SYSTEMS, TRAR'SFCPMELMOE CONNECTED CIRCUIT CCNSISTNG OF MI] JWALL MO{IHIEO ❑ DUCTS. LOCATELISHTIHO FIXTURES SYMMETRICALLY IN PROPER i]I fO 1]I PoTENTMLTRAEURD RMER WIN FUSES (UNGROUNDED) CONOLGTCRSIX I-CWWIT. LCVC FN RELATING T RINGLET AREAS EKCEPT MERE DMENSUMED ON PALMER NDGTES DUUNT Y, HOT SLASH lX TES NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR F �SXNMWIMGj VY1AJIHDGTE6 DELL OBERNOTED OF MOIRE ALL CRC, ®� RAT CERN M ❑ F PIMMRYISECdp1 INDICAB �L 1R/JA4FMMER�WYECMNECIFD 9WLCdMSi OTHERARE ALWWI WINGS OR LOCATED ON REFLECTED COUNIG PVNS y CE0.MGMWNIED ELECTRICAL YANN0.E S. RACEWAYS ANDD LLS11PPdRSPd BWRSENTSINTERS. tlyly. (GRWNpEO) FEA EVI RAL MALAYS ANOOMTUREELECTRICAL SAGOWYEM YMEREVER 1yWA=MEBVIIDIHG STRWNRERNOL WIVANE FOR pREET WRMERiRICATES A EdLZG1 WALL LgIXIEO MWNTIN(i. SHOWN D...)lES SUGAPR NOT TRW14dME0.-0ELTA COXXECIED (D SHWMIG SECONDARY INDICATES S. SHORTCON PTBRANCRMANERBTO RECEPTACLES CIRCUIT OF PRIMARY SECWOWV CURRENT RATIO FACTORY Ai NINELEp MACHINE d RE- O �� HOME RUX iO PANEL �F F� SHORT PROWL PERMANENTLY SPLICED TO THE CIRCUIT ID EQUIPMENT IRO. INDICATES ESTIMATEDHI �ry COHWEi00.5. LJ EMERGE OPERATT 1 JO JUNCTION BOX GTIEflYOPEPATEp T MOUMGROUPED DEMES RE VOLTAGE EOMNVOVXGANG OSED ONE DIAGRAM, I GRAS IFgGCTEOd OIIE BOX USE PMTRIONS WHERE VOLTAGE BETWEEN EXPOSED O ONE pAMNId MOOR ROOLE IRAVTEp IMPMT80FADAGEM6MATCHESFXCEEDSfCVOLT6 WMENG' ME �:l 0. XVAE COITROLSAND VSSOCNIED VARMG SNALLBE N GRREM TRANSFORMER LMRWrt. CWRONATEWNMECWWIGLCOMRACTOR INpCATIMi LWNTS O UOITNGRVEL �♦ SNRCX B. PROVIDE BEkEO FITTINGS FOR CONDUITS EXTE0.IXGANO O 9-NNEE WAY LEAVIXGFLVMU DOUSCSSIFIEDAREAS iIiTINGS SRLLL BE E AffTFR_y PONE0.PgHEL AP WEATHERPROOF PLACED JUST BEFORE ENTERING ANC/OR JUST AFTER LEAVING E WP-WFANERPRWF PLACEDIE ST GROUNDBEFO .L AMMETER %P-EXPlO51W PROOF CURREN fORANSFOLT H6d o-1 DISCONNECT BNRUI tO CONTRACTAULOR REFMINE REMTpSIBL FOR GOURING CONSTRUCTOR CLP REM iRPH6FORMER f- FREQUENCYSISTERCONTRACTOR RITUAL THE O ONSIBIERTOSTAOHATIONOf qt4 pLGWAiT METER WVRKPHKINGN1TN THE ONNER PRIOR TO6TAER� MMl pLGWATT Ip110. METER LF FVSEDOBCdRECi AYRd COM6TRVLTOH (] HERE CONDUIT AND WRING IMMINNOT BEEN �N PRO �4' BREV{ERBREARER R MJIBFARIL9AF INpCAIEfi 1I. DMNIWS ME ARRAHOE MEMCIRIUOROVTING K_11111X0 OR n MMP MLOVATT HOUR IEIFA CORd ®A 1pJYF FRNENEE ARO L.I.ER RN DFAWU'REOSIFA STARTER �N1EE�� 1NMT TRP SETTING LHON RIMCTORSDLSCBRRTONI4$ NOOELEAT ICF- POKER FACTd MEIER PT- RUNNING TIME METER ® COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER OENEMLLY ACCEPTED WOO PRACIeLe�µO E 6YNCROSCCPE COMMUNICATIONS PLANS REOUIRIDE1L1 �,r(1?�l1�/q� p• =TINGSAITCMNONFUUG V- VOLTMETER A PROVIDE AOORIpiAL ERATIF6jf,ER NEC SC101R�R5. (•IRpGTE6SWrtCMNG) MAHygRMER V FA FlPE MPAM PANEL _ R TPAMSWpERy B. LIONTINOAXD RECEPTACLE UALLBEPI}.- D ® CFNIRCLLFA CONOpT. -G =' M WRREMi RRENARMBNL L. PRONpE.I.AWGCOOUNCL. 0rl g ' MLQYATE C MOCK 1YJIUµ %VJ6TAlKW �l I�/I 1f BOlIE5 W6iNLFD WTD00R$SMALLRIK�i1 5 65 IBOAGAESEAUGHNTFORATIONI E0 I PLTAGE Yd ICN INdCAlAV3CMLF STEEL]IB :;��O ('IIdGTE85HREX Fp.) S WLTVOE Spp_� •• R �• SG- SIGNAL CONVENER O PHOTDEIFCTRIC CELL 1fi BY SCHEMATIC AND DMO ORAWNOB� WRING OYAVWLWLLSTATCH 14 STRUCTURAL STRUT SUPPORTS SHALL BE 6TANLE55-STEEL T O dMLE iN RELAY. PdWUONG ON YWTCHING WSMW ON TYPE 3STNKLIES T EFAIRLESS LMMLWAREELT Bj DDROD WD -J\ DUWWTNR U0.CUR BRFAIFP S BVNL FJIECKREUV ❑p FLECMIL OOCMOPERER NEBLFMSUA 15 f1ELO DEVICES SIYLLL HAVE WRITE OVER 8 LACK NAMEPLATES EI NI]OIMTIE SY NRCMIIR INDICATING DEVOE INSTALLED. NAMEPLATE SMALL INCLUDE OENCE NAMEEQUIPMENTID VOLTAGE SOURCE AND, UIT NUMBER AS 3F- UNDENWLTNRE RELAY p AECEmIC1E6 INDICATED ON THE ELECTRICAL ONLARE O0.R PANEL SCHEDULE ^ LANNUNCIATOR -V MO• 1EAT DETECTOR NAMEPLATES SINAL BE SECURELY FASTENED WITH C W- REVERSE POWER RELAY 1 -SHARE R-RATE'O'PI6E PERMPNENiVO1E61VE. C DRAW ON TYPE 3 -TRIPLE% F-FDEO EIREUITBREAKER RIN IME OVERCURRENT RELAY ..OLMOPLEX WITH INSTANipNE0U5 S-SNRTCM ] OOTLET Yp-WATERPROOF 8 SMOME DETECTOR.'• IZI MIMWITHNO TAME AXEflRCCSRREXTREUV %P pPROSIOHPL(OCF PI . COMMON, ^ .1 UNDER FIEWENEYAMER U-VNCERFLOOi VOLTAGE RELAY SUPDA DRUMMOUT GROI BREAIEP q O DICT DETECTOR SS GOVERNOR HL AUTOMATIC TRANSFER AS. •� RANGE WTIEi V W VOLTAGE REGULATOR FLOOR OUTLET TEL MIEPMONEPAXEL IWALLI M U PAR FCW£R 1 ❑ W VANOWER FACTOR CONTROLLER ® N0. DEBERIDTpN GBON CHAPVO WTE GHOST BREAKER BS IFRORTFI(0.YRCdTRMLER ® LT'd iSVO,LET zs lEtE➢NORE WALL WiIET B COIBIN11pNY]TpT 6TMIFA SWITd.•• TETEPHOHERWROUT1I B LORIS .CCMKTCN /5. AMMETER SELECTd ® •.S]J WTFT �A INpGTE55RE CS CIRCUIT BREAIORCWTRM-�Iri1rwx FVNR- FDLLVOLTAGE NOWREVERSIXG ES- EMEAOEXCYATOP yy yy yy yy SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY O CILTXGMOUMEDILPFAKER Stanley Consultants Mc glk FVR-ipLVCLTAGE=NSING FS FUELSEIECTd FVT6-TNA 6PEE0 T35 bV.v Avenin. Mueu IVP bw.5]]613)61 C -COMPACTOR OS GWERTpRPNSEUTAER IuT SPORTING XAA SWITCH IeII/ pRECTOHAL $PGI(E0. AMNeymWdin wm 56-EJEETMCNSO TSTANT M HWD0FFAUTO J LLEBdE1M005 FOR SPECIFIC TYPES LJV wn 1¢SLUCTOR SM1Id. FOR TYPE O rond 2MSELECTOR SWTLH CRL' OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER BEECOMTKKSYNGNATIL SEE SCI 101 SPECIFIC TYPES IV :I/I M.DNSCTpNN$FEWER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT VIJV IOWA CRY. IOWA WCANT d 1ON-fTYR INS CORRIN SCHEMATIC HANYOEE FlLTER S. OFF. A ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND SE SYXCHROMTNG SHEET I i' VS VOLTMETER SELECTOR LS LIMOS ITCH GEBpNED JOWN ATFU11SIIE DRAWN DBCNYIN SCALS. MANE O 1 2 9 IN HEDGES LIXpUYNIC. TIS qLy. F11 4ITT-I APPRWED APPROVED LIMiWAi 0 1 z z e 5 8 r BDII GTE NpuSrxivn E1 0 1 2 ] . s S T e e m E9emwnvaMnn 11 PDF Page 26 11 ] 1 J 1 4 6 18 ) 8 1 B 1 1° 1 11 ELECTRICAL MOTOR AND CONTROL SCHEMATICS WIRINGo— NORFPRIIEL 4]VREKrW1 .TO.CYOFEN NFRI BNIrCN CLO6ES ON R191NOiEMPEMMiE ---- FIELDWRING XIMiMNLYCLOJE°)EMFERARMEPCIVA]ED 0 W wHENS ON .1. L..rL..rE..2� Xyyn M P4VYDR'.IER� ¢P0614EOSMRCl1 xDRMMLYGPEN ESRD 6PEEO 6W1rcN rRFN NJRYI.LLvcwsEO GNETCC WI MAGXE]ICCORE FOOT SMrfN /yV/y� MOBE6 BY FWi FRESWRE ' , , ' r CON]IEI, LTR.V 9FgtlER A l fOOi WBYF REIB BYFMTPIESSIgIE V 6pLExaO VAUE FLOW SWR CX O OP OC CL REUY. I.gidi LO60N INCRFIBNp iLQN 6TATER.0. OR CIXITKTpi FLOW 6W?CN CFENS W INLRE/. .FLOW NCIIEWLVOPEH IN°.1 CONFKT �y (1 NORWILVCw DINCICMTI �L.� - 1 - MyyNyLT°FENCIXRF.CTCL°SE6-R- A CCUVIFTERCCEENEAGILE° FUSE D— WRIMLLVCw8E000NTKT OPIN80X WOUNDCCNNECTION PMEDEUVM RCOLENEROtED. E E Lp ED p1 R IIpC.RNp RwiIMXi ERG GOA. TYE CEUV qI DE{IERGISFD COR. ON IETER NPM)E6 OOR6 ERE XVCw8E°CExB.R M dMLE PhMOTOR P.DEUYqiD{MEROVEDOUL WTCRCOMROCFNMRTERMRWL 01 ... NECT°RTP^i ESWRCN Q FREDPMFLMWIFML NORI YOPEN MCMENTg CMW 0 IXgNp10L CENCE RRMINLL 404X°FUSNBVR—TCN6PRING �. p CPE N NUMBER OF ELECTFKC COMKTS ON .1..JNONN ON Q KCENCL°6VREr RMIFNL 0 C 4O, SCHEMnTIC NORNW YCLOBw WMEMMYCIRCUM BPPoMi CFOM �R NOTES. NUMBER OFELFCTR d1S NBNO4NWCON aCOMKIb BGNEWTIC Ory CA 1. I1LSYlI...,NRBREVMTgIL5FH.ONTNIBIEGEN° WY WLIPPEM OY MI66Ei CF diAVGXG6 " �'f� TIREE POSRILW CIXITKTS 1 CLOSED. SE., ON 1 KR Of IAdUTE°BY'X.NWON \%� �N) SNA SHEOWN ON fAMROLWHEWTMFIr �\ O!� 101K RFY°iE MO PodlICN6EIECTOR 6NTltx NKi600JEDN FWIICN L � MJUTFOBV'X.N MON _ � 6N°WX G1CttRRp 6C11E1M~iITCCN Q` _p 0_ O% SW.\V dMICM 0 NMIFD RMDON .q 0 Y Wd 7 b� W LEBCRATRIX p6tll 01110 /AVD MTE IM WNRCN NGRMALLvuos6DcpxrKr C°FITKT OPENS NNENKTWTE° • B B �`D— UMIi 6WrtCN xORMALLYOPEN COMKi CgITKTOO6Es WHEN PCNRIED Stanley Cmultarft w- \� 1%Ii— OPEN LEVEL --M6 B NCL .ONRId1GLEE IIBb Prenw Muu eMaEP613]b WNeFmrYJYNa mm CRY OF IOWA CITY WASTEWATER NJRM4Lr cL°8E°LEVFI KTHIFD BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT WMrcnpPExsaN RMRq IEVEL IOWA CRY, IOWA NORM Y C4EN PRE65NE OR V. UMC EMTEO BYATGI CLOMS ON NCRU&M PRESMRE ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND A SHEET2 A NAMN1Y 0.05E..°FPEJ&ME qi °EBGXFD JOIYN VKWY °FEWLE°b1MCN0£N6 O601YDT 6CNE NOWAT qI NPEA4NG PAE64UREORANN RALSlE CNECRO LbORAM W. Y1101 REV i 0 1 Z .' N MPROVEO LIN{#Ill 0 1 ] 9 4 B B ] 6.1 wTE ulDusr—��> 1 2 J a 6 a 7 e J to YORorr<=•eNR 11 -------------------------------------------------------- ]BL` BETERING SM, .1O %L` MCC -O33 ]CR BFPRCVM HL NR € ACL 4 EMIMV8T HAN FIYW MR PEM)HOul N. IMM \ g Z. & d R R Y ) RPOB / MCCB / MCCB / � ) MCCB ) LBYB ) YCCB ) MCCB I- - - - -bD L-4---*XOTEA - -- 6 NOtEA A B C D E F I 2 ] A B 1 ] A YCC-031 BETERING PREMA, .1O FPME MCC -O33 METERING BFPRCVM .A € Y 4 EMIMV8T HAN FIYW MR PEM)HOul N. IMM \ g RRFPJX & d R R Y ) RPOB e � e PARIS. FROMA SGyiPVONRMF NC.1 A ML MCC—SP1 ELECTRI A ONE—LINE DIAGRAM A B C D E F I 2 ] A B 1 ] A YCC-031 BETERING PREMA, .1O FPME MCC -O33 METERING BFPRCVM .A NII1 EMIMV8T HAN FIYW MR PEM)HOul N. IMM \ Rf1ii-J1 RRFPJX FBFFPP-J1 Ell LGEOPOP YCP ) RPOB —6 PARIS. FROMA SGyiPVONRMF NC.1 A ML W31I FA PUMP EPME pMS R XroFYw %roi4JR MV)MA xtulx6 ImWBP N yW®iWvREXmKAXACOA =O EFRv10E AL OLT FKRRFEA TNET, M0A P01 GRCVIT .M MPP PAN FFEAn M@B PoiFIAFR FBMA fAMFffiM Mull FE313A BPIDE FgYTANt �) EXHAl PAR YEhAI YLCJPI FSA UR PMF3 EAWNTFAM El NIV MIII BFP 0.WY PElYTM1L EPfDE p2LA C 611 SUMP PUMP OYhA FMyA EpWRTFMI FEXTR2 FSB9A MCC—SP1 ELEVATIDN MCC—SP2 ELEVATION 8\ A E C O DRY PC �PRCCE. UR Bl E \VKYEB Jn P Ngli -------------------------------------------- 'A1 8\ F 3A tlL -. \ 1 Y@ I MCP ) YCP ) I ICLB T-T 9m, 9m, Dmf MCS, -S°2 LLUTPI,'AL ONE—LIVE NVcAv wga PDF Page 27 GENERAL NOTES: I. LOCAL DUCOXNECT M PROW EDMTM FM' YMR BEE pUWIXG W 3. SEE CNAl MACXINE CIM PARYgUNNG ]AI 1. FOR RRMNATIWB. O ]. PflONOEAND n)INLET(DOMELTRIC 72) AND ANAYAWRY CONTACT PAIR (DSMUXI AROMAR(HANDIS IREN. 01&AI OI 3. BOX fix>JR13.W° l4Tl)A, CACCEfi60RYUMIX,.E(HµDIE CON. ON]0 E1II0% OBX]]61.T.TH EMANAP OBIT OF THE XPD TO. HUT CON TACT;. BEC ONNECTED PRESSEREBLEORCF M VFDTO6MIT E F MEPLUGCXOU 5POILEO. RE-ROVTEERE 56YRESMATCH ORDINAMIRING ONRIER THE (.N OT IH THE BOTTOM OF THE BOR COORDINATE PATH CM1ER (Beaux oun l POLYMER PUMP ME B BE REPLACED, PROMM ALIEN WADIFY PRONAFRFIFX WD. COORDNATEMRXpMERFORVEDMOORANDOPTIONS &PROVAEN 011AWGCONWLTMSFROMTIEMEfi REBMRCNONTLE POLYMER PUMP TO THE WD. &PRONOE MAMP (EPO) EQUIPMENT PROTECTION D.C. BRFN(ER FOR THE HEAT TRACE CIRCUIT 7, All MAMEPLATEG W MCC BVCRETS WTCNNO DE64RIPT*N ON ELECTRICAL OXE.E F O CA —IC) Cfl fir- n. m � m _ E.A IE IC B Stanley Cmsuharrts w - RE lows Avenue. MuoYnA bwv 53761G7N CITY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FlLTER PRESS REPLACEPAEM PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA ELECTRICAL ONE -LINES A OEBIGNEO JGAVIN AT FULL SIZE UNA. 0SCHMIDT ecuE NOAE 0 1 2 ] N CHECXED LPOPHAM ND. m71m1 REv. AXPROVED LINGMM r1TITm1 APPXUXEO E3 0 AUOIRI]q 0 1 z ] A s 0 r eATE BOBB ]NT X Ile `LAelwe.mNA.Nne 11 PDF Page 28 f B 1 f--- _________-- ' GENERAL NOTES: 1. COORDINATE BELT FILTER PRESS FIELD CCNWIT RWTWO ANDAIMNO I REOUIREMEHTSYNTX CHAPTER MACHINE COMPAXTORAYNNOS. 0 i ]]0M-1 ONE OAOtOXM UNFA �IpTF 13 p Y I ] NE OMWING E]FOR pN'A CrtTNWIp EIECTRILH OHEyNES. ALLAROIDI ]NEW FMNAVSi1gODOX ROCFMWNIEOON EYJ]TNG LURE SCRUNER CON FIXL I HFAT TRACE FOR BELT FILTER PRESS ODOR CONTROL DUCT E)REREIR OF PANEL BE SUPPLIED FROM A EQUIPMTHE ENT PROTECTIDING EAT ON DEVICE III BE DISCOID�LR MEN INTERIOR TO ELECTRICAL PANEL 'A IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM. NOTE 13 e. UTILDS PVC GORDON. STAINLESS STEEL NMDWARE. STRUCTURAL STRUT AND SUPPORTS W ERROR i0 THE SLUDGE PROCESSING BUILDING. ! e SFPCONTXOL PANELS SHALL BE TAGGED IN THE NEW ORDER SHOWN (]21 FROM W£STTOEIBT)TOMRRORTHEBFPUNITLOCATON. J ] OEM. A NUUS F I•CpCGWYf ROUTED TOBELT FEEDER PRESS CONTROL PANELS LOCATED IN THE F CONTROL ROOM I SWIFEWER CONCUR S REPLACE POLYMER PUMPS AND WD DI SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWING 0. REPLACE COXDVR ANC WIRING FROM POLYMER VFD'S TO THE PUMPS, P HEAT TRACE CONCERT- IC OWNER DION ES TO REMRAIIGE POLYMER WD MCA IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE OWNER PROVmED GOTTERS —NDTE. ABOVE AND BELOW THE NEW POLYMER PUMP WDB. COORDINATE LAYOUT OF THE GUTTERS AND VFD'S WTI THE OWNER — - NORTH H. MELTRIC RVG, SEE DRAWING E3 NOTE]. -- - - rr ---- 12 ELECTRIC IRECL A MINIMUM OF CLEARANCE RN RANAMOUND SECURED NSFORMEREUIPMEN REOVIREDAROVND EXISTING TRANSFORMER EQUIPMENT 11II SCRUBBER DRN N LINE,CAMI HFATTRAEFEAT JI 13. HEATISH 1 `�_FP GRACE C CIRCUIT UIT FINISH ORADE.OSEFROMANE XPMENT E SHIP ..IT 3 UN_ _ �•R[L.YOIL:[ �L SFP Wrt 1 OOORSYNATE SHAUL P OT CATION DEVICE IC(SPED EOVRMENi PROTECTION ELECTRIA E INTERIEDFROM E RORIMERIOR TO LXEELECTRIULPNiEL'A'IN THE ELECTRICAL OM I 1 I I I — IIVORAVLK - HYDRAULIC E I LU uxrz uxrt HYDRAU UHrt A II PREM PRE89 PRESS D BERYRK TERYIWL I� yNAL �� O_ 0 BOM ® BOX a L} r l IJ� All-- "' _ - -- y Q ��FBBIIA WIIIU NDlE3 FY90A I I I Y3TE9 NOTE] TATE] NOTE 11 ---__ • ---_J --. COXTPOL ROdA ..... _ III NpUNR] CDNIRCL PANEL gOOHSIRUC1gN --TWO BOUTI SLVOGE NP YNR] CONIRM �„ (NOTE 1.51 ® L`mI JO Y Y CeATAII] SOUTHEBNG PANEL RIPLgN OSGN cH. . GATE STAIDON PRS) (NOTE f.e) BFP VHIiI POLYYN PIMPB CONTROL PANEL CONTROL MOTES) PANEL e r oaTETRI I B .._....._ YOTOR CONTROL ._ CENTER MCL9P —NOTES Y Stanley Consultants .- PeOTRICAI ROOM POLYMER. I Z15 UmA--Alun — Nue'LlL' ]]R (NOTES. MN vruv�."FYNFFOI.�Nr6mr^ o EA CRP OF IOWA CRP WASTEWATER MMID BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IOWA CRY, IOWA (PAN0.'A' PAMELT BELT FILTER PRESS - ELECTRICAL PLAN A A DEOINEO ,GAUSS ATFLLL517E DSCHMMT BCYE: 3NC=i'd BELT FILTER PRESS • ELECTRICAL PLAN 0 1 CHECA 'jFfo01 REv. N CHECIRD LINGRAY NO I 9 E SCALE 3IIv 1'1P 2 �� 9 APPRorEO uNOMM APPROVED EAI G p 0 1 2 9 < 5 6 ] 8 m DATE A1A]uST�NIT 11 2 1 3 4 1 5 1e 7 B S I DIV -SUN -1 11 PDF Page 29 1 > e / s s T e ID GENERAL NOTES: NORTH RORTII I. THE DOEOTER 0^SEMENT ISA GI $31, DMS*N 2 FLWRILOUS LOCATON, PRONDE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL COMMITS ENCLOSURES AND HIRING METHODS. O + T 2PROHDE STARE" STEL MCUNTNG HN0.VME AM CONWR O �G SLUDGEdlp TANK MC., SLIMNESS. O KEYNOTES: ITY%CAL FOR 31 O J O 15M 1. THE EMsnNOOELT FILTER PRE35 FEED PUMP vfos ARE IN MCC041-1. M B 2 THE MOTOR CHSCONNECT AND FIELD WRING FROM THE O FINE Lf MOTORS HAVES EN REPLACED BBYEOWNER AUSTEDCUMHA2AR0 LOC^TON CABLE ANDCONNECTMS HAVE BEEN W3TAILED FROM ME ❑RB N .R C WCONNECT TO THE MOTOR WTX SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO REPLACEMENT OF THE MOTOR. ❑ ACCOMMODATE e ^ 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL DKCONXECT AND REUSE THE CONNECTORS AND WRING FROM THE BELT FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP MOTORS TO THE F BELTFATERMrtSSFEED DUCOMMCT. F PUMP IIYP FOR 3) l CONTRACIORFIENDNEWMOTORAMOR CONNECL iXFITTING AND'MRING THAT MILE d3CONHECTEO DURING ______ _______ 71011 ® / B. PRIOR yXGNEW UDGE EED (\ 41 ° a PIMIE HRXO ER AND CONFAM THE ENSING VFG5 INSTKEO IM YCW I -I IUYE BEER RE-0ROGMMMED i0 THE NEW MOTOR DATA. IN NEClOI-I HA REM GEWUMERE333LE NEW MOTOR DATA 0. CWRDINATE WITH OWNER TO CONFIRM MOTOR ROTATION. O cue31. C RpX i - RFA� A ® J MCC W1 ---ED ----- YCCAi f-1 r�---- SO E F • 4 MCC 003 WW11 E ELECTRICAL RWM _• / ° ® AND00 A80 ANDOM. ♦�J i 1 ' S .��'�+ . ` Y --' "d MINNS ° n� Ln( 3 F F F 3 �F♦�. NO] F 3P �,` SLUDGE DIGESTER NO3�/ 801A SLUDOEdiER I E s IS IS IS i a p' D DIGESTER BUILDING 8608 GROUND FLOOR ELECTRICAL ROOM ° SCALE. 1M'=Td H ]w L e 6 s S g 2 �w$ Aw w Y e C mu¢ mu¢ mu¢ DIGESTER BUIUDNG 8600 BASEMENT PLAN G SME uD=Tv MCC-DG1-1 ONE -LINE DIAGRAM p a oRCOxeTxICMIH JG U U WMAt> NJ DEecxPTKKI o6on CMRo A➢VD 3TE B 4a e Stanley CiOnSl bfliS ■c ]E bw AwN•. IYmFn. M• Bilef m .•I..M•M3mMsmn CRY OF IOWA CRY WASTEWATER BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT N]WA CRY, IOWA DIGESTER BUILDING ELECTRICAL PLANS A A DEscxEO 1 LM'V11 ATFULLSI2E oRAvx oec1B/or auL[ 1N'•1'd 3 IN CHHECHEO L xORNF NO a 001 RLv 0 1 2 PROVED L "GRAN "PPRO"ED ES 0 0 1 2 ] 4 ] 6 T 8 tm DATE YR> 1 2 3 1 1 s 7 1w y�AOGLIST?l V •M•IO�MIYF n 12 ROAD WIDTH I/2 ROD MOTH I' EXPAiSON JOINT — REMOVE All FN / //� MATERAL g MARKS FROM W/O CURB AND GUTTER I CURB IDC 6' INTEGRAL CURB / JOINTING TOOL CL STREETASTROTURF DRAG SLOPE • '�' 1/2' MAX RADIUS FINISH CURB SECTION A SLOPE 2S I 2% ~— WE • 'J H � d CONCRETE SIOENLVI( ABUTTING CURB HAND TOOLED CONTROL JOINT PARRM'D CEMENT CONCRETE • NORMAL SIDEWALK CROSS SLOPE (PCC) PAVEMENT 6' AGGREGATE BASE SCAM SUBCRAOE 5 1/4' PER FOOT TO A DEPTH OF 12' AND 1/4' MA% TYPICAL PCC PAVEMENT SECTION RECOHPAO W 2 LAYERS DETAIL A -C3 WHEN N CUT AREALFLOOR ELEVATION N9i SCALE: NONE _ r. I. CONCRETE PAVEMENT TO BE B' THICK '� .i 1/2' IXP/NSlgl "41 OUTS8IE EDGE OF TERIAL FONOTgN APPROACH SLAB AT BUILDING SAWED CONTROL JOINT ROAD WIDTH TYPICAL SIDEWALK DETAILS W/O CURB AND GUTTER DETAIL SCALE: NONE SLOPE 1/4' 1/2' .INT FRIER JOINT STALER ,. STRUCTURE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SCABBY SIBCAAOC OR CUING (PCC) PAVEMENT 8' AGGREGATE BASF TOARECODEPTH O21LAYERS TYPICAL PCC PAVEMENT SECTION WHEN N CUT AREA DETAIL D -C3 NDu: SCALE: NONE ISOLATION JOINT DETAIL I. CONCRETE PAVEMENT 10 BE 8' THICK RADIUS (TYP) INTEGRAL CURB DETAIL E -C3 YALE: NONE INTEGRAL PCC PAVEMENT (TYR) NO JOINT FOR \-6' SUBBASE INTEGRAL DEC PAVEMENT NOTE PROVIDE CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS AS SPECIFIED FOR CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER VALLEY GLITTER DETAIL K -C3 SCALE: NOW TO A DEPTH OF 12' AND RECONPACT N 2 LAYERS WHEN N CUT AREA TYPICAL AGGREGATE ROAD SECTION DETAIL F -C3 SAVE: NONE TYPE B-3 JOINT ADJACENT SAWCUT WIN JPNT SEALER OR WON 1/8' PARTING STNP F TYPE "C" TRANSVERSE CONTRACTION JOINT DETAIL 9' TMJ 15' UN SAWCUT WITH JOINT SEALER CRACK OR JOINT TINE 18 8W 0 12' 1 EPDXY FULLTil DRILLED HDLE MOLE TYPE "BT -3" JOINT RIGID TIE ABUTTING PAVEMENT DETAIL H -C3 SCALE: NONE AT EACH AD (PYP) (ITP) 14010 CONCRETE STAIR ON GRADE DETAIL L -C3 SCALE: 3/4'=1'-0' 5 6' O DOABLE DOOR PLAN (BIBLE DOOR SHOO!) sj —,r 3._0. SEE TYPICAL KEMY 15 X 36' TE BANS AT 30' CENTERS TYPE "KD" CONSTRUCTION JOINT DETAIL ABUTTING PAVEMENT DETAIL G -C3 SAVE: NONE FACE OF FOM TOM I/2 MM KEY OF STRUCTURE DOOR PAD DETAILS DETAIL C -C3 SCALE: NONE SAWCUT WITH JOINT SEALER Tl- - 15 X 36' TE BWS AT 30' Coam TYPE "L• LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT DETAIL TYPICAL KEYWAY DETAIL DETAIL J -C3 SCALE: NONE LANDSCAPE EDGING TURF FILTER EABNC 1/2' - 3/4' CRUSHED STONE WDH FNES COMPACTED EARTH NOTE: USE WHERE TURFED AREA ABUTS STRUCITURE. MOWING STRIP STRIP D�AIL DETAIL M -C3 SCALE: NONE WITH 1/4' PADUS TOOL R SEALER T/10 flR Sl M SU1B AT FULL. S2E 0 1 2 3 N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8. GENERAL NOTES: I. MAXIMUM JOINT SPACING FOR 8' PAVEMENT: 15' 2. LENGTH OF CONCRETE PANEL SHVI NOT EXCEED WIDTH BY MORE TRW 25%. J. AVOID MUTE ANGLES N PAWL CDRNERS (NOT LESS THAN 75') 4. PROVOS SOLATION JOINT WHERE NEW CONCRETE ABUTS EXISTING CONCRETE, STRUCTURES, PIPES, POSTS, OR HYDRANTS. PAVEMENT JOINT NOTES: I. MOTH OF SAWCUi EQUALS 178 . 2. ALL PREFORMED JOINT MATERAL SHALL BE INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO PAVEMENT SURFACE AND CME EXERCISED THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCBON OF THE PAVEMENT TO ENSURE THAT THE JOINT WTERVL REMAINS IN PROPER POSRION UPON COMPLETION OF PAVING OPERATION. 3. A) TIE BAR DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR DEFORMED STEEL. B) TIE BARS SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND HELD SECURELY IN PUCE OUTING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. SAWLTR WITH DONT IIAM r PCC O_ PCC/ HMA,4UTTjQj DETA16n i r p�.4 ss' U1rn ` I� .—vo 'A TR /M.SNIaY P NMY WF 66.15.✓ '4' 1 I FAu mNN. zJRW s1 C ya�Pfv ScJKt Nuv � D i - L-3 slK Fa•e DRId•sTULeD � f wnDeF weJer-T I' ill I' �Mriptp •N45eRIF /epILL ��J•IV .`.A .J I MIPI✓M SP41 AW M: FiAMf Lstcas - w TM• . 4T aiMovbLb TRAMa:ELeNT YY.� R4+eL IN MO�JM eeOJL AWryIJVM Fps. � AaIT4a. J.'r- Iunmo MIZOR up; 4m Gm! . 3 d /ftwT-- AN moolm 64A61e6 wNY. aW oww. RWM. k d bW =14W NORTH ELEVATION TR /M.SNIaY P NMY WF 66.15.✓ '4' 1 I FAu mNN. zJRW s1 C ya�Pfv ScJKt Nuv � D i - L-3 slK Fa•e DRId•sTULeD � f wnDeF weJer-T I' ill I' �Mriptp •N45eRIF /epILL ��J•IV .`.A .J I MIPI✓M SP41 AW M: FiAMf Lstcas - w TM• . 4T aiMovbLb TRAMa:ELeNT YY.� R4+eL IN MO�JM eeOJL AWryIJVM Fps. � AaIT4a. J.'r- Iunmo MIZOR up; 4m Gm! . 3 d /ftwT-- AN moolm 64A61e6 wNY. aW oww. RWM. k (S) V60 bW =14W NORTH ELEVATION SCALE. 1/8'-1'O' _ __ � 9 ' IS reMtE'CP WiJ+rtn NaN2E +Nryp� TTrt 14� .E ANp •LLaTION else TD Ax+.aW Tot 4E•54.N M6PYM FWI AWHIJ'�"I 4L+5i - - • FoAme 5 f Lt�� ♦K+IINV.1 WAU. •.a' , G SR", J..4 N14N 6aOf nL 15.44'- st. /.weL 3YSTtry /•+wyJl,nl 4KIe - 54Ap 3Je6 AMA 4+^yd JaJT u✓�L bJT — yWdq WMwW WISNa2J TTeerF/MafN D wI/ryAlONaY CJ �'= ..1aNT Lha•! _ -- _ —__._._._ - _ ____ _-_ . •Af +PVF 0445.44 i Sr141E t_ YLL CTfrt Lr+,.J - WSJLaTEq o.l+•faD I - v1x ,Y/ 4kwr JIeeD w% mWL?VUJb5 ST l454tN5NL NW4 ' 'iQwaVX-*D . GLA.&S C1. v-Q--QV:st6D - �Mt•d -tVdn TSAR%\ -LSIE J '!,.Rb Au- „us•i � - .+N f�4as J a ��TT4cI3o2.. WL1a4.us. nloC ti°e�4ND D002S ��A RtaW�"R'PE�/�\\ LASS . VitiwN 7'x W43DG .pE �S.V, �yWs a.• SOUTH ELEVATION . SCALE. t-H'WteR 4�-0 too Wav sNILS! /IaNJry WAI,A1tNSi bp4.MT wcJozg 64A61e6 V/fa cHd flY4 L0LRe6 k (S) V60 4eeS a* NdOeR =14W _ D6Te6 54.5 LocL6a! PARCEL PLAN - TOILET & LOCKER ROOM A ELEVATION T 44a1{s15",f e• .INN NVN4 .ET PARTITIO4. ouWeoFy wLORR- N - W.W MAM1iD YRaN VERIFY L p 1111111 SWNEU sRvlJep ❑ � � RNifH w /LaOP - eor WAnr FIRE ELEVATION 2 4 F•.E aRVNc Pouw •- sdpu 4Wsse- t.Nrro.L Rxf'.., �•.. J.IJT \ ILS If TE " p o to TINTf'� FKAVI w Mi.as'I eRaNve ewryNo.l rpa'IS oAat tt4T AW11 6dpea4""- 44e7S �' J EAST ELEVATION SCALE. ' .WMH.Pi fAl414 ` .' u AEY,TNE,' WAN, p6/eL LoU✓2[ /L� © C. �, �� 'JM .� C: �� frW� wNcFfTE SILL. n -"' 1)] . .�v SJ.L 100J cMU Wsw NOTES' k PDF Page 31 4eeS a* NdOeR I- A4_ FWMbJ4 PIVTJPS'S FN• MaUJT Ny,TTrE ' _ R e EaSlat65 (H) itis S'_ T,ILET P�PW ANp •LLaTION else TD Ax+.aW Tot - - Ire - MINL —_ IaINtF© O � t TTeerF/MafN D CiT�IF.!/�� �'= ..1aNT Lha•! _ -- INSYLertD AUNWqq IN✓ry W1NMbl 4L6VS (TYIIGAL: IN i Sr141E t_ YLL CTfrt Lr+,.J McMvj sb I - �. TTr1 '.' ML✓h mWL?VUJb5 ST l454tN5NL NW4 J EAST ELEVATION SCALE. ' .WMH.Pi fAl414 ` .' u AEY,TNE,' WAN, p6/eL LoU✓2[ /L� © C. �, �� 'JM .� C: �� frW� wNcFfTE SILL. n -"' 1)] . .�v LMU SJ.L 100J cMU Wsw NOTES' rLENUM 4eeS a* NdOeR I- A4_ FWMbJ4 PIVTJPS'S FN• MaUJT Ny,TTrE ' _ EaSlat65 (H) itis S'_ T,ILET P�PW ANp •LLaTION else TD Ax+.aW Tot - - STt pVA,1 SPE"FILSTeH6'A4M NSTTJTE ,sTa,lP.pp spauFluT1o.14' eNH NT•Iy10Ds � t i TTFI'A'� CiT�IF.!/�� r liM.eRfp SRaJ1E `• I 4L6VS (TYIIGAL: IN t_ McMvj sb I WEST ELEVATION mWL?VUJb5 ST l454tN5NL NW4 ' 'iQwaVX-*D . GLA.&S C1. v-Q--QV:st6D •'qZ.A.;;-'0V uOtrt JES7i6uL4E—_ -tVdn TSAR%\ -LSIE J '!,.Rb Au- 00026 REZ x11FCDaLL� f T-k},E_ a ��TT4cI3o2.. WL1a4.us. nloC ti°e�4ND D002S ��A RtaW�"R'PE�/�\\ LASS . VitiwN Pta,h1ELS SN'DULI .pE �S.V, �yWs a.• y'p�•, .. LMU SJ.L 100J cMU Wsw NOTES' rLENUM 4eeS a* NdOeR I- A4_ FWMbJ4 PIVTJPS'S FN• MaUJT Ny,TTrE ' _ EaSlat65 (H) itis S'_ T,ILET P�PW ANp •LLaTION else TD Ax+.aW Tot STt pVA,1 SPE"FILSTeH6'A4M NSTTJTE ,sTa,lP.pp spauFluT1o.14' eNH NT•Iy10Ds M=E mWL?VUJb5 ST l454tN5NL NW4 RHtNrHyll"- YHAJPI uryep'-:4V)A STATE 91ALDIJOSPE , PMSION I. NOJEryAS}ITAL• f - oL L,�EST V!?SI OBJ. . I!&S I,SU,LP XE E ELEVATION 3 suLe6 4',I' -s' FSNNu RA(Js It615 No METCALF & EDDY ov.. aft su;,v'p �,„TL a `9305�`t '7<4 rowaap SHIVE-HATTEW ENGINEERS.. R W Sf✓E6AVeF /E/4111 aaa + 1 FOR INFORMATION ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A CITY OF IOWA CRY. IOWA 4105 . SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES Fv5 ,• N_6n1A SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY AS NOTED PARTIAL PLAN AND ELEVATIONS a, A=SS -ARCHITECTURAL - 3 1 1 • 1 pp RwrbIJSNLAT1oiJ- 1 Fb1 BPILK �— OwvIJ4lLnTIoJ - - .- UNTEL s' see FoxR F•AN Pwib 1J5✓LAT°N see SGNRCGLE . GMU WAU. FAcf DFI<I< _ -�1 DOTJLINTFI. -SAM ReyLET � FAt! BPIGIG RS4LET /,1 pLVM. T N t s!E UJiEI 1£MBR� , FRAME Z') MlMgIMIT. YII LINriL SGNebVLe YNFbJLE P6y LeT I Seex LINTVL RASNIN9 , paMavndP TRANsIJGEVT Wow FANeL of - WtcINNAAs ryryEMB N! sGH•oVLe WFAP"eh I-� Px�O.G. :Rx SHIM uWN4 (BxaoES) Ps4'o.G..� pLASNi�4 F LINTEL Wear PP14-L.-- ores - I FPGe DRicx < d AWM. Use LB15x41.� �eeaLnNT FRs'16 41✓15h .ea Nef{I vf/ �+ LMtFL <xr 2Ses FF c u �_ <s,5r `' i kIILiN yR 1 D✓IN•! `MU d - i d S alA Nal!1 SeAtAN T LOUVER -sec unI 3 uVLlc c 3 DETAIL soNeB✓Le r,a'-.= _ _ . HEAD e y ' FAGa BRIck uN7FL gs.5e41e MWLnTev aWM. WiNpOW \l - R6T✓FN W/ K v4 +' h'GaNL sae NOTE 1 wse senl.u+T ;HEAD DETAIL A 'HEAD DETAIL r v cMU WAW FAGe pC!✓R Fp a jwlcl 1 I I I I :.1_ VIM 'Gu k,c IBOTN eorfi .y. 1410 ARolsNe) FGGE aPIGIG Ir 1P.tsJLnTIOJ Yh HL�O TiR'D' Fn 0 SPICK FA,B epcl�- cMU 3 R1aIV INsJlnrprl 1 • 1 pp RwrbIJSNLAT1oiJ- Fb1 BPILK OwvIJ4lLnTIoJ - - .- UNTEL aryesArla r see SGNRCGLE Wr IA0.e5 -�1 DOTJLINTFI. -SAM 4 `aVLG j 9 pLVM. T N t FRAME Z') GMJ zETJ.N paMavndP TRANsIJGEVT Wow FANeL — HEAD bETAIL K II'i II INEIA.ATeb >D�NCAb DLGR . EADTAIL E4sea Noral ' ¢I I I I la—t FAGe eiRGK III.; LMJ. ' PRaJEGTIH y Waib lNxL. L5,'S 'Fa' JAMB UE�AIL _ 7IE1 hnM1 Fpm '$aa 2) I 4 4' 4' P ILj WALL =x �' v _.r &kLJOSe 4411 a ��_ - \ / cryJ - Y• : r . mowNose i a x' P e UA a _ `4 u,", t{ d T-4T' EALA- .. gr aN c.MU d I RI ;1 - csJLkIN4 r.LayS — swim 4 GAJW194 d i!a N•TC 4.OT L 3 '1 INSJLGTT¢Eb d 4LALN4 eaAD> a — Y.VM. TVD¢ FI'AME(G•Z') = l9w"TeP I s6 N?e Z ALN'M WI.boW i >< ovyLNem c rA uJsleb // A m. WIFE FRwle 4 F R6MwAw1E T AJBJceNT SF f? twlc. FFal2elf / ., L I WaL1. P�rIFl r_ _-. N Lod✓¢g - —/ NW.NvS! cnd JAMB DETAIL' P J iAO sEnlnJT xa scNSOJtR ' JAMB DETAIL/la JAMB DETAIL ° -= Awn, slw P94 1- j`�;rx-i �JAMB DETAIL L Fva eplck MSJLATlb FAG! DIR4C x 4 cMU PaNFJ 1 AWM. W1JobW - 7p 4' ' maltaT -� in- s � d FiTJai1 Lo✓rLe •eee YNeFIAt ? 3 I'' e,' ,...,,,Jy SILL DTAIL� Jt Waav14Les sALgNT <xxRxva _ sa: Jure 2 sA I T \ � DUu.Noae 4411 c1LI. M� MILK cryJ � O_ �+ DUU.NOSE cMU - - ryalYJRnNB II _ SILI. L WAW ANaL�WGEJT pLASNiNp L16c }�JI£� P uNTe4 W_ AI 1 Q1 Foal_ Y_ AuIM. FLAs111Np' - AASWIM uJLC�Na / bRiP AWry. S'LL W/bPP RF)IWAV a AL✓M. FFA Z 1 x P LaIG.4 \XwrtveILIo¢ ; AwMINJM FFWe I•v PF xp"T ll. SGNFbU.E Fm sr IONe.. / 7Y!'E OF GsE _,�"N. MoF - r s111M euA.KWa. ; uN RCTMI Luybn FWISN 4Cnv <. ^�'s�' d lie[ Le �J ubATiFJ NMq=111txPA4si w S LANT x . ANGNq! FwM¢ F<R - FcIVW ;HEAD DETAIL. a7 .SILL DETAILSILL DETAIL - SILL DETAIL n 4r - INSU.ATaJ NOTES: AG,✓MIJJM FADE DRIIX ^cMU X�� FRAM! 1• PAINT Exposao ARaps To MATGN OUTSIce F"G OF FRAME. - F"'k DKI' , VMWVM (MATcA OOoF, WINwW, LoUvap. eTG.) PENM1N nlPesll�Le Z. r*4 E%pD seb ij REAS To M -T"4 I"IM pnCE aF fRArye. NISN _ � (MA .a poop,' l4mia, LOJVSFL eTG.) °.;c , '> `. SNIMAS RDv.AVv 9 MALA, T F • Z 5 AWMINVIT FOR INFORMATION ONLY,_ NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION SILL DETAIL s JAMB DETAIL R P L CITY OF IOWA CRY, IOWA- 2106 varlNls MpFJSTCA °�, uulx, METCALF & EDDY SOUTH WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES SLUDGE PROCESSING FACILITY e!IA Neem P ' 112'-4 -0" DETAILS SHIVE-HATTE" ENGINEERS....- ewer .A=SB xuyvx xxr[ lynxn axxcxxon ,QW $[wRx,xE 'INl Rena1ON5 ...... �...,...a.,o„ ..........<.,,,.... ARCHRECTURAL I a 4 460 VAC 3 PHASE 60 Hz, 1 Line Diagram Page / CIRCUIT PROTECTION BY OTHERS FB -A 40 AMP CB -A 30 AMP TP CONTROL PANEL F I /2 AMP Q FB -3 FB -4 480/120 VPC XFMR T2 75 VA VPCFB-I VA 5 AMP 15 AMP 15 AMP TRANSFORMER ORMER C 7rnMS-1 t480/120 VPD -3 VFD-4 FB AMPA MP rn ��o D CA M-1 M-3 N-4 HYDRAULIC GBT DRIVE TP DRIVE UNIT 2HP 3.4 FLA 5HP 7.6 FLA 1.5HP 2.4 FLA 480 VAC 480 VAC 480 VAC CURRENT DRAW HYDRAULIC UNIT 2.4A FOR INFORMATION ONLY, GBT DRIVE 3.4A NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION TP DRIVE 7.6A CONTROL POWER 3.OA TOTAL 16.4 AMPS KE ham CWTER NACHM MANY 55 WESTER AVE METUCHEN ILL NNO A CITY, LOVA THERNASE SPECIFIED 3BTP22.93 FRACMNAL DIM 11194 1 LITE DIAGRAM ..C..wH. �.< B D 11—L NEWHEFT O o _ SILJ Z Z =�W 5 pMlt j6 0 b s Z yy' y < J yW 7 1 P _ Z SE = ' WIJOIR60 W4WyN< `O 1� J4� �} tp O 6Q<W�JUNWOU� 1T 1 �i�.. G i� Q ✓� i y O: IOC R¢K �'U N;I.UN000N CI \ 1 ��•�� ZEl ` M n ay�WW��No �C�`�M C1iY..0 0 ��Wy N «o«<oW n LL O c3 �WKJU4'Y K6F�W\� yJ¢ Z LL S_¢_UWO[1p-p~p~O6o2r0 G~ �� QRRIIZSL>WNV Z til7l' Ri W LL Z a �I _ o �Q n JJJ FZ w..Nn4mm�mmo^nom n jo 088 ^oo oeo �" x888888$ 8888000 m's �Y m BQ�y I I I I �S 0 ^ ^ 12 x a JkWN'q g b le 5 7 J \J J J J4 N J J J J J J �Um O I I I I O I i l l O l l l l O l l l l O l l l l v l l l l <JW ZS VK WNWS FWOmWFONJ�NK K i'Kuy;1"UU WU J2 yWO�^^WWRWa06 O d ai FC'f ..r�>as7xa NJWWOKLLKIWWW;� ��WWj�p000 y<��KW ZS6RRSSSSG>W NIJ W Y CC ^m?Ooc>O.GmJK$ qN h.nn<Nn^406 NO nJJ N a m W^ non Por^4m "N >0�08$�8�56 oSo .00000000d. R000000000c.000 FB -C 1 A J N yi KQm M 1f K U W S W� _y 2 I J J V N R •• $ u noo W � n < rJ �u > run, I Y ' 4¢ 2Gj 1nCD Qmi € In n OQO 6'OJilJ J J I }}ff Y J I I 010 sS J J _ Oil 110111101 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 1 PRESS TERMINAL BOX > �-W 2 I nrDRAIA.IC UNIT ) > ' g V N N � In N y R.fi P1 6J LJ L' q VJ VJ p I ____ `n n=: � = R K R� n� U z 8 8 8 8 8 8 LP -i �-- 460V-3PHASE-60HZ 60 ANP SUPPLY � I a I4 SYSTEM CONTACTS FOR INFORMATION ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION RVERI CHARTER MACHINE COMPANY 55 WESTER AVE METUCHEN N.J. 08840 TITLE "OLERANCES UNLESS IOWA CITY, IOWA WISE SPECIFIED 3BTP22.93 IAL DIM i+/64 TERMINATION DIAGRAM DIM z.005 WG NO. 111 1 FINISH 7P6 B 770 -K -0101 -INT 0 NONE HEET 1 OF 1 N 0 I _ Orn-- MAIN CONTROL PANEL _ r c- Gm a M C FOR INFORMATION ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION RVERI CHARTER MACHINE COMPANY 55 WESTER AVE METUCHEN N.J. 08840 TITLE "OLERANCES UNLESS IOWA CITY, IOWA WISE SPECIFIED 3BTP22.93 IAL DIM i+/64 TERMINATION DIAGRAM DIM z.005 WG NO. 111 1 FINISH 7P6 B 770 -K -0101 -INT 0 NONE HEET 1 OF 1 19" 25" ORFICE OPENING (1)1" NPT POLYMER INJECTION CONNECTION AND (3) 318" NPT CLEANOUTS ornnv nnrv. mv� I U� mnuv IPUI\C✓ rum rnvrmm r 5yd��G OPERATION OF INLINE MIXER Il Lp C DOWNWARDS FLOW MOUNTING CLEARANCE Uz„ UP -RDS E TINj� CCORANCE CA 3e- (S) Prepared by: Ben Clark, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319) 356-5436 Resolution No. 17-290 Resolution setting a public hearing on September 19, 2017 on plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project, directing City Clerk to publish notice of said hearing, and directing the City Engineer to place said plans on file for public inspection. Whereas, funds for this project are available in the Sludge Biosolid Dewatering Equipment Replacement account # V3141. Now, therefore, be it resolved by the Council of The City of Iowa City, Iowa, that: 1. A public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 19th day of September, 2017, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. A copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 5th day of September 2017 Ma or Approved bypp�� Atte City Clerk City Attorney's Office Fl? --7117 It was moved by trims and seconded by Taylor the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: Ayes: Nays: Absent: Botchway Cole Dickens Mims Taylor Thomas Throgmorton e FQFheadia PRESS -CITIZEN MEDIA PART OFTHE USATODAY NETWORK CIN OF IOWA CITY ICPD 410 E WASHINGTON ST IOWA CITY IA 522401825 AFFIDAVIT OF PUBLICATION State of Wisconsin County of Brown, ss.: The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, states that the Iowa City Press Citizen, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa, with its principal place of business in Iowa City, Iowa, the publisher of Iowa City Press Citizen newspaper of general circulation printed and published in the City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa, and that an advertisement, a printed copy of which is attached as Exhibit "A" and made part of this affidavit, was printed and published in Iowa City Press Citizen on the following dates: Ad No. Start Date: Run Dates: Cost: 0002389239 9/11/17 09/11/17 $45.31 Copy of Advertisement Exhibit"A" �Y Subscribed and sworn to bef re me by said affiant this 11th day of September. 2017 "AWLL �b:wyl ELISSq ''., Notary Public N o TqR� : 0 _ GBLIC ` of ..........Ns��,.' WISCO rl/llllll���` r 1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING FILTER F IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, p.m. hereby given it of the City of will con -duct a on plans, n of contract cost for the 2._ City of Iowa in said city, or 3ncelled, at the is City Council d by the City This project includes demolition of three existing belt filter presses,procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated pipping, replacement of four pol er pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; exhaust ducting and odor control system; and control system modifications and integration. The project is located at the Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street, SE, Iowa City, Iowa. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, y and may be inspected by ,ect persons may meeting of the City purpose of making and comments said plans contract or the cost This notice isgiven by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. KELLIE FRUEHLING, CITY CLERK Publish 9/11 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE CITY OF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will con- duct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 1day of September, 2017, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. This project includes demolition of three existing belt filter presses, procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated piping, replacement of four polymer pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; exhaust ducting and odor control system; and control system modifications and integration. The project is located at the Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street, SE, Iowa City, Iowa. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. KELLIE FRUEHLING, CITY CLERK Prepared by: Ben Clark, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319) 356-5436 Resolution No. 17-307 Resolution approving plans, specifications, form of agreement, and estimate of cost for the construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project, establishing amount of bid security to accompany each bid, directing City Clerk to post notice to bidders, and fixing time and place for receipt of bids. Whereas, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held; and Whereas, the City Engineer or designee intends to post notice of the project on the website owned and maintained by the City of Iowa City; and Whereas, funds for this project are available in the Sludge Biosolid Dewatering Equipment Replacement account # V3141. Now, therefore, be it resolved by the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa that: The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 5% (five percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to post notice as required in Section 26.3, not less than 13 days and not more than 45 days before the date of the bid letting, which may be satisfied by timely posting notice on the Construction Update Network, operated by the Master Builder of Iowa, and the Iowa League of Cities website. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 2:30 p.m. on the 10th day of October, 2017. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 17th day of October, 2017, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 19th dayof_ September 2017 Ma or Approved by/ Atte%111AAp Ci ClerkOlity Attorney's Office Resolution No. 17-307 Page 2 It was moved by Botchway and seconded by Dickens the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: Ayes: Nays: Absent: Botchway Cole Dickens Mims Taylor Thomas Throgmorton A,ro-41 IOWA QfCG USE CERTIFICATE The Iowa League of Cities an entity organized under the laws of Iowa as an instrumentality of its member cities, with its principal place of business in Des Moines, Polk County, Iowa, does hereby certify that I am now and was at the time hereinafter mentioned, the duly qualified and acting Executive Director of the Iowa League of Cities, and that as such Executive Director of the League and by full authority from the Executive Board, I have caused a NOTICE TO BIDDERS Notice to Bidders - Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project Classified ID: 105166 A printed copy of which is attached and made part of this certificate, provided on 09/20/2017 to be posted on the Iowa League of Cities' intemet site on the following date: September 20, 2017 I certify under penalty of perjury and pursuant to the laws of the State of Iowa that the preceding is true and correct. 9/20/2017 Alan Kemp, Executive Director Post 9/20 NOTICE TO BIDDERS CITYOF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 2:30 P.M. on the 10th day of October, 2017. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 17th day of October, 2017, or at special meeting called for that purpose. A prebid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m. on September 28, 2017 at the Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, Iowa. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders' tour of the treatment plant facilities being modified will immediately follow conclusion of pre-bid meeting (approximately 11:00 a.m). The Project will involve the following: General construction at the City of Iowa Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, IA. Work will include demolition of three existing belt filter presses, procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated piping, replacement of four polymer pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; and control system modifications and integration. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc, of Muscatine, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be submitted in a sealed envelope. In addition, a separate sealed envelope shall be submitted containing a completed Bidder Status Form and a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 5% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. The City shall retain the bid security furnished by the successful bidder until the approved contract form has been executed, a bond has been filed by the bidder guaranteeing the performance of the contract, and the contract and bond have been approved by the City. The City shall promptly return the checks or bidder's bonds of unsuccessful bidders to the bidders as soon as the successful bidder is determined or within thirty days, whichever is sooner. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hun- dred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Milestone 1 Date: January 12th, 2018 Substantial Completion Date: May 15t, 2018 Specified Completion Date: May 31, 2018 Specified Start Date: November 2, 2017 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Printed copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the City Engineer, City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $65 fee is required for each set of printed half-size set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the Treasurer of City of Iowa City, Iowa. The fee is refundable if returned within 14 days of award of the project by City Council in re -usable condition. Electronic Bidding Documents consisting of portable document format (PDF) files of Project Manual and Drawings on compact disc may be obtained from Ms. Mandy Hoag, Stanley Consultants, Inc. Muscatine, Iowa, telephone 563-264-6657 via Engineer's file transfer service and includes entry on planholders list. Bidding Documents also may be examined at regional plan rooms and their Internet - based construction information subscription services. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Posted upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. KELLIE FRUEHLING, CITY CLERK Julie Voparil From: Carla Long <CLong@mbionline.com> Sent: Thursday, September 21, 2017 4:41 PM To: Julie Voparil Subject: Certificate for Notice to Bidders Attachments: 9.21.17 Notice To Bidders.pdf Certificate The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, states that The Construction Update Plan Room Network ("CU Network") is a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa, with its principal place of business in Des Moines, Polk County, Iowa. The undersigned also states that he is now and was at the time hereinafter mentioned, the duly qualified and acting President / CEO of the CU Network, and that as such President / CEO of the CU Network and by full authority from the Executive Board, he caused a NOTICE TO BIDDERS City Of Iowa City Water Treatment Plant Belt Filter Press Replacement A printed copy of which is attached and made part of this certificate, to be posted in the Construction Update Network Plan Room, a relevant contractor plan room service with statewide circulation and a relevant contractor lead generating service with statewide circulation, on the following date(s): September 21, 2017 I certify under penalty of perjury and pursuant to the laws of the State of Iowa that the preceding is true and correct. September 21, 2017 Date President/CEO of The Construction Update Plan Room Network Carla Long - Project Information Specialist Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, Des Moines, Iowa 50309 (d)515-657-4400(0)515-288-7339 (f) 515-288-8718 (e) mbiplanroom-dsm@mbionline.com (w) www.mbionline.com Project Information I-# IowaBidDate.com 013 CONSTRUCTION WEEN OCTOBER 2-6.2017 OF IF thl EELEtB�T1Yi T�[CBMSTSOCTIOM IMCOSTR7 #COMST"CTIGMWEE517 RECEIVED Post 9/20 SEP 2 0 2017 NOTICE TO BIDDERS CITYOF IOWA CITY BELT FILTER PRESS REPLACEMENT PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 2:30 P.M. on the 10th day of October, 2017. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 17th day of October, 2017, or at special meeting called for that purpose. A prebid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m. on September 28, 2017 at the Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, Iowa. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders' tour of the treatment plant facilities being modified will immediately follow conclusion of pre-bid meeting (approximately 11:00 a.m). The Project will involve the following: General construction at the City of Iowa Wastewater Treatment Plant, 4366 Napoleon Street SE, Iowa City, IA. Work will include demolition of three existing belt filter presses, procurement and installation of three new belt filter presses with associated modifications of floor slab, mechanical piping and electrical systems, conversion of two window sets to coil doors, replacement of three belt filter press feed pumps and associated piping, replacement of four polymer pumps; replacement of HVAC exhaust fans; and control system modifications and integration. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc, of Muscatine, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be submitted in a sealed envelope. In addition, a separate sealed envelope shall be submitted containing a completed Bidder Status Form and a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 5% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. The City shall retain the bid security furnished by the successful bidder until the approved contract form has been executed, a bond has been filed by the bidder guaranteeing the performance of the contract, and the contract and bond have been approved by the City. The City shall promptly return the checks or bidder's bonds of unsuccessful bidders to the bidders as soon as the successful bidder is determined or within thirty days, whichever is sooner. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hun- dred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) years) from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Milestone 1 Date: January 12'', 2018 Substantial Completion Date: May 1'% 2018 Specified Completion Date: May 31, 2018 Specified Start Date: November 2, 2017 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Printed copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the City Engineer, City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $65 fee is required for each set of printed half-size set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons, The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the Treasurer of City of Iowa City, Iowa. The fee is refundable if returned within 14 days of award of the project by City Council in re -usable condition. Electronic Bidding Documents consisting of portable document format (PDF) files of Project Manual and Drawings on compact disc may be obtained from Ms. Mandy Hoag, Stanley Consultants, Inc. Muscatine, Iowa, telephone 563-264-6657 via Engineer's file transfer service and includes entry on planholders list. Bidding Documents also may be examined at regional plan rooms and their Internet - based construction information subscription services. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Posted upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. KELLIE FRUEHLING,,aTY CLERK Prepared by. Ben Clark, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5436 Resolution no. 17-330 Resolution awarding contract and authorizing the Mayor to sign and the City Clerk to attest a contract for construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Project Whereas, Woodruff Construction, Inc. of Tiffin, IA has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $1,709,500 for construction of the above-named project; and Whereas, the bid includes the base bid and Alternates #land #3; and Whereas, funds for this project are available in the Sludge Biosolid Dewatering Equipment Replacement account #V3141 Whereas, The City Engineer and City Manager are authorized to execute change orders according to the City's Purchasing Policy as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Now, therefore, be it resolved by the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, that: 1. The contract for the construction of the above-named project for the base bid plus Alternates #1 and #3 is hereby awarded to Woodruff Construction, Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign the contract for construction of the above-named project and the Contractor's Bond, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. Passed and approved this 17th day of October / 2017 L, Maygr /f Approved by Attest• Cc..� �[ �,r K �uoiuvy�s�q�lCf�. City Clerk CityAttomey's Office tv/)//7% It was moved by trims and seconded by Botchway the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Botchway X Cole X Dickens X Mims X Taylor X Thomas Throgmorton Bond No.: 54219538 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Woodruff Construction, LLC as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and United Fire & Casualty Company (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of one Million Seven Hundred Nine Thousand Five Hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($ 1,709,500.00 ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of 0 —L-'5—, 'LO 1-7 , entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for Wastewater Belt Filter Press Replacement Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc., which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed- upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not f7iw Y exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price;' as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractors Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of Two (2) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF O C. -O" b e, , 20177 . IN THE PRESENCE OF: c%?'Mitness Stacy Venn "I ss m Woodruff Construction, LLC (Principal NiUtow(Title) EASt / Ow—ion TRX/de/71L- FVrd Fire & Casualty Company Diane R. young, (TILe) torney-in-Fact Holmes, Murphy and Associates, LLC (Street) P.O. Box 9207, Des Moines, IA 50306-9207 (City, State, Zip) (515) 223-6800 (Phone) ufg UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS, IA Inquiries: Surely AveSE UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, R'EllSTER, TX IIS Secondand Ae SE FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 10 CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY (original on file at Home Office of Company - See Certification) KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, it corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Iowa: UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas; and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California (herein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, constitute and appoint KEVIN J. KNUTSON, OR JODY A. DECKER, OR MICHELLE GRUIS, OR KATHLEEN BREWER, ALL INDIVIDUALLY OF THE CEDAR RAPIDS IA OFFICE; OR CRAIG E. HANSEN, OR JAY D. FREIERMUTIL OR BRIAN M. DEIMERLY, OR CINDY BENNETT, OR ANNE CROWNER, OR T1D1 MCCULLOH, OR STACY VENN, OR LACY CRAMBLIT, OR SHIRLY S. BARTENIIAGEN, OR KYLEE HEUSI, OR DIONE R. YOUNG, ALL INDIVIDUALLY OF WEST DES MOINES IA their true and lawful Altomcy(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign• seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and otherobligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $100.000,000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by die duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby mlif ied and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY. UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY CObIPANY, AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. This Power of Attorney is made and executed personal to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE CONIPANY. "Article VI- Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section'_, Appointment of Attorney-in-Fael. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint by wTltten certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds. undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and die Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal. when so used, being adopted by the Companies as die original signature of such officer and the original seal of die Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the salve force and effect as trough martially affixed. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind dee Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach die seal of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Comp.mics may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its "aF fw5q,4 iiq �dppinN4^ J'Y' o, M1INS'nypy ._Ani „F vice president and its cnrpomte seal to be hereto affixed this IoT day of JANUARY, 2016 `4 rCalVRwrE Y,' '`-°, cartroxnII'vea £VRq 4�nPoq�t. C nmry ,o` UNITED FIRE& �CASUALTY COMPANY sur. a`., Igoe UNITED FIRE &INDEMNITY COMPANY FOAM.: g`y FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY oma uuuuno` C/ li...rw— State of Iowa. County of Linn, ss: By: Vice President On I" day of JANUARY, 2016, before me personally cause Dennis L Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal allixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board o I' Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority. and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. 4lWrr Judith A. Davis Iowa Notarial Seal num Commission number 173041 Notary Public rmF. My Commisslon Expires 04/2312018 My commission expires: 04/23/2018 1, David A. Lange, Secretary of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and Assistant Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit. and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Altomey, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and Ural the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testinhony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and aff[xed the corporate seal of the said Corporations this day of ..ter^,.. „m"..19ri5U'r., 'e �WR :flTIt � ] ?Q CORPoMR./ F\ e' Y•' Z�hQLy2g �� p 7n''. loos l�c "At L s `J`" ' unne"`` pniunaoa""` nnn,m BPOA(1040 Gpl ? By: At-21101� Secretary. OF&C Assistant Secretary. OF&I/EPIC V � ENGINEER'S REPORT May 26, 2021 City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa RE: City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project Dear City Clerk: tr , CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 - 1826 (319) 356 - 5000 (319) 356 - 5009 FAX www.icgov.org I hereby certify that the construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Replacement Project has been completed by Woodruff Construction, LLC, of Fort Dodge, Iowa in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications prepared by Stanley Consultants, Inc. of Muscatine, Iowa. The project was bid as a lump sum price contract and the final contract price is $1,828,774.00. There is a total of 20 change or extra work orders for the project as described below: 1 Add epoxy coating to interior rebar 2 Additional concrete removal/finishing adjacent to press footings 3 Demo existing/add new polymer feed pump housekeeping pads 4 Change driveway PCC from 6° to 8" depth 5 Add S.S. dif#Users to odor control duct 6 Add three Venturi mixing valves on sludge feed lines 7 Add curbing around press number 3 8 Redesigned sump pit w/ raised foundation piers 9 Time extension 10 Additional 30" expansion joint between odor control and duct 11 Additional 60 linear feet of enclosure curtain and track 12 Additional soil removal and re -compaction 13 Add pipe saddle and bearing plate to exterior equipment stand 14 Concrete repairs 15 Additional piping insulation and jacketing to effluent piping 16 Deduct/credit for equipment rental 17 Add fiberglass polymer tanks and associated pumps and equip. 18 Increase fixed elevation of presses 1 & 2 19 Additional exterior sidewalk infill paving 20 Remove 1,315.00 2,553.00 981.00 1.725.00 13,893.00 2,648.00 22,45,4,00 0 N_ * 4� 97AD0 ,A85;!JD0 -tr co - �14g)0 Q C):�'z m v 5,59"0 (2,7560) 56,958.00 21,821.00 2,115.00 (20,000.00) Total $ 11 I recommend that the above -referenced improvements be accepted by the City of Iowa City. Sincerely, Jason Havel, P.E. City Engineer o —n GrM CD a Z D W W Prepared by: Ben Clark, Engineering Division, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5436 Resolution No. 21-148 Resolution accepting the work for the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Project Whereas, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the City of Iowa City Belt Filter Press Project has been completed by Woodruff Construction, LLC, of Fort Dodge, Iowa, dated October 25, 2017, be accepted; and Whereas, the Engineer's Report and the performance, payment and maintenance bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and Whereas, funds for this project are available in the Sludge Biosolid Dewatering Equipment Replacement account #V3141; and Whereas, the final contract price is $1,828,774.00. Now, therefore, be it resolved by the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, that said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 1st day of June , 2021 Ma r ,l Attest: City Clerk It was moved by Thomas and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: Ayes: i7 Nays: Approved by City Attorney's Office — 05/26/2021 Taylor Absent: Bergus Mims Salih Taylor Teague Thomas Weiner the Resolution be